From the archive

Sacred Books of the East, Vol. 5 — PahlaviTxts

English·1879–1910·trans. E. W. West·389 passages

The text

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project to make the world’s books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that’s often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book’s long journey from the publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.

We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google’s system: If you are conducting research on machine translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attribution The Google “watermark” you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can’t offer guidance on whether any specific use of any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book’s appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google’s mission is to organize the world’s information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web at http: //books.google.com/

Trndl 30,9

Google Book Search helps readers discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web at http: //books.google.com/

Trndl 30,9

HARVARD COLLEGE LIBRARY

Digitized by Google

THE

SACRED BOOKS OF THE EAST

{5] a

London

MACMILLAN AND CO,

PUBLISHERS TO THE UNIVERSITY OF

@xford

Digitized by s00gle

THE

‘SACRED BOOKS OF THE EAST,

TRANSLATED BY VARIOUS ORIENTAL SCHOLARS

AND EDITED BY

F. MAX MULLER VOL. V_

@rford AT THE CLARENDON PRESS

1880

/ + i

HARVARD UNIVERSITY

LIBRARY

PAHLAVI TEXTS

TRANSLATED BY

E. W. WEST

PART I

THE BUNDAHIS, -BAHMAN YAST, AND SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST

@rford

AT THE CLARENDON PRESS

1880

(AU rights reserved}

Digitized by Google

CONTENTS.

INTRODUCTION.

1. The Parsi Scriptures . . 2. The Pahlavi Language and Literature 3. The Bundahis . .

4. The Selections of ZAd-sparam .

5. The Bahman Yast

6. The Shayast 14-shayast

7. Concluding Remarks

TRANSLATIONS.

BunpaHIs SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM Bauman Yast

SuAyasT LA-sHAYAST

Index

Transliteration of Oriental Alphabets adopted for the Translations of the Sacred Books of the East

PAGE ix xi

xxii

xlvi-

lix

Ixvii

153 189

237

407 434

435

Digitized by Google

INTRODUCTION

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

1. THE PARSI SCRIPTURES,

THOUGH we must look to the Avesta for information regarding the main outlines of the Parsi religion, it is to Pahlavi writings we must refer for most of the details relating to the traditions, ceremonies, and customs of this ancient faith, which styles itself emphatically ‘the good religion of the Mazdayasnians, and calls its laity bahdin4an, or ‘those of the good religion.’ In the fragments of the Avesta which still exist, we may trace the solid foundations of the religion, laid by philosophic bards and lawgivers of old, with many a mouldering column and massive fragment of the superstructure erected upon them by the ancient priesthood. These are the last remnants of the faith held by Cyrus, the anointed of the Lord (Isaiah xlv. 1), the righteous one (Is. xli. 2), or eagle (Is. xlvi. 11), whom He called from the east, and the shepherd who performed His pleasure (Is. xliv. 28); scattered fragments of the creed professed by Darius in his inscriptions, when he attributes his successes to ‘the will of Adramazd4;’ and mouldering ruins of the comparatively pure religion of oriental ‘barbarism,’ which Alexander and his civilising Greek successors were unable wholly to destroy, and replace by their own idolatrous superstitions. While in the Pahlavi texts we find much of the medizval edifice built by later Persian priestcraft upon the old foundations, with a strange mixture of old and new materials, and exhibiting the usual symptom of declining powers, a strong insistence upon complex forms and minute details, with little of the freedom of treatment and simplicity of outline characteristic of the ancient bards.

x , PAHLAVI TEXTS.

To understand the relationship between these two classes of Parsi sacred writings, it must be observed that the Avesta and Pahlavi of the same scripture, taken together, form its Avesta and Zand, terms which are nearly synonymous with ‘revelation and commentary.’ Both words are derived from verbal roots implying ‘ knowledge;’ Avesta being the Pahlavi avistak, which may most probably be traced to the past participle of 4, ‘to, + vid, ‘to know,’ with the meaning of ‘what is announced’ or ‘ declaration ;’ and Zand, being the Pahlavi form of Av. zaisti (traceable in the word azaintis), must be referred to the root zan, ‘ to know,’ with the meaning of ‘knowledge, understanding'.’ European scholars, misled probably by Muhammadan writers, have converted the phrase ‘Avesta and Zand’ into ‘Zend-Avesta,’ and have further identified Zand with the language of the Avesta. This use of the word Zand is, however, quite at variance with the practice of all Parsi writers who have been independent of European influence, as they apply the term Zand only to the Pahlavi translations and explanations of their sacred books, the original text of which they call Avesta. So that when they use the phrase ‘Avesta and Zand’ they mean the whole of any scripture, both the Avesta text and Pahlavi translation and commentary. And the latter, being often their only means of understanding the former, has now become of nearly equal authority with the Avesta itself. It is probable, indeed, that the first Zand was really written in the Avesta language, as we find many traces of such Avesta commentaries interpolated both in the Avesta and Pahlavi texts of the Parsi scriptures ; but this is rather a matter of European inference than of Parsi belief. The later (or Pahlavi) Zand appears also, in many places, to be merely a translation of this earlier (or Avesta) Zand, with additional explanations offered by the Pahlavi translators.

Regarding the sacredness of these Pahlavi translations, in the eyes of the Parsis, there can be no manner of doubt, so far as they cannot be shown to be inconsistent with the

1 See Haug’s Essays on the Sacred Language, Writings, and Religion of the Parsis, second edition, London, 1878; pp. 121, 122.

INTRODUCTION. . Xi

121, 122.

INTRODUCTION. . Xi

original Avesta text. But besides these translations there is another class of Pahlavi religious writings whose authority is more open to dispute. These writings are either translations and Zands of Avesta texts-no longer extant, or they contain the opinions and decisions of high-priests of later times, when the Pahlavi language was on the decline. Such writings would hardly be considered of indisputable authority by any Parsi of the present day, unless they coincided with his own preconceived opinions, But for outsiders they have the inestimable value either of supplying numerous details of religious traditions and customs which would be vainly sought for elsewhere, or of being contemporary records of the religious ideas of the Parsis in the declining days of their Mazdayasnian faith. It is with a few of such writings this volume has to deal; but before describing them more minutely it will be desirable to give some account of the Pahlavi language in which they are written.

2. THE PAHLAVI LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE.

The term ‘ Pahlavi,’ in its widest extent, is applied to all the varying forms of the medizval Persian language, from the time when the grammatical inflexions of ancient Persian were dropped, till the period when the modern alphabet was invented, and the language became corrupted into modern Persian by the adoption of numerous Arabic words and phrases. Some traces of Pahlavi words and phrases, written in old Semitic characters, have been found in the legends of coins struck by certain kings of Persian provinces, subordinate to the Greek successors of Alexander, as early as the third century B.c.' Further traces have been dis- , covered in the legends on some provincial, coins of the time of the Arsacidan dynasty. But, practically, our acquaintance with Pahlavi commences with the inscriptions, on rocks and coins, of Ardakhshir-i Papakan (A.D. 226-240), the founder of the Sasanian dynasty, and ends with certain religious

1 See Levy’s Beitrage zur aramidischen Miinzkunde Eran’s, und zur Kunde der altern Pehlewi-Schrift ; Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, Leipzig, 1867 ; XXI, 421-465.

xii PAHLAVI TEXTS.

writings of priests and other devout Parsis of post-Muhammadan times, among the latest of which is one dated A.yY. 250 (A.D. 881). Any fragments of Pahlavi composition of later date than A.D. 1000, must be considered merely as modern imitations of a dead language, and cannot be quoted — as authorities for the use of any particular Pahlavi words or construction.

250 (A.D. 881). Any fragments of Pahlavi composition of later date than A.D. 1000, must be considered merely as modern imitations of a dead language, and cannot be quoted — as authorities for the use of any particular Pahlavi words or construction.

With regard to the origin of the word Pahlavi, or language of Pahlav, many suggestions have been offered ; but the most probable explanation! is that which connects it with the Parthva of the cuneiform inscriptions, the land of the Parthians known to the Greeks and Romans, and of the Pahlavas mentioned by Sanskrit writers; the change of Parthva into Pahlav being very similar to that of Av. Mithra into Pers. Mihr. No doubt the language of the Parthians themselves was not Pahlavi, but they were the actual rulers of Persia for some centuries at the time when the Pahlavi language was forming there ; and, being formidable to their neighbours, it is not surprising that their name became identified with everything Persian, in the same way as the Roman name has been applied by the Persians, not only to the later Greek empire of Constantinople, but even to the earlier conqueror, Alexander the Great.

Strictly speaking, the medizval Persian language is only called Pahlavi when it is written in one of the characters used before the invention of the modern Persian alphabet, and in the peculiarly enigmatical mode adopted in Pahlavi writings. Whenever it is’ transcribed, either in Avesta characters, or in those of the modern Persian alphabet, and freed from this peculiarity, it is called Pazand.

The peculiar mode of writing Pahlavi, here alluded to, long made the character of the language a standing puzzle for European scholars, and was first satisfactorily explained by Professor Haug, of Munich, in his admirable Essay on the Pahlavi Language already cited.

Like the Assyrians of old, the Persians of Parthian times appear to have borrowed their writing from a foreign race.

2 See Haug's Essay on the Pahlavi Language, Stuttgart, 1870; pp. 33-37-

INTRODUCTION. xiil

But, whereas the Semitic Assyrians adopted a Turanian syllabary, these later Aryan Persians accepted a Semitic alphabet. Besides the alphabet, however, which they could use for spelling their own words, they also transferred a certain number of complete Semitic words to their writings, as representatives of the corresponding words in their own language. These Semitic representatives (the number of which might at any time be increased or diminished at the discretion of the writer) were probably never very numerous, and not more than four hundred of them are to be found in the Pahlavi writings now extant; but, as they represent nearly all the commonest words in the language (excepting those specially relating to religious matters), they often constitute more than half the bulk of a Pahlavi text.

The use of such Semitic words, scattered about in Persian sentences, gives Pahlavi the motley appearance of a compound language; more especially as Persian terminations are often added to the Semitic words. But there are good reasons for supposing that the language was never spoken as it was written. The spoken language appears to have been purely Persian ; the Semitic words being merely used as written representatives, or logograms, of the Persian words which were spoken. Thus the Persians would write malkan malka, ‘king of kings,’ but they would read shahan shah. This is still the mode in which most Parsis read their Pahlavi literature; and it is only by assuming it to have been their universal practice, in former times, that we can account for the total and immediate disappearance of the Semitic portion of the Pahlavi, from their language, when the Persians adopted their modern alphabet. As the Semitic words were merely a Pahlavi mode of writing their Persian equivalents (just as ‘viz.’ is a mode of writing ‘namely’ in English), they disappeared with the Pahlavi writing, and the Persians began at once to write all their words, with their new alphabet, just as they pronounced them.

In the meantime, the greater part of the nation had become Muhammadans, and a new influx of Semitic words commenced, but of a very different character. The Semitic

XIV PAHLAVI TEXTS.

portion of the Pahlavi writing was nearly pure Chaldee, and was confined (as already stated) to the graphic representation of most of the simplest and commonest words unconnected with religion; but it seems to have formed no part of the spoken language, at all events in later times. Whereas the Semitic portion of modern Persian is borrowed from Arabic, and includes most words connected with religion, science, and literature; in fact, every class of words except that which was usually Semitic in Pahlavi writings; and these Arabic words form an essential part of the spoken language, being as indispensable to the modern Persian as words of Norman-French origin are to the English.

In Pahlavi writings, moreover, besides the four hundred Semitic logograms already mentioned, we also find about one hundred obsolete forms of Iranian words used as logograms; much in the same way as ‘ye’ may be used for ‘the, and ‘ Xmas’ for ‘Christmas’ in English. The use of all these logograms was, however, quite optional, as their usual Persian equivalents might be substituted for any of them at any time, according to each particular writer’s taste and discretion. But whenever they are employed they form what is called the Huzvdris portion of the Pahlavi; while the other words, intended to be pronounced as they are spelt, form the Pazand portion.

But whenever they are employed they form what is called the Huzvdris portion of the Pahlavi; while the other words, intended to be pronounced as they are spelt, form the Pazand portion.

Many attempts have been made to explain the word Huzviaris, but it cannot be said that any satisfactory etymology has yet been proposed. Like the word Pahlavi it seems hardly to occur in any old Pahlavi text, but only in colophons, chapter-headings, and similar notes of modern writers ; it seems, therefore, more reasonable to trace it to modern Persian than direct to any more ancient source. Its Pahlavi form, hQzv4ris or adzv4risn, appears to represent the modern Persian uzvd4ris, which is rarely used ; the usual Persian form of the word being zuvaris. Now zuviris is precisely the form of an abstract noun derived from the crude form of a verb zuvAridan, which has been admitted into some Persian dictionaries on the authority of Golius},

1 See Castelli Lexicon Heptaglotton, Pars altera, London, 1669.

INTRODUCTION. XV

with the meaning ‘to grow old, to become thread-bare.’ If such a verb really exists in Persian, although its meaning may imply ‘decrepitude or decay’ rather than ‘antiquity or obsoleteness,’ yet its abstract noun would not be altogether inapplicable to the logograms used in Pahlavi, which are, in fact, last remnants of older writings.

The word Pazand is probably derived from Av. paitizanti, with the meaning ‘re-explanation,’ that is, a further interpretation of the Pahlavi Zand in the Persian vernacular. This term is applied not only to the purely Persian words in Pahlavi texts, but also (as already noticed) to transliterations of the said texts, either in Avesta or modern Persian characters, in which all the Huzvaris words are replaced by their Pazand equivalents. These transliterations form what are called Pazand texts; they retain the exact idiom and construction of the Pahlavi original, and represent the mode in which it was read. It may be remarked, however, that all such PAzand texts, as have been examined, seem to have been written in India, so that they may be suspected of representing some corrupt Gugarati pronunciation of Persian, rather than the peculiar orthography of any period of the Persian language.

It may be remarked, however, that all such PAzand texts, as have been examined, seem to have been written in India, so that they may be suspected of representing some corrupt Gugarati pronunciation of Persian, rather than the peculiar orthography of any period of the Persian language.

This theory of the origin and development of Pahlavi writing could hardly be upheld, unless we could trace the same artificial mixture of Huzvaris and Pazand in all accessible Pahlavi records, from their earliest appearance to the present time. This we are able to do, even in the scanty materials afforded by the legends on the provincial Persian coins of the third century B.C. and second century A.D. already mentioned. But we can trace it with greater certainty not only in the coin legends, but also in the rock inscriptions of the earlier Sasanian kings (A.D. 226-388), in the latest of which we find the written language differing very slightly from that contained in the manuscripts preserved by the Parsis of the present day, although the characters differ very much in form. And, finally, in the legends on the coins of the later Sasanian kings (A.D. 388- 651) and on seals of their times, we find even this difference in the shapes of the letters disappearing by degrees. In \

Xvi PAHLAVI TEXTS.

fact, all the materials at our disposal tend to show that Huzvaris has been an essential constituent of all Pahlavi writings from the time of Alexander’s successors to that of the disuse of Pahlavi characters; but we have no reason to suppose that the spoken language of the great mass of the Persian people ever contained the Semitic words which they thus used as Huzvaris in their writings.

Although the use of Huzvaris, until explained recently, rendered the nature of the Pahlavi language very obscure, it added very little to the difficulty of understanding the Pahlavi texts, because the meaning of nearly every Huzvaris logogram was well known; being recorded in an old glossary preserved by the Parsis, in which every logogram is explained by its proper PAzand equivalent. The extant copies of this old glossary generally contain the Huzvadris and Pazand words written in the Pahlavi character, together with their traditional pronunciation, either in Avesta or modern Persian letters; there is, therefore, no particular difficulty in reading or translating the Huzviris portion of a Pahlavi text, although doubts may often be entertained as to the accuracy of the traditional pronunciation.

The real difficulty of reading Pahlavi texts lies in the Pazand portion (so far as it may be unexplained by existing vocabularies), and is chiefly occasioned by the ambiguity of some of the Pahlavi letters. The alphabet used in Pahlavi books contains only fourteen distinct letters, so that some letters represent several different sounds; and this ambiguity is increased by the letters being joined together, when a compound of two letters is sometimes exactly like some other single letter. The complication arising from these ambiguities may be understood from the following list of the sounds, simple and compound, represented by each of the fourteen letters of the Pahlavi alphabet respectively :—

Da ah kh fb. Opel Ptd Chg zr. 71, lL §z. 298, yi, yad, yag, yag, di, dad, dag, dag, gi, gad, gag, gag, gi, gad, gag, gag. -X) sh, s, ya, yah, yakh, th, ikh,

INTRODUCTION. xvii

da, dah, dakh, g4, gah, gakh, 78, gah, gakh. 2 gh. gk. 6m. Jnv,w,0,6,1 sy, 4d, g,¢.

From this list it is easy to see the confusion produced by the letter 29 s being exactly like the letter 5 y doubled, and by the letter -4%) sh being identical with a compound of 5 y and » 4; and there are, in fact, some compounds of two letters which have from ten to fifteen sounds in common use, besides others which might possibly occur. If it be further considered that there are only three letters (which are also consonants, as in most Semitic languages) to represent five long vowels, and that there are probably five short vowels to be understood, the difficulty of reading Pahlavi correctly may be readily imagined.

When Pahlavi writing was in common use this difficulty was probably no more felt by the Persians, than the complexity of Chinese characters is felt as an evil by a Chinese mandarin, or the corrupt system of English orthography by an educated Englishman. It is only the foreigner, or learner, who fully appreciates the difficulty of understanding such cumbrous systems of writing.

With regard, however, to their Huzvaris logograms the Persians seem to have experienced more difficulty. As the actual sounds of these Semitic words were rarely pronounced, in consequence of their Pazand equivalents being substituted in reading, there must have been some risk of their true pronunciation being forgotten. That this risk was understood by the Persians, or Parsis, is proved by the existence of the Huzv4ris-Pazand glossary already described, which was evidently compiled as a record both of the pronunciation and meaning of the Huzvaris logograms. But its compilation does not appear to have been undertaken until the true pronunciation of some of these logograms had been already lost. Thus, although the traditional readings of most of the Semitic portion of the Huzvdris can be readily traced to wellknown Chaldee words, there are yet many other such readings which are altogether inexplicable as Semitic

(5]

_Xvill PAHLAVI TEXTS,

Thus, although the traditional readings of most of the Semitic portion of the Huzvdris can be readily traced to wellknown Chaldee words, there are yet many other such readings which are altogether inexplicable as Semitic

(5]

_Xvill PAHLAVI TEXTS,

words. In most such cases, however, European scholars have found that the Huzvaris word can be easily read in some other way which at once connects it with some ordinary Chaldee equivalent. It may, therefore, be reasonably assumed that the compilers of the glossary had in some instances lost the correct pronunciation of these old Semitic words, and that, in such cases, they adopted (as a Parsi would probably do at the present day) the most obvious reading of the letters before them, which thenceforth became an artificial word to be handed down to posterity, by successive generations of writers, with all the authority of old tradition.

In the same manner the artificial pronunciation of the Iranian portion of the Huzvaris may be explained. The compilers of the glossary found a number of words in the Pahlavi texts, which were written in some obsolete or contracted manner; they knew the meanings of these words, but could not trace the true readings in the altered letters; they, therefore, adopted the most obvious readings of the written characters, and thus produced another series of artificial words, such as anhém4 for adharmazd, yahan for yazdan, madénad for main6ék, shatan for shatr6, &c.

Naturally enough the Parsis are loth to admit the possibility of any error in their traditional readings of Huzvaris, and very few of them have yet adopted the views of European scholars further than to admit that they are ingenious hypotheses, which still require satisfactory proof. They are quite right in demanding such proof, and they may reasonably argue that the conflicting opinions of various European scholars do not tend to in-— crease the certainty of their explanations. But, on the other hand, they are bound to examine all proofs that may be offered, and to consider the arguments of scholars, before utterly rejecting them in favour of their own preconceived notions of traditional authority.

Fortunately, we possess some means of ascertaining the ancient pronunciation of a few Huzvaris words, independent of the opinions of comparative philologists, in the inscrip-

INTRODUCTION. xix

Fortunately, we possess some means of ascertaining the ancient pronunciation of a few Huzvaris words, independent of the opinions of comparative philologists, in the inscrip-

INTRODUCTION. xix

tions already mentioned as having been engraved on rocks, and impressed on coins, by the earlier kings of the Sasanian dynasty in Persia. The earliest of these rock inscriptions records the name and titles of Artakhshatar son! of Papak, the first Sasanian monarch (A. D. 226-240); it is engraved in Greek and two kinds of old Pahlavi characters, which have been called Chaldzo-Pahlavi and Sasanian-Pahlavi, because the one bears more resemblance to Chaldee, both in its letters and the language they express, and the other is more frequently used by the subsequent Sasanian monarchs. A similar tri-lingual inscription records the names and titles of his son and successor Shahpdhar I (A.D. 240-271), who has also left a long bi-lingual inscription, in Chaldzo and Sasanian- Pahlavi, in a cave near Persepolis. Another long bi-lingual inscription, fragments of which have been found on stones among the ruins of Pai Kall, is attributed to his early successors, who have also left us several uni-lingual inscriptions in Sasanian-Pahlavi, two of which are of great length, but none later than the end of the fourth century.

The language of the earlier of these inscriptions differs from that of the manuscripts preserved by the Parsis, chiefly in the use of several Semitic words unknown to the manuscript Huzvaris, the non-existence of Iranian Huzvaris (which is evidently a growth of later times), and the less frequent use of Persian terminations affixed to Semitic words. These differences, however, are hardly greater than those which distinguish the English of Chaucer from that of our own day. Moreover, they gradually disappear in process of time, as we find the later inscriptions of the fourth century approaching much closer, in language, to the manuscripts.

As the alphabets of these inscriptions are less imperfect and ambiguous than that of the Pahlavi manuscripts, they render the pronunciation of many words much more certain. They consist of eighteen letters, having the following sounds :—

‘ So stated in the inscription, but Pahlavi MSS. call him the son of P&pak’s daughter and of Saésan (see Bund. XXXI, 30).

xX PAHLAVI TEXTS,

lad. 2b 3.p,f. 4.t,@ 5.4, ¢,%. 6.kh, h. 7.d. 8.1,v,w, 0,6. 9.z. 10.8. I1.sh,s. 12.k. 13.g. 14.l,r, 15.m. 16.n. 17. y,%,4& 18. doubtful, being equivalent to Chaldee N-> and to Pahl. MS. -man".

call him the son of P&pak’s daughter and of Saésan (see Bund. XXXI, 30).

xX PAHLAVI TEXTS,

lad. 2b 3.p,f. 4.t,@ 5.4, ¢,%. 6.kh, h. 7.d. 8.1,v,w, 0,6. 9.z. 10.8. I1.sh,s. 12.k. 13.g. 14.l,r, 15.m. 16.n. 17. y,%,4& 18. doubtful, being equivalent to Chaldee N-> and to Pahl. MS. -man".

Comparing this list of sounds with that of the sounds of the manuscript alphabet (pp. xvi, xvii) it is evident that the inscriptions must afford a means of distinguishing 4 from kh, s from any binary compound of y, d, g, or g, sh from any compound of y, d, g, or g with 4, h, or kh, n from vy, r, or |, and y, d, g from each other; all which letters and compounds are left in doubt by the manuscript alphabet. Unfortunately we do not possess trustworthy copies of some of the inscriptions which are evidently the most important from a linguistic point of view?; but such copies as have been obtained supply corrections of traditional misreadings of about twenty-five Huzvaris logograms, and at the same. time they confirm the correctness of three traditional readings which have been called in question by most European scholars. So far, therefore, the inscriptions would teach the Parsis that the decisions of comparative philologists are not likely to be right more than seven times out of eight, even when they are tolerably unanimous,

The Chaldzo-Pahlavi character appears to have soon

' Whether the sound of this letter can ever be satisfactorily settled remains doubtful. Levy, in his Beitrage, cited on p. xi, considers it to be the Semitic 71, on palzeographical grounds ; but there are serious objections to all the identifications that have been proposed.

? The Sasanian inscriptions, of which new and correct copies are most urgently wanted, are:—1. An inscription of thirty-one lines high up in the left side-com partment (behind the king) of the centre bas-relief of Naqs-i Ragab, near Persepolis. 2. Two inscriptions, of eleven and twelve lines respectively, on the stones of the edifice near the south-west corner of the great platform at Persepolis, south of the Hall of Columns (see Ouseley’s Travels in Persia, vol. ii. p. 237 and plate 42). 3. All the fragments of the Pat KAlt inscription, of which probably not more than half have yet been copied.

Of the very long inscription behind the king’s horse in the bas-relief of Naqs-i Rustam, containing more than seventy lines very much damaged, a copy taken by Westergaard in 1843. with his usual accuracy, probably gives nearly all that is legible. And of the Hagiabad and shorter inscriptions, little or nothing remains doubtful.

INTRODUCTION. xxi

with his usual accuracy, probably gives nearly all that is legible. And of the Hagiabad and shorter inscriptions, little or nothing remains doubtful.

INTRODUCTION. xxi

gone out of use, after the establishment of the Sasanian dynasty, as the latest known inscription, in which it occurs, is that of Pai Kali, which contains the name of Adharmazd I (A.D. 271-272); while the long inscriptions of Naqs-i Ragab and Nagqs-i Rustam, which contain the name of Varahran II (A.D. 275-283), are engraved only in Sasanian-Pahlavi. From these facts it seems probable that Chaldzo-Pahlavi went out of use about A.D. 275. The Sasanian characters continue to appear, with very little alteration, upon the coins until the end of the fifth century, when most of them begin to assume the cursive form of the manuscript Pahlavi, which appears to have altered very slightly since the eighth century.

The oldest Pahlavi manuscript known to be extant, consists of several fragments of papyrus recently found in a grave in the Faydm district in Egypt, and now in the Royal Museum at Berlin; it is supposed to have been written in the eighth century. Next to this, after a long interval, come four manuscripts written on Indian paper, all by the same hand, in A.D. 1323-1324; they are two copies of the Yasna and two of the Vendidad, containing the Avesta with its Zand, or Pahlavi translation and com- - mentary; two of these old MSS. are now preserved in Kopenhagen, one in London, and one in Bombay. Next to these in age are two MSS. of miscellaneous Pahlavi texts, written probably about fifty years later; one of these is now in Kopenhagen and one in Bombay. Another MS. of nearly the same age is also a miscellaneous collection of Pahlavi texts, written in A.D. 1397, and now in Munich; where there is also one of the oldest Pazand- Sanskrit MSS., a copy of the Ard4-Viraf-namak, written in A.D. 1410. Another Pazand-Sanskrit MS., a copy of the Khurdah Avesta, of about the same age, exists in Bombay. Pahlavi and Pazand manuscripts of the sixteenth century are rather more numerous.

Pahlavi literature reached the zenith of its prosperity about thirteen centuries ago, when it included the whole literature of Persia. Seventy years later its destruction commenced with the fall of the Sasanian dynasty (A.D.

XXil PAHLAVI TEXTS.

636--651); and the subsequent adoption of the modern Persian alphabet gave it its death-blow. The last remnants of Pahlavi writings are now contained in the few manuscripts still preserved by the Parsis in Western India, and their almost-extinct brethren in Persia. A careful estimate of the length of these remnants, so far as they are known to Europeans, has shown that the total extent of existing Pahlavi literature is about thirty-six times that of the Bundahis, as translated in this volume. One-fifth of this literature consists of translations accompanying Avesta texts, and the remaining four-fifths are purely Pahlavi works which are nearly all connected with religion. How much of this literature may have descended from Sasanian times can hardly be ascertained as yet; in fact, it is only very recently that any trustworthy data, for determining the age of a few Pahlavi writings, have been discovered, as will be explained hereafter, when considering the age of the Bundahis.

3. THE BUNDAHIS.

‘The term Bundahis, ‘creation of the beginning, or ‘original creation, is applied by the Parsis to a Pahlavi work?! which, in its present state, appears to be a collection of fragments relating to the cosmogony, mythology, and legendary history taught by Mazdayasnian tradition, but which cannot be considered, in any way, a complete treatise on these subjects.; This term is applicable enough to much of the earlier part of the work, which treats of the ‘progressive development of creation under good and evil influences; but it is probably not the original name of the book. Its adoption was no doubt partly owing to the occurrence of the word bfn-dahisn, or bOn-dahisnih, twice in the first sentence, and partly to its appropriateness to the subject. But the same sentence seems to inform

‘ When this work forms part of & collection of Pahlavi texts, the whole manuscript is sometimes called ‘ the great Bundahis.’ There also exists a Saddar Bundahis, or Bundahis of a hundred chapters, which is a comparatively modern compilation, detailing the chief customs and religious laws of the Parsis in a hundred sections,

INTRODUCTION. XXill

us that the actual name of the treatise was Zand-akAs, ‘knowing the tradition.’

XXill

us that the actual name of the treatise was Zand-akAs, ‘knowing the tradition.’

‘The work commences by describing the state of things in the beginning ; the good spirit being in endless light and omniscient, and the evil spirit in endless darkness and with limited knowledge. Both produced their own creatures, which remained apart, in a spiritual or ideal state, for three thousand years, after which the evil spirit began his opposition to the good creation under an agreement that his power was not to last more than nine thousand years, of which only the middle three thousand were to see him successful. By uttering a sacred formula the good spirit throws the evil one into a state of confusion for a second three thousand years, while he produces the archangels and the material creation, including the sun, moon, and stars. At the end of that period the evil spirit, encouraged by the demons he had produced, once more rushes upon the good creation, to destroy it. The demons carry on conflicts with each of the six classes of creation, namely, the sky, water, earth, plants, animals represented by the primeval ox, and mankind represented by G4yé6mard; producing little effect but movement in the sky, saltness in the water, mountains in the earth, withering in plants, and death to_the primeval ox, and also to Gayémard after an interval.

Then follows a series of chapters describing the seven regions of the earth, its mountains and Seas, the five classes of animals, the origin of mankind, generation, the five kinds of fire and three sacred fires, the white Hom tree and the tree of many seeds, the three-legged ass, the ox Hadhayés, the bird KAmrés, and other birds and animals opposed to the evil creation, the rivers of the world, the seventeen species of liquids, the lakes, the origin of the ape and bear, the chiefs of the several kinds of creatures and creations, the calendar, lineal measures, trees and plants, the characteristics of various demons, the spiritual chiefs of the various regions of the earth, and the resurrection and future existence ; all which descriptions are given on the authority of the Din, which may have been some particular

XXIV PAHLAVI TEXTS.

book, or revelation generally. The concluding chapters give the genealogies of the legendary Persian kings and heroes, and of Zaratist and certain priests, together with an epitome of Persian chronology from the creation to the Muhammadan conquest.

As the work now stands it is evidently of a fragmentary character, bearing unmistakable marks both of omissions and dislocations; and the extant manuscripts, as will be seen, differ among themselves both as to the extent and arrangement of the text. Many passages have the appearance of being translations from an Avesta original, and it is very probable that we have in the Bundahis either a translation, or an epitome, of the Damdad Nask, one of the twenty-one books into which the whole of the Zoroastrian scriptures are said to have been divided before the time of Darius. This may be guessed from a comparison of the contents of the Bundahis with those of the Damd4d Nask, which are detailed in the Dini-vagarkard as follows!:—‘It contained an explanation of the spiritual existence and heaven, good and evil, the material existence of this world, the sky and the earth, and everything which Adharmazd produced in water, fire, and vegetation, men and quadrupeds, reptiles and birds, and everything which is produced from the waters, and the characteristics of all things. Secondly, the production of the resurrection and future existence; the concourse and separation at the Kinvad bridge; on the reward of the meritorious and the punishment of sinners in the future existence, and such-like explanations.’ Moreover, the Damdaéd Nask is twice quoted as an authority in the Selections of Zadsparam (IX, 1, 16), when treating of animals, in nearly the same words as those used in the Bundahis.

The first manuscript of the Bundahis seen in Europe was brought from Surat by Anquetil Duperron in 1761, and he published a French translation of it in his great work on the Zend-Avesta in,1771%. This manuscript,

1 See Haug’s Essays, &c., second edition, pp. 127, 128. * Zend-Avesta, ouvrage de Zoroastre, &c., par Anquetil Duperron; Paris, 1771. Tome seconde, pp. 343-422, Boun-dehesch.

INTRODUCTION. XXV

which is now in the National Library at Paris, was a modern copy, written A.D. 1734, and contained a miscellaneous collection of Pahlavi writings besides the Bundahis. And Anquetil’s translation, though carefully prepared in accordance with the information he had obtained from his Parsi instructor, is very far from giving the correct meaning of the original text in many places.

And Anquetil’s translation, though carefully prepared in accordance with the information he had obtained from his Parsi instructor, is very far from giving the correct meaning of the original text in many places.

- In 1820 the very old codex from which Anquetil’s MS. had been copied was brought to Europe, from Bombay, by the Danish scholar Rask, and was subsequently deposited in the University Library at Kopenhagen. This most important codex, which will be more particularly described under the appellation of K20, appears to have been written during the latter half of the fourteenth century; and a facsimile of the Pahlavi text of the Bundahis, which it contains, was very carefully traced from it, lithographed, and published by Westergaard in 18511.

In a review of this lithographed edition of the Pahlavi text, published in the Géttinger Gelehrte Anzeigen in 18542, Haug gave a German translation of the first three chapters of the Bundahis. And Spiegel, in his Traditional Literature of the Parsis?, published in 1860 a German translation of many passages in the Bundahis, together with a transcript of the Pahlavi text of Chaps. I, II, III, and XXX in Hebrew characters. But the complete German translation of the Bundahis by Windischmann, with his commentary on its contents, published in his Zoroastrian Studies* in 1863, was probably the most important step in advance since the time of Anquetil, and the utmost

1 Bundehesh, Liber Pehlvicus. E vetustissimo codice Havniensi descripsit, duas inscriptiones regis Saporis Primi adjecit, N. L. Westergaard; Havniz, 1851.

2 Ueber die Pehlewi-Sprache und den Bundehesh, von Martin Haug; Gottingen, 1854.

3 Die Traditionelle Literatur der Parsen in ihrem Zusammenhange mit den angranzenden Literaturen, dargestellt von Fr. Spiegel ; Wien, 1860.

* Zoroastriche Studien. Abhandlungen zur Mythologie und Sagengeschichte des alten Iran, von Fr. Windischmann (nach dem Tode des Verfassers herausgegeben von Fr. Spiegel) ; Berlin, 1863.

XXVI PAHLAVI TEXTS.

that could be done on the authority of a single MS. which is far from perfect.

In 1866 another very old codex, containing the Pahlavi texts of the Bundahis and other works, was brought to Europe by Haug, to whom it had been presented at Surat in 1864. It is now in the State Library at Munich, and will be more minutely described under the appellation of M6. In this codex the Bundahis is arranged in a different order from that in K20, and Chaps. XXVIII, XXIX, and XXXI-XXXIII are omitted.

A second complete German translation of the Bundahis, with a lithographed copy of the Pahlavi text, a transliteration of the text in modern Persian characters, and a glossary of all the words it contains, was published by Justi in 18681. Its author, having had access to other MSS. (descended from M6) at London and Oxford, was able to rectify many of the deficiencies in Windischmann’s translation ; but, otherwise, he made but little progress in elucidating difficult passages.

Its author, having had access to other MSS. (descended from M6) at London and Oxford, was able to rectify many of the deficiencies in Windischmann’s translation ; but, otherwise, he made but little progress in elucidating difficult passages.

Other European writers have published the result of their studies of particular parts of the Bundahis, but it does not appear that any of them have attempted a continuous translation of several chapters.

Whether the existence of previous translations be more of an assistance than a hindrance in preparing a new one, may well be a matter of doubt. Previous translations may prevent oversights, and in difficult passages it is useful to see how others have floundered through the mire; but, on the other hand, they occasion much loss of time, by the necessity of examining many of their dubious renderings before finally fixing upon others that seem more satisfactory. The object of the present translation is to give the meaning of the original text as literally as possible, and with a minimum of extra words; the different renderings of other translators being very rarely noticed, unless there be some probability of their being of service

‘ Der Bundehesh, zum ersten Male herausgegeben, transcribirt, iibersetzt, und mit Glossar versehen, von Ferdinand Justi; Leipzig, 1868,

INTRODUCTION. XXVii

to the reader. Some doubtful words and _ passages still defy all attempts at satisfactory solution, but of these the reader is warned; and, no doubt, a few oversights and mistakes will be discovered.

With regard to the original text, we have to recover it from four manuscripts which are, more or less, independent authorities, and may be styled K20, K2ob, M6, and TD. The first three of these have evidently descended, either directly or through one or more intermediate copies, from the same original; but the source of TD, so far as it can be ascertained, seems to have been far removed from that of the others. All the other MSS. of the Bundahis, which have been examined, whether Pahlavi or Pazand, are descended either from K20 or M6, and are, therefore, of no independent authority.

All the other MSS. of the Bundahis, which have been examined, whether Pahlavi or Pazand, are descended either from K20 or M6, and are, therefore, of no independent authority.

K20 is the very old codex already mentioned as having been brought from Bombay by Rask in 1820, and is now No. 20 of the collection of Avesta and Pahlavi MSS. in the University Library at Kopenhagen. It consists now of 173 folios of very old and much-worn Indian paper of large octavo size, but five other folios are certainly missing, besides an uncertain number lost from the end of the volume. This MS. contains twenty Pahlavi texts, written twenty lines to the page, and some of them accompanied by Avesta; the Bundahis is the ninth of these texts, and occupies fols. 88-129, of which fol. 121 is missing. Three of the texts, occurring before the Bundahis, have dated colophons, but the dates are A.Y. 690, 720, and 700, all within 36 folios; it is, therefore, evident that these dates have been copied from older MSS.; but at the same time the appearance of the paper indicates that the actual date of the MS. cannot be much later than A.Y. 720 (A.D. 1351), and there are reasons for believing that it was written several years before A. Y. 766 (A.D. 1397), as will be explained in the description of M6. Owing to its age and comparative completeness this MS. of the Bundahis is certainly the rhost important one extant, although comparison with other MSS. proves that its writer was rather careless, and frequently omitted words and phrases. The

XXVIII PAHLAVI TEXTS.

loss of fol. 121, though it has hitherto left an inconvenient gap in the text (not filled up by other MSS.), is more than compensated by the three extra chapters which this MS. and its copies have hitherto alone supplied. The text on the lost folio was supposed by Anquetil to have contained a whole chapter besides portions of the two adjacent ones; this is now known to be a mistake, Anquetil’s Chap. XXVIII being quite imaginary; the end of Chap. XXVII has long been supplied from other MSS., but the beginning of the next chapter has hitherto been missing.

Only two copies of K20 appear to be known to Europeans ; the best of these is the copy brought from Surat by Anquetil, No. 7 of his collection of manuscripts, now in the National Library at Paris; this was written in A.D. 1734, when K20 appears to have been nearly in its present imperfect state, though it may have had some 15 folios more at the end. This copy seems to have been carefully written; but the same cannot be said of the other copy, No. 21 in the University Library at Kopenhagen, which is full of blunders, both of commission and omission, and can hardly have been written by so good a Pahlavi scholar as Dastdr Dérab, Anquetil’s instructor, although attributed to him.

21 in the University Library at Kopenhagen, which is full of blunders, both of commission and omission, and can hardly have been written by so good a Pahlavi scholar as Dastdr Dérab, Anquetil’s instructor, although attributed to him.

K2ob consists of nineteen loose folios!, found by Westergaard among some miscellaneous fragments in the collection of Avesta and Pahlavi MSS. in the University Library at Kopenhagen, and now forming No. 20b in that collection. The first two folios are lost, but the third folio commences with the Pahlavi equivalent of the words ‘knew that Aharman exists’ (Bund. Chap. I, 8), and the text continues to the end of Chap. XI, 1, where it leaps at once (in the middle of a line on the fifteenth folio) to Chap. XXX, 15, ‘one brother who is righteous,’ whence the text continues to the end of Chap. XXXI, 15, which is followed by Chaps. XXXII, XXXIV, as in K20, This

1 Tam indebted to the late Professor N. L. Westergaard for all information about this MS., and also for a tracing of the Pahlavi text of so much of Chap. XXXI as is contained in it,

INTRODUCTION. XXI1X

MS. is not very old, and contains merely a fragment of the text; but its value consists in its not being a descendant of either K20 or M6, as it clearly represents a third line of descent from their common original. It agrees with K20 in the general arrangement of its chapters, so far as they go, and also in containing Chap. XX XI; but it differs from it in some of the details of that chapter, and agrees with M6 in some verbal peculiarities elsewhere; it has not, however, been collated in any other chapter. The omission of nearly twenty chapters, in the centre of the work, indicates that some one of the MSS. from which it is descended, had lost many of its central folios before it was copied, and that the copyist did not notice the deficiency ; such unnoticed omissions frequently occur in Pahlavi manuscripts.

from which it is descended, had lost many of its central folios before it was copied, and that the copyist did not notice the deficiency ; such unnoticed omissions frequently occur in Pahlavi manuscripts.

M6 is the very old codex brought to Europe by Haug in 1866, and now No. 6 of the Haug collection in the State Library at Munich. It consists of 240 folios of very old, but well-preserved, Indian paper of large octavo size (to which thirteen others, of rather later date, have been prefixed) bound in two volumes. This MS. contains nineteen Pahlavi texts, written from seventeen to twenty-two lines to the page, and some of them accompanied by Avesta; eleven of these texts are also found in K20, and the Bundahis is the fourteenth of the nineteen, occupying fols. 53-99 of the second volume. Two of the other texts have dated colophons, the dates being fifty days apart in A. Y. 766 (A.D. 1397), and as there are 150 folios between the two dates there is every probability that they are the actual dates on which the two colophons were written. The arrangement of the Bundahis in this MS. is different from that in K20, giving the chapters in the following order :—Chaps. XV-XXIII, I-XIV, XXIV-XXVII, XXX, XXXII, XXXIV, and omitting Chaps. XXVIII, XXFX, and XXXI. These omissions and the misplacement of Chaps. I-XIV render it probable that the MS., from which the Bundahis in M6 was copied, was already in a state of decay; and this supposition is confirmed by upwards of fifty peculiar mistakes, scattered over most parts of the

XXX PAHLAVI TEXTS.

text in M6, which are evidently due to the illegibility of the original from which it was copied, or to its illegible words having been touched up by an ignorant writer, instances of which are not uncommon in old Pahlavi MSS. Eliminating these errors, for which the writer of M6 cannot be held responsible, he seems to have been a more careful copyist than the writer of K20, and supplies several words and phrases omitted by the latter. The close correspondence of K20 and M6 in most other places, renders it probable that they were copied from the same original, in which case K20 must have been written several years earlier than M6, before the original MS. became decayed and difficult to read. It is possible, however, that K20 was copied from an early copy of the original of M6; in which case the date of K2o0 is more uncertain, and may even be later than that of M6.

became decayed and difficult to read. It is possible, however, that K20 was copied from an early copy of the original of M6; in which case the date of K2o0 is more uncertain, and may even be later than that of M6.

Several MSS. of the Bundahis descended from M6 are in existence. One is in the MS. No, 121 of the Ouseley collection in the Bodleian Library at Oxford, and contains the chapters in the following order :—Chaps. XV-XXIII, I-VII,17 (to ‘ Arag river’), XII-XIV, XXIV-XXVII, XXX, VII, 12~XI; followed by Sls. Chap. XX, 4-17, also derived from M6. Another is in the library of DastOr JamAspji Minochiharji at Bombay, and contains the chapters also in a dislocated state (due to the misplacement of folios in some former MS.) as follows :—Chaps. XV-XXIII, I-XI, 5 (to ‘and the evil spirit’), XII, 2 (from ‘ Si#idav’)-XII, 12 (first word), XI, 5 (from ‘produced most for Khvaniras’)—XII, 2 (to ‘and Kéndras, Mount’), XXX, 32 (from ‘the renovation arises in’)}-XXX, 33, XXXII, XXXIV, Sls. Chap. XVIII, Bund. Chaps. XII, 12 (from ‘ Airak’)-XIV, XXIV-XXVII, XXX. A third is in the library of Dastr NéshirvAnji JamAspji at Poona, and contains the text in the same order as M6. A fragment of the Pahlavi text of the Bundahis, also descended from M6, occupies eight folios in the Additional Oriental MS. No. 22,378 in the Library of the British Museum ; it contains Chaps. XVIII, XIX, 17, and XX, 1-2 (to ‘one from the other’).

There are also several PAzand manuscripts of the Bun-

INTRODUCTION. XXXi

dahis, written in Avesta characters, and likewise derived from M6. One of the best of these is No. 22 of the collection of Avesta and Pahlavi MSS. in the India Office Library at London ; it is old, and has the date a.Y. 936 (A.D. 1567) in a Pahlavi colophon on fol. 111, but this may have been copied from an older MS.; its contents are arranged as follows :—Chaps. XVIII-XXIII, I-XIV, XXIV-XXVII, XXX, XXXII, XXXIV, followed by several short Pazand texts, only part of which are derived from M6, and the last of them being left incomplete by the loss of the folios which originally formed the end of the volume; instead of these lost folios others, containing Chaps. XV-XVII, have been added and bound up with the rest. Another MS., No. 7 in the same collection, which is dated A.Y. 1174 (A.D. 1805), is a modern copy derived from No. 22 through one or more intervening MSS.}; it contains precisely the same text, but with many variations in orthography, indicative of the very uncertain character of Pazand spelling. Two fragments of the P4zand text are also contained in the MSS. No. 121 at Oxford, already mentioned ; they consist of Chaps. V, 3-7 (to ‘would have known the secret’) and XXV, 18-22. Another fragment, evidently copied from an old MS., is found on fols. 34, 35 of the Rivayat MS. No. 8 of the collection in the India Office Library ; it consists of Chap. XVIII, 1-8.

121 at Oxford, already mentioned ; they consist of Chaps. V, 3-7 (to ‘would have known the secret’) and XXV, 18-22. Another fragment, evidently copied from an old MS., is found on fols. 34, 35 of the Rivayat MS. No. 8 of the collection in the India Office Library ; it consists of Chap. XVIII, 1-8.

The Pazand text of the Bundahis, derived from M6, is also written in Persian characters in M7 (No. 7 of the Haug collection at Munich), dated A.y. 1178 (A.D. 1809). It is interlined by Persian glosses, word for word, and consists of Chaps. XVIII-XXIII, I-XIV, XXIV-XXVII, and XXX on fols. 81-119, with Chaps. XV-XVII on fols. 120- 126, a repetition of Chap. XV and part of XVI on fols. 223-227, and Chap. XXXII on fol. 232.

Thus far, it will be noticed, we have two good independent authorities, K20 and M6, for ascertaining the text of the Bundahis in the fourteenth century, so far as Chaps. I-

' This is proved by an omission in fol. 40, which clearly indicates the loss of a folio in an intermediate MS.

XXXil PAHLAVI TEXTS,

XXVII, XXX, XXXII, and XXXIV are concerned ; and we have also, in K20b, a second authority for so much of Chap. XXXI as occurs in K20; but for Chaps. XXVIII and XXIX we have nothing but K20 to rely on, and part of Chap. XXVIII is lost in that manuscript. Such was the _ unsatisfactory state of that part of the text until Dec. 1877, when information about the MS. TD was received, followed by further details and a copy of Chaps. XXVIII, XXIX, and XXXI-XXXIII in Oct. 18781.

TD is a manuscript of the Bundahis which contains a much more extensive text than the MSS. already described, but whether it be an extension of the hitherto-received text, or the received text be an abridgement of this longer one, is likely to be a matter of dispute among Pahlavi scholars until the whole of the new text has been thoroughly examined. At any rate, the contents of this MS., combined with those of some MSS. of the Dadistan-i Dinik, afford a means of fixing the date of this recension of the Bundahis, as will be seen hereafter.

This MS. belongs to a young Mobad named Tehmuras Dinshawji Anklesaria in Bombay, and was brought from Persia a few years ago by a Mobad named Khodabakhsh Farod Abadan. It occupies the first 103 folios of the volume containing it, and is followed by 112 more folios containing the Nirangistan. The first original folio, which contained the text as far as Chap. I, 5 (to ‘ endless light’), has been lost and replaced by another (which, however, is now old) containing some introductory sentences, besides the missing text. The last original folio of the Bundahis, containing the last five lines of the last chapter, has also been lost and replaced by another modern folio, which contains the missing text followed by two colophons, both expressing approval of the text, and asserting that the MS. was written by Gépatshah Rastam Béndar. The first of these colophons

was written by Gépatshah Rastam Béndar. The first of these colophons

* Tam indebted to Mr. Khurshedji Rustamji Cama, of Bombay (who is well known for the interest he takes in all matters relating to the ancient customs and history of his fellow-countrymen), for obtaining this information, and to the owner of the MS. for his liberality in supplying me with all the details and extracts mentioned in the text.

INTRODUCTION. XXXHi

is undated, but gives the testimony of Dastir Rfistém? Gdstasp Ardashir, who is known to have written another MS. dated A.y. 1068 (A.D. 1699). The second colophon is by Dastar Jamshéd Jamasp Hakim, and is dated a.Y. 1113 (A. D. 1743), which was probably the date when this last folio was supplied to complete the old defective MS.

With regard to the age of the older part of this MS. we can arrive at an approximation in the following manner :— A valuable MS. of the Dadistan-i Dinik, which also belongs to Tehmuras Dinshawji, was written (according toa colophon which it contains) by Gépatshah Ristém? Bandar Malkamardan in the land of Kirm4n, who was evidently the same person as the writer of TD. Another MS. of the Dadistan-i Dinik was written by Marzapan Frédin Vahrém Radstém Bondar Malk4-mard4n Din-aydr, also in the land of Kirman, in A.Y. 941 (A.D. 1572). Comparing these two genealogies together it seems evident that Gépatshah was a brother of Vahrém, the grandfather of Marzap4n, and, therefore, a grand-uncle of Marzapan himself. Allowing for these two generations, it is probable that Gépatshah wrote TD about A.Y. 900 (say A. D. 1530); although instances have occurred in which a son has written a MS. at an earlier date than that of one written by his father.

The introductory sentences on the first restored folio are evidently a modern addition to the text, after it had acquired the name of Bundahis ; but they seem to have been copied from some other MS., as the copyist appears to have hardly understood them, having written them continuously with the beginning of the text, without break or stop. The spelling is modern, but that may be due to the copyist ; and the language is difficult, but may be translated as follows 3:—

‘The propitiation of the creator Adharmazd, the radiant,

1 This Dastfr is said to have sprung from the laity, and not from a priestly family.

2 The vowels 4 and 6 (or fi) often interchange in Pahlavi MSS. from Persia, probably owing to peculiarities of dialect, and the very broad sound of Persian a, like English a in call.

? English words in italics are additions to complete the sense.

[5] c

XXXIV PAHLAVI TEXTS.

glorious, omniscient, wise, powerful, and supreme, dy what as well-thought, well-said, azd well-done in thought, word, and deed, and the good augury of all the celestial angels and terrestrial angels upon the virtuous creation, I beseech.

[5] c

XXXIV PAHLAVI TEXTS.

‘Written at the second fortunate conjunction (akhtar) in the high-priestship (dastfrih) of the God-devoted, allsagacious cultivator of righteousness, the lover of good works who is God-discerning, spirit-surveying, avd approved by the good, the high-priest of the good religion of the Mazdayasnians, the glorified! Spendyad son of M4h-vindad, son of Rastém, soz of Shatréyar.

‘The writing? of the Bandahis was set going by the coming of the Arabs to the country of Iran, whose heterodoxy (dds-dinih) and ignorance have arisen from not understanding the mysteries of Kayan® orthodoxy (hadinéih) and of those revered by the upholders of the religion. From their deep seats it draws the purport of benedictions, avd from dubious thinking of actions 7¢ draws words of true meaning, the disclosure of which is entertaining knowledge.

‘On account of evil times, even he of the undecayed family of the Kayans and the Kay4n upholders of the religion are mingled with the obedient and just of those heterodox; and by the upper class the words of the orthodox, uttered in assembled worship, are considered as filthy vice. He also whose wish was to learn propriety (var4g) through this treatise (farhang), might provide z¢ for himself, from various places, by trouble and day and night painstaking, d4¢ was not able.’

The text of Chap. I then commences (without any intermediate stop) with the words zak zand-ak4sih, ‘that knowledge of tradition.’ As the whole text of the Bundahis occupies about 203 pages in TD, and each page contains

' Literally, ‘immortal-soulled,’ a term implying generally that the person is dead ; but it seems to have been applied to King Khfsré I (Néshirvan) during his lifetime. The time when this priest lived has yet to be discovered.

3 Reading zektib(n-i, equivalent to Paz. nivis-i; the MS. has zak tibna,

3 The hero tribe or princely race of the KayAnian dynasty, from which later Persian rulers have fancied themselves descended.

INTRODUCTION. XXXV

The time when this priest lived has yet to be discovered.

3 Reading zektib(n-i, equivalent to Paz. nivis-i; the MS. has zak tibna,

3 The hero tribe or princely race of the KayAnian dynasty, from which later Persian rulers have fancied themselves descended.

INTRODUCTION. XXXV

seventeen lines rather longer than those in K20, it is evident that the text in TD must be more than twice the length of that in K20, which occupied originally about eighty-three pages of twenty lines each. This additional text consists not only of additional matter in many of the chapters, but also of extra chapters, which give the work a more complete appearance than it presents in the manuscripts hitherto known. The whole number of chapters in TD appear to be forty-two, the general character of the contents of which may be gathered from the following list of the headings of each chapter, with the space it occupies in TD, and a reference to the corresponding chapter of the translation in this volume (such chapters as seem to be entirely wanting in K20 being marked with an asterisk) :—

1. The knowledge of tradition, first about Afharmazd’s original creation and the antagonism of the evil spirit, afterwards about the nature of the creatures of the world, from the original creation till the end; 19 pages; see Chap. I.

2. On the formation of light; 11 pages; see Chap. IE.

3. The rush of the destroyer at the creatures ; 6 pages; see Chaps. III, IV.

4. On the opposition of the two spirits, that is, in what manner the arch-fiends have come spiritually in opposition to the celestial angels; 10 pages; see Chap. V for two of the middle pages.

5. On the waging of the conflict (4rdik) of the creations of the world, encountering the evil spirit; 1 page; see Chap. VI.

6. The second conflict the water waged; 3 pages; see Chap. VII. ; 7. The third conflict the earth waged; 1 page; see

Chap. VIII.

8. The fourth conflict the plants waged; $ page; see Chap. IX.

g. The fifth conflict the primeval ox waged; 4 page; see Chap. X.

*10. The sixth conflict Gayémard waged ; 14 page.

*11. The seventh conflict the fire waged; 4 page.

*12, The eighth conflict the constellations waged ; } page. Cc 2

XXXVI PAHLAVI TEXTS.

*13. The ninth conflict the celestial angels waged with the evil spirit ; three lines.

*14. Tenth, the stars practised ron-intermeddling (agQmégisn); 4 page.

*15. On the species of those creations; 2$ pages.

16. On the nature of lands; 14 page; see Chap. XI.

17. On the nature of mountains ; 44 pages ; see Chap. XII.

18, On the nature of seas; 24 pages; see Chap. XIII.

19. On the nature of rivers; 54 pages; see Chaps. XX, XXI.

20. On the nature of lakes; 1} page; see Chap. XXII.

21. On the nature of the five classes of animals ; 5% pages ; see Chap. XIV.

22. On the nature of men; 74 pages; see Chap. XV}.

23. On the nature of generation of every kind; 5 pages; see Chap. XVI.

24. On the nature of plants ; 34 pages; see Chap. XXVII.

XXII.

21. On the nature of the five classes of animals ; 5% pages ; see Chap. XIV.

22. On the nature of men; 74 pages; see Chap. XV}.

23. On the nature of generation of every kind; 5 pages; see Chap. XVI.

24. On the nature of plants ; 34 pages; see Chap. XXVII.

25. On the chieftainship of men and animals and every single thing; 24 pages; see Chap. XXIV.

26. On the nature of fire; 44 pages; see Chap. XVII. *27. On the nature of sleep; 24 pages.

*28. On the nature of wind and cloud and rain; 94 pages. *29. On the nature of noxious creatures; 44 pages ?, * 30, On the nature of the wolf species; 2 pages.

31. On things of every kind that are created by the spirits®, and the opposition which came upon them; 7} pages; see Chaps. XVIII, XIX.

32. On the religious year; 4 pages; see Chaps. XXV, XXVI.

* 33. On the great exploits of the celestial angels; 174 pages.

34. On the evil-doing of Aharman and the demons; 7 pages, as in Chap. XXVIII.

* TD contains half a page more near the beginning, and a page and a half more at the end.

* Probably Chap. XXIII of the translation forms a part either of this chapter or the next.

3 This word is doubtful.

INTRODUCTION. | XXXVil

*35. On the body of man and the opinion of the world?!; 7 pages.

36. On the spzritual chieftainship of the regions of the earth; 34 pages, as in Chap. XXIX.

*37. On the Xinvad bridge and the souls of the departed; 54 pages.

*38. On the celebrated provinces of the country of Iran, the residence of the Kay4ns; 5 pages.

* 39. On the calamities of various millenniums happening to the country of Iran; 83 pages %.

40. On the resurrection and future existence; 63 pages; see Chap. XXX. ‘

41. On the race and offspring of the Kay4ns; 82 pages, as in Chaps. XXXI-X XXIII.

42. On the computation of years of the Arabs ; 23 pages; see Chap. XXXIV.

Comparing this list of contents with the text in K20, as published in Westergaard’s lithographed facsimile edition, it appears that TD contains, not only fifteen extra chapters, but also very much additional matter in the chapters corresponding to Chaps. I, II, V, XVI, XXVIII, and XXXI of the translation in this volume, and smaller additions to those corresponding to Chaps. III, IV, XV, XVII, and XXXIV. The arrangement of the chapters in TD is also much more methodical than in the Indian MSS., especially with regard to Chaps. XX, XXI, XXII, and XXVII, which evidently occupy their proper position in TD; and so far as Chap. XX is concerned, this arrangement is confirmed by the insertion of its first sentence between Chaps. XIII and XIV in the Indian MSS., which indicates that the whole chapter must have been in that position in some older copy. In fact, the Indian MSS. must probably be now regarded merely as collections of

1 The meaning is doubtful and must depend upon the context.

2 This chapter begins with a translation of the first fargard of the Vendidad, and concludes with an account of buildings erected by various kings.

In fact, the Indian MSS. must probably be now regarded merely as collections of

1 The meaning is doubtful and must depend upon the context.

2 This chapter begins with a translation of the first fargard of the Vendidad, and concludes with an account of buildings erected by various kings.

3 Containing an account of the kings reigning in the various millenniums, and concluding with prophecies similar to those in the Bahman Yast,

XXXVill PAHLAVI TEXTS.

extracts from the original work; this has been long suspected from the fragmentary character of the text they contain, but it could hardly be proved until a more complete text had been discovered.

Whether TD may be considered as a copy of the text as it stood originally, or merely of an after recension of the work, can hardly be determined with certainty until the whole contents of the manuscript have been carefully examined ; it is, therefore, to be hoped that its owner will be induced to publish a lithographed facsimile of the whole, after the manner of Westergaard’s edition. So far as appears in the lengthy and valuable extracts, with which he has kindly favoured me, no decided difference of style can be detected between the additional matter and the text hitherto known, nor any inconsistencies more striking than such as sometimes occur in the Indian MSS. On the other hand, it will be noticed that heading No. 25 in the list of contents seems to be misplaced, which is an argument against the text being in its original state; and the style of the Bundahis is so much less involved and obscure than that of the Selections of Zad-sparam (see Appendix to the Bundahis), which treat of some of the same subjects, that it may be fairly suspected of having been written originally in a different age. But the writer of the text, as it appears in TD, calls Zad-sparam! one of his contemporaries (see Chap. XX XIII, 10, 11 of the translation); it may, therefore, be suspected that he merely re-edited an old text with some additions of his own, which, however, are rather difficult to distinguish from the rest. No stress can be laid upon peculiarities of orthography in TD, as they are, in all likelihood, attributable to copyists long subsequent to Z4d-sparam’s contemporaries.

Any future translator of the Bundahis will probably have to take the text in TD as the nearest ‘accessible approach to the original work ; but the present translation is based, as heretofore, upon the text in K20, corrected in many places from M6, but with due care not to adopt

‘ He writes the name Zad-sparham,

INTRODUCTION. XXXIX

readings which seem due to the illegibility of the original from which M6 was copied, as already explained. In Chaps. XXVIII, XXIX, XXXI, XXXII, and XXXIII, however, TD has been taken as a principal authority, merely checked by K20, and having its additional passages carefully indicated; and in Chap. XX XI, K20b has also been consulted.

In Chaps. XXVIII, XXIX, XXXI, XXXII, and XXXIII, however, TD has been taken as a principal authority, merely checked by K20, and having its additional passages carefully indicated; and in Chap. XX XI, K20b has also been consulted.

Since the present translation was printed, any lingering doubts, as to the genuineness of the text in TD, have been, in a great measure, dissipated by the discovery that a small fragment! of an old MS. of the Bundahis, which has long been in Europe, is evidently a portion of a text of similar character to TD, and of exactly the same extent. This small fragment consists of two folios belonging to an old MS. brought from Persia by the late Professor Westergaard in 1843-44, and which is evidently the codex mentioned by him in the preface to his Zend-Avesta, p. 8, note 3. These two folios, which are numbered 130 and 131 in Persian words, now form the commencement of this old mutilated MS., of which the first 129 folios have been lost. They contain very little more than one page of the Bundahis text, namely, the last sentences of the last chapter (corresponding to Bund. XXXIV, 7-9), followed by a colophon occupying less than two pages. This fragment of the text contains some additional details not found in the Indian MSS., as well as a few other variations of no great importance. It may be translated as follows :—

‘[. . . . Sahm? was in those reigns of AQz6b6, Kavad, and Mantskihar.] Kai-Kayds, till 42s going to the sky, seventy-five years, and after that, seventy-five years, altogether a hundred and fifty years; Kai-Khisrébé sixty

1 I am indebted to Professor G. Hoffmann, of Kiel, for directing my attention to this fragment, and also for kindly sending me a facsimile of it. It hdd been recognised as a portion of the Bundahis by Dr. Andreas some years ago, and probably by the owner of the MS., the late Professor Westergaard, long before that.

? See Bund. XXXI, 27. As the beginning of this sentence is lost, its translation is uncertain. Details not found in K2o and M6 are here enclosed in brackets, and words added by the translator to complete the sense are printed in italics.

xl PAHLAVI TEXTS.

years; Kai-Léhardsp a hundred and twenty years; Kai- Vistasp, till the coming of the religion, thirty years; [total (mar) one thousand years'. Then the millennium reign came to Capricornus, and Zaratihast? the Spitaman, with tidings (pétkhambarih) from the creator Adharmazd, came to King Vistasp ; and Vistasp was king,]| after receiving the religion, ninety years.

‘Vohdman, son of Spend-dad, a hundred and twelve years; Hamai, daughter of Vohiman, thirty years; D4&rdi, son of Kihar-Azdd, that is, of the daughter of Vohiman, twelve years; D4arai, son of Darai, fourteen years; and Alexander the Riman® fourteen years. ©

‘The Ask4nians should bear the title in an uninterrupted sovereignty two hundred and so many‘ years; and Artakhshatar, son of Papak, and the number of the SAsdnians dear it four hundred and sixty years, until the withering Arabs obtained a place® [as far as the year 447 of the Persians ; now ?¢ zs the Persian year 527]°.’

The colophon, which follows, states that the MS. was finished on the thirteenth day of the ninth month A.Y. 936 (A. D. 1567), and was written by Mitré-ap4n, son of Anéshakrdban, soz of Ristam. This MS. is, therefore, of nearly the same age as TD; but there has been no opportunity of collating the fragment of it, which is still extant, with the corresponding portion of TD. That it was a MS. of the same character as TD (that is, one containing the same text as K20, but with much additional matter) appears clearly

! From the beginning of Frédiin’s reign, when the millennium of Sagittarius commenced,

* The usual way of spelling Zaratist in old MSS., excepting K20 and a few others.

3 Here written correctly Alaksandar-i Ardmaf,

* Reading va and; as the final letter is d and not d it cannot be read nAvad as a variant of navad, ‘ninety.’

5 The words are, vad ginak ayaft khfské-i Taztkand, but the exact meaning is rather doubtful.

* The last date is doubtful, as the Pahlavi text gives the ciphers only for ‘five and twenty-seven,’ omitting that for ‘hundred.’ These Persian dates must either have been added by some former copyist, or Chap. XXXIV must have been appended to the Bundahis at a later date than the ninth century, when the preceding genealogical chapters were probably added to the original work (see p. xliii). ‘The Persian year 527 was a. D. 1158.

INTRODUCTION. xli

XXXIV must have been appended to the Bundahis at a later date than the ninth century, when the preceding genealogical chapters were probably added to the original work (see p. xliii). ‘The Persian year 527 was a. D. 1158.

INTRODUCTION. xli

from the fragment translated above. Regarding its original extent, it is possible to make an approximate estimate, by calculating the quantity of text which the 129 lost folios must have contained, from the quantity actually existing on folio 130. According to this calculation, the original extent of the text of the Bundahis in this MS. must have been very nearly 30,000 words; and it is remarkable that a similar calculation of the extent of the text in TD, based upon the actual contents of ten folios out of 103, gives precisely the same result. This coincidence is a strong argument in favour of the absolute identity of the text lost from Westergaard’s MS. with that actually existing in TD; it shows, further, that the original extent of the Bundahis may now be safely estimated at 30,000 words, instead of the 13,000 contained in K20 when that MS. was complete. That this fragment belonged to a separate MS,, and is not the folio missing from the end of TD, is shown not only by its containing more of the text than is said to be missing, but also by the first folio of the fragment being numbered 130, instead of 103, and by its containing fifteen lines to the page, instead of seventeen, as would be necessary in order to correspond with TD. / Regarding the age of the Bundahis many opinions have been hazarded, but as they have been chiefly based upon minute details of supposed internal evidence evolved from each writer’s special misinterpretation of the text, it is unnecessary to detail them. The only indication of its age that can be fairly obtained from internal evidence, is that the text of the Bundahis could not have been completed, in its present form, until after the Muhammadan conquest of Persia (A.D. 651). This is shown not only by the statements that the sovereignty ‘went to the Arabs’ (Chap. XXXIV, 9), that ‘now, ¢hrough the invasion of the Arabs, they (the negroes) are again diffused through the country of Iran’ (Chap. XXIII, 3), and that ‘whoever keeps the year by the revolution of the moon mingles summer with winter avd winter with summer’ (Chap. XXV, 19, referring probably to the Muhammadan year not corresponding with the seasons), but also, more positively

xlii PAHLAVI TEXTS.

by the following translation of an extract from Chap. 39 in TD :—

XXV, 19, referring probably to the Muhammadan year not corresponding with the seasons), but also, more positively

xlii PAHLAVI TEXTS.

by the following translation of an extract from Chap. 39 in TD :—

‘And when the sovereignty came to Yazdakard he exercised sovereignty twenty years, and then the Arabs rushed into the country of Iran in great multitude. Yazdakard did not prosper (14 s4kaft6) in warfare with them, and went to Khirds4n and Tirkistan to seek horses, men, and assistance, and was slain by them there. The son of Yazdakard went to the Hinds and fetched an army of champions ; before it came, conducted unto Khfrds4n, that army of champions dispersed. The country of Iran remained with the Arabs, and their own irreligious law was propagated by them, and many ancestral customs were destroyed ; the religion of the Mazdayasnians was weakened, and washing of corpses, burial of corpses, and eating of dead matter were put in practice. From the original creation until this day evil more grievous than this Aas not happened, for through their evil deeds—on account of want, foreign habits (Aniranih), hostile acts, bad decrees, and bad religion—ruin, want, and other evils have taken lodgment.’

None of these passages could have been written before the Muhammadan conquest; but the writer, or editor, of the text as it appears in TD, supplies the means of approximating much more closely to the date of his work, in a passage in Chap. 41 of TD, in which he mentions the names of several of his contemporaries (see Chap. XX XIII, 10, 11), Among these, as already noticed, he mentions ‘Zad-sparham son of Yad4n-Yim,’ who must have been the writer of the Selections of Z4d-sparam, a translation of which is added as an appendix to the Bundahis in this volume. This writer was the brother of Mandskihar son of Yd4n-Yim, who wrote the Dadistan-i Dinik!, and from colophons found in certain MSS. of the Dadistan (which will be more particularly described in the next section of this introduction) it appears that this Mandssihar was

1 It is quite possible that Mandssthar was also the reviser of the Bundahis; see the note on Dadakth-i Ashévahisté in Chap. XXXIII, ro,

eee

INTRODUCTION. xlili

XXXIII, ro,

eee

INTRODUCTION. xlili

high-priest of Pars and Kirm4n in A. Y. 250 (A.D, 881). This date may, therefore, be taken as a very close approximation to the time at which the Bundahis probably assumed the form we find in TD; but that MS., having been written about 650 years later, can hardly have been copied direct from the original. Whether that original was merely a new edition of an older Pahlavi work, as may be suspected from the simplicity of its language, or whether it was first translated, for the most part, from the Avesta of the Damdad Nask, in the ninth century, we have no means of determining with certainty. Judging, however, from Chap. I, 1, the original Bundahis probably ended with the account of the resurrection (Chap. XXX), and the extra chapters, containing genealogical and chronological details (matters not mentioned in Chap. I, 1), together with all allusions to the Arabs, were probably added by the revising editor in the ninth century. The last, or chronological, chapter may even have been added at a later date.

A Gugarti translation, or rather paraphrase, of the Bundahis was published in 1819 by Edal Darab Jamshéd JamAsp Asa, and a revised edition of it was published by Peshutan Rustam in 18771, In the preface to the latter edition it is stated that the translator made use of two MSS., one being a copy of a manuscript written in Iran in A.Y. 776 by Rustamji Meherwanji Margaban Sheheriar 2, and the other a MS. written in India by Dastar Jamshédji Jamaspji in a. y. 11393. It is also mentioned that he was four years at work upon his translation. The editor of the new edition states that he has laboured to

! Bundehes ketab, ine dunia-ni awal-thi te 4kher sudhi pedaes-ni sahruat-ni hakikat ; bigi-var sudh4rine skapAwan4r, Peshutan bin Rustam; Mumbai, 1877.

? There is no doubt whatever that the writer of the preface is referring to M6, although his description is incorrect. M6 was written at Bhrok in India 4.¥. 766 by Pésh6tan Ram KAmdfn Shaharyar Néryésang Shahmard Shaharyar Bahram Afdirmazdy&r Ramyar; but some portion of it (probably not the Bundahis) was copied from a MS. written a. y. 618 (a.p. 1249) by Rastam Mihirap4n Marzapan Dahisn-ayar, who must be the copyist mentioned in the preface to the Gugarati translation.

* This is probably the copy derived from M6, and mentioned in p. xxx as being now in the library of Dastdr JamAspji Minochiharji,

xliv PAHLAVI TEXTS.

improve the work by collecting all the further information he could find, qn the various subjects, in many other Pahlavi works. The result of all this labour is not so much a mere translation of the Bundahis, as a larger work upon the same subject, or a paraphrase more methodically arranged, as may be seen from the following summary of its contents :—

The result of all this labour is not so much a mere translation of the Bundahis, as a larger work upon the same subject, or a paraphrase more methodically arranged, as may be seen from the following summary of its contents :—

The headings of the fifty-nine chapters, which form the first part of the work, are:—Ahuramazd’s covenant, account of the sky, of the first twelve things created, of Mount Alborg, of the twelve signs of the zodiac, of the stars, of the soul, of the first practices adopted by the creatures of the evil spirit Ahereman, of Ahereman’s first breaking into the sky, of Ahereman’s coming upon the primeval ox, of Ahereman’s arrival in the fire, of Ahereman’s coming upon Gaiomard, of the coming of Ahuramazd and Ahereman upon Gaiomard at the time of his creation, of the lustre residing in both spirits; further account of the arrangement of the sky, another account of all the mountains, of depressions for water, of great and small rivers, of the eighteen rivers of fresh water, of the seven external and seven internal liquids in the bodies of men, of the period in which water falling on the earth arrives at its destination, of the three spiritual rivers, of the star Tehestar’s destroying the noxious creatures which Ahereman had distributed over the earth, of the prophet Zarathost’s asking the creator Ahuramazd how long these noxious creatures will remain in the latter millenniums, of driving the poison of the noxious creatures out of the earth, of the divisions of the land, of the creator Ahuramazd’s placing valiant stars as club-bearers over the heads of the demons, of all the things produced by the passing away of the primeval ox, of the 282 species of beasts and birds, of the bird named Kamros, of the bird named Karsapad and the hollow of Vargamkard, of the birds who are enemies opposed to the demons and fiends, of the bitter and sweet plants among the fifty-five kinds of grain and twelve kinds of herbs, of the flowers of the thirty days, of the revolution of the sun and moon and stars, and how

INTRODUCTION. xlv

xlv

night falls, and how the day becomes light, of the seven regions of the earth, of depressions, of the creatures of the sea, of the flow and ebb of the tide, of the three-legged ass, of the Gahambars, of Rapithvan, of the revolution of the seasons, of the production of mankind from the passing away of Gaiomard, of the production of offspring from the seed of men, of all fires, of all the clever work produced in the reign of King Jamshed and the production of the ape and bear, of the production of the Abyssinian and negro from Zohak, of the splendour and glory of King Jamshed, of the soul of Kersdsp, of Kersdsp’s soul being the first to rise, of the names of the prophet Zarathost’s pedigree, of his going out into the world, of his children, of the orders given by Ahereman to the demons when the creator Ahuramazd created the creatures, of the weeping and raging of the evil spirit Ahereman, of the weeping of the demon of Wrath in the presence of Ahereman when the prophet Zarathost brought the religion, of the computation of twelve thousand years.

The headings of the thirteen chapters, which form the second part, are: — Account of the last millenniums, of the appearance of Hosedar-bAmi, of his going out into the world, of the appearance of Hosedar-mah, of Sosios, of the fifty-seven years, of giving the light of the sun to men on the day of the resurrection, of the rising again of the whole of mankind on that day, of the resurrection, of the means of resurrection, of the annihilation of the evil spirit Ahereman and the demons and fiends on the day of resurrection, of the creator Ahuramazd’s making the earth and sky one after the resurrection, of the proceedings of all creatures after the resurrection.

The third part contains an abstract of the contents of the hundred chapters of the Sad-dar Bundahis, and concludes with an account of the ceremonial formula practised when tying the kusti or sacred thread-girdle.

xlvi PAHLAVI TEXTS.

4. THE SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM.

In some manuscripts of the Dadistan-i Dinik the ninetytwo questions and answers, which usually go by that name, are preceded and followed by Pahlavi texts which are each nearly equal in extent to the questions and answers, and treat of a variety of subjects, somewhat in the manner of a Rivayat. Of the texts which follow the questions and answers the following are the principal :—

Of the texts which follow the questions and answers the following are the principal :—

Incantations for fever, &c.; indications afforded by natural marks on the body; about the hamistak4n (‘the ever-stationary,’ or neutral state of future existence) and the different grades in heaven; copy of an epistle! from Herbad MA4ndsfihar son of YOd4n-Yim?, which he addressed to the good people of Sirkan %, about the decisions pronounced by Herbad Z4d-sparam son of Yddan-Yim ; copy of a letter from Herbad MA4ndsfihar son of Yddan- Yim to his brother, Herbad Z4d-sparam, on the same subject, and replying to a letter of his written from Nivshapthar; copy of a notice by Herbad Mandskihar, son’ of Yidan-Yim and high-priest (rad) of Pars and Kirman, of the necessity of fifteenfold ablution on account of grievous sin, written and sealed in the third month A.y. 250 (A.D. 881); memoranda and writings called ‘Selections of Zad-sparam son of YOd4n-Yim,’ the first part treating of many of the same subjects as the Bundahis, together

This long epistle contains one statement which is important in its bearing upon the age of certain Pahlavi writings. It states that Nishahpfhar was in the council of Anéshak-riibén Khisré, king of kings and son of Kavad, also that he was Mobad of Mobads and a commentator. Now this is the name of a commentator quoted in the Pahlavi Vend. III, 151, V, 112, VIII, 64, and very frequently in the Nfrangist&n ; it is also a title applied to Arda-Virf (see AV. J, 35). These facts seem to limit the age of the last revision of the Pahlavi Vendidad, and of the composition of the Pahlavi Nirangistén and Ard4-Virafnamak to the time of King Khfisré Néshirvan (a.p. 531-579). The statement depends, of course, upon the accuracy of a tradition three centuries old, as this epistle must have been written about a. p. 880.

3 Some Parsis read this name Géshnajam, others Yfid4n-dam.

* Mr. Tehmuras Dinshawji thinks this is the place now called Sfrgan, about thirty parasangs south of Kirman, on the road to Bandar Abbis, which is no doubt the case.

INTRODUCTION, xl vii

with legends regarding Zaratdst and his family ; the second part about the formation of men out of body, life, and soul; and the third part about the details of the renovation of the universe. The last part of these Selections is incomplete in all known MSS., and is followed by some fragments of a further series of questions and answers regarding the omniscient wisdom, the evil spirit, Kangdez, the enclosure formed by Yim, &c.

The last part of these Selections is incomplete in all known MSS., and is followed by some fragments of a further series of questions and answers regarding the omniscient wisdom, the evil spirit, Kangdez, the enclosure formed by Yim, &c.

A translation of so much of the Selections of Z4d-sparam as treats of the same subjects as the Bundahis, has been added as an appendix to the translation of that work in this volume, because the language used in these Selections seems to have an important bearing upon the question of the age of the Bundahis. The time when the Selections themselves were written is fixed with considerable precision by the date (A. D. 881), when their author's brother, Mandskihar, issued his public notice, as mentioned above. But Zad-sparam uses, in many places, precisely the same words as those employed in the Bundahis, interspersed with much matter written in a more declamatory style; it is, therefore, evident that he had the Bundahis before him to quote from, and that work must consequently have been written either by one of his contemporaries, or by an older writer. So far the Selections merely confirm the information already obtained more directly from TD (see p. xxxviii); but the involved style of their language seems to prove more than this. In fact, in none of the text of the DAadistan-i Dinik and its accompaniments is there much of the simplicity of style and directness of purpose which are the chief characteristics of most of the language of the Bundahis. So far, therefore, as style can be considered a mark of age, rather than a mere personal peculiarity of a contemporary writer, the contrast between the straightforward language of the Bundahis and the laboured sentences of M4ndskihar and Z4d-sparam, sons of Yid4n-Yim, tends to prove that the bulk of the Bundahis was already an old work in their days, and was probably saved from oblivion through their writings or influence. That this original Bundahis or Zand- 4kas was an abridged translation of the Avcsta of the

xl viii PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Damdad Nask appears pretty evident from Z4d-sparam’s remarks in Chap. IX, 1, 16 of his Selections.

That this original Bundahis or Zand- 4kas was an abridged translation of the Avcsta of the

xl viii PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Damdad Nask appears pretty evident from Z4d-sparam’s remarks in Chap. IX, 1, 16 of his Selections.

The first part of these Selections consists of ‘sayings about the meeting of the beneficent and evil spirits,’ and the first portion of these ‘sayings’ (divided into eleven chapters in the translation) is chiefly a paraphrase of Chaps. I-XVII of the Bundahis (omitting Chaps. II, V, and XVI). It describes the original state of the two spirits, their meeting and covenant, with a paraphrase of the Ahdnavar formula; the production of the first creatures, including time; the incursion of the evil spirit and his temporary success in deranging the creation, with the reason why he was unable to destroy the primitive man for thirty years ; followed by the seven contests he carried on with the sky, water, earth, plants, animals, man, and fire, respectively, detailing how each of these creations was modified in consequence of the incursion of the evil spirit. In the account of the first of these contests the Pahlavi translation of one stanza in the Gathas is quoted verbatim, showing that the same Pahlavi version of the Yasna was used in the ninth century as now exists. The remainder of these ‘sayings,’ having no particular connection with the Bundahis, has not been translated.

With regard to the Pahlavi text of the Selections, the present translator has been compelled to rely upon a single manuscript of the D4distén-i Dinik, brought by Westergaard from Kirman’ in 1843, and now No. 35 of the collection of Ayesta and Pahlavi MSS. in the University Library at Kopenhagen; it may, therefore, be called K35. This MS. is incomplete, having lost nearly one-third of its original bulk, but still contains 181 folios of large octavo size, written fifteen to seventeen lines to the page; the first seventy-one folios of the work have been lost, and about thirty-five folios are also missing from the end; but the whole of the ninetytwo questions and answers, together with one-third of the

1 That is, so far as the late Professor Westergaard could remember in 1878, when he kindly lent me the MS. for collation with my copy of the text, already obtained from more recent MSS. in Bombay, the best of which turned out to be a copy of K35.

INTRODUCTION. xlix

for collation with my copy of the text, already obtained from more recent MSS. in Bombay, the best of which turned out to be a copy of K35.

INTRODUCTION. xlix

texts which usually precede them, and three-fifths of those which usually follow them, are still remaining. This MS. has lost its date, but a copy! of it exists in Bombay (written when it was complete) which ends with a colophon dated A. Y. 941 (A.D.1572), as detailed in p. xxxiii; this may either be the actual date of that copy, or it may have been merely copied from K35, which cannot be much older. The latter supposition appears the more probable, as this colophon seems to be left incomplete by the loss of the last folio in the Bombay copy, and may, therefore, have been followed by another colophon giving a later date.

This copy of K35 was, no doubt, originally complete, but has lost many of its folios in the course of time; most of the missing text has been restored from another MS., but there are still twelve or more folios missing from the latter part of the work; it contains, however, all that portion of the Selections which is translated in this volume, but has, of course, no authority independent of K35. The other MS. in Bombay, from which some of the missing text was recovered, is in the library of Dastdr JamAspji Minochiharji ; it is a modern copy, written at different periods from forty to sixty years ago, and is incomplete, as it contains only one-fourth of the texts which usually follow the ninety-two questions and answers, and includes no portion of the Selections of Zad-sparam.

Another MS. of the Dadistan-i Dinik and its accompaniments, written also at Kirm4n, but two generations earlier than K35 (say, about A. D. 1530), has been already mentioned (see p. xxxiii). It is said still to contain 227 folios, though its first seventy folios are missing ; it must, therefore, begin very near the same place as K35, but extends much further, as it supplies about half the text still missing from the

' The fact of its being a copy of K35 is proved by strong circumstantial evidence. In the first place, it contains several false readings which are clearly due to mis-shapen letters and accidental marks in K35, so that it is evidently descended from that MS. But it is further proved to have been copied direct from that MS., by the last words in thirty-two of its pages having been marked with interlined circles in K35 ; the circle having been the copyist’s mark for finding his place, when beginning a new page after turning over his folios.

[5]

1 PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Bombay copy of K35, though it has lost about fourteen folios at the end. This MS. must be either the original from which K35 was copied, or an independent authority of equal value, but it has not been available for settling the text of the Selections for the present translation. |

5. THE BAHMAN YAST.

This MS. must be either the original from which K35 was copied, or an independent authority of equal value, but it has not been available for settling the text of the Selections for the present translation. |

5. THE BAHMAN YAST.

The Bahman Yast, usually called the ‘Zand of the Vohdman Yast,’ professes to be a prophetical work, in which Adharmazd gives Zaratdst an account of what was to happen to the Iranian nation and religion in the future.

It begins with an introduction (Chap. I) which states that, according to the Stidgar Nask, Zaratdst having asked Atharmazd for immortality, was supplied temporarily with omniscient wisdom, and had a vision of a tree with four branches of different metals which were explained to him as symbolical of four different periods, the times of Vist4sp, of Ardakhshir the Kaydnian, of Khasré Néshirvan, and of certain demons or idolators who were to appear at the end of a thousand years. It states, further, that the commentaries of the VohQman, Horvadad, and Astad Yasts mentioned the heretic Mazdak, and that Khisr6é Néshirvan summoned a council of high-priests and commentators, and ordered them not to conceal these Yasts, but to teach the commentary only among their own relations.

The text then proceeds (Chap. ITI) to give the details of the commentary on the Vohfiman Yast as follows :—Zaratast, having again asked Adharmazd for immortality, is refused, but is again supplied with omniscient wisdom for a week, during which time he sees, among other things, a tree with seven branches of different metals, which are again explained to him as denoting the seven ages of the religion, its six ages of triumph in the reigns of Vistasp, of Ardakhshir the Kaydnian, of one of the Askanian kings, of Ardakhshir Papakan and Shahpar I and II, of Vahram Gér, and of Khisr6 Noéshirvan, and its seventh age of adversity when

INTRODUCTION. li

Iran is to be invaded from the east by hordes of demons or idolators with dishevelled hair, who are to work much mischief, so as to destroy the greater part of the nation and mislead the rest, until the religion becomes nearly extinct. The details of this mischief, written in a tone of lamentation, constitute the greater part of the text, which also notices that the sovereignty will pass from the Arabs, Ramans, and these leathern-belted demons (Tirks) to other Tarks and non-Tfranians who are worse than themselves.

The details of this mischief, written in a tone of lamentation, constitute the greater part of the text, which also notices that the sovereignty will pass from the Arabs, Ramans, and these leathern-belted demons (Tirks) to other Tarks and non-Tfranians who are worse than themselves.

Distressed at this narrative Zaratist asks Atharmazd (Chap. III, 1) how the religion is to be restored, and these demons destroyed? He is informed that, in the course of time, other fiends with red banners, red weapons, and red hats, who seem to be Christians, will appear in the northwest, and will advance either to the Arvand (Tigris) or the Euphrates, driving back the former demons who will assemble all their allies to a great conflict, one of the three great battles of the religions of the world, in which the wicked will be so utterly destroyed that none will be left to pass into the next millennium.

Zaratdst enquires (III, 12) how so many can perish, and is informed that, after the demons with dishevelled hair appear, Hishédar, the first of the last three apostles, is born near Lake Frazdan; and when he begins to confer with Adharmazd a Kay4n prince is born in the direction of Kinistan (Samarkand), who is called Vahram the Vargavand, and when he is thirty years old he collects a large army of Hindu (Bactrian) and int (Samarkandian) troops, and advances into Iran, where he is reinforced by a numerous army of Iranian warriors, and defeats the demon races with immense slaughter, in the great conflict already mentioned, so that there will be only one man left to a thousand women.

The writer then proceeds to describe the supernatural agencies employed to produce this result: how the evil spirit (III, 24) comes to the assistance of the demonworshippers ; how Adharmazd sends his angels to Kangdez, to summon Péshyétand, the immortal son of Vistasp, with his disciples, to re-establish the sacred fires and restore the

lii PAHLAVI TEXTS.

religious ceremonies ; and how the angels assist them against the evil spirits, so that Vahram the Vargavand is enabled to destroy the fiendish races, as already detailed, and Péshyétani becomes supreme high-priest of the Iranian world.

Finally, the writer gives some details regarding the missions of the last three apostles, returning for that purpose (III, 44) to the birth of Hdshédar, the first of the three, whose millennium witnesses both the invasion and the destruction of the fiendish races. Hfshédar proves his apostolic authority, to the satisfaction of Vargavand and the people, by making the sun stand still for ten days and nights. His mission is to ‘bring the creatures back to their proper state;’ and it is not till near the end of his millennium that Péshyétand appears, as before described. As this millennium begins with the invasion of the fiendish races and the fall of the Sasanian dynasty, it must have terminated in the seventeenth century, unless it was to last more than a thousand years. A very brief account is then given of the millennium of Hdshédar-mah, the second of the three apostles, whose mission is to make ‘the creatures more progressive’ and to destroy ‘the fiend of serpent origin’ (Az-i Dah4k). During his millennium (which appears to be now in progress) mankind become so skilled in medicine that they do not readily die; but owing to their toleration of heretics the evil spirit once more attains power, and releases Az-i Dahak, from his confinement in Mount Dimavand, to work evil in the world, till Adharmazd sends his angels to rouse Keresdsp the Samén, who rises from his trance and kills Az-i Dahak with his club at the end of the millennium. Afterwards, Sdshyans, the last apostle, appears to ‘make the creatures again pure;’ when the resurrection takes place and the future existence commences.

Whether this text, as now extant, be the original commentary or zand of the Vohiman Yast admits of doubt, since it appears to quote that commentary (Chap. II, 1) as an authority for its statements; it is, therefore, most probably, only an epitome of the original commentary. Such an epitome would naturally quote many passages verbatim

INTRODUCTION. liti

II, 1) as an authority for its statements; it is, therefore, most probably, only an epitome of the original commentary. Such an epitome would naturally quote many passages verbatim

INTRODUCTION. liti

from the original work, which ought to bear traces of translation from an Avesta text, as its title zand implies a Pahlavi translation from the Avesta (see p. x). There are, in fact, many such traces in this epitome, as indicated by the numerous sentences beginning with a verb, the mode of addressing Adharmazd, the quotation of different opinions from various commentators, and other minor peculiarities. Some of these might be the result of careful imitation of other commentaries, but it seems more likely that they are occasioned by literal translation from an original Avesta text. In speculating, therefore, upon the contents of the Bahman Yast it is necessary to remember that we are nfost probably dealing with a composite work, whose statements -‘may be referred to the three different ages of the Avesta original, the Pahlavi translation and commentary, and the Pahlavi epitome of the latter; and that this last form of the text is the only old version now extant.

With regard to the age of the work we have the external evidence that a copy of it exists in a manuscript (K20) written about five hundred years ago, and that this copy is evidently descended from older manuscripts as it contains several clerical blunders incompatible with any idea of its being the original manuscript, as witness the omissions noted in Chaps. II, 10, 13, 14, 22, 27, 45, III, 30, 32, the misplacement of II, 18, and many miswritings of single words. Owing to the threefold character of the work, already noticed, the internal evidence of its age can only apply to its last recension in the form of an epitome, as an oriental editor (to say nothing of others) generally considers himself at liberty to alter and add to his text, if he does not understand it, or thinks he can improve it. That this liberty has been freely exercised, with regard to these professed prophecies, is shown by the identification of the four prophetical ages of the Stidgar Nask in the first chapter of the Bahman Yast being different from that given in the Dinkard, The Dinkard quotes the Stddgar Nask (that is, its Pahlavi version) as identifying the iron age with some period of religious indifference subsequent to the time of Atar6-p4d son of M4raspend, the supreme high-priest and

liv PAHLAVI TEXTS.

prime ministerof ShahpdrII (A.D. 309-379); but the Bahman Yast (Chap. I, 5) quotes the Nask as identifying the same age with the reign of an idolatrous race subsequent to the time of Khfsr6é Néshirvan (A.D. 531-579). This example is sufficient to show that the compiler of the extant epitome of the Bahman Yast commentary largely availed himself of his editorial license, and it indicates the difficulty of distinguishing his statements from those of the former editors. At the same time it proves that the epitome could not have been compiled till after Iran had been overrun by a foreign race subsequent to the reign of Khdsré Néshirvan. It is remarkable that the compiler does not mention any later Sasanian king, that he does not allude to Muhammadanism, and speaks of the foreign invaders as Turanians and Christians, only mentioning Arabs incidentally in later times ; at the same time the foreign invasion (which lasts a thousand years) is of too permanent a character to allow of its having reference merely to the troublous times of Noéshirvan’s successor.

Perhaps the most reasonable hypotheses that can be founded upon these facts are, first, that the original zand or commentary of the Bahman Yast was written and translated from the Avesta in the latter part of the reign of Khdsré Néshirvan, or very shortly afterwards, which would account for no later king being mentioned by name; and, secondly, that the epitome now extant was compiled by some writer who lived so long after the Arab invasion that the details of their inroad had become obscured by the more recent successes of Turanian rulers, such as the Ghaznavis and Salgfigqs of the eleventh and twelfth centuries. It is hardly possible that the epitomist could have lived as late as the time of Gingiz Khan, the great Mongol conqueror (A.D. 1206-1227), as that would bring him within 150 years of the date of the extant manuscript of his work, which has no appearance of being an immediate copy of the original ; but the rule of the Salgdqs would certainly have afforded him sufficient materials for his long description of the iron age. The Avesta of the Bahman Yast was probably compiled from older sources (like the rest of the Avesta) during

a ee

INTRODUCTION. lv

the reigns of the earlier Sasanian monarchs; but it was, no doubt, very different in its details from the epitome of its commentary which still exists.

The Avesta of the Bahman Yast was probably compiled from older sources (like the rest of the Avesta) during

a ee

INTRODUCTION. lv

the reigns of the earlier Sasanian monarchs; but it was, no doubt, very different in its details from the epitome of its commentary which still exists.

These hypotheses, regarding the threefold origin of the present form of this Yast, derive some confirmation from the inconsistencies in its chronological details ; especially those relating to the periods of the invaders’ reign and of Hishédar’s birth. The Zoroastrians have for ages been expecting the appearance of Hdshédar, the first of their last three apostles, but have always had to postpone their expectations from time to time, like the Jews and other interpreters of prophecy; so that they are still looking forward into the future for his advent, although his millennium has long since expired according to the chronology adopted in the Bahman Yast. This chronology, of course, represents the expectations of Zoroastrians in past times, and seems to express three different opinions, First, we have the statement that the last great battle of the demonraces is to take place at the end of Zaratdst’s millennium (see Chap. III, 9), when the wicked will be so destroyed (compare III, 22, 23) that none will pass into the next millennium (III, 11), which is that of Hdshédar (III, 43). And that the reign of evil is to precede the end of Zaratist’s millennium is evidently assumed also in Chap. II, 41, 63. Such opinions may reasonably be traced to the original Avesta writer, who must have expected only a short reign of evil to arise and fall near the latter end of Zaratist’s millennium, which was still far in the future, and to be followed by the appearance of Hashédar to restore the ‘good’ religion. Secondly, we are told (I, 5, II, 22, 24, 31) that the invasion of the demon-races, with its attendant evils, is to take place when Zaratist’s millennium is ended ; on their appearance Hashédar is born (III, 13), and when he is thirty years old (compare III, 14 with III, 44) Vahram the Vargavand is also born, who at the age of thirty (III, 17) advances into Iran with an innumerable army to destroy the invaders. Such statements may be attributed to the original Pahlavi translator and commentator who, writing about A.D. 570-590, would have before his eyes the disastrous

\vi PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Such statements may be attributed to the original Pahlavi translator and commentator who, writing about A.D. 570-590, would have before his eyes the disastrous

\vi PAHLAVI TEXTS.

reign of Adharmazd IV, the son and successor of Khasré Néshirvan, together with the prowess of the famous Persian general Bahram XK 6pin, which drove out all invaders. This writer evidently expected the reign of the demon-races to last less than a century, but still at some period in the near future; merely illustrating his theme by details of the disasters and wars of his own time. Thirdly, we find it stated (III, 44) that Hashédar will be born in 1600, which seems to mean the sixteen hundredth year of Zaratdst’s millennium, or six hundredth of his own (say A.D. 1193- 1235), also that the reign of the demon-races is to last a thousand years (III, 34), and that Péshyétand does not come to restore the religion till near the end of the millennium (III, 51); it also appears (III, 49) that Vargavand occupies a prominent position when Hashédar comes from his conference with Atharmazd at thirty years of age (III, 44, 45). Such details were probably inserted by the compiler of the epitome, who had to admit the facts that the reign of the demon-races had already lasted for centuries, and that Hfshédar had not yet appeared. To get over these difficulties he probably adopted the opinions current in his day, and postponed the advent of Hdshédar till the beginning of the next century in his millennium, and put off the destruction of the wicked, as a more hopeless matter, till near the end of the millennium. Both these periods are now long since past, and the present Zoroastrians have still to postpone the fulfilment of the prophecies connected with their last three apostles, or else to understand them in a less literal fashion than heretofore.

For the Pahlavi text of the Bahman Yast the translator has to rely upon the single old manuscript K20, already described (p. xxvii), in which it occupies the 134 folios immediately following the Bundahis ; these folios are much worn, and a few words have been torn off some of them, but nearly all of these missing words can be restored by aid of the Pazand version. The Pahlavi text is also found in the modern copies of K20 at Paris and Kopenhagen, but these copies (P7 and K21) have no authority independent of K20. In India this text has long been exceedingly rare,

INTRODUCTION. Ivii

and whether any copy of it exists, independent of K20, is doubtful.

The Pahlavi text is also found in the modern copies of K20 at Paris and Kopenhagen, but these copies (P7 and K21) have no authority independent of K20. In India this text has long been exceedingly rare,

INTRODUCTION. Ivii

and whether any copy of it exists, independent of K20, is doubtful.

The Pazand version is more common in Parsi libraries, but contains a very imperfect text. Of this version two modern copies have been consulted; one of these occupies fols. 38-62 of a small manuscript, No. 22 of the Haug collection in the State Library at Munich ; the other is a copy of a manuscript in the library of the high-priest of the Parsis in Bombay. Both these MSS. are evidently descended from the same original, which must have been a very imperfect transliteration of a Pahlavi text closely resembling that of K20, but yet independent of that MS., as a few words omitted in K20 are supplied by these Pazand MSS. (see B.Yt. II, 13, 14, 22, &c.) To a certain extent, therefore, these Pazand MSS. are of some assistance in settling the text of a few sentences, but the greater part of their contents is so imperfect as to be utterly unintelligible; they not only omit Chaps. I, 1-8, IT, 17, 30-32, 40, III, 9, 12, 17— 44, 58-63 entirely, but also words and phrases from nearly every other section of the text. Adhering scrupulously to the Pahlavi original for a few consecutive words, and then widely departing from it by misreading or omitting all difficult words and passages, this Pazand version is a complete contrast to the Pazand writings of Néryésang, being of little use to the reader beyond showing the extremely low ebb to which Pahlavi learning must have fallen, among the Parsis, before such unintelligible writings could have been accepted as Pazand texts.

There is also a Persian version of the Bahman Yast, a copy of which, written A. D. 1676, is contained in a large Rivayat MS. No. 29, belonging to the University Library at Bombay. According to the colophon of this Persian version it was composed in A.D. 1496 by Rustam Isfendiyar of Yazd, from an Avesta (Pazand) MS. belonging to his brother Jamshéd. This Persian version contains less than three per cent of Arabic words, and is more of a paraphrase than a translation, but it adheres very closely to the meaning of the Pahlavi text from Chaps. I, 1 to III, 9, where a dislocation occurs, evidently owing either to the displacement

\viii PAHLAVI TEXTS.

of two folios in an older MS., or to the second page of a folio being copied before the first, so that §§ 10-14 follow §§ 15-22. From the middle of § 22 the folios of the older MS. seem to have been lost as far as the end of Hashédar’s millennium (§ 51), to which point the Persian version leaps, but the remainder of this paraphrase is much more diffuse than the Bahman Yast, and is evidently derived from some other Pahlavi work.

seem to have been lost as far as the end of Hashédar’s millennium (§ 51), to which point the Persian version leaps, but the remainder of this paraphrase is much more diffuse than the Bahman Yast, and is evidently derived from some other Pahlavi work.

This conclusion of the Persian version describes how adversity departs from the world, and ten people are satisfied with the milk of one cow, when Hiashédar-m4h appears and his millennium commences. On his coming from his conference with Adharmazd the sun stands still for twenty days and nights, in consequence of which twothirds of the people in the world believe in the religion. Meat is no longer eaten, but only milk and butter, and a hundred people are satisfied with the milk of one cow. Hashédar-méh destroys the terrible serpent, which accompanies apostasy, by means of the divine glory and Avesta formulas ; he clears all noxious creatures out of the world, and wild animals live harmlessly among mankind ; the fiends of apostasy and deceit depart from the world, which becomes populous and delightful, and mankind abstain from falsehood. After the five-hundredth year of Hashédar-mdh has passed away, Sdshyans (SAsan) appears, and destroys the fiend who torments fire. The sun stands still for thirty days and nights, when all mankind believe in the religion, and the year becomes exactly 360 days. Dahak escapes from his confinement, and reigns for a day and a half in the world with much tyranny ; when Séshyans rouses S4m Nariman, who accepts the religion and becomes immortal. S4m calls upon Dah&k to accept the religion, but the latter proposes that they should together seize upon heaven for themselves, whereupon S4m kills him. All evil having departed from the world mankind become like the archangels, and the resurrection takes place, which is described with many of the same details as are mentioned in Bund. XXX.

Accompanying this Persian version in B29 is another

INTRODUCTION. lix

All evil having departed from the world mankind become like the archangels, and the resurrection takes place, which is described with many of the same details as are mentioned in Bund. XXX.

Accompanying this Persian version in B29 is another

INTRODUCTION. lix

fragment from the same source, which treats of the same subjects as the third chapter of the Bahman Yast, but is differently arranged. It confines itself to the millennium of Hiashédar, and may possibly be some modification of the contents of the folios missing from the version described above. After some introductory matter this fragment contains a paraphrase (less accurate than the preceding) of Chap. III, 23-49 of the Bahman Yast; it then proceeds to state that Hashédar destroys the wolf race, so that wolves, thieves, highway robbers, and criminals cease to exist. When Hashédar’s three-hundredth year has passed away the winter of Malkés arrives and destroys all animals and vegetation, and only one man survives out of ten thousand ; after which the world is repeopled from the enclosure made by Yim. Then comes the gathering of the nations to the great battle on the Euphrates, where the slaughter is so great that the water of the river becomes red, and the survivors wade in blood up to their horses’ girths. Afterwards, the Kayan king, Varg4vand, advances from the frontiers of India and takes possession of Iran to the great delight of the inhabitants, but only after a great battle; and then Péshyétani is summoned from Kangdez to restore the religious ceremonies.

A German translation of some passages in the Bahman Yast, with a brief summary of the greater part of the remainder, was published in 1860 in Spiegel’s Traditionelle Literatur der Parsen, pp. 128-135.

6. THE SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

Another treatise which must be referred to about the same age as the Bundahis, though of a very different character, is the Shayast l4-shayast or ‘the proper and improper.’ It is a compilation of miscellaneous laws and customs regarding sin and impurity, with other memoranda about ceremonies and religious subjects in general. Its name has, no doubt, been given to it in modern times!, and has pro-

' But perhaps before the compilation of the prose Sad-dar Bundahis, or Bundahis of a hundred chapters, which seems to refer to the Shiyast la-shayast

\x PAHLAVI TEXTS.

bably arisen from the frequent use it makes of the words shayad, ‘ it is fit or proper, and 14 shayad, ‘it is not fit or proper.’ And, owing to its resemblance to those Persian miscellanies of traditional memoranda called Rivdyats, it has also been named the Pahlavi Rivayat, though chiefly by Europeans.

It consists of two parts, which are often put together in modern MSS., and bear the same name, but are widely separated in the oldest MSS. These two parts, consisting respectively of Chaps. I-X and XI-XIV in the present translation, are evidently two distinct treatises on the same and similar subjects, but of nearly the same age. That they were compiled by two different persons, who had access to nearly the same authorities, appears evident from Chaps. XI, 1, 2, XII, 11, 13-16, 18, 20 being repetitions of Chaps. I, 1, 2, X, 4, 20-23, 7, 31, with only slight alterations ; such repetitions as would hardly be made in a single treatise by the same writer. Minor repetitions in the first part, such as those of some phrases in Chaps. II, 65, IV, 14, repeated in Chap. X, 24, 33, might readily be made by the same writer in different parts of the same treatise. To these two parts of the Sh4yast 14-shayast a third part has been added in the present translation, as an appendix, consisting of a number of miscellaneous passages of a somewhat similar character, which are found in the same old MSS. that contain the first two parts, but which cannot be attributed either to the same writers or the same age as those parts.

The first part commences with the names and amounts of the various degrees of sin, and the names of the chief commentators on the Vendidad. It then gives long details regarding the precautions to be taken with reference to corpses and menstruous women, and the impurity they occasion; besides mentioning (Chap. II, 33-35) the pollution

in its opening words, as follows:—‘ This book is on “the proper and improper” which is brought out from the good, pure religion of the Mazdayasnians ;’ though this term may possibly relate to its own contents. There is also a Persian treatise called ShAyast na-sh4yast, which gives a good deal of information obtained from the Persian Rivayats, and copies of which are contained in the MSS. Nos. 56 and 116 of the Ouseley collection in the Bodleian Library at Oxford. -

INTRODUCTION. Ixi

There is also a Persian treatise called ShAyast na-sh4yast, which gives a good deal of information obtained from the Persian Rivayats, and copies of which are contained in the MSS. Nos. 56 and 116 of the Ouseley collection in the Bodleian Library at Oxford. -

INTRODUCTION. Ixi

caused by a serpent. It next describes the proper size and materials of the sacred thread-girdle and shirt, giving some details about the sins of running about uncovered and walking with one boot, and thence proceeding to the sin of unseasonable chatter. Details are then given about good works, and those who can and cannot perform them; in which reference is made to Christians, Jews, and those of other persuasions (Chap. VI, 7). The next subjects treated of are reverencing the sun and fire, the sin of extinguishing fire, confession and renunciation of sin, atonement for sins, especially mortal sins, both those affecting others and those only affecting one’s own soul ; with a digression (Chap. VIII, 3) prohibiting the rich from hunting. The remainder of this first treatise is of a miscellaneous character, referring to the following subjects :—The Hasar of time, priests passing away in idolatry, the discussion of religion, ceremonies not done aright, throwing a corpse into the sea, evil of eating in the dark, the four kinds of worship, when the angels should be invoked in worship, the ephemeral nature of life, proper looseness for a girdle, when the sacred cake set aside for the guardian spirits can be used, maintaining a fire where awoman is pregnant, providing a tank for ablution, the Gathas not to be recited over the dead, food and drink not to be thrown away to the north at night, unlawful slaughter of animals, how the corpse of a pregnant woman should be carried, forgiveness of trespasses, evil of walking without boots, when the sacred girdle is to be assumed, breaking the spell of an inward prayer, ten women wanted at childbirth, and how the infant is to be treated, sin of beating an innocent person, evil of a false judge, men and women who do not marry, a toothpick must be free from bark, acknowledging the children of a handmaid, advantage of offspring and of excess in almsgiving, prayer on lying down and getting up, Avesta not to be mumbled, doubtful actions to be avoided or consulted about, evil of laughing during prayer, crowing of a hen, treatment of a hedgehog, after a violent death corruption does not set in immediately, necessity of a dog's gaze, putrid meat and hairy cakes or butter unfit for ceremonies, when a woman can do priestly duty, &c.

Ixii PAHLAVI TEXTS,

The second part also commences with the names and amounts of the various degrees of sin, followed by the proper meat-offerings for various angels and guardian spirits. Next come miscellaneous observations on the following subjects :—The simplest form of worship, necessity of submitting to a high-priest, advantage of a fire in the house, sin of clothing the dead, presentation of holy-water to the nearest fire after a death, nail-parings to be prayed over, advantage of light at childbirth, offerings to the angels, maintaining a fire where a woman is pregnant and a child is born, a toothpick must be free from bark, acknowledging the children of a handmaid, advantage of offspring and of excess in almsgiving, evil of drawing well-water at night, food not to be thrown away to the north at night, advantage of prayer at feasts, treatment of a hedgehog, praying when washing the face, the proper choice of a purifying priest, no one should be hopeless of heaven, necessity of a wife being religious as well as her husband, the ceremonies which are good works, and the cause of sneezing, yawning, and sighing. These are followed by a long account of the mystic signification of the Gathas, with some information as to the errors which may be committed in consecrating the sacred cakes, and how the beginning of the morning watch is to be determined.

The third part, or appendix, commences with an account of how each of the archangels can be best propitiated, by a proper regard for the particular worldly existence which he specially protects. This is followed by a statement of the various degrees of sin, and of the amount of good works attributed to various ceremonies. Then come some account of the ceremonies after a death, particulars of those who have no part in the resurrection, the duty of submission to the priesthood, whether evil may be done for the sake of good, the place where people will rise from the dead, Aéshm’s complaint to Aharman of the three things he could not injure in the world, the occasions on which the Ahunavar formula should be recited, and the number of recitals that are requisite, &c. And, finally, statements of the lengths of midday and afternoon shadows, blessings invoked

INTRODUCTION. Lxiii

from the thirty angels and archangels who preside over the days of the month, and the special epithets of the same.

And, finally, statements of the lengths of midday and afternoon shadows, blessings invoked

INTRODUCTION. Lxiii

from the thirty angels and archangels who preside over the days of the month, and the special epithets of the same.

With regard to the age of this treatise we have no precise information. All three parts are found in a MS. (M6) which was written in A.D. 1397 (see p. xxix), and nearly the whole is also found in the MS. K20, which may be a few years older (see p. xxvii), and in which the first part of the Sh4yast l4-sh4yast is followed by a Persian colophon dated A.Y. 700 (A.D. 1331), copied probably from an older MS. The text in both these old MSS. seems to have been derived almost direct from the same original, which must have been so old when M6 was written that the copyist found some words illegible (see notes on Chaps. VIII, 19, X, 34, XII, 14, 15, &c.) Now it is known from a colophon that a portion of M6, containing the book of Ard4-Viraf and the tale of Gést-i Fry4né, was copied from a MS. written in A.D. 1249; and we may safely conclude that the Sh4yast 1l4-sh4yast was copied, either from the same MS., or from one fully as old. So far, therefore, as external evidence goes, there is every reason to suppose that the whole of the Shayast 14-shayast, with its appendix’, was existing in a MS. written about 630 years ago.

But internal evidence points to a far higher antiquity for the first two parts, as the compilers of those treatises evidently had access, not only to several old commentaries, but also to many of the Nasks, which have long been lost. Thus, the first treatise contains quotations from the commentaries of Afarg, Gégésasp, Kdshtand-bigéd, Méddkmah, Réshan, and Séshyans, which are all frequently quoted in the Pahlavi translation of the Vendidad (see Sls. I, 3, 4, notes); besides mentioning the opinions of Mardbad, Néryésang, Nés4t Barz-Mitré, and Vand-Adharmazd, who are rarely or never mentioned in the Pahlavi Vendidad. It also quotes no less than eleven of the twenty Nasks or books of the complete Mazdayasnian literature which are no longer extant, besides the Vendidad, the only Nask that still survives in the full extent it had in Sasanian times.

‘ Except Chaps. XXII, XXIII (see the note on the heading of Chap. XXII). -

lxiv PAHLAVI TEXTS.

‘ Except Chaps. XXII, XXIII (see the note on the heading of Chap. XXII). -

lxiv PAHLAVI TEXTS.

The Nasks quoted are the Stdgar (Sls. X, 8), the Bagh (X, 26), the Damdad (X, 22), the Paz6n (IX, 9), the Ratistaitih (X, 29), the Kidrast (X, 28), the Spend (X, 4), the Nihaddm (X, 3, 22, 23), the Dibasrigéd (X, 13), the Hasparam (X, 21), and the Sakadim (X, 25), very few of which are mentioned even in the Pahlavi Vendidad. The second treatise mentions only one commentator, Vand-Agharmazd, but it quotes eight of the Nasks no longer extant; these are the Stddgar (Sls. XII, 32), the Damdad (XII, 5, 15), the Spend (XII, 3, 11, 15, 29), the Bag-yasné (XII, 17), the Nihaddm (XII, 15, 16), the Hdsp4ram (XII, 1, 7, 14, 31, XIII, 17), the Sakaddm (XII, 2, 10, 12, XIII, 30), and the Hadékht (XII, 19, 30, XIII, 6, 10).

Of two of these Nasks, the Bagh and H4dékht, a few fragments may still survive (see notes on Sls. X, 26, Haug’s Essays, p. 134, B. Yt. III, 25), but those of the latter Nask do not appear to contain the passages quoted in the Shayast 14-shayast. With regard to the rest we only know that the Damdad, Hisp4ram, and Sakadim must have been still in existence about A.D. 881, as they are quoted in the writings of Zad-sparam and Mandséihar, sons of Yadén-Yim, who lived at that time (see pp. xlii, xlvi); and the Nih4adam and Hdsp4ram are also quoted in the Pahlavi Vendidad. It is true that the Dinkard gives copious information about the contents of all the Nasks, with two or three exceptions ; and the Dinkard seems to have assumed its present form about A.D. 900 (see Bund. X XXIII, 11, notes); but its last editor was evidently merely a compiler of old fragments, so there is no certainty that many of the Nasks actually existed in his time.

Thus far, therefore, the internal evidence seems to prove that the two treatises called Shayast l4-shayast, which constitute the first two parts of the present translation, are more than a thousand years old. On the other hand, they cannot be more than three centuries older, because they frequently quote passages from the Pahlavi Vendidad which, as we have seen (p. xlvi, note 1), could not have assumed its present form before the time of Khasré Néshirvan (A.D. 531-579). As they contain no reference to any

INTRODUCTION. Ixv

xlvi, note 1), could not have assumed its present form before the time of Khasré Néshirvan (A.D. 531-579). As they contain no reference to any

INTRODUCTION. Ixv

interference of the governing powers with the religion or priesthood, it is probable that they were written before the Muhammadan conquest (A.D. 636-651), although they do not mention the existence of any ‘king of the kings,’ the usual title of the Sasanian monarchs. And this probability is increased by there being no direct mention of Muhammadanism among the contemporary religions named in Chap. VI, 7, unless we assume that passage to be a quotation from an earlier book. We may, therefore, conclude, with tolerable certainty, that the Pahlavi text of the first two parts of the present translation of the Shdyast 14shayast was compiled some time in the seventh century ; but, like the Bundahis and Bahman Yast, it was, for the most part, a compilation of extracts and translations from far older writings, and may also have been rearranged shortly after the Muhammadan conquest.

The fragments which are collected in the appendix, or third part of the present translation, are probably of various ages, and several of them may not be more than seven centuries old. The commentator Bakht-afrid, whose work (now lost) is quoted in Chap. XX, 11, may have lived in the time of Khasré6 Néshirvan (see B. Yt. I, 7). And Chap. XXI must certainly have been written in Persia, as the lengths of noonday shadows which it mentions are only suitable for 32° north latitude. As regards the last two chapters we have no evidence that they are quite five centuries old.

For the Pahlavi text of the Shayast 14-shayast and its appendix we have not only the very old codex M6 (see p. xxix) for the whole of it, but also the equally old codex K20 (see p. xxvii) for all but Chaps. XV-XVII, XX, XXII, and XXIII in the appendix. In M6 the first two parts are separated by twenty folios, containing the Farhang-i Oimkhaddk, and the second part is separated from the first three chapters of the appendix by four folios, containing the Patit-i Khad; the next three chapters of the appendix are from the latter end of the second volume of M6, Chap. X XI is from the middle of the same, and the last two chapters are from some additional folios at the beginning of the

fs] e

Ixvi PAHLAVI TEXTS.

first volume. In K20 the first two parts are separated by ninety-two folios, containing the Farhang-i Oim-khadak, Bundahis, Bahman Yast, and several other Pahlavi and Avesta texts ; Chap. XVIII precedes the first part, Chap. XIX precedes the second part, and Chap. XXI is in an earlier part of the MS.

In K20 the first two parts are separated by ninety-two folios, containing the Farhang-i Oim-khadak, Bundahis, Bahman Yast, and several other Pahlavi and Avesta texts ; Chap. XVIII precedes the first part, Chap. XIX precedes the second part, and Chap. XXI is in an earlier part of the MS.

Derived from K20 are the two modern copies P7 and Kai (see p. xxviii). Derived from M6 are the modern copy of the first two parts in Mg (No. 9 of the Haug collection in the State Library at Munich), a copy of Chaps. XIV, XV in L15 (No. 15 of the collection of Avesta and Pahlavi MSS. in the India Office Library at London), a copy of Chap. XX, 4-17 in O121 (No. 121 of the Ouseley collection in the Bodleian Library at Oxford, see p. xxx), and a copy of Chap. XVIII in Dastar Jamdspji’s MS. of the Bundahis at Bombay. While an independent Pahlavi version of Chap. XXIII occurs in a very old codex in the library of the high-priest of the Parsis at Bombay, which version has been used for the text of the present translation, because that chapter is incomplete in M6,

Pazand versions of some of the chapters, chiefly in the appendix, are to be found in some MSS,., but all derived apparently from M6. Thus, in the Pizand MSS. L7 and L22 (Nos. 7 and 22 in the India Office Library at London, see p. xxxi), written in Avesta characters, Chaps. XVIII, XX, XV follow the last chapter of the Bundahis, and Chap. XIV occurs a few folios further on. And in the Pazand MS. M7 (No. 7 of the Haug collection in the State Library at Munich), written in Persian characters, the following detached passages occur in a miscellaneous collection of extracts (fols. 126-133):—Chaps. XX, 14-16, X, 18, 19, IX, 9, 10, XX, 12, 13, 4, 5, VIII, 2, 4-14, XX, 11. A Persian version of Chap. XVIII also occurs in M5 (No. 5 of the same collection) on fol. 54.

It does not appear that the Shayast 14-shayast has ever been hitherto translated into any European language ', nor

1 Except Chap. XVIII, which was translated into German by Justi, as the last chapter of his translation of the Bundahis (see p. xxvi).

INTRODUCTION. Ixvii

54.

It does not appear that the Shayast 14-shayast has ever been hitherto translated into any European language ', nor

1 Except Chap. XVIII, which was translated into German by Justi, as the last chapter of his translation of the Bundahis (see p. xxvi).

INTRODUCTION. Ixvii

is any Persian or Gugarati translation of it known to the present translator, though a good deal of the matter it contains may be found in the Persian Rivayats, but generally given in a different form. Owing to the technical character of the treatise, it is hazardous for any one but a Parsi priest to attempt to translate it, so that errors will, no doubt, be apparent to the initiated in the present translation. At the same time it must not be forgotten that the laws and customs mentioned in the text were those current in Persia twelve centuries ago, which may be expected to differ, in many details, from those of the Parsis in India at the present day. This is a consideration which a Parsi translator might be too apt to ignore; so that his thorough knowledge of present customs, though invaluable for the decipherment of ambiguous phrases, might lead him astray when dealing with clear statements of customs and rules now obsolete and, therefore, at variance with his preconceived ideas of propriety.

7. CONCLUDING REMARKS.

The Pahlavi texts selected for translation in this volume are specimens of three distinct species of writings. Thus, the Bundahis and its appendix, which deal chiefly with cosmogony, myths, and traditions, may be roughly compared to the book of Genesis. The Bahman Yast, which professes to be prophetical, may be likened unto the Apocalypse. And the Shdyast 14-shayast, which treats of religious laws regarding impurity, sin, ritual, and miscellaneous matters, bears some resemblance to Leviticus. But, though thus dealing with very different subjects, these texts appear to have all originated in much the same manner, a manner which is characteristic of the oldest class of the Pahlavi writings still extant. All three are full of translations from old Avesta texts, collected together probably in the latter days of the Sasanian dynasty, and finally rearranged some time after the Muhammadan conquest of Persia; so that, practically, they may be taken as representing the ideas entertained of their prehistoric religion by Persians in the

e 2

Ixviii PAHLAVI TEXTS.

sixth century, but modified so far as to suit the taste and exigencies of the tenth.

But, notwithstanding the wide range of subjects embraced by these texts, it would be rash for the reader to assume that they afford him sufficient information for forming a decided opinion as to the character of the Parsi religion. The texts translated in this volume contain barely oneeleventh part of the religious literature extant in the Pahlavi language, without taking the Pahlavi versions of existing Avesta texts into account, which latter are even more important than the former, from a religious point of view, as they are considered more authoritative by the Parsis themselves, What proportion the literature extant may bear to that which is lost it is impossible to guess; but, omitting all consideration of the possible contents of the lost literature, it is obvious that the remaining ten-elevenths of that which is extant may contain much which would modify any opinion based merely upon the one-eleventh here translated. What the untranslated portion actually contains no one really knows, The best Pahlavi scholar can never be sure that he understands the contents of a Pahlavi text until he has fully translated it ; no amount of careful reading can make him certain that he does not misunderstand some essential part of it, and were he to assert the contrary he would be merely misleading others and going astray himself. How far the translations in this volume will enable the reader to judge of the Parsi religion may perhaps be best understood by considering how far a careful perusal of the books of Genesis, Leviticus, and the Revelation, which constitute one-eleventh part of the Protestant Bible, would enable him to judge of Christianity, without any further information.

But, though these translations must be considered merely as a contribution towards a correct account of medizval Zoroastrianism, the Bundahis does afford some very definite information upon one of the fundamental doctrines of that faith. The Parsi religion has long been represented by its opponents as a dualism ;' and this accusation, made in good faith by Muhammadan writers, and echoed more

INTRODUCTION. lxix

incautiously by Christians, has been advanced so strenuously that it has often been admitted even by Parsis themselves, as re: ids, the, medizval form of their faith. But neither party! ‘séem# to have fairly considered how any religion which admits the personality of an evil spirit, in order to account for the existence of evil, can fail to become a dualism to a certain extent. If, therefore, the term is to be used in controversy, it behoves those who use it to define the limits of objectionable dualism with great precision,|so as not to include most of the religions of the world, their own among the number.

If it be necessary for a dualism that the evil spirit be omnipresent, omniscient, almighty, or eternal, then is the

’ Parsi religion no dualism. \(The Bundahis distinctly asserts that the evil spirit is not omniscient and almighty (Chap. I, 16); that his understanding is backward (I, 3, 9), so that he was not aware of the existence of Adharmazd till he arose from the abyss and saw the light (I, 9); that he is unobservant and ignorant of the future (I, 19) till it is revealed to him by Adharmazd (I, 21); that his creatures perish at the resurrection (I, 7, 21),and he himself becomes impotent (I, 21, III, 1) and will not be (I, 3, XXX, 32). Nowhere is he supposed to be in two places at once, or to know what is occurring elsewhere than in his own presence. So far, his powers are considerably less than those generally assigned by Christians to the devil, who is certainly represented as being a more intelligent and ubiquitous personage. | (On the other hand, Aharman is able to produce fiends and demons (Chap. I, 10, 24), and the noxious creatures are said to be his (III, 15, XIV, 30, XVIII, 2);: in which respects he has probably rather more power than the devil, although the limits of the latter’s means of producing evil are by no means well defined.

‘The origin and end of Aharman appear to be left as uncertain as those of the devil, and, altogether, the resemblance between these two ideas of the evil spirit is remarkably close; in fact, almost too close to admit of the possibility of their being ideas of different origin. “The only important differences are that Zoroastrianism does not believe in an

Ixx PAHLAVI TEXTS.

eternity of evil as Christianity does} and that Christianity has been content to leave all its other ideas about the devil in a very hazy and uncertain form, while Zoroastrianism has not shrunk from carrying similar ideas to their logical conclusion, If, therefore,a belief in Aharman, as the author of evil, makes the Parsi religion a dualism, it is difficult to understand why a belief in the devil, as the author of evil, does not make Christianity also a dualism. At any rate, it is evident from the Bundahis that a Christian is treading on hazardous ground when he objects to Zoroastrianism on the score of its dualism.

At any rate, it is evident from the Bundahis that a Christian is treading on hazardous ground when he objects to Zoroastrianism on the score of its dualism.

Another misrepresentation of the Parsi religion is shown to have no foundation in fact, by a passage in the Selections of ZAd-sparam. \Several writers, both Greek and Armenian, contemporaries of the Sasanian dynasty, represent the Persians as believing that both Adharmazd and Aharman were produced by an eternal being, who is evidently a personification of the Avesta phrase for ‘boundless time.’ This view was apparently confirmed by a passage in Anquetil Duperron’s French translation of the Vendidad (XIX, 32-34), but this has long been known to be a mistranslation due to Anquetil’s ignorance of Avesta grammar ;\ So that the supposed doctrine of ‘boundless time’ being the originator of everything is not to be found in the Avesta; still it might have sprung up in Sasanian times.; But the Selections of Z4d-sparam (I, 24) distinctly state that Adharmazd produced the creature Zérvan (precisely the term used in the phrase ‘ boundless time’ in the Avesta). Here ‘time, although personified, is represented as a creature of Adharmazd, produced after the first appearance of Aharman ; which contradicts the statement of the Greek and Armenian writers completely, and shows how little reliance can be placed upon the assertions of foreigners regarding matters which they view with antipathy or prejudice.

With reference to the general plan of these translations of Pahlavi texts a few remarks seem necessary. In the first place, it will be obvious to any attentive reader of this introduction that a translator of Pahlavi has not merely to translate, but also to edit, the original text; and, in some

- INTRODUCTION. xxi

cases, he has even to discover it. Next, as regards the translation, it has been already mentioned (p. xxvi) that the translator’s object is to make it as literal as possible ; in order, therefore, to check the inevitable tendency of free translation to wander from the meaning of the original text, all extra words added to complete the sense, unless most distinctly understood in the original, are italicised in the translation. And in all cases that seem doubtful the reader's attention is called to the fact by a note, though it is possible that some doubtful matters may be overlooked.

And in all cases that seem doubtful the reader's attention is called to the fact by a note, though it is possible that some doubtful matters may be overlooked.

The notes deal not only with explanations that may be necessary for the general reader, but also with various readings and other details that may be useful to scholars; they are, therefore, very numerous, though some passages may still be left without sufficient explanation. References to the Vendidad, Yasna, and Visparad are made to Spiegel’s edition of the original texts, not because that edition is superior, or even equal, in accuracy to that of Westergaard, but because it is the only edition which gives the Pahlavi translations, because its sections are shorter and, therefore, reference to them is more definite, and because the only English translation of the Avesta hitherto existing! is based upon Spiegel’s edition, and is divided into the same sections.

No attempt has been made to trace any of the myths or traditions farther back than the Avesta, whence their descent is a fact that can hardly be disputed. To trace them back to earlier times, to a supposed Indo-Iranian personification or poetic distortion of meteorological phenomena, would be, in the present state of our knowledge, merely substituting plausible guesses for ascertained facts. In many cases, indeed, we have really no right to assume that an Avesta myth has descended from any such Indo- Iranian origin, as there have been ample opportunities for the infiltration of myths from other sources, yet unknown,

1 Bleeck’s Avesta; the Religious Books of the Parsees; from Professor Spiegel’s German Translation; London, 1864. Not much reliance can be placed upon the correctness of this translation, owing to defects in the German one,

Ixxii PAHLAVI TEXTS.

among the many nations with which the religion of the Avesta has come in contact, both before and since the time of Zaratist. For, notwithstanding the ingenious rhetoric of the expounders of myths, it is still as unsafe, from a scientific point of view, to disbelieve the former existence of Zaratist as it is to doubt that of Moses, or any other practically prehistoric personage, merely because mythic tales have gathered about his name in later times, as they always do about the memory of any individual who has become famous or revered.

In many cases the original Pahlavi word is appended, in parentheses, to its English equivalent in the translation. This has been done for the sake of explanation, when the word is technical or rare, or the translation is unusual. For, with regard to technical terms, it has been considered best, in nearly all cases, to translate them by some explanatory phrase, in preference to filling the translation with foreign words which would convey little or no distinct meaning to the general reader. Some of these technical terms have almost exact equivalents in English, such as those translated ‘resurrection’ and ‘demon,’ or can be well expressed by descriptive phrases, such as ‘sacred twigs’ and ‘sacred cakes.’ Other terms are only approximately rendered by such words as ‘archangel’ and ‘angel ;’ others can hardly be expressed at all times by the same English words, but must change according to the context, such as the term variously rendered by ‘worship, ceremonial, prayer, or rites. While the meaning of some few terms is so technical, complicated, or uncertain, that it is safer to use the Pahlavi word itself, such as Tandpdhar, Frasast, Gétikharid, Dvazdah-hémast, &c.

The following is a list of nearly all the technical terms that have been translated, with the English equivalents generally used to express them :—Afrin, ‘blessing;’? aharmdk, ‘apostate, heretic ;’ aharQbé, ‘righteous ;’ aharibd-d4d, ‘alms, almsgiving;’ akdin6, ‘infidel;’ ameshéspend, ‘archangel ;’ armést, ‘helpless ;? ast-hémand, ‘ material;’ atiséfrid, ‘ propitiation, offering ;’ bagh6é-bakht6, ‘divine providence ;’ baresém, ‘sacred twigs or twig-bundle;’

INTRODUCTION. I xxiii

ast-hémand, ‘ material;’ atiséfrid, ‘ propitiation, offering ;’ bagh6é-bakht6, ‘divine providence ;’ baresém, ‘sacred twigs or twig-bundle;’

INTRODUCTION. I xxiii

baresé6mdA4n, ‘twig stand;’? dakhmak (Huz. khaz4n), ‘depository for the dead ;’ dasht4nist4n, ‘place for menstruation;’ din6, ‘religion, revelation, religious rites ;’ drayAn-giyisnih, ‘unseasonable chatter;’ drevand, ‘wicked ;’ dr6n6, ‘sacred cake;’ drig, ‘fiend;’ frashakard, ‘renovation of the universe;’ fravahar, ‘guardian spirit ;’ fravardik4n, ‘days devoted to the guardian spirits ;’ ganrak maindk, ‘evil spirit;’ garzisn, ‘confession of sin;’ gas, ‘period of the day, time;’ ga4s4nb4r, ‘seasonfestival ;’ gasn6, ‘feast ;’ gas-dak (Av. gaus hudhau), ‘meat-offering, sacred butter ;’ gavid-rastak4n, ‘the heterodox;’ giv (Av. g4us givya), ‘sacred milk ;’? géméz, ‘bull’s urine ;’ hamémél, ‘accuser ;” hamréd, ‘direct pollution, contagion ;’ hazdrak, ‘millennium ;’ hikhar, ‘bodily refuse ;? k4r, ‘duty;’ késhvar, ‘region;’ khayebit, ‘destroyer ;’ khrafstar, ‘noxious creature ;’ khvét fik-das, ‘next-of-kin marriage ;’ kirfak, ‘good works;’ kdstik, ‘sacred thread-girdle ;?. magh, ‘stone ablution-seat ;’ maindk, ‘spirit ;’ marg-arg4n, ‘worthy of death, mortal sin;’ myazd, ‘feast, sacred feast ;’ nas4i, ‘corpse, dead matter ;’ nasai katak, ‘corpse chamber ;’ nirang, ‘religious formula, ritual ;’ nfrangistAn, ‘code of religious formulas ;’ niy4yisn, ‘salutation;’ paddm, ‘mouth-veil;’ padiyavih, ‘ablution, ceremonial ablution ;’ pAahldm ahvaAn, ‘best existence;’ paitréd, ‘indirect pollution, infection ;’ parahém, ‘hém-juice;’ parik, ‘witch;’ patitith, ‘renunciation of sin;’ patiy4rak, ‘adversary ;’ péryédkéshih, ‘ primitive faith ;? rad, ‘chief, spiritual chief, primate, high-priest ;’ ristakhéz, ‘resurrection;? satdith, ‘the three nights;’ séda, ‘demon ;’ shapik, ‘sacred shirt ;’ shn4yisn, ‘ propitiation, gratification ;’ shniman, ‘dedication formula, propitiation ;’ spénadk maindk, ‘beneficent spirit ;’ tand-i pasind, ‘future existence ;’ tégisn, ‘retribution ;’ tér4-i khad O-d4d, ‘ primeval ox;’ v4g, ‘inward prayer;’ vigarisn, ‘atonement for sin;’ vishad-dObarisnih, ‘running about uncovered ;’ yasn6, ‘ritual ;’ yast, ‘prayers, ritual, form of prayer, worship, consecration ;’ yastan6, ‘to consecrate, solemnize, propitiate, reverence ;’ y4tdk, ‘wizard ;’ yazdan, ‘angels, sacred beings, celestial beings, God ;’ yazisn,

[5]

Ixxiv PAHLAVI TEXTS.

‘ceremonial, ceremony, sacred ceremony, ceremonial worship, worship, reverence, rites, prayer ;’ yédat6, ‘angel;’ zand, ‘commentary ;? zéhar or zér, ‘holy-water;° zot, ‘officiating priest.’

With regard to the orthography of Pahlavi names and words, advantage has been taken of the system of transliteration adopted for this series of Translations of the Sacred Books of the East, by making use of italics for the purpose of distinguishing between certain Pahlavi letters which were probably pronounced very nearly alike. Thus, besides the usual letters | for v and § for z, the Pahlavi letter @ is often used to denote those same sounds which, in such cases, are represented by the italic letters v and gz. An extension of the same mode of distinction to the letters 1 and r would be desirable, but has not been attempted in this volume; these two letters are usually written 4), but in a few words they are represented by \ or by J, in which cases they would be better expressed by the italics 7and r. Some attempt has been made to adhere to one uniform orthography in such names as occur frequently, but as there is no such uniformity in the various languages and writings quoted, nor even in the same manuscript, some deviations can hardly be avoided.

In conclusion it may be remarked that a translator of Pahlavi generally begins his career by undervaluing the correctness of Pahlavi texts and the literary ability of their authors, but he can hardly proceed far without finding abundant reason for altering his opinion of both. His depreciatory view of Pahlavi literature is generally due partly to want of knowledge, and partly to his trusting too much to the vile perversions of Pahlavi texts usually supplied by PAzand writers. But as his knowledge of Pahlavi increases he becomes better able to appreciate the literary merits of the texts. Ifthe reader should have already formed some such low estimate of the ability of Pahlavi writers, it may be hoped that these translations will afford him sufficient reason for changing his opinion ; if not, they will have signally failed in doing those writers justice.

THE

[5]

BUNDAHIS

ORIGINAL CREATION.

OBSERVATIONS.

1. For all divisions into chapters and sections the translator is responsible, as the original text is written continuously, with very few stops marked.

2. Italics are used for any English words which are not expressed, or fully understood, in the original text, but are added to complete the sense of the translation.

3. Oriental words are usually ‘spaced.’ Italics occurring in them, or in names, are intended to represent certain peculiar Oriental letters. The italic consonants d, ”, v may be pronounced as in English; but g should be sounded like j, Av like wh, & like ch in ‘church,’ wn like ng, s like sh, g like French j. For further information, see ‘ Transliteration of Oriental Alphabets adopted for the Translations of the Sacred Books of the East’ at the end of the volume.

For further information, see ‘ Transliteration of Oriental Alphabets adopted for the Translations of the Sacred Books of the East’ at the end of the volume.

4. In Pahlavi words all circumflexed vowels and any final 6 are expressed in the Pahlavi original, but all other vowels are merely understood.

5. In the translation, words in parentheses are merely explanatory of those which precede them.

6. Abbreviations used are:—Av. for Avesta. Dé&d. for Dadistan-i Dinik. Huz. for Huzvaris. Mkh. for Mainy6-i-khard, ed. West. Pahl. for Pahlavi. Pz. for Pazand. Pers. for Persian. Sans. for Sanskrit. Vend. for Vendid4d, ed. Spiegel. Visp. for Visparad, ed. Sp. Yas. for Yasna, ed. Sp. Yte for Yast, ed. Westergaard.

7. The manuscripts mentioned in the notes are :—

K2o (about 500 years old), No. 20 in the University Library at Kopenhagen.

Ka2ob (uncertain date), a fragment of the text, No. 20b in the same library.

M6 (written a.p. 1397), No. 6 of the Haug Collection in the State Library at Munich.

TD (written about a.p. 1530), belonging to Mobad Tehmuras Dinshawji Anklesaria at Bombay.

BUNDAHIS.

Cuapter I,

o. In the name of the creator Aftharmazd.

1. The Zand-4k4s (‘Zand-knowing or traditioninformed’)}, which is first about Adharmazd’s original creation and the antagonism of the evil spirit®, and afterwards about the nature of the creatures from the original creation till the end, which is the future existence (tanfi-! pasind). 2. ‘As revealed by the religion of the Mazdayasnians,so“it is declared that Adharmazd is supreme in omniscience and goodness,

1 The Pézand and most of the modern Pahlavi manuscripts have, ‘From the Zand-4k4s,’ but the word min, ‘from,’ does not occur in the old manuscript Kzo, and is a modern addition to M6. From this opening sentence it would appear that the author of the work gave it the name Zand-&kés.

* The Avesta Angra-mainyu, the spirit who causes adversity or anxiety (see Darmesteter’s Ormazd et Ahriman, pp. 92-95); the Pahlavi name is, most probably, merely a corrupt transliteration of the Avesta form, and may be read Ganrak-mafn6k, as the Avesta Spesta-mainyu, the spirit who causes prosperity, has become Spén4k-mafnék in Pahlavi. This latter spirit is represented by Aftharmazd himself in the Bundahis. The Pahlavi word for ‘spirit,’ which is read madénad by the Parsis, and has been pronounced minavad by some scholars and mfnéf by others, is probably a corruption of mafnék, as its Sasanian form was miné. If it were not for the extra medial letter in ganrak, and for the obvious partial transliteration of spén&k, it would be preferable to read gan4k, ‘smiting,’ and to derive it from a supposed verb gandan, ‘to smite’ (Av. ghna), as proposed by most Zendists. A Parsi would probably suggest gandan, ‘to stink.’

4 BUNDAHIs.

ghna), as proposed by most Zendists. A Parsi would probably suggest gandan, ‘to stink.’

4 BUNDAHIs.

and unrivalled in splendour; the region of light is the place of Atharmazd, which they call ‘endless light,’ and the omniscience and goodness of the unrivalled Aftharmazd is what they call ‘revelation’. 3. Revelation is the explanation of both spirits together ; one is he who is independent of unlimited time *, because Aftharmazd and the region, religion, and time of Adharmazd were and are and ever will be; whz/e Aharman‘ in darkness, with backward understanding and desire for destruction, was 2” the abyss, and it is Ae who will not be; and the place of that destruction, and also of that darkness, is what they call the ‘endlessly dark.” 4. And between them was empty space, ¢Aa?¢ is, what they call ‘air,’ in which is now ¢hety meeting, |

5. Both are limited and unlimited spirits, for the supreme is that which they call endless light, and the abyss that which is endlessly dark, so that between them is a void, and one is not connected with

1 Reading aham -kaf, ‘without a fellow-sovereign, peerless, unrivalled, independent.’ This rare word occurs three times in §§ 2, 3, and some Pazand writers suggest the meaning ‘ everlasting’ (by means of the Persian gloss hamfsah), which is plausible enough, but hAmakf would be an extraordinary mode of writing the very common word ham4i, ‘ ever.’

2 The word diné (properly dén6), Av. daéna, being traceable to a root df, ‘to see,’ must originally have meant ‘a vision’ (see Haug’s Essays on the Religion of the Parsis, znd ed. p. 152, note 2), whence the term has been transferred to ‘religion’ and all religious observances, rules, and writings; so it may be translated either by . ‘religion’ or by ‘revelation.’

8 This appears to be the meaning, but the construction of § 3 is altogether rather obscure, and suggestive of omissions in the text.

* The usual name of the evil spirit; it is probably an older corruption of Angra-mainyu than Ganra&k-matn6ék, and a less technical term. Its Sasanian form was Aharmanf.

CHAPTER 4, 3—10. 5

the other ; and, again, both spirits are limited as to their own selves. 6. And, secondly, on account of the omniscience of Atharmazd, both things are in the creation of Adharmazd, the finite and the infinite; for this they know is that which is in the covenant of both spirits.) 7. And, again, the complete sovereignty of the creatures of Adharmazd is in the future existence, and that also is unlimited for ever and everlasting ; and ‘the creatures of Aharman will perish at the time when! the future existence occurs, and that also is eternity.)

And, again, the complete sovereignty of the creatures of Adharmazd is in the future existence, and that also is unlimited for ever and everlasting ; and ‘the creatures of Aharman will perish at the time when! the future existence occurs, and that also is eternity.)

8. Adharmazd, through omniscience, knew that Aharman exists, azd whatever he schemes he infuses with malice and greediness till the end; and because He accomplishes the end by many means, He also produced spiritually the creatures which were necessary for those means, avd they remained three thousand years in a spiritual s¢aée, so that they were unthinking? and unmoving, with intangible bodies

9. (The evil spirit, on account of backward knowledge, was not aware of the existence of Adharmazd;| and, afterwards, he arose from the abyss, and came in unto the light which he saw. ro. Desirous of destroying, and because of zs malicious nature, he

1 Substituting amat, ‘when,’ for mfin, ‘which,’ two Huzvaris forms which are frequently confounded by Pahlavi copyists because their Pazand equivalents, ka and ke, are nearly alike.

* Reading aminfdér in accordance with M6, which has aminid4&r in Chap. XXXIV, 1, where the same phrase occurs. Windischmann and Justi read amfft4r, ‘uninjured, invulnerable,’ in both places. This sentence appears to refer to a preparatory creation of embryonic and immaterial existences, the prototypes, fravashis, spiritual counterparts, or guardian angels of the spiritual and material creatures afterwards produced.

6 BUNDAHIS.

rushed in to destroy that light of Adharmazd unassailed by fiends, and he saw its bravery and glory were greater than his own; so he fled back to the gloomy darkness, and formed many demons and fiends ; and the creatures of the destroyer arose for violence.

11, Atharmazd, by whom the creatures of the evil spirit were seen, creatures terrible, corrupt, and bad, also considered them not commendable (bdrzisntk). 12. Afterwards, the evil spirit saw the creatures of Atharmazd; they appeared many creatures of delight (v4yah), enquiring creatures, and they seemed to him commendable, and he commended the creatures and creation of Adharmazd.

13. Then Adharmazd, with a knowledge! of which way the end of the matter would de, went to meet the evil spirit, and proposed peace to him, avd spoke thus: ‘Evil spirit! bring assistance unto my creatures, and offer praise! so that, in reward for it, ye (you and your creatures) may become immortal and undecaying, hungerless and thirstless.’

14. And the evil spirit shouted thus ?*: ‘I wz// not depart, I wz// not provide assistance for thy creatures, I wz// not offer praise among thy creatures, and I am not of the same opinion with thee as to good things. I w2d/ destroy thy creatures for ever and everlasting; moreover, I w#d/ force all thy creatures into disaffection to thee and affection for myself.’ 15. And the explanation thereof is this, that the evil spirit reflected in this manner, that

I w2d/ destroy thy creatures for ever and everlasting; moreover, I w#d/ force all thy creatures into disaffection to thee and affection for myself.’ 15. And the explanation thereof is this, that the evil spirit reflected in this manner, that

1 The Huz. khavitfinast stands for the P4z. danist with the meaning, here, of ‘ what is known, knowledge,’ as in Persian.

® Literally, ‘And it was shouted by him, the evil spirit, thus :' the usual idiom when the nominative follows the verb.

CHAPTER I, I I-20. 7

Adharmazd was helpless as regarded him’, therefore He proffers peace; and he did not agree, but bore on even into conflict with Him.

¥16. And Adharmazd spoke thus: ‘You are not omniscient and almighty, O evil spirit! so that it is not possible for thee to destroy me, and it is not possible for thee to force my creatures so that they wt not return to my possession. ’|

7. Then Adharmazd, through omniscience, knew that: If I do not grant a period of contest, then it will be possible for him to act so that he may be able to cause the seduction of my creatures to himself.} As even now there are many of the intermixture of mankind who practise wrong more than right. (18. And Adharmazd spoke to the evil spirit thus: ‘Appoint a period! so that the intermingling of the conflict may be for nine thousand years.’ For he knew that by appointing this period the evil spirit would be undone.\

19.‘ Then the evil spirit, unobservant and through ignorance, was content with that agreement \ just like two men quarrelling together, who propose a time thus: Let us appoint such-and-such a day for a fight.

20. Atharmazd also knew this, through omniscience, that within these nine thousand years, for three thousand years everything proceeds éy the will of Afharmazd, three thousand years ¢here 7s an intermingling of the wills of Adharmazd and Aharman, and the last three thousand years the evil " spirit is disabled,jand they keep the adversary away ? from the creatures.

1 The words dén val stand for dén valman. * That is, ‘the adversary is kept away.’ In Pahlavi the third

8 BUNDAHIS.

a1. [Afterwards, Atharmazd jrecited the Ahunavar thus: Yath4 ahd vairyé (‘as a heavenly lord is to be chosen’), &c.1 once, avd uttered the twenty-one words?; He also exhibited to the evil spirit His own triumph in the end, and the impotence of the evil spirit, the annihilation of the demons, and the resurrection azd undisturbed future existence of the creatures for ever and everlasting. 22. And the evil spirit, who perceived his own impotence and the annihilation of the demons, became confounded, and fell back to the gloomy darkness} even so as is declared in revelation, that, when one of its (the Ahunavar's) three Aarts was uttered, the evil spirit contracted Azs body through fear, and when two parts of it were uttered he fell upon zs knees, and when all of it was uttered ‘he became confounded

person plural is the indefinite person, as in English. These gooo years are in addition to the 3000 mentioned in § 8, as appears more clearly in Chap. XXXIV, 1.

1 This is the most sacred formula of the Parsis, which they have to recite frequently, not only during the performance of their ceremonies, but also in connection with most of their ordinary duties and habits. It is neither a prayer, nor a creed, but a declaratory formula in metre, consisting of one stariza of three lines, containing twenty-one Avesta words, as follows :—

Yath4 ahfi vairyé, ath4 ratus, ashad Aid had,

Vangheus dazd4 manangh6, skyaothnanim angheus mazdAi,

Khshathreméa ahurdi 4, yim dregubyé dadad vastarem. And it may be translated in the following manner : ‘As a heavenly lord is to be chosen, so is an earthly master (spiritual guide), for the sake of righteousness, /o de a giver of the good thoughts of the actions of life towards Mazda; and the dominion is for the lord (Ahura) whom he (Mazda) has given as a protector for the poor’ (see Haug’s Essays on the Religion of the Parsis, 2nd ed. Pp. 125, 141).

2 The word m4rik must mean ‘word’ here, but in some other places it seems to mean ‘syllable’ or ‘ accented syllable.’

CHAPTER I, 21-26. 9

and impotent as to the harm he caused the creatures of Adharmazd, and he remained three thousand years in confusion ?. j

23. fAtharmazd created Azs creatures in the confusion of Aharman;/ first he produced Vohfiman (‘good thought’), by whom the progress of the creatures of Afharmazd was advanced.

24. The evil spirit first created? Mitékht (‘falsehood’), and then Akéman (‘evil thought’).

25. The first of Atharmazd’s creatures of the world was the sky, and his good thought (Vohtman), by good procedure®, produced the light of the world, along with which was the good religion of the Mazdayasnians; this was because the renovation (frashakard) * which happens to the creatures was known to him. 26. Afterwards avose Ardava-

1 This is the first third of the gooo years appointed in §§ 18, 20, and the second 3000 years mentioned in Chap. XXXIV, 1.

2 It is usual to consider d&dan (Huz. yehabfintan), when traceable to Av. da=Sans. dh4, as meaning ‘to create,’ but it can hardly be proved that it means to create out of nothing, any more than any other of the Avesta verbs which it is sometimes convenient to translate by ‘create.’ Before basing any argument upon the use of this word it will, therefore, be safer to substitute the word ‘produce’ in all cases.

® Or it may be translated, ‘ and from it Vohfiman, by good procedure,’ &c. The position here ascribed to Vohfiman, or the good thought of Aflharmazd, bears some resemblance to that of the Word in John i. 1-5, but with this essential difference, that Vohfiman is merely a creature of Adharmazd, not identified with him; for the latter idea would be considered, by a Parsi, as rather inconsistent with strict monotheism. The ‘light of the world’ now created must be distinguished from the ‘ endless light’ already existing with Adharmazd in § 2.

‘ The word frashakard, ‘what is made durable, perpetuation,’ is applied to the renovation of the universe which is to take place about the time of the resurrection, as a preparation for eternity.

Io . BUNDAHIS.

hist, and then Shatvatré, and then Spendarmad, and then Horvadad, and then Amerédad’.

27. From the dark world of Aharman were Akoman and Andar, and then Sdvar, and then Nakahéd, and then Tatrézv and Zairté 2.

28. Of Atharmazd’s creatures of the world, the first was the sky; the second, water; the third, earth; the fourth, plants; the fifth, animals; the sixth, mankind.

Cuapter II.

o. On the formation of the luminaries.

1, Adharmazd produced illumination between the sky and the earth, the constellation stars and those also not of the constellations 3, then the moon, and afterwards the sun, as I sha// relate.

1 These five, with Vohiman and Aftharmazd in his angelic capacity, constitute the seven Ameshaspends, ‘ undying causers of prosperity, immortal benefactors,’ or archangels, who have charge of the whole material creation. They are personifications of old Avesta phrases, such as Vohfi-mané6, ‘good thought;’ Asha-vahista, ‘perfect rectitude;’ Khshathra-vairya, ‘desirable dominion ;’ Spezta-4rmaiti, ‘bountiful devotion ;’ Haurvat4d, ‘ completeness or health ;’ and Ameret&d, ‘immortality.’

* These six demons are the opponents of the six archangels respectively (see Chap. XXX, 29); their names in the Avesta are, Akem-mané, ‘evil thought;’ Idra, Sauru, Naunghaithya, Tauru, Zairifa (see Vendidad X, 17,18 Sp., and XIX, 43 W.), which have been compared with the Vedic god Indra, Sarva (a name of Siva), the Nasatyas, and Sans. tura, ‘diseased,’ and garas, ‘decay,’ respectively. For further details regarding them, see Chap. XXVIII, 4-13.

§ The word akhtar is the usual term in Pahlavi for a constellation of the zodiac; but the term ap4khtar, ‘away from the akhtar,’ means not only ‘the north,’ or away from the zodiac, but also ‘a

CHAPTER I, 27-II, 4. IT

For further details regarding them, see Chap. XXVIII, 4-13.

CHAPTER I, 27-II, 4. IT

2. First he produced the ce/estzal sphere, and the constellation stars are assigned to it by him; especially these twelve whose names ave Varak (the Lamb), Tér4 (the Bull), Dé-patkar (the Two-figures or Gemini), Kalaéang (the Crab), Sér (the Lion), Khisak (Virgo), Tarazik (the Balance), Gazdim (the Scorpion), Nim4sp (the Centaur or Sagittarius), Vahik? (Capricornus), Dal (the Waterpot), and Mé4hik (the Fish); 3. which, from their original creation, were aivided into the twenty-eight subdivisions of the astronomers ?, of which the names are Padévar, Pésh-Parviz, Parviz, Paha, Avésar, Besn, Rakhvad, Taraha, Avra, Nahn, Miy4n, Avdem, Mashéha, Spar, Husru, Srob, Nur, Gél, Garafsa, Varant, Gau, Got, Muru, Bunda, Kahtsar, Vaht, Miy4n, Kaht*. 4. And all his original creations,

planet,’ which is in the zodiac, but apart from the constellations. The meaning of akhtar, most suitable to the context here, appears to be the general term ‘constellation.’

? Written Nah&zik here, both in Kzo and M6, which may be compared with Pers. nah 4z, ‘ the leading goat of a flock ;’ but the usual word for ‘Capricornus’ is Vahtk, asin Chap. V, 6. None of the other names of the signs of the zodiac are written here in Pazand, but it may be noted that if the ah in Vahfk were written in Pazand (that is, in Avesta characters), the word would become the same as Nahasik in Pahlavi.

* Literally, ‘fragments of the calculators,’ khurdak-i ham4rikan. These subdivisions are the spaces traversed daily by the moon among the stars, generally called ‘lunar mansions.’

5 All these names are written in P&azand, which accounts for their eccentric orthography, in which both K2o and M6 agree very closely. The subdivision Parviz is evidently the Pers. parvén, which includes the Pleiades, and corresponds therefore to the Sanskrit Nakshatra Krittika. This correspondence leads to the identification of the first subdivision, Padévar, with the Nakshatra Asvini. The P&zand names are so corrupt that no reliance can be placed upon them, and the first step towards recovering the true

12 BUNDAHIS.

residing in the world, are committed to them’; so that when the destroyer arrives they overcome the adversary and their own persecution, and the creatures are saved from those adversities.

5. As a specimen of a warlike army, which is destined for battle, they have ordained every single constellation of those 6480 thousand small stars as assistance; and among those constellations four chieftains, appointed on the four sides, are leaders. 6. On the recommendation of those chieftains the many unnumbered stars are specially assigned to the various quarters and various places, as the united strength azd appointed power of those constellations. 7. As it is said that Tistar is the chieftain of the east, Satavés the chieftain of the west, Vanand the chieftain of the south, avd Hapték-ring the chieftain of the north, 8. The great oe which they

Pahlavi names would be to transliterate the Pazand back into Pahlavi characters. The ninth subdivision is mentioned in Chap. VII, 1 by the name Avrak. ,

1 That is, to the zodiacal constellations, which are supposed to have special charge of the welfare of creation.

2 Of these four consteHations or stars, which are said to act as leaders, there is no doubt that Hapt6k-ring, the chieftain of the north, is Ursa Major; and it is usually considered that Tistar, the chieftain of the east, is Sirius ; but the other two chieftains are not so well identified, and there may be some doubt as to the proper stations of the eastern and western chieftains. It is evident, however, that the most westerly stars, visible at any one time of the year, are those which set in the dusk of the evening; and east of these, all the stars are visible during the night as far as those which rise at daybreak, which are the most easterly stars visible at that time of the year. Tistar or Sirius can, therefore, be considered the chieftain of the eastern stars only when it rises before daybreak, which it does at the latter end of summer ; and Haptékring or Ursa Major is due north at midnight (on the meridian below the pole) at about the same time of the year. These stars, there-

CHAPTER I, 5-8. 13

call a G&h (period of the day), which they say is the great one of the middle of the sky, till 7us¢ before the destroyer came was the midday (or south) one of the five, that is, the Rapttvin'.

These stars, there-

CHAPTER I, 5-8. 13

call a G&h (period of the day), which they say is the great one of the middle of the sky, till 7us¢ before the destroyer came was the midday (or south) one of the five, that is, the Rapttvin'.

fore, fulfil the conditions necessary for being chieftains of the east and north at the end of summer, and we must look for stars capable of being chieftains of the south and west at the same season. Now, when Ursa Major is near the meridian below the pole, Fomalhaut is the most conspicuous star near the meridian in the far south, and is probably to be identified with Vanand the chieftain of the south. And when Sirius rises some time before daybreak, Antares (in Scorpio) sets some time after dusk in the evening, and may well be identified with Satavés the chieftain of the west. Assuming that there has been a precession of the equinoxes equivalent to two hours of time, since the idea of these chieftains (which may perhaps be traced to Avesta times) was first formed, it may be calculated that the time of year when these leading stars then best fulfilled that idea was about a month before the autumnal equinox, when Ursa Major would be due north three-quarters of an hour after midnight, and Fomalhaut due south three-quarters of an hour before midnight, Sirius would rise three hours before the sun, and Antares would set three hours after the sun. In the Avesta these leading stars are named Tistrya, Satavaésa, Vanant, and Hapt6i- Tinga (see Tistar Yt. 0, 8, 9, 12, 32, &c., Rashnu Yt. 26-28, Sir6z. 13). ,

1 This translation, though very nearly literal, must be accepted with caution. If the word mas be not a name it can hardly mean anything but ‘great ;’ and that it refers to a constellation appears from Chap. V, 1. The word khéms&k is an irregular form of the Huz. khéms yA, ‘ five,’ and may refer either to the five chieftains (including ‘ the great one’) or to the five Gahs or periods of the day, of which Rapitvin is the midday one (see Chap. XXYV, 9). The object of the text seems to be to connect the Rapitvin Gah with some great mid-sky and midday constellation or star, possibly Regulus, which, about s.c. g60, must have been more in the daylight than any other important star during the seven months of summer, the only time that the Rapftvin G4h can be celebrated (see Chap. XXV, 7-14). Justi has, ‘They call that the great one of the place, which is great in the middle of the sky; they say that before the enemy came it was always midday, that is, Rapitvin.’

14 BUNDAHIS.

XXV, 7-14). Justi has, ‘They call that the great one of the place, which is great in the middle of the sky; they say that before the enemy came it was always midday, that is, Rapitvin.’

14 BUNDAHIS.

g. Adharmazd performed the spiritual Yazisn ceremony with the archangels (ameshéspend4n) in the Rapttvin G4h, and in the Yazisn he supplied every means necessary for overcoming the adversary’. 1o. He deliberated with the consciousness (béd) and guardian spirits (fravahar) of men*, and the omniscient wisdom, brought forward among men, spoke thus: ‘ Which seems to you the more advantageous, when ® I shall present you to the world? ¢hat you shall contend in a bodily form with the fiend (drag), and the fiend shall perish, and in the end I shall have you prepared again perfect and immortal, and in the end give you back to the world, and you will be wholly immortal, undecaying, and undisturbed ; or ¢#at it be always necessary to provide you protection from the destroyer ?’

11. Thereupon, the guardian spirits of men became of the same opinion with the omniscient wisdom about going to the world, on account of the evil ‘hat comes upon them, in the world, from the fiend (drig) Aharman, and ¢hezr becoming, at last, again unpersecuted by the adversary, perfect, and immortal, in the future existence, for ever and everlasting.

Windischmann has nearly the same, as both follow the PAzand MSS. in reading hémfsak (as a variant of hamfsak), ‘always,’ instead of khéms&k.

1 Or ‘adversity.’

* These were among the fravashis already created (see Chap. I, 8).

* Reading amat, ‘when,’ instead of mfin, ‘ which ’ (see note to Chap. I, 7).

CHAPTER II, Q-—III, 5. 15

CuaprTer III.

1. On the rush of the destroyer at the creatures it is said, in revelation, that the evil spirit, when he saw the impotence of himself and the confederate? (ham-dast) demons, owing to the righteous man 2, became confounded, avd seemed in confusion three thousand years. 2. During that confusion the archfiends * of the demons severally shouted thus: ‘Rise up, ¢hou father of us! for we w2// cause a conflict in the world, the distress and injury from which wed? become those of Adharmazd and the archangels.’

3. Severally they twice recounted their own evil deeds, and it pleased him not; and that wicked evil spirit, through fear of the righteous man, was not able to lift up 4s head until the wicked Géh* came, at the completion of the three thousand years. 4. And she shouted to the evil spirit thus: ‘ Rise up, ¢hou father of us! for I wzd/ cause that conflict in the world wherefrom the distress and injury of Atiharmazd and the archangels w¢/ arise. 5. And she twice recounted severally her own evil deeds, and it pleased him not; and that wicked evil spirit

? The P&zand MSS. have gar6ist, for the Huz. hémnunast, ‘trusted.’ Windischmann and Justi have ‘all.’

? Probably Gayémard.

5. And she twice recounted severally her own evil deeds, and it pleased him not; and that wicked evil spirit

? The P&zand MSS. have gar6ist, for the Huz. hémnunast, ‘trusted.’ Windischmann and Justi have ‘all.’

? Probably Gayémard.

5 The word kamfrak4n is literally ‘those with an evil pate,’ and is derived from Av. kameredha, ‘the head of an evil being,’ also applied to ‘the evil summit’ of Mount Arezfira (Vend. XIX, 140, 142), which is supposed to be at the gate of hell (see Chap. XII, 8). That the chief demons or arch-fiends are meant, appears more clearly in Chap. XXVIII, 12, 44, where the word is kam4rik&n.

* The personification of the impurity of menstruation.

16 BUNDAHIs.

_rose not from that confusion, through fear of the righteous man.

6. And, again, the wicked Géh shouted thus: ‘Rise up, ¢kou father of us! for in that conflict I will shed thus much vexation! on the righteous man and the labouring ox that, through my deeds, life w2d7 not be wanted, and I will destroy their living souls (nism4)?; I wz/? vex the water, I wz// vex the plants, I wd? vex the fire of Adharmazd, I wll make the whole creation of Afharmazd vexed.’ 7. And she so recounted those evil deeds a second time, that the evil spirit was delighted and started up from that confusion; and he kissed Géh upon the head, and the pollution which they call menstruation became apparent in Géh.

8. He shouted to Géh thus: ‘ What is thy wish ? so that I may give z¢ thee.’ And Géh shouted to the evil spirit thus: ‘A man is the wish, so give z¢ to me.’

9. The form of the evil spirit was a log-like lizard’s (vazak) body, and he appeared a young man of fifteen years to Géh, and that brought the thoughts: of Géh to him *

1 The word vésh or vish may stand either for bésh, ‘distress, vexation, as here assumed, or for vish, ‘ poison,’ as translated by Windischmann and Justi in accordance with the Paz. MSS.

* That this is the Huzvaris of rfib4n, ‘soul,’ appears from Chap. XV, 3-5, where both words are used indifferently; but it is not given in the Huz.-Paz. Glossary. It is evidently equivalent to Chald. nism 4, and ought probably to have the traditional pronunciation nisman, an abbreviation of nismman.

5 This seems to be the literal meaning of the sentence, and is confirmed by Chap. XXVIII, 1, but Windischmann and Justi understand that the evil spirit formed a youth for Géh out ofa toad’s body. The incident in the text may be compared with Milton’s idea of Satan and Sin in Paradise Lost, Book II, 745-765.

CHAPTER III, 6-16. 17

10. Afterwards, the evil spirit, with the confederate demons, went towards the luminaries, and he saw the sky; and he led them up, fraught with malicious intentions. 11. He stood upon one-third? of the inside of the sky, and he sprang, like a snake; out of the sky down to the earth.

12, Jw the month Fravardin and the day Adharmazd? he rushed in at noon, and thereby the sky was as shattered and frightened by him, as a sheep by a wolf. 13. He came on to the water which was arranged* below the earth, and then the middle of this earth was pierced and entered by him. 14. Afterwards, he came to the vegetation, then to the ox, then to GAyémard, and then he came to fire‘; so, just like a fly, he rushed out upon the whole creation; and he made the world quite as injured and dark*® at midday as though it were in dark night. 15. And noxious creatures were diffused by him over the earth, biting and venomous, such as the snake, scorpion, frog (kalv4k), and lizard (vazak), so that not so much as the point of a needle remained /vee from noxious creatures. 16. And blight® was diffused by him over the

1 Perhaps referring to the proportion of the sky which is overspread by the darkness of night. The whole sentence is rather obscure.

* The vernal equinox (see Chap. XXV, 7).

* Literally, ‘and it was arranged.’

‘ For the details of these visitations, see Chaps. VI-X.

® Reading khfst t6m; but it may be hangf¢t(im, ‘most turbid, opaque.’

* The word makhé, ‘blow, stroke,’ is a Huzvaris logogram not found in the glossaries; M6 has d4r, ‘wood,’ but this may be a misreading, due to the original, from which M6 was copied, being difficult to read.

(5) Cc

18 BUNDAHIS.

vegetation, and it withered away immediately. 17. And avarice, want, pain, hunger, disease, lust, and lethargy were diffused by him abroad upon the ox and Gayémard.

18. Before zs coming to the ox, Aftharmazd ground up the healing fruit?, which some call ‘btndk,’ small in water openly before zés eyes, so that z¢s damage and discomfort from the calamity (zanisn) might be less; and when it became at the same time lean and ill, as z¢s breath went forth and it passed away, the ox also spoke thus: ‘The cattle are to be created, amd their work, labour, and care are to be appointed.’

19. And before 4zs coming to Gayémard, Atharmazd brought forth a sweat upon Gdydémard, so long as he might recite a prayer (v4g) of one stanza (viast); moreover, Afharmazd formed that sweat into the youthful body of a man of fifteen years, radiant and tall. 20. When Gayémard issued from the sweat he saw the world dark as night, and the earth as though not a needle’s point remained free from noxious creatures; the celestzal sphere was in revolution, azd the sun and moon remained in motion: and the world’s struggle, owing to the clamour of the Ma4zintkan demons ?, was with the constellations.

21.‘And the evil spirit thought that the creatures of Afharmazd were all rendered useless except

1 The word mfvang is an unusual form of mivak, ‘fruit.’ It is probably to be traced to an Av. mivangh, which might mean ‘fatness,’ as Windischmann suggests. _

* The MAzainya daéva of the Avesta, and Mazendar4n demons, or idolators, of Persian legends.

CHAPTER III, 17-27. 19

Gayémard;jand Asté-vidad! with a thousand demons, causers of death, were let forth by him on Gayémard. 22. But his appointed time had not come, and he (Asté-vid4a@) obtained no means of noosing (4viztdan6) him, as it is said that, when the opposition of the evil spirit came,{the period of the life and rule of GAyémard was appointed for thirty years.| 23. (After the coming of the adversary he lived thirty years] and Gayémard spoke thus: ‘Although the destroyer 4as come, mankind wzé7 be all of my race; and this one thing is good, when they perform duty and good works.’

24. And, afterwards, he (the evil spirit) came to fire, and he mingled smoke and darkness with it. 25. The planets, with many demons, dashed against the celestial sphere, and they mixed the constellations; and the whole creation was as disfigured as though fire disfigured every place and smoke arose over 24, 26. And ninety days and nights the heavenly angels were contending in the world with the confederate demons of the evil spirit, avd hurled them confounded to hell; and the rampart of the sky was formed so that the adversary should not be able to mingle with it.

27. Hell is in the middle of the earth; there where the evil spirit pierced the earth? and rushed in upon it, fs all the possessions of the world were

1 The demon of death, Ast6-vidh6tu in the Avesta (Vend. IV, 137, V, 25, 31), who is supposed ‘to cast a halter around the necks of the dead to drag them to hell, but if their good works have exceeded their sins they throw off the noose and go to heaven’ (Haug’s Essays, and ed. p. 321). This name is misread Astivihad by Pazand writers.

® See § 13.

20 BUNDAHIS.

changing into duality, ad persecution, contention, and mingling of high and low became manifest. }

CuaprTer IV.

1. This also is said, that when the primeval ox’ passed away it fell to the right hand, avd Gayémard afterwards, when he passed away, to the left hand. 2. Gésfrvan*, as the soul of the primeval ox came out from the body of the ox, stood up before the ox and cried to Afharmazd, as much as a thousand men when they sustain a cry at one time, thus: ‘With whom is the guardianship of the creatures left by thee, when ruin 4as broken into the earth, and vegetation is withered, and water is troubled ? Where is the man® of whom it was said by thee thus: I wz? produce him, so that he may preach carefulness ?’

Where is the man® of whom it was said by thee thus: I wz? produce him, so that he may preach carefulness ?’

3. And Adharmazd spoke thus: ‘ You are made ill‘, O Géstrvan! you have the illness which the evil spirit brought on ; if it were proper to produce that man in this earth at this time, the evil spirit would not have been oppressive in it.’

? Literally, ‘ the sole-created ox’ from whom all the animals and some plants are supposed to have proceeded (see Chaps. X and XIV), as mankind proceeded from GAyémard. It is the ox of the primitive creation, mentioned in Chap. III, 14, 18.

® The spiritual representative of the primeval ox, called Geusurv4, ‘soul of the bull,’ in the Avesta, of which name Gésfirvan is a corruption. The complaint of Gésfirvan is recorded in the G§Athas, the oldest part of the Avesta (see Yas. XXIX).

5 Referring to Zarat(st.

* In Kao, ‘ You are ill.’

CHAPTER IV, I-V, I. 21

4. Forth Gésfrvan walked to the star station (payak) and cried in the same manner, and forth to the moon station avd cried in the same manner, and forth to the sun station, and then the guardian spirit of Zaratfist was exhibited to her, and Atharmazd said thus!: ‘I will produce for the world 42m who will preach carefulness.’ 5. Contented became the spirit Gésirvan, and assented thus: ‘1 will nourish the creatures ;’ that is, she became again consenting to a worldly creation in the world.

CuHapTer V.

1. Seven chieftains of the planets have come unto the seven chieftains of the constellations?, as the planet Mercury (Tir) unto Ttstar, the planet Mars (Vahram) unto Haptdék-ring, the planet Jupiter (Aftharmazd) unto Vanand, the planet Venus (Anahid) unto Satavés, the planet Saturn (Kév4n) unto the great ove of the middle of the sky, Gééihar *

1 As the text stands in the MSS. it means, ‘and then the guardian spirit of Zaratist demonstrated to her thus;’ but whether it be intended to represent the fravdhar as producing the creature is doubtful. The angel Gés, who is identified with Gésfrvan, is usually considered a female, but this is hardly consistent with being the soul of a bull (see Chap. X, 1, 2), though applicable enough to a representative of the earth. In the Selections of Z4d-sparam, IJ, 6, however, this mythological animal is said to have been a female (see Appendix to Bundahis).

* Five of these are mentioned in Chap. II, 7, 8, to which the sun and moon are here added.

* As this name stands in the MSS. it may be read Gdrgd4r (as in the Paz. MSS.), GarMhar, or Dfréthar ; the reading is very uncertain, and Windischmann suggests Gfirg-Aihar, ‘wolf progeny’ (compare vehrk6-4ithra in Ardabahist Yast 8). A shooting star,

22 BUNDAHIS.

and the thievish (daggun) Maspar’, provided with tails, unto the sun and moon and stars. 2. The sun has attached Maspar to its own radiance by mutual agreement, so that he may be less able to do harm (vinas),

A shooting star,

22 BUNDAHIS.

3. Of Mount Albfrz? it is declared, that around the world and Mount Térak 3, which is the middle of the world, the revolution of the sun is like a moat * around the world; it turns back in a circuit ® owing to the enclosure (var) of Mount Albdrz around Térak. 4. As it is said that z¢# zs the Térak of Albtrz from behind which my sun and moon aad stars return again®. 5. For there are a hundred

or meteor, is probably meant (see Chap. XXX, 18, 31), and as it is the special disturber of the moon, it may be Gé-Aihar (Av. gao- Aithra, ‘of ox-lineage’), a common epithet of the moon; the Pahlavi letter 4 being often written something like the compound rk; and this supposition is confirmed by the Gék-Aihar of TD in Chap. XXVIII, 44.

1 This is written M@s-parfk in TD in Chap. XXVIII, 44, and seems to be the mfs pairika of Yas. XVII, 46, LXVII, 23, as noticed by Windischmann ; it is probably meant here for a comet, as it is attached to the sun. The zodiacal light and milky way have too little of the wandering character of planets to be considered planetary opponents of the sun and moon.

3 The hara berezaiti, ‘lofty mountain-range,’ of the Avesta, which is an ideal representative of the loftiest mountains known to the ancient Iranians, the Alburz range in M4zendar4n, south of the Caspian. See Chaps. VIII, 2, XII, 1, 3.

° The Taéra of Yas. XLI, 24, Ram Yt. 7, Zamyad Yt. 6. See Chap. XII, 2, 4.

« The word may4-gtr is a Huz. hybrid for 4v-gir, ‘a waterholder, or ditch.’

5 The word may be either 4végak or khavtgak, with this meaning.

* This appears to be a quotation from the Rashnu Yast, 25. The Huz. word for ‘month’ is here used for the ‘ moon.’

CHAPTER V, 2-6. 23

and eighty apertures (régin) in the east, and a hundred and eighty in the west, through Albarz; and the sun, every day, comes in through an aperture, and goes out through an aperture’; azd the whole connection and motion of the moon and constellations and planets is with it: every day it always illumines (or warms) three regions (késhvar)* and a half, as is evident to the eyesight. 6. And twice in every year the day and night are equal, for on the original attack *, when‘ it (the sun) went forth from its first degree (khardak), the day and night were equal, it was the season of spring; when it arrives at the first degree of KalaZang (Cancer) the time of day is greatest, z¢ 7s the beginning of summer; when it arrives at the sign (khfirdak) Taragdk (Libra) the day and night are equal, z¢ zs the beginning of autumn; when it arrives at the sign Vahtk (Capricorn) the night is a maximum, 2¢ zs the beginning of winter ; and when it arrives at Varak (Aries) the night and day fave again become equal, as when it

' This mode of accounting for the varying position of sunrise and sunset resembles that in the Book of Enoch, LXXI, but only six eastern and six western gates of heaven are there mentioned, and the sun changes its gates of entrance and exit only once a month, instead of daily.

2 See § g and Chap. XI.

5 The reading of this word is doubtful, although its meaning is tolerably clear. The Paz. MSS. read har dé, ‘ both ;’ Justi reads ardab, ‘ quarrel ;’ and in the Selections of Z4d-sparam it is written Ardik. It seems probable that the word is kharah, ‘attack,’ which being written exactly like ardé (Av. ashya, see Yas. LVI, 1, 1) has had a circumflex added to indicate the supposed d, and this false reading has led to the more modern form 4raik (Pers. ard, ‘anger’). But probabilities in obscure matters are often treacherous guides.

“ Reading amat, ‘when,’ instead of mfin, ‘ which,’ throughout the sentence (see note to Chap. I, 7).

24 BUNDAHIS.

went forth from Varak. 7. So that when it comes back to Varak, in three hundred and sixty days and the five Gatha days’, it goes in and comes out through one and the same aperture ; the aperture is not mentioned, for if it had been mentioned the demons would have known the secret, and been able to introduce disaster.

8. From there where the sun comes on on the longest day to where it comes on on the shortest day is the east region Savah ; from there where it comes on on the shortest day to where it goes off on the shortest day is the direction of the south regions Fradadafsh and Vidadafsh; from there where it goes in on the shortest day to where it goes in on the longest day is the west region Arzah; from there where it comes in on the longest day to there where it goes in on the longest day are the north regions Vérdbarst and Vérigarst*. 9. When the sun comes on, it illumines (or warms) the regions of Savah, Fradadafsh, Vidadafsh, and half of Khvantras?; when it goes in on the dark side, it illumines the regions of Arzah, Vérfbarst, Vérdgarst, and one half of Khvantras; when z¢ zs day here z¢ ts night there.

* The five supplementary days added to the last of the twelve months, of thirty days each, to complete the year. For these days no additional apertures are provided in Albfirs, and the sun appears to have the choice of either of the two centre apertures out of the 180 on each side of the world. This arrangement seems to ‘indicate that the idea of the apertures is older than the rectification of the calendar which added the five Gatha days to an original year of 360 days. :

2 This sentence occurs, without the names of the késhvars or regions, in the Pahl. Vend. XIX, 19. For the késhvars see Chap. XI.

5 Often corrupted into Khanfras in the MSS.

CHAPTER V, 7—VII, I. 25

CuHapTer VI.

2 This sentence occurs, without the names of the késhvars or regions, in the Pahl. Vend. XIX, 19. For the késhvars see Chap. XI.

5 Often corrupted into Khanfras in the MSS.

CHAPTER V, 7—VII, I. 25

CuHapTer VI.

1.'On the conflict of the creations of the world with the antagonism of the evil spirit it is said in revelation, that the evil spirit, even as he rushed in and looked upon the pure bravery of the angels and his own violence, wished to rush backy 2. The spirit of the sky is himself like one of the warriors who has put on armour ; he arrayed the sky against the evil spirit, and led on in the contest, until Aftharmazd had completed a rampart around, stronger than the sky and in front of the sky. 3. And his guardian spirits (frav4har) of warriors and the righteous, on war horses and spear in hand, were around the sky; such-like as the hair on the head is the similitude (@nguntattak) of those who hold the watch of the rampart. 4. ‘And no passage was found by the evil spirit, who rushed back; and he beheld the annihilation of the demons and his own impotence, as Afharmazd ad his own final triumph, producing the renovation of the unzverse for ever and everlasting. |

CuarpTer VII. 1. The second conflict was waged with the water, because, as the star Ttstar was in Cancer, the water which is in the subdivision they call Avrak* was

1 This is the doubtful word translated ‘attack’ in Chap. V, 6 (see the note there) ; it also occurs at the beginning of each of the following four chapters.

* Reading zérfh; but it may be zfirfh, ‘ falsity.”

* The ninth lunar mansion (see Chap. II, 3) corresponding with the middle of Cancer. Tistar (Sirius) being in Cancer probably

26 BUNDAHISs.

pouring, on the same day when the destroyer rushed in, and came again into notice for mischief (Avarak) in the direction of the west. 2. For every single month is the owner of one constellation; the month Ttr is the fourth month! of the year, azd Cancer the fourth constellation from Aries, so it is the owner of Cancer, into which Tistar sprang, ad displayed the characteristics of a producer of rain; and he brought on the water aloft by the strength of the wind. 3. Co-operators with Tistar were VohQman and the angel Hém, with the assistance of the angel Bfrg and the righteous guardian spirits in orderly arrangement. .

4. Tistar was converted into three forms, the form of a man and the form of a horse and the form of a bull?; thirty days and nights he was distinguished in brilliance’, and in each form he produced rain ten days and nights; as the astrologers say that every constellation has three forms. 5. Every single drop of that rain became as big as a bowl, and the water stood the height of a man over the whole of this earth ; avd the noxious creatures on the earth being all killed by the rain, went into the holes of the earth ¢.

means that it rises about the same time as the stars of Cancer, as is actually the case.

1 See Chap. XXV, 20.

means that it rises about the same time as the stars of Cancer, as is actually the case.

1 See Chap. XXV, 20.

2 See Tistar Yt. 13, 16, 18, where it is stated that Tistar assumes the form of a man for the first ten nights, of a bull for the second ten nights, and of a horse for the third ten nights. Also in Vend. XIX, 126 Tistar is specially invoked in his form of a bull.

5 Or it may be translated, ‘ he hovered in the light,’ as Windischmann and Justi have it.

‘ In comparing the inundation produced by Tistar with the Noachian deluge, it must be recollected that the former is represented as occurring before mankind had propagated on the earth.

CHAPTER VII, 2-10. 27

6. And, afterwards, the wind spirit, so that it may not be contaminated (gimtkht), stirs up the wind and atmosphere as the life stirs in the body; and the water was all swept away by it, and was brought out to the borders of the earth, and the wide-formed? ocean arose therefrom. 7. The noxious creatures remained dead within the earth, and their venom and stench were mingled with the earth, and in order to carry that poison away from the earth Tistar went down into the ocean in the form of a white horse with long hoofs”.

8. And Apdadésh 8, the demon, came meeting him in the likeness of a black horse with clumsy (kund) hoofs; a mile (parasang)* away from him fled Ttstar, through the fright which drove 42m away. 9. And Tistar begged for success from Adharmazd, and Afharmazd gave Aim strength and power, as it is said, that unto Ttstar was brought at once the strength of ten vigorous horses, ten vigorous camels, ten vigorous bulls, ten mountains, and ten rivers ® 10. A mile away from him fled Ap4adsh, the demon, through fright at 42s strength; on account of this they speak of an arrow-shot with Ttstar’s strength in the sense of a mile.

1 The term far&khf-kard, ‘wide-formed,’ is a free Pahlavi translation of Av. vouru-kasha, ‘ wide-shored,’ or ‘having wide abysses,’ applied to the boundless ocean (see Chap. XIII, 1).

2 For the Avesta account of this expedition of Tistar, see Tistar Yt. 20-29.

® Miswritten Apavs or Apavas in Pazand, by all MSS. in this chapter, but see Chap. XXVIII, 39.

‘ The word parasang is here used for Av. hathra, which was about an English mile (see Chap. XXVI, 1).

5 A quotation from Tistar Yt. 25.

28 BUNDAHIS.

20-29.

® Miswritten Apavs or Apavas in Pazand, by all MSS. in this chapter, but see Chap. XXVIII, 39.

‘ The word parasang is here used for Av. hathra, which was about an English mile (see Chap. XXVI, 1).

5 A quotation from Tistar Yt. 25.

28 BUNDAHIS.

11. Afterwards, with a cloud for a jar (khQmb)— thus they call the measure which was a means of the work—he seized upon the water and made it rain most prodigiously, in drops “e bull’s heads and men’s heads, pouring in handfuls amd pouring in armfuls, both great and small. 12. On the production of that rain the demons Aspengargék! and Ap4ésh contended with it, and the fire VAzist * turned z¢s club over; and owing to the blow of the club Aspengarg4k made a very grievous noise, as even now, in a conflict with the producer of rain, a groaning and raging® are manifest. 13. And ten nights and days rain was produced by him in that manner, and the poison and venom of the noxious creatures which were in the earth were all mixed up in the water, and the water became quite salt, because there remained in the earth some of those germs which noxious creatures ever collect.

14. Afterwards, the wind, in the same manner as before, restrained the water, at the end of three days, on various sides of the earth; and the three great seas and twenty-three small seas‘ arose therefrom, and two fountains (kashmak) of the sea thereby became manifest, one the Aé#ast lake, and one the Sévbar 5, whose sources are connected with the

1 Mentioned in Vend. XIX, 135, thus: ‘thou shouldst propitiate the fire VAzista, the smiter of the demon Spengaghra.’ It is also written Spéngargék in Chap. XVII, 1, and Aspengardg4 in Chap. XXVIII, 39.

* That is, the lightning (see Chap. XVII, 1).

5 Or, ‘a tumult and flashing.’ Justi has ‘ howling and shrieking;’ the two words being very ambiguous in the € original.

* See Chap. XIII, 6.

5 See Chap. XXII, 1-3.

CHAPTER VII, II-—VIII, 2. 29

fountain of the sea. 15. And at its north side? two rivers flowed out, avd went one to the east and one to the west; they are the Arag river and the Véh river; as it is said thus: ‘Through those fingerbreadth tricklings do thou pour avd draw forth two such waters, O Afharmazd!’ 16. Both those rivers wind about through all the extremities of the earth, and intermingle again with the water of the wideformed ocean. 17. As those two rivers flowed out, and from the same place of origin as theirs, eighteen? navigable rivers flowed out, and after the other waters have flowed out from those navigable streams they all flow back to the Arag® river and Véh river, whose fertilization (khv4apard4rth) of the world arises therefrom.

Cuapter VIII.

o. On the conflict which the evil spirit waged with the earth.

1. As the evil spirit rushed in, the earth shook 4,

and the substance of mountains was created in the earth. 2. First, Mount Albdrz arose; afterwards,

Cuapter VIII.

o. On the conflict which the evil spirit waged with the earth.

1. As the evil spirit rushed in, the earth shook 4,

and the substance of mountains was created in the earth. 2. First, Mount Albdrz arose; afterwards,

1 Probably meaning the north side of the ArédvivsOr fountain of the sea, which is said to be on the lofty Hagar, a portion of Albfirs, from the northern side of which these two semi-mythical rivers are said to flow (see Chaps. XII, 5, XX, 1).

7 See Chap. XX, 2.

* Here written Aréng, but the usual Pahlavi reading is Arag; the nasal of the Av. Rangha being generally omitted in Pahlavi, as other nasals are sometimes; thus we often find sag for sang, ‘ stone.’

‘ The word gudnid is a transposition of gundid, a graphical ' variant of gunbid, ‘ shook.’

30 BUNDAHIS.

the other ranges of mountains (kéfanth4) of the middle of the earth; for as Albdrz grew forth all the mountains remained in motion, for they have all grown forth from the root of Albfrz. 3. At that time they came up from the earth, like a tree which has grown up to the clouds and zts root! to the bottom; and their root passed on that way from one to the other, amd they are arranged in mutual connection. 4. Afterwards, about that wonderful shaking out from the earth, they say that a great mountain is the knot of lands; and the passage for the waters within the mountains is the root which is below the mountains; they forsake the upper parts so that they may flow into it, just as the roots of trees pass into the earth; a counterpart (4ngunt- ~attak) of the blood in the arteries of men, which gives strength to the whole body. 5. In numbers’, apart from Albdrz, all the mountains grew up out of the earth in eighteen years*, from which avzses the perfection * of men’s advantage.

Cuapter IX.

1. The conflict waged with plants was that when® they became quite dry. 2. Amerddad the arch-

? M6 has rak&k, but this and many other strange words are probably due to the copyist of that MS. having an original before him which was nearly illegible in many places.

* Or, ‘as it were innumerable ;’ the word amar meaning both ‘number’ and ‘innumerable.’

8 See Chap. XII, 1.

* The word must be farhakhtag4n, ‘proprieties,’ both here and in Chap. [XS 6, as farhakhtisn is an ungrammatical form.

5 Reading amat, ‘ when,’ instead of mfin, ‘ which’ (see the note to Chap. I, 7).

CHAPTER VIII, 3—X, I. 31

angel, as the vegetation was his own, pounded the plants small, azd mixed ¢hem up with the water which Tistar seized, and Tistar made that water rain down upon the whole earth. 3. On the whole earth plants grew up like hair upon the heads of men. 4. Ten thousand! of them grew forth of one special description, for keeping away the ten thousand species of disease whzch the evil spirit produced for the creatures; and from those ten thousand, the 100,000 species? of plants have grown forth.

4. Ten thousand! of them grew forth of one special description, for keeping away the ten thousand species of disease whzch the evil spirit produced for the creatures; and from those ten thousand, the 100,000 species? of plants have grown forth.

5. From that same germ of plants the tree of all germs* was given forth, avd grew up in the wideformed ocean, from which the germs of all species of plants ever increased. 6. And near to that tree of all germs the Gékard tree‘ was produced, for keeping away deformed (ddspad) decrepitude; and the full perfection of the world arose therefrom.

CyapTeR X.

o. On the conflict waged with the primeval ox.

1. As it passed away’, owing to the vegetable principle (Atharak) proceeding from every limb of the ox, fifty and five species of grain® and twelve species of medicinal plants grew forth from the earth, and their splendour and strength were the

1 See Chap. XXVII, 2.

* Here 120,000 are mentioned, but see Chap. XXVII, 2, and Selections of Z4d-sparam, VIII, 2.

® Or, ‘of all seeds’ (see Chap. XVIII, 9).

* The white-Hém tree (see Chaps. XVIII, 1-6, XXVII, 4).

® See Chap. IV, 1. ® See Chaps. XIV, 1, XXVII, 2.

32 BUNDAHIS.

seminal energy (t6khmth) of the ox. 2. Delivered to the moon station’, that seed was thoroughly-purified by the light of the moon, fully prepared in every way, and produced life in a body. 3. Thence arose two oxen, one male and one female; and, afterwards, two hundred and eighty-two species of each kind* became manifest upon the earth. 4. The dwelling (mantst) of the birds is in the air, and the fish are in the midst of the water.

CuapTer XI.

1. On the nature of the earth it says in revelation, that ¢keve are thirty and three kinds® of land. 2. On the day when Ttstar produced the rain, when its seas arose therefrom, the whole place, half taken up by water, was converted into seven portions; this portion‘, as much as one-half, is the middle, and six portions are around; those six portions are fogether as much as Khvaniras. 3. The name

1 See Chap. XIV, 3. In the Mah Yt. 0, 7, blessings are invoked for ‘the moon of ox lineage’ (gao4ithra) in conjunction with the ‘sole-created ox and the ox of many species.’ In the Avesta the gender of these two primeval oxen appears doubtful, owing probably to the dual gen. masc. of their epithets being of the same form as a sing. gen. fem.

2 That is, of each sex. See Chap. XIV, 13, 27. In all three occurrences of this number K2o has 272, but all other MSS. have 282 (except M6 in this place only).

5 K2ob has ‘thirty-two kinds,’

“ That is, Khvaniras; or it may be ‘one portion,’ as han4, ‘this,’ is often used for aé, ‘one,’ because the Pazand form of both words is ¢,

CHAPTER X, 2—XI, 5. 33

have 282 (except M6 in this place only).

5 K2ob has ‘thirty-two kinds,’

“ That is, Khvaniras; or it may be ‘one portion,’ as han4, ‘this,’ is often used for aé, ‘one,’ because the Pazand form of both words is ¢,

CHAPTER X, 2—XI, 5. 33

késhvar (‘zone or region’) is also applied to them, and ¢hey existed side by side (kash kash)?; as on the east side of this portion (Khvantras) is the Savah region, om the west is the Arzah region; the two portions on the south side are the Fradadafsh and Vidadafsh regions, the two portions on the north side are the Vérdbarst and Vordgarst regions, and that in the middle is Khvantras. 4. And Khvantras has the sea, for one part of the wide-formed ocean wound about around it; and from Véribarst and Vordgarst a lofty mountain grew up; so that it is not possible for any one to go from region to region *,

5. And of these seven regions every benefit was created most in Khvantras, and the evil spirit also produced most for Khvantras, on account of the superiority (sarih)? which he saw in it. 6. For the Kay4nians and heroes were created in Khvanirds ; and the good religion of the Mazdayasnians was created in Khvantras, and afterwards conveyed to the other regions ; Séshyans‘ is born in Khvantras, who makes the evil spirit impotent, and causes the resurrection and future existence.

1 Possibly an attempt to connect the term késhvar with kash; but the sentence may also be translated thus: ‘and ¢hey formed various districts like this portion; on the east side is the Savah region,’ &c.

* In the Pahlavi Vend. I, 4a, and in the Mainy6-i-khard, IX, 6, it is added, ‘except with the permission of the angels’ or the demons. ,

8 So in M6; but K2o has zad4rth, which would imply, ‘ for the destruction of what he saw of it.’

« Always spelt so in the Bundahis MSS. Kzo and M6, and corrupted into Séshyés in Pazand; but it is more usually written Sésh4ns in other Pahlavi works, and its Avesta form is Saoshyas (see Chap. XXXII, 8).

(s] D

34 BUNDAHIS.

CuaPtTer XII.

Kzo and M6, and corrupted into Séshyés in Pazand; but it is more usually written Sésh4ns in other Pahlavi works, and its Avesta form is Saoshyas (see Chap. XXXII, 8).

(s] D

34 BUNDAHIS.

CuaPtTer XII.

1. On the nature of mountains it says in revelation, that, at first, the mountains have grown forth in eighteen years; and Albdrz ever grew till the completion of eight hundred years; two hundred years up to the star station (payak), two hundred years to the moon station, two hundred years to the sun station, and two hundred years to the endless light’. 2. While the other mountains have grown out of Albfrz, in number 2244 mountains, azd are Hagar the lofty’, Térak of Albdrz, Kak4d-i-DAittk, and the Arezfir ridge, the Afdstnd6m mountain, Mount Ap4rsén which they say is the mountain of Pars, Mount Zarid also which is Mount MaAnts, Mount Atra#, Mount Kaf, Mount Vadgés, Mount Adshdastér, Mount Arezfr-bOm, Mount Rdéyisnhémand, Mount Padashkhvargar which is the greatest in Khvdrth, the mountain which they call Kind, Mount Révand, Mount Dérspét the Bakyir mountain, Mount Kabed-sikaft, Mount Sty4k-matmand, Mount Vafar-hémand, Mount Spendy4d and Kéndrasp, Mount Asnavand and Kéndras, Mount

1 These are the four grades of the Mazdayasnian heaven.

* In all the geographical details, mentioned in the Bundahis, there is a strange mixture of mythical tradition with actual fact. The author of the work finds names mentioned in the Avesta, by old writers of another country, and endeavours to identify them with places known to himself; much in the same way as attempts have been made to identify the geographical details of the garden of Eden. Most of the names of these mountains occur in the Zamy4d Yast, or in other parts of the Avesta, as will be noticed in detail further on. The number 2244 is also mentioned in § 7 of that Yast. A very able commentary on this chapter will be found in Windischmann’s Zoroastriche Studien, pp. 1-19.

CHAPTER XII, I-6. 35

Sifidav}, a mountain among those which are in Kangdez *, of which they say that they are a comfort and delight of the good creator, the smaller hills.

3. I weld mention them also a second time; Albdrz? is around this earth and is connected with the sky. 4. The Térak* of Albdrz is that through which the stars, moon, amd sun pass® in, and through it they come back. 5. Hagar the lofty® is that from which the water of Arédvivsir’ leaps down the height of a thousand men. 6. The Afstndém* mountain is that which, being of ruby

1 The Av. Sitidava of Zamy4d Yt. 5.

2 See Chap. XXIX, 4, 10; the name is here written Kandes in K2o. In M6 the word is kéf, ‘ mountain,’ which is almost identical in form; if this be the correct reading, the translation will be, ‘a mountain among those in the mountain which they say is agreeable and the delight,’ &c. This mountain is, however, probably intended for the Av. Antare-kangha, ‘ within Kangha,’ of Zamy4d Yt. 4.

This mountain is, however, probably intended for the Av. Antare-kangha, ‘ within Kangha,’ of Zamy4d Yt. 4.

3 The Haraiti-bares of Zamyad Yt. 1; but it is more usually called Hara berezaiti (see Chap. V, 3).

* A central peak of the mythic Albfirz, around which the heavenly bodies are said to revolve (see Chap. V, 3). It is the Av. Taéra, mentioned in Yas. XLI, 24, Ram Yt. 7, Zamy4d Yt. 6.

5 So in M6, but K2o0 has ‘go in.’

* This appears to be another peak of the mythic Albfrs, probably in the west, as it is connected with Satavés, the western chieftain of the constellations (see Chaps. XXIV, 17, and II, 7). It is the Av. Hukairya berezé, of Yas. LXIV, 14, Aban Yt. 3, 25, 96, Gés Yt. 8, Mihir Yt. 88, Rashnu Yt. 24, Fravardin Yt. 6, RAm Yt. 15.

7 See Chap. XIII, 3-5.

® In Afiharmazd Yt. 31 and Zamy4d Yt. 2, 66, an Ushidh4o mountain is mentioned as having many mountain waters around it, but this seems to be a near neighbour of the Ushidarena mountain (see § 15). The details in the text correspond with the description of the Hindva mountain, given in Tfstar Yt. 32, thus: us Hindvad paiti garéid yd histaiti maidhfm zrayanghé vouru-kashahé, ‘up on the Hindva mountain, which stands amid the wide-shored

36 BUNDAHIS,

(khin-ahind), of the substance of the sky’, is 7 the midst of the wide-formed ocean, so that its water, which is from Hagar, pours down into it (the ocean), 7. Kak&éd-i-Datttk (‘the judicial peak’) is that of the middle of the world, the height of a hundred men, on which the Ainvar bridge? stands; and they take account of the soul at that place. 8. The Areziir® ridge [of the AlbOrz mountain] is a summit at the gate of hell, where they always hold the concourse of the demons. 9g. This also is said, that, excepting Albdrz, the Aparsén‘* mountain is the

ocean ;’ and the Pahlavi name, Afisind6m, has probably arisen from the us Hindvad of this passage, as suggested by Justi. (See Chaps. XIII, 5, and XVIII, ro, 11.)

1 The sky is considered to be a true firmament, or hard and indestructible dome.

* The Kinvat6-peretu of the Avesta, mentioned even in the G&thas. In the Pahlavi Vend. XIX, ror, it is stated that ‘they pass across by the Kinvad bridge, whose two extremities are their own heavenly angels, one stands at Aakad-i-D&fiik, and one at Albfrg;’ the former mountain seems not to be mentioned in the Avesta, but the bridge is the path of the soul to the other world ; if righteous the soul passes by it easily over Albfrg (the confines of this world) into paradise, but if wicked it drops off the bridge into hell.

® See Vend. III, 23, XIX, 140. The words in brackets may perhaps be inserted by mistake, but they occur in all MSS. examined, and there is nothing inconsistent with tradition in supposing Arez(ir to be the extreme northern range of the mythic Albfrs which surrounds the earth, being the place where demons chiefly congregate.

The words in brackets may perhaps be inserted by mistake, but they occur in all MSS. examined, and there is nothing inconsistent with tradition in supposing Arez(ir to be the extreme northern range of the mythic Albfrs which surrounds the earth, being the place where demons chiefly congregate.

‘ Justi adopts the reading Harparsén, which occurs in K2o four times out of eleven, but is corrected thrice. Windischmann suggests that this mountain is the Av. skyata (or iskata) upairi-saéna of Yas. X, 29, and Zamy4d Yt. 3, which the Pahlavi translator of the Yasna explains as ‘the Parsén crag.’ It seems to be a general name for the principal mountain ranges in the south and east of Tran, as may be seen on comparing this passage and Chap. XXIV,

CHAPTER XII, 7-15. 37

greatest; the Aparsén mountain they call the mountain of Pars, and its beginning is in Sagastan? and its end in Khdgistén. 10. Mount Mants? is great; the mountain on which Manfséthar was born.

11. The remaining mountains have chiefly grown from those; as it is said that the elevation (afs4rth) of the districts had arisen most around those three mountains*, 12. Mount Airaé‘ is in the middle from Hamad4n to Khvarizem, and has grown from Mount Aparsén. 13. Mount [nd], which is on its east, on the frontier of Tarkistan, is connected also with Apdrsén. 14. Mount Kaf® has grown from the same Mount Aparsén, 15. Mount Atshdas-

28, with Chap. XX, 16, 17, 21, 22, where the Haro, Hétfiimand, Marv, and Balkh rivers are said to spring from Mount Apdrsén ; but its application to the southern range is perhaps due to the etymological attempt, in the text, to connect it with Pars. The Selections of Zad-sparam, VII, 7, have Kinfstén for KhOgistan.

1 This name can also be read Ststan.

2 In § 2 it is also called Zarid, but in Zamy4d Yt. 1 Zeredhé and Aredhé-manusha are mentioned as neighbouring mountains. The word ‘great’ is omitted in M6.

5 That is, around the ranges of Albfirs, Ap&rsén, and M&nts.

‘ Perhaps intended for the Erezishé of Zamyad Yt. 2. The description would apply to any of the mountains near NisApfir.

5 This name is omitted in the MSS., but is taken from § 2 as suggested by Justi. Perhaps it may be connected with ‘ the country of Sént’ (Chap. XV, 29), which is explained as being Xinist4n, probably the land of Samarkand, which place was formerly called Xin, according to a passage in some MSS. of Tabart’s Chronicle, quoted in Ouseley’s Oriental Geography, p. 298.

* Not K4f, nor is it mentioned in the Pahlavi Vend. V, 57, as supposed by Justi; the kaf kép ar4yad of Spiegel’s edition of the Pahlavi text being a misprint for kafaké parayad, ‘it traverses a fissure’ (see Haug’s Essays, 2nd ed. p. 326, note 2).

38 BUNDAHIS.

298.

38 BUNDAHIS.

tar! is in Sagastén. 16. Mount Arezir? is that which is in the direction of Artm. 17. The Padashkhvargar? mountain is that which is in Taparistan and the side of Gilan. 18. The Révand‘ mountain is in Khfrdsan 5, on which the Barzin fire® was established ; and its zame Révand means this, that z¢ is glorious. 19. The Vadgés? mountain is that which is on the frontier of the Vadgésians ; that quarter is full of timber axd full of trees. 20, The Bakyir® mountain is that which Frasiya4v of Tar used as a stronghold, and he made his residence within 2¢; and zz the days of Yim® a myriad towns and cities were erected on its pleasant azd prosperous territory. 21. Mount Kabed-sikaft?* (‘very rugged’)

' 1 The Av. Ushi-darena of Yas. I, 41, II, 54, III, 55, IV, 45, XXII, 31, XXV, 22, AQharmazd Yt. 31, ZamyAd Yt. 0, 2, 97.

? Called Arezfr-bfim in § 2, which name stands for the sixth and seventh mountains, Erezuré6 and Bumyé, in Zamydd Yt. 2. The land of Arfim was the eastern empire of the Romans.

* Evidently the mountain range south of the Caspian, now called Albfrz; but whether this actual Albfirz is to be considered a part of the mythic Albfrz is not very clear.

‘The Av. Raévaus, ‘shining,’ of Zamyad Yt. 6. It is also called the Ridge of Vistdsp (see § 34).

5 Or, ‘the east.’ ® See Chap. XVII, 8.

7 The Av. Vaiti-gaés6, the twelfth mountain in Zamydd Yt. 2; Badghés in Persian.

® In § 2 it is Bakyir, which Justi thinks is another name for Mount Darspét (‘white poplar’); the latter name not being repeated here makes this supposition probable.

®° K2o has rm and M6 has lanman, but both explained by the Paz. gloss Yim, which is also the reading of the Paz. MSS. If the gloss be rejected the most probable translation would be, ‘and tn our days Shatré-rim (or rfmisn), the victorious, erected on it a myriad towns and cities.’

1° Windischmann suggests that this may be intended for the Av. skyata or iskata mentioned in the note on Ap§rsén in § 9.

CHAPTER XII, 16-28. 39

is that in Pars, out of the same Mount Aparsén. 22. Mount Siyaék-hémand (‘being black’) azd Mount Vafar-hdmand (‘having snow’)}, as far as their K4vdl borders, have grown out of it (Apdrsén) towards the direction of Kind. 23. The Spendyad? mountain is in the circuit (var) of Révand®. 24. The Kéndrésp‘ mountain, on the summit of which is Lake Sévbar 5, is in the district (or by the town) of Tas. 25. The Kondrés® mountain is in Airan-vég. 26. The Asnavand’ mountain is in Ataré-patakan. 27. The Réyisn-hémand ® (‘having growth’) mountain is that on which vegetation has grown.

28. Whatever® mountains are those which are in every place of the various districts asd. various

25. The Kondrés® mountain is in Airan-vég. 26. The Asnavand’ mountain is in Ataré-patakan. 27. The Réyisn-hémand ® (‘having growth’) mountain is that on which vegetation has grown.

28. Whatever® mountains are those which are in every place of the various districts asd. various

1 The Av. Sy4maka and Vafrayau of Zamyad Yt. 5; and probably the Siy4h-kéh and Saféd-k6h of Afghanistan. With regard to Kind, see the note on § 13. The former mountain is called Siyak-mfii-mand, ‘having black hair,’ in § 2, which is certainly a more grammatical form than Siy4k-hémand.

2 The Av. Spemté-data of Zamy4d Yt. 6.

® The term var often means ‘lake,’ but we are not informed of any Lake Révand, though a mountain of that name is described in § 18; so it seems advisable to take var here in its wider sense of ‘enclosure, circuit, district.’

* The Av. Kadrva-aspa of Zamy4d Yt. 6.

5 See Chap. XXII, 3. All MSS. have Sébar here.

® If the circumflex be used in Pahlavi to indicate not only the consonant d, but also the vowel f, € when it follows a vowel, as seems probable, this name can be read K6fras; in any case, it is evidently intended for the Av. Kaoirisa in Zamy4d Yt. 6. It is written K6éndras in § 2.

7 The Av. Asnavau of Zamyéd Yt. 5, Atash Nyy. 5, Siréz. 9. See also Chap. XVII, 7.

* The Av. Raoidhité, the eighth mountain of Zamy4d Yt. 2.

® So in M6 and the Paz, MSS., but Keo has, ‘ The country mountains.’

40 BUNDAHIS.

countries, and cause the tillage and prosperity therein, are many z# name and many zw number, and have grown from these same mountains. 29. As Mount Gandvad, Mount Asparég, Mount Pahargar, Mount Dimavand, Mount RAavak, Mount Zarin, Mount Gésbakht, Mount Davad, Mount Migin, and Mount Marak?, which have all grown from Mount Aparsén, of which the other mountains are enumerated. 30. For the Davad? mountain has grown into Khigistan likewise from the Aparsén mountain. 31. The Dimavand* mountain is that in which Bévardsp is bound. 32. From the same Padashkhvargar mountain unto Mount Kimis‘, which they call Mount Madéfry4d (‘Come-to-help ’) — that in which Vistésp routed Arg&asp—is Mount Mtyan-idast (‘mid-plain’)®, azd was broken off from that mountain there. 33. They say, in the war of the religion, when there was confusion among the Iranians it broke off from that mountain, ad slid down zxZo the middle of the plain; the Iranians were saved by

1 This list is evidently intended to include the chief mountains known to the author of the Bundahis, which he could not identify with any of those mentioned in the Avesta.

2 This is the Pazand reading of the name, on which very little reliance can be placed; the Pahlavi can also be read DAnad, and it may be the Deana mountain, 12,000 feet high, near Kaski-zard.

5 See Chap. XXIX, 9. This volcanic mountain, about 20,000 feet high and near Teheran, still retains this ancient Persian name, meaning ‘wintry.’ It is the chief mountain of the Padashkhvargar range, which the Bundahis evidently considers as an offshoot of the Ap&rsén ranges,

‘ The present name of a mountain between Nisdpfr and the desert.

5 The name of a place about midway between Astarabad and Nis4pfir. This mountain is called Migin in § 29, probably from a place called Mezinan in the same neighbourhood.

CHAPTER XII, 29—XIII, I. 4r

it, and it was called ‘Come-to-help’ by them. 34. The Gand4vad? mountain is likewise there, on the Ridge of Vistasp (pfiist-i Vistasp4n)? at the abode of the Barztn-Mitré fire, nine leagues (parasang) to the west. 35. RAvak Btsan® is in Zravakad; this place, some say, is Zravad, some call z¢ Bisan, some Kalk; from this the road of two sides of the mountain is down the middle of a fortress; for this reason, that is, because it is there formed, they call Kalak a fortress; this place they also call within the land of Sarak. 36. Mount Aspardég‘ is established from the country of Lake A’ééast® unto Pars. 37. PAhargar (‘the Pahar range’) is in Khfrds4n. 38. Mount Marak® is in Laran. 39. Mount Zartn is in Tarktstan. 40. Mount Bakht-tan? is in Spahan.

41. The rest, apart from this enumeration, which they reckon as fostering hills of the country in the religion of the Mazdayasnians, are the small hills, those which have grown piecemeal in places.

CuHapTer XIII.

1. On the nature of seas it says in revelation, that the wide-formed ocean keeps one-third of this earth on the south side of the border of Albdrz*, axd so

1 The Pers. Kanfbad, or Gundbad, is near Gumin.

? Another name for Mount Révand (§ 18). See Chap. XVII, 8.

S Probably in Kirm4n.

* The mountain ranges of western Persia, including the Mount Zagros of classical writers.

5 See Chap. XXII, 2.

® Probably the Merkhinah range in northern Lérist4n.

” The Bakhtiyarf range in the province of Ispahan. __

* Or perhaps better: thus: ‘the wide-formed ocean is in the

42 BUNDAHIS.

wide-formed is the ocean that the water of a thousand lakes is held by it, such as the source Arédvivsir}, which some say is the fountain lake. 2. Every particular lake is of a particular kind?, some are great, and some are small; some are so large that a man with a horse might compass ¢em around in forty days*, which is 1700 leagues (parasang) in extent.

2. Every particular lake is of a particular kind?, some are great, and some are small; some are so large that a man with a horse might compass ¢em around in forty days*, which is 1700 leagues (parasang) in extent.

3. Through the warmth and clearness of the water, purifying more than other waters, everything continually flows from the source Arédvivsir. 4. At the south of Mount Albdrz a hundred thousand golden channels are there formed, avd that water goes with warmth and clearness, through the channels, on to Hagar the lofty‘; on the summit of that mountain is a lake®; into that lake it flows, becomes quite purified, and comes back through a different golden channel. 5. At the height of a thousand men an open golden branch from that channel is connected with Mount Adsindém* amid the wideformed ocean; from there one portion flows forth to the ocean for the purification of the sea, avd one portion drizzles in moisture upon the whole of this earth, and all the creations of Atharmazd acquire

direction of the south limit of Albfirz, and possesses one-third of this earth.’

1 The Av. Ardvt sfira of Abn Yt. 1, &c.

® Literally, ‘for every single lake shere 1s a single kind;’ but we may perhaps read 14, ‘not,’ instead of the very similar r4f, ‘for, and translate as follows: ‘every single lake is not of one kind ;’ which expresses very nearly the same meaning.

* Compare Abdn Yt. ror.

* See Chap. XII, 5.

® Lake Urvis (see Chap. XXII, 11).

* See Chaps. XII, 6, and XVIII, ro, rr.

CHAPTER XIII, 2—I1. 43

health from it, and it dispels the dryness of the atmosphere.

6. Of the salt seas three are principal, ad twentythree are small. 7. Of the three which are principal, one is the Pftik, one the Kamrfid, and one the Sahi-bin. 8. Of all three the Pitik! is the largest, in which is a flow and ebb, on the same side as the wide-formed ocean, avd it is joined to the wideformed ocean. 9. Amid this wide-formed ocean, on the Patik side, it has a sea which they call the Gulf (var) of Satavés% 10, Thick and salt the stench * wishes to go from the sea Pfitik to the wide-formed ocean; with a mighty high wind therefrom, the Gulf of Satavés drives away whatever is stench, and whatever is pure and clean goes into the wideformed ocean and the source Arédvivsdr; and that flows back a second ¢me to Patik*. 11. The control® of this sea (the Patik) is connected with the

' The Av. Phitika of Vend. V, 52, 57, and evidently the Persian Gulf.

11. The control® of this sea (the Patik) is connected with the

' The Av. Phitika of Vend. V, 52, 57, and evidently the Persian Gulf.

? So called from the constellation Satavés (§ 12), see Chap. II, 7. The details given in the text are applicable to the Gulf and Sea of ’Uman, the Arabian Sea of Europeans. The description of this Gulf, given in the Pahl. Vend. V, 57, which is rather obscure, is as follows: ‘In purification she impurities flow, in the purity of water, from the sea Pfitik into the wide-formed ocean; at the southernmost side he waser stands back in mist, and the blue body of Satavés stands back around it. Pfittk stands ou/ from the side of Satavés, this is where z/ 7s. From which side it stands is not clear to me. The water comes to Satavés through the bottom; some say that it traverses a fissure.’

’ Perhaps a better reading would be stfirg sr-i géndakth, ‘the intense saltness which is stench.’ The author appears to have had some vague idea of the monsoon.

“ Or, perhaps, ‘ the other (the stench) flows back to Pattk.’

® Reading band; but it may be béd, ‘consciousness, sensitiveness,’

44 BUNDAHIS.

moon and wind; it comes again axzd goes down, in increase and decrease, because of her revolving. 12. The control! also of the Gulf of Satavés is attached to the constellation Satavés, in whose protection are the seas of the southern quarter, just as those on the northern side are in the protection of Haptdék-ring *. 13. Concerning the flow and ebb it is said, that everywhere from the presence of the moon two winds continually blow, whose abode is in the Gulf of Satavés, one they call the down-draught, and one the up-draught; when the up-draught blows zt zs the flow, and when the down-draught blows it is the ebb*, 14. In the other seas there is nothing of the nature of a revolution of the moon therein, and there are no flow and ebb. 15. The sea of Kamrfd@‘ is that which they pass by, in the north, in Taparistan ; that of Sahi-bdn® is in Ardm.

16. Of the small seas that which was most whole-

1 See p. 43, note 5.

® See Chap. II, 7.

§ This is not a confused attempt to explain the tides as the effect of the land and sea breezes, as might be suspected at first, but is a reasonable conclusion from imaginary facts. Assuming that the wind always blows eastward and westward from the moon, it follows that as the moon rises an easterly wind must blow, which may be supposed to drive the flood tide westward into the Persian Gulf; until the moon passes the meridian, when the wind, changing to the west, ought to drive the ebb tide eastward out of the Gulf, thus accounting for one flow and ebb every day, dependent on the position of the moon.

‘ Evidently the Caspian, which lies north of Taparfstan, a province including part of Mazendar4n.

5 Or perhaps Gahf-b(in, meaning probably the Mediterranean or Euxine, if not both of them; the author appears merely to have heard of the existence of such a sea in Asia Minor (Aram). In the Selections of Zid-sparam, VI, 14, it is called Géhan-bfin.

CHAPTER XIII, 12—XIV, 2. 45

some! was the sea Kydnsth ?, such as is in Sagast4n; a¢ first, noxious creatures, snakes, and lizards (vazagh) were not in 2, and the water was sweeter ¢han in any of the other seas; later (dadigar) zt became salt; at the closest, on account of the stench, it is not possible to go so near as one league, So very great are the stench and saltness through the violence of the hot wind. 17. When the renovation of the universe occurs it will again become sweet®,

CHAPTER XIV.

1. On the nature of the five classes of animals (g5spend) it says in revelation, that, when the primeval ox passed away‘, there where the marrow came out grain grew up® of fifty and five species, and twelve® species of medicinal plants grew ; as it says, that out of the marrow is every separate creature, every single thing whose lodgment is in the marrow’. 2. From the horns avose peas (migtk),

1 Comparing nfstQim with Pers. nist, ‘ healthy.’

® The Av. Kasu of Vend. XIX, 18, and Zamy4d Yt. 66, 92 (see also Chaps. XX, 34, and XXI, 7). A brackish lake and swamp now called Hamfin, ‘the desert,’ or Zarah, ‘ the sea,’ and which formerly contained fresher water than it does now.

> The MSS. here add the first sentence of Chap. XX, and there is every reason to believe that Chaps. XX-XXII originally occupied this position, between XIII and XIV, (see the list of the contents of TD in the Introduction.)

4 See Chaps. IV, 1, and X, 1.

5 All MSS. have lakhv4r, ‘again, but this is probably a blunder for 1414, ‘ up.’

* K2o has ‘fifteen’ here, but ‘twelve’ in Chaps. X, 1, and XXVII, 2.

7 Kzo has ‘of every single thing the lodgment is in the marrow.’

46 BUNDAHIS.

from the nose the leek, from the blood the grapevine! from which they make wine—on this account wine abounds with blood—from the lungs the ruelike herbs, from the middle of the heart? thyme /or keeping away stench, avd every one of the others as revealed in the Avesta.

3. The seed of the ox was carried up to the moon station®; there it was thoroughly purified, and produced the manifold species of animals‘. 4. First, two oxen, one male and one female, and, afterwards, one pair of every single species was let go into the earth, azd was discernible in Atran-vég for a HAsar (‘mile’), which is like a Parasang (‘league’); as it says, that, on account of the valuableness of the ox, it was created twice, one time as an ox, and one time as the manifold species of animals. 5. A thousand days and nights they were without eating, and first water and afterwards herbage (airvar) were devoured by them.

5. A thousand days and nights they were without eating, and first water and afterwards herbage (airvar) were devoured by them.

6. And, afterwards, the three classes (kardak) of animals were produced therefrom, as it says that first were the goat and sheep, and then the camel

1 Probably kadfik-i raz may mean ‘the pumpkin and grape.’

? Reading dtl; but the word may also be read sar, ‘ the head,’ or jigar, ‘ the liver.’

5 See Chap. X, 2.

‘ This translation suits both text and context very well, but gospend pfir-sardak is evidently intended for the Av. g4us pouru-saredh6, ‘the ox of many species,’ of M4h Yt. 0, 7, and Siré6z. 12.

5 Reading mfin aé parasang hum4n4k; if 3 be read for aé the translation must be, ‘three of which are like a Parasang,’ for a HAsar cannot be equal to three Parasangs (see Chaps. XVI, 7, and XXVI). The phrase in the text probably means merely that a HAsar is a measure for long distances, just as a Parasang is.

CHAPTER XIV, 3-13. 47

and swine, and then the horse and ass. 7. For, first, those suitable for grazing were created therefrom, those are now kept in the valley (laf); the second created were those of the hill summits (sari déz) 1, which are wide-travellers, azd habits (nihadak) are not taught to them by hand; the third created were ¢hose dwelling in the water.

8. As for the genera (khadfinak), the first genus is that which das the foot cloven in two, and ts suitable for grazing; of which a camel larger than a horse is small azd new-born. 9. The second genus ‘is ass-footed, of which the swift? horse is the largest, and the ass the least. 10. The third genus is that of the five-dividing paw, of which the dog is the largest, and the civet-cat the least. 11. The fourth genus is the flying, of which the griffon of three natures ® is the largest, and the chaffinch ‘ the least. 12. The fifth genus is that of the water, of which the Kar fish > is the largest, and the Nemadu ® the least.

13. These five genera are apportioned out into

1 Justi reads gfrisa&, the Av. gairish446, ‘ mountain-frequenting,’ of Tistar Yt. 36; but this is doubtful.

* Pahl. zibal = Pers. zib4l,

5 The Paz. sin-i se avin is the Pahl. sén-i 3 khadfifnak of Chap. XXIV, 11, 29, the Sin bird or Stmurgh of Persian legends, the Av. saéna. The word avin4 is a P&z. misreading either of 4inak, ‘kind, sort,’ or of angan4k, ‘dividing.’ The mixture of P4zand and Pahlavi in this and some other chapters is rather perplexing, but the Pazand misreadings can usually be corrected after transliterating them back into Pahlavi characters.

* Reading va taru (Pers. tar).

® See Chaps. XVIII, 3, and XXIV, 13.

* If this Pazand word be written in Pahlavi letters it may be read va magan, which may stand for va magil, ‘and the leech;’ but this is very uncertain,

48 BUNDAHIS.

* Reading va taru (Pers. tar).

® See Chaps. XVIII, 3, and XXIV, 13.

* If this Pazand word be written in Pahlavi letters it may be read va magan, which may stand for va magil, ‘and the leech;’ but this is very uncertain,

48 BUNDAHIS.

two hundred and eighty-two! species (sardak). 14. First are five species of goat, the ass-goat *, the milch-goat, the mountain-goat, the fawn, azd the common goat. 15. Second, five species of sheep, that with a tail, that which has no tail, the dogsheep, the wether, and the Kdrisk sheep, a sheep whose horn is great; it possesses a grandeur? like unto a horse, avd they use z¢ mostly for a steed (bara), as it is said that Mands&thar kept a Kdrisk as a steed. 16. Third, two species of camel, the mountain one and that suitable for grazing ; for one is fit to keep in the mountain, avd one in the plain; they are one-humped and two-humped. 17. Fourth, fifteen species of ox, the white, mud-coloured 4, red, yellow, black, azd@ dappled, the elk, the buffalo, the camel-leopard ox, the fish-chewing® ox, the Fars ox, the Kagau, avd other species of ox. 18. Fifth, eight species of horse, the Arab, the Persian, the mule °, the ass, the wild ass (gér), the hippopotamus (asp-i Avi), avd other species of horse. 19. Sixth, ten species of dog, the shepherd’s dog, the village-dog which is the house-protector, the blood-hound, the slender hound’, the water-

1 K2o alone has 272 (see Chap. X, 3).

® The khar-bfiz (see Chap. XXIV, 2).

* Supposing se koh to be a Pz. misreading of Pahl. suktth. Justi’s translation is: ‘it inhabits the three mountains, like the horse.’

‘ Paz. ashgun is evidently for Pahl. hasgfin.

® Transcribing the Paz. m&hi khu ush4n.into Pahlavi it may be read m4htka4n-khvashan (khash4n?).

® Instead of these first three species M6 has ‘ the white, black, yellow, bay, and chestnut.’ Kzo omits ‘the ass’ by mistake.

7 These first four species are the Av. pasus-haurvd, vishaurvé, véhunazgé, and tauruné of Vend. V, 92-98, XIII, 21, 26-74, I17, 164, 165.

CHAPTER XIV, 14-22. 49

beaver? which they call the water-dog, the fox, the ichneumon (rdsu), the hedgehog which they call ‘ thorny-back,’ the porcupine *, avd the civet-cat; of which, two species are those accustomed ® to burrows, one the fox avd one the ichneumon; and those accustomed to jungle are such as the porcupine which has spines on zés back, and the hedgehog which is similar. 20. Seventh, five species of the black * hare; two are wild species, one dwelling in a burrow’ and one dwelling in the jungle. 21. Eighth, eight species of weasel; one the marten, one the black marten, the squirrel, the Bez ermine *, the white ermine, azd other species of weasel. 22. Ninth, eight species of musk axzmals ; one is that which is recognised by 7¢s musk’, one

1 The Av. bawris up4pé of Aban Yt. 129.

21. Eighth, eight species of weasel; one the marten, one the black marten, the squirrel, the Bez ermine *, the white ermine, azd other species of weasel. 22. Ninth, eight species of musk axzmals ; one is that which is recognised by 7¢s musk’, one

1 The Av. bawris up4pé of Aban Yt. 129.

* The word indra has usually been taken as a Paz. misreading of the Pahl. aQdrak (Av. udra, ‘otter, of Vend. XIII, 48, 167, 169, XIV, 2), but this would be more probably read andra. The Pahl. sfigar, ‘porcupine,’ is just as likely to be misread indra, and its meaning suits the context better.

* The Paz. 4mokhtesn, which is an ungrammatical form, is evidently a misreading of the Pahl. 4mfitkhtag4n.

* Kzo has seya, M6 has zy4gi hest. Perhaps some old copyist has corrected sfy4k-g6sh into khar-gésh, and so both the epithets have crept into the text, the word ‘ black’ being superfluous.

5 Reading khan-mA4nist, the Paz. khu being an obvious misreading of khan.

* The P4z. bez is written bedh in the Pazand MS. (the z in M6 being shaped something like dh), and Justi supposes it represents the Arabic abyadh or bafdh4, ‘white,’ and is explained by the Pers. sapéd, ‘white,’ which follows; but there is nothing in the text to indicate that the second name is an explanation of the first. It is more probable that bez represents the Pers. big4d, ‘reddish, rufous, variegated,’ an epithet quite applicable to the ermine in its summer fur.

7 Or, ‘is known as the musk animal,

[5] E

50 BUNDAHIS.

the musk axzmal with a bag in which is their pleasant scent, the Bis-musk! which eats the Bisherb, the black musk which is the enemy of the serpent ¢hat zs numerous in rivers, and other species of musk animals. 23. Tenth, one hundred and ten species of birds; flying creatures (vey=vai) such as the griffon bird?, the Karsipt®, the-eagle, the Kahrk&4s‘ which they call the vulture, the crow, the Arda, the crane, avd the tenth® is the bat. 24. There are two of them which have milk in the teat and suckle ¢hetr young, the griffon bird and the bat which flies in the night; as they say that the bat is created of three races (sardak), the race (Ayina) of the dog, the bird, azd the musk anzma/; for it flies like a bird, has many teeth like a dog, and is dwelling in holes like a musk-rat. 25. These hundred and ten species of birds are distributed into eight groups (khaddinak), mostly as_ scattered about as when a man scatters seed, amd drops the seed in Azs fingers to the ground, large, middling, and small. 26. Eleventh °, fish were created of ten

' A kind of musk-rat; the bis it eats is said to be the Napellus Moysis.

2 Pahl. sénd mfrfk, the stmurgh of Persian tradition, and Av. mereghé saéné of Bahram Yt. 41.

8 See Chap. XIX, 16. * See Chap. XIX, 25.

26. Eleventh °, fish were created of ten

' A kind of musk-rat; the bis it eats is said to be the Napellus Moysis.

2 Pahl. sénd mfrfk, the stmurgh of Persian tradition, and Av. mereghé saéné of Bahram Yt. 41.

8 See Chap. XIX, 16. * See Chap. XIX, 25.

® Counting the ‘flying creatures’ and ‘the vulture’ as distinct species, ‘the bat’ is the tenth. It has been generally supposed that we should read ‘ eleventh,’ and consider the bats as an eleventh group, especially as the MSS. call the next group (the fish) the ‘twelfth ;’ but this view is contradicted by the remarks about the bats being mingled with those about the birds, and also by Zadsparam in his Selections, Chap. IX, 14 (see App. to Bund.), not mentioning any group of bats among the other animals.

® All the MSS. have ‘twelfth,’ but they give no ‘eleventh’ nor ‘thirteenth,’ though they have ‘fourteenth’ in § 29. These irre-

CHAPTER XIV, 23-29. 51

species; first, the fish Ariz!, the Arzuva, the Arzuké, the Marzuk4, azd other Avesta names ?. 27. Afterwards, within each species, species within species are created, so the total is two hundred and eighty-two species *.

28. Of the dog they say that out of the star station, that is, away from the direction of the constellation Hapt6k-ring, was given to him further by a stage (yégist)* than to men, on account of zs protection of sheep, avd as associating with sheep and men; for this the dog is purposely adapted 5, as three more kinds of advantage are given to him than 4o man, he has his own boots, his own clothing*, and may wander about without self-exertion. 29. The twelfth’ is the sharp-toothed beast of

gularities seem to indicate that part of this chapter has been omitted by some old copyist.

» See Chaps. XVIII, 5, and XXIV, 13.

* None of these names are found in the portion of the Avesta now extant.

®’ Kzo alone has 272 (see Chap. X, 3). The actual total number of species mentioned is’ 186, leaving ninety-six for the ‘species within species.’ Zéd-sparam in his Selections, Chap. IX, 14, differs from the numbers given in the text merely in giving ten species of ox, instead of fifteen; so the total of his details is 181, leaving ror sub-species to make up his grand total of 282 (see App. to Bund.)

* A yégist (compare Sans. yogana) was probably from fifteen to sixteen English miles, as it consisted of sixteen hAsar, each of one thousand steps of the two feet (see Chap. XXVI, 1). This sentence seems to imply that on account of the useful qualities of the dog he has a part of the lowermost grade of paradise allotted to him, further from the demon-haunted north than that allotted to the men whose inferior order of merit does not entitle them to enter the higher grades of paradise.

5 Reading 4hang-hémand, ‘having a purpose.’

* Compare Vend. XIII, 106,

7 All the MSS. have ‘ fourteenth,’ but they give no ‘ thirteenth,’

E 2

52 BUNDAHIS.

5 Reading 4hang-hémand, ‘having a purpose.’

* Compare Vend. XIII, 106,

7 All the MSS. have ‘ fourteenth,’ but they give no ‘ thirteenth,’

E 2

52 BUNDAHIS.

which the leader of the flock is in such great fear, for that flock of sheep is very badly maintained which has no dog.

30. Adharmazd said when the bird Varesha! was created by him, whzch is a bird of prey, thus: ‘Thou art created by me, O bird V4resha! so that my vexation may be greater than my satisfaction with thee, for thou doest the will of the evil spirit more than that of me; like the wicked man who did not become satiated with wealth, thou also dost not become satiated with the slaughter of birds; but if thou be not created by me, O bird V4resha! thou wouldst be created by him, the evil spirit, as a kite * with the body of a Varpa*, by which no creature would be left alive.’

31. Many animals are created in all these species for this reason, that when one shall be perishing through the evil spirit, one shall remain.

CHAPTER XV.

1. On the nature of men it says in revelation, that Gayémard, in passing away‘, gave forth seed ; that seed was thoroughly purified by the motion of

1 No doubt ‘a hawk’ (Pers. vasah or b4sah), as mentioned by Justi; Av. vare would become v4 or b4 in Persian.

® Compare gfirtk with Pers. varik, varka, vark4k, varkak, varg4h, ‘an eagle, falcon, kite, or hawk.’

8 Transcribing the Paz. varpa @yi into Pahlavi we have varpak-aé, which is very nearly the same in form as varfkak-aé, ‘a hut or cottage’ (Pers. gurifah-€); so the formidable bird which the evil spirit might have created was ‘a kite with a body like a cottage.’

* See Chap. IV, 1.

CHAPTER XIV, 30-XV, 4. 53

the light of the sun, and Néryésang? kept charge of two portions, and Spendarmad? received one portion. 2. And zm forty years, with the shape of a one-stemmed Rivads-p/ant*, and the fifteen years of zés fifteen leaves, Matré and Matréy46‘* grew up from the earth in such a manner that their arms rested behind on ¢hety shoulders (désh), and one joined to the other they were connected together and both alike. 3. And the waists of both of them were brought close avd so connected together that it was not clear which is the male and which the female, and which is the ove whose living soul (nismé6) of Afharmazd is not away® 4. As it is said thus: ‘Which is created before, the soul (nism6) or the body? And Afharmazd said that the soul is created before, and the body after, for him who was

1 Av. Nairyé-sangha of Yas. XVII, 68, LXX, 92, Vend. XIX, 111, 112, XXII, 22, &c.; the angel who is said to be Adharmazd’s usual messenger to mankind.

* The female archangel who is supposed to have special charge of the earth (see Chap. I, 26).

5 A plant allied to the rhubarb, the shoots of which supply an acid juice used by the Persians for acidulating preserves and drinks.

* The female archangel who is supposed to have special charge of the earth (see Chap. I, 26).

5 A plant allied to the rhubarb, the shoots of which supply an acid juice used by the Persians for acidulating preserves and drinks.

‘ These names are merely variants of the Mashya and MAshyét of the latter part of this chapter (nom. dual, m. and f., of Av. mashya, ‘mortal’). This is shown by the Pandn4mak-i Zaratfist, saying: ‘and my human nature is from Matréth and Matr6yadih, from which first generation and seed from GAayémard I have sprung.’ And the names are also found in the more Persian forms Maharth and Maharfyaéyth (see the note to § 22). Windischmann considered the meaning to be that ‘they grew up on the day Mitré of the month Mitré6,’ that is, the sixteenth day of the seventh month of the Parsi year; this is not confirmed, however, by Zadsparam in his Selections, Chap. X, 4 (see App. to Bund.)

5 That is, whether they had souls or not. That nismé6 is the Huzvaris for rfb4n, ‘soul,’ appears clearly in § 4, where both words are used for the same thing.

54 BUNDAHIs.

created; it is given into the body that it may produce activity, and the body is created only for activity;’ hence the conclusion is this, that the soul (rdb4n) is created before and the body after. 5. And both of them changed from the shape of a plant into the shape of man, and the breath (nism6) went spiritually into them, which is the soul (rab4n); and now, moreover, in that similitude a tree had grown up whose fruit was the ten varieties of man}.

6. Adtharmazd spoke to Mashya and Mashyédt thus: ‘You are man, you are the ancestry of the world, and you are created perfect in devotion? by me; perform devotedly the duty of the law, think good thoughts, speak good words, do good deeds, and worship no demons!’ 7. Both of them first thought this, that one of them should please the other, as he is a man for him; and the first deed done by them was this, when they went out they washed* themselves thoroughly; and the first words spoken by them were these, that Adharmazd created the water and earth, plants and animals, the stars, moon, and sun, and all prosperity whose origin and effect are from the manifestation of righteousness‘, 8. And, afterwards, antagonism rushed into their minds, and their minds were

1 This evidently refers to another tree, which is supposed to have produced the ten varieties of human monstrosities (see § 31).

_ ” This would be a translation of the Avesta phrase, ‘the best of Armaiti (the spirit of the earth).’

5 Comparing mégtd with Pers. magid; but the verb is very ambiguous, as it may mean, ‘they feasted themselves,’ or ‘they made water.’ .

* The last phrase appears to be quoted from the Pahlavi Had6kht Nask, I, 2.

CHAPTER XV, 5-13. 55

magid; but the verb is very ambiguous, as it may mean, ‘they feasted themselves,’ or ‘they made water.’ .

* The last phrase appears to be quoted from the Pahlavi Had6kht Nask, I, 2.

CHAPTER XV, 5-13. 55

thoroughly corrupted, and they exclaimed that the evil spirit created the water and earth, plants and animals, avd the other things as aforesaid. 9. That false speech was spoken through the will of the demons, and the evil spirit possessed himself of this first enjoyment from them; through that false speech they both became wicked, and their souls are in hell until the future existence.

10. And they had gone thirty days without food}, covered with clothing of herbage (giy4h); and after the thirty days they went forth into the wilderness, came to a white-haired goat, and milked the milk from the udder with their mouths. 11. When they had devoured the milk M4shya sazd to MA4shyét thus: ‘My delight was owing to it when I had not devoured the milk, and my delight is more delightful now when it is devoured by my vile body.’ 12. That second false speech enhanced the power of the demons, and the taste of the food was taken away by them, so that out of a hundred parts one part remained.

13. Afterwards, in another thirty days and nights they came to a sheep, fat? azd white-jawed, and they slaughtered z¢; and fire was extracted by them out of the wood of the lote-plum? and box-tree, through the guidance of the heavenly angels, since ~ both woods were most productive of fire for them ;

1 Reading akhfrisn instead of the khfrisn of all MSS, which is hardly intelligible. Perhaps 4v-kh@risn, ‘drinking water,’ ought to be read, as it is alluded to in Chap. XXX, 1.

3 Comparing gefar with Av. garewa and Pers. garb, but this identification may not be correct.

8 The k(inar, a thorny tree, allied to the jujube, which bears a small plum-like fruit.

56 BUNDAHIS.

and the fire was stimulated by their mouths; and the first fuel kindled by them was dry grass, kend4r, lotos, date palm leaves, and myrtle ; and they made a roast of the sheep. 14. And they dropped three handfuls of the meat into the fire, azd said: ‘ This is the share of the fire?.’ One piece of the rest they tossed to the sky, avd said: ‘This is the share of the angels.’ A bird, the vulture, advanced and carried some of it away from before them, as a dog ate the first meat. 15. And, first, a clothing of skins covered them; afterwards, it is said, woven garments were prepared from a cloth woven? in the wilderness. 16. And they dug out a pit in the earth, and iron was obtained by them and beaten out with a stone, and without a forge they beat out a cutting edge* from it; and they cut wood with it, and prepared a wooden shelter from the sun (pés-khar).

in the wilderness. 16. And they dug out a pit in the earth, and iron was obtained by them and beaten out with a stone, and without a forge they beat out a cutting edge* from it; and they cut wood with it, and prepared a wooden shelter from the sun (pés-khar).

17. Owing to the gracelessness which they practised, the demons became more oppressive, and they themselves carried on unnatural malice between themselves; they.advanced one against the other, and smote and tore ¢her hair and cheeks‘. 18. Then the demons shouted out of the darkness

1 Most of this sentence is omitted in Kzo by mistake.

3 Reading khés-1-i tad, which Pahlavi words might be easily misread ashabé tad, as given in P4zand in the text. That PAz. tadha stands for Pahl. tadak (Pers. tadah, ‘spun, woven’) is quite certain.

5 Or ‘an axe,’ according as we read tékh ortash. The order of the foregoing words, bara tap4k-1, ‘ without a forge,’ appears to have been reversed by mistake.

‘ Reading réd as equivalent to Pers. rfif, ‘ face,’ but it ought to be réd. Perhaps the word is lft, ‘bare,’ and the translation should be, ‘ tore Aer hair bare.’

CHAPTER XV, 14-24. 57

thus: ‘You are man; worship the demon! so that your demon of malice may repose.’ 19. Mashya went forth and milked a cow's milk, azd poured z¢ out towards the northern quarter; through that the demons became more powerful, and owing to them they both became so dry-backed that in fifty winters they had no desire for intercourse, and though they had had intercourse they would have had no children. 20. And on the completion of fifty years the source of desire arose, first 7 MAshya and then zm Mashyéi, for MAshya said to MA4shyét thus: ‘When I see thy shame my desires arise.’ Then MAshyét spoke thus: ‘ Brother MAshya! when I see thy great desire I am also agitated’.’ 21. Afterwards, it became their mutual wish that the satisfaction of their desires should be accomplished, as they reflected thus: ‘Our duty even for those fifty years was this.’

22. From them was born in nine months a pair, male and female; azd owing to tenderness for offspring? the mother devoured one, and the father one. 23. And, afterwards, Atharmazd took tenderness for offspring away from them, so that ome may nourish a child, and the child may remain.

24. And from them arose seven pairs, male and

1 This is merely a paraphrase of the original.

* Or, ‘the deliciousness of children’ (shirfnth-i farzand). Justi has, ‘owing to an eruption on the children the mother deserted one,’ &c.; but the legend of devouring the first children is still more clearly mentioned in the Pahlavi Rivayat, which forms the first book of the D4distan-i Dintk (preceding the ninety-two questions and answers to which that name is usually applied) as follows: Maharth va Maharty&6yth dashdaram rai nazdist6 farzand-i nafsman bar& vastamfind, ‘MAashya and Mashydt, through affection, at first ate up their own offspring.’

58 BUNDAHIS.

female, azd each was a brother and sister-wife ; and from every one of them, in fifty years, children were born, and they themselves died in a hundred years. 25. Of those seven pairs one was Siyakmak, the name of the man, and Nasaék! of the woman; and from them a pair was born, whose names were Fravak of the man and Fravakatn of the woman. 26. From them fifteen pairs were born, every single pair of whom became a race (sardak); and from them the constant continuance of the generations of the world arose.

27. Owing to the increase (z4yisn) of the whole fifteen races, nine races proceeded on the back of the ox Sarsaok ?, through the wide-formed ocean, to the other six regions (késhvar), and stayed there ; and six races of men remained in Khvantras. 28. Of those six races the name of the man of one pair was T4z and of the woman Ta4zak, and they went ¢o the plain of the TAzikan (Arabs); and of one pair Héshyang ® was the name of the man and Gtdzak of the woman, and from them arose the Afranakan (Iranians); and from one pair the M4zendarans‘* have arisen. 29. Among the number (pavan aé mar) were those who are in the coun-

» Or ‘ Vasak.’

* See Chaps. XVII, 4, XIX, 13; the name is here written Srisaok in the MSS., and is a Pazand reading in all three places.

* Av. Haoshyangha of Abfn Yt. 21, Gés Yt. 3, Fravardin Yt. 137, Ram Yt. 7, Ashi Yt. 24, 26, Zamyad Yt. 26. His usual epithet is paradh&ta (Pahl. pés-d4d), which is thus explained in the Pahlavi Vend. XX, 7: ‘this early law (pés-d4dih) was this, that he first set going the law of sovereignty.’ For this reason he is considered to be the founder of the earliest, or Pésdadian, dynasty. See Chaps. XXXI, 1, XXXIV, 3, 4.

‘ The people of the southern coast of the Caspian, the M4zainya daéva, ‘ Mazainyan demons or idolators,’ of the Avesta.

CHAPTER XV, 25-31. 59

tries of Sfrak?, those who are in the country of Anér?, those who are in the countries of Tar, those who are in the country of Salm which is Ar(im, those who are in the country of Séni, that which is Xinistén, those who are in the country of Dat®, and those who are in the country of Sind‘. 30. Those, indeed, throughout the seven regions are all from the lineage of Fravak, son of Siyakmak, son of MAshya.

31. As there were ten varieties of man 5, and fifteen races from Fravak, there were twenty-five races all from the seed of Gayémard; the varteties are such as those of the earth, of the water, the breast-eared, the breast-eyed, the one-legged, those also who have wings like a bat, ¢hose of the forest, with tails, ad who have hair on the body*.

* Not Syria (which is Sfristén, see Chap. XX, 10), but the Sfrfk of the Pahlavi Vend. I, 14, which translates Av. Sughdha, the land east of the Oxus (see Chap. XX, 8). Windischmann reads it as Paz. Erak.

* Probably for Av. anairya, ‘non-Aryan,’ which seems specially applied to the lands east of the Caspian.

XX, 10), but the Sfrfk of the Pahlavi Vend. I, 14, which translates Av. Sughdha, the land east of the Oxus (see Chap. XX, 8). Windischmann reads it as Paz. Erak.

* Probably for Av. anairya, ‘non-Aryan,’ which seems specially applied to the lands east of the Caspian.

* The countries of Tir, Salm, Séni, and Dai are all mentioned successively in Fravardin Yt. 143, 144, in their Avesta forms Tfirya, Sairima, S4ini, and Dahi. The country of Tar was part of the present Turkistan, that of Salm is rightly identified with Arfim (the eastern Roman Empire, or Asia Minor) in the text; the country of Séni (miswritten Sénd), being identified with Xinfst4n, was probably the territory of Samarkand, and may perhaps be connected with Mount Aind (see Chap. XII, 2, 13); and the land of Dai must be sought somewhere in the same neighbourhood.

* Bactria or any part of north-western India may be intended ; wherever Brahmans and Buddhists existed (as they did in Bactria) was considered a part of India in Sasanian times.

5 Grown on a separate tree (see § 5).

* Only seven varieties of human monsters are here enumerated,

60 BUNDAHIS.

CuapTer XVI.

1. On the nature of generation it says in revelation, that a woman when she comes out from menstruation, during ten days and nights, when they go near unto her, soon becomes pregnant. 2. When she is cleansed from her menstruation, avd when the time for pregnancy has come, always when the seed of the man is the more powerful a son arises from it; when that of the woman is the more powerful, a daughter; when both seeds are equal, twins and triplets. 3. If the male seed comes the sooner, it adds to the female, and she becomes robust; if the female seed comes the sooner, it becomes blood, and the leanness of the female arzses therefrom.

4. The female seed is cold and moist, and z¢s flow is from the loins, and the colour is white, red, and yellow; and the male seed is hot and dry, z¢s flow is from the brain of the head, avd the colour is white and mud-coloured (hasgfin). 5. All! the seed of the females whzch issues beforehand, takes a place within the womb, and the seed of the males will remain above it, avd will fill the space of the womb; whatever refrains therefrom becomes blood again, enters into the veins of the females, azd at the time any one is born it becomes milk and

for the last three details seem to refer to one variety, the monkeys. The Parsi MS. of miscellaneous texts, M7 (fol. 120), says, ‘The names of the ten species of men are the breast-eyed, the three-eyed, the breast-eared, the elephant-eared, the one-legged, the webfooted, the leopard-headed, the lion-headed, the camel-headed, and the dog-headed.’

1 M6 has ‘always.’

CHAPTER XVI, I—XVII, I. 61

nourishes him, as all milk arises from the seed of the males, azd the blood is that of the females.

6. These four things, they say, are male, and these female: the sky, metal, wind, azd fire are male, and are never otherwise; the water, earth, plants, and fish are female, azd are never otherwise; the remaining creation consists of male and female.

7. As regards the fish? it says that, at the time of excitement, they go forwards and come back in the water, two and two, the length of a mile (h4sar), which is one-fourth of a league (parasang), in the running water; in that coming and going they then rub ther bodies together, and a kind of sweat drops out betwixt them, axd both become pregnant.

Cuarter XVII.

1. On the nature of fire it says in revelation, that fire is produced of five kinds, namely, the fire Berezi-savang ?, the fire which shoots up before AQharmazd the lord; the fire Vohu-fryén%, the fire which is in the bodies of men and animals; the fire Urvazist*, the fire which is in plants; the fire

1 K2o has ‘the male fish,’ which is inconsistent with the preceding sentence.

* These Avesta names of the five kinds of fire are enumerated in Yas. XVII, 63-67, and the Pahlavi translation of that passage interchanges the attributes ascribed to the first and fifth in the text, thus it calls the first ‘the fire of sublime benefit in connection with Varahran (Bahram). See also Selections of Zad-sparam, XI, 1.

* *The fire of the good diffuser ( or offerer), that within the bodies of men’ (Pahl. Yas. XVII, 64).

‘ «The fire of prosperous (or abundant) life, that within plants’ (Pahl. Yas. XVII, 65).

62 BUNDAHIS.

VA4zist!, the fire which is in a cloud whch stands opposed to Spéngargak in conflict; the fire Spénist?, the fire which they keep in use in the world, likewise the fire of VAhram*. 2. Of those five fires one consumes both water and food, as that which is in the bodies of men; one consumes water avd consumes no food, as that which is in plants, which live and grow through water; one consumes food and consumes no water, as that which they keep in use in the world, and likewise the fire of VAhram; one consumes no water and no food, as the fire VA4zist. 3. The Berezi-savang is that in the earth and mountains and other things, which‘ Aftharmazd created, zm the original creation, like three breathing souls (nismé); through the watchfulness and protection due to them the world ever develops (vakhshéa). 4. And in the reign of Takhmérup®, when men continually passed, on the back of the ox Sarsaok °, from Khvaniras to the other regions, one night

1 <The fire VAzist, that which smites the demon Spengarga’ (Pahl. Yas. XVII, 66). See Chap. VII, 12.

4 <The propitious fire wich stands in heaven before A(fharmazd in a spiritual state’ (Pahl. Yas. XVII, 67).

® The Bahram fire, or sacred fire at places of worship.

Yas. XVII, 66). See Chap. VII, 12.

4 <The propitious fire wich stands in heaven before A(fharmazd in a spiritual state’ (Pahl. Yas. XVII, 67).

® The Bahram fire, or sacred fire at places of worship.

‘M6 has min, instead of mfin, which alters the translation, but not the meaning. This appears to be a different account of the fire Berezi-savang to that given in § 1, but it merely implies that it is fire in its spiritual state, and the name can, therefore, be applied to any natural fire which can be attributed to supernatural agency, such as burning springs of petroleum, volcanic eruptions, ignis fatuus, phosphorescence of the sea, &c.

® The second Pésdfdian monarch (see Chaps. XXXI, 2, 3, XXXIV, 4).

* Written Srisaok in the MSS. in Chap. XV, 27; where it also appears that the sea was ‘the wide-formed ocean.’ See likewise Chap. XIX, 13.

CHAPTER XVII, 2-7. 63

amid the sea the wind rushed upon! the fireplace— the fireplace in which the fire was, such as was provided in three places on the back of the ox—which the wind dropped with the fire into the sea ; and all those three fires, like three breathing souls, continually shot up in the place and position of the fire on the back of the ox, so that it becomes quite light, azd the men pass again through the sea. 5. And in the reign of Yim? every duty was performed more fully through the assistance of all those three fires; and the fire Frébak® was established by him at the appointed place (d4d-g4s) on the Gadman-hémand (‘glorious’) mountain in Khvdérizem ¢, which Yim constructed for them; and the glory of Yim saves the fire Frébak from the hand of Dahak°. 6. In the reign of King Vistasp, upon revelation from the religion®, it was established, out of Khvdrizem, at the Réshan (‘shining’) mountain in K4vulistén, the country of Kavul (K4bul), just as it remains there even now.

7. The fire Gisasp, until the reign of Kai-Khdsr6éb’, continually afforded the world protection in the manner aforesaid® ; and when Kai-Kh(isrdéb’ was

1 Compare staft with Pers. sitaftan, ‘to hasten.’

* The third Pésdfédian monarch (see Chaps. XXXI, 3, 4, XXXIV, 4).

5 Also written Frébé, Fr6éb4, Frébak, or Frébag.

‘ The Av. Hvairizem of Mihir Yt. 14, a province east of the Caspian.

5 It is doubtful whether va gadman, ‘and the glory,’ or nism6, ‘the soul, reason’ (see Chaps. XXIII, 1, XXXIV, 4), should be read. And it may even be that ‘the fire Frébak saves the soul of Yim,’ &c. For Dahfk see Chaps. XXXI, 6, XXXIV, 5.

* Or, ‘upon declaration from revelation.’ .

7 Here written Kaf-Khfisrébi.

* In § 3. The ‘three breathing souls’ of spiritual fire are sup-

64 BUNDAHIS.

extirpating the idol-temples of Lake Aééast! it . settled upon the mane of 4zs horse, and drove away the darkness and gloom, and made z¢ quite light, so that they might extirpate the idol-temples; in the same locality the fire Gfsasp was established at the appointed place on the Asnavand mountain *.

it . settled upon the mane of 4zs horse, and drove away the darkness and gloom, and made z¢ quite light, so that they might extirpate the idol-temples; in the same locality the fire Gfsasp was established at the appointed place on the Asnavand mountain *.

8. The fire Barzin-Mitré, until the reign of King VistAsp, ever assisted’, 2 like manner, in: the world, and continually afforded protection; amd when the glorified * Zaratfst was introduced to produce confidence in the progress of the religion, King Vistasp and zs offspring were steadfast in the religion of God*, and Vist&4sp established ¢h2s fire at the appointed place on Mount Révand, where they say the Ridge of Vist4sp (pdst-i Vistasp4n) is ®

9. All those three fires are the whole body of the fire of Vahr4m, together with the fire of the world, and those breathing souls are lodged in them; a counterpart of the body of man when it forms in the womb of the mother, azd a soul from the spiritworld settles within z¢, which controls the body while living ; when that body dies, the body mingles with the earth, ad the soul goes back to the spirit.

posed to be incorporated in its three earthly representatives, the fires Frébak, GQsasp, and Bfrsin-Mitré respectively.

* That is, of the province around that lake (see Chap. XXII, 2).

* See Chap. XII, 26. Compare Selections of Z4d-sparam, VI, 22.

* Taking vagid as equivalent to Pers. guzid; but it may be equivalent to Pers. vazid, ‘ grew, shot up.’

“ The epithet anédshak-rabén (Pers. néshirvan) means literally ‘immortal-souled.’

® Or, ‘ of the angels,’ which plural form is often used to express ‘God.’

* See Chap. XII, 18, 34.

CHAPTER XVII, 8—XVIII, 5: 65

Cuapter XVIII.

1. On the nature of the tree they call Gékard! it says in revelation, that z¢ was the first day when the tree they call Gékard grew in the deep mud? within the wide-formed ocean ; amd it is necessary as a producer of the renovation of ¢he universe, for they prepare its immortality therefrom. 2. The evil spirit has formed therein, among those which enter as opponents, a lizard* as an opponent in that deep water, so that it may injure the Hém‘*. 3. And for keeping away that lizard, Adharmazd has created there ten Kar fish ® which, at all times, continually circle around the Hém, so that the head of one of those fish is continually towards the lizard. 4. And together with the lizard those fish are spiritually fed *, that is, no food is necessary for them; azd till the renovation of the universe they remain in contention. 5. There are places where that fish is

1 A corruption of the Av. gaokerena of Vend. XX, 17, Adharmazd Yt. 30, Haptén Yt. 3, Siréz. 7. In the old MSS. of the Bundahis the form gékard occurs thrice, gdkarn once, and gogry once.

? Reading gil, ‘mud.’ Windischmann and Justi prefer gar, ‘mountain,’ and have ‘ depth of the mountain.’

gaokerena of Vend. XX, 17, Adharmazd Yt. 30, Haptén Yt. 3, Siréz. 7. In the old MSS. of the Bundahis the form gékard occurs thrice, gdkarn once, and gogry once.

? Reading gil, ‘mud.’ Windischmann and Justi prefer gar, ‘mountain,’ and have ‘ depth of the mountain.’

® That the writer of the Bundahis applies the term vazagh toa lizard, rather than a frog, appears from the ‘log-like lizard’s body’ of Chap. III, 9.

‘ That is, the Gékard tree, which is the white H6m (see Chap. XXVII, 4).

5 The Av. karé masyé of Vend. XIX, 140, Bahrém Yt. 29, Din Yt. 7; see also Chap. XXIV, 13.

* Windischmann and Justi prefer translating thus: ‘ Moreover, the lizard is the spiritual food of those fish ;’ but this can hardly be reconciled with the Pahlavi text.

(5) F

66 BUNDAHIS.

written of as ‘the Ariz! of the water;’ as it says that the greatest of the creatures of Adharmazd is that fish, and the greatest of those proceeding from the evil spirit is that lizard; with the jaws of ¢hety bodies, moreover, they snap in two whatever of the creatures of both sfzrzts has entered between them, except that one fish which is the VAs of Pan#dsadvarin*®. 6.-This, too, is said, that those fish are so serpent-like® in that deep water, they know the scratch (m4lisn) of a needle’s point by which the water shall increase, or by which it is diminishing.

7. Regarding the Vas of Panfdsadvardn it is declared that it moves within the wide-formed ocean, and its length is as much as what a man, while in a swift race, will walk /vom dawn till when the sun goes down; so much that it does not itself move* the length of the whole of its great body. 8. This, too, is said, that the creatures of the waters live also specially under its guardianship.

9. The tree of many seeds has grown amid the wide-formed ocean, and in its seed are all plants ; some say z¢ zs the proper-curing, some the energeticcuring, some the all-curing °.

1 See Chaps. XIV, 26, and XXIV, 13.

* The Av. vasfm yim pans&sadvardim of Yas. XLI, 27.

® Transcribing the P4z. m4radu into Pahlavi we have mar yin, ‘snake’s manner.’ Compare the text with Bahram Yt. 29.

* K20 omits the words from ‘ walk’ to ‘ move.’

® This is the tree of the sa€na or Simurgh, as described in Rashnu Yt. 17, and these three epithets are translations of its three titles, hubis, eredhw6-bis, and visp6-bis. See also Chap. XXVII, 2, 3

CHAPTER XVIII, 6—XIX, I. 67

10. Between! these trees of such kinds? is formed the mountain with cavities, 9999 thousand myriads zn number, each myriad being ten thousand. 11. Unto that mountain is given the protection of the waters, so that water streams forth from there, in the rivulet channels, to the land of the seven regions, as the source of all the sea-water in the land of the seven regions is from there ®,

Cuaprer XIX.

1. Regarding the three-legged ass‘ they say, that it stands amid the wide-formed ocean, and its feet are three, eyes six, mouths® nine, ears two, and horn

' This must have been the original meaning of the Huz. dén (bén in the Sasanian inscriptions) before it was used as a synonym of P4z. andar, ‘ within.’ The mountain is between the white-Hém tree and the tree of many seeds.

? Transcribing the Paz. ofnoh into Pahlavi we have 4n-gfinak, ‘that kind ;’ or the word may be a miswriting of Paz. 4n6, ‘there.’

* This description of the mountain seems to identify it with the Afsind6m mountain of Chaps. XII, 6, and XIII, 5.

* The Av. khara, ‘which is righteous aad which stands in the middle of the wide-shored ocean’ (Yas. XLI, 28). Darmesteter, in his Ormazd et Ahriman (pp. 148-151), considers this mythological monster as a meteorological myth, a personification of clouds and storm; and, no doubt, a vivid imagination may trace a striking resemblance between some of the monster’s attributes and certain fanciful ideas regarding the phenomena of nature; the difficulty is to account for the remaining attributes, and to be sure that these fanciful ideas were really held by Mazdayasnians of old. Another plausible view is to consider such mythological beings as foreign gods tolerated by the priesthood, from politic motives, as objects worthy of reverence; even as the goddess An&hita was tolerated in the form of the angel of water.

® This is the traditional meaning of the word, which (if this

F 2

68 BUNDAUIS.

one, body white, food spiritual, azd it is righteous. 2. And two of its six eyes are in the position of eyes, two on the top of the head, and two in the position of the hump!; with the sharpness of those six eyes it overcomes and destroys. 3. Of the nine mouths three are in the head, three in the hump, and three in the inner part of the flanks; and each mouth is about the size of a cottage, and 2¢ zs itself as large as Mount Alvand*, 4. Each one of the three feet, when it is placed on the ground, is as much as a flock (gird) of a thousand sheep comes under when they repose together; and each pastern® is so great in its circuit that a thousand men with a thousand horses may pass inside. 5. As for the two ears z¢ zs MAzendaran which they will encompass. 6. The one horn is as it were of gold and hollow, and a thousand évanch horns‘ have grown upon it, some befitting ® a camel, some befitting a horse, some befitting an ox, some befitting an ass, both great and small. 7. With that horn it will vanquish amd dissipate all the vile corruption due to the efforts of noxious creatures.

meaning be correct) ought probably to be read yéng, and be traced to Av. eeaungh (Yas. XXVIII, 11). In the MSS. the word is marked as if it were pronounced gfind, which means ‘a testicle.’

1 The hump is probably supposed to be over the shoulders, as in the Indian ox, and not like that of the camel.

eeaungh (Yas. XXVIII, 11). In the MSS. the word is marked as if it were pronounced gfind, which means ‘a testicle.’

1 The hump is probably supposed to be over the shoulders, as in the Indian ox, and not like that of the camel.

* Near Hamadan, rising 11,000 feet above the sea, or 6000 above Hamadan. It may be one of the Av. Aurvanté of Zamy4d Yt. 3. The Pazand MSS. read Hunavand.

® Literally, ‘ the small of the foot,’ khirdak-i ragelman.

“ Or, ‘a thousand cavities (srfibd, Pers. surub, ‘cavern’) have grown in it.’

5 Reading ziy4k; compare Pers. ziyidan, ‘to suit, befit.’

CHAPTER XIX, 2-13. 69.

8. When that ass shall hold z¢és neck in the ocean zts ears will terrify (asahméa), and all the water of the wide-formed ocean will shake with agitation, and the side of Ganavad' will tremble (shivanéd). g. When it utters a cry all female water-creatures, of the creatures of Afharmazd, will become pregnant; and all pregnant noxious water-creatures, when they hear that cry, will cast ¢hey young. 10. When it stales in the ocean all the sea-water will become purified, which is in the seven regions of the earth—z¢ zs even on that account when all asses which come into water stale in the water—as it says thus: ‘If, O three-legged ass! you were not created for the water, all the water in the sea would have perished from the contamination which the poison of the evil spirit has brought into its water, through the death of the creatures of Afharmazd.’

11. Tistar seizes the water? more completely from the ocean with the assistance of the three-legged ass. 12. Of ambergris also (ambar-i£) z¢ is declared, that it is the dung of the three-legged ass; for if it has much spirit food, then also the moisture of the liquid nourishment goes through the veins pertaining to the body into the urine, axd the dung is cast away.

13. Of the ox Hadhayés’, which they call Sarsaok‘, it says, that in the original creation men passed from region to region upon zt, and in the

2 A mountain (see Chap. XII, 29, 34).

2 See Chap. VII, 11.

5 Written Haday4vs in the MSS. in Chap. XXX, 25, and Hadhay&s in the D4&distén-i Dinik, Part II, reply 89; it is a Pazand reading in all three places.

* See Chaps. XV, 27, XVII, 4.

70 ‘ BUNDAHIS.

renovation of the universe they prepare Hash (the beverage producing immortality) from it. 14. It is said, that life is in the hand of that foremost man, at the end of 4zs years', who has constructed the most defences around this earth, until the renovation of the universe is requisite.

15. Regarding the bird A4amrés? it says, that z¢ zs on the summit of Mount Albarz; and every three years many come from the non-Iranian districts for booty (gird) §, by going to bring damage (ziy4n) on the Iranian districts, and to effect the devastation of the world; then the angel Barg*, Aaveng come up from the low country of Lake Arag®, arouses that very bird K4mrés, and it flies upon the loftiest of all the lofty mountains, azd picks up all those non- Iranian districts as a bird does corn.

16. Regarding Karsipt® they say, that it knew how to speak words, and brought the religion to the enclosure which Yim made, and circulated 2¢ ; there they utter the Avesta in the language of birds.

1 Transcribing the Paz. svadyi into Pahlavi we have snatth, ‘term of years.’ The whole sentence is very obscure.

* Written Xamrés in Chap. XXIV, 29. It is the Av. Kamraos (gen. of Kamru) of Fravardin Yt. rog. See also Chap. XXVII, 3.

5 Or, ‘to an assembly.’

‘ The Av. Beregya of Yas. I, 21, II, 27, III, 35, ‘a spirit cooperating with the Ushahina Gah, who causes the increase of herds and corn.’

® Or, ‘of the district of Arag’ (see the note on Chap. XII, 23). Although no Lake Arag is described in Chap. XXII, some of the epithets referring to its Avesta equivalent Rangha are more applicable to a lake than to a river, as in Bahram Yt. 29. Possibly the low lands between the Caspian and Aral, or on the shores of the Caspian, are meant.

* The Av. vis karsipta of Vend. II, 139, where, however, vis

CHAPTER XIX, 14-23. 71

17. Regarding the ox-fish they say, that it exists in all seas; when it utters a cry all fish become pregnant, and all noxious water-creatures cast their young.

18. The griffon bird', which is a bat, is noticed (kard) twice in another chapter (bab4).

19. Regarding the bird Ashézust ?, which is the bird Zobara-vahman azd also the bird Sdk 4, they say that it has given an Avesta with z¢s tongue; when it speaks the demons tremble at it avd take nothing away there; a nail-savzng, when it is not prayed over (afsid), the demons amd wizards seize, and like an arrow it shoots at and kills that bird. 20. On this account the bird seizes avd devours a nail-pavimg when it is prayed over, so that the demons may not control z¢s use; when it is not prayed over it does not devour z¢, and the demons are able to commit an offence with it.

21. Also other beasts and birds are created all in opposition to noxious creatures, as it says, that when the birds and beasts are all in opposition to noxious creatures and wizards, Gc. 22. This, too, it says, that of all precious® birds the crow (valagh) is the most precious. 23. Regarding the white falcon it

22. This, too, it says, that of all precious® birds the crow (valagh) is the most precious. 23. Regarding the white falcon it

does not mean ‘bird,’ and the Pahlavi translator calls it ‘a quadruped.’ In the Pahl. Visp. I, 1, ‘the Karsipt is the chief of flying creatures,’ and the Bundahis also takes it as a bird (see Chaps. XIV, 23, XXIV, 11).

1 See Chaps. XIV, 11, 23, 24, XXIV, rr, 29.

2 The Av. Ash6-zusta of Vend. XVII, 26, 28.

* Compare Pers. z(lah, ‘a sparrow or lark.’

* Compare Pers. sak, ‘a magpie.’

5 This quotation is evidently left incomplete.

¢ The Pahlavi word is ambiguous; it may be read zil, ‘cheap, common,’ or it may be zagar = yakar, ‘dear, precious,’ but the

72 BUNDAHIS.

says, that it kills the serpent with wings. 24. The magpie (k4skinak) bird kills the locust, and is created in opposition to it. 25. The Kahrkds’, dwelling in decay, which is the vulture, is created for devouring dead matter (nasA!); so also are the crow (valak)? and the mountain kite.

26. The mountain ox, the mountain goat, the deer, the wild ass, and other beasts devour all snakes. 27. So also, of other axzmals, dogs are created in opposition to the wolf species, azd for securing the protection of sheep; the fox is created in opposition to the demon Khava ; the ichneumon is created in opposition to the venomous snake (garzak) and other noxious creatures in burrows; so also the great musk-anzmal is created in opposition® to ravenous intestinal worms (kadik-danak garzak). 28. The hedgehog is created in opposition to the ant which carries off grain‘, as it says, that the hedgehog, every time that it voids urine into an ant’s nest, will destroy a thousand ants; when the grain-carrier travels over the earth it pro-

latter seems most probable, although the crow is perhaps as ‘common’ as it is ‘ precious,’ as a scavenger in the East. Singularly enough Pers. arz4n is a synonym to both words, as it means both ‘cheap’ and ‘ worthy.’

1 The Av. kahrk4sa of Vend. III, 66, IX, 181, Aban Yt. 61, Mihir Yt. 129; its epithet zarm4n-m4nisn, ‘ dwelling in decay,’ is evidently intended as a translation of the Av. zarenumainis, applied to it in Bahram Yt. 33, Din Yt. 13. :

2 The text should probably be val4k-i sty&k va sar-i gar, ‘the black crow and the mountain kite,’ which are given as different birds in Shayast-l4-sh4yast, II, 5.

8 K2o0 omits the words from this ‘ opposition’ to the next one.

‘ The mér-i d4nak-kash is the Av. maoiris dané-karshé of Vend. XIV, 14, XVI, 28, XVIII, 146.

CHAPTER XIX, 24-34. 73

duces a hollow track!; when the hedgehog travels over it the track goes away from it, and it becomes level. 29. The water-beaver is created in opposition to the demon which is in the water. 30. The conclusion is this, that, of all beasts‘and birds and fishes, every one is created in opposition to some noxious creature.

29. The water-beaver is created in opposition to the demon which is in the water. 30. The conclusion is this, that, of all beasts‘and birds and fishes, every one is created in opposition to some noxious creature.

31. Regarding the vulture (kark4s) it says, that, even from his highest flight, he sees when flesh the size of a fist is on the ground; and the scent of musk is created under his wing, so that if, in devouring dead matter, the stench of the dead matter comes out from it, he puts 4zs head back under the wing and is comfortable again. 32. Regarding the Arab horse they say, that if, in a dark night, a single hair occurs on the ground, he sees zz.

33. The cock is created in opposition to demons and wizards, co-operating with the dog; as it says in revelation, that, of the creatures of the world, those which are co-operating with Srdésh?, in destroying the fiends, are the cock and the dog. 34. This, too, it says, that it would not have deen managed if I had not created the shepherd's dog, which is the Pasus-haurva*, amd the house watchdog, the Vis-haurva?; for it says in revelation, that the dog is a destroyer of such a fiend as covetous-

’ Comparing srak with Pers. suragh in preference to sfrakh or sQlakh, ‘a hole.’

? Av. Sraosha, the angel who is said specially to protect the world from demons at night; he is usually styled ‘the righteous,’ and is the special opponent of the demon Aéshm, ‘ Wrath’ (see Chap. XXX, 29).

* These are the Avesta names of those two kinds of dog (see Chap. XIV, 19).

74 BUNDAHIS.

ness, among those which are in the nature (aftth) of man and of animals. 35. Moreover it says, that, inasmuch as it will destroy all the disobedient, when it barks it will destroy pain’; and its flesh and fat are remedies for driving away decay and pain from men ?,

36. Adharmazd created nothing useless whatever, for all these (kol4 aé) are created for advantage ; when one does not understand the reason of them, it is necessary to ask the Dastdr (‘high-priest ’), for his five dispositions (khik)* are created in this way that he may continually destroy the fiend (or deceit).

CHAPTER XX.

1, On the nature of rivers it says in revelation, that these two rivers flow forth from the north, part from Albdrz and part from the Albfrz of Adhar-

1 Or it may be thus: ‘For it says thus: Wherewith will it destroy? When it barks it will destroy the assembly (gird) of all the disobedient.’

2 This is the most obvious meaning, but Spiegel (in a note to Windischmann’s Zoroastrische Studien, p. 95) translates both this sentence and the next very differently, so as to harmonize with Vend. XIII, 78, 99.

When it barks it will destroy the assembly (gird) of all the disobedient.’

8 The five dispositions (khim) of priests are thus detailed in old Pahlavi MSS.: ‘ First, innocence; second, discreetness of thoughts, words, and deeds; third, holding the priestly office as that of a very wise and very true-speaking master, who has learned religion attentively and teaches 7/ truly ; fourth, celebrating the worship of God (yazd4n) with a ritual (nfrang) of rightly spoken words and scriptures known by heart (narm naskfh4); fifth, remaining day and night propitiatingly in 42s vocation, struggling with his own resistance (hamést4r), and, a// life long, not turning away from steadfastness in religion, and being energetic in Azs. vocation,’

CHAPTER XIX, 35—XX, 4. 75

mazd!; one towards the west, that is the Arag’; and one towards the east, that is the Véh river. 2. After them eighteen rivers flowed forth from the same source, just as the remaining waters have flowed forth from them in great multitude; as they say that they flowed out so very fast, one from the other, as when a man recites one Ashem-voh( ? of a series (padisdr). 3. All of those, with the same water, are again mingled with these rivers, that is, the Arag river and Véh river. 4. Both of them continually circulate through the two extremities of the earth, and pass into the sea; and all the regions feast owing to the discharge (zah4k) of both, which, after both arrive together at the wide-formed ocean, returns to the sources whence they flowed out; as it says in revelation, that just as the light comes in through Albarz and goes out through Albfrz‘, the

? So in K2o, and if correct (being only partially confirmed by the fragment of this chapter found in all MSS. between Chaps. XIII and XIV) this reading implies that the rivers are derived partly from the mountains of Albfirz, and partly from the celestial Albfrs, or the clouds in the sky. M6 has ‘ flow forth from the north part of the eastern Albfirs.’ ,

* For further details regarding these two semi-mythical rivers see § 8, 9.

* The sacred formula most frequently recited by the Parsis, and often several times in succession, like the Pater-noster of some Christians ; it is not, however, a prayer, but a declaratory formula in ‘praise of righteousness’ (which phrase is often used as its name in Pahlavi). It consists of twelve Avesta words, as follows:

Ashem vohfi vahistem asti,

usta asti; usta ahméi

_hyad ashai vahistai ashem. And it may be translated in the following manner: ‘ Righteousness is the best good, a blessing it is; a blessing be to that which is righteousness to perfect rectitude’ (Asha-vahista the archangel).

* See Chap. V, 5.

76 BUNDAHIS.

And it may be translated in the following manner: ‘ Righteousness is the best good, a blessing it is; a blessing be to that which is righteousness to perfect rectitude’ (Asha-vahista the archangel).

* See Chap. V, 5.

76 BUNDAHIS.

water also comes out through Albfrz and goes away through Albdrz. 5. This, too, it says, that the spirit of the Arag begged of Atharmazd thus: ‘O first omniscient creative power?! from whom the Véh river begged for the welfare that thou mightest grant, do thou then grant z¢ in my quantity!’ 6. The spirit of the Véh river similarly begged of Adharmazd for the Arag river; azd on account of loving assistance, one towards the other, they flowed forth with equal strength, as before the coming of the destroyer they proceeded without rapids, and when the fiend shall be destroyed? they wz// again be without rapids.

7. Of those eighteen principal rivers, distinct from the Arag river avd Véh river, and the other rivers which flow out from them, I wz// mention the more famous?: the Arag river, the Véh river, the Diglat* river they call also again the Véh river, the Frat river, the Déittk river, the Dargdm river, the Zéndak river, the Harét river, the Marv river, the HétQmand river, the Akhdéshir river, the NAvad4® river, the Zismand river, the Khvegand river, the Balkh river, the Mehrva river they call the Hendva river, the Spéd’ river, the Rad ® river which they call also the Koir, the Khvaraé river which they call

? So in M6, but K2o has, ‘ First is the propitiation of all kinds.’

? Literally, ‘when they shall destroy the fiend.’

® For details regarding these rivers see the sequel.

* The Paz. Deyrid is evidently a misreading of Pahl. Diglat or Digrat, which occurs in § 12.

5 So in K2o, but M6 (omitting two words) has, ‘they call also the Didgar.’

* No further details are given, in this chapter, about this river, but it seems to be the river Nahvték of Chap. XXI, 6, the Naivtak of Chap. XXIX, 4, 5.

7 K2o has ‘ Spend.’ § Called Tort in & ++,

CHAPTER XX, 5-9. 77

also the Mesrgan, the Harhaz? river, the Teremet river, the Khvanaidis? river, the Daraga. river, the Kastk river, the Séd ° (‘shining’) river Pédaé-meyan or Katru-meyan river of Mokarstan.

8. I wz/? mention them also a second time: the Arag‘ river is that of which it is said that it comes out from Albfrz in the land of Sfrak 5, zz which they call it also the Ami; it passes on through the land of Spétos, which they also call Mesr, and they call it there the river Niv®. 9. The Véh’ river

1 Miswritten Araz in Pazand, both here and in § 27.

* M6 has Khvanainidis, but in K2o it is doubtful whether the extra syllable (which is interlined) is intended to be inserted or substituted; the shorter form is, however, more reconcilable with the Pahlavi form of Vendeses in § 29.

* As there is no description of any Séd river it is probably only an epithet of the Péda-meyan or Katru-meyan (pédak being the usual Pahlavi equivalent of Av. &ithr6). Justi suggests that Mokarstén (Mokarsta rfid in M6) stands for Pers. Moghulst4n, ‘ the country of the Moghuls,’ but this is doubtful.

* Sometimes written Arang or Aréng, but the nasal is usually omitted; it is the Av. Rangha of Aban Yt. 63, Rashnu Yt. 18, R4m Yt. 27, which is described more like a lake or sea in Vend. I, 77, Bahram Yt. 29. This semi-mythical river is supposed to encompass a great part of the known world (see Chap. VII, 16), and the Bundahis probably means to trace its course down the Am (Oxus) from Sogdiana, across the Caspian, up the Aras (Araxes) or the Kur (Cyrus), through the Euxine and Mediterranean, and up the Nile to the Indian Ocean. The Amf (Oxus) is also sometimes considered a part of the Véh river or Indus (see §§ 22, 28).

® Sogdiana (see Chap. XV, 29), the country of the Amd river.

* The combination of the three names in this clause, as Justi observes, renders it probable that we should read, ‘the land of Egypt, which is called Misr, and where the river is the Nile. The letter S in Péz. Spétos is very like an obsolete form of Av. g, or it may be read as Pahl. fk or fg, so the name may originally have been Gpétos or Ikpétos ; and the Paz. Niv, if transcribed into Pahlavi, can also be read Nil.

* The ‘good’ river, which, with the Arag and the ocean, completes

78 BUNDAHIS,

passes on in the east, goes through the land of Sind’, and flows to the sea in Hinddstan, and they call it there the Mehr&? river. 10. The sources of the Frat river are from the frontier of Aram, they feed upon zt in Sdristan, and it flows to the Diglat river; and of this Frat 7¢ zs* that they produce irrigation over the land. 11. It is declared that Mandséthar excavated the sources, and cast back the water all to one place, as it says thus: ‘1 reverence the Frat, full of fish, which MAndséihar excavated for ¢he benefit of his own soul, anzd. he seized the water and gave to drink®.’ 12. The Diglat® river comes out from Salm4n’, and flows to the sea in Khigistan. 13. The Déittk® river is the river

the circuit of the known world, and is evidently identified with the Indus ; sometimes it seems also to include the Ama (Oxus), as Bactria was considered a part of India ; thus we find the Balkh and Teremet rivers flowing into the Véh (see §§ 22, 28).

1 See § 30.

The Déittk® river is the river

1 See § 30.

2 No doubt the Mehrva or Hendvé river of § 7, and the Mihran of Ouseley’s Oriental Geography of the pseudo Ibn ‘Hafdal, pp- 148-155, which appears to combine the Satlig and lower Indus. The final n is usually omitted by the Bundahis after 4 in Pazand words. This river is also called Kasak (see § 30).

§ The Euphrates, which rises in Armenia (part of the eastern empire of the Romans), traverses Syria, and joins the Tigris.

* Or, ‘and its convenience is this ;’ a play upon the words farhat and Frat, which are identical in Pahlavi.

5 Referring probably to canals for irrigation along the course of the Euphrates.

* The Tigris (Arabic Diglat), Hiddekel of Gen, ii. 14, Dan. x. 4, and perhaps the Av. tighris of Tistar Yt. 6, 37; misread Déirid in Pazand.

7 The country of Salm (see Chap. XV, 29), son of Frédin (see Chap. XXXI, 9, 10). The name can also be read Dilm4n, which is the name of a place in the same neighbourhood.

* The Av. Déitya of Vend. XIX, 5, Adharmazd Yt. 21, Ab4n Yt. 112, Gés Yt. 29. The‘ good d4itya of Airyana-vaég6’ is also

CHAPTER XX, IO—I9. ~ 79

whith comes out from Altran-vég, and goes out through the hill-country'; of all rivers the noxious creatures in it are most, as it says, that the Daitik river is full of noxious creatures. 14. The Dargam river is in Side. 15. The Zend® river passes, through the mountains of Pangistan, and flows away to the Haro river. 16. The Haro ® river flows out from the Aparsén range‘. 17. The HétQmand® river is in Sagast4n, and its sources are from the Aparsén range; this is distinct from that which Frastyav conducted away ®. 18. The river Akhéshir is in Kdmts7. 19. The Zismand?® river, in the direc-

mentioned in Vend. I, 6, II, 42, 43, Aban Yt. 17, 104, Ram Yt. 2, but this may not be a river, though the phrase has, no doubt, led to locating the river Dafttk in Afran-vég.

1 Paz. gopest4n in K2o, which is evidently Pahl. k6fistan, but not the Kéhist&én of southern Persia. M6 has ‘the mountain of Pangistan,’ which must be incorrect, as according to §§ 15, 16, this is in north-east Khuras4n, and too far from Afran-vég in Atar6-patakan (Adar-bign), see Chap. XXIX, 12. Justi proposes to read Gurgistan (Georgia), and identifies the DAftik with the Araxes. But, adhering to the text of K2o, the Daftik rises in Adar-bigan and departs through a hill-country, a description applicable, not only to the Araxes, but also more particularly to the Saféd Rad or white river; although this river seems to be mentioned again as the Spéd or Spend river in § 23.

? Written Z6ndak in § 7. This can hardly be the Zendah river of Ispahan, but is probably the Tegend river, which flows past Meshhed into the Heri river.

8 This is the Heri, which flows past Herat.

« See Chap. XII, 9.

* The Etymander of classical writers, now the Hélmand in Afghanistan. The Av. Haétumat of Vend. I, 50, XIX, 130, Zamyad Yt. 66, is the name of the country through which it flows.

* See § 34 and Chap. XXI, 6.

7 The district about Dimaghan.

* Perhaps the Zarafs4n.

80 BUNDAHISs.

tion of Soghd, flows away towards the Khvegand river. 20. The Khvegand! river goes on through the midst of Samarkand and PargAna, and they call it also the river Ashard. 21. The Marv? river, a glorious river in the east’, flows out from the Aparsén range. 22. The Balkh river comes out from the Aparsén mountain of Bamikan‘, and flows on to the Véh’ river. 23. The Spéd® river is in Atarépatakan; they say that Dahdk begged a favour’ here from Aharman and the demons. 24. The Tort ® river, which they call also the Koir, comes out from

1 This is evidently not the small affluent now called the Khugand, but the great Syr-darya or Jaxartes, which flows through the provinces of Farghanah and Samarkand, past Kokand, Khugand, and Tashkand, into the Aral. The P&z. Ashard represents Pahl. Khshart, or Ashart (Iaxartes).

* The Murghab.

5 Or, ‘in Khfirdsan.’

* Bamian, near which the river of Balkh has its source.

® Justi observes that it should be ‘the Arag river;’ but according to an Armenian writer of the seventh century the Persians called the Oxus the Véh river, and considered it to be in India, because Buddhists occupied the country on its banks (see Garrez in Journal Asiatique for 1869, pp. 161-198). It would seem, therefore, that the Oxus was sometimes (or in early times) considered a part of the Arag (Araxes), and sometimes (or in later times) a part of the Véh (Indus).

* So in M6, but K2o has ‘ Spend,’ both here and in§ 7. The name of this river corresponds with that of the Saféd Rfd, although the position of that river agrees best with the account given of the Déitik in § 13.

™ Compare Ram Yt. 19, 20. K2o has ‘there,’ instead of ‘here.’

® Called Rad in § 7 (by the loss of the first letter of the original Pahlavi name); by its alternative name, Koir, Justi identifies it as the Kar in Georgia, flowing into the Caspian, or sea of Verg4n, the Av. Vehrkana (Hyrcania) of Vend. I, 42, which is Gdrg4n in Pahlavi.

CHAPTER XX, 20-30. 81

Vehrkana (Hyrcania) of Vend. I, 42, which is Gdrg4n in Pahlavi.

CHAPTER XX, 20-30. 81

the sea of Giklan', azd flows to the sea of Vergan?. 25. The Zah4vayi® is the river whzch comes out from Ataré-patak4n, and flows to the sea in Pars. 26. The sources of the Khvaraé‘ river are from Spahan°; it passes on through Khdgist4n, flows forth to the Diglat® river, and in Sp4han they call it the Mesrk4n’? river. 27. The Harhaz® river is in Taparistan, and its sources are from Mount Dimdavand. 28. The Teremet? river flows away to the Véh river. 29. The Vendeses?® river is in that part of Pars which they call Sagastén. 30, The Kasak” river comes out through a ravine (k4f) in the province of Tfs!*, and they call it there the Kasp river; more-

‘M6 has P&z. Key4seh, but this is in Sagastén (see Chap. XIII, 16).

* The MSS. have Verg4, but the final nasal after 4 is often omitted in P4zand readings in the Bundahis.

* Not mentioned in § 7. Possibly one of the rivers Z4b, which rise on the borders of Adarbig4n, flow into the Tigris, and so reach the Persian Gulf, the sea on the coast of Pars. Or it may be the Shirvan, another affluent of the Tigris, which flows through the district of Zohab.

* The Kuran, upon which the town of Shfistar was founded by one of the early Sasanian kings, who also dug a canal, east of the town, so as to form a loop branch of the river; this canal was called Nahr-i Masrfig4n by Oriental geographers (see Rawlinson, Journal Roy. Geogr. Soc. vol. ix. pp. 73-75).

® Ispahan in Persian.

* Miswritten Dayrid in Pazand (see § 12).

7 Written in Pazand without the final n, as usual. This is the old name of the canal forming the eastern branch of the Kuran at Shistar; it is now called Ab-i Gargar.

* Flows into the Caspian near Amfil.

* Probably the river which flows into the Amf (Oxus) at Tarmaz; but, in that case, the Oxus is here again identified with the Véh (Indus) as in § 22, instead of the Arag (Araxes) as in § 8.

" Called KAstk in § 7. 12 Close to Meshhed.

{s] G

82 BUNDAHIS.

over, the river, which is there the Véh, they call the Kasak?; even in Sind they call 2¢ the Kasak. 31. The Péd4k-miy4n ?, which is the river Xatru-miyan, is that which is in Kangdez*, 32. The Daraga river is in Airan-vég, on the bank (b4r) of which was the dwelling of Pérdshasp, the father of Zaratdst*. 33. The other innumerable waters and rivers, springs avd channels are one in origin with those °; so in various districts azd various places they call them by various names.

The Daraga river is in Airan-vég, on the bank (b4r) of which was the dwelling of Pérdshasp, the father of Zaratdst*. 33. The other innumerable waters and rivers, springs avd channels are one in origin with those °; so in various districts azd various places they call them by various names.

34. Regarding Frdsiyav® they say, that a thousand springs were conducted away by him into the sea Kydnsih’, suitable for horses, suitable for camels, suitable for oxen, suitable for asses, both great and small*; and he conducted the spring Zarinmand (or golden source), which is the Hétdmand ® river, they say, into the same sea; and he conducted the seven navigable waters of the source of the Va#aéni?® river into the same sea, and made men settle ¢here.

1 Or, ‘this same Véh river they call there the K4sak; even in Sénf they call ## the K4sak;’ Sénf is apt to be miswritten Sénd or Sind (see Chap. XV, 29).

2 See § 7. The latter half of both names can also be read ‘ m&han, m&hé, or mahan. Péshyétan, son of Vistésp, seems to have taken a surname from this river (see Chap. XXIX, 5).

* See Chap. XXIX, 10.

* See Chaps. XXIV, 15, XXXII, 1, 2.

5 Or, ‘are from those as a source.’

* The MSS. have ‘Pérfshasp,’ but compare § 17 and Chap. XXI, 6. The two names are somewhat alike in Pahlavi writing.

7 See Chap. XIII, 16.

* Compare Chap. XIX, 6. Kzo omits the words ‘suitable for asses ’ here.

* Another Hétmand according to § 17. Possibly a dried-up bed of that river.

CHAPTER XX, 3I-—XxXI, 2. 83

CyHarpTter XXI},

1. In revelation they mention seventeen ? species of liquid (may4), as one liquid resides in plants °; second, that which is flowing from the mountains, that is; the rivers; third, that which is rain-water ; fourth, that of tanks ad other special constructions ; fifth, the semen of animals and men; sixth, the urine of animals and men‘; seventh, the sweat of animals and men; the eighth liquid is that in the skin of animals and men; ninth, the tears of animals and men; tenth, the blood of animals and men; eleventh, the oil in animals and men, a necessary in both worlds®; twelfth, the saliva of animals and men, with which they nourish the embryo®; the thirteenth is that which is under the bark’ of plants, as it is said that every bark has a liquid, through which a drop appears on a twig (tékh) when placed four finger-breadths before a fire®; fourteenth, the milk of animals and men. 2. All these, through growth, or

‘navigable (ndvtak) waters’ may be ‘the N4vada river’ of § 7, ‘the river Nahvtak’ of Chap. XXI, 6, and Naivtak of Chap. XXIX, 4, 5.

1 This chapter is evidently a continuation of the preceding one.

3 Only fourteen are mentioned in the details which follow.

® Most of these details are derived from the Pahl. Yas. XX XVIII, 7-9, 13, 143 and several varieties of water are also described in Yas. LXVII, 15.

* This sixth liquid is omitted by K2o.

3 Only fourteen are mentioned in the details which follow.

® Most of these details are derived from the Pahl. Yas. XX XVIII, 7-9, 13, 143 and several varieties of water are also described in Yas. LXVII, 15.

* This sixth liquid is omitted by K2o.

5 Departed souls are said to be fed with oil in paradise.

* K2o omits the word pfs, ‘ embryo.’

7 The meaning ‘bark’ for Pz. ay van is merely a guess; Anquetil has ‘sap’ (compare Pers. Avin4, ‘ juice’), but this is hardly consistent with the rest of the sentence.

* See Chap. XXVII, 25.

84 BUNDAHIS.

the body which is formed, mingle again with the rivers, for the body which is formed and the growth are both one.

3. This, too, they say, that of these three rivers, that is, the Arag river, the Marv river, and the Véh! river, the spirits were dissatisfied, so that they would not flow into the world, owing to the defilement of stagnant water (armést) which they beheld, so that they were in tribulation through it until Zaratist was exhibited to them, whom I (Aftharmazd) will create, who w2// pour sixfold holy-water (zér) into it avd make z¢ again wholesome; he will preach carefulness?, 4. This, too, it says, that, of water whose holy-water is more and pollution less, the holy-water has come in excess, ad in three years it goes back to the sources*; ¢haé¢ of which the pollution and holy-water have both become equal, arrives back in six years; ¢hat of which the pollution is more and holy-water less, arrives back in nine years. 5. So, also, the growth of plants is connected, in this manner, strongly with the root‘; so, likewise, the blessings (4frin) which the righteous utter, come back, in this proportion, to themselves.

6. Regarding the river Nahvtaék® it says, that Frastyav of Tar conducted it away; and when @

* K2o has ‘ Hétfimand,’ but M6 has ‘ Sapir,’ the Huz. equivalent of ‘ Véh,’ which is more probable.

* Or, ‘abstinence from impurity.

* The source Arédvivs(ir (see Chap. XIII, 3, 10).

‘ That is, by the sap circulating like the waters of the earth. The greater part of this sentence is omitted in K2o.

® Probably ‘the NAavada’ and ‘ navigable waters’ of Chap. XX, 7, 34, and N&ivtak of Chap. XXIX, 4, 5.

* Reading amat, ‘when,’ instead of mfin, ‘which’ (see note to Chap. I, 7).

CHAPTER XXI, 3—XXII, 3. 85

Hashédar! comes it we// flow again suitable for horses; so, also, wi// the fountains of the sea Ky4nsih*. 7. Ky4nsih? is the one where the home (gin4k) of the Kay4n race is.

CuapTeR XXII.

1. On the nature of lakes it says in revelation, that thus many fountains of waters have come into notice, which they call lakes (var); counterparts of the eyes (£ashm) of men are those fountains (4ashmak) of waters; such as Lake Kééast, Lake Sévbar, Lake Khvdarizem?, Lake Frazdan, Lake Zartnmand, Lake Asvast, Lake Husru, Lake Satavés, Lake Urvis.

2. I wzd/ mention them also a second time: Lake Kékast* is in Ataré-patak4n, warm is the water ad opposed to harm, so that nothing whatever is living in z¢; and its source is connected with the wideformed ocean’, 3. Lake Sévbar is in the upper district and country on the summit of the mountain of Tas*; as it says, that the Sid-bahar? (‘share of benefit’) is propitious and good from which abound-

1 Written Khfrshédar, as usual in Bundahis (see Chap. XXXII, 8).

2 Written Kay4seh in Pazand (see Chap. XIII, 16).

* P4z. Khvarazm both here and in § 4.

‘ Av, A’a@hasta of Aban Yt. 49, Gos Yt. 18, 21, 22, Ashi Yt. 38, 41, Siréz. 9. The present Lake Urumiyah in Adarbigan, which is called Khegest, or Kegest, by ‘Hamdu-l-lah Musta(ft.

5 Implying that the water is salt.

* The K6ndrasp mountain (see Chap. XII, 24). This lake is probably a small sheet of water on the mountains near Meshhed.

7 Evidently a punning etymology of the name of this lake.

86 ; BUNDAHIS.

ing liberality is produced. 4. Regarding Lake Khvarizem? it says that excellent benefit is produced from it, ¢ha¢t zs, Arshisang? the rich in wealth, the well-portioned zzth abounding pleasure. 5. Lake Frazdan? is in Sagastén ; they say, where a generous man, who zs righteous, throws anything into it, it receives 7¢; when not righteous, it throws z¢ out again; its source also is connected with the wideformed ocean. 6. Lake Zartnmand is in Hamadan‘. 7. Regarding Lake Asvast it is declared that the undefiled’ water which it contains is always constantly flowing into the sea, so bright and copious ® that oe might say that the sun had come into it and looked at Lake Asvast, into that water which is requisite for restoring the dead in the renovation of the universe. 8. Lake Husru? is within fifty °

1 The province of Khvarizem was between the Aral and Caspian, along the ancient course of the Oxus (see Chap. XVII, 5). This lake has been identified with the Aral.

* Av. ashis vanguhi, ‘ good rectitude,’ personified as a female angel whose praises are celebrated in the Ashi Yast; in later times she has been considered as the angel dispensing wealth and possessions. She is also called Ard (Av. areta, which is synonymous with asha), see Chap. XXVII, 24.

’ The ‘Frazdanava water’ of Aban Yt. 108 and Farhang-i Otmkhadfik, p. 17. Justi identifies it with the Ab-ist4dah (‘standing water’) lake, south of Ghazni. It is here represented as a salt lake.

* K2o adds, ‘they say.’ This lake cannot be the spring Zarinmand of Chap. XX, 34.

® Paz. avnasti transcribed into Pahlavi is avinastag, ‘unspoiled,’ the equivalent of Av. anahita in Yas. LXIV, 1, 16, Visp. I, 18.

® K2o has ‘glorious’ as a gloss to ‘copious.’

7 The Av. Haosravangha of Stroz. 9, ‘the lake which is named Husravau’ of Zamyad Yt. 56. It may be either Lake Van or Lake Sevan, which are nearly equidistant from Lake Urumiyah.

* M6 has ‘four leagues.’

CHAPTER XXII, 4—XXIII, 3. §7

I, 18.

® K2o has ‘glorious’ as a gloss to ‘copious.’

7 The Av. Haosravangha of Stroz. 9, ‘the lake which is named Husravau’ of Zamyad Yt. 56. It may be either Lake Van or Lake Sevan, which are nearly equidistant from Lake Urumiyah.

* M6 has ‘four leagues.’

CHAPTER XXII, 4—XXIII, 3. §7

leagues (parasang) of Lake Kééast. 9. Lake (or, rather, Gulf) Satavés! is that a/ready written about, between the wide-formed ocean and the Patik. ro. It is said that in Kamind4n is an abyss (zafar), from which everything they throw in always comes back, and it well not receive it unless alive (gAnvar); when they throw a living creature into it, it carries z¢ down; men say that a fountain from hell is in it. 11. Lake Urvis is on Hfigar the lofty?.

CuarTreR XXIII.

1. On the nature of the ape avd the bear they say, that Yim, when reason (nism6) departed from him 8, for fear of the demons took a demoness as wife, and gave Yimak, who was 4zs sister, to a demon as wife; and from them have originated the tailed ape and bear and other species of degeneracy.

2. This, too, they say, that in the reign of Az-i Dahak‘* a young woman was admitted to a demon, and a young man was admitted to a witch (partk), and on seeing them they had intercourse; owing to that one intercourse the black-skinned negro arose from them. 3. When FrédQn® came to them they fled from the country of Iran, avd settled upon the sea-coast ; now, ¢krough the invasion of the Arabs, they are again diffused through the country of Iran.

1 See Chap. XIII, 9-13.

* See Chaps. XII, 5, XIII, 4.

* See Chap. XXXIV, 4. This is the Jamshéd of the Sh&hnamah. Perhaps for ‘reason’ we should read ‘glory.’

* See Chaps. XXXI, 6, XXXIV, 5.

® See Chap. XXXIV, 6.

88 BUNDAHIS.

CuHaAPTER XXIV.

1. On the chieftainship of men and animals and every single thing it says in revelation, that first of the human species Gayémard was produced, brilliant and white, with eyes which looked out for the great one, him who was here the Zarattistréthm (chief high-priest); the chieftainship of all things was from Zaratist?. 2. The white ass-goat #, which holds z¢s head down, is the chief of goats, the first of those species created*. 3. The black sheep which is fat and white-jawed is the chief of sheep; it was the first of those species created*. 4. The camel with white-haired knees ad two humps is the chief of camels. 5. First the black-haired ox with yellow knees was created; he is the chief of oxen. 6. First the dazzling white (ards) horse, with yellow ears, glossy hair, ad white eyes, was produced; he is the chief of horses. 7. The white, cat-footed * ass is the chief of asses. 8. First of dogs the fair (ards) dog with yellow hair was produced; he is the chief of dogs. 9. The hare was produced brown

7. The white, cat-footed * ass is the chief of asses. 8. First of dogs the fair (ards) dog with yellow hair was produced; he is the chief of dogs. 9. The hare was produced brown

? So in all MSS., but by reading mfin, ‘who,’ instead of min, ‘from,’ we should have, ‘him who was here the chief high-priest and chieftainship of all things, who was Zarat(st.’ The Pahlavi Visp. I, 1, gives the following list of chiefs: ‘ The chief of spirits is Aftharmazd, the chief of worldly existences is Zaratfst, the chief of water-creatures is the Kar-fish, the chief of /and-animals is the ermine, the chief of flying-creatures is the Karsipt, the chief of the wide-travellers is the ..., the chief of those suitable for grazing is the ass-goat.’

® See Chap. XIV, 14.

* It is doubtful whether the phrase, ‘the first of those species created,’ belongs to this sentence or the following one.

* Or, ‘cat-legged.’

CHAPTER XXIV, I-17. 89

(bdr); he is the chief of the wide-travellers. 10. Those beasts which have no dread whatever of the hand are evil. 11. First of birds the griffon of three natures! was created, not for here (this world), for the Karsipt ? is the chief, which they call the falcon (Zark), that which revelation says was brought to the enclosure formed by Yim. 12. First of fur animals the white ermine was produced; he is the chief of fur animals; as it says that z¢ zs the white ermine which came unto the assembly of the archangels. 13. The Kar-fish, ov Ariz*, is the chief of the water-creatures. 14. The Daitik‘ river is the chief of streams. 15. The Daraga® river is the chief of exalted rivers, for the dwelling of the father of Zaratist was on its banks®, amd Zaratist was born there. 16. The hoary forest’ is the chief of forests. 17. Hfgar the lofty®, on which the water of Arédvivstir flows and leaps, is the chief of summits, since z2¢ 2s ¢hat above which is the revolution of the constellation Satavés®, the chief of reser-

1 The Simurgh (see § 29 and Chap. XIV, 11, 23, 24). In Mkh. LXII, 37-39, it is mentioned as follows: ‘ And Sinamrf’s restingplace is on the tree which is opposed to harm, of all seeds; and always when he rises aloft a thousand twigs will shoot forth from that tree; and when he alights he will break off the thousand twigs, and he sheds their seed therefrom.’

* See Chap. XIX, 16. In § 29 Kamrés is said to be the chief.

® See Chaps. XIV, 12, 26, XVIII, 3-6.

* See Chap. XX, 13.

® See Chap. XX, 32.

* The MSS. have ‘in Balkh’ instead of ‘on the banks,’

7 The arfis-i razur is the Av. spaétitem razurem of Ram Yt. 31.

* See Chap. XII, 5. ® See Chap. II, 7.

90 BUNDAHIS.

In § 29 Kamrés is said to be the chief.

® See Chaps. XIV, 12, 26, XVIII, 3-6.

* See Chap. XX, 13.

® See Chap. XX, 32.

* The MSS. have ‘in Balkh’ instead of ‘on the banks,’

7 The arfis-i razur is the Av. spaétitem razurem of Ram Yt. 31.

* See Chap. XII, 5. ® See Chap. II, 7.

90 BUNDAHIS.

voirs?, 18. The Hém which is out-squeezed is the chief of medicinal plants*. 19. Wheat is the chief of large-seeded® grains. 20. The desert wormwood is the chief of unmedicinal* p/ants. 21. The summer vetch, which they also call ‘pag’ (gAvirs), is the chief of small-seeded grains’, 22. The Kastik (sacred thread-girdle) is the chief of clothes. 23. The Baz4yvana® is the chief of seas. 24. Of two men, when they come forward together, the wiser and more truthful is chief.

25. This, too, it says in revelation, that Adharmazd created the whole material world one abode, so that all may be one; for there is much splendour and glory of industry in the world. 26. Whatsoever he performs, who practises that which is good, is the value of the water of life7; since water is not created alike * in value, for the undefiled water of Arédvivsdr is worth the whole water of the sky and earth of Khvaniras®, except the Arag river’, created by Adharmazd. 27. Of trees the myrtle and date,

1 The meaning of P4z. gobar4 is doubtful, but it is here taken as standing for Pahl. g6bal4n, equivalent to the plural of Pers. g 6] or kdl, ‘areservoir ;’ Satavés being a specially ‘ watery’ constellation (see Tistar Yt.0). Justi traces gobarAn to Av. gufra, and translates it by ‘protecting s/ars.’

* Paz. khvad and bakaga evidently stand for Pahl. hid (Av. huta) and beszashk.

* Compare Av. as-danunim-a yavanandm (Tistar Yt. 29).

* Paz. abakaga stands for Pahl. abegashk.

5 Compare Av. kasu-danunim-fa vastranam (Tistar Yt. 29).

® Justi identifies this with Lake Van, but perhaps Lake Sevan may be meant.

7 Or, ‘its value is water.’ K20 omits the word ‘ water,’

® Reading ham instead of ham4k, ‘all.’

® See Chap. XI, 2-6.

10 See Chap. XX, 8,

CHAPTER XXIV, 18—XxvV, 3. gt

on which model, it is said, trees were formed, are worth all the trees of Khvaniras, except the Gédkard tree! with which they restore the dead.

28. Of mountains Mount Apdrsén’s beginning is zm Sagastan and end in Khfgistan, some say 2¢ zs all the mountains of Pars, avd is chief of all mountains except Albdrz. 29. Of birds Kamrés? is chief, who is worth all the birds in Khvaniras, except the griffon of three natures. 30. The conclusion is this, that every one who performs a great duty has then much value. .

CHAPTER XXV.,

1. On matters of religion® it says in revelation thus: ‘The creatures of the world were created by me complete in three hundred and sixty-five days,’ that is, the six periods of the Gahanbars which are completed ina year. 2. It is always necessary first to count the day avd afterwards the night, for first the day goes off, and then the night comes on ‘. 3. And from the season (g4s) of Médék-shém®,

2. It is always necessary first to count the day avd afterwards the night, for first the day goes off, and then the night comes on ‘. 3. And from the season (g4s) of Médék-shém®,

1 See Chap. XVIII, 1-4.

2 See Chap. XIX, 15, where it is written Kamr6és. This § is at variance with § 11, which gives the chieftainship to Karsipt.

® That is, ‘on the pertods for dbservance of religious duties.’

* The Jewish and Muhammadan practice is just the contrary.

®’ The Av. maidhy6-shema of Yas. I, 27, II, 36, III, 41, Visp. I, 3, II, 1, Afringan Gahanbéar 2, 8. It is the second season-festival, held on the five days ending with the roth day of the Parsi year, which formerly corresponded approximately to midsummer, according to the Bundahis. Later writings assert that it commemorates the creation of water.

92 BUNDAHIS.

which is the auspicious! day Khar of the month Tir?, to the season of Médiy4rém’, which is the

Later writings assert that it commemorates the creation of water.

92 BUNDAHIS.

which is the auspicious! day Khar of the month Tir?, to the season of Médiy4rém’, which is the

1 A dispute as to the meaning of this word formed no small part of the Kabisah controversy, carried on between the leaders of the two rival sects of Parsis in Bombay about fifty years ago. Dastur Edalji Darabji, the high-priest of the predominant sect (who adhered to the traditional calendar of the Indian Parsis), insisted that it meant ‘solar,’ or ‘belonging to the calendar rectified for solar time by the intercalation of a month every 120 years ;’ Mulla Firfz, the high-priest of the new sect (who had adopted the calendar of the Persian Parsis, which is one month in advance of the other), asserted that the word had no connection with intercalation, but meant ‘commencing,’ or ‘pertaining to New-year’s day,’ as translated into Sanskrit, by Nérydésang, in Mkh. XLIX, 27. Anquetil translates it either as ‘inclusive’ or ‘complete ;’ Windischmann simply skips it over; and Justi translates it everywhere as ‘inclusive.’ Dastur Edalji reads the word vehigaki or vehigak; Néryésang has vaheza; Mulla Firfz reads. naifakik in the Bundahis, but véhfgakfk in the Dinkard, where the word also occurs; Justi has nfffakik. The meaning ‘inclusive’ suits the context in nearly all cases in the Bundahis, but not elsewhere; if it had that meaning the most probable reading would be vikhégakik or nikhégakik, ‘arising, leaping over, including.’ It is nearly always used in conncction with dates or periods of time, and must be some epithet of a very general character, not only applicable to intercalary periods, but also to New-year’s day and dates in general; something like the Arabic epithet mub4rak, ‘fortunate,’ so commonly used in Persian dates. Dastur Edalji compares it with Pers. bihrak or bihtarak, ‘intercalary month,’ which is probably a corruption of it; and this suggests veh, ‘good,’ as one component of the epithet. “The word may be read veh-yagakik, ‘for reverencing the good,’ but as veh, ‘good,’ is an adjective, this would be an irregular form; a more probable reading is veh-fkaktk, ‘for anything good,’ which, when applied to a day, or any period of time, would imply that it is suitable for anything good, that is, it is ‘auspicious.’ Sometimes the word is written vehf#ak, véhfkakfk, or véhisd; and epithets of similar forms in Pahlavi are applied by the writers of colophons to themselves, but these should be read vakhégak or nistvak, ‘lowly, abject.’

? The eleventh day of the fourth month, when the festival commences.

* The Av. maidhydirya of Yas. I, 30, II, 39, II, 44, Visp. I,

CHAPTER XXV, 4-6. 93

The eleventh day of the fourth month, when the festival commences.

* The Av. maidhydirya of Yas. I, 30, II, 39, II, 44, Visp. I,

CHAPTER XXV, 4-6. 93

auspicious day Vahram of the month Din’—the shortest day—the night increases; and from the season of Méaty4rém to the season of Médék-shém the night decreases avd the day increases. 4. The summer day is as much as two of the shortest? winter days, azd the winter night is as much as two of the shortest summer nights*. 5. The summer day is twelve HAsars, the night six Ha4sars; the winter night is twelve HAsars, the day six; a HAsar being a measure of time and, in like manner, of land‘, 6. In the season of Haméspamadayém *, that is, the

6, II, 1, Af. Gahan. 2, 11. It is the fifth season-festival, held on the five days ending with the 2goth day of the Parsi year, which formerly corresponded approximately to midwinter, according to the Bundahis. Later writings assert that it commemorates the creation of animals.

' The twentieth day of the tenth month, when the festival ends.

* The word kah-aft is merely a hybrid Huzvaris form of kahist, ‘shortest,’ which occurs in the next phrase.

5 This statement must be considered merely as an approximation. The longest day is twice the length of the shortest one in latitude 49°, that is, north of Paris, Vienna, and Odessa, if the length of the day be computed from sunrise to sunset; and, if twilight be included, it is necessary to go still further north. In Adarbig&n, the northern province of Persia, the longest day is about 144 hours from sunrise to sunset, and the shortest is about 94 hours.

* According to this passage a hdsar of time is one hour and twenty minutes; itis the Av. hathra of the Farhang-i Otm-khadik (p. 43, ed. Hoshangji), which says, ‘of twelve Hasars is the longest day, and the day and night in which is the longest day are twelve of the longest Hasars, eighteen of the medium, and twenty-four of the least—an enumeration of the several measures of the HAsar.’ For the’h4sar measure of land, see Chap. XXVI.

* So in K2o, but this name is rarely written twice alike; it is the Av. hamaspathmaédaya of Yas. I, 31, II, 40, III, 45, Visp. I, 7, Il, 1, Af. Gahan. 2, 12. It is the sixth season-festival, held on the five Gatha days which conclude the Parsi year, just before

94 BUNDAHIS.

XXVI.

94 BUNDAHIS.

five supplementary days at the end of the month Spendarmad, the day and night are again equal. 7. As from the auspicious day Adharmazd of the month Fravardin to the auspicious day Aniran of the month Mitré! is the summer of seven months, so from the auspicious day Adharmazd of the month Avan to the auspicious month Spendarmad, on to the end of the five supplementary days*, is the winter of five months. 8. The priest fulfils the regulation (va#ar) about a corpse avd other things, by this calculation as to summer and winter. 9. In those seven months? of summer the periods (gas) of the days and nights are five—since ome celebrates the Rapitvin—namely, the period of daybreak is HAvan, the period of midday is Rapitvin, the period of afternoon is Afizérin, when the appearance of the stars 4as come into the sky‘ until midnight is the period of Atbisritém, from midnight until the stars become imperceptible is the period of Adshahin®. 1o. In winter are four periods, for from daybreak till Adzérin is all Havan, and the rest as I save said; and the reason of it is this, that the appearance ® of winter is in the direction of the

the vernal equinox, according to the Bundahis. Later writings assert that it commemorates the creation of man.

? That is, from the first day of the first month to the last day of the seventh month.

* That is, from the first day of the eighth month to the last of the five Gatha days, which are added to the twelfth month to complete the year of 365 days.

5 All MSS. have ‘ five months’ here.

' 4 Kazo has ‘when the stars have come into sight.’

5 The Avesta names of the five Gaéhs are Havani, Rapithwina, Uzayéirina, Aiwisrfthrema, and Ushahina.

CHAPTER XXV, 7-14. 95

5 All MSS. have ‘ five months’ here.

' 4 Kazo has ‘when the stars have come into sight.’

5 The Avesta names of the five Gaéhs are Havani, Rapithwina, Uzayéirina, Aiwisrfthrema, and Ushahina.

CHAPTER XXV, 7-14. 95

north, where the regions Vérdbarst! and Vérdgarst are; the original dwelling of summer, too, is in the south, where the regions Fradadafsh and Vidadafsh are; on the day Adharmazd of the auspicious month Avan the winter acquires strength and enters into the world, azd the spirit of Rapitvin goes from above-ground to below-ground, where the spring (kh4nt) of waters is, azd diffuses? warmth and moisture in the water, azd so many roots of trees do not wither with cold and drought. 11. And om the auspicious day Ataré of the month Din? the winter arrives, with much cold, at Afran-vég; and until the end, in the auspicious month Spendarmad, winter advances through the whole world; on this account they kindle a fire everywhere on the day Ataré of the month Din, and it forms an indication that winter fas come. 12. In those five months the water of springs avd conduits is all warm‘, for Rapitvin keeps warmth azd moisture there, and one does not celebrate the period of Rapitvin. 13. As the day Adharmazd of the month Fravardin advances it diminishes the strength which winter possesses, avd summer comes in from its own original dwelling, azd receives strength and dominion. 14. Rapitvin comes up from below-ground, and ripens the fruit of the trees; on this account

1 See Chaps. V, 8, XI, 3. The- north, being opposed to the south or midday quarter, is opposed to the midday period of Rapitvin, which, therefore, disappears as winter approaches from the north.

‘If, instead of khAnf for khAntk, ‘spring,’ we read ahf-i, ‘lord of, the translation will be, ‘so that the angel of waters may diffuse,’ &c. :

* The ninth day of the tenth month.

* That is, warmer than the air, as it is cooler in summer.

96 BUNDAHIS.

the water of springs is cold in summer’, for Rapftvin is not there; azd those seven? months one celebrates the Rapitvin, azd summer advances through the whole earth. 15. And yet in the direction of HinddstAn, there where the original dwelling of summer is nearer, it is always neither cold nor hot; for in the season which is the dominion of summer, the rain always dispels most of the heat, azd it does not become perceptible ; in the winter rain does not fall, and the cold does not become very perceptible *. 16. In the northern direction, where the preparation of winter is, z¢ zs always cold‘; for in the summer mostly, on account of the more oppressive winter there, it is not possible so to dispel the cold that one might make z¢ quite warm. 17. In the middle localities the cold of winter azd heat of summer both come on vehemently.

17. In the middle localities the cold of winter azd heat of summer both come on vehemently.

18. Again, the year dependent on the revolving moon is not equal to the computed year on this account, for the moon ® returns one time in twentynine, azd one time in thirty days, and there are four

1 Ka2o has ‘ winter’ by mistake.

2 K2o has‘ six,’ and M6 ‘ five,’ instead of ‘ seven.’

® This is a fairly accurate account of the effect of the monsoons over the greater part of India, as understood by a foreigner unacquainted with the different state of matters in a large portion of the Madras provinces.

“ M6 has khfr4s4n instead of 4rayisn, ‘ preparation,’ which alters the sense into ‘ that is, KhQr4s4n, of which the winter is always cold.’

6 The MSS. have the Huzvaris term for ‘month,’ which is sometimes used, by mistake, for ‘moon.’ It is doubtful which word the author intended to use here, but it is usual to count the days of a lunar month from the first actual appearance of the new moon, which usually occurs a full day after the change of the moon.

CHAPTER XXV, 15-22. 97

hours (zam4n) more than such a one of its years'; as it says, that every one deceives where they speak about the moon (or month), except when they say that it comes twice in sixty days. 19. Whoever keeps the year by the revolution of the moon mingles summer with winter ad winter with summer ?.

20. This, too, z¢ says, that the auspicious month Fravarain, the month Ardavahist, azd the month Horvadad? are spring; the month Tir, the month Amerédad, and the month Shatvaird are summer; the month Mitré, the month Av4n, and the month Ataré are autumn; the month Din, the month Vohiman, avd the month Spendarmad are winter ‘. 21. And the sun comes from the sign (khfrdak) of Aries, into which it proceeded in the beginning, back to that same place in three hundred and sixtyfive days and six short times (hours), which are one year. 22. As every three months it (the sun) advances through three constellations, more or less, the moon comes, in a hundred and eighty days, back to the place out of which it travelled in the beginning °,

* Meaning, probably, that the lunar year is four hours more than twelve months of 29 and 30 days each, alternately. It should be 8 hours, 48 minutes, and 37 seconds. The sentence seems defective, but it is evident from § 21 that zam4n means ‘hour.’

* That is, the lunar year being eleven days shorter than the solar one, its months are constantly retrograding through the seasons.

® Generally written Avardéd in Pazand, and Khurdad in Persian.

* The names of the months are selected from the names of the days of the month (see Chap. XXVII, 24), but are arranged in a totally different order.

* Probably meaning, that the new moon next the autumnal

(s] H

98 - BUNDAHIS.

CuHaPTER XXVI.

* The names of the months are selected from the names of the days of the month (see Chap. XXVII, 24), but are arranged in a totally different order.

* Probably meaning, that the new moon next the autumnal

(s] H

98 - BUNDAHIS.

CuHaPTER XXVI.

1. A HAsar! on the ground is a Parasang of one thousand steps of the two feet. 2. A Parasang? is a measure as much as a far-seeing man may look out, see a beast of burden, and make known that z¢ is black or white. 3. And the measure of a man is eight medium spans °.

equinox is to be looked for in the same quarter as the new moon nearest the vernal equinox, the moon’s declination being nearly the same in both cases.

1 Av. hathra of Vend. II, 65, VIII, 280, 287, 291, Tistar Yt. 23, 29. The statements regarding the length of a Hasar are rather perplexing, for we are told that it ‘is like a Parasang’ (Chap. XLV, 4), that ‘the length of a Hasar is one-fourth of a Parasang’ (Chap. XVI, 7), and that ‘a medium Hasar on the ground, which they also call a Parasang, is a thousand steps of the two feet when walking with propriety’ (Farhang-i Oim-khadfk, ed. Hosh. p. 42). To reconcile these statements we must conclude that the H4sar is like a Parasang merely in the sense of being a long measure of distance, that it is really the mille passus or mile of the Romans, and that it is a quarter of the actual Parasang. At the same time, as it was usual to call a Hasar by the name of a Parasang, we are often left in doubt whether a mile or a league is meant, when a Hisar or Parasang is mentioned. The Farhang-i Oim-khadik (p. 41) also mentions other measures of distance, such as the takar (Av. takara) of two HAsars, the asvast (or aéast) of four Hasars, the dashmést (Av. dakhshmaiti) of eight Hasars, and the yégést (Av. yigaiasti or yugaiasti) of sixteen Hasars.

3 A Parasang is usually from 34 to 4 English miles, but perhaps a HAsar is meant here.

* Reading vitast-i miyAfnak instead of vitast dam4nak. The Farhang-i Oim-khadQk (p. 41) mentions three kinds of spans, the Av. vitasti (Vend. VIII, 243, 245, XVII, 13) of twelve fingerbreadths (angst), or about 9 inches, which is a full span between the thumb and little finger (the one mentioned in the text); the Av. disti (Vend. XVII, 13) of ten finger-breadths, or about 7} inches, which is a span between the thumb and middle finger ; and the

CHAPTER XXVI, I-—XXVII, 2. 99

CuarpTteR X XVII,

1. On the nature of plants it says in revelation, that, before the coming of the destroyer, vegetation had no thorn and bark about it; and, afterwards, when the destroyer came, it became coated with bark amd thorny’, for antagonism mingled with every single thing; owing to that cause vegetation is also much mixed with poison, like Bis the height of hemp (kand)?, that is poisonous, for men when they eat z¢ die.

2. In like manner even as the animals, with grain of fifty and five species azd twelve species of medicinal plants, have arisen from the primeval ox, ten thousand‘ species among the species of principal

Av. uzasti (Pahl. 141l4-ast) of eight finger-breadths, or about 6 inches, which is a span between the thumb and fore-finger. Other measures mentioned by the same authority are the pat (Av. padha, Vend. IX, 15, 20, 29), ‘foot,’ of fourteen finger-breadths, or about to} inches; the g4m (Av. gAya, Vend. III, 57, &c.), ‘ step,’ which ‘in the Vendidad is three pai,’ or about 2 feet 74 inches, ‘and in other places is said fo de two frarast’ (Av. frarathni in Vend. VIL, 76, 79,87); so the frarast, which is probably the distance from the neck to the extended elbow, is half a g4m, or from 15 to 16 inches. Two other measures are mentioned in Vend. VII, 79, 87, 90, IX, 8, the Av. frabazu, ‘ fore-arm or cubit’ from elbow to finger-ends, which is about 18 inches (or it may be a half fathom) ; and Av. vibazu, which is probably the ‘fathom,’ or extent of the two arms out-stretched, from 54 to 6 feet.

1 M6 has ‘ poisonous,’ but is evidently copied from an original almost illegible in some places.

® Perhaps ‘hemp the height of Bis’ would better express the Pahlavi words, but Bis (Napellus Moysis) is often mentioned as a poisonous plant. The phrase may also be translated ‘ like Bis and tall hemp.’

® See Chap. XIV, 1.

* M6 has ‘a thousand,’ but marks an omission. See Chap. IX, 4.

H 2

100 BUNDAHIS.

plants, azd a hundred thousand species among ordinary plants have grown from all these seeds of the tree opposed to harm}, the many-seeded, whzch has grown in the wide-formed ocean. 3. When the seeds of all these plants, with those from the primeval ox, have arisen upon it, every year the bird? strips that tree azd mingles all the seeds in the water; Tistar seizes ‘hem with the rain-water and rains them on to all regions. 4. Near to that tree the white Hém, the healing and undefiled, has grown at the source of the water of Arédvivsir $; every one who eats z¢ becomes immortal, and they call it the Gékard‘ tree, as it is said that Hém is expelling death ®; also in the renovation of the untverse they prepare its immortality therefrom*; and it is the chief of plants’.

5. These are as many genera of plants as exist: trees and shrubs, fruit-évees, corn, flowers, aromatic herbs, salads, spices, grass, wild plants, medicinal

1 See Chaps. IX, 5, XVII, 9, XXIX, 5.

5. These are as many genera of plants as exist: trees and shrubs, fruit-évees, corn, flowers, aromatic herbs, salads, spices, grass, wild plants, medicinal

1 See Chaps. IX, 5, XVII, 9, XXIX, 5.

* The apparently contradictory account in Chap. IX, 2, refers only to the first production of material plants from their spiritual or ideal representative. The bird here mentioned is Kamrés (see Chaps. XIX, 15, XXIV, 29), as appears from the following passage (Mkh. LXII, 40-42): ‘And the bird Aamrés for ever sits 2” that vicinity ; and his work is this, that he collects that seed which sheds from the tree of all seeds, which is opposed to harm, and conveys 7/ there where Tistar seizes the water, so that Tistar may seize the water with that seed of all kinds, and may rain 7/ on the world with the rain.’

® See Chaps. XII, 5, XIII, 3-5.

* Here written Gékarn in all MSS. See Chaps. IX, 6, XVIII, I, 2.

® That is, in Yas. IX, where Haoma is entitled dfraosha.

® See Chap. XXIV, 27.

7 See Chap. XXIV, 18.

CHAPTER XXVII, 3-II. 101

Plants, gum plants, and all producing ! oil, dyes, and clothing. 6. I wz? mention them also a second time: all whose fruit is not welcome as food of men, and are perennial (s4lv4r), as the cypress, the plane, the white poplar, the box, and others of this genus, they call trees and shrubs (d4r va dirakht). 7. The produce of everything welcome as food of men, that is perennial, as the date, the myrtle, the loteplum 2, the grape, the quince, the apple, the citron, the pomegranate, the peach, the fig, the walnut, the almond, axd others in this genus, they call fruit (mivak). 8. Whatever requires labour with the spade’, avd is perennial, they call a shrub (dirakht). 9. Whatever requires that they take its crop through labour, azd zts root withers away, such as wheat, barley, grain, various kinds‘ of pulse, vetches, and others of this genus, they call corn (gird4k). 10. Every plant with fragrant leaves, which is cultivated by the hand-labour of men, avd is perennial (hamvAr), they call an aromatic herb (siparam). 11. Whatever sweet-scented blossom arises a¢ various seasons through the hand-labour of men, or has a perennial root azd blossoms in z¢s season with new shoots azd sweet-scented blossoms, as the rose, the narcissus, the jasmine, the dog-rose (néstarfin),

1 Comparing this list with the subsequent repetition it appears probable that ham4k bar4 is a corruption of aesam béd (see §§ 19, 21), and that we ought to read ‘ gum planis, woods, scents, ~ and plants for oil, dyes, and clothing.’ M6 has ‘oil and dyes for clothing.’

* The kfinar (see Chap. XV, 13).

® The Paz. péhani (which is omitted in K20) is evidently a misreading of Pahl. pashang, ‘a hoe-like spade.’

* M6 adds Paz. gavina (Pahl. gQnak) to gvid gvid munga4n, without altering the meaning materially.

102 BUNDAHIS.

XV, 13).

® The Paz. péhani (which is omitted in K20) is evidently a misreading of Pahl. pashang, ‘a hoe-like spade.’

* M6 adds Paz. gavina (Pahl. gQnak) to gvid gvid munga4n, without altering the meaning materially.

102 BUNDAHIS.

the tulip, the colocynth (kavastik), the pandanus (kédi), the £amba, the ox-eye (héri), the crocus, the swallow-wort (zarda), the violet,.the karda, and others of this genus, they call a flower (g Ql). 12. Everything whose sweet-scented fruit, or sweetscented blossom, arises in z¢s season, without the hand-labour of men, they call a wild plant (vahar or nih&l). 13. Whatever is welcome as food of cattle and beasts of burden they call grass (giy4h). 14. Whatever enters into cakes (pés- parakih4) they call spices (@vzarth4). 15. Whatever is welcome in eating of bread, as torn shoots! of the coriander, water-cress (kakig), the leek, azd others of this genus, they call salad (térak)*. 16. Whatever is like spinning® cotton, azd others of this genus, they call clothing plants (gamak). 17. Whatever lentil* is greasy, as sesame, ddishd4ang, hemp, zandak®5, and others of this genus, they call an oil-seed (rékané6). 18. Whatever one can dye clothing with, as saffron, sapan-wood, zasava, vaha, azd others of this genus, they call a dyeplant (rag). 19. Whatever root, or gum °, or wood

* Reading stak darid; Justi has ‘baked shoots ;’ Anquetil has ‘the three following ;’ M6 has stak va karafs, ‘shoots and parsley.’

7 Or tarak in § 5, Pers. tarah.

* Reading Huz. neskhun4a, ‘twisting,’ but the word is doubtful ; Justi has ‘ sitting on the plant,’ which is a rather singular description for cotton.

* Reading mafag; Anquetil, Windischmann, and Justi read mazg, ‘marrow,’ but this is usually written otherwise.

® Perhaps for zét6, ‘olive,’ as Anquetil supposes, and Justi assumes.

* Reading tf (compare Pers. tuf, ‘ saliva’).

CHAPTER XXVII, 12-24. 103

is scented, as frankincense!, varast?, kust, sandalwood, cardamom, camphor, orange-scented mint, and others of this genus, they call a scent (bdd). 20. Whatever stickiness comes out from plants‘ they call gummy (zadak). 21. The timber which proceeds from the trees, when it is either dry or wet, they call wood (£iba). 22. Every one of all these plants which is so, they call medicinal (dardk)®.

23. The principal fruits are of thirty kinds (khadfiinak), and ten species (sardak) of them are fit to eat inside and outside, as the fig, the apple, the quince, the citron, the grape, the mulberry, the pear, and others of this kind; ten are fit to eat outside, du¢ not fit to eat inside, as the date, the peach, the white apricot, azd others of this kind; those which are fit to eat inside, dz¢ not fit to eat outside, are the walnut, the almond, the pomegranate, the cocoanut®, the filbert 7, the chesnut *, the pistachio nut, the varga4n, and whatever else of this description are very remarkable.

24°. This, too, it says, that every single flower is appropriate to an angel (ameshdéspend)”, as the

? Paz. kendri for Pahl. kundur probably.

* Justi compares Pers, barghast.

* Paz. kakura may be equivalent to Pers. qaqulah, ‘ cardamoms,’ or to Pers. kakul or kak Ql, ‘ marjoram.’

* K20 omits a line, from here to the word ‘ either.’

5 The line which contained this sentence is torn off in K2o0.

* Paz. anarsar is a misreading of Pahl. anargil (Pers. nargil, * cocoa-nut ’).

7 Paz. pendak, a misreading of Pahl. funduk.

® Paz. shahbréd, a misreading of Pahl. shahbalfit; omitted in M6.

® M6 begins a new chapter here.

1° These are the thirty archangels and angels whose names are applied to the thirty days of the Parsi month, in the ordcr in

104 BUNDAHIS.

white! jasmine (saman) is for Vohdman, the myrtle and jasmine (yasmin) are Adharmazd’s own, the mouse-ear (or sweet marjoram) is Ashavahist’'s? own, the basil-royal is Shatvairé’s own, the musk flower is Spendarmaa’s, the lily is Horvadaa’s, the 4amba is Amerédaa’s, Din-pavan-Ataré has the orangescented mint (vadrang-béd), Ataré has the marigold (4dargun), the water-lily is Avan’s, the white marv is Khiarshéa@’s, the ranges‘ is Mah’s, the violet is Tir’s, the méren® is Gés’s, the kArda is Din-pavan-Mitré’s, all violets are Mitré’s, the red chrysanthemum (khér) is Srésh’s, the dog-rose (nestran) is Rashnd’s, the cockscomb is Fravardin’s, the sisebar is VAahr4m’s, the yellow chrysanthemum is Ram’s, the orange-scented mint is Vaa’s®, the trigonella is Din-pavan-Din’s, the hundredpetalled rose is Din’s, all kinds of wild flowers (vah4r) are Ara’s?, Astdd has all the white Hém ’, the bread-baker's basil is Asm4n’s, Zamy4d has the crocus, Maraspend has the flower® of Ardashir,

which they are mentioned here, except that AGharmazd is the first day, and Vohfiman is the second.

1 M6 has ‘ yellow.’

* Synonymous with the Ardavahist of Chap. I, 26.

* Anquetil, Windischmann, and Justi have ‘ the poppy.’

“ M6 has Paz. Ig as only the first part of the word, and Justi translates it by ‘red lac,’ which is not a plant. Transcribing the P4zand into Pahlavi, perhaps the nearest probable word is rand, ‘laurel.’

5 M6 has Paz. ménr; Anquetil has ‘vine blossom,’ and is followed by Windischmann and Justi, but the word is very uncertain.

6 The remainder of this chapter is lost from K2o.

7 This female angel is also called Arshisang (see Chap. XXII, 4).

® See § 4.

® M6 leaves a blank space for the name of the flower; perhaps it is the marv-i Ardashfran,

CHAPTER XXVII, 25—XXVIII, 2. 105

Aniran das this H6m of the angel Hém!', of three kinds.

25. It is concerning plants that every single kind with a drop of water on a twig (teh) they should hold four finger-breadths in front of the fire?; most of all it is the lotos (kdQn4r) they speak of.

CuaPpTreR XXVIII3.

105

Aniran das this H6m of the angel Hém!', of three kinds.

CuaPpTreR XXVIII3.

[1. On the evil-doing of Aharman and the demons it says in revelation, that the evil which the evil spirit has produced for the creation of Adharmazd it is possible to tell by this winter‘; and his body is that of a lizard (vazagh)® whose place is filth (kalA). 2..He does not think, nor speak, nor act for the welfare (naddkth) of the creatures of Adharmazd ; and his business is unmercifulness and the destruction of this welfare,|so that the creatures which Adharmazd shall increase he will destroy; and Azs eyesight (4ashm mi&isn)® does not refrain from doing the creatures harm. 3. As it says that, ‘ever

1 Reading, in Pahlavi, Hm yédaté aé hém.

2 See Chap. XXI, 1. Referring to the necessity of drying firewood before putting it on the fire. The kfn4r is specially mentioned, as one of the first fire-woods used by mankind, in Chap. XV, 13. .

5 Chaps. XXVIII, XXIX, and XXXI are omitted in M6 and all MSS. descended from it, whether Pahlavi or Pazand; and, owing to the loss of a folio from Kzo before any of its extant copies were written, the first quarter of Chap. XXVIII has hitherto been missing, but is here supplied (enclosed in brackets) from TD, a MS. belonging to Mobad Tahmuras Dinshaw (see Introduction).

* Winter being one of the primary evils brought upon creation by Angra-mainyu (see Vend. I, 8-12).

® See Chap. III, 9. ® Referring to ‘ the evil eye.’

106 BUNDAHIs.

since a creature was created by us, 1, who am Aftharmazd, have not rested at ease, on account of providing protection for my own creatures; and likewise not even he, the evil spirit, on. account of contriving evil for the creatures.’ 4. And by cher devotion to witchcraft (yatik-dindith) he seduces mankind into affection for himself and disaffection to Adharmazd}, so that they forsake the religion of Adharmazd, and practise that of Aharman. 5. He casts this into the thoughts of men, that this religion of Adharmazd is nought, and it is not necessary to be steadfast in it. 6. Whoever gives that man anything, in whose law (d4@) this saying is established, then the evil spirit is propitiated by him, that is, he has acted by his pleasure.

5. He casts this into the thoughts of men, that this religion of Adharmazd is nought, and it is not necessary to be steadfast in it. 6. Whoever gives that man anything, in whose law (d4@) this saying is established, then the evil spirit is propitiated by him, that is, he has acted by his pleasure.

7. The business of Akéman? is this, that he gave vile thoughts and discord to the creatures. 8. The business of the demon Andar is this, that he con- Strains the thoughts of the creatures from deeds of virtue, just like a leader who Aas well-constrained (sardar-i khdp afs4rdd); and he casts this into the thoughts of men, that it is not necessary to have the sacred shirt and thread- girdle. 9. The business of the demon Savar", that is a leader of the demons, is this, that is, misgovernment, oppressive anarchy, and drunkenness. 10. The business of the demon Naikiyas‘ is this, that he gives discontent to the creatures; as it says, that should this ove

1 Compare Chap. I, r4.

2 The six arch-fiends of this paragraph are those mentioned in Chaps. I, 27, XXX, 29.

® Written Sévar in Chap. I, 27.

‘ Written Nakahéd in Chap. I, 27, Naikfyas when repeated in this sentence, and Paz. Nafinghas in Chap. XXX, 29.

CHAPTER XXVIII, 3-15. 107

give anything to those men whose opinion (dd) is this, that it is not necessary to have the sacred shirt and thread-girdle, then Andar, Savar, and Naikiyas are propitiated by him. 11. The demon Taprév! is he who mingles poison with plants and creatures; as it says thus: ‘ Taprév the frustrater, and Zatrié the maker of poison.’ 12. All those six, it is said, are arch-fiends? of the demons; the rest are cooperating and confederate with them. 13. This, too, it says, that]? should ove give [anything to] a man who says [that it is proper to have one boot], and in his law walking with one boot [is established, then]* the fiend Taprév is propitiated [by him].

14. The demon Tarémat® [is he who] produces disobedience ; the demon Mitékht ® is the liar (drégan) of the evil spirit?; the demon Arask® (‘malice’) is the spiteful fiend of the evil eye. 15. Theirs are the same? appliances as the demon Aeshm’s”, as it

? Written Tairév in Chap. I, 27. * See Chap. III, 2.

* From this point the Pahlavi text is extant in K2o, except some illegible words, the translation of which (supplied from TD) is here enclosed in brackets.

* Anquetil, misled by the lacuna in his MS., thought that there was a change of subject here, and began a new chapter at this point. On this account the numbers of his chapters are henceforth one in excess of those in this translation.

5 Written Tarékmaté in TD, and identified with Nadnghas (Naikiyas) in Chap. XXX, 29; a personification of the Av. tarémaiti, ‘ disobedience,’ of Yas. XXXIII, 4, LIX, 8.

* A personification of the Av. mithaokhta, ‘ false-spoken,’ of Yas. LIX, 8, Vend. XIX, 146, Visp. XXIII, 9, Zamy4d Yt. 96.

7 TD has drag gimanikth, ‘the fiend of scepticism.’

XXX, 29; a personification of the Av. tarémaiti, ‘ disobedience,’ of Yas. XXXIII, 4, LIX, 8.

* A personification of the Av. mithaokhta, ‘ false-spoken,’ of Yas. LIX, 8, Vend. XIX, 146, Visp. XXIII, 9, Zamy4d Yt. 96.

7 TD has drag gimanikth, ‘the fiend of scepticism.’

® Av. araska of Yas. IX, 18, Ram Yt. 16, personified.

®* The word h6manam in K2ois a false Huzvaris reading of ham, owing to the copyist reading am, ‘I am;’ TD has hamafz4r, ‘having like means.’

Or Khashm, ‘wrath;’ so written in K2o0, but it is usually

108 BUNDAHIS.

says that seven powers are given 4o Aeshm!, that he may utterly destroy the creatures therewith ; with those seven powers he will destroy seven? of the Kayan heroes in his own time, é¢ one will remain. 16. There where Mitdkht (‘falsehood’) arrives, Arask (‘malice’) becomes welcome, [and there where Arask is welcome]? Aeshm lays a foundation *, and there where Aeshm has a foundation ® many creatures perish, avd he causes much non-Iranianism*. 17. Aeshm mostly contrives all evil for the creatures of Adharmazd, and the evil deeds of those Kayan heroes have been more complete through Aeshm, as it says, that Aeshm, the impetuous assailant, causes them most’.

18, The demon Vizarésh® is he who struggles with the souls of men which save departed, those

Aéshm elsewhere; the Av. aéshma of Vend. IX, 37, X, 23, 27, &c. The Asmodeus of the Book of Tobit appears to be the Av. Aéshmé daévé, ‘ demon of wrath.’

1 TD has ‘there were seven powers of Aéshm.’

? TD has ‘six,’ which looks like an unlucky attempt to amend a correct text. ‘Tradition tells us that only five Kayans reigned (see Chap. XXXIV, 7), and the Shahn4mah also mentions Siyawush (Pahl. Kai-Siyavakhsh), who did not reign; but eight Kay4ns, besides L6éhardsp and Vistasp, who were of collateral descent (see Chap. XXXI, 28), are mentioned in the Avesta, whence the author of the Bundahis would obtain much of his information (see Fravardin Yt. 132, Zamydd Yt. 71, 74).

® The phrase in brackets occurs only in TD.

* Reading bunak as in TD; K2zo has ‘sends down a root.’

5 Soin TD; K2o has ‘ where Aeshm keeps on.’

¢ That is, ‘many foreign customs.’

7 The word vésh, ‘most,’ is only in TD.

® So in TD; Kzo has Vigésh. He is the Av. Vizaresha of Vend. XIX, 94, who is said to convey the souls of the departed to the Xinvad bridge.

CHAPTER XXVIII, 16-22. 109

days and nights! when ¢hey remain in the world; he carries ‘Hem on, terror-stricken, avd sits at the gate of hell. 19. The demon Uda? is he who, when a man sits in a private place, or when he eats at meals, strikes 42s knee spiritually on zs back 3, so that he bawls out [avd looks out, that chattering he may eat, chattering] he may evacuate (rié@), and chattering he may make water (mézéd@), so that he may not attain [unto the] best existence *.

[20. The demon Ak&t4sh ® is the fiend of perversion (nikirayth), who makes the creatures averse (niktr4t) from proper things; as it says, that whoever has given anything to that person (tanf) whose opinion (d4@) is this, that it is not necessary to have a high-priest (dastébar), then the demon Aeshm is propitiated by him. 21. Whoever has given anything to that person whose opinion is this, and who says, that it is not necessary to have a snake-killer (m4r-van), then Aharman, with the foregoing demons, is propitiated by him; this is said of him who, when he sees a noxious creature, does not kill 24. 22. A snake-killer (m4ré-gn6)é® is a stick on the end of which a leathern chong is

1 TD has ‘those three nights,’ referring to the period that the soul is said to remain hovering about the body after death (see H4dékht Nask, ed. Haug, II, 1-18, III, 1-17).

* Soin K20; TD has Afidak (see Pahl.Vend. XVIII, 70).

°> TD has merely ‘strikes a slipper (padin-pdésh) spiritually,’ that is, invisibly, for the purpose of startling the man.

* The short phrases in brackets are taken from TD to supply words torn off from K2o, which passes on to Chap. XXIX at this point, but TD supplies a continuation of Chap. XXVIII, which is added here, and enclosed in brackets.

5 The Av. Akatasha of Vend. X, 23 Sp., XIX, 43 W.

* See Pahlavi Vend. XVIII, 5, 6.

IIo BUNDAHIS.

provided ; and it is declared that every one of the good religion must possess one, that they may strike and kill noxious creatures avd sinners more meritoriously with it.

23. Zarm4n?! is the demon who makes decrepit (dispad), whom they call old age (pirth). 24. Xishmak? is he who makes disastrous (vazandak), and also causes the whirlwind*® wzch passes over for disturbance. 25. The demon Varené‘ is he who causes illicit intercourse, as it says thus: ‘Varen6 the defiling (4141).’ 26. The demon Bash- Asp*® is she who causes slothfulness; Ség is the fiend (drig) who causes annihilation; and the demon Ntyaz is he who causes distress.

27. The demon Az® (‘greediness’) is he who swallows everything, and when, through destitution, nothing has come he eats himself; he is that fiendishness which, although the whole wealth of the world be given up to it, does not fill up and is not satisfied; as it says, that the eye of the covetous is a noose (gamand), and zw it the world is nought. 28. Pas? is the demon who makes a hoard, and

' A personification of the Av. zaurva of Vend. XIX, 43 W., Yas. IX, 18 Sp., Gds Yt. 10, Ram Yt. 16.

§ The reading of this name is uncertain.

5 The small whirlwinds, which usually precede a change of wind in India, are commonly known by the name of shafr4n, which indicates that such whirling columns of dust are popularly attributed to demoniacal agency.

* A personification of Av. varena, ‘desire,’ in an evil sense.

5 Av. Bdshyasta of Vend. XI, 28, 29, 36, 37, XVIII, 38, &c. The names of the three demons in this sentence are Persian words for ‘sloth,’ ‘trouble,’ and ‘ want.’

* A personification of Av. varena, ‘desire,’ in an evil sense.

5 Av. Bdshyasta of Vend. XI, 28, 29, 36, 37, XVIII, 38, &c. The names of the three demons in this sentence are Persian words for ‘sloth,’ ‘trouble,’ and ‘ want.’

* Av. Azi of Vend. XVIII, 45, 50, Yas. XVII, 46, LXVII, 22, Astad Yt. 1. ;

7 Compare Pers. pay(is, ‘covetous,’ and piy fis, ‘avarice.’ Pas is evidently the demon of misers, and Az that of the selfish.

CHAPTER XXVIII, 23-35. rit

does not consume 2¢, axd does not give to any one; as it says, that the power of the demon Az is owing to that person who, not content with his own wife, snatches away even those of others.

29. The demon Nas? is he who causes the pollution and contamination (nisrdstih), which they call nasAt (‘dead matter’). 30. The demon Friftar (‘deceiver’) is he who seduces mankind. 31. The demon Spazg? (‘slander’) is he who brings and conveys discourse (milay4), avd it is nothing in appearance such as he says; and he shows that mankind fights azd apologizes (avakhshinéqa), individual with individual. 32. The demon Ardst? (‘untrue’) is he who speaks falsehood. 33. The demon Aigh4sh‘ is the malignant-eyed fiend who smites mankind with 4zs eye. 34. The demon Bat® is he whom they worship among the Hindfs, and his growth is lodged in idols, as one worships the horse as an idol®. 35. Asté-vidad’ is the evil flyer (vaé-i saritar) who seizes the life; as it says that, when

1 Av. Nasu of Vend. V, 85-106, VI, 65, 72, 74, 79, VII, 2-27, 70, VIII, 46, 48, 132-228, IX, 49-117, &c.

? Av. spazga of Ardabahist Yt. 8, 11, 15.

® Always written like anast.

‘ Av. aghashi of Vend. XX, 14, 20, 24, which appears to be ‘the evil eye ;’ but see § 36.

5 Av. Baiti of Vend. XIX, 4, 6, 140, who must be identified with Pers. but, ‘an idol,’ Sans. bhfita, ‘a goblin,’ and not with Buddha.

* Reading afas vakhsh pavan battha mahm4néd, éigfn bfit asp parastédé, which evidently admits of many variations, but the meaning is rather obscure.

7 Here written Asti-vid4d (see Chap. III, 21). Vend. V, 25, 31 says, ‘ Ast6-vidhétu binds him (the dying man); Vayé (the flying demon) conveys him bound ;’ from which it would appear that Ast6-vidad and ‘the evil flyer’ were originally considered as distinct demons,

112 BUNDAHIS.

Ais hand strokes a man 2¢ zs lethargy, when he casts z¢ on the sick one 2¢ zs fever, when he looks in his eyes he drives away the life, and they call it death. 36. The demon of the malignant eye (sir-4ashmih) is he who will spoil anything which men see, when they do not say ‘in the name of God’ (yazd4n).

36. The demon of the malignant eye (sir-4ashmih) is he who will spoil anything which men see, when they do not say ‘in the name of God’ (yazd4n).

37. With every one of them are many demons and fiends co-operating, to specify whom a second time would be tedious; demons, too, who are furies (khashmak4n), are in great multitude it is said. 38. They are demons of ruin, pain, and growing old (zv4r4n), producers of vexation and bile, revivers of grief (nivagth), the progeny of gloom, and bringers of stench, decay, and vileness, who are many, very numerous, and very notorious; and a portion of all of them is mingled in the bodies of men, and their characteristics are glaring in mankind.

39. The demon Apdésh! and the demon Aspengargdk ? are those who remain in contest with the rain. 40. Of the evil spirit? are the law of vileness, the religion of sorcery, the weapons of fiendishness, and the perversion (khamth) of God’s works; and

1 Av, Apaosha of Tistar Yt. 21, 22, 27, 28, Astéd Yt. 2,63 see also Chap. VII, 8, ro, 12.

2 Here written Aspengarég4, but see Chaps. VII, 12, XVII, 1. He is the Av. Spengaghra of Vend. XIX, 135, and, being a demon, is not to be confounded with the demon-worshipper, Spizgauruska, of Gés Yt. 31, Ashi Yt. 51.

® The ‘ evil spirit, Ganrak-main6k, seems to be here treated as a demon distinct from Aharman, which is inconsistent with what is stated in §§ 1-6, and is contrary to general opinion. This inconsistency would indicate the possibility of this continuation of Chap. XXVIII in TD, or a portion of it, having been added by an editor in later times (although it is difficult to discover any difference of style in the language), if we did not find a similar confusion of the two names in Chap. XXX, 29, 30.

CHAPTER XXVIII, 36-44. 113

his wish is this, that is: ‘Do not ask aéou¢ me, and do not understand me! for if ye ask adoud and understand me, ye wzé/ not come after me?.’ 41. This, too, it says, that the evil spirit remains at the distance of a cry, even at the cry of a three-year-old cock (kfiléng), even at the cry of an ass, even at the cry of a righteous man when one strikes him involuntarily avd he utters a cry% 42. The demon Kindak#® is he who is the steed (b4rak) of wizards.

43. Various new demons arise from the various new sins the creatures may commit, and are produced for such purposes; who make even those planets rush 0” which are in the cedestzal sphere, and they stand very numerously in the conflict. 44. Their ringleaders (kam4rik4n) are those seven planets, the head and tail of Gésihar, and Mdspar *

44. Their ringleaders (kam4rik4n) are those seven planets, the head and tail of Gésihar, and Mdspar *

1 Compare Mkh. XL, 24-28: ‘The one wish that Hérmezd, the lord, desires from men is this, that “ye shall understand me (Hérmezd), since every one who shall understand me comes after me, and strives for my satisfaction.” And the one wish that Aharman desires from men is this, that “ye shall not understand me (Aharman), since whoever shall understand me wicked, Azs actions proceed not after me, and, moreover, no advantage and friendship come to me from that man.”’

? The sentence is rather obscure, but it seems to imply that such cries keep the evil spirit at a distance ; it is, however, just possible that it means that the cry of the evil spirit can be heard as far as such cries.

* Av. Kunda of Vend. XI, 28, 36, XIX, 138.

‘ TD has Gék-Aihar and Mfs-parik here, but see Chap. V, 1, where these beings are included among the seven planetary leaders, and not counted in addition to them. This is another inconsistency which leads to the suspicion that this contjnuation of the chapter may have been written by a later hand. According to this later view, the sun and moon must be included among those malevolent orbs, the planets.

[5] I

114 BUNDAHIS.

provided with a tail, whzchk are ten. 45. And by them these ten worldly creations, ¢hat is, the sky, water, earth, vegetation, animals, metals, wind, light, fire, and mankind, are corrupted with all this vileness; and from them calamity, captivity, disease, death, and other evils and corruptions ever come to water, vegetation, and the other creations which exist 2 the world, owing to the fiendishness of those ten. 46. They whom I save enumerated are furnished with the assistance and crafty (afzarhémand) nature of Aharman.

47. Regarding the cold, dry, stony, and dark interior of mysterious (tartk dén afrag-pédak) hell it says, that the darkness is fit to grasp with the hand’, and the stench is fit to cut with a knife ; and if they inflict the punishment of a thousand men within a single span, they (the men) think in this way, that they are alone; amd the loneliness is worse than its punishment?. 48. And its connection (band) is with the seven planets, be it through much cold like Saturn® (Kév4n), be it through much heat like Aharman; and their food is brimstone (gandak), and of succulents the lizard (vazagh), and other evil azd wretchedness (paty4n).]

' Compare Mkh. VII, 31: ‘and always their darkness is suchlike as though it be possible to grasp with the hand.’

2 Compare Arda-Viraf-namak (LIV, 5-8): ‘As close as the ear to the eye, and as many as the hairs on the mane of a horse, so close and many in number, the souls of the wicked stand, but they see not, and hear no sound, one from the other; every one thinks thus, “I am alone.”’

3 Or, ‘with more cold than Saturn.’

CHAPTER XXVIII, 45—XXIX, 2. 115

CuapTterR XXIX1,

115

CuapTterR XXIX1,

1. On [the sfzxztual chieftainship® of the regions of the earth] it says in revelation, that every one of those six chieftainships® has one sfzvztual chief; as the chief of Arzah is Ashashagahad-é Hvandhin’, the chief of Savah is Hoazarédathhri-hana Paréstyar65, the chief of Fradadafsh is Spitdéid-i Adspésinan °, [the chief of Vidadafsh is Afriz-rasp Atispésinan’,] the chief of Vérdbarst is Huvdsp’, the chief of Vérdgarst is Kakhravak®. 2. Zaratdst is

1 For this chapter, which is numbered XXX by previous translators, we have to depend only on K2o and TD (see the note on the heading of Chap. XXVIII); and the words enclosed in brackets are supplied from TD, being either illegible or omitted in K2o.

* Perhaps ‘patriarchate’ or ‘episcopate’ would be a better translation of radih, and ‘ patriarch’ or ‘bishop’ of rad, in this chapter, as the chief high-priest (dastQr-i dastQran) and his office are evidently meant by these words.

® Of the six other regions, distinct from this one of Khvantiras, see Chap. XI, 2-4.

* TD has Ashashfg,hd-é atgh Névandan ; both MSS. giving these names in a barbarous Pazand form which cannot be relied on. Perhaps this DastOr is the Av. Ashavanghu Bivandangha of Fravardin Yt. rro.

5 TD has Héazar6kakhhr-hané Paréstyré, all in P&azand in both MSS., except Huz. han4, which stands for P4z. é, here used for the idhafat i. Perhaps this Dast@r is the Av. Garé-danghu Pairistira of Fravardin Yt. 110.

* So in TD; Kzo has P&z. Spaitanid-i Husp4sny&n. This DastOr is, no doubt, the Av. (gen.) Spitéis Uspisnaos of Fravardin Yt. rar.

7 Omitted in K2o, but, no doubt, this Dastfr is the Av. Erezrfspa Uspasnu of Fravardin Yt. rar.

® Av. Hvaspa of Fravardin Yt. 122.

® So in both MSS. As in the case of each of the preceding two pair of regions, two consecutive names of Dastfirs have been taken from the Fravardin Yast, it may be supposed that the names

116 BUNDAHIs,

spiritual chief of the region of Khvantras, and also of all the regions; he zs chief of the world of the righteous, and it is said that the whole religion was received by them from Zaratist}.

3. In the region of Khvaniras are many places, from which, in this evil time of violent struggling with the adversary, a passage (vidarg) is constructed by the power of the spiritual world (matndédkth), and one calls them the beaten tracks * of Khvantras.

4. Counterparts of those other regions® are such places as Kangdez, the land of Saukavast4n, the plain of the Arabs (Taztk4n), the plain of Pésydnsai, the river Naivtak‘, Atran-vég, the enclosure (var) formed by Yim, azd Kasmir in India’. 5. And one immortal chief acts in the government of each

taken for this third pair of regions will also be consecutive, and this Dastfr must, therefore, be identified with the Av. Xathwaraspa of Fravardin Yt. 122.

5. And one immortal chief acts in the government of each

taken for this third pair of regions will also be consecutive, and this Dastfr must, therefore, be identified with the Av. Xathwaraspa of Fravardin Yt. 122.

1 TD has ‘ Zaratfst is chief of this region of Khvaniras, and also of the whole world of the righteous; all chieftainship, also, is from Zaratist, so that the whole religion,’ &c.

2 Justi has ‘ zones, climates ;’ but transcribing Paz. habavanha back into Pahlavi we have a word which may be read khabanoha, pl. of khab4n, ‘a trampling-place’ (comp. Pers. khabidan), TD has khvabfsné-g4s, which has the same meaning.

® Meaning, probably, that they resemble the six smaller regions in being isolated and difficult of access; in other words, either mythical, or independent of Iranian rule.

“ Soin TD, which also omits the second, third, and fourth of these isolated territories. In K2o we might read rad va khfidak, ‘chief and lord,’ as an epithet of Afran-vég. This river must be the Nahvték of Chap. XXI, 6.

5 Reading Kasmir-i andar Hind@, but TD has Kasmfr-i andarfind; perhaps the last word was originally anfranak, in which case we should read ‘the non-Iranian Kasmir.’

CHAPTER XXIX, 3-5. 117

of them; as it says, that Péshydétanfi! sox of Vistasp, whom they call Aitré-main6é?, is in the country of Kangdez*; Aghrérad* son of Pashang is in the land of Saukavast4n®, and they call him Gépatshah*; Parsadgi? H/vembya is in the plain of

1 The Av. Peshdtanu of Visht4ésp Yt. 4, where he is described as free from disease and death. TD has Péshydk-tanf. See also Chaps. XXXI, 29, XXXII, 5.

* TD has Xitrd-m46n6, and it may be doubted whether the latter portion of the name be derived from Av. mainyu, ‘spirit,’ or maunghé, ‘moon.’ The Dadistén-i Dintk (Reply 89) calls him ‘ Patshaydtand who is called from the Xitr6k-m4hané6 (or mfy4n6),’ the Katru-mfy4n river of Chap. XX, 7, 31.

® See § 10. TD has Kangdez-i bamfk, ‘Kangdez the splendid.’

‘ The Av. Aghraératha Narava of Gés Yt. 18, 22, Fravardin Yt. 131, Ashi Yt. 38, Zamyad Yt. 77; he is Aghrirath, brother of Afrasiyab, in the Shahn4mah ; see also Chap. XXXI, 15.

5 TD has Pahl. Sakikstan here, but Sdkapastén in § 13 (the letters tk and p being often much alike in Pahlavi writing). Kzo has Paz. Savkavatén, SaukAvasta, and Savkavastin.

131, Ashi Yt. 38, Zamyad Yt. 77; he is Aghrirath, brother of Afrasiyab, in the Shahn4mah ; see also Chap. XXXI, 15.

5 TD has Pahl. Sakikstan here, but Sdkapastén in § 13 (the letters tk and p being often much alike in Pahlavi writing). Kzo has Paz. Savkavatén, SaukAvasta, and Savkavastin.

* TD has Gépat-malké, ‘king of Gépat;’ and Dad. (Reply 89) states that ‘the reign of Gépatshah is over the country of Gépaté, coterminous with Afran-vég, on the bank of the water of the Dafttk ; and he keeps watch over the ox Hadhayas, on whom occurred the various emigrations of men of old.’ Mkh. (LXII, 31-36) says, ‘ G6patshéh remains in Afran-vég, within the region of Khvantras ; from foot to mid-body he #s a bull, and from mid-body to top he zs a man; at all times he stays on the sea-shore, and always performs the worship of God, and always pours holy-water into the sea; through the pouring of that holy-water innumerable noxious creatures in the sea will die; for if he should not mostly perform that ceremonial, and should not pour that holy-water into the sea, and those innumerable noxious creatures should not perish, then always when rain falls the noxious creatures would fall like rain.’ In Chap. XXXI, 20, he is said to be a son of Aghrérad.

7 So in K20; and Av. Parshadgau occurs in Fravardin Yt. 96, 1273 but TD has Fradakhstar Khfmbikan, and Dad. (Reply 89) mentions ‘Fradhakhst6 son of Khfimbik4n’ as one of the seven

118 BUNDAHIS.

Pésy4nsat!, and he is Hvembya for this reason, because they brought 47m up in a Avemb (‘jar’) for fear of Khashm (‘ Wrath’); [Asdm-i? Yamdahust is in the place which they call the River Nétvtak]; the tree opposed to harm? is in Airan-vég; Urvatadnar‘ som of Zarat(st is in the enclosure formed by Yim. 6. Regarding them it says, they are ‘hose who are immortal, as are Narsih® son of Vivanghad, Tds® son of Nédar’, Giw® son of Gddarz, Ibairaz® the causer of strife, azd@ Ashavazd son of Pourudhakhst!®; and they will all'! come forth, to the

immortal lords of Khvantras, which name corresponds with the Av. Fradhakhsti Khumbya of Fravardin Yt. 138.

1 TD has always Pahl. Pésansih. No doubt the Pisin valley is meant (see § 11).

® Or it may be read Aéshm-i. This phrase occurs only in TD, but Dad. (Reply 89) mentions ‘ the Avesta YakhmAyisad, son of the same Fry4n6,’ as one of the seven immortal lords of Khvaniras.

5 See Chap. XXVII, 2.

* See Chap. XXXII, 5.

5 Or Narsde in TD; Kzo has Paz. Naréi, but see Chap. XXXI, 3, 5-

* Av. Tusa of Abdn Yt. 53, 58, and an Iranian warrior in the Shahnémah.

7 Av. Naotara, whose descendants are mentioned in Aban Yt. 76, 98, Fravardin Yt. 102, Ram Yt. 35.

® Av. Gaévani of Fravardin Yt. 115 is something like this name of one of the Iranian warriors in the Shahn4mah.

® TD has P4z. Bairazd. Perhaps it is not a name, but a Pazand corruption of Pahl. aévarz, ‘warrior, trooper’ (traditionally); in which case we should have to read ‘ the warrior who was a causer of strife.’

115 is something like this name of one of the Iranian warriors in the Shahn4mah.

10 So in TD; K2o has ‘Ashavand son of Porudakhst,’ and Dad. (Reply 89) mentions ‘ Ashavazang son of Pérfidakhst6ih’ as one of the seven immortal lords of Khvaniras. He is the Av. ‘ Ashavazdangh the Pourudhakhstiyan’ of Aban Yt. 72, Fravardin Yt. 112.

™ So in TD, but K2o has ‘always.’

CHAPTER XXIX, 6—TI0. 119

assistance of Séshyans, on the production of the renovation of ¢he universe.

7. Regarding S4m! it says, that he became immortal, éu¢ owing to his disregard of the Mazdayasnian religion, a Tadrk whom they call Nihag? wounded Am with an arrow, when he was asleep there, in the plain of Pésyansai ; and it had brought upon him the unnatural lethargy (bishasp) which overcame /zm in the midst of the heat*. 8. And the glory (far) of heaven stands over him‘ for the purpose that, when Az-i Dah4k® becomes unfettered (arazak), he may arise and slay him; and a myriad guardian spirits of the righteous are as a protection to him. 9. Of Dahak, whom they call Bévardsp, this, too, it says, that Frédin when he captured Dah4k was not able to kill 42m, and afterwards confined him in Mount Dimdvand®; when he becomes unfettered, S4m arises, and smites and slays him.

10. As to Kangdez, z¢ zs in the direction of the east, at many leagues from the bed (var)? of the

1 This is not Sim the grandfather of Rustam, but the Av. Sama, who appears to have been an ancestor of Keresfspa (see Yas. IX, 30), called Sam, grandfather of Garsdsp, in a passage interpolated in some copies of the Shahnamah (compare Chap. XXXI, 26, 27). Here, however, it appears from the Bahman Yast (III, 59, 60) that Keresaspa himself is meant, he being called Sma Keresdspa in Fravardin Yt. 61, 136.

2 It can also be read Nihav or Niy4g in K2o, and Nih&v or Nihan in TD.

* TD has ‘as he lay ¢# the midst of the heat.’

‘ TD has ‘and the snow (vafar) has settled (nishast) over him.’

5 See Chaps. XXXI, 6, XXXIV, 5.

§ See Chap. XII, 31.

7 TD has agvar, ‘above,’ instead of min var, ‘from the bed.’

120 BUNDAHIS.

wide-formed ocean towards that side. 11. The plain of Pésy4nsat is in KAvulistan, as it says, that the most remarkable upland (b4list) in K4vulistan is where Pésy4nsat is; there it is hotter, on the more lofty elevations there is no heat?, 12, Airan-vég is in the direction of Ataré-patakan*, 13. The land of Saukavastén is on the way from Tarkistaén to Kinistén, in the direction of the north. 14. [The enclosure]* formed by Yim is zz the middle of Pars, in Sruv4‘; thus, they say, that what Yim formed (Yim-kard) is below Mount Yimakan®. 15. Kasmir is in Hinddstan.

Carrer XXX¢.

The land of Saukavastén is on the way from Tarkistaén to Kinistén, in the direction of the north. 14. [The enclosure]* formed by Yim is zz the middle of Pars, in Sruv4‘; thus, they say, that what Yim formed (Yim-kard) is below Mount Yimakan®. 15. Kasmir is in Hinddstan.

Carrer XXX¢.

1. On the nature of the resurrection and future existence it says in revelation, that, whereas MAshya and Mashydt, who grew up from the earth’, first fed upon water, then plants, then milk, avd then meat, men also, when their time of death Aas come, first desist from eating meat, then milk, then from

1 Or, ‘the hottest there, through the very lofty elevation, is not heat.’

? Pers. Adarbig4n.

’ The word var is omitted in K2o.

‘ TD has Pahl. Srfbak.

5 Or it may be read Damak4n, but TD has Kamak4n. It can hardly be Damaghan, as that is a town and district in Khurds4n ; Justi also suggests the district of Gamag4n in P4rs, and thinks Sruva means ‘cypress wood,’ there being a Salvastin between Shiraz and Fasa.

6 This chapter is found in all MSS., and has been numbered XXXI by former translators.

7 See Chaps. XV, 2-16, XXXIV, 3.

CHAPTER XXIX, EI—XXX, 5. 121

bread, till when! they shall die they always feed upon water. 2. So, likewise, in the millennium of Hdshédar-méh ?, the strength of appetite (4z) will thus diminish, when men we// remain three days and nights in superabundance (sirth) through one taste of consecrated food. 3. Then they will desist from meat food, avd eat vegetables azd milk ; afterwards, they abstain from milk food axd abstain from vegetable food, azd are feeding on water; and for ten years before Sédshyans? comes they remain without food, azd do not die.

4. After Sdéshyans comes they prepare the raising of the dead, as it says, that Zaratdst asked of Afharmazd thus: ‘Whence does a body form again, which the wind 4as carried and the water conveyed (vazid)*? and how does the resurrection occur ?’ 5. Adharmazd answered thus: ‘When through me the sky avose from the substance of the ruby®, without columns, on the spiritual support of far-compassed light; when through me the earth arose, which® bore the material life, azd there is no

1 Reading amat, ‘ when,’ instead of mfin, ‘ which’ (see the note on Chap. I, 7).

2 Written Khfrshédar-mah, or Khfrshéd-mah, in the Bundahis ; see Chap. XXXII, 8, and Bahman Yt. III, 52, 53.

® See Chaps. XI, 6, XXXII, 8, Bahman Yt. III, 62.

* Compare (Vend. V, 26) ‘the water carries 42m up, the water carries Aim down, the water casts Aim away.’

5 Compare Mkh. IX, 7.

® All MSS. have min, ‘out of, but translators generally suppose it should be mfin, ‘which,’ as the meaning of ‘brought out of material life’ is by no means clear. Perhaps the two phrases might be construed together, thus: ‘there is no ofher maintainer of the worldly creation, brought from the material life, than it’ Windischmann refers to Fravardin Yt. 9.

122 BUNDAIIIS.

Perhaps the two phrases might be construed together, thus: ‘there is no ofher maintainer of the worldly creation, brought from the material life, than it’ Windischmann refers to Fravardin Yt. 9.

122 BUNDAIIIS.

maintainer of the worldly creation but it; when by me the sun and moon avd stars are conducted in the firmament (andarvaAi) of luminous bodies; when by me corn was created so that, scattered about in the earth, it grew again avd returned with increase ; when by me colour! of various kinds was created in plants; when by me fire was created in plants and other things? without combustion; when dy mea son was created and fashioned® in the womb of a mother, avd the structure (pisak) severally of the skin, nails, blood, feet, eyes, ears, and other things was produced; when by me legs were created for the water, so that it flows away, azd the cloud was created which carries the water of the world and rains there where it has a purpose; when by me the air was created which conveys z# one’s eyesight, through the strength of the wind, the lowermost upwards according to z¢s will, azd one is not able to grasp z¢ with the hand out-stretched; each one of them, when created by me, was herein more difficult than causing the resurrection, for‘ z¢ zs an assistance to me in the resurrection that they exist, du¢ when they were formed it was not forming the future out of the past®. 6. Observe that when that which was not was then produced, why is it not possible to

' Former translators all read rag, ‘vein, pore ;’ but it probably stands for rang, ‘colour, dye,’ as in Chap. XXVII, 5, 18.

2 See Chap. XVII, 1, 2.

® Paz. srahtid is evidently a misreading of Pahl. sristid, ‘formed, shaped.’ Windischmann compares Fravardin Yt. 11, 22, 28,

“ Here &£tm is the Pazand of Huz. mamanan, ‘for to me;’ being a different word from the interrogative 4im, ‘why?’ of the next §.

5 Literally, ‘what becomes out of what was.’

CHAPTER XXX, 6-IT. 123

produce again that which was ? for at that time one will demand the bone from the spirit of earth, the blood from the water, the hair from the plants, axd the life from fire, since ¢hey were delivered to them in the original creation.’

7. First, the bones of GAyémard are roused up, then those of MAshya azd MAshyédt, then those of the rest of mankind; in the fifty-seven years of Séshyans? they prepare all the dead, avd all men stand up; whoever is righteous amd whoever is wicked, every human creature, they rouse up from the spot where its life departs. 8. Afterwards, when all material living beings assume again their bodies and forms, then they assign (bara yehabdnd) them a single class% 9. Of the light accompanying (levatman) the sun, one half will d¢ for Gayémard, and one half will give enlightenment among the rest of men, so that the soul axd body will know that this is my father, and this is my mother, and this is my brother, and this is my wife, and these are some other of my nearest relations.

10. Then is the assembly of the SadvAstardn 3, where all mankind will stand at this time; in that assembly every one sees his own good deeds and his own evil deeds; azd then, in that assembly, a wicked man becomes as conspicuous as a white sheep among those which are black. 11. In that

1 K20 omits ‘ Séshyans,’

* The phrase is obscure, and Kzo omits the numeral ‘one’ (the idh4fat of unity); but the meaning is probably that all former distinctions of class, or caste, are abolished.

* Windischmann suggests that it may be ‘ the assembly of IsadvAstar,’ the eldest son of Zaratfist (see Chap. XXXII, 5); perhaps supposed to be presided over by him as the first supreme highpriest after Zaratttst’s death.

124 BUNDAHIS.

assembly whatever righteous man was friend of a wicked one in the world, azd the wicked man complains of him who is righteous, thus: ‘Why did he not make me acquainted, when in the world, with the good deeds which he practised himself?’ if he who is righteous did not inform him, then it is necessary for him to suffer shame accordingly in that assembly!

12. Afterwards, they set the righteous man apart from the wicked; axzd then the righteous is for heaven (garédmA4n), and they cast the wicked back to hell. 13. Three days and nights they inflict punishment bodily in hell, azd then he beholds bodily those three days’ happiness in heaven*, 14. As it says that, on the day when the righteous man is parted from the wicked, the tears of every one, thereupon, run down unto zs legs. 15. When, after they set apart a father from his consort (hambaz), a brother from his brother, and a friend from

1 In the Ard&-Viraf-namak (Chap. LXVIII) it is related that Ard4-Vtraf saw the souls of a husband and wife, that of the husband destined for heaven, and that of the wife for hell; but the wife clung to her husband and asked why they should be separated, and he told her it was on account of her neglect of religious duties ; whereupon she reproached him for not teaching and chastising her. ‘And, afterwards, the man went to heaven and the woman to hell. And owing to the repentance of that woman she was in no other affliction in hell but darkness and stench. And that man sat in the midst of the righteous of heaven in shame, from not converting and not teaching the woman, who might have become virtuous in his keeping.’

3 As an aggravation of his punishment in hell. It has generally been supposed that this last phrase refers to the reward of the righteous man, but this cannot be the case unless akhar be taken in the sense of ‘other,’ which is unlikely ; besides, beholding the happiness of others would be no reward to an Oriental mind.

CHAPTER XXX, 12-19, 125

It has generally been supposed that this last phrase refers to the reward of the righteous man, but this cannot be the case unless akhar be taken in the sense of ‘other,’ which is unlikely ; besides, beholding the happiness of others would be no reward to an Oriental mind.

CHAPTER XXX, 12-19, 125

his friend, they suffer, every one for his own deeds, and weep, the righteous for the wicked, and the wicked about himself; for there may be a father who is righteous axd a son wicked, avd there may be one brother who is righteous amd one wicked. 16. Those for whose peculiar deeds it is appointed, such as Dah&k and Frdstyav of Tar, and others of this sort, as those deserving death (marg-argdAn4n), undergo a punishment no other men undergo; they call 2¢ ‘the punishment of the three nights #.’

17. Among his producers of the renovation of the universe, those righteous men of whom it is written ? that they are living, fifteen men and fifteen damsels, will come to the assistance of Séshyans. 18. As GéAthar® falls in the celestial sphere from a moonbeam on to the earth, the distress of the earth becomes such-like as ¢hat of a sheep when a wolf falls upon zt. 19. Afterwards, the fire and halo‘ melt the metal of Shatvairé, in the hills aza@ mountains, and it remains on this earth like a river.

1 According to the Pahlavi Vend. VII, 136 (p. 96, Sp.) it appears that a person who has committed a marg-arg4n or mortal sin, without performing patit or renunciation of sin thereafter, remains in hell till the future existence, when he is brought out, beheaded three times for each mortal sin unrepented of, and then cast back * into hell to undergo the punishment tishrém khshafnaém (‘of the three nights’) before he becomes righteous ; some say, however, that this punishment is not inflicted for a single mortal sin. This period of three nights’ punishment is quite a different matter from the three nights’ hovering of the soul about the body after death.

3 See Chap. XXIX, 5, 6. As the text stands in the MSS. it is uncertain whether the fifteen men and fifteen damsels are a portion of these righteous immortals, or an addition to them.

5 Probably a meteor (see Chap. V, 1).

“ Reading khirman; M6 has ‘the fire and angel Airman (Av. Airyaman) melt the metal in the hills,’ &c.

126 BUNDAHIs.

20. Then all men will pass into that melted metal and will become pure; when one is righteous, then it seems to him just as though he walks continually in warm milk; 6z¢ when wicked, then it seems to him in such manner as though, in the world, he walks continually in melted metal.

126 BUNDAHIs.

21. Afterwards, with the greatest affection, all men come together, father and son and brother and friend ask one another thus: ‘Where has it! been these many years, and what was the judgment upon thy soul? hast thou been righteous or wicked ?’ 22. The first soul the body sees, it enquires of it with those words (gift). 23. All men become of one voice avd administer loud praise to Adharmazd and the archangels.

24. Atharmazd completes 47s work at that time, and the creatures become so that it is not necessary to make any effort about them; azd among those by whom the dead are prepared, it is not necessary that any effort be made. 25. Sdshyans, with his assistants, performs a Yazisn ceremony in preparing the dead, and they slaughter the ox Hadhayés? in that Yazisn ; from the fat of that ox and the white Hém ° they prepare Hash, azd give z¢ to all men, and all men become immortal for ever and everlasting. 26. This, too, it says, that whoever has been the size of a man, they restore him then with an age of forty years; they who have been little when not dead, they restore then with an age of fifteen years; and they give every one 47s wife, and

’ K2o has ‘have I;’ probably hémanfh, ‘hast thou,’ was the original reading.

2 See Chap. XIX, 13.

5 See Chap. XXVII, 4.

CHAPTER XXX, 20-28. 127

show kzm fis children with the wife; so they act as now in the world, but there is no begetting of children.

27. Afterwards, Séshyans and his assistants, by order of the creator Afharmazd, give every man the reward and recompense suitable to 4zs deeds ; this is even the righteous existence (ait) where it is said that they convey 42m to paradise (vahist), and the heaven (garéddm4n) of Adharmazd takes up the body (kerp) as itself requires; with that assistance he continually advances for ever and everlasting. 28. This, too, it says, that whoever has performed no worship (yast), and has ordered no Gétt-khartd!, and has bestowed no clothes as a righteous gift, is naked there; and he performs the worship (yast) of Adharmazd, and the heavenly angels? provide him the use of his clothing.

28. This, too, it says, that whoever has performed no worship (yast), and has ordered no Gétt-khartd!, and has bestowed no clothes as a righteous gift, is naked there; and he performs the worship (yast) of Adharmazd, and the heavenly angels? provide him the use of his clothing.

1 The Sad-dar Bundahis says that by Géti-kharid ‘heaven is purchased in the world, and one’s own place brought to hand in heaven.’ The Rivdyat of Dastfr Barz(i (as quoted in MS. 29 of Bombay University Parsi Collection) gives the following details in Persian: ‘To celebrate Géti-kharid it is necessary that two hérbads (priests) perform the Nabar, and with each khshniman which they pray it is fit and necessary that both hérbads have had the Nabar; and the first day they recite the N6nabar yast, and consecrate the NénAbar dr6n and the Néndbar 4fringan which they recite in each G&h; in the Havan GaAh it is necessary to recite fravarané (as in Yas. III, 24 W. to end), ahurahé mazdau raévaté (asin Afharmazd Yt. 0, to) frasastayaéa, then Yas. III, 25 W., XVII, 1-55 Sp., ashem vohfi thrice, afrinami khshathryan (as in Afringén I, 14, to end). The second day the Srésh yast and Srésh dr6én and 4fring4n are to be recited ; and the third day it is necessary to recite the Sirézah yast, the Sfrézah dr6n and 4fring4n dahm4n; and it is needful to recite the second and third 4fring4ns in each G4h, and each day to consecrate the barsom and dr6én afresh with seven twigs, so that it may not be ineffective.’

* Paz. gehan is probably a misreading of Pahl. yazd4n, as

128 BUNDAHIS.

29. Afterwards, Afharmazd seizes on! the evil spirit, VohOman om Akéman?, Ashavahist oz Andar, Shatvaird o# Sdavar, Spendarmad on Tardmat who is Nadnghas‘, Horvadad and Amerédad on Tatrév and Zairtk®, true-speaking o# what is evilspeaking, Srésh * on Aeshm*. 30. Then two fiends remain at large, Aharman® and Az?; Atharmazd comes to the world, himself the Zéta and Srédsh the R4spi'*, and holds the Kastt in Acs hand;

neither ‘the spirit of the world,’ nor ‘the spirit of the Gahs’ is a likely phrase. It is possible, however, that maindédk gehan is a misreading of min atvyah4n, ‘from the girdle,’ and we should translate as follows: ‘and out of its girdle (that is, the kfstt of the barsom used in the ceremony) he produces the effect of his clothing.’

1 Instead of vakhdfind, ‘seize on,’ we should probably read vanend, ‘smite,’ as in the parallel passages mentioned below.

7 Compare Zamy4d Yt. 96. Each archangel (see Chap. I, 25, 26) here seizes the arch-fiend (see Chaps. I, 27, XXVIII, 7-12) who is his special opponent.

5 Here written P4z. Inder. Compare Pahlavi Yas. XLVI, 1: ‘When among the creation, in the future existence, righteousness smites the fiend, Ashavahist smzfes Indar.’

* Written Nakahéd in Chap. I, 27, and Naiktyas in Chap. XXVIII, 10, where he is described as a distinct demon from Tarémat in XXVIII, 14.

® Here written Tarév and Zart&,

XLVI, 1: ‘When among the creation, in the future existence, righteousness smites the fiend, Ashavahist smzfes Indar.’

* Written Nakahéd in Chap. I, 27, and Naiktyas in Chap. XXVIII, 10, where he is described as a distinct demon from Tarémat in XXVIII, 14.

® Here written Tarév and Zart&,

® Av. Sraosha, a personification of attentive hearing and obedience, who is said to watch over the world and defend it from the demons, especially at night; see Vend. XVIII, 48, 51, 70, &c., Yas. LVI, Srésh Yt. Had6kht, &c.

7 See Chap. XXVIII, 15-17.

® Comparing § 29 with § 30 it is not very clear whether the author of the Bundahis considered Aharman and the evil spirit as the same or different demons; compare also Chap. XXVIII, 1-6 with 40, 41.

® See Chap. XXVIII, 27.

10 The Zéta is the chief officiating priest in all ceremonies, and the RAspf is the assistant priest.

CHAPTER XXX, 29-33. 129

defeated by the Kfstt? formula the resources of the evil spirit and Az act most impotently, and by the passage through which he rushed into the sky? he runs back to gloom and darkness. 31. Géé#thar? burns the serpent (m4r)* in the melted metal, and the stench and pollution wich were in hell are burned in that metal, and it (hell) becomes quite pure. (32. He (Adharmazd) sets the vault® into which the evil spirit fled, in that metal ; he brings the land of hell back for the enlargement of the world °; the renovation arises in the universe by /zs will, and the world is immortal for ever and everlasting.

33. This, too, it says, that this earth decomes an iceless?, slopeless plain®; even the mountain’,

1 The words zak g,h4ni, for 4n geh4ni, are probably a misreading of afvyah4n, ‘the kfstf or sacred thread-girdle,’ which is tied round the waist in a peculiar manner, during the recital of a particular formula, in which Aflharmazd is blessed and Aharman and the demons are cursed.

* See Chap. III, 10-12. ® See §18 and Chap. V, 1.

* Probably referring to As, which means both ‘ greediness’ and ‘serpent.’ It is, however, possible to read ‘Gééihar the serpent burns in’ &c., and there can be no doubt that Gééihar is represented as a malevolent being.

* Or, perhaps, ‘ hiding-place.’ Comparing K2o and M6 together the word seems to be além, which may be compared with Heb. pbx ‘a vault,’ or Chald. NON ‘a porch;’ it may, however, be v4lém, which may be traced to bby ‘to conceal.’ In the old MSS. it is certainly not shélman, ‘hell,’ which is an emendation due to the modern copy in Paris.

* Or, ‘to the prosperity of the world.’

7 Former translators read anhtkhar, ‘ undefiled,’ but this does not suit the Pahlavi orthography so well as anhasér, ‘iceless’ (compare Pers. hasar, khasar, or khas4r, ‘ice’); cold and ice, being produced by the evil spirit, will disappear with him.

* P4z. 4m4van is a misreading of Pahl. hAmfin, so the reading is anstp (compare Pers. stb) hamfin. Mountains, being the work of the evil spirit, disappear with him.

® Kak4d-i-Déitik, see Chap. XII, 7.

(5) K

* P4z. 4m4van is a misreading of Pahl. hAmfin, so the reading is anstp (compare Pers. stb) hamfin. Mountains, being the work of the evil spirit, disappear with him.

® Kak4d-i-Déitik, see Chap. XII, 7.

(5) K

130 BUNDAHIS.

whose summit is the support of the Kinvar drzdge, they keep down, aad it wz// not exist. |

CuarTrer XXXII}.

o. On the race and genealogy of the Kay4ns.

1. Héshyang*? was son of Fravak, son of Styakmak 8, son of MAshya ‘, son of Gayémard. [2. Takhmérup ° was son of Vivanghad °, soz of Yanghad’, son of Héshyang. 3. Yim,]® Takhmérup, Spttdr®, axd Narsih”, whom they also call ‘the Rashnd of Xtnd",’

1 For this chapter, which is numbered XXXII by previous translators, we have to depend only on K20, TD, and Kzob (a fragment evidently derived from the same original as K2o0 and M6, but through some independent line of descent).

8 ‘a in K20, but usually Héshang (see Chaps. XV, 28, XXXIV, 3; 4).

* See Chap. XV, 25, 30.

* See Chaps. XV, 2-24, 30, XXXIV, 3.

® Av. Takhmé-urupa of Ram Yt. 11, Zamy4d Yt. 28, Afrtn Zarat. 2; written Tékhmérup in TD, which is the only MS. in which the passage enclosed in brackets is found, the omission of which by K2o was suspected by Windischmann (Zoroastriche Studien, p. 199). This king is the Tahmftras of the Sh&hnémah. See also Chaps. XVII, 4, XXXIV, 4.

* Av. Vivanghau of Yas. IX, 11, 20, XXXII, 8, Vend. II, 8, 28, 94, Fravardin Yt. 130, Zamy4d Yt. 35.

7 As this Pézand name or title begins with a medral y, its initial vowel is probably omitted (see p. 141, note 8).

® Av. Yima or Yima khshaéta of Vend. II, &c., the Jamshéd of the Shahndmah (see Chaps. XVII, 5, XXXIV, 4).

* Av. Spityura of Zamy4d Yt. 46.

1 Here written Narsf in K20 and K2ob, and Nésth in TD; but see § 5 and Chap. XXIX, 6. Windischmann suggests that he may be the Av. Aoshnara pouru-gtra of Fravardin Yt. 131, Af. Zarat. 2.

" An epithet equivalent to ‘the Minos of China;’ Rashnfi being the angel of justice, who is said to weigh the meritorious deeds of

CHAPTER XXXI, I-6. 131

were all brothers. 4. From Yim and Yimak!', who was ts sister, was born a pair, man and woman, and they became husband azd wife together; Mtrak the Aspiy4n? and ZtyAnak Zardahim were their names, and the lineage went on. 5. Spittir was he who, with Dahak, cut up Yim*; Narsih‘ lived then® also, whom they call Nésr-gy4van*; they say that such destiny (gadman) is allotted to him’, that he shall pass every day in troubles, and shall make all food purified and pure.

6. Dahak* was son of Khritasp, son of ZAtntgav,

the departed soul against its sins. Neither word is, however, quite certain, as rashnfik may stand for rasnfk, ‘spear,’ and has also been translated by ‘light’ and ‘hero;’ Xind, moreover, was probably not China, but Samarkand (see Chaps. XII, 13, 22, XV, 29).

1 See Chap. XXIII, r.

Neither word is, however, quite certain, as rashnfik may stand for rasnfk, ‘spear,’ and has also been translated by ‘light’ and ‘hero;’ Xind, moreover, was probably not China, but Samarkand (see Chaps. XII, 13, 22, XV, 29).

1 See Chap. XXIII, r.

2 Av. Athwy4na of Ab&n Yt. 33, Gos Yt. 13, Fravardin Yt. 131, Zamy4d Yt. 36, &c., where it is the family name of Thraétaona, who is said to be a son of Athwya in Yas. IX, 23, 24. In the text this name seems to be used rather as a title than a patronymic, and in § 7 it appears to be a family surname.

* As stated in Zamy4d Yt. 46.

* Here written Narsak in Kz0 and K2ob, and Nésth in TD.

5 TD has ‘together,’ instead of ‘then.’

* So in K2o, but K2ob has Narst-gy4vin, and TD has Nésthviy4vantk (or nfy4z4nik). Perhaps we may assume the epithet to have been nigfr-vfyA4vantk (or niy&z4nfk), ‘one with a bewildering (or longing) glance.’

7 Justi supposes this clause of the sentence refers to Yim and the disease which attacked his hand. If this be the case it may be translated as follows: ‘they say afghash is produced on his hand (yadman), so that,’ &c.; afghash being a disease, or evil, mentioned in Vend. XX, 14, 20, 24; compare Chap. XXVIII, 33.

® Or As-i Dah&k, the Av. Asi Dah&ka, ‘destructive serpent,’ of Yas, IX, 2g, Vend. I, 69, Ab&n Yt. 29, 34, Bahram Yt. 40, Zamy4d Yt. 46-50. A name applied to a foreign dynasty (probably Semitic) personified as a single king, which conquered the dominions of Yim (see Chap. XXXIV, 5).

K 2

132 BUNDAHIS.

son of Virafsang, son of T4z, son of Fravak, son of Styakmak!; by 42s mother Dahak was of Udat?, son of Bayak, son of Tambayak, soz of Owokhm!, son of Pairi-urvaésm ‘, son of Gadhwithw®, son of Drigdskan *, som of the evil spirit.

7. Frédin the Aspiyan’ was son of Ptr-tora® the Aspiyan, son of Sék-t6ra® the Aspiyan, son of Bértora the Aspiy4n, son of Styak-t6ra the Aspiyan, son of Spéd-téra the Aspiyan, son of Gefar-téra the Aspiyan, son of Ramak-téra the Aspiyan, son of

* For the last three names, see Chap. XV, 25, 28.

* Pahl. Afidin TD; compare ‘the demon Uda’ of Chap. XXVIII, 19. The following two names look like ‘ fear’ and ‘ gloom-fear,’ both appropriate names for demons.

* TD has P4z.Owdikh ; compare Av. aoiwra, ‘a species of nightmare,’ observing that r and 6 are often written alike in Pahlavi.

* TD and K2ob have P&z. Pairi-urva-urvaésm, and Kao has Pai-urvaésm.

® TD has P4z. Gawithw.

* So in TD, but K2o has P&z. Drus-i ayaska, and K2ob has Drug-i ayask&. It corresponds to Av. drugaska in Vend. XIX, 139, Vistasp Yt. 26. This genealogy appears to trace Dah&k’s maternal descent through a series of demons.

7 Av. Thraétaona, son of Athwya, but generally called ‘the Athwyanian,’ who slew the destructive serpent (asi dah4ka), see Yas. IX, 24, 25, Vend. I, 69, Ab&n Yt. 33, 61, Gés Yt. 13, Fravardin Yt. 131, Bahram Yt. 40, Ram Yt. 23, Ashi Yt. 33, Zamy4d Yt. 36, 92, Af. Zarat. 2. In the Shahnamah he is called Feridfin son of Abtin.

IX, 24, 25, Vend. I, 69, Ab&n Yt. 33, 61, Gés Yt. 13, Fravardin Yt. 131, Bahram Yt. 40, Ram Yt. 23, Ashi Yt. 33, Zamy4d Yt. 36, 92, Af. Zarat. 2. In the Shahnamah he is called Feridfin son of Abtin.

§ This name is omitted in K20, but occurs in the other two MSS. ; it is a Huzvaris hybrid equivalent to Paz. Par-gau and Av. Pourugau, which is a title of an Athwy4nian in Af. Zarat. 4, Vist&sp Yt. a. This genealogy consists almost entirely of such hybrid names, which have a very artificial appearance, though suitable enough for a race of herdsmen, meaning, as they severally do, ‘one with abundant oxen, with useful oxen, with the brown ox, with the black ox, with the white ox, with the fat ox, and with a herd of oxen.’

® So in TD, but the other two MSS. have Sty4k-t6ra, which is probably wrong, as the same name occurs again in this genealogy.

CHAPTER XXXI, 7—-II. 133

Vanfraghesn! the Aspiydn, son of Yim, son of Vivangh4d ; as these, apart from the Aspiyan Partéra, were ten generations, they every one lived a hundred years, which becomes one thousand years ; those thousand years were the evil reign of Dahak. 8. By the Aspiyan Par-téra was begotten Frédin, who exacted vengeance for Yim; together with him? also were the sons Barm4yfn and Katdydn, but Fréddn was fuller of glory than they.

9. By Frédfin three sons were begotten, Salm and Tag and Atrié*; and by Atrié one son and one pair‘ were begotten; the names of the couple of sons were VAanta@ar and Anastokh 5, and the name of the daughter was Giizak*. 10. Salm and Tig slew them all, Atrié and Azs happy sons, ut Fréddn kept the daughter in concealment, and from that daughter a daughter was born’; they became aware of 2t, and the mother was slain by them. 11. FrédQn provided for the daughter ®, also in concealment, for

1 In TD this name can be read Vanfrékisn or Vanfrdkg4n.

* TD has ‘as well as Aim.’ Kzob omits most of this sentence by mistake.

* These sons, as Windischmann observes, are not mentioned in the extant Avesta, but their Avesta names, Sairima, Tfirya or Tara, and Airya or Airyu, may be gathered from the names of the countriesover ~ which they are supposed to have ruled (see Fravardin Yt. 143).

‘ TD has ‘two sons and one daughter.’

5 TD has Anidar and Anastabé.

® Or Gfigak, in TD; the other MSS. have P4z. Ganga here, but Guzak in § 14; it is identical with the name of Héshyang’s sister and wife in Chap. XV, 28. In the Pazand G&am4sp-n4mah the name of Fréd{in’s daughter is written Virak.

7 Reading min zak diikht dfkht-1 zd, as in K2ob and TD; some uncertainty arises here from the words dikht, ‘daughter,’ and dv4d, ‘ pair,’ being written alike in Pahlavi.

* TD has bartman, ‘ daughter,’ indicating that the word in K2o0 must be read dikht, and not dvd, ‘ pair.’

134 BUNDAHIS.

7 Reading min zak diikht dfkht-1 zd, as in K2ob and TD; some uncertainty arises here from the words dikht, ‘daughter,’ and dv4d, ‘ pair,’ being written alike in Pahlavi.

* TD has bartman, ‘ daughter,’ indicating that the word in K2o0 must be read dikht, and not dvd, ‘ pair.’

134 BUNDAHIS.

ten generations, when MAnds-i Kharshéd-vintk was born from 42s mother, [so called because, as he was born, some of }} the light of the sun (kharshéd) fell upon zs nose (vintk). 12. From Mé4nds-i Kharshéd-vintk and his sister? was MAnts-khirnar, and from Mands-khdrnar [and hes sister] was Mandséthar born’, by whom Salm and Tag were slain in revenge for Airté*, 13. By MAntséthar were Fris, Nédar >, and Dardsréb * begotten.

14. Just as Mandsé#thar was of M4nds-khdrnar, of Mants-kharnak?, who was M4m-sozak 8, of Atrak, of Thritak, of Bitak, of Fraztsak, of Zdsak°, of Fragdzak, of Giizak, of Airié, of Fréddn, so Frastyav! was

' The phrase in brackets occurs only in TD; and the whole passage from ‘vinik’ to ‘sun’ is omitted in K2o, evidently by mistake.

2 TD has ‘from M4nfs and Ais sister, and K2ob has ‘from M4nts-hé#ibar and M&nds-kharshéd.’

* The words in brackets occur only in TD, and Kzob has ‘from MAnfis-khdrnar also was M4n@s-khfrnak, from M&nQs-khfrn&k was Méan@séthar born,’ but this introduction of an extra generation is not confirmed by the list of names in § 14. The term khfrn4k (or khfirnak) seems to be merely a transcript of the Avesta word of which khfirshéd-vinik, ‘sun-nose,’ is a translation. The other term khfrnar can also be read khfirvar, but K2o has Pz. Avarnar. Ménfséihar is the Av. Manus&ithra of Fravardin Yt. 131, where he is styled the Airyavan, or descendant of Airyu (Airf&).

‘ TD has ‘and vengeance exacted for Airif.’

® See Chap. XXIX, 6.

$ Paz. Durasro, but the Pahlavi form, given in the text, occurs in § 31 and Chap. XXXII, 1 in TD, which MS. omits this § by mistake.

7™ The same as M4nfs-i khfirshéd-vinik, as noted above.

® This Pazand epithet seems to mean ‘mother-burning,’ and may have some connection with the legend mentioned in § 11. TD has main am Gfigak, ‘whose mother was Gfigak.’

® Kaob omits the five names from Afrak to Zfisak.

CHAPTER XXXI, 12-21. 135

of Pashang, of Zaésm’, of Tfrak, of Spaényasp, of Dadréshasp, of Tag, of Frédn. 15. He (Frasty4v) as well as Karsévaz*, whom they call Kadan, and Aghrérad* were all three brothers.

[16° Pashang and Visak were both brothers. 17. By Visak were Ptran®, Haman, SAn’, and other brothers begotten. 18. By Frdsty4v were Frasp-i Kor, San, Shédak*, and other sons begotten; and Vispan-fry4®, from whom Kat-Khfsr6éb was born, was daughter of Frasty4v, and was of the same mother with Frasp-i Afr. 19. From Frasp-i A ‘dr were Srak, Asfrik, and other children ; and by them were KhvéAst-atrikht, Yazdan-atrikht, Yazd4n-sar4d, Fréh-khdrd, La-vahak”, and others begotten; a recital of whom would be tedious.

19. From Frasp-i A ‘dr were Srak, Asfrik, and other children ; and by them were KhvéAst-atrikht, Yazdan-atrikht, Yazd4n-sar4d, Fréh-khdrd, La-vahak”, and others begotten; a recital of whom would be tedious.

20. By Aghrérad was Gépatshah” begotten. 21. When Frdsty4v made MAntséthar, with the Iranians, captive in the mountain-range (gar) of Padashkh-

Gés Yt. 18, 22, Ashi Yt. 38, 42, Zamy4d Yt. 56-63, 82, 93; called Afrasiyab in the Shahn&mah.

1 Zadsam in the Shahn4mah.

* Garstvaz in the Shahn4mah.

® TD has Pahl. Kidan.

* See Chap. XXIX, 5.

5 The remainder of this chapter is found only in TD.

* Pirin Visah is Afrasiyab’s chief general in the Shahbn4mah, and Hfim4n and Pilsam are his brothers.

7 This name is very ambiguous in Pahlavi, as it can be read many other ways. .

* Shédah in the Sh&hn4dmah.

® She is called Farangts in the Shahn4mah.

10 The reading of several of these names is more or less uncertain, but the object of the author is evidently to apply opprobrious epithets to all the male descendants of Afrasiy4b.

1 TD has Gépat-malk4 here, as also in Chap. XXIX, 5, where it is said to be a title of Aghrérad (always written Agrérad in TD).

136 BUNDAHIS.

var!, and scattered ruin and want among them, Aghrérad begged a favour of God (yazd4n), and he obtained the benefit that the army and champions of the Iranians were saved by him from that distress. 22. Frastyav slew Aghrérad for that fault; and Aghrérad, as his recompense, begat such a son as Gédpatshah.

23. Adzébé the TOhmAspian?, Kanak-i Barzist, Arawisanasp, and Vaétand-i Raghinédid were the three sons avd the daughter of Agaimasvak 8, the son of Nédar, son of MAnds&thar, who begat Afiz6bé. 24. Kavad*‘ was a child in a waist-cloth (kuspid); they abandoned 4zm on a river, and he froze upon the door-sills (kavadak4n); Atizébé perceived and took 42m, brought 42m up, and settled the name of the trembling child.

25. By Kavad was Kat-Apivéh begotten; by Kat-Aptvéh were Kat-Arsh, Kat-Vy4rsh, Kat-Pisan, and Kat-K4ds begotten; by Kat-Kats was Styavakhsh begotten; by Styavakhsh was Kat-Khasréb°

1 The mountains south of the Caspian (see Chap. XII, 17).

2 Av. Uzava Tamaspana of Fravardin Yt. 131, called Zav, or Zab, son of TahmAsp, in the Shahnamah.

5 None of these names, which TD gives in Pazand, are to be found in the portion of the Avesta yet extant.

* Av. Kavi Kavata of Fravardin Yt. 132, Zamy4d Yt. 71, called Kai-Qubad in the Shahnamah. There appears to be an attempt, in the text, to derive his name from the ‘ door-sill’ on which he is said to have been found.

5 The Avesta names of these seven other Kay4ns are, respectively, Kavi Aipi-vanghu, Kavi Arshan, Kavi By&rshén, Kavi Pisanangh, Kavi Usadhan, Kavi Sy4varshan, and Kavi Husravangh (see Fravardin Yt. 132, Zamyad Yt. 71, 74); omitting the third, they are called, respectively, Armin, Aris, Pasfn, Kat-K4vs, Siy4vush, and , Kai-Khbusr6é in the Shahnfmah. TD, omitting the first letter, has Sano for Pisdn ; it also writes Kal-Kayfks and Kai-Khdsrévt.

CHAPTER XXXI, 22-30. 137

begotten. 26. Keres&sp! amd Atrvakhsh? were both brothers. 27. Athrat® was son of Sahm, son of Trak, son of Spaényasp, son of Dfréshasp ¢, son of Tg, sont of Frédin. 28. Léharasp® was son of Atizav *, son of Mantis, son of Kat-Pisin’, son of Kat-Aptvéh, son of Kat-Kavéd. 29. By Kat- Léharasp were Vist4sp, Zartr*, azd other brothers begotten; by Vistésp were Spend-d4d® and Péshyé-

tani begotten; and by Spend-dad were Vohfman", Ataré-tarsah, Mitré-tarsah, and others begotten.

30. Artakhshatar descendant of Papak—of whom his mother was daughter—was son of S4s4n!*, son of

1 Av. Keres4spa of Yas. 1X, 31, 36, 39, Vend. I, 36, Aban Yt. 37, Fravardin Yt. 61, 136, Ram Yt. 27, Zamy4d Yt. 38-44, Af. Zarat. 3; he is called Garsasp in the Shahn&mah.

* Av. Urvakhshaya of Yas. IX, 31, Ram Yt. 28, Af. Zarat. 3. These brothers were sons of Thrita or Athrat, mentioned in the next §.

* Av. Thrita of the Sama race (see Yas. IX, 30, Vend. XX, 11) and father of Keres&spa, whose genealogy is given in a passage interpolated in some copies of the Shahn4mah as follows : Gars4sp, Atrat, Sam, Tfrag, Sidasb, Tar, Jamshéd.

“ Written Dfréshap in TD, both here and in § 14.

® Av. Aurvad-aspa of Ab4n Yt. 10g, Vistasp Yt. 34, 46, called Luhrfsp in the Shahnamah.

* Reading doubtful.

7 Written Ka-Pisfn here, but he is the same person as Kaf- Pisin of § 25 ; the latter part of the name is written both Pisanangh and Pisina in the Avesta.

* Probably Zargar (being Av. Zairivairi of Aban Yt. 112, 117, Fravardin Yt. ror), but called Zarir in the Shahnamah.

® Av. Spentd-data of Fravardin Yt. 103, Visthsp Yt. 25, called Isfendiy4r in the Shahnamah.

10 See Chaps, XXIX, 5, XXXII, 5.

1 Called Bahman in the Shahnamah, and Ardashifr the Kay&nian in Bahman Yt. II, 17; the successor of his grandfather Vist&sp (see Chap. XXXIV, 8).

13 The text is rather obscure, but the Kam4mak of Ardashifr-i Papakan states clearly that Ardashir was son of Sasan by the

138 BUNDAHIS.

1 Called Bahman in the Shahnamah, and Ardashifr the Kay&nian in Bahman Yt. II, 17; the successor of his grandfather Vist&sp (see Chap. XXXIV, 8).

13 The text is rather obscure, but the Kam4mak of Ardashifr-i Papakan states clearly that Ardashir was son of Sasan by the

138 BUNDAHIS.

Véh-Afrid and? Zartr, son of SAs4n, son of Artakhshatar who was the said Vohfiman son of Spend-dad. 31. The mother of Kat-Aptvéh was Farhank ?, daughter of him who is exalted on the heavenly path’, Urvad-gai-frast‘, son of Rak, son of Dardsrdb, son of Mandséthar. 32. This, too, it says, that the glory® of Frédfn settled on the root of a reed (kany4) in the wide-formed ocean; azd Néktargaé®, through sorcery, formed a cow for tillage, and begat children there; three years he carried the reeds there, amd gave them to the cow, until the glory went on to the cow; he brought the cow, milked her milk, and gave z¢ to his three sons; as ¢heiy walking was on hoofs, the glory did not go to the sons, but to Farhank. 33. Nédktarga4 wished to injure’ Farhank, dv¢ Farhank went with the glory away from

daughter of Papak, a tributary ruler of Pars under Ardavdn, the last of the AskAniyan monarchs.

1 So in the Pahlavi text, which therefore makes Véh-4frtd a woman’s name (like Pers. Beh-frin) ; but this is doubtful, as the MSS. often confound va, ‘and,’ and i, ‘ son of.’ .

2 In the Shaéhnamah Farhang is mother of Kai-Kavis. The Pahlavi name can also be read FarAnak, the name of the mother of Ferfdfin in the Shahnamah.

5 Paz. vidharg-4frastaka, which looks more like an epithet than a name.

* Or, perhaps, ‘ Urvad-g4 son of Frast.’

° The divine glory which was supposed to accompany all legitimate sovereigns of Iran, from the time of Héshyang even to that of the Sasanian dynasty ; itis the Av. svarenangh of the Zamyad Yast, and is said to have fled to the ocean for refuge during the reign of foreign dynasties and wicked kings (see Aban Yt. 42, Zamy4d Yt. 51, 56, 59, 62).

* The last syllable is so written, in Pazand, in § 33.

7 Reading hangtdand, ‘to injure,’ instead of khungdané, which may mean ‘to embrace ;’ the difference between the two words being merely the letter f.

CHAPTER XXXI, 31-38. 139

the fierce (ttb) father, and made a vow (patyastak) thus: ‘I will give my first son to Atshbém'’ 34. Then Afdshbd4m saved her from the father; and the first son, Kai-Aptvéh, she bore and gave to Adshbam, was a hero associating with Adshbam, and travelled in Atishbam’s company.

35. The mother of Afz6ébé was the daughter of Ndmiin the wizard, when N&mak? was with Frasty4z.

Then Afdshbd4m saved her from the father; and the first son, Kai-Aptvéh, she bore and gave to Adshbam, was a hero associating with Adshbam, and travelled in Atishbam’s company.

35. The mother of Afz6ébé was the daughter of Ndmiin the wizard, when N&mak? was with Frasty4z.

36. And, moreover, together with those begotten by Sam! were six children in pairs, male axd female; the name of one was Damnak, of one Khisrév, and of one Margandak, and the name of cack man and woman together was one. 37. And the name of one besides them was Dast4n‘; he was considered more eminent than they, and Sag4nsth® and the southern quarter were given to him; and Avar-shatré® and the governorship were given by him to Avarnak. 38. Of Avar-shatré this is said, that z¢ zs the district of Avarnak, and they offered blessings ¢o Srésh and Ardavahist in succession; on this account is cher possession of horses and possession of arms; and on account of firm religion, purity, and manifest joy, good estirnation and extensive fame are greatly

1 This name means ‘the dawn;’ perhaps it may be identified with Av. Usinemangh or Usenemangh of Fravardin Yt. 113, 140, whose wife Freni may possibly be the Farhank (or Franak) of the text.

* So in TD, but it is probably only a variant of Namfin.

® The grandfather of Rustam (see § 41). In the Avesta he is usually called Sama Keres4spa with the title Nairimanau; while in the Shahnémah Sm is son of Nariman.

* Another name for ZAl, the father of Rustam, in the Shahn4mah.

® The same as Sagastan.

* Or, perhaps, ‘the upper district.’

I40 BUNDAHIS.

among them. 39. To Damnak the governorship of Asfristén was given; sovereignty and arranging the law of sovereignty, wilfulness and the stubborn defects they would bring, were among them. 40. To Sparnak! the governorship of Spah4n? was given; to Khisrév the governorship of R4i® was given; to Margandak the kingdom, forest settlements, and mountain settlements of Padashkhvargar were given; where they travel nomadically, and ¢here ave the forming of sheep-folds, prolificness, easy procreation, and continual triumph over enemies. 41. From Dastan proceeded Ridastém * and Hizavarak 5,]

CuHaPTeR XXXII 4,

1. On the kindred of Pérfshasp’, son of Pattirasp®, son of Aurvadasp®, son of Haékadasp”, son of

1 He would seem not to have been a son of SAm, as he is not mentioned before. The reading of all these names is uncertain.

3 The Pahlavi form of Ispah4n.

5 Av. Ragha of Yas. XIX, 51, Vend. I, 60, whose ruins are near the modern Teher4n.

‘ The usual Pahlavi form of Rustam.

5 Or Afizvérak; Rustam’s brother is called Zavérah in the Shahn4mah.

* This chapter, which is numbered XXXIII by previous translators, is found in all MSS., but in TD it forms a continuation of the preceding chapter, beginning with the name Pérfishasp.

7 Av. Pourushaspa of Yas. IX, 42, 43, Vend. XIX, 15, 22, 143, Ab&n Yt. 18, &c.

* This chapter, which is numbered XXXIII by previous translators, is found in all MSS., but in TD it forms a continuation of the preceding chapter, beginning with the name Pérfishasp.

7 Av. Pourushaspa of Yas. IX, 42, 43, Vend. XIX, 15, 22, 143, Ab&n Yt. 18, &c.

® K2o has Paz. Spitarsp, and M6 has Paz. Pirtrasp (see note on Chap. XXXIII, 1). The reading in the text is doubtful.

® Omitted in K2o and TD.

2 Av. Ha€kadaspa of Yas. XLV, 15, LII, 3.

CHAPTER XXXI, 39 —XXXII, 3. I4I

Kakhshnds’, son of Patttrasp, som of Hardarsn 2, son of Hardar 8, som of Spitaman ‘, soz of Vidast °, son of Ayazem, son of Ragan®, son of Ddrdsréb’, son of MAndséthar*. 2. As Pattirasp ad two sons, one Pérfshasp and one ArAsti®, by Pérfshasp was ZaratQst begotten for a sanctuary of good religion ™, and by Ardsti was Médy6k-mah” begotten. 3, Zaratdst, when he brought the religion, first celebrated

y ? Windischmann suggests Av. KAkhshnéis (gen.) of Fravardin t. 114.

* Kao has Paz. Harsn and TD has Harakidarsnd.

® TD has Hardtdar, or Ardidar.

* Or Spitém (as the last syllable is the patronymical suffix), Av. Spit4ma, the usual patronymic of Zarat(st.

® May be read VAadist in TD.

* Possibly the same person as R&k in Chap. XXXI, 31; but see XXXII, 3.

7 So in TD, but P4z. Durdsrun in K20, M6.

® This genealogy is somewhat differently given in the Vagarkard-i Dintk (pp. 28, 29),as published in Bombay by Dastur Peshotanji Behramji Sanjan4 in 1848; and is extended back, through the generations mentioned in Chap. XXXII, 1, 2,7,14,to Gaydémard, as follows : ‘Pérfishdspé6 son of Paitirasp, and Arfspé6 son of Paitirasp, Urvandasp, Haésadasp, Kikhshnus, Paétirasp, Hardrsn, Haridar, Spftam4né, Vaédist, Nay4zem, Ragisn, Dfirasréb, Mandstihar sovereign of Iran, M4nus-khQrmar, M4nus-khfrnak, Néryésang, Varsid-din, Vizak, Airyak, Aithritak, Ibitak, Frazisak, Zisak, Frasizak, Izak, Airté, Frédan lord of Khvantras, Pfir-téra the Asptkan, Névak-t6ra the Asptkan, Ség-téra the Asptkan, Géfar-t6ra the Asptkén, Van6i-fravisn the Asptk&an, Yim lord of the seven regions, Vivanghad, Ayanghad, Ananghad, Takhmérup, Héshfng the Pésdad, lord of the seven regions, Fravak, Sty4mak, Mashy6é whose wife was Mashyak, Gayékmard the first man, and father of all mankind in the material world.’ .

* Av. Ardstaya of Fravardin Yt. 95 ; TD has Ardstih.

% The Pézand words darg4 hidainis appear to be merely a misreading of Pahl. darg4s-i hadinétfh.

11 Av. Maidhyé6-maungha of Yas. L, 19, Fravardin Yt. 95, 106. He is said to have been Zaratfist’s first disciple.

142 BUNDAHIS.

worship! azd expounded in Atran-vég, and Médyékm4h received the religion from him. 4. The Mobads? of P&rs are all ¢vaced back to this race of M4ndséihar.

11 Av. Maidhyé6-maungha of Yas. L, 19, Fravardin Yt. 95, 106. He is said to have been Zaratfist’s first disciple.

142 BUNDAHIS.

worship! azd expounded in Atran-vég, and Médyékm4h received the religion from him. 4. The Mobads? of P&rs are all ¢vaced back to this race of M4ndséihar.

5. Again, I say, by Zaratist* weve begotten three sons and three daughters‘; one son was IsadvAstar °, one Adrvatad-nar*, and one Khirshéd-séthar’; as IsadvAstar was chief of the priests he became the Mébad of Mébads, azd passed away in the hundredth year of the religion; Adrvatad-nar was an agriculturist, avd the chief of the enclosure formed by Yim®, which is below the earth; Khfrshéd-&thar was a warrior, commander of the army of Péshyétant, son of Vistasp, and dwells in Kangdez®; and of the three daughters the name of one was Frén, of one Srtt, and of one Péruftst®. 6. Adrvatad-nar and Kharshéa-Athar were from a serving (kakar) wife’, the rest were from a privileged (padakhshah) wife.

' Reading frag yast; but it may be frag gast, ‘wandered forth.’

® The class of priests whose special duty is to perform all religious rites and ceremonies,

5 This paragraph is quoted, with a few alterations, in the Vagarkard-i Dintk, pp. 21-23.

* K2o omits the ‘three daughters’ here, by mistake.

5 Av. Isad-vastra of Yas. XXIII, 4, XXVI, 17, Fravardin Yt. 98.

* Av. Urvatad-nara of Vend. II, 143, Fravardin Yt. 98. Kao and M6 have Afirvartad-nar, and TD has Afirvatad-nar.

7 Av. Hvare-Aithra of Fravardin Yt. 98; TD has Khfr-éthar.

® See Chap. XXIX, 5. Windischmann and Justi consider the clause about Péshydtanfi as inserted by mistake, and it is omitted in the Vagarkard-i Dintk (p. 21); it is found, however, in all MSS. of the Bundahis.

® These daughters are the Av. Freni, Thriti, and Pouru-Aista of Fravardin Yt. 139; the last is also mentioned in Yas. LII, 3.

1° The following is a summary of the Persian descriptions of the five kinds of marriage, as given in the Riv4yats :—

A p&dsh4h (‘ ruling, or privileged’) wife is when a man marries,

CHAPTER XXXII, 4—7. 143

71. By Isadv4star was begotten a son whose name was Ururviga?, and they call him Arang-i Biraé@4n® (‘fore-arm of brothers’) for this reason, that, as they

with the parents’ consent, an unbetrothed maiden out of a family, and she and her children remain his in both worlds.

A yfikan or ayfik (‘ only child’) wife is an only child, married with the parents’ consent, and her first child belongs to them; after its birth she becomes a pAdsh&h wife. She is entitled to onethird of her parents’ property for giving up the child.

A satar (‘adopted’) wife is when a man over fifteen years of age dies childless and unmarried, and his relatives provide a maiden with a dowry, and marry her to another man; when half her children belong to the dead man, and half to the living, and she herself is the dead man’s wife in the other world.

A akar or 4akar (‘serving’) wife is a widow who marries again ; if she had no children by her first husband she is acting as a satar wife, and half her children by her second husband belong to her first one; and she herself, in any case, belongs to her first husband in the other world.

A khftd-sarff or khfd-sar&f (‘self-disposing ’) wife is one who marries without her parents’ consent ; she inherits no property from her parents until her eldest son has given her as a padsh&h wife to his father.

1 Instead of this sentence the Vagarkard-i Dinfk (pp. 21, 22) has the following, which appears to rest upon a misinterpretation of the text :—

‘And Zaratttst the righteous had three wives; all three were in the lifetime of ZaratOst, and all three wives were living throughout the lifetime of ZaratQst; the name of one was Hvév, of the second Urvig, of the third Arnig-bareda. And from Urvig, who was a privileged wife, four children were born; one was the son IsadvAstar, and the three daughters, namely, Frén, Sritak, and Pérusist ; these four were from Urvig. And from the wife Arnig-bared4 two sons were born, one Afirvart-nar, and the second Khfrshéd-Athar ; and Arnig-bared4 was a serving wife, and the name of the former husband of Arnig-bared4 was Mitré-ay4r. And from Hvév, who was a privileged wife, were three sons, namely, Hfshédar, Hfshédar-m4h, and Sésh4ns, as it says,’ &c. (as in § 8).

3 TD has Pahl. Afrvarvigak or Khfrfrfipak.

5 So in TD.

144 BUNDAHIS.

were from a serving wife, she then delivered them over to Isadvastar through adoption. 8. This, too, one knows, that three sons of Zaratfst, namely, Hashédar, Hfshédar-méh!, and Sdéshyans*, were from Hvév; as it says, that ZaratQst went near unto Hvév three times, avd each time the seed went to the ground; the angel Nérydésang* received the brilliance and strength of that seed, delivered 2¢ with care to the angel Andhid®, and in time will blend z¢ with a mother. 9. Nine thousand, nine hundred, and ninety-nine, and nine myriads* of the guardian spirits of the righteous are intrusted with z¢s protection, so that the demons may not injure 2¢7,

10. The name of the mother of Zaratist was Dughda *, avd the name of the father of the mother of Zaratist was Frahimravé °.

1 Av. Ukhshyad-ereta and Ukhshyad-nemangh of Fravardin Yt. 128.

2 Av. Saoshyas of Vend. XIX, 18, Fravardin Yt. 129, &c. See Chaps. XI, 6, XXIX, 6, XXX, 3, 4, 7, 17, 25, 27-

® Av. Hvdvi of Fravardin Yt. 139, Din Yt. 15; the Pahlavi form of the name, as given once in TD, is Hivaébé.

* See Chap. XV, 1.

5 Ay. andhita of Aban Yt. 1, &c.; a female personification of ‘unsullied’ water, known generally by the epithet ardvf sfra (the Arédvivstr of Chap. XIII), and whose name is also applied to the planet Venus (see Chap. V, 1).

* So in M6; other MSS. have ‘9,999 myriads,’ but see Fravardin Yt. 62.

7 This last phrase, about the demons, is omitted in TD and the Vagarkard-i Dintk.

® The Avesta word for ‘ daughter.’

XIII), and whose name is also applied to the planet Venus (see Chap. V, 1).

* So in M6; other MSS. have ‘9,999 myriads,’ but see Fravardin Yt. 62.

7 This last phrase, about the demons, is omitted in TD and the Vagarkard-i Dintk.

® The Avesta word for ‘ daughter.’

° TD has Paz. Feredhimruvana.

CHAPTER XXXII, 8—XxXXIII, 3. 145

(CuaPTeR XXXIII4

o. The family of the Mébads (‘ priests’).

1. Bahak? was son of Hfbakht, son of Atarébéndak, sow of Mahdad, son of Méadydk-méh, sox of Frah-vakhsh-vind4d, son of Médydk-mdh, son of Kad‘, son of Médydk-mah, son of ArAstth, son of Paitirasp’. 2. As Bahak was Mébad of Mébads (high-priest) unto Shahpdhar*, son of Afharmazd, so Kad was the great preceptor (farmAd@4r) unto Déarat 7.

3. Atar6-pAd ® was son of Maraspend, son of Dadarda, son of DAadirad, son of Hidind, son of Atarédd, son of MAnis&thar, son of Vohiman-Athar, son of Fry4né °, soz of Bahak?, sox of Fréddn, son of Fra-

* This chapter is found only in TD, where it forms a continuation of the preceding, and affords a means (see §§ 10, 11) for determining the age of the recension of the text contained in that MS. As nearly all the names are written in Pahlavi letters, the pronunciation of many of them is merely a matter of guess.

* Here written Béhak, but it is Bahak or Bak in § 2; compare Bahak in § 3, and Av. Baungha of Fravardin Yt. 124.

> Compare Av. Frashavakhsha of Fravardin Yt. rog.

* Compare Av. K4ta of Fravardin Yt. 124.

5 See Chap. XXXII, 2, for the last three generations ; TD has PirtarAsp here, like the variant of M6 in Chap. XXXII, 1.

* The Sasanian king ShApfir II, who reigned a.p. 309-379. -

7 According to the chronology of the Bundahis (Chap. XXXIV, 8, 9), D&rat lived only some four centuries before Sh4pfr II, for which period only seven generations of priests are here provided. This period, moreover, is certainly about three centuries less than the truth.

* This priest was prime minister of Shapfr II.

® Compare Av. Fryana of Yas. XLV, 12.

10 This name is repeated in TD, probably by mistake (compare Bahak in §§ 1, 2).

fs] L

146 BUNDAHIS.

shattar!, son of Pérushasp, son of Vindsp, son of Nivar, soz of Vakhsh, soz of Vahidhrés, son of Frast, son of Gak?*, son of Vakhsh, soz of Fryan, son of Ragan, soz of Dardsréb, son of MAandséthar 8.

4. Mitré-vardz was son of Nig&s-afzid-dak, son of Shirtashésp, so of Parstva, son of Urvad-ga, son of Taham, sox of Zartr, son of Dardsréb, son of Mantis‘. 5. Dornamtk was son of Zagh, son of Masvik, son of Nédar 5, son of Mandséthar.

6. Mitré-akAvid zs son of Mardan-véh*, son of Afrébag-vindad, son of Vindad-i-pédak, son of Vaébakht’, son of Bahak, soz of V4é-bikht. 7. The mother from whom I was born is Himéi, daughter of Freh-mah, who also was the righteous daughter ®

? This is probably a semi-Huzv4ris form of Frashéstar.

* Perhaps this name should be read along with the next one, so as to give the single Pazand name Skinas or Skivas.

7. The mother from whom I was born is Himéi, daughter of Freh-mah, who also was the righteous daughter ®

? This is probably a semi-Huzv4ris form of Frashéstar.

* Perhaps this name should be read along with the next one, so as to give the single Pazand name Skinas or Skivas.

* See Chap. XXXII, 1, for the last three generations, According to this genealogy Atarép4d-i M4raspendan was the twenty-third in descent from Manfiskihar, whereas his contemporary, Bahak (§ 1), was twenty-second in descent from the same.

* No doubt M&nfséthar is meant; if not, we must read M&n(sdQrnamik in connection with § 5.

® Here written Nidar, but see Chaps. XXIX, 6, XXXI, 13.

* Here written Mard-véh, but see § 8.

” Here written Aé-vikht, but see § 8; it may be Vis-bfkht, or Vés-bfikht.

* The text is amfdar mfinas li agas zerkhfind Himéf dOkht-i Freh-m4h-if aharéb vikht (dQkht?). We might perhaps read ‘ Freh-mah son of Kah4réb-bfikht,’ but it seems more probable that §§ 7, 8 should be connected, and that the meaning intended is that Hamat was daughter of Freh-m4h (of a certain family) and of Pfyisn-sh&d (of another family); she was also the mother of the editor of that recension of the Bundahis which is contained in TD ; but who was his father? The singularly unnecessary repetition of the genealogy of the two brothers, Mitr6-ak4vid and Pfyisn-shad, in §§ 6, 8, leads to the suspicion that if the latter

CHAPTER XXXIII, 4-11. 147

of M&ah-aydr soz of M&h-béndak, sox of M4h-bdkht. 8. Pfyisn-shad zs son of Mardan-véh, son of Afrébagvindad, son of Vindad-i-pédak, son of Vaé-bikht, son of Bahak, soz of V4é-bikht. = -

g. All the other Mébads who have been renowned in the empire (khQdd4yth) were from the same family it is said, avd were of this race of M4nds- Athar'. 10. Those Médbads, likewise, who now exist are all from the same family they assert, and I, too, they boast, whom they call ? ‘the administration of perfect rectitude’ (Dadakth-i Ashévahisté)*. 11. Yid4n-Yim soz of Vahrim-shaa, son of Zaratist, Atar6-pid son of Maraspend, sox of Zad-sparham +,

were his mother’s father, the former was probably his own father or grandfather. Unfortunately the text makes no clear statement on the subject, and § 10 affords further material for guessing otherwise at his name and connections.

' Compare Chap. XXXII, 4.

* Reading va If& laband-i karftind.

Unfortunately the text makes no clear statement on the subject, and § 10 affords further material for guessing otherwise at his name and connections.

' Compare Chap. XXXII, 4.

* Reading va If& laband-i karftind.

* This looks more like a complimentary title than a name, and if the editor of the TD recension of the Bundahis were the son or grandson of Mitré-ak4vid (§ 6) we have no means of ascertaining his name; but if he were not descended from Mitr6-ak4vid it is possible that §§ 10, rr should be read together, and that he was the son of Yidan-Yim. Now we know, from the heading and colophon of the ninety-two questions and answers on religious subjects which are usually called the D&distan-i Dinik, and from the colophons of other writings which usually accompany that work, that those answers were composed and certain epistles were written by M4nfséihar, son of Yfid4n-Yim, who was high-priest of Pars and Kirmfn in a.y. 2g0 (a.p. 881), and apparently a more important personage than his (probably younger) brother Z&dsparham, who is mentioned in § 11 as one of the priests contemporary with the editor of the TD recension. If this editor, therefore, were a son of Yfidaén-Yim (which is a possible interpretation of the text) he was most probably this same M4n(séthar, author of the D&gistén-i Dinik (see the Introduction, § 4).

* The last name is very probably superfluous, Zad-sparham

148 BUNDAHIS.

Zad-sparham son of Yod4n-Yim', Ataré-pdd son of Hamtid?, Ashévahist son of Freh-Srésh, and the other Mébads have sprung from the same family.

12. This, too, it says, that ‘in one winter I wed/ locate (g4kinam) the religion of the Mazdayasnians, which came out into the other six regions.’]

having been written twice most likely by mistake. This Atar6-pid son of M4raspend was probably the one mentioned in the following extract from the old Persian Rivayat MS., No. 8 of the collection in the Indian Office Library at London (fol. 142 a) :-—

‘The book Dinkard which the dastfirs of the religion and the ancients have compiled, likewise the blessed Adarb4d son of Mahrasfend, son of Asavahist of the people of the good religion, in the year three hundred of Yazdagard Shahry4r, collected some of the more essential mysteries of the religion as instruction, and of these he formed this book.’ That is, he was the last editor of the Dinkard, which seems to have remained unrevised since his time, as the present copies have descended from the MS. preserved by his family and first copied in a.y. 369.

1 ZAd-sparham was brother of the author of the DAdistan-i Dintk ; he was high-priest at Sirkin in the south, and evidently had access to the Bundahis, of part of which he wrote a paraphrase (see Appendix). His name is usually written Zad-sparam.

2 In the history of the Dinkard, given at the end of its third book (see Introd. to Farhang-i Oim-khad@k, p. xxxiv), we are told as follows :— -

His name is usually written Zad-sparam.

2 In the history of the Dinkard, given at the end of its third book (see Introd. to Farhang-i Oim-khad@k, p. xxxiv), we are told as follows :— -

‘After that, the well-meaning Atard-pad son of Hémid, who was the leader of the people of the good religion, compiled, with the assistance of God, through inquiry, investigation, and much trouble, a new means of producing remembrance of the Mazdayasnian religion.’ He did this, we are further told, by collecting all the decaying literature and perishing traditions into a work ‘like the great original Dinkard, of a thousand chapters’ (m4nak-i zak raba bin Diné-kart6 1000-darak6). We thus learn from external sources that the group of contemporary priests, mentioned in the text, was actively employed (about a.p. goo) in an attempted revival. of the religious literature of the Mazdayasnians, to which we owe either the revision or compilation of such works as the Dfnkard, D&distan-i Dintk, and Bundahis.

CHAPTER XXXIII, 12—XXXIV, 4. 149

CHAPTER XXXIV}

o. On the reckoning of the years ?.

1. Time was for twelve thousand years; and it says in revelation, that three thousand years was the duration of the spiritual s¢a¢e, where the creatures were unthinking, unmoving, azd intangible®; and three thousand years‘ was the duration of Gdyémard, with the ox, in the world. 2. As ¢4zs was six thousand years the series of millennium reigns® of Cancer, Leo, and Virgo had elapsed, because it was six thousand years when the millennium reign came to Libra, the adversary rushed in, and GAayémard lived thirty years in tribulation®. 3. After the thirty years’? MAshya and MAshyéi grew up; it was fifty years while they were not wife avd husband °, and they were ninety-three years together as wife and husband till the 4¢me when Héshyang® came.

4. Héshyang was forty years’, Takhmérup" thirty years, Yim till 42s glory!? departed six hundred and

1 This chapter is found in all the MSS.

* TD adds ‘of the Arabs (Tazik4n).’

5 See Chap. I, 8. ‘ See Chaps. I, 22, III, 1.

® This system of a millennium reign for each constellation of the zodiac can hardly have any connection with the precession of the equinoxes, as the equinoxes travel backwards through the zodiac, whereas these millennium reigns travel forwards.

6 See Chap. III, 21-23.

7 That is, forty years after the thirty (see Chap. XV, 2).

® See Chap. XV, 19, 20. ® See Chaps. XV, 28, XXXI, 1.

10 K20 omits, by mistake, from ‘together’ in § 3 to this point.

" See Chap. XXXI, 2.

% So in K2o, but M6 has nismé, ‘soul, reason,’ as in Chap. XXIII, 1; the word ‘glory’ would refer to the supposed divine glory of the Iranian monarchs (see Chap. XXXI, 32).

150 BUNDAHIS.

XV, 28, XXXI, 1.

10 K20 omits, by mistake, from ‘together’ in § 3 to this point.

" See Chap. XXXI, 2.

% So in K2o, but M6 has nismé, ‘soul, reason,’ as in Chap. XXIII, 1; the word ‘glory’ would refer to the supposed divine glory of the Iranian monarchs (see Chap. XXXI, 32).

150 BUNDAHIS.

sixteen years and six months, and after that he was a hundred years in concealment. 5. Then the millennium?! reign came to Scorpio, and Dah&k # ruled a thousand years. 6. After the millennium reign came to Sagittarius, Frédfin * rezgned five hundred years; in the same five hundred years of Frédtin were the twelve years of Atrié; Mands#ihar* was a hundred and twenty years, avd in the same reign of Mandsihar, when he was in the mountain fastness (ddshkhv4r-gar) 5, were the twelve years of Frasty4v; Zéb* the Tahmaspian was five years.

7. Kai-Kabad? was fifteen years; Kat-KAts, till he went to the sky, seventy-five years, azd seventyfive years after that, altogether a hundred and fifty years; Kat-Khdsrév sixty years; Kai-Lérdsp® a hundred and twenty years; Kat-Vistdsp, till the coming of the religion, thirty years, altogether a hundred and twenty years.

8. Vohfiiman” sox of Spend-d4d a hundred and

1 The seventh millennium, ruled by Libra, is computed by Windischmann as follows: 30 + 403 + 50+93+ 40+ 30 + 6164+ 100= 1000. The eighth millennium, ruled by Scorpio, is the thousand years of Dahak.

* See Chap. XXXI, 6. 5 See Chap. XXXI, 7-11.

* See Chap. XXXI, 12-14. 5 See Chap. XXXI, 21.

® Written Afiz6bé in Chap. XXXI, 23, 24.

7 Usually written Kai-Kavad in Pahlavi (see Chap. XXXI, 24, 25).

® Also written Kat-Léharasp (see Chap. XXXI, 28, 29).

® This is the end of the ninth millennium, ruled by Sagittarius, which is computed by Windischmann as follows: 500+ 120+5+ 15 +150+ 60+ 120+ 30= 1000,

10 See Chap. XXXI, 29, 30, where he is said to have been also called Artakhshatar, which seems to identify him with Artaxerxes Longimanus and his successors down to Artaxerxes Mnemon; so that Hfm4f may perhaps be identified with Parysatis, and Dérai Aithar-4z4dan with Artaxerxes Ochus, as D&rai Daray4n must be

CHAPTER XXXIV, 5-9. 151

twelve years; Hdmat, who was daughter of Vohtman, thirty years; Dérdi son of Athar-iz4d!, that is, of the daughter of Vohiman, twelve years; Dérdt son of Darai fourteen years ; Alexander the Riman? fourteen years.

9g. The AskAnians bore the title in an uninterrupted (a-aribik) sovereignty two hundred and eighty-four years*, Ardashir son of Papak and the number of the Sds4nians four hundred and sixty years‘, and then it went to the Arabs.

Darius Codomannus, while the reign of Kai-Vistésp seems intended to cover the period from Cyrus to Xerxes.

1 A surname of Himii.

4 Sikandar-i Arfim4k, that is, Alexander the Roman (of the eastern or Greek empire), as Pahlavi writers assume.

* This period is nearly two centuries too short.

Darius Codomannus, while the reign of Kai-Vistésp seems intended to cover the period from Cyrus to Xerxes.

1 A surname of Himii.

4 Sikandar-i Arfim4k, that is, Alexander the Roman (of the eastern or Greek empire), as Pahlavi writers assume.

* This period is nearly two centuries too short.

“ The actual period of Sasanian rule was 425 years (A.D. 226- 651). According to the figures given in the text, the tenth millennium, ruled by Capricornus, must have terminated in the fourth year of the last king, Yazdakard. This agrees substantially with the Bahman Yast, which makes the millennium of Zaratfst expire some time after the reign of Khfsr6é Néshirvin; probably in the time of Khfisr6 Parviz, or some forty years earlier than the fourth year of Yazdakard. According to the text we must now

be near the end of the first quarter of the twelfth and last millennium.

Digitized by Google

(APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS./

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM,

BROTHER OF THE DASTOR OF

PARS AND KIRMAN,

A.D. 881.

Part I, CuHapters I-XI.

(PARAPHRASE OF BUNDAHIS, I-XVII.)}

OBSERVATIONS.

1-5. (The same as on p. 2.)

6. Abbreviations used are:—Av. for Avesta. Bund. for Bundahis, as translated in this volume. B. Yt. for Bahman Yast, as translated in this volume. Haug’s Essays, for Essays on the Sacred Language, Writings, and Religion of the Parsis, by Martin Haug, 2nd edition. Mkh. for Mainyé-i-khard, ed. West. Pers. for Persian. Vend. for Vendidad, ed. Spiegel. Yas. for Yasna, ed. Spiegel. Yt. for Yast, ed. Westergaard.

4. The MS. mentioned in the notes is K35 (written probably A.D. 1572), No. 35 in the University Library at Kopenhagen.

SELECTIONS

ZAD-SPARAM.

Tuey call these memoranda azd writings the Selections (£idakth4) of Z4d-sparam, son of Ydan- Yim.

Cuapter I.

o. In propitiation of the creator Aftharmazd and all the angels—who are the whole of the heavenly and earthly sacred beings (yazd4n)—ave the sayings of Herbad Z4d-sparam, son of YAd4n-Yim, who is of the south’, about the meeting of the beneficent spirit and the evil spirit.

1. It is in scripture thus declared, that light was above and darkness below, and between those two was open space. 2.'Adharmazd was in the light, and Aharman in the darkness?; Adharmazd was aware of the existence of Aharman and of zs coming for strife; Aharman was not aware of the existence of light ad of Atharmazd®, 3. It happened to Aharman, in the gloom avd darkness, that

1 Z4d-sparam appears to have been dastfir of Sirkan, about thirty parasangs south of Kirman, and one of the most southern districts in Persia (see Ouseley’s Oriental Geography, pp. 138, 139, 141, 143-145).

® See Bund. I, 2-4.

° Or ‘ of the light of AGharmazd’ (compare Bund. I, 8, 9).

156 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIs.

138, 139, 141, 143-145).

® See Bund. I, 2-4.

° Or ‘ of the light of AGharmazd’ (compare Bund. I, 8, 9).

156 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIs.

he was walking humbly (fr6-tanf) on the borders, and meditating other ¢hzngs he came up to the top, and a ray of light was seen by him; and because of zé¢s antagonistic nature to him he strove that he might reach it, so that it might also be within his absolute power. 4. And as he came forth to the boundary, accompanied by certain others!, Afharmazd came forth to the struggle for keeping Aharman away from His territory; and He did it through pure words, confounding witchcraft, and cast him back to the gloom.

5. For protection from the fiend (drfg) the spirits rushed in, the spirits of the sky, water, earth, plants, animals, mankind, and fire He ad appointed, and they maintained it (the protection) three thousand years. 6. Aharman, also, ever collected means in the gloom; and at the end of the three thousand years he came back to the boundary, blustered (pattst4d@), and exclaimed thus: ‘I wzd/ smite thee, I wd? smite the creatures which thou thinkest Lave produced fame for thee—thee who art the beneficent spirit—I will destroy everything about them.’

(7, Adharmazd answered thus: ‘Thou art not a doer of everything, O fiend?!’ |

8. And, again, Aharman retorted thus: ‘I will seduce all material life into disaffection to thee and affection to myself %.’

(9. Adharmazd perceived, through the spirit of wisdom, thus: ‘Even the blustering of Aharman is capable of performance, if I do not allow disunion

1 Reading pavan at&rand ham-tanf, but the phrase is somewhat doubtful, and rather inconsistent with Bund. I, ro. 2 Bund. I, 16. 5 Bund. I, 14.

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, I, 4-14. 157

(l4 barininam) during a period of struggle.’ ) 10. And he demanded of him a period for friendship }, for it was seen by him that Aharman does not rely upon the intervention of any vigorous ones, azd the existence of a period is obtaining the benefit of the mutual friendship azd just arrangement of both; and he formed it into three periods, each period being three millenniums. 11. Aharman relied upon zt, and Adharmazd perceived that, though it is not possible to have Aharman sent down, ever when he wants he goes back to his own requisite, which is darkness; and from the poison which is much diffused endless strife arises *.

11. Aharman relied upon zt, and Adharmazd perceived that, though it is not possible to have Aharman sent down, ever when he wants he goes back to his own requisite, which is darkness; and from the poison which is much diffused endless strife arises *.

12. And after the period was appointed by him, he brought forward the Ahfnavar formula*; and in his Ahdnavar these‘ kinds of benefit were shown :— 13. The first is that, of all things,{ that is proper which is something declared as the will of Adharmazd; so that, whereas that is proper which is declared the will of Adharmazd, where anything exists which is not within the will of Adharmazd, it is created injurious from the beginning, a sin of a distinct nature. | 14. The second is this, that'whoever shall do that which is the will of Adharmazd, his reward azd recompense are his own; and of him who shall not do that which is the will of Adharmazd, the punishment at the bridge > owing thereto

1 Bund. I, 17, 18.

? Or ‘ the poison of the serpent, which is much diffused, becomes endless strife.’

5 Bund. I, 21.

* The word 4n, ‘those,’ however, is probably a miswriting of the cipher for ‘ three.’

5 The Xinvad or Kinvar bridge (see Bund. XII, 7).

158 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

is his own; which is shown from this’ formula; and the reward of doers of good works, the punishment of sinners, and the tales of heaven azd hell are from it. 15. Thirdly, z¢ 2s shown that\the sovereignty of Atharmazd increases that which is for the poor, azd adversity is removed); by which z¢ is shown that there are treasures for the needy oxe, and treasures are to be 4zs friends; as the intelligent creations are to the unintelligent, so also ave the treasures of a wealthy Jerson to a needy one, treasures liberally given which are his own. 16. And the creatures of the trained hand of Adharmazd are contending and angry (4rd@ik), one with the other, as the renovation of the universe must occur through these three things. 17. That is, first, true religiousness in oneself, and reliance upon a man’s original hold on the truly glad tidings (nav-barh4m), that A dharmazd is all goodness without vileness, and his will is a will altogether excellent ; aza@ Aharman is all vileness without goodness. | 18. Secondly, hope of the reward and recompense of good works, serious fear of the bridge azd the punishment of crime, strenuous perseverance in good works, ad abstaining from sin. 19. Thirdly, the existence of the mutual assistance of the creatures, or along with and owing to mutual assistance, ‘heir collective warfare; it is the triumph of warfare over the enemy which is one’s own renovation?.

1 The MS. has hfiman, ‘ well-meditating,’ instead of denman, ‘this ;’? but the two words are much alike in Pahlavi writing.

3 This commentary on the Ahfinavar, or Yath4-ahf-vairyd formula, is rather clumsily interpolated by Z&d-sparam, and is much more elaborate than the usual Pahlavi translation and explanation of this formula, which may be translated as follows :-—

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, I, 15-24. 159

20. By this formula he (Aharman) was confounded, avd he fell back to the gloom!; azd Atharmazd produced the creatures bodily for the world ; first, the sky; the second, water; the third, earth; the fourth, plants; the fifth, animals; the sixth, mankind?, 21. Fire was in all, diffused originally through the six substances, of which it was as much the confiner of each single substance in which it was established, it is said, as an eyelid when they lay one down upon the other.

22. Three thousand years the creatures were possessed of bodies and not walking on ¢hezr navels; and the sun, moon, avd stars stood still. 23. In the mischievous incursion, at the end of the period, Aftharmazd observed thus: ‘What advantage is there from the creation of a creature, although thirstless, which is unmoving ov mischievous?’ 24.

‘ As is the will of the living spirit (as is the will of Adharmazd) so should be the pastor (so excellent should he be) owing to whatsoever are the duties and good works of righteousness (the duties and good works should be as excellent as the will of Adharmazd). Whose is the gift of good thought (that is, the reward and recompense good thought gives, it gives also unto him) which among living spirits is the work of Alharmazd (that is, they would do that which Afharmazd requires); there are some who say itis thus : Whose gift is through good thought (that is, the reward and recompense which they will give to good thought, they would give also unto him); Ataré-p4d son of ZaratQst said that by the gift of good thought, when among living spirits, they comprehend the doing of deeds. The sovereignty is for Aftharmazd (that is, the sovereignty which is his, Afharmazd has kept with advantage) who gives necessaries [or comfort, or clothing] to the poor (that is, they would make intercession for them).’

Additional phrases are sometimes inserted, and some words altered, but the above is the usual form of this commentary.

2 Bund. I, 22. 2 Bund. IJ, 28.

160 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

2 Bund. I, 22. 2 Bund. IJ, 28.

160 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

-And in aid of the celestial sphere he produced the creature Time (z6rv4n)?; and Time is unrestricted, so that he made the creatures of Adharmazd moving, distinct from the motion of Aharman’s creatures, for the shedders of perfume (b6!-d4d4n) were standing one opposite to the other while emitting 24. 25. And, observantly of the end, he brought forward to Aharman a means out of himself, the property of darkness, with which the extreme limits (virfnakd) of Time were connected by him, an envelope (pést6) of the black-pated and ash-coloured kind. 26. And in bringing it forward he spoke thus: ‘Through their weapons the co-operation of the serpent (az6) dies away, and this which is thine, indeed thy own daughter, aves through religion; and if at the end of nine thousand years, as it is said azd written, is a time of upheaval (madam kardan6), she zs upheaved, not ended.’

27. At the same time Aharman came from accompanying Time out to the front, out to the star Station; the connection of the sky with the star station was open, which showed, since it hung down into empty space, the strong communication of the lights and glooms, the place of strife in which is the pursuit of both. 28. And having darkness with himself he brought it into the sky, avd left the sky so to gloom that the internal deficiency in the sky extends as much as one-third? over the star station.

1 This is the Av. zrvana akarana, ‘boundless time or antiquity,’ of Vend. XIX, 33, 44. He is a personification of duration and age, and is here distinctly stated to be a creature of Afharmazd. This throws some doubt upon the statements of Armenian writers, who assert that the two spirits sprang from Zrvdna.

® Compare Bund. III, rr.

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, I, 25-11, 6. I61

Cuapter II.

1. On the coming in of Aharman to the creatures it is thus declared in revelation, that zz the month Fravardin and the day Atharmazd, at noon}, he came forth to the frontier of the sky. 2. The sky sees him and, on account of Ads nature, fears as much as a sheep trembles at a wolf; avd Aharman came on, scorching avd burning into it. 3. Then he came to the water which was arranged below the earth ?, and darkness without an eyelid was brought on by him; and he came on, through the middle of the earth, as a snake all-leaping comes on out of a hole; and he stayed within the whole earth. 4. The passage where he came on is his own, the way to hell, through which the demons make the wicked run.

5. Afterwards, he came to a tree, such as was of a single root, the height of which was several feet, and zt was without branches and without bark, juicy and sweet ; and to keep the strength of all kinds of trees in its race, it was in the vicinity of the middle of the earth; and at the self-same time 7z¢ became quite withered *.

6. Afterwards, he came to the ox, the solecreated‘, as it stood as high as Gayémard on the

? Bund. III, 12. * Bund. III, 13.

6. Afterwards, he came to the ox, the solecreated‘, as it stood as high as Gayémard on the

? Bund. III, 12. * Bund. III, 13.

5 Bund. III, 14, 16.

* The primeval ox, or first-created representative of animals, as G4yémard was of mankind; from which two representatives all mankind and animals are said to have been afterwards developed. There seems to have been some doubt as to the sex of this mythological ox ; here it is distinctly stated to have been a female, but from Bund. X, 1, 2, XIV, 3, it would appear to have been a male, and this ‘seems to be admitted by Dad-sparam himself, in Chap. IX, 7.

[5] M

162 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

bank of the water of Déitih! zz the middle of the earth; and its distance from Gdyémard being as much as its own height, it was also distant from the bank of the water of Dattih by the same measure ; and it was a female, white aad brilliant as the moon. 7. As the adversary came upon z¢ Adharmazd gave zt a narcotic, which is also called ‘bang,’ to eat, and to rub the ‘bang’ before the eye’, so that the annoyance from the assault of crimes may be less; it became lean and ill, azd fell upon its right breast? trembling.

8. Before the advance to Gayémard, who was then about one-third the height of Zaratst, and was brilliant as the sun, Atharmazd forms, from the sweat ‘ on the man, a figure of fifteen years, radiant and tall, and sends it on to Gayémard; and he also brings his sweat® on to him as leng as one Yathaah-vairy6*® is detmg recited. 9. When he issued from the sweat, and raised his eyes, he saw the world when it was dark as night’; on the whole earth were the snake, the scorpion, the lizard (vazak), and noxious creatures of many kinds; and so the other kinds of quadrupeds stood among the

1 The Daittk river (see Bund. XX, 13).

* This is a misunderstanding of the corresponding phrase in Bund. III, 18. The narcotic here mentioned is usually prepared from the hemp plant, and is well known in India and the neighbouring countries,

§ See Bund. IV, 1.

‘ The word which, as it stands in the MS., looks like h6manfe, is here taken as a transposition of min khvd4e, in accordance with Bund. III, 19; but it may be a variant of anumf4e, ‘embryo,’ in which case the translation should be, ‘forms an embryo into the shape of a man of fifteen years.’

5 Or it may be ‘sleep,’ both here and in § 9.

® See Bund. I, 21. 7 Bund. III, 20.

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, II, 7-IV, I. 163

reptiles ; every approach of the whole earth was as though not as much as a needle’s point remained, in which there was no rush of noxious creatures. 10. There were the coming of a planetary s¢ar into planetary conjunction, and the moon and planets at sixes and sevens!; many dark forms with the face and curls of Az-i Dahak suffered punishment in company with certain non-Iranians; azd he was amazed at calling the wicked out from the righteous.

11. Lastly, he (Aharman) came up to the fire, and mingled darkness and smoke with it 2.

Cuapter III.

11. Lastly, he (Aharman) came up to the fire, and mingled darkness and smoke with it 2.

Cuapter III.

1. And Gésfrvan, as she was herself the soul of the primeval ox, when the ox passed away, came out from the ox, even as the soul from the body of the dead, and kept up the clamour of a cry to Adharmazd in such fashion as that of an army, a thousand strong, when they cry out together*. 2. And Adharmazd, in order to’ be much more able to keep watch over the mingled creatures than in front of GAayémard, went from the earth up to the sky. 3. And Gésfrvan continually went after him crying, and she kept up the cry thus: ‘With whom may the guardianship over the creatures be left by thee?’

» CuapTer IV,

1. This was the highest predominance of Aharman, for he came on, with all the strength which he

1 Literally, ‘in fours and fives.’ * Bund. III, 24. 5 Bund. IV, 2. M 2

164 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

had, for the disfigurement of the creatures; and he took as much as one-third of the base of the sky', in a downward direction, into a confined and captive state, so that it was all dark azd apart from the light, for it was itself, at the coming of the adversary, his enemy among the struggles for creation. 2. And this is opposing the renovation of the universe, for the greatest of all the other means of the fiend, when he das come in, are of like origin and strength this day, in the sleep? of the renovation, as on that when the enemy, who is fettered on coming in, is kept back.

3. Amid all this struggling were mingled the instigations of Aharman, cryzmg thus: ‘My victory has come completely, for the sky is split and disfigured by me with gloom and darkness, and taken by me as a stronghold; water is disfigured by me, and the earth, injured by darkness, is pierced by me; vegetation is withered by me, the ox is put to death by me, Gayémard is made ill by me, and opposed to those revolving* are the glooms and planets arranged by me; no one 4as remained for me to take and pervert in combat except Adharmazd, and of the earth ¢here is only one man, who is alone, what is he able to do?’

4. And he sends Asté-vid4d‘ upon him with the thousand decrepitudes (atizv4r4nd) and diseases

* Compare Bund. III, 11. The involved style of Z4@sparam is particularly conspicuous in this chapter.

* The word seems to be khvapisné.

8 Meaning probably the zodiacal signs, but the word is doubtful, being spelt vardisn4nd instead of vardisnand. A very small alteration would change it into vardéisn4nd, ‘ believers,’ but there were no earthly believers at the time alluded to.

* See Bund. III, 21, and XXVIII, 35.

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, IV, 2-8. 165

A very small alteration would change it into vardéisn4nd, ‘ believers,’ but there were no earthly believers at the time alluded to.

* See Bund. III, 21, and XXVIII, 35.

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, IV, 2-8. 165

which are his own, sicknesses of various kinds, so that they may make him ill avd cause death. 5. GAyémard was not secured by them, and the reason was because it was a decree of appointing Time (z6rv4n6d) in the beginning of the coming in of Aharman, that: ‘Up to thirty winters I appoint Gayémard unto brilliance and preservation of life.’ 6. And his manifestation in the celestial sphere was through the forgiveness of criminals axd instigators of confusion by 42s good works, and for that reason no opportunity was obtained by them during the extent of thirty years.

7. For in the beginning it was so > appointed that the star Jupiter (A tharmazd) was life towards the creatures, not through its own nature, but on account of z¢s being within the control (band) of the luminaries; and Saturn (Kév4n) was death towards the creatures. 8. Both were in their supremacy (b4list)? at the beginning of the crea-

1 These luminaries are the fixed stars, especially the signs of the zodiac, to whose protection the good creation is committed (see Bund. II, o-4); whereas Jupiter and all other planets are supposed to be, by nature, disturbers of the creation, being employed by Aharman for that purpose (see Mkh. VIII, 17-21, XII, 7-10, XXIV, 8, XXXVIII, 5).

% The most obvious meaning of bAlfst is ‘ greatest altitude,’ and this is quite applicable to Jupiter when it attains its highest northern declination on entering Cancer, but it is not applicable to Saturn in Libra, when it has only its mean altitude. At the vernal equinox, however, which was the time of the beginning mentioned in the text, when Aharman invaded the creation (see Chap. II, 1), Libra is in opposition to the sun, and Saturn in Libra would be at its nearest approach to the earth, and would, therefore, attain its maximum brightness; while Jupiter in Cancer would be at its greatest altitude and shining with four-fifths of its maximum brightness. Both planets, therefore, were near their most conspicuous position (which would seem to be the meaning of balist

166 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

Both planets, therefore, were near their most conspicuous position (which would seem to be the meaning of balist

166 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

tures, as Jupiter was in Cancer on rising, that which is also called Givdn (‘living’), for it is the place in which life is bestowed upon it; azd Saturn was in Libra, in the great subterranean, so that its own venom and deadliness decame more evident and more dominant thereby. 9. And it was when both shall not be supreme ¢hat Gayémard was to complete his own life, which is the thirty years? Saturn came not again to supremacy, that is, 40 Libra. 10. And at the time when Saturn came into Libra, Jupiter was in Capricornus*, on account of whose own lowness‘*, and the victory of Saturn over Jupiter, Gayémard suffered through those very defects which came and are to continue advancing, the continuance of that disfigurement which Aharman can bring upon the creatures of Adharmazd.

here), and might each be supposed to be exercising its maximum astrological influence, so that the presumed deadly power of Saturn would be neutralised by the supposed reviving influence of Jupiter.

1 This reading suits the context best, but the name can also be . read Snahan, and in many other ways. It may possibly be the tenth lunar mansion, whose name is read Nahn in Bund. II, 3, by Pazand writers, and which corresponds to the latter part of Cancer.

* Saturn revolves round the sun in about 29 years and 167 days, so it cannot return into opposition to the sun (or to its maximum brightness), at or near the vernal equinox, in less than thirty years.

5 That is, while Saturn performs one revolution round the sun, Jupiter performs two and a half, which is very nearly correct, as Jupiter revolves round the sun in about 11 years and 315 days. Therefore, when the supposed deadly influence of Saturn has returned to its maximum, the supposed reviving influence of Jupiter is at its minimum, owing to the small altitude of Capricornus, and no longer counterbalances the destructive power of Saturn.

‘ There seems to be no other reasonable translation, but the MS. has 14 instead of r4i, and niskasp instead of nistz.

».

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, IV, 9-V, 4. 167

Cuapter V.

‘ There seems to be no other reasonable translation, but the MS. has 14 instead of r4i, and niskasp instead of nistz.

».

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, IV, 9-V, 4. 167

Cuapter V.

1. When in like manner, and equally oppressively, as his (Adharmazd’s) creatures were disfigured, then through that same deterioration his own great glory-~ was exhibited; for as he came within. the sky he | maintains the spirit of the sky, like an intrepid warrior who has put on metal armour’; and the sky in its fortress* spoke these hasty, deceitful words to” Aharman, thus: ‘ Now when thou shalt have come in I wz/Z not let thee back;’ and it obstructed him until Adharmazd prepared another rampart, that is stronger, around the sky, w&zch is called ‘righteous understanding’ (ashék 4k4sih). 2. And he arranged the guardian spirits‘ of the righteous who are warriors around that rampart, mounted on horses and spear in hand, in such manner as the hair on the head; and they acquired the appearance of prison guards who watch a prison from outside, and would not surrender the outer boundaries ¢o an enemy descended from the inside.

3. Immediately, Aharman endeavours that he may go back to his own complete darkness, but he found no passage; and he recapitulated, with seeming misgiving, his fears of the worthiness which is to arise at the appearance of the renovation of the universe at the end of the nine thousand years.

(4. As it is said in the G&thas, thus®: ‘So also

_ 7 See Chap. III, 2. * Compare Bund. VI, 2. * Or ‘zodiacal signs,’ for brg6 means both. * Bund. VI, 3, 4

5 This quotation from the G&athas is from the Pahlavi Yas. XXX, 4, and agrees with the Pahlavi text, given in DastQr Jam-

168 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

both those spirits have approached together unto that which was the first creation—that is, both spirits have come to the ees of GAyémard. Whatmazd, that is: So that I may keep it alive ; whatever is in lifelessness zs so through this purpose? of the evil spirit, that is: So that I may utterly destroy it; and whatever is thus, is so until the last in the world, so that they (both spirits) come also on to the rest of mankind. And on account of the utter depravity of the wicked ¢hey destruction is fully seen, aud so is the perfect meditation of him who is righteous, the hope of the eternity of Attharmazd.’}

5. And this was the first contest 2, hat of the sky with Aharman.

CuaptTer VI,

1. And as he (Aharman) came secondly to the water, together with him rushed in, om the horse Cancer, he who is the most watery Tistar; the equally watery one, that is called Avrak 3, gave forth a cloud azd went down in the day; that is

Aspji’s old MS. of the Yasna in Bombay, very nearly as closely as Spiegel’s edition does. It appears, therefore, that D4d-sparam used the same Pahlavi translation of the Yasna as the Parsis do at the present day.

2 The MS. here omits the words ‘through this purpose,’ by mistake. ;

of the Yasna in Bombay, very nearly as closely as Spiegel’s edition does. It appears, therefore, that D4d-sparam used the same Pahlavi translation of the Yasna as the Parsis do at the present day.

2 The MS. here omits the words ‘through this purpose,’ by mistake. ;

2 The word Ardik, which D4d-sparam uses instead of the kharah, ‘conflict, of Bund. V, 6, VI, 1, &c., may be connected with Pers. ard, ‘ anger.’

* The ninth lunar mansion (see Bund. II, 3, VII, 1).

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, V, 5—VI, 7. 169

declared as the movement of the first-comers of the creatures, 2. Cancer became a zodiacal constellation (akhtar); it is the fourth constellation of thg zodiac for this reason, because the month Tir is the fourth month of the year !.

3. And_as Tistar begged for assistance, Vohtman and Hém.are therefore co-operating with him in command, Birg of the waters and the water in mutual aid, and the righteous guardian spirits in _ keeping the peace. 4. He was converted into three forms, which are the form of a man, the form of a bull, azd the form of a horse; and each form was distinguished i in brilliance for ten nights, and lets its rain fall on the night for the destruction of noxious creatures. 5. The drops became each separately “ike a great bowl in which water is drawn; and as to that on whzch they are driven, they kill all the noxious creatures except the reptiles 2, who entered into the muddiness of the earth, 2...

6. Afterwards, the wind spirit, in the form of a man, became manifest on the earth; radiant avd tall he had a kind of wooden boot (mikvé-aé-i dartn6) on Ais feet ; and as when the life shall stir the body, the body is advancing with like vigour, so that spirit of the wind stirs forth the inner nature of the atmospheric wind, the wind pertaining to the whole earth is forth, and the water in its grasp is flung out from it to the sides of the earth, and its wide-formed ocean arose therefrom.

7. It (the ocean) keeps one-third of this earth 3,

1 Bund. VII, 2-6 is paraphrased in § 2-6.

? Reading neksiind bard min khasandak4nd instead of the MS. barf nasfind min khasandak4na.

3 Compare Bund, XIII, 1, 2.

170 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

and among its contents are a thousand sources and fountains, suchas are called lakes (var); a thousand water-fountains, whose water is from the ocean, come up from the lakes avd are poured forth into it. 8. And the size of some of all the lakes and all the fountains of water is as much as a fast rider on an Arab horse, who continually compasses and canters around ¢hem, will attain in forty days, which ts 1900! long leagues (parasang-i akartk), each league deimg at least 20,000 feet.

8. And the size of some of all the lakes and all the fountains of water is as much as a fast rider on an Arab horse, who continually compasses and canters around ¢hem, will attain in forty days, which ts 1900! long leagues (parasang-i akartk), each league deimg at least 20,000 feet.

g. And after the noxious creatures died *, and the poison therefrom was mixed up in the earth, in order to utterly destroy that poison Tistar went down into the ocean; and Apdadsh,. the demon, hastened to meet him, and aé the alarm of the first contest Tistar was in terror (pard). 10. And he applied unto Adharmazd, who brought such power unto_Tistar #s arises through propitiation and praise and invoking by name’, and they call. forth such power unto Tistar as ¢hat of ten vigorous horses, ten vigorous camels, ten vigorous bulls, ten mountains when hurled, and ten single-stream rivers when together. 11. And without alarm he drove out Apadsh, the demon, and kept him away from the sources of the ocean.

12. And with a cup and measuring bowl, which possessed the diligence even of a guardian spirit (fravahar), he seized many more handfuls of water,

} Bund. XIII, 2 has 1700, but as neither number is a multiple of forty in round numbers, it is probable that both, are wrong, and that we ought to read 1600.

* Bund. VII, 7-14 is paraphrased in §§ 9-14.

® The Av. aokht6-namana yasna of Tistar Yt. 11, 23, 24.

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, VI, 8-17. 171

and made z¢ rain down! much more prodigiously, for destruction, drops as large as men’s heads and bulls’ heads, great and small. 13. And in that cloud and rain were the chastisement azd beating which Tistar and the fire Vazist zz/izcted on the opposition of Ap4ésh; the all-deciding (visp6-vi4tr) fire Vazist struck down with a club of fire, all-deciding -among the malevolent (kébar4n6).

14. Ten days and nights there was rain, and its darting ? was the shooting of the noxious creatures ; afterwards, the wind drove z¢ to the shore of the wide-formed ocean, and it is portioned out into three, and three seas arose from it; they are called the Pditik, the Kamirid, and the Géhan-ban* 15. Of these the Pdittk itself is salt water, in which is a flow azd ebb‘; and the control of its flow and ebb is connected with the moon, and by its continual rotation, in coming up azd going down, that of the moon is manifested. 16. The wide-formed ocean stands forth on the south side as to (pavan) Albfrz 5, and the Pditik stands contiguous to it, and amidst it is the gulf (var) of Satavés, whose connection is with -Satavés, which is the southern quarter. 17. In the activity of the sea, and in the increase and decrease of the moon, whose circuit is the whole of Iran, are the flow and ebb; of the

1 Or perhaps ‘made the cloud rain, if madam v4rAninid stands for avar varaninid.

* Reading part4z instead of the MS. patfitéz, ‘ powerful fury.’

17. In the activity of the sea, and in the increase and decrease of the moon, whose circuit is the whole of Iran, are the flow and ebb; of the

1 Or perhaps ‘made the cloud rain, if madam v4rAninid stands for avar varaninid.

* Reading part4z instead of the MS. patfitéz, ‘ powerful fury.’

* This is a variant of the Sahi-bfn or Gahi-bfin of Bund. XIII, 4,15; the other two names differ but little from those given in Bund. XIII. In the MS. Pfitik occurs once, and Puitik twice.

* Compare §§ 15-18 with Bund. XIII, 8-14.

5 Compare Bund. XIII, 1.

172 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

curving tails in front of the moon two issue forth, and have an abode in Satavés; one is the updrag and one the down-drag; through the up-drag occurs the flood, avd through the down-drag occurs the ebb. 18. And Satavés itself is a gulf (var) and side arm of the wide-formed ocean, for it drives back the impurity azd turbidness which come from the salt sea, when they are continually going into the wide-formed ocean, with a mighty high wind?, while that which is clear through purity goes into the Arédvisir sources of the wide-formed ocean. 19. Besides these four * there are the small seas ‘. 20. And, afterwards, ¢Aere were made to flow from Albfirz, out of its northern border, two rivers®, which were the Arvand *—that is, the Diglit, ad the flow

* This is even a more mechanical theory of the tides than that detailed in Bund. XIII, 13. Whether the ‘ curving tails’ (gagak dunbak) are the ‘horns’ of the crescent moon is uncertain.

* By an accidental transposition of letters the MS. has 4taré, ‘fire,’ instead of v4t6, ‘ wind.’ .

5 The ocean and three principal seas.

* Said to be twenty-three in number in Bund. XIII, 6.

5 Bund. VII, 15, 16, XX, 1. .

* This appears to be a later identification of the Arag, Arang, or Aréng river of Bund. XX with the Tigris, under its name Arvand, which is also found in the Bahman Yast (III, 21, 38) and the Afrin of the Seven Amesh4spends (§ 9). The Bundahis (XX, 8) seems to connect the Arag (Araxes?) with the Oxus and Nile, and describes the Diglat or Tigris as a distinct river (Bund. XX, 12). This difference is one of the indications of the Bundahis having been so old a book in the time of Z4d-sparam that he sometimes misunderstood its meaning, which could hardly have been the case if it had been written by one of his contemporaries. As the Persian empire has several times included part of Egypt, the Nile must have then been well known to the Persians as the great western river of their world. The last time they had possession of part of Egypt was, for about half a century, in the reigns of Khusré

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, VI, 18-VII, I. 173

The last time they had possession of part of Egypt was, for about half a century, in the reigns of Khusré

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, VI, 18-VII, I. 173

of that river was to those of the setting sux (val fréd-yehevund4n6d)—and the Véh! was the river of the first-comers to the sun; formed as two horns they went on to the ocean. 21. After them eighteen? great rivers came out from the same Albdrz; and these twenty rivers, whose source is in Albdrez, go down into the earth, and arrive in Khvaniras.

22. Afterwards, two fountains of the sea are opened out for the earth*, which are called the Kékast*—a lake which has no cold wind, and on whose shore rests the triumphant fire Gdsnasp’— and, secondly, the Sévar ® which casts on z¢s shores all turbidness, and keeps its own salt lake clear and pure, for it is like the semblance of an eye which casts out to zfs edges every ache and every impurity ; and on account of its depth it is not reached to the bottom, for it goes into the ocean; and in its vicinity rests the beneficial fire Barzin-Mitré 7.

23. And this was the second contest, which was with the water.

Cuaprer VII.

1. And as he (Aharman) came thirdly to the earth, which arrayed the whole earth against him—

Néshirvan, AQharmazd IV, and Khusré Parviz; but since the early part of the seventh century the Tigris has practically been their extreme western limit; hence the change of the old Arag or Arang into the very similarly written Arvand, a name of the Tigris. :

1 See Bund. XX, 9. * Bund. XX, 2, 7.

5 Bund. VII, 14. * Bund. XXII, 2.

* Written Gisasp in Bund. XVII, 7, and Gdsndsp in B. Yt. IIT, 30, 40, while the older form Visnasp occurs in B.Yt. III, 10.

* The Sévbar of Bund. VII, 14, XII, 24, XXII, 3.

7 Bund. XVII, 8.

174 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

since there was an animation of the earth through the shattering— Albdrz grew up}, which is the boundary of the earth, avd the other? mountains, which are amid the circuit of the earth, come up 2244 in number*®, 2. And by them the earth was bound together and arranged, and on them was the sprouting avd growth of plants, wherefrom was the nourishment of cattle, and therefrom was the great advantage of assistance to men.

mountains, which are amid the circuit of the earth, come up 2244 in number*®, 2. And by them the earth was bound together and arranged, and on them was the sprouting avd growth of plants, wherefrom was the nourishment of cattle, and therefrom was the great advantage of assistance to men.

3. Even so it is declared that before the coming ‘of the destroyer to the creatures, for a thousand years the substance of mountains was created in the earth—especially as antagonism came on the earth, ‘and settled on z¢ with injury—and it came up over the earth just like a tree whose branch has grown at the top, and its root at the bottom. 4. The root of the mountains is passed on from one to the other, and is arranged in connection weth them, and through it is produced the path and passage of water from below to above, so that the water may flow in it in such manner as blood in the veins, from all parts of the body to the heart, the latent vigour which they possess. 5. And, moreover, in six hundred years‘, at first, all the mountains apart from Albdrz were completed. 6. Albfrz was growing during eight hundred years*; in two hundred years it grew up to

» Bund. VIII, 1-4 is paraphrased in §§ 1-4.

* The MS. has 4v4n6, ‘waters,’ instead of avArfk, ‘other,’ which alters the meaning into, ‘which is the boundary of the waters of the earth, and the mountains,’ &c.

5 Bund. XII, 2.

* Bund. VIII, 5, and XII, 1, have ‘eighteen years.’ As both numbers are written in ciphers it would be easy for either to be corrupted into the other.

5 Bund. XII, 1.

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, VII, 2—I2. 175

the star station, in two hundred years up to the moon station, two hundred years up to the sun Station, azd two hundred years up to the sky. 7. After Albdrz the Aparsén mountain! is the greatest, as it is also called the Avar-réyisn? (‘up-growth’) mountain, whose beginning is in Sagastan and its end unto P&rs and to Kinistan*.

8. This, too, is declared, that after the great rain in the beginning of the creation‘, ad the wind’s sweeping away the water to the ocean, the earth is in seven portions® a little above z¢, as the compact earth, after the rain, is torn up by the noise and wind 7 various places. 9. One portion, moreover, as much as one-half the whole earth, is in the middle, and in each of the six portions around is as much as Sagastaén; moreover, as much as Sagastdn is the measure of what is called a késhvar (‘region’) for the reason that one was defined from the other by a késh (‘furrow’). 10. The middle ove is Khvantiras, of which P4rs is the centre, and those six regions are like a coronet (avitsar) avound zt. 11. One part of the wide-formed ocean wound around it, among those six regions; the sea and forest seized upon the south side, ad a lofty mountain grew up on the north, so that they might become separate, one from the other, azd imperceptible.

12. This is the third contest, about the earth.

? The Ap4rsén of Bund. XII, 9.

12. This is the third contest, about the earth.

? The Ap4rsén of Bund. XII, 9.

* Written Ap@-réyisn, as if it were an Arabic hybrid meaning ‘father of growth.’ ;

> Bund. XII, 9. XXIV, 28, have Khfgtstfn instead of Xinfstén ; the latter appears to be an old name of the territory of Samarkand (see note to Bund. XII, 13).

‘ Literally, ‘creature.’

5 Bund. XI, 2-4 is paraphrased in §§ 8-11.

176 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

Cwraprer VIII.

1. As he (Aharman) came fourthly to the plants— which have struggled (kikhsht-ait5) against him with the whole vegetation—because the vegetation was quite dry !, Amerédad, by whom the essence of the world’s vegetation * was seized upon, pounded it up small, and mixed z¢ up with the rain-water of Tistar. 2. After the rain the whole earth is discerned sprouting, and ten thousand ® special species and a hundred thousand‘ additional species (levatman sardak6) so grew as if there were a species of every kind; and those ten thousand species are provided for > keeping away the ten thousand 3 diseases.

3. Afterwards, the seed was taken up from those hundred thousand species of plants, azd from the collection of seed the tree of all germs, amid the wide-formed ocean, was produced, from which all species of plants continually grow. 4. And the griffon bird (séné mdrdvd) has his resting-place upon it; when he wanders forth from within it, he scatters the dry seed into the water, avd it is rained back to the earth with the rain.

5. And in its vicinity the tree was produced which

2s the white Hém, the counteractor of decrepitude,

1 This chapter is a paraphrase of Bund. IX.

* Or, perhaps, ‘the worldly characteristics of vegetation.’

Ix Written like ‘one thousand,’ but see the context and Bund.

» 4

‘In Bund. IX, 4, the MSS. have ‘120,000,’ which is probably wrong, as Bund. XXVII, 2, agrees with the text above.

5 The MS. has bar4 instead of pavan, a blunder due probably to some copyist reading the Huzvaris in Persian, in which language bih (= bara) and bah (= pavan) are written alike. In Pézand they are usually written be and pa, respectively.

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, VIII, I-IX, 2. 177

the reviver of the dead, avd the immortalizer of the living. 6. This was the fourth contest, about the plants.

CuapTer IX.

1. As he (Aharman) came fifthly to cattle—which struggled against him with all the animals—and likewise as the primeval ox! passed away, from the nature of the vegetable principle it possessed, fiftyfive* species of grain and twelve species of medicinal plants grew from z¢s various members; and forasmuch as they should see from which member each one froceeds, it is declared in the Damdéd Nask*, 2, And every plant grown from a member

1 See Chaps. II, 6, III, 1, and Bund. IV, 1, X, 1, XIV, 1.

2 The MS. has ‘fifty-seven’ in ciphers, but Bund. X, 1, XIV, 1, XXVII, 2, have ‘ fifty-five’ in words.

II, 6, III, 1, and Bund. IV, 1, X, 1, XIV, 1.

2 The MS. has ‘fifty-seven’ in ciphers, but Bund. X, 1, XIV, 1, XXVII, 2, have ‘ fifty-five’ in words.

5 This was the fourth nask or ‘book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard, which gives a very short and superficial account of its contents. But, according to the Dinf-vagarkard and the Rivayats of Kamah Bahrah, Narfman Héshang, and Barzi Qiy4mu-d-din, it was the fifth nask, and was called Dv4zdah-hamAst (or homast). For its contents, as given by the Dini-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, p. 127. The Rivayat of K4mah Bahrah, which has a few more words than the other Rivayats, gives the following account (for the Persian text of which, see ‘Fragmens relatifs & la religion de Zoroastre,’ par Olshausen et Jules Mohl) :-—

“Of the fifth the name is Dvazdah-homést, and the interpretation of this is “the book about help” (dar imdAd, but this is probably a corruption of ddmd4d). And this book has thirty-two sections (kardah) that the divine and omnipotent creator sent down, in remembrance of the beginning of the creatures of the superior world and inferior world, and #¥# 7s a description of the whole of them and of that which God, the most holy and omnipotent, mentioned about the sky, earth, and water, vegetation and

(5) N

178 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

promotes that member, as it is said that there where the ox scattered zés marrow! on to the earth, grain afterwards grew up, corn? and sesame, vetches* and peas; So sesame, on account of‘ z¢s marrow quality, is itself a great thing for developing marrow. 3. And it is also said that from the blood is the vine’, a great vegetable thing—as wine itself is blood— for more befriending the sound quality of the blood. 4. And it is said that from the nose is the pulse (m4ys or mAsah) which is called d6énak, and was a variety of sesame (sama g4)®, and zt ts for other noses.

fire, man and quadrupeds, grazing and flying a#:mals, and what he produced for their advantage and use, and the like. Secondly, the resurrection and /eavenly path, the gathering and dispersion, and the nature of the circumstances of the resurrection, as regards the virtuous and evil-doers, through the weight of every action they perform for good and evil.’

Secondly, the resurrection and /eavenly path, the gathering and dispersion, and the nature of the circumstances of the resurrection, as regards the virtuous and evil-doers, through the weight of every action they perform for good and evil.’

This description corresponds very closely with what the Bundahis must have been, before the addition of the genealogical and chronological chapters at the end; and D4d-sparam mentions in his text here, and again in § 16, particulars regarding the Damd&d which also occur in the Bundahis (XIV, 2, 14-18, 21-24). There can be very little doubt, therefore, that the Bundahis was originally a translation of the Démdad, though probably abridged; and the text translated in this volume is certainly a further abridgment of the original Bundahis, or Zand-4k4s. Whether the Avesta text of the Damdad was still in existence in the time of Dad-sparam is uncertain, as he would apply the name to the Pahlavi text. At the present time it is very unusual for a copyist to write the Pahlavi text without its Avesta, when the latter exists, but this may not always have been the case.

? Or ‘brains.’

2 Supposing the MS. galdélag is a corruption of gallak (Pers. ghallah).

> Assuming the MS. alfiné or arvanéd to be a corruption of alfim or arsand.

“ Reading raf instead of 14. 5 Compare Bund. XIV, 2.

* Either this sentence is very corrupt in the MS. or it cannot be

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, IX, 3-10. 179

5. And it is also said that from the lungs are the ruelike herbs! whzch heal, and are for the lung-disease of cattle. 6. This, rooted amid the heart, is thyme, from which is Vohiman’s thorough withstanding of the stench of Akéman’, and z¢ zs for that which proceeds from the sick and yawners.

7. Afterwards, the brilliance of the seed, seized upon, by strength, from the seed whzck was the ox’s, they would carry of from it, ad the brilliance was intrusted to the angel of the moon’; in a place therein that seed was thoroughly purified by the light of the moon, and was restored in its many qualities, and made fully infused with life (g4nvarhémand). 8. Forth from there it produced for Atran-vég, first, two oxen, a pair, male and female‘, and, afterwards, other species, until the completion of the 282 species’; and they were discernible as far as two long leagues om the earth. 9. Quadrupeds walked forth on the land, fish swam in the water, and birds flew zz the atmosphere; zz every two, at the time good eating is enjoyed, a longing (4vdah4n) arose therefrom, and pregnancy and birth.

10. Secondly, their subdivision is thus :—First, they are divided into three, that is, quadrupeds walking on the earth, fish swimming in the water,

reconciled with the corresponding clause of Bund. XIV, 2. Altering dénak and gfinak into gandanak, and samagé into samasdar, we might read, ‘from the nose is m4ys, which is called the leek, and the leek was an onion;’ but this is doubtful, and leaves the word m4ys unexplained.

XIV, 2. Altering dénak and gfinak into gandanak, and samagé into samasdar, we might read, ‘from the nose is m4ys, which is called the leek, and the leek was an onion;’ but this is doubtful, and leaves the word m4ys unexplained.

1 The MS. has géspend&né, ‘cattle,’ instead of sipandand, ‘rue herbs.’ .

* See Bund. I, 24, 27, XXVIII, 7, XXX, ag.

® Bund. X, 2, XIV, 3. 4 Bund. X, 3, XIV, 4.

5 Bund. X, 3, XIV, 13.

180 _ APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

and birds flying in the atmosphere. 11. Then, into five classes}, that is, the quadruped which is roundhoofed, the double-hoofed, the: five-clawed, the bird, and the fish, whose dwellings are in five places, and which are called aquatic, burrowing, oviparous, widetravelling, and suitable for grazing. 12. The aquatic are fish and every beast of burden, cattle, wild beast, dog, and bird which enters the water; the burrowing are the marten (samfr) and musk anzmals, and all other dwellers and movers in holes; the oviparous are birds of every kind; the widetravelling sprang away for help, and are also those of a like kind; those suitable for grazing are whatever are kept grazing in a flock.

13. And, afterwards, they were divided into genera, as the round-hoofed are one, which is all called ‘horse ;’ the double-hoofed are many, as the camel and ox, the sheep and goat, and others double-hoofed; the five-clawed are the dog, hare, musk animals, marten, avd others; then are the birds, and then the fish. 14. And then they were divided into species *, as eight species of horse, two species of camel, ten® species of ox, five species of sheep, five species of goat, ten of the dog, five of the hare, eight of the marten, eight of the musk azzmals, 110 of the birds, and ten of the fish; some are counted for the pigs, and with all those declared and all those undeclared ¢here were, at first, 282 species *; and with the species within species there were a thousand varieties.

1 Bund. XIV, 8-12.

2 Bund. XIV, 13-23, 26, 27.

® Bund. XIV, 17 says ‘fifteen,’ which is probably correct. * Only 181 species are detailed or ‘ declared’ here,

SELECTIONS OF ZAL-SPARAM, IX, II-I9. 181

15. The birds are distributed? into eight groups (rtstak5), and from that which is largest to that which is smallest ¢hey are so spread about as when a man, who is sowing grain, first scatters abroad ¢hat of heavy weight, then that which is middling, and afterwards that which is small.

181

16. And of the whole of the species, as enumerated a second time in the Damdéd Nask?, and written by me in the manuscript (niptk) of ‘the summary enumeration of races?’—this is a lordly‘ summary—the matter which is shown is, about the species of horses, the first is the Arab, and the chief of them® is white and yellow-eared, and secondly the Persian, the mule, the ass, the wild ass, the water-horse, avd others. 17. Of the camel there are specially two, ‘hat for the plain, amd the mountain one which is double-humped. 18. Among the species of ox are the white, mud-coloured, red, yellow, black, and dappled, the elk, the buffalo, the camel-leopard®, the ox-fish, avd others. 19. Among sheep are those having tails and those which are tailless, also the wether and the Kairisk which, because of its trampling the hills, zés great horn, and also being suitable

1 Bund. XIV, 25.

® See § 1; the particulars which follow are also found in Bund. XIV, 14-18, 21-24, showing that the Bundahis must be derived from the Damdad.

’ The title of this work, in Pahlavi, is Tékhm-afismarisnith-i hangardiké, but it is not known to be extant.

* Reading mar4k (Chaldee 87), but this is doubtful, though the Iranian final k is often added to Semitic Huzv4ris forms ending with 4. It may be min&4k, ‘thinking, thoughtful,’ or a corruption of mantk, ‘mine,’ in which last case we should translate, ‘ this is a summary of mine.’

5 Bund. XXIV, 6.

® Literally, ‘camel-ox-leopard.’

182 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

for ambling, became the steed of Mandséthar. 20. Among goats are the ass-goat, the Arab, the fawn (varikd), the roe, and the mountain goat. 21. Among martens are the white ermine, the black marten, the squirrel, the beaver (khaz), and others. 22. Of musk anzmals with a bag, one is the Bishmusk—which eats the Bish poison and does not die through it, and it is created for the great advantage that it should eat the Bish, avd less of z¢ should succeed in poisoning the creatures—and one is a musk animal of a black colour which they desired (ayfiftS) who were bitten dy the fanged serpent— as the serpent of the mountain water-courses (mak) is called—which is numerous on the river-banks; one throws the same unto it for food, which it eats, and then the serpent enters its body, when his} serpent, at the time ¢izs happens, feeds upon the same belly in which the serpent is, and he will become clear from that malady. 23. Among birds two were produced of a different character from the rest, and those are the griffon bird and the bat, which have teeth zz the mouth, avd suckle ther young with animal milk from the teat. 24. This is the fifth contest, as to animals.

CuaprTer X,

23. Among birds two were produced of a different character from the rest, and those are the griffon bird and the bat, which have teeth zz the mouth, avd suckle ther young with animal milk from the teat. 24. This is the fifth contest, as to animals.

CuaprTer X,

1. As he (Aharman) came sixthly #o Gayémard there was arrayed against /zm, with Gayémard, the

1 This appears to be the meaning here of amat zak garsaké, but the whole sentence is a fair sample of D4d-sparam’s most involved style of writing. By feeding the black musk animal with snakes the effect of a snake-bite, experienced by the feeder, is supposed to be neutralized.

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, IX, 20-X, 5. 183

pure propitious liturgy (mansarspend), as heard from Gayémard; and Atharmazd, in pure meditation, considered that which is good and righteousness as destruction of the fiend (draig6). 2. And when he (Gdyémard) passed away eight kinds of mineral of a metallic character arose from zs various members; they are gold, silver, iron, brass, tin, lead, quicksilver (€vginak6), and adamant; and on account of the perfection of gold it is produced from the life and seed.

3. Spendarmad received the gold of the dead G4éydémard?, and it was forty years in the earth. 4. At the end of the forty years, zz the manner of a Rivaslant, Mashya and Mashyét? came up, and, one joined to the other, were of like stature and mutually adapted’; and its middle, on which a glory came, through their like stature‘, was such that it was not clear which is the male and which the female, and which is the one with the glory which Atharmazd created. 5. This is that glory for which man is, indeed, created, as it is thus said in revela-

1 Compare Bund. XV, 1.

* The MS. has Mash&t Mash4yé, but see Bund. XV, 6. The Avesta forms were probably mashya mashy di (or mashyé6), which are regular nominatives dual, masculine and feminine, of mashya, ‘mortal,’ and indicate that they were usually coupled together in some part of the Avesta which is no longer extant. PAzand writers have found it easy to read Mashyanf instead of Mashyédf.

5 Reading ham-basnd ham-dakhik, but whether this is more likely to be the original reading than the ham-badisn va hamdasak of Bund. XV, 2, is doubtful. The last epithet here might also be read ham-sabik, ‘having the same shirt,’ but this is an improbable meaning.

* It is evident that ham-bandisnth, ‘mutual connection,’ in accordance with Bund. XV, 3, would be preferable to the hambasndth, ‘like stature,’ of this text.

184 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

tion: ‘Which existed before, the glory’ or the body?’ And Adharmazd spoke thus: ‘The glory was created by me before ; afterwards, for him who is created, the glory is given a body so that it may produce activity, and its body is created only for activity. 6. And, afterwards, they changed from the shape of a plant into the shape of man?, ad the glory went spiritually into them.

CuartTer XI.

6. And, afterwards, they changed from the shape of a plant into the shape of man?, ad the glory went spiritually into them.

CuartTer XI.

1. As he (Aharman) came seventhly to fire, which was all together agaznst him, the fire separated into five kinds*, which are called the Propitious, the Good diffuser, the Adrv4ztst, the VAzist, azd the Supremely-denefiteng. 2. And it produced the Propitious fire itself in heaven (garédm4n); its manifestation is in the fire which is burning on the earth, and its propitiousness is this, that all the kinds are of its nature. 3. Zhe Good diffuser is that which is in men and animals‘, and its business comsists in the digestion of the food, the sleeping of the

1 The old word nismé, ‘soul’ (see Bund. XV, 3, 4), has become corrupted here (by the omission of the initial stroke) into gadman, ‘glory.’ This corruption may be due either to Dad-sparam not understanding the word (in which case the Bundahis must have been an old book in his time), or else to some later copyist confounding the old word for ‘soul’ with the better-known ‘glory’ of the Iranian sovereigns.

* Bund. XV, 5.

§ Bund. XVII, 1. Three of the Avesta names are here translated, the first two being the Spénist and Vohu-fryaén, which are the fifth and second in the Bundahis, and the fifth being the Berezisavang, which is the first in the Bundahis.

* See Bund. XVII, 2.

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, X, 6-XI, 7. 185

body, aad the brightening of the eyes. 4. The A frvaztst is that which is in plants, in whose seed z¢ is formed, and its business comszs¢s in piercing the earth, warming the chilled water! and producing the qualities and fragrance of plants and blossoms therefrom, and elaborating the ripened produce into many fruits. 5. And the Vazist is that which has its motion in a cloud, and its business comszs¢s in destroying the atmospheric gloom and darkness, and making the thickness of the atmosphere fine and propitious in quality, sifting the hail, moderately warming the water which the cloud holds, and making sultry weather showery. 6. The Supremelybenefiting, like the sky, is that glory whose lodgment is in the Behrd4m fire?, as the master of the house is over the house, axa whose propitious power arises from the growing brightness of the fire, the blazing forth in* the purity of the place, the praise of God (yazd4n$), and the practice of good works. 7. And its business is ¢haé it struggles with the spiritual fiend, it watches the forms of the witches—who walk up from the river‘, wear woven clothing, disturb the luminaries by the concealment of stench, avd by witchcraft injure the creatures— and the occurrences of destruction, burning, and celebration of witchcraft, especially at night; being an assistant of Srésh the righteous.

1 Reading may4-i afsardtntdd tAftand instead of the seemingly unmeaning mayé4 asardinid6 4ftand of the MS,

8 The Verehrand 4tAsh, or sacred fire of the fire-temples.

* Reading pavan instead of bar4 (see p. 176, note 5).

1 Reading may4-i afsardtntdd tAftand instead of the seemingly unmeaning mayé4 asardinid6 4ftand of the MS,

8 The Verehrand 4tAsh, or sacred fire of the fire-temples.

* Reading pavan instead of bar4 (see p. 176, note 5).

* Or ‘sea’ (darfy4vd). This long-winded sentence is more involved and obscure in the original than in the translation,

186 APPENDIX TO THE BUNDAHIS.

8. And in the beginning of the creation’ the whole earth was delivered over into the guardianship of the sublime Frébak fire, the mighty Gdsnasp fire, and the beneficial Barzin-Mitré fire 2, whzch are like priest, warrior, and husbandman. 9. The place of the fire Frébak was formed om the Gadman-hémand (‘glorious’) mountain in Khvdrizem’, the fire Gdsnasp was on the Asnavand mountain in Atar6-patak4n, and the fire Birzin-Mitré on the Révand mountain which is in the Ridge of Vist4sp, and its material manifestation in the world was the most complete.

10. In the reign of Héshang‘, when men were continually going forth to the other regions (késhvar) on the ox Srfvé®, one night, half-way, while admiring the fires, the fire-stands which were prepared in three places on the back of the ox, avd in which the fire was, fell into the sea, and the substance of that one great fire whch was manifest, is divided into three, and they established z¢ on the three fire-stands, and it became itself three glories whose lodgments are in the Frébak fire, the Gisnasp fire, and the Barztn-Mitré *.

1 Literally, ‘ creature.’

3 The epithets of these three sacred fires are, respectively, varg4n, tagtké, and pfir-sQid6 in Pahlavi.

® See Bund. XVII, 5, 7, 8.

‘ Bund. XVII, 4 says, ‘in the reign of Takhmérup,’ his successor.

5 Sarsaok or Srisaok in the Bundahis.

* The remainder of ‘the sayings of Z4d-sparam, about the meeting of the beneficent spirit and the evil spirit,’ have no special reference to the Bundahis. They treat of the following matters :—

The coming of the religion, beginning in the time of Frésty4év and M4nfistihar, with an anecdote of K4f-Qs and the hero Srit6 (Av. Thrita). The manifestation of the glory of Zaratist

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, XI, 8-10. 187

They treat of the following matters :—

The coming of the religion, beginning in the time of Frésty4év and M4nfistihar, with an anecdote of K4f-Qs and the hero Srit6 (Av. Thrita). The manifestation of the glory of Zaratist

SELECTIONS OF ZAD-SPARAM, XI, 8-10. 187

before his birth. The begetting of Zaratist through the drinking of hém-juice and cow’s milk infused, respectively, with his guardian spirit and glory, as declared in the manuscript on ‘the guidance of worship.’ The connection of Zaratst with A@harmazd, traced back through his genealogy as far as Gayémard. The persistent endeavours of the fiends to destroy Zarattist at the time of his birth, and how they were frustrated. His receiving the religion from Aftharmazd, with another anecdote of K4i-fs and Srit6, and of Zaratfist’s exclamation on coming into the world. The enmity borne to him by five brothers of the Karap4n family, and how it was frustrated; his own four brothers, and some of his wonderful deeds. The worthiness of his righteousness; his compassionate and liberal nature; his giving up worldly desires; his pity; his good selection of a wife; and what is most edifying for the soul. What occurred when he was thirty years old, and his being conducted by the archangel Vohfiman to the assembly of the spirits. The questions asked by Zarat(st, and Afharmazd’s replies thereto. The seven questions he asked of the seven archangels in seven different places, in the course of one winter. [Westergaard’s MS. K35 ends in the middle of the second of these questions.] The five dispositions of priests, and the ten admonitions. The three preservatives of religion, with particulars about the Gathas and the connection of the Ahunavar with the Nasks. Zaratfist’s obtaining one disciple, Médyék-m4h, in the first ten years, and the acceptance of the religion by Vist&sp two years afterwards.

The second of the writings of Z4d-sparam consists of his ‘ sayings about the formation of men out of body, life, and soul ;’ and the third (which is imperfect in all known MSS.) contains his ‘sayings about producing the renovation of the universe.’

Digitized by Google

BAHMAN YAST,

OR. ZAND-I VOHUMAN YASNO,

OF WHICH ZAND, OR COMMENTARY,

THIS WORK SEEMS TO BE AN EPITOME.

OBSERVATIONS.

1-5. (The same as on p. 2.)

6. Abbreviations used are:—Av. for Avesta. Bund. for Bundahis, as translated in this volume. Dé&d. for D&distan-i Dinfk. Gr. for Greek. Haug’s Essays, for Essays on the Sacred Language, Writings, and Religion of the Parsis, by Martin Haug, 2nd edition. Huz. for Huzv4ris. Pahl. for Pahlavi. Paz. for Pazand. Pers. . for Persian. Sans. for Sanskrit. Sls. for Shayast 14-shyast, as translated in this volume. SZS. for Selections of Z4d-sparam, as translated in this volume. Vend. for Vendidad, ed. Spiegel. Yas. for Yasna, ed. Spiegel. Yt. for Yast, ed. Westergaard.

4. The manuscripts mentioned in the notes are :—

K2o (about goo years old), No. 20 in the University Library at Kopenhagen.

SZS. for Selections of Z4d-sparam, as translated in this volume. Vend. for Vendidad, ed. Spiegel. Yas. for Yasna, ed. Spiegel. Yt. for Yast, ed. Westergaard.

4. The manuscripts mentioned in the notes are :—

K2o (about goo years old), No. 20 in the University Library at Kopenhagen.

P4z. MSS. (modern), No. 22 of the Haug Collection in the State Library at Munich, and a copy of one in the library of the highpriest of the Parsis at Bombay.

Pers. version (composed a.p. 1496, copied A.D. 1679) in a Rivayat MS., No. 29 of the University Library at Bombay.

BAHMAN YAST.

CuaptTer I.

o. May the gratification of the creator Adharmazd, the beneficent, the developer, the splendid, and glorious, and the benediction of the archangels, which constitute the pure, good religion of the Mazdayasnians, de vigour of body, long life, and prosperous wealth for him whose writing I am}.

1. As? it is declared by the Stddgar Vask® that

Or, possibly, ‘for whom I am written,’ the meaning of mfin yektibfinfhém being not quite clear. In fact, the construction of the whole of this initial benediction is rather obscure.

* It is possible that this is to be read in connection with Chap. II, 1, with the meaning that ‘as it is declared by the Sthdgar Mask that Zaratist asked for immortality from Aftharmazd, so in the Vohfiman Yast commentary it is declared that he asked for it a second time.’ This introductory chapter is altogether omitted in both the Paz. MSS. which have been examined, but it is given in the Pers. version. It is also omitted in the epitome of the Bahman Yast contained in the Dabist&n (see Shea’s translation, vol. i. pp. 264-271).

5 This was the first nask or ‘book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard, which calls it SAdkar; but according to the Dinf-vagarkard and the Rivayats it was the second nask, called StQdgar or IstQdgar. For its contents, as given by the Dint-vagarkard (which agrees with the account in the Rivdyats), see Haug’s Essays, p. 126. In the Dinkard, besides a short description of this Nask, given in the eighth book, there is also a detailed account of the contents of each of its fargards, or chapters, occupying twenty-five quarto pages of twenty-two lines each, in the ninth book. From this detailed statement it appears

192 BAHMAN YAST.

Zaratist asked for immortality from Adharmazd, then Adharmazd displayed the omniscient wisdom to Zaratdst, and through it he beheld the root of a tree, on which were four branches, one golden, one of silver, one of steel, and one was mixed up with iron. 2. Thereupon he reflected in this way, that this was seen in a dream, and when he arose from sleep ZaratQst spoke thus: ‘Lord of the spirits and earthly existences! it appears that I saw the root of ‘a tree, on which were four branches.’

3. Adharmazd spoke to Zaratdst the Spitaém4n!? thus: ‘That root of a tree which thou sawest, and those four branches, are the four periods which wd/

it appears that I saw the root of ‘a tree, on which were four branches.’

3. Adharmazd spoke to Zaratdst the Spitaém4n!? thus: ‘That root of a tree which thou sawest, and those four branches, are the four periods which wd/

that the passage mentioned here, in the text, constituted the seventh fargard of the Nask, the contents of which are detailed as follows :—

‘The seventh fargard, Ta-ve-raté (Av. t@ ve urvat4, Yas. XXXI, 1), is about the exhibition to Zaratfist of the nature of the four periods in the Zaratfistian millennium (hazangr6k zim, “thousand winters”). First, the golden, that in which Afharmazd displayed the religion to Zaratfist. Second, the silver, that in which Vistasp received the religion from ZaratQst. Third, the steel, the period within which the organizer of righteousness, Ataré-pad son of Marspend, was born. Fourth, the period mingled with iron is this, in which is much propagation of the authority of the apostate and other villains (sarftar4nd), along with destruction of the reign of religion, the weakening of every kind of goodness and virtue, and the departure of honour amd wisdom from the countries of Tran. In the same period is a recital of the many perplexities and torments of the period for that desire (girAyth) of the life of the good which consists in seemliness. Perfect is the excellence of righteousness (Av. ashem vohf@i vahistem astf, Yas. XXVII, 14, W.).

If this be a correct account of the contents of this fargard, the writer was evidently consulting a Pahlavi version of the Nask, composed during the later Sasanian times.

1 Generally understood to mean ‘ descendant of Spitama,’ who was his ancestor in the ninth generation (see Bund. XXXII, 1).

CHAPTER I, 2-6. 193

come. 4. That of gold is when I and thou converse, and King VistAsp shall accept the religion, and shall demolish the figures of the demons, du¢ they ¢hemselves remain for! . . . concealed proceedings. 5. And that of silver is the reign of Ardakhshir? the Kayan king (Kat shah), and that

of. steel is the reign of the glerified (anédshak-* cw

riban) Khdsré son of Kévad?, and that which was mixed-with iron is the evil sovereignty of the demons with dishevelled hair‘ of the race of Wrath 5,

and when it is the end of the tenth hundredth v

winter (sat6é zim) of thy millennium, O Zaratdst the Spit&éman!’

6. It is declared in the commentary (zand)® of the Vohiman Yast, Horvadad Yast, and Astad Yast

? A word is lost here in K20 and does not occur in the other copies and versions, nor can it be supplied from the similar phrase in Chap. II, 16. The meaning of the sentence appears to be that Vistasp destroyed the idols, but the demons they represented still remained, in a spiritual state, to produce evil.

® See Chap. II, 17.

* Khusr6é Néshirvan son of Qub4d, in modern Persian, who reigned in a.p. 531-579. Kév4d is usually written Kavad.

The meaning of the sentence appears to be that Vistasp destroyed the idols, but the demons they represented still remained, in a spiritual state, to produce evil.

® See Chap. II, 17.

* Khusr6é Néshirvan son of Qub4d, in modern Persian, who reigned in a.p. 531-579. Kév4d is usually written Kavad.

‘ The epithet vig4rd-vars may also mean ‘dressed-hair,’ but the term in the text is the more probable, as the Persian version translates it by kush4dah mui, ‘ uncovered hair.’ That it is not a name, as assumed by Spiegel, appears clearly from the further details given in Chap. II, 25.

* Or, ‘the progeny of Aéshm,’ the demon. Wrath is not to be understood here in its abstract sense, but is personified as a demon. It is uncertain whether the remainder of this sentence belongs to this § or the next.

* If there were any doubt about zand meaning the Pahlavi translation, this passage would be important, as the Avesta of the Horvadad (Khord4d) and Astéd Yasts is still extant, but contains nothing about the heretic Mazdik or Mazdak (see Chap. II, 21). No Avesta of the Vohfiman Yast is now known.

[5] o

194 BAHMAN YAST.

that, during this time, the accursed Mazdik son of Bamdad, who is opposed to the religion, comes into notice, and is to cause disturbance among those in the religion of God (yazd4n). 7. And he, the glorified oze!, summoned Khisré son of M&h-dad and Dad-Adharmazd of Nishapfr, who were highpriests of Ataré-patak4n, and Ataré-frébag the undeceitful (akadb4), Atar6-pid, Atard-Mitr6, and Bakht-Afrid to A’s presence, and he demanded of them a promise’, thus: ‘Do not keep these Yasts in concealment, azd do not teach the commentary except among your relations®.’ 8. Azd they made the promise unto Khdasré.

Cuapter II.

1. In the Vohiman Yast commentary (zand) it is declared‘ that Zaratdst asked for immortality from

1 That is, Khusr6 Néshirvin. As the names of his priests and councillors stand in K2o they can hardly be otherwise distributed than they are in the text, but the correctness of the MS. is open to suspicion. D&d-Aflharmazd was a commentator who is quoted in Chap. III, 16, and in the Pahl. Yas. XI, 22; Atar6-frébag was another commentator mentioned in Sls. I, 3; and Ataré-p4d and Bakht-afrid are names well known in Pahlavi literature, the former having been borne by more than one individual (see Sls. I, 3, 4).

* The Pers. version says nothing about this promise, but states that Khfisr6 sent a message to the accursed Mazdak, requiring him to reply to the questions of this priestly assembly on pain of death, to which he assented, and he was asked ten religious questions, but was unable to answer one; so the king put him to death immediately.

* A similar prohibition, addressed to Zaratfist, as regards the Avesta text, is actually found in the Horvadad Yt. 10.

* This seems to imply that this text is not the commentary

CHAPTER I, 7—II, 3. 195

* A similar prohibition, addressed to Zaratfist, as regards the Avesta text, is actually found in the Horvadad Yt. 10.

* This seems to imply that this text is not the commentary

CHAPTER I, 7—II, 3. 195

Atharmazd a second time, ad spoke thus: ‘I am Zaratist, more righteous and more efficient among these thy creatures, O creator! when ‘hou shalt make me* immortal, as the tree opposed to harm ?, and Gépatshah, Gést-i Fry4n, azd Kitrdk-miydn son of Vistisp, who is Péshyétani, were made*®. 2. When thou shalt make me immortal they in thy good religion wz// believe that the upholder of religion, who receives from Afharmazd his pure and good religion of the Mazdayasnians, will become immortal ; then those men wll believe in thy good religion.’

3. Adharmazd spoke! thus: ‘When I shall make thee immortal, O Zaratfst the SpitamAn! then Tar-i Bradarvash the Karap® will become immortal, and

itself, but merely an epitome of it. The Paz. MSS. which have been examined, begin with this chapter.

1 Or, ‘when I shall decome,;’ the verb is omitted by mistake in Kao.

2 Three of these immortals are mentioned in Bund. XXIX, 5, and Gést-i Frydn is included in a similar enumeration in D&d. (Reply 89). The tale of Gést-i Fryan (Av. Y6ist6 yé Fryananim, of Abfn Yt. 81 and Fravardin Yt. 120) has been published with ‘The Book of Ard4-VirAf,’ ed. Hoshangji and Haug.

8 Or, ‘ became ;’ most of this verb is torn off in K2o.

‘ The verb is placed before its nominative in the Pahlavi text, both here and in most similar sentences, which is an imitation of the Avesta, due probably to the text being originally translated from an Avesta book now lost, or, at any rate, to its author’s wish that it might appear to be so translated. In such cases of inverted construction, when the verb is in a past tense, the Pahlavi idiom often requires a pronominal suffix, corresponding to the nominative, to be added to the first word in the sentence; thus, gift6s Adharmazd, or afas gift Aflharmazd, does not mean ‘ Aftharmazd spoke to him (or said it),’ but merely ‘Afharmazd spoke’ (lit. ‘it was said by him, AGharmazd’).

5 According to an untranslated passage in the Selections of Zad-sparam, mentioned in the note on p. 187, this is the name of

O 2

196 BAHMAN YAST.

when Tfr-i Bradarvash the Karap shall become immortal the resurrection avd future existence are not possible.’

4. Zaratdst seemed uneasy about z¢ in Azs mind’; and Adharmazd, through the wisdom of omniscience, knew what was thought by Zaratdst the Spitaman with the righteous spirit, and he? took hold of Zaratist’s hand. 5. And he, Afharmazd the propitious spirit, creator of the material world, the righteous ove, even he put the omniscient wisdom, in the shape of water, on the hand of Zaratdst, and said to him thus: ‘ Devour it.’

took hold of Zaratist’s hand. 5. And he, Afharmazd the propitious spirit, creator of the material world, the righteous ove, even he put the omniscient wisdom, in the shape of water, on the hand of Zaratdst, and said to him thus: ‘ Devour it.’

one of the five brothers in the Karap4n family of sorcerers, who were enemies of Zaratfist during his childhood. Their names, as written in SZS., may be read as follows, ‘Bradarvakhsh, Bradréyisné, Tr Bragrésh, Az4nd, and Nasm,’ and the first is also called‘ T@r-i Bradarvakhsh ;’ they are described as descendants of the sister of Manfiséthar. In the seventh book of the Dinkard a wizard, who endeavours to injure Zaratfist in his childhood, is called ‘ Tfr-i Bradr6k-résh, the Karapéd,’ and was probably the third brother, whose name (thus corrected) indicates brathr6-raésha as its Avesta form. Karap or Karap4n in all these passages is evidently the name of a family or caste, probably the Av. karapané which Haug translates by ‘ performers of (idolatrous) sacrificial rites,’ in connection with Sans. kalpa, ‘ceremonial ritual’ (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 289-291).

1 K2o has ‘among the spirits ;’ the word minisn having become mainék4n by ‘the insertion of an extra stroke.

* Reading afas instead of minas (Huz. of agas, ‘from or by him,’ which is written with the same letters as afas, ‘and by him’), not only here, but also in §§ 5, 7,9. The copyist of K2o was evidently not aware that afas is a conjunctive form, but confounded it with the prepositional form agas, as most Parsis and some European scholars do still. The Sasanian inscriptions confirm the reading afas for the conjunctive form; and Nérydsang, the learned Parsi translator of Pahlavi texts into Pazand and Sanskrit some four centuries ago, was aware of the difference between the two forms, as he transcribes them correctly into Paz. vas and azas.

CHAPTER II, 4-12. 197

6. And Zaratdst devoured some of it; thereby the omniscient wisdom was intermingled with Zaratdst, and seven days and nights Zaratist was in the wisdom of Adharmazd. 7. And Zarat(st beheld the men and cattle in the seven regions of the earth, where the many fibres of hair of every one are, and whereunto the end of each fibre holds on the back. 8. And he beheld whatever trees and shrubs ¢here were, and how many roots of plants were in the earth of Spendarmad, where and how they had grown, and where they were mingled.

g. And the seventh day and night he (Atharmazd) took back the omniscient wisdom from Zaratist, and Zaratdst reflected in this way, that I have seen z¢ in a pleasant dream produced by Adharmazd, azd I am not surfeited with the dream. 1o. And he took both hands, rubbed his body (kerp) again, axd spoke: thus: ‘I have slept a long time, avd am not surfeited with this pleasant dream produced by Atharmazd.’

11. Adharmazd said to the righteous Zaratist thus: ‘What was seen in the pleasant dream produced by Afharmazd ?’

1o. And he took both hands, rubbed his body (kerp) again, axd spoke: thus: ‘I have slept a long time, avd am not surfeited with this pleasant dream produced by Atharmazd.’

11. Adharmazd said to the righteous Zaratist thus: ‘What was seen in the pleasant dream produced by Afharmazd ?’

12. Zarattist spoke thus: ‘O Afharmazd, propitious spirit! creator of the material world, righteous creator! I have seen a celebrity (khunid) with much wealth, whose soul, infamous in the body, was hungry (gurs)? and jaundiced and in hell, and he did not seem to me exalted; and I saw a beggar with no wealth and helpless, and his soul was thriving (farpth) in paradise, and* he seemed to me exalted.

1 This verb is omitted in K2o by mistake. 2 Or else ‘dirty.’ 5 Reading afam instead of minam, both here and in § 14; the

198 BAHMAN YAST.

13. [And I saw a wealthy maz without children, and he did not seem to me exalted;]! and I saw a pauper with many children, and he seemed to me exalted. 14. And I saw a tree on which were seven branches, one golden, one of silver, one brazen, one of copper, [one of tin]?, one of steel, and one was mixed up with iron.’

15. Adharmazd spoke thus: ‘O Zaratfst the Spitam4n! this is what I say beforehand, the one tree which thou sawest is the world which I, Adharmazd, created; and those seven branches thou sawest are the seven periods which w// come. 16. And that which was golden is the reign of King Vistasp, when I and thou converse about religion, and Vistasp shall accept that religion and shall demolish the figures of the demons, and the demons desist from demonstration into concealed proceedings; Aharman and the demons rush back to darkness, and care for water, fire, plants, and the earth of Spendarmad? becomes apparent. 17. And that which was of silver‘ is the reign of Ardashir® the

copyist of Kzo having confounded these two words, like those mentioned in the note on § 4.

1 The passage in brackets is omitted in K2o, but is supplied from the Paz. MSS., being evidently necessary to complete the contrast. It occurs also in the Pers. version.

? Supplied from the Paz. and Pers. versions, being omitted here in K2o0, though occurring in § 20.

* The female archangel who has charge of the earth (see Bund. I, 26).

‘ The P4z. MSS. omit the description of the silver age.

5 Usually identified with Artaxerxes Longimanus, but his long reign of 112 years may include most of the Achzemenian sovereigns down to Artaxerxes Mnemon, several of whom are called Ahasuerus or Artaxerxes in the biblical books of Ezra and Esther. See Bund. XXXI, 30, XXXIV, 8.

CHAPTER II, 13-19. 199

See Bund. XXXI, 30, XXXIV, 8.

CHAPTER II, 13-19. 199

Kay4n (Kat), whom! they call Vohdman son of Spend-d4d@?, who is he who separates the demons from men, scatters ¢4em about, and makes the religion current zz the whole world. 18. And that which was brazen ® is the reign of Ardakhshir 4, the arranger and restorer of the world, and that of King Shahpdr, when he arranges the world which I, Atharmazd, created ; he makes happiness (bikhtakih)® prevalent in the boundaries of the world, and goodness shall become manifest; and Ataré-pad of triumphant destiny, the restorer of the true religion, with the prepared brass*, brings this religion, to- | gether with the transgressors, back to the truth. 19. And that which was of copper is the reign of the Askanian king’, who removes from the world

1 Reading mfin, ‘whom,’ instead of amat, ‘ when’ (see the note on Bund. I, 7).

* Contracted here into Spendad, as it is also in Bund. XXXIV, 8 in the old MSS. This name of the king is corrupted into Bahman son of Isfendiy4r in the Shahnamah.

5 This brazen age is evidently out of its proper chronological order. The Pazand and Persian versions correct this blunder by describing the copper age before the brazen one here, but they place the brazen branch before the copper one in § 14, so it is doubtful how the text stood originally.

‘ Artakhshatar son of Papaki and Shahpfihar? son of Artakhshatar are the Sasanian forms of the names of the first two monarchs (4.p. 226-271) of the Sasanian dynasty, whose reigns constitute this brazen age.

5 Literally, ‘deliverance from sin’ or ‘ salvation’ by one’s own good works, and, therefore, not in a Christian sense.

* Referring to the ordeal of pouring molten brass on his chest, undergone by Atar6-p4d son of Maraspend, high-priest and prime minister of Shapfir I, for the purpose of proving the truth of his religion to those who doubted it.

7 Tt is uncertain which of the Askanian sovereigns is meant, or whether several of the dynasty may not be referred to. The Greek

200 BAHMAN YAST.

the heterodoxy (gavid-rastakth) which existed, and the wicked Akandgar-i Kilisy4kith? is utterly destroyed by this religion, azd goes unseen and unknown from the world. 20. And that which was of tin is the reign of King Vahram Gér?, when he

successors of Alexander were subdued in Persia by Ask (Arsaces I), who defeated Seleucus Callinicus about s.c. 236. But the third book of the Dinkard (in a passage quoted by Haug in his Essay on the Pahlavi Language) mentions Valkhas (Vologeses) the Askanian as collecting the Avesta and Zand, and encouraging the Mazdayasnian religion. This Valkhas was probably Vologeses I, a contemporary of Nero, as shown by Darmesteter in the introduction to his translation of the Vendidad.

This Valkhas was probably Vologeses I, a contemporary of Nero, as shown by Darmesteter in the introduction to his translation of the Vendidad.

1 I am indebted to Professor J. Darmesteter for pointing out that Néryésang, in his Sanskrit translation of Yas. IX, 75, explains Kalasiyik&% as ‘those whose faith is the Christian religion ;’ the original Pahlavi word in the oldest MSS. is Kilisdy4tk, altogether a misunderstanding of the Avesta name Keresani, which it translates, but sufficiently near the name in our text to warrant the assumption that Néryésang would have translated Kilisyakih by ‘Christianity ;’ literally it means ‘ecclesiasticism, or the church religion’ (from Pers. kilisya, Gr. éxxAnoia). Akandgar is probably a miswriting of Alaksandar or Sikandar; though Darmesteter suggests that Skandgar (Av. skend6é-kara, Pers. sikandgar), ‘causer of destruction,’ would be an appropriate punning title for Alexander from a Persian point of view. The anachronisms involved in making Alexander the Great a Christian, conquered by an Ask4nian king, are not more startling than the usual Pahlavi statement that he was a Roman. To a Persian in Sasanian times Alexander was the representative of an invading enemy which had come from the countries occupied, in those times, by the eastern empire of the Christian Romans, which enemy had been subdued in Persia by the Askanian dynasty ; and such information would naturally lead to the anachronisms just mentioned. The name Kilisy4kih is again used, in Chap. III, 3, 5, 8, to denote some Christian enemy.

® This Sasanian monarch (a. p. 420-439), after considerable provocation, revived the persecution of the heretics and foreign creeds which had been tolerated by his predecessor, and this conduct naturally endeared him to the priesthood.

CHAPTER II, 20-24. 201

makes the sight? of the spirit of pleasure manifest, and Aharman with the wizards rushes back to darkness and gloom. 21. And that which was of steel is the reign of King Khdsré son of Kév4d?, when he keeps away from this religion the accursed Mazdik§, son of Bamdad, who remains opposed to the religion along with the heterodox. 22. And that which was mixed with iron [is the reign of the demons with dishevelled hair* of the race of Wrath, when it is the end of the tenth hundredth winter of thy millennium], O Zaratdst the Spitaéman !’

23. Zarattst said thus: ‘Creator of the material world! O propitious spirit! what token would you give of the tenth hundredth winter ?’

24. Adharmazd spoke thus: ‘Righteous Zaratdst! I wetl make z¢ clear: the token that it is the end of thy millennium, and the most evil’ period is coming, is ‘hat a hundred kinds, a thousand kinds, a myriad of kinds of demons with dishevelled hair, of the

? Reading vénap (Pers. bfn4b), but it may be va davag, in which case the phrase must be translated as follows: ‘ when he makes the spirit of pleasure and joy manifest.’

Reading vénap (Pers. bfn4b), but it may be va davag, in which case the phrase must be translated as follows: ‘ when he makes the spirit of pleasure and joy manifest.’

* See Chap. I, 5. The characteristic of the steel age, like that of the tin one, was the persecution of heretics who had been tolerated by the reigning monarch’s predecessor.

* Generally written Mazdak, a heretic whose teaching was very popular in the time of King Kévad (or Kavad, a.p. 487-531). His doctrine appears to have been extreme socialism built upon a Mazdayasnian foundation. He was put to death by Khfsré I, as hinted in the text. It is remarkable that none of the successors of Khfisr6 Néshirvan are mentioned in the Bahman Yast, so that a Parsi, who even did not believe in the verbal inspiration of the book, might possibly consider the remainder of it as strictly prophetical.

* The passage in brackets is omitted in K20 by mistake, and is here supplied from Chap. I, 5, in accordance with the Paz. and Pers. versions,

202 BAHMAN YAST.

race of Wrath, rush into the country of Iran (Airan shatr6) from the direction of the east!, which as an inferior race and race of Wrath. 25. They have uplifted banners, they slay those living in the world?, they have ¢hery hair dishevelled on the back, and they are mostly a small and inferior (nitim) race, forward in destroying the strong doer; O Zaratdst the Spitim4n! the race of Wrath is miscreated (vishd@) and its origin is not manifest. 26. Through | witchcraft they rush into these countries of Iran which I, Aftharmazd, created, since they burn and damage many things; and the house of the houseowner, the land of the land-digger, prosperity, nobility, sovereignty, religion’, truth, agreement, security, enjoyment, and every characteristic which I, Adharmazd, created, this pure religion of the Mazdayasnians, and the fire of Va4hram, which is set in the appointed place, encounter annihilation, and the direst destruction and trouble will come into notice. 27. And that which is a great district will become a town; that which is a great town, a village; that

1 Or ‘of Khfras4n.’ It is difficult to identify these demons with the Arabs, who came from the west, though a dweller in Kirman might imagine that they came from Khfrdsan. In fact, hardly any of the numerous details which follow, except their longcontinued rule, apply exclusively to Muhammadans. It appears, moreover, from’ § 50 and Chap. III, 8, that these demons are intended for Tfrks, that is, invaders from Turkistaén, who would naturally come from the east into Persia.

* Reading géhan-zivo zektelfind, but the beginning of the latter word is torn off in K2o, and the other versions have no equivalent phrase. The Pazand substitutes the phrase ‘black banners and black garments.’

* This word, being torn off in K2o0, is supplied from the Paz. MSS.

CHAPTER II, 25-31. 203

The Pazand substitutes the phrase ‘black banners and black garments.’

* This word, being torn off in K2o0, is supplied from the Paz. MSS.

CHAPTER II, 25-31. 203

which is a great village, a family; and that which is a [great]! family, a single threshold. 28. O Zaratdst the Spitaman! they will lead these Iranian countries of Adharmazd into a desire for evil, zz¢o tyranny and misgovernment, those demons with dishevelled hair who are deceivers, so that what they say they do not do, and they are of a vile religion, so that what they do not say they do. 29. And their assistance and promise have no sincerity, there is no law, they preserve no security, and on the support they provide no one relies; with deceit, rapacity, and misgovernment they will devastate these my Iranian countries, who am Atharmazd.

30. ‘And at that time, O Zaratdst the Spitaman! all men will become deceivers, great friends will become of different parties, and respect, affection, hope’, and regard for the soul will depart from the world; the affection of the father will depart from the son; and ¢hat of the brother from 4zs brother ; the son-in-law wil become a beggar (kidyak or kasik) from his father-in-law *, and the mother will be parted and estranged from the daughter.

31. ‘When it is the end of thy tenth hundredth winter, O ZaratOst the Spitaman! the sun is more unseen and more spotted (vasangtar); the year, month, and day are shorter; and the earth of Spendarmad is more barren, and fuller of highway-

1 This word is omitted in Kzo, but supplied from the PAzand. The whole section is omitted in the Pers. version.

2 This word, being torn off in K20, is doubtfully supplied from the Pers. paraphrase. The Paz. MSS. omit §§ 30-32.

° Or, perhaps, ‘ parents-in-law;’ the original is khfsrfiné, followed by some word (probably nafsman) which is torn off in Kzo. The Pers. version gives no equivalent phrase.

204 BAHMAN YAST.

men’; and the crop will not yield the seed, so that of the crop of the corn-fields in ten cases seven will diminish and three? will increase, and that which increases does not become ripe*; and vegetation, trees, and shrubs will diminish ; when one shall take a hundred, ninety will diminish and ten will increase, and that which increases gives no pleasure and flavour. 32. And men are born smaller, and their skill and strength are less; they become more deceitful and more given to vile practices; they have no gratitude and respect for bread and salt, and they have no affection for their country (désak).

32. And men are born smaller, and their skill and strength are less; they become more deceitful and more given to vile practices; they have no gratitude and respect for bread and salt, and they have no affection for their country (désak).

33. ‘And in that most evil time a boundary has most disrespect‘ where it is the property of a suffering man of religion; gifts are few among their deeds, and duties and good works proceed but little from their hands; and sectarians of all kinds are seeking mischief for them®. 34. And all the world will be burying azd clothing the dead, and burying the dead and washing the dead wd/ de by law; the burning, bringing to water and fire, and eating of dead matter they practise by law and do not abstain from. 35. They recount largely about duties and good works, and pursue wickedness and the road to hell; and through the iniquity, cajolery, and craving of wrath and avarice they rush to hell.

36. ‘And in that perplexing time, O Zaratdst the

? Or, ‘tax-collectors;’ Pahl. tangtar va r4s-vanagtar.

? In K2o ‘va 3’ is corrupted into the very similar va vai, ‘and a portion.’

5 Literally, ‘ white.’

* Reading an4zarm instead of han4 4zarm.

5 That is, for the Iranians in general, who are the ‘they’ in

§§ 32-35.

CHAPTER II, 32-36. 205

Spitaman!—the reign of Wrath with infuriate spear! and the demon with dishevelled hair, of the race of Wrath,—the meanest slaves walk forth with the authority of nobles of the land; and the religious, who wear sacred thread-girdles on the waist, are then not able 4o perform their ablution (padiyazvth), for in those last times dead matter and bodily refuse become so abundant, that one who shall set step to step walks upon dead matter; or when he washes in the barashnim ceremony, and puts down a foot from the stone seat (magh)*, he walks on dead matter; or when he arranges the sacred twigs (baresém) and consecrates the sacred cakes (dr6n6) in their corpse-chamber (nas4t katak)? it is allowable.

' The Av. Aéshmé khrvfdrus, ‘Aéshma the impetuous assailant’ (see Bund. XXVIII, 15-17); this demon’s Pahlavi epithet is partly a transcription, and partly a paraphrase of the Avesta term.

* According to Dastir Hoshangji (Zand-Pahlavi Glossary, p. 65) the term magh is now applied to the stones on which the person undergoing purification has to squat during ablution in the barashnfim ceremony. Originally, however, Av. magha appears to have meant a shallow hole dug in the earth, near or over which the person squatted upon a seat, either of stone or some other hard material (see Vend. IX). The term for the hole was probably extended to the whole arrangement, including the seat, which latter has thus acquired the name of magh, although magh and maghAk still mean ‘a channel or pit’ in Persian.

IX). The term for the hole was probably extended to the whole arrangement, including the seat, which latter has thus acquired the name of magh, although magh and maghAk still mean ‘a channel or pit’ in Persian.

$ The Av. kata of Vend.V, 36-40; a special chamber for the temporary reception of the corpse, when it was impossible to remove it at once to the dakhma, owing to the inclemency of the weather. It should be large enough for standing upright, and for stretching out the feet and hands, without touching either walls or ceiling ; that is, not less than six feet cube. The text means that those times will be so distressing, that it will be considered lawful to perform the sacred ceremonies even in a place of such concentrated impurity as a dead-house not actually occupied by a corpse.

206 BAHMAN YAST.

37. Or, in those last times, it becomes allowable to perform a ceremonial (yazisn) with two men, so that this religion may not come to nothing and collapse’; there wz// be only one in a hundred, in a thousand, in a myriad, who believes in this religion, and even he does nothing of it though z¢ de a duty?; and the fire of V4hram, which will come to nothing and collapse, fad/s off from a thousand to one care-taker, and even he does not supply it properly with firewood and incense; or when a man, who has performed worship and does not know the Nirangistan* (‘code of religious formulas’), shall kindle 2¢ with good intentions, it is allowable.

38. ‘ Honourable‘ wealth will all proceed to those of perverted faith (kévid-késh4n); it comes to the transgressors, and virtuous doers of good works, from the families of noblemen even unto the priests (még-mard@4n), remain running about uncovered ; the lower orders take in marriage the daughters of nobles, grandees, and priests; and the nobles, grandees, and priests come to destitution and bondage. 39. The misfortunes of the ignoble will overtake greatness and authority, and the helpless and ignoble will come to the foremost place and advancement; the words of the upholders of religion, and the seal and decision of a just judge will become the

1 The P4z. MSS. add, ‘ and helplessness.’

2? The Paz. MSS. add, ‘and the prayers and ceremonies that he orders of priests and disciples they do not fulfil.’

® The name of a work which treats of various ceremonial details, and appears to be a portion of the Pahlavi translation of the seventeenth or Hfsparam Nask, containing many Avesta quotations which are not now to be found elsewhere.

‘ The Paz. MSS. have misread astr damfk, ‘ underground,’ instead of 4zarmik.

CHAPTER Il, 37-41. 207

‘ The Paz. MSS. have misread astr damfk, ‘ underground,’ instead of 4zarmik.

CHAPTER Il, 37-41. 207

words of random speakers (andéz6-g6k4n) among the just amd even the righteous; and the words of the ignoble and slanderers, of the disreputable axd mockers, and of those of divers opinions they consider true and credible, about which they take! an oath, although with falsehood, and thereby give false evidence, and speak falsely and irreverently about me, Afharmazd. 40. They who bear the title of priest and disciples wish evil concerning ? one another; he speaks vice and they look upon vice; and the antagonism of Aharman and the demons is much brought on by them; of the sin which men commit, out of five® sins the priests and disciples commit three sins, and they become enemies of the good, so that they may thereby speak of bad faults relating to one another; the ceremonies they undertake they do not perform, and they have no fear of hell.

41. ‘And in that tenth hundredth winter, whzch is the end of thy millennium, O righteous Zaratdst! all mankind will bind torn hair, disregarding revelation‘, so that a willingly-disposed cloud and a

1 Literally, ‘devour an oath,’ which Persian idiom was occasioned by the original form of oath consisting in drinking water prepared in a particular manner, after having invoked all the heavenly powers to bear witness to the truth of what had been asserted (see the Safgand-namah).

? Reading rAi instead of 14, ‘not.’ The whole section is omitted by the P4z. MSS., possibly from politic motives, as the language is plain enough.

* The Persian paraphrase has ‘ eight.’

‘ Referring probably to the injunctions regarding cutting the hair and paring the nails, with all the proper precautions for preventing any fragments of the hair or nails from lying about, as given in Vend. XVII. One of the penalties for neglecting such precautions is supposed to be a failure of the necessary rains. The

208 BAHMAN YAST.

XVII. One of the penalties for neglecting such precautions is supposed to be a failure of the necessary rains. The

208 BAHMAN YAST.

righteous wind are not able to produce rain in its proper time and season. 42. And a dark cloud makes the whole sky night, and the hot wind and the cold wind arrive, and bring along fruit and seed of corn, even the rain in its proper time; and it does not rain, azd that which rains also rains more noxious creatures than water; and the water of rivers and springs will diminish, and there will be no increase. 43. And the beast of burden and ox and sheep bring forth more painfully’ and awkwardly, and acquire less fruitfulness ; and ¢her hair is coarser and skin thinner; the milk does not increase and has less cream (£arbist); the strength of the labouring ox is less, and the agility of the swift horse is less, and it carries less in a race. 44. ‘And on the men in that perplexing time, O Zaratist the Spitaman! who wear the sacred thread-girdle on the waist, the evil-seeking of misgovernment and much of its false judgment have come as a wind in which their living is not possible, and they seek death as a boon; and youths and children will be apprehensive, and gossiping chitchat and gladness of heart do not arise among them. 45. And they practise the appointed feasts (gasn6) of ¢hezr ancestors, the propitiation (adséfrid) of angels, avd the prayers and ceremonies of the season festivals and guardian spirits, in various places, yet that which they practise they do not believe in unhesitatingly ; they do not give rewards lawfully, and

words an4stak din6é can also be translated by ‘despising the religion.’

1 The word appears to be dardaktar, but is almost illegible in K2o; it may possibly be k@taktar, ‘more scantily,’ as the P4z, MSS. have kédaktar bahéd, ‘become smaller.’

CHAPTER II, 42-49. 209

bestow no gifts and alms, and even those [they bestow]! they repent of again. 46. And even those "men of the good religion, who have reverenced the good religion of the Mazdayasnians, proceed in conformity with (bar-hamak6 rdbisn) those ways and customs’, and do not believe their own religion. 47. And the noble, great, and charitable *, who are the virtuous of their own country and locality, will depart from their own original place and family‘ as idolatrous; through want they beg something from the ignoble and vile, and come to poverty and helplessness ; through them® nine in ten of these men will perish in the northern quarter.

48. ‘Through their way of misrule everything comes to nothingness and destitution, levity and infirmity; and the earth of Spendarmad opens z¢s mouth wide, avd every jewel and metal becomes exposed, such as gold and silver, brass, tin, and lead. 49. And rule and sovereignty come to slaves, such as the Tark and non-Taranian (Atdr) of the army®, and are turbulent as among the moun-

1 This verb is omitted in K20. ;

2 It is rather doubtful whether their own customs are meant, or those of their conquerors.

49. And rule and sovereignty come to slaves, such as the Tark and non-Taranian (Atdr) of the army®, and are turbulent as among the moun-

1 This verb is omitted in K20. ;

2 It is rather doubtful whether their own customs are meant, or those of their conquerors.

* Or dah&k&n may mean ‘the skilful.’

“ Reading dftdak instead of rfdak. At first sight the miswriting of r for d seems to indicate copying from a text in the modern Persian character, in which those two letters are often much alike; but it happens that the compounds df and rf also resemble one another in some Pahlavi handwriting.

5 Whether through poverty and helplessness, or through the conquerors, is not quite clear.

* Very little reliance can be placed upon the details of this sentence, but it is difficult to make any other complete and consistent translation. Darmesteter suggests the reading hén6, ‘army,’ but another possible reading is Khyén (Av. Hvyaona), the old name

[5] P

210 BAHMAN YAST.

taineers1; and the Aint?, the KAzflt, the Sdfti, the Raman (Ardmayak), and the white-clothed Karmak? then attain sovereignty in my countries of Iran, and their will and pleasure will become current in the world. 50. The sovereignty will come from those leathern-belted ones* and Arabs (T4ztg4n) and Rdmans to them, avd they will be so misgoverning that when they kill a righteous man who is virtuous and a fly, it is all one® in their eyes. 51. And the security, fame, and prosperity, the country and families, the wealth and handiwork, the streams, rivers, and springs of Iran, and of those of the good religion, come to those non-Iranians; and the army and standards of the frontiers come to them, and a rule with a craving for wrath advances in the world. 52. And their eyes of avarice are not sated with wealth, and they form hoards of the world’s wealth, and conceal ‘em underground; and through wickedness they commit sodomy, hold much intercourse with menstruous women, and practise many unnatural lusts.

of some country probably in Turkistén,as ArgAsp, the opponent of Vistasp, is called ‘lord or king of Khyén’ in the Yadk4r-i Zarfran (see also Gés Yt. 30, 31, Ashi Yt. 50, 51, Zamyad Yt. 87).

1 Or, ‘as the mountain-holding Khfdarak.’ Darmesteter suggests that Khfdarak may be an ‘inhabitant of Khazar.’

* Probably the people of Samarkand, which place was formerly called Xin according to a passage in some MSS. of Tabart’s Chronicle, quoted in Ouseley’s Oriental Geography, p. 298. See also Bund. XII, 22.

8 The K4buli and Byzantine Riman are plain enough; not so the Séftt and Karmak (Kalmak or Krimak).

‘ That is, the Tfrks, as appears more clearly from Chap. III, 8,9. The Arabs are mentioned here, incidently, for the first time, and again in Chap. III, 9, 51.

_® Literally, ‘ both are one.’

CHAPTER II, 50-57., 211

‘ That is, the Tfrks, as appears more clearly from Chap. III, 8,9. The Arabs are mentioned here, incidently, for the first time, and again in Chap. III, 9, 51.

_® Literally, ‘ both are one.’

CHAPTER II, 50-57., 211

53. ‘And in that perplexing time the night is brighter!, and the year, month, and day will diminish one-third; the earth of Spendarmad arises, and suffering, death, and destitution become more severe in the world.’

54. Adharmazd said to Zaratist the Spitaman : ‘This is what I foretell: that wicked evil spirit, when it shall be necessary for him to perish, becomes more oppressive and more tyrannical.’

55. So Adharmazd spoke to Zaratdst the Spitaman thus: ‘Enquire fully and learn by heart? thoroughly! teach z¢ by Zand, P&zand, and explanation! tell z¢ to the priests and disciples who speak forth in the world, azd those who are not aware of the hundred winters, tell 24 then to them! so that, for the hope of a future existence, and for the preservation of their own souls, they may remove the trouble, evil, and oppression which those of other religions cause in the ceremonies of religion (diné yésn4n). 56. And, moreover, I tell thee this, O Zaratist the Spitaman! that whoever, in that time, appeals for the body is not able to save the soul, for ke zs as it were fat, and 42s soul is hungry and lean in hell; whoever appeals for the soul, 42s body is hungry avd lean through the misery of the world, and destitute, and his soul is fat in heaven.’

57. Zaratist enquired of Adharmazd thus: ‘O -Atharmazd, propitious spirit! creator of the material world who art righteous!’—-He is Adharmazd through righteous invocation, and the rest through

1 The P4z. version adds, ‘the motion of the sun is quicker.’ 2 Literally, ‘make easy.’

P 2

212 BAHMAN YAST.

praise; some say ‘righteous creator'! ’'—‘O creator ! in that perplexing time are they righteous? and are there religious people who wear the sacred ¢threadgirdle (kQsttk) on the waist, and celebrate religious rites (din6)? with the sacred twigs (baresém)? and does the religious practice of next-of-kin marriage (khvétOk-das) continue in their families ?’

58. Adharmazd said to Zaratist thus: ‘Of the best men is he who, in that perplexing time, wears the sacred thread-girdle on the waist, and celebrates religious rites with the sacred twigs, ‘hough not as in the reign of King Vistasp. 59. Whoever in that perplexing time recites It4-4d-yazam (Av. itha 4d yazamaidé, Yas. Vand XX XVII)8 azd one Ashemvohii‘, avd has learned z¢ by heart, is as though, in the reign of King Vist4sp, 2¢ were a Dvazdahhémast® with holy-water (zéhar). 60. And by

1 This interpolated commentary is a pretty clear indication that the writer is translating from an Avesta text.

* Both Pz. and Pers. have dréné, ‘ sacred cakes.’

’ The third h& or chapter of the Yasna of seven chapters. It worships Afharmazd as the creator of all good things.

* See Bund. XX, 2.

* Both Pz. and Pers. have dréné, ‘ sacred cakes.’

’ The third h& or chapter of the Yasna of seven chapters. It worships Afharmazd as the creator of all good things.

* See Bund. XX, 2.

5 For the following explanation of the various kinds of h6m4st I am indebted to Dastfir JamAspji Minochiharji Jam4sp-As4-n4 of Bombay :—

There are four kinds of hé6mAst recited by priests for the atonement of any sin that may have been committed by a woman during . menstruation, after her purification :—

1. HémA4st consists of prayers recited for 144 days, in honour of the twelve following angels: AGharmazd, Tistar, Khfrshéd, M&h, Aban, Adar, Khurdid, Amerdad, Spendarmad, Béd, Srésh, and Arda-fravash. Each angel, in turn, is reverenced for twelve days successively, with one Yasna each day.

2. Khadfk-hémst, ‘ one hémast,’ differs from the last merely in adding a Vendidad every twelfth day, to be recited in the Ush-

CHAPTER II, 58-62. 213

whomever prayer is offered up, azd the GAthahymns are chanted, z¢ 7s as though the whole ritual had been recited, azd the GAatha-ymmns consecrated by him zz the reign of King Vistasp. 61. The most perfectly righteous of the righteous is he who remains in the good religion of the Mazdayasnians, and continues the religious practice of next-of-kin marriage in his family.’

62. Adharmazd said to the righteous Zarattst : ‘In these nine thousand years which I, Adharmazd, created, mankind become most perplexed in that perplexing time; for in the evil reigns of Az-i Dahak and FrAsty4v of Tar mankind, in those perplexing times, were living better and living more

ahin Gah (12 p.m. to 6 a.m.) in honour of the angel whose propitiation ends that day.

3. Dah-hémAst,‘ ten hémasts,’ differs from the preceding merely in having a Vendidad, in addition to the Yasna, every day.

4. Dvazdah-h6mAst, ‘ twelve hémasts,’ are prayers recited for 264 days in honour of twenty-two angels, namely, the twelve aforesaid and the following ten: Bahman, Ardibahist, Shahrivar, Mihir, Bahram, R4m, Din, Rashnf, Gés, and Astéd. Each angel, in turn, is reverenced as in the last.

The celebration of hém4st costs 350 rfpis, that of khadfkhémAst 422 rfipis, that of dah-hémast rooo rfipis, and that of dv4zdah-hém4st 2000 rfipfs; but the first and third are now no longer used. The merit obtained by having such recitations performed is equivalent to 1000 tan4pfihars for each Yasna, 10,000 for each Visparad, and 70,000 for each Vendidad recited. A tan4p&har is now considered as a weight of 1200 dirhams, with which serious sins and works of considerable merit are estimated ; originally it must have meant a sin which was ‘inexpiable’ by ordinary good works, and, conversely, any extraordinary good work which was just sufficient to efface such a sin.

The amount of merit attaching to such recitations is variously stated in different books, and when recited with holy-water (that is, with all their ceremonial rites) they are said to be usually a hundred times as meritorious as when recited without it.

214 BAHMAN YAST.

numerously, and their disturbance by Aharman and the demons was less. 63. For in their evil reigns, within the countries of Iran, there were not seven! towns which were desolate as they w2d/ de when it is the end of thy millennium, O Zaratdst the SpitamAn! for all the towns of Iran wzd/ be ploughed up by their horses’ hoofs, and their banners w2// reach unto Padashkhvargar?, and they w// carry away the sovereignty of the seat of the religion I approve from there; and their destruction comes from that place, O Zaratist the Spitaman! this is what I foretell.’

64. Whoever $ of those existing, thus, with reverence unto the good, performs much worship for Atharmazd, Adharmazd, aware of z¢ through righteousness, gives /zm whatsoever Adharmazd is aware of through righteousness, as remuneration and reward of duty azd good works, and such members of

1 So in the Pazand, but ‘seventeen’ in Persian; in K2o the word is partly illegible, but can be no other number than sibA, ‘seven.’

* The mountainous region south of the Caspian (see Bund. XII, 2, 17).

* This section is the Pahlavi version of an Avesta formula which is appended to nearly two-thirds of the h4s or chapters of the Yasna, and, therefore, indicates the close of the chapter at this point. The version here given contains a few verbal deviations from that given in the Yasna, but none of any importance. The Avesta text of this formula is as follows :—

Yénhé hatim 4ad, yésné paitf,

vangh6 mazdau ahur6 vaétha, ashd hafa,

yaunghaméé, task tauska yazamaidé. And it may be translated in the following manner :—

‘Of whatever male of the existences, therefore, Ahuramazda was. better cognizant, through righteousness in worship, and of whatever females, both those males and those females we reverence.’

CHAFTER II, 63-I1, 3. 215

_the congregation, males and females, I reverence ; and the archangels, who are also male and female, they are good.

Cuapter III.

1. Zaratist enquired of Adharmazd thus: ‘O Atharmazd, propitious spirit! creator of the material world, righteous ove / whence do they restore this good religion of the Mazdayasnians? and by what means will they destroy these demons with dishevelled hair}, of the race of Wrath? 2, O creator! grant me death! and grant my favoured ones death! that they may not live in that perplexing time; grant ¢kem exemplary living! that they may not prepare wickedness and the way to hell.’

3. Adharmazd spoke thus: ‘O Zaratist the Spitaman! after the ill-omened? sovereignty of those of the race of Wrath? there is a fiend, ShédAspth ‘ of the Kilisy4kih, from the countries of Salman5;’ Mah-

1 The Pz. MSS. insert, ‘and black clothing’ here.

® Literally, ‘black-marked,’ or possibly, ‘ black standard.’

after the ill-omened? sovereignty of those of the race of Wrath? there is a fiend, ShédAspth ‘ of the Kilisy4kih, from the countries of Salman5;’ Mah-

1 The Pz. MSS. insert, ‘and black clothing’ here.

® Literally, ‘black-marked,’ or possibly, ‘ black standard.’

* The P4z. MSS. add, ‘ the leathern-belted Tfirks,’ that is, people of Turkistan.

‘ This fiend appears to be a personification of Christianity or ‘ecclesiasticism’ (Kilisyakih, see Chap. II, 19), and the writer seems to place his appearance some time in the middle ages, probably before the end of the thirteenth century (see the note on § 44). Darmesteter suggests that Shédasp may have been intended as a modern counterpart of Bévarasp (Az-i Dahak), the ancient tyrant; and that this Christian invasion may be a reminiscence of the crusades.

* Ihave formerly read MQsulm4n instead of min Salman, and hence concluded that the text must have been written long

216 BAHMAN YAST.

vand-dad said that these people are Riman (ArQmaytk), and Réshan! said that they have red weapons, red banners, and red hats(kfil4h). 4. ‘It is when a symptom of them appears, as they advance, O Zaratist the Spitaman! the sun and the dark show signs, and the moon becomes manifest of various colours; earthquakes (bim-guzand), too, become numerous, and the wind comes more violently; in the world want, distress, and discomfort come more into view; and Mercury and Jupiter advance the sovereignty for the vile’, avd they are zm hundreds and thousands and myriads. 5. They have the red banner of the fiend Shéd4spth of Kilisy4kth, and they hasten much their progress to these countries of Iran wich 1, Atharmazd, created, up to the bank of the Arvand3,’ some have said‘ the Frat® river, ‘unto the Greeks (Yan4n) dwelling in Asfristan ;’ they are Greeks by strict reckoning °,

after the Muhammadan conquest of Persia; but this reading is irreconcileable with the context. The position of Salman (Av. Sairima) is defined by Bund. XX, 12, which places the sources of the Tigris in that country.

* The name of a commentator, or commentary, often quoted in the Pahlavi Vendidad, and other texts. MaAhvand-déd is mentioned in the Pahlavi Yasna (see Sls. I, 4).

* The Paz. MSS. state that ‘Mercury and Jupiter beat down the strength of Venus.’

® Here written Arang, Arand, or Arvad, but as it is Arvand in §§ 21, 38, that reading seems preferable, the difference between the two names in Pahlavi being merely a single stroke. The Arvand is the Tigris, and the Arang probably the Araxes (see SZS. VI, 20, Bund. XX, 8).

‘ Literally, ‘there are and were some who said;’ this phrase occurs several times in the latter part of this text.

5 The Euphrates.

* Or, ‘of strict reckoning,’ reading sa&kht am4r, but both reading and meaning are very uncertain. As it stands in K2o it

CHAPTER III, 4-9. 217

XX, 8).

‘ Literally, ‘there are and were some who said;’ this phrase occurs several times in the latter part of this text.

5 The Euphrates.

* Or, ‘of strict reckoning,’ reading sa&kht am4r, but both reading and meaning are very uncertain. As it stands in K2o it

CHAPTER III, 4-9. 217

and their Assyrian dwelling is this, that they slay the Assyrian people therein, and thus they will destroy their abode, some have said the /urking-holes (gréstak) of the demons.

6. ‘ They turn back those of the race of Wrath! in hundreds and thousands and myriads; and the banners, standards, and an innumerable army of those demons with dishevelled hair will come to these countries of Iran which I, Attharmazd, created. 7. And the army of the invader? is an extending enemy of the Tark* and even the Karm‘, be it with banners aloft when he shall set up a banner, be it through the excessive multitude which will remain— like haivs 7m the mane of a horse—in the countries of Iran which I, Adharmazd, created.

8. ‘The leathern-belted Tork axzd the Roman Shédaspth of Kilisyakth come forth with simultaneous movement®, and in three places, with similar strife, there was and w7// be three times a great contest (4rdth), O Zaratist the Spitaman! 9. One in the reign of Kaf-K4ds*, when through

may be sakht gumAl, ‘extreme beauty,’ or Sakhttm4r (the name of a place), or this may stand for sakht tim4r, ‘severe misfortune ;’ and other readings are possible.

? It is not quite clear which party will turn the other back.

* Literally, ‘extender,’ that is, one engaged in extending his own dominions.

* The remainder of this § (except the verb ‘remain’) is Pazand written in Persian characters in K20.

* Possibly the Karmak of Chap. II, 49. In § 20 the Kurd and Karman (or Karms) may refer to the Tirk and Karm of this §, so it is doubtful whether Tark or Kurd is meant.

* Or, ‘ for the encounter,’ pavan ham-rasisnth.

* See Bund. XXXI, 25, XXXIV, 7. The letters are here joined together, so as to become Kai-gafis, and this form of the name is

218 BAHMAN YAST.

* Or, ‘ for the encounter,’ pavan ham-rasisnth.

* See Bund. XXXI, 25, XXXIV, 7. The letters are here joined together, so as to become Kai-gafis, and this form of the name is

218 BAHMAN YAST.

the assistance of demons z¢ was with the archangels; and the second when thou, O Zaratist the Spttaman! receivedst the religion and ads¢ thy conference, and King Vistasp and Argdsp', miscreated by wrath, were, through the war of the religion, in the combat of Spéd-raztir (“the hoary forest?”),’ some have said z¢ was in Pars; ‘and the third when it is the end of thy millennium, O Zaratdst the Spitaman! when all the three, Tork, Arab, and Rdman, come to this® place,’ some have said the plain of Nisanak4 10. ‘And all ¢hose of the countries of Iran, which I, Adharmazd, created, come from their own place unto Padashkhvargar 5, owing to those of the race of Wrath, O Zaratast the Spitaman! so that a report of something of the cave dwellings, mountain dwellings, and’ river dwellings of these people will remain at Padashkhvargar and Pars; some have sazd the fire Visndsp*, on the deep Lake Kékast which has medicinal water opposed to the demons, is there (in Padashkhvargar ?) as it were conspicuous, some have said ‘originating’,’ ‘so that

often read Kahfs or Kahés in Pazand (see Mkh. VIII, 27, XXVII, 54, LVII, 21). The Paz. MSS. omit § 9.

' See Bund. XII, 32, 33.

2 See Bund. XXIV, 16.

’ Perhaps ‘one’ is meant, as hané, ‘this,’ is sometimes substituted for-aé, ‘one,’ both being read ¢e in Pazand.

* The reading of this name is quite uncertain.

® See Chap. II, 63. The whole of the final clause of this section, about the fire Visndsp, is inserted parenthetically at this point in the Pahlavi text.

* Elsewhere called Gfisnasp, Gasnésp, or Gfsasp (see SZS. VI, 22).

7 The most obvious reading of this word is mahfk, ‘ fish,’ which can hardly be reconciled with the context. The view here taken is that the writer was translating from an Avesta text, and met

CHAPTER III, 10, IT. 219

they may use z¢ anew, and the fire may become shining in these countries of Iran which I, Adharmazd, created. 11. For when one shall be able to save his own life, he has then no recollection of wife, child, and wealth, that they may not live, zm that perplexing time, O Zaratdst! yet the day when the hundredth winter becomes the end of thy millennium, which is ¢ha¢t of Zaratist, is so that nothing wicked may go from this millennium into that millennium 1.’

with the word Aithra, which means both pédak, ‘clear,’ and tékhmak, ‘ originating,’ but to express the latter meaning he used the synonym m4yakik, which can be written exactly like mahik. Owing to the involved character of this section it is not very clear in English, but it is still more obscure in the Pahlavi text, in which the whole of this clause about the Gre is inserted parenthetically after the first mention of Padashkhv4rgar.

Owing to the involved character of this section it is not very clear in English, but it is still more obscure in the Pahlavi text, in which the whole of this clause about the Gre is inserted parenthetically after the first mention of Padashkhv4rgar.

' This last clause may be read several ways, and it is by no means easy to ascertain clearly the chronological order of the . events which are jumbled together in this last chapter. But it would appear that Zaratfst’s millennium was to end at a time when the religion was undisturbed, and just before the incursion of the demons or idolators, the details of which have been given in Chap. II, 22-III, 11, and which is the first event of Hfshédar’s millennium (see § 13). Now according to Bund. XXXIV, 7-9, the interval from ‘the coming of the religion,’ in the reign of Kaf- Vistasp, to the end of the Sasanian monarchy was 90+ 112 +30 +12+144+14+284+460=1016 years. If by ‘the coming of the religion’ be meant the time when Zaratfist received it, as he was then thirty years old, he must have been born 1046 years before the end of the Sasanian monarchy (a. p. 651), and the end of his millennium must have been in a. p. 605, the sixteenth year of Khfisr6 Parviz, when the Sasanian power was near its maximum, and only a score of years before it began suddenly to collapse. This close coincidence indicates that the writer of the Bahman Yast must have adopted the same incorrect chronology as is found in the Bundahis. If, however, ‘the coming of the’ religion’ mean its acceptance by Vistasp, which occurred in Zaratfst’s fortieth or

220 BAHMAN YAST.

12. Zaratist enquired of Afharmazd thus: ‘O Adharmazd, propitious spirit! creator of the material world, righteous ove/ when they are so many in number, by what means will they be able to perish? ?’ .

13. Adharmazd spoke thus: ‘O Zaratdst the Spitaman! when the demon with dishevelled hair of the race of Wrath comes into notice in the eastern quarter, first a black token becomes manifest, and Hashédar son of Zaratdst is born on Lake Frazd4n?. 14. It is when he comes to his conference wth me 8, Atharmazd, O Zarattist the Spitam4n!’ ¢hat zn the direction of AXtnist4n‘, z¢ is said—some have said among the Hindus—‘is born a prince (ka); it is his father, a prince of the Kay4n race, approaches the

forty-second year, his birth must have been ten or twelve years earlier, and his millennium must have ended a.b. 593-595. But according to the imperfect chronology of Bund. XXXIV the tenth millennium of the world, that of Capricornus, commenced with ‘the coming of the religion,’ and ended, therefore, in a.p. 635, the fourth year of Yazdakard, the last Sasanian king, when the Muhammadans were just preparing for their first invasion ; so the millennium of Aquarius is very nearly coincident with that of Hfshédar, and may probably be intended to represent it. It appears, therefore, that the millennium of H@shédar is altogether past, having extended from a. D. 593-635 to A.D. 1593-1635.

It appears, therefore, that the millennium of H@shédar is altogether past, having extended from a. D. 593-635 to A.D. 1593-1635.

* The Paz. MSS. omit§12. The writer having detailed the evils of the iron age, now returns to its commencement in order to describe the means adopted for partially counteracting those evils.

* See Bund. XXII, 5, XXXII, 8. The Paz. MSS. add, ‘they bring him up in Zavulistan and KAvulistan ;’ and the Pers. version says, ‘on the frontier of KAbulistan. With regard to the time of Hfishédar’s birth, see § 44. His name is always written Khfarshédar in K20.

; ® The P4z. and Pers. versions say, ‘at thirty years of age,’ as in

44.

* Possibly Samarkand (see Chap. II, 49, note 2).

CHAPTER III, 12-17. 221

women, and a religious prince is born to him; he calls Ais name Vahram the VargA4vand!,’ some have said Shahptr. 15. ‘That a sign may come to the earth, the night when that prince is born, a star falls from the sky; when that prince is born the star shows a signal.’ 16. It is Dad-Atharmazd? who said that the month Av4n and day V4@’ is his father’s end; ‘they rear 42m with the damsels of the king, and a woman becomes ruler.

17. ‘That prince when he is thirty years old’— some have told the time—‘ comes with innumerable banners avd divers armies, Hindu and ini‘, having uplifted banners—for they set up ¢/ezy banners —having exalted banners, and having exalted weapons; they hasten up with speed ® as far as the Véh river’—some have said the country of Bambé*— ‘as far as Bukhar and the Bukhfrans within z¢s bank,

1 Bahram the illustrious or splendid (Av. varefanghand, compare Pers. varg), an epithet applied, in the Avesta, to the moon, Tistrya, the scriptures, the royal glory of the Kay4nians, the Kayanians themselves, and the hero Thrita. This personage may possibly be an incarnation of the angel Bahram, mingled with some reminiscences of the celebrated Persian general Bahrim Xépin; but see §§ 32, 49.

* A commentator who is quoted in the Pahlavi Yas. XI, 22; see also Chap. I, 7.

* The 2and day of the eighth month of the Parsi year, corresponding to October 7th when the year began at the vernal equinox, as the Bundahis (XXV, 6, 7, 20, 21) describes.

* That is, Bactrian and Samarkandian.

5 Or, ‘light up with glitter,’ according as we read tagend or tavend. The Paz. MSS. omit §§ 17-44, except one or two isolated phrases.

6 Spiegel was inclined to identify this name with Bombay, but this is impossible, as the MS. K20 (in which the name occurs) was written some two centuries before the Portuguese invented the name of Bombay. Its original name, by which it is still called by

222 BAHMAN YAST.

O Zaratist the Spttaman! 18. When the star Jupiter comes up to z¢s culminating point (balist)! and casts Venus down, the sovereignty comes to the prince. 19. Quite innumerable are the champions, furnished with arms avd with banners displayed,’ some have said from Sagastan, Pars, and Khdrdsan, some have said from the lake of Padashkhvargar ?, some have said from the Hiratts? and Kohistan, some have said from Taparistaén‘; and from those directions ‘ every supplicant for a child® comes into ° view. 20. It is concerning the displayed banners and very numerous army, which were the armed men, champions, and soldiers from the countries of Iran a¢ Padashkhvérgar—whom J told thee’ that they call both Kurd and Karm4n—it is declared

its native inhabitants, being Mumbaf. The locality mentioned in the text is evidently to be sought on the banks of the Oxus near Bukhiré; the Oxus having been sometimes considered the upper course of the Arag, and sometimes that of the Veh (see Bund. XX, 22, note 5). It is hardly probable that either Bamt (Balkh) or Bamiy4n would be changed into Bambé, and the only exact representative of this name appears to be Bamm, a town about 120 miles S. E. of Kirm4n; this is quite a different locality from that mentioned in the text, but it is hazardous to set bounds to the want of geographical knowledge displayed by some of the Pahlavi commentators.

1 Compare SZS. IV, 8. Here the triumph of Jupiter over Venus appears to be symbolical of the displacement of the queen dowager by her son.

% That is, from the southern shore of the Caspian.

* Reading Hiriy4n, but this is doubtful, as it may be ‘from the citadels (arig4n6), or defiles (khalak4n6), of Kéhistan.’

* See Bund. XII, 17, XIII, 15.

5 That is, every man able to bear arms.

* Reading pavan, ‘into,’ instead of bar4, ‘besides’ (see SZS. VIII, 2, note 5).

7 See § 10, but as nothing is said there about Kurd or Karm4n, it is possible that the writer meant to say, ‘of whom I told thee,

CHAPTER III, 18-22. 223

that they will slay an excessive number, in companionship and. under the same banner, for these countries of Iran.

VIII, 2, note 5).

7 See § 10, but as nothing is said there about Kurd or Karm4n, it is possible that the writer meant to say, ‘of whom I told thee,

CHAPTER III, 18-22. 223

that they will slay an excessive number, in companionship and. under the same banner, for these countries of Iran.

21. ‘ Those of the race of Wrath and the extensive army! of Shédaspth, whose names are the two-legged wolf and the leathern-belted demon on the bank of the Arvand ?, wage three battles, one in Spéd@-razir* and one in the plain of NtsAnak ;’ some have said that z¢ was on the lake of the three races, some have said that z¢ was in Martiv‘ the brilliant, ezd some have said in Pars, 22. ‘For the support of the countries of Iran is the innumerable army of the east; its having exalted banners® is that they have a banner of tiger skin (b6par pést), and their wind banner is white cotton®; innumerable are the mounted troops, and they ride up to the /wr&zng-holes’ of the demons; they will slay so that a thousand women can afterwards see and kiss d#¢ one man.

and whom they call both Kurd and Karman.’ It is more probable, however, that he is referring to § 7.

1 Compare § 7. The ‘extensive army’ and ‘two-legged wolf’ are terms borrowed apparently from Yas. IX, 62, 63.

4 That is, ‘the rapid’ (Av. aurvand). The other names of this river, Tigris and Hiddekel, have the same meaning. See §§ 5, 38.

> See § 9, of which this is a recapitulation, but the first of the three battles is here omitted by mistake.

* Marv in the present Turkistan.

® Referring to § 17.

* Supposing that band6k may be equivalent to Pers. bandak,

but the usual Pahlavi term for ‘cotton’ is pumbak (Pers. punbah).

' 7 Reading grestak as in § 5, but the word can also be read dar didak, ‘gate watch-tower.’ It is possible that the drugdé geredha, ‘ pit of the fiend,’ of Vend. III, 24, may be here meant; the gate of hell, whence the demons congregate upon the Aresfir ridge (Bund. XII, 8).

224 BAHMAN YAST.

23. ‘When it is the end of the time', O Zaratast the Spttaman! those enemies will be as much destroyed as the root of a shrub when 2¢ zs in the night on which a cold winter arrives, and in this night it sheds z¢s leaves; and they wé/ reinstate these countries of Iran which I, Atharmazd, created 2.

24. ‘And with speed rushes the evil spirit, with the vilest races of demons and Wrath with infuriate spear °, and comes on to the support and assistance of those demon-worshippers and miscreations of wrath, O Zaratist the SpitimA4n! 25. And I, the creator Adharmazd, send Nérydésang the angel and Srésh the righteous‘ unto Kangdez®, which the illustrious Styavakhsh * formed, and ¢o Kitré-mtyan™ son of VistAsp, the glory of the Kaydns, the just restorer of the religion, 4o speak thus: ‘“ Walk forth, O illustrious Péshyétand! to these countries of Iran which I, Attharmazd, created; consecrate the fire and waters for the Haddékht* avd Dvazdah-hémast !

to these countries of Iran which I, Attharmazd, created; consecrate the fire and waters for the Haddékht* avd Dvazdah-hémast !

1 Compare, ‘and at the time of the end’ (Dan. xi. 40). The writer appears to be here finally passing from a description of the past into speculations as to the future, which he has hitherto only casually indulged in.

2 The supernatural means supposed to be employed for the destruction of the wicked and the restoration of the good are detailed in the following paragraphs.

® See Chap. II, 36.

‘ The two angels who are the special messengers of Adharmazd to mankind (see* Bund. XV, 1, XXX, 29). This message was expected to be sent to Péshyétanfi near the end of Hfshédar’s millennium (see § 51).

5 See Bund. XXIX, ro.

® See Bund. XXXI, 25.

7 A title of Péshydtana, written Xitr6-mainé in Bund. XXIX, 5.

® This was the twentieth nask or ‘ book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard; but the Dtnivagarkard and the Rivdyats make it the twenty-first, and say very

CHAPTER III, 23-25. 225

that is, celebrate ‘hem with the fire and waters, and such as is appointed about the fire and waters!”

little about its contents (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 133, 134). The Dinkard, in its eighth book, gives the following account of this Nask :—

225

that is, celebrate ‘hem with the fire and waters, and such as is appointed about the fire and waters!”

little about its contents (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 133, 134). The Dinkard, in its eighth book, gives the following account of this Nask :—

‘The Haddkht as it exists Aas three divisions among its 133 sections. The first Aas thirteen (twelve?) sections, treatises upon the nature of the recital of the Ahunavar, which is the spiritual benefit from chanting it aloud, and whatever is on the same subject. Admonition about selecting and keeping a spiritual and worldly high-priest, performing every duty as to the high-priest, and maintaining even those of various high-priests. On the twentyone chieftainships of the spirits in Afharmazd, and of the worldly existences in ZaratQst, among which are the worship of God and the management of the devout. On the duty reguzstée in each of the five different periods of the day and night, and she faée af the celestial bridge of him who shall be zealous in the celebration of the season-festivals ; he who does not provide the preparations for the feast of the season-festivals, and who is yet efficient in the other worship of God. On how to consider, and what to do with, a leader of the high-priest class amd a man of the :n/ferror classes ; he who atones for unimportant sin, and he who does not atone even for that which is important, and whatever is on the same subject. On the apparatus with which ploughed land (?) is prepared. On the manifestation of virtuous manhood, and the merit and advantage from uttering good words for desstng the eating and drinking of food and drink, and rebuking the inward talk of the demons. On the recitations at the five periods of the day, and the ceremonial invocation by name of many angels, each separately, and great information on the same subject; the worthiness of a man restrained by authority, the giving of life and body to the angels, the good rulers, and their examination and satisfaction; the blessing and winning words which are most successful in carrying off the affliction which proceeds from a fiend. On all-pleasing creativeness and omniscience, and all precedence (?), leadership, foresight(?), worthy liberality, virtue (?), and every proper cause and effect of righteousness; the individuality of righteousness, the opposition to the demons of Atharmazd’s opinion, and also much other information in the same section.

‘The middle division has 102 sections, treatises on spiritual and worldly diligence, the leadership of the diligent, and their mighty

[s] Q

226 BAHMAN YAST.

‘The middle division has 102 sections, treatises on spiritual and worldly diligence, the leadership of the diligent, and their mighty

[s] Q

226 BAHMAN YAST.

26. ‘And Néryésang proceeds, wth Srésh the righteous, from the good Kak4a-i-Dattik! to Kangdez, which the illustrious StyAvakhsh formed, and cries out from it thus: “Walk forth, O illustrious Péshyétani! O Attré-miyan son of VistAsp, glory of the Kaydns, just restorer of the religion! walk forth to these countries of Iran which I, Afharmazd, created! restore again the throne of sovereignty of the religion !”

27. ‘Those spirits move on, and they propitiate them; with holy-water the illustrious Péshyétand celebrates the DvAzdah-hémAst, with a hundred and fifty righteous who are disciples of Péshyétand, in black marten fur, and they have garments as it were of the good spirit. 28. They walk up with the words: “Hdmat, hokht, hdvarst?,” and consecrate

means, all former deeds of righteousness ; righteousness kindling the resolution is the reward of merit, each for each, and is adapted by it for that of which it is said that s# zs the Had6kht which is the maintaining of righteousness, so that they may make righteousness more abiding in the body of a man.

‘The last divi'ston has nineteen sections of trusty remedies, that is, remedies whose utterance aloud by the faithful is a chief resource among the creatures of God; also the nature of sayings full of humility, well-favoured, most select, and adapted for that of which it is said that I reverence that chief, the excellent and eminent H4dékht, of which they trust in the sustaining strength of every word of Zaratist. Perfect is the excellence of righteousness (Av. ashem vohfi vahistem astf).’

According to tradition three chapters of this Nask are still extant, being the Yast fragments XXI, XXII of Westergaard’s edition of the Avesta Texts; but they do not correspond to any part of the description in the Dinkard. For a description of Dvazdah-hémést see Chap. II, 59.

1 See Bund. XII, 7.

2 That is, ‘good thoughts, good words, and good deeds,’ a formula often uttered when commencing an important action.

CHAPTER III, 26-31. 227

For a description of Dvazdah-hémést see Chap. II, 59.

1 See Bund. XII, 7.

2 That is, ‘good thoughts, good words, and good deeds,’ a formula often uttered when commencing an important action.

CHAPTER III, 26-31. 227

the fire of the waters; wz¢# the illustrious Hadékht they bless me, Adharmazd, with the archangels; and after that it demolishes one-third of the opposition. 29. And the illustrious Péshyétand walks forth, with the hundred and fifty men who wear black marten fur, and they celebrate the rituals (yasn4n) of the Gadman-hémand (“ glorious’) fire, which they call the Réshané-kerp (“luminous form ”)!, which is established at the appointed place (d4té-gAs), the triumphant ritual of the Frdbé fire, Horvadad, and Amerédad, and the ceremonial (yazisn) with his priestly co-operation; they arrange and pray over the sacred twigs; and the ritual of Horvadad and Ameréddad, in the chapter of the code of religious formulas (ntrangistan)? demolishes three-thirds of the opposition. 30. Péshyétani son of Vist4asp walks forth, with the assistance of the Fréba ve, the fire Gisndsp, and the fire Barztn-Mitré%, to the great idol-temples, the abode of the demons‘; and the wicked evil spirit, Wrath with infuriate spear®, and all demons and fiends, evil races and wizards, arrive at the deepest adyss of hell; avd those idol-temples are extirpated by the exertions of the illustrious Péshydtand.

31. ‘And I, the creator Afharmazd, come to Mount Hdkatry4@* with the archangels, and I issue

1 See Bund. XVII, 5, 6. This appears to be an allusion to the removal of the sacred fire by Vistaésp, from the ‘ glorious’ mountain in Khv4rizem to the ‘ shining’ mountain in Kévulistan.

* See Chap. II, 37.

* Regarding these three manifestations of the sacred fire, see Bund. XVII, 3-9, SZS. XI, 8-10.

« Supplying the word s€d44n, ‘the demons,’ in accordance with §§ 36, 37; there being clearly some word omitted in K2o.

5 See Chap. II, 36. ¢ Hagar the lofty in Bund. XII, 2, 5.

228 BAHMAN YAST.

orders to the archangels that they should speak to the angels of the spiritual existences thus: “ Proceed to the assistance of the illustrious Péshyétana!” 32. Mitré of the vast cattle-pastures, Srésh the vigorous, Rashn the just, Vahram! the mighty, Astdd the victorious, and the glory of the religion of the Mazdayasnians, the stimulator of vegious formulas (ntrang), the arranger of the world, proceed? to the assistance of the illustrious Péshyétanf, through the order of which I, the creator, have just written °.

33. ‘Out of the demons of gloomy race the evil spirit cries to Mitré of the vast cattle-pastures thus: “ Stay above in truth ‘, thou Mitré of the vast cattlepastures!”

to the assistance of the illustrious Péshyétanf, through the order of which I, the creator, have just written °.

33. ‘Out of the demons of gloomy race the evil spirit cries to Mitré of the vast cattle-pastures thus: “ Stay above in truth ‘, thou Mitré of the vast cattlepastures!”

34. ‘And then Mitré of the vast cattle-pastures cries thus: “ Of these nine thousand years’ support, which during its beginning produced Dahak of evil religion, Frastyav of Tar, and Alexander® the Raman, the period of one thousand years of those leathern-belted demons with dishevelled hair is a more than moderate reign to produce,”

35. ‘The wicked evil spirit becomes confounded when he heard this; Mitré of the vast cattle-pastures will smite Wrath of the infuriate spear with

1 The fact that the angel V4hrém goes in his spiritual form to the assistance of Péshydtanf, rather militates against the idea that he also goes in the form of Vahrim the Varg4vand.

3 This verb is omitted by mistake in K2o.

5 Literally, ‘arrive at the writing.’

* Or, ‘stand up with honesty !’

5 The latter two names are here written Fras4v and Alasandar.

* From this it appears that the writer expected the evil reign of the unbelievers to last a thousand years, that is, till the end of Hfshédar’s millennium, about a. p. 1593-1635, which corresponds very closely with the reign of the great Shah "Abbas.

CHAPTER III, 32-39. 229

stupefaction; azd the wicked evil spirit flees, with the miscreations and evil progeny he flees back to the darkest recess of hell.) 136. And Mitré of the vast cattle-pastures cries to the illustrious Péshyétani thus: “Extirpate and utterly destroy the idoltemples, the abode of the demons! proceed to these countries of Iran which I, Atharmazd, created! restore again the throne of sovereignty of the religion over the wicked! when they see thee they will be terrified.”

37. ‘And the illustrious Péshyétand advances, and the fire Frdba, the fire Gdsnasp, and the triumphant fire Barzin-Mitré will smite the fiend of excessive strength ; he will extirpate the idol-temples that are the abode of demons; and they celebrate the ceremonial (yazisn), arrange the sacred twigs, solemnize the Dv4zdah-hémast, and praise me, Adharmazd, with the archangels; this is what I foretell’. 38. The illustrious Péshyétand walks forth to these countries of Iran which I, Aftharmazd, created, to the Arvand and Véh river?; when the wicked see him they will be terrified, those of the progeny of gloom and those not worthy.

39. ‘And regarding that Vahram the Varg4vand it is declared that he comes forth in full glory, fixes upon Vandta-khim (“a curbed temper”), and having intrusted 42m with the seat of mobadship of the

1 Or, perhaps, ‘ what I said before,’ being already narrated in § 29 as performed by Péshyétanfi before advancing far into Iran.

* The Tigris and the Oxus— Indus (see §§ 5, 21).

3 Probably a title of Péshyétani; a more obvious translation would be, ‘restrains a curbed temper, and is intrusted,’ &c., but it is hardly probable that the warrior prince Vahrém could become a priest. It is Vahraém’s business to restore the empire, leaving Péshyétanfi to restore the religion.

230 BAHMAN YAST.

mobads!, and the seat of true explanation of the religion, he restores again these countries of Iran which I, Adharmazd, created; and he drives ? away from the world covetousness, want, hatred, wrath, lust, envy, and wickedness. 40. And the wolf period goes away, and the sheep period comes on; they establish the fire Fréba, the fire Gdsn4sp, and the fire Bdrzin-Mitré again at their proper places, and they will properly supply the firewood and incense ; and the wicked evil spirit becomes confounded and unconscious, with the demons and the progeny of gloom. 41. And so the illustrious Péshyétani speaks thus: “Let the demon be destroyed, and the witch be destroyed! let the fiendishness and vileness of the demons be destroyed! and let the gloomy progeny of the demons be destroyed! The glory® of the religion of the Mazdayasnians prospers, and let it prosper! let the family‘ of the liberal and just, who are doers of good deeds, prosper! and let the throne of the religion and sovereignty have a good restorer!” 42. Forth comes the illustrious Péshydétand, forth he comes with a hundred and fifty men of the disciples who wear black marten fur, and they take the throne of their own religion and sovereignty.’

43. Adharmazd said to Zaratist the Spitaman: ‘This is what I foretell, when it is the end of thy millennium it is the beginning of ¢ha¢ of Hdshédar ®.

1 The supreme high-priesthood, or primacy.

2 Merely a guess, as the verb varafs€d is difficult to understand.

® Kao has nism6, ‘soul,’ but the very-similarly written gadman, ‘glory,’ is a more likely reading here (see § 32).

* Reading dQidak instead of ridak, as in Chap. II, 47.

5 The writer having detailed the supernatural means employed for restoring the religion, now returns to the birth of H&shédar

CHAPTER III, 40-46. 231

44. Regarding Hashédar it is declared that he will be born in 16001, and at thirty years of age he comes to a conference with me, Aftharmazd, and receives the religion. 45. When he comes away from the conference he cries to the sun with the swift horse, thus: “Stand still!”

46. ‘The sun with the swift horse stands still ten

45. When he comes away from the conference he cries to the sun with the swift horse, thus: “Stand still!”

46. ‘The sun with the swift horse stands still ten

(§ 13) for the purpose of mentioning some of his actions, and making the chronology of his millennium rather more clear. Nothing is said here about his miraculous birth, the details of which are given in the seventh book of the Dinkard very much as they are found in the Persian Rivayats. The Dinkard states that thirty years before the end of Zarat@st’s millennium a young maiden bathing in certain water, and drinking it, becomes pregnant through the long-preserved seed of Zaratfst (see Bund. XXXII, 8, 9), and subsequently gives birth to Hshédar.

1 There seems to be no other rational way of understanding this number than by supposing that it represents the date of HAshédar’s birth, counting from the beginning of Zaratfst’s millennium. According to this view Hfshédar was to be born in the six hun- ‘dredth year of his own millennium, and not at its beginning, as § 13 seems to imply, nor nearly thirty years earlier, as the Dinkard asserts. As the beginning of his millennium may be fixed about A.D. 593-635 (see note on § 11), the writer must have expected him to be born about a.p. 1193-1235; a time which was probably far in the future when he was writing. And as Vahram the Vargavand was to be born when Hfshédar was thirty years of age (compare §§ 14, 44), and was to march into Iran at the age of thirty (§ 17), the great conflict of the nations (§§ 8, 19-22) was expected to begin about a.p. 1253-1295, and to continue till near the end of the millennium, about a.p. 1593-1635, when PéshyétanQ was expected to appear (§ 51) and to restore the ‘good’ religion (§§ 26, 37, 42). An enthusiastic Parsi interpreter of prophecy might urge that though this period did not witness any revival of his religion, it did witness a restoration of the Persian empire under Shah ’Abb§s, and also the first beginning of British power in India, which has been so great a benefit to the scanty remnant of his fellow-countrymen.

2 The usual epithet of the sun in the Avesta.

232 BAHMAN YAST.

days and nights; and when this happens all the people of the world abide by the good religion of the Mazdayasnians. 47. Mitré of the vast cattlepastures cries to Hashédar, son of Zaratdst, thus : “O Hishéaar, restorer of the true religion! cry to the sun with the swift horse thus: ‘Move on!’ for it is dark in the regions of Arz4h and Savah, Fradadafsh and Vidadafsh, Vérdbarst and Véridgarst, and the illustrious Khvantras }.”

48. ‘Hadshédar son of Zaratdst cries, to the sun he cries, thus: “Move on!” 49. The sun with the swift horse moves on, avd Vargavand? and all mankind fully believe in the good religion of the Mazdayasnians.’

‘Hadshédar son of Zaratdst cries, to the sun he cries, thus: “Move on!” 49. The sun with the swift horse moves on, avd Vargavand? and all mankind fully believe in the good religion of the Mazdayasnians.’

50. Adharmazd spoke thus: ‘O Zaratist the Spitam4n! this is what I foretell, that this one brings the creatures back to their proper state. 51. When it is near the end of the millennium Péshydtand * son of Vistaésp comes into notice, who is a Kay4n that advances triumphantly; and those enemies who relied upon fiendishness, such as the Tark, Arab, and Rfman, and the vile ones who control‘ the Iranian sovereign with insolence and oppression and enmity to the sovereignty, destroy the fire and make the religion weak ; and they convey ¢hety power and success to him and every one who accepts the law and religion willingly; if he

* The seven regions of the earth (see Bund. XI, 2, 3).

* It is just possible to read, ‘the sun with the swift horse, the splendid, moves on, and all mankind fully believe, &c. But if the reading in the text be correct it effectually disposes of the idea of Vahram being an incarnation of the angel, as an angel would require no miracle to make him believe in the religion.

5 See §§ 25-30.

‘ This verb is doubtful, as most of the word is torn off in K20.

CHAPTER III, 47-55. 233

accept it unwillingly the law and religion ever destroy Aim till it is the end of the whole millennium.

52. ‘And, afterwards, when the millennium of Hashédar-mah comes, through Hfshédar-méh ? the creatures become more progressive, and he utterly destroys the fiend of serpent origin *; and Péshyé6tani son of Vistasp becomes, in like manner, highpriest and primate (rad) of the world‘. 53. In that millennium of Hishédar-m&h mankind become so versed in medicine, and keep and bring physic and remedies so much in use, that when they are confessedly at the point of death they do not thereupon die, nor when they smite and slay ¢hem with the sword and knife °.

54. ‘Afterwards, one begs a gift of amy description out of the allowance of. heretics, axa owing to depravity and heresy they do not give z¢. 55. And Aharman rises through that spite * on to the moun-

' This appears to be the meaning, but the latter part of the sentence is not very clear.

* See Bund. XXXII, 8. The name is written Khfrshéd-mah in Kao. The Dinkard gives the same account of the miraculous birth of H@shédar-mah as of the first H&shédar (see note on § 43); it also repeats the legend of the sun standing still, but for the longer period of twenty days; all which details are also found in the Persian Rivayats.

3 Av. azikithra; such creatures are mentioned in Ardavahist Yt. 8, 10, 11, 15; but As-i Dah4k, ‘the destructive serpent,’ is probably meant here (see §§ 56-61).

‘ As in the previous millennium. According to the chronology deduced from § 44 the millennium of Hfshédar-m4h, which corresponds to the twelfth and Jast millennium of Bund. XXXIV, is now near the middle of its third century.

5 The sentence is either defective or obscure, but this appears to be its meaning.

* The evil spirit is encouraged, by an act of religious toleration, apparently, to recommence his manceuvres for injuring mankind.

234 BAHMAN YAST.

tain of DimAvand!, which is the direction of Bévarasp, and shouts thus: “ Now it is nine thousand years, and Fréddn is not living; why do you not rise up, although these thy fetters are not removed, when ? this world is full of people, and they have brought them from the enclosure which Yim formed 3?”

56. ‘After that apostate shouts like this, azd because of it, Az-i Dah4k* stands up before Az, but, through fear of the likeness of Fréddn in the body of Frédfin, he does not first remove those fetters and stake from Azs trunk until Aharman removes them. 57. And the vigour of Az-i Dah&k increases, the fetters being removed from Azs trunk, and his impetuosity remains; he swallows down the apostate on the spot®, and rushing into the world to perpetrate sin, he commits innumerable grievous sins; he swallows down one-third of mankind, cattle, sheep, and other creatures of Adharmazd; he smites the water, fire, and vegetation, and commits grievous sin.

58. ‘And, afterwards, the water, fire, and vegetation stand before Adharmazd the lord in lamentation, and make this complaint: “Make Frédfn alive again! so that he may destroy Az-i Dah4k; for if thou, O Adharmazd! dost not do this, we cannot

1 Here written DimbhAvand (see Bund. XII, 31).

3 Reading amat, ‘ when,’ instead of mfn, ‘ which’ (see the note on Bund. I, 7).

5 The var-i Yim kard (see Bund. XXIX, 14). The men and creatures who are supposed to be preserved in this enclosure are expected to replenish the world whenever it has been desolated by wars and oppression.

“ Whose surname is Bévardsp (see Bund. XXIX, 9).

5 The Paz. MSS. end here.

CHAPTER III, 56-63. 235

exist in the world; the fire says thus: I w2d/ not heat; and the water says thus: I w// not flow.”

59. ‘And then I, Attharmazd the creator, say to Srésh and Néryésang the angel: “Shake the body of Keresdsp the S4mén, till he rises up!”

60. ‘Then Srésh and Nérydésang the angel go to Keresdsp}; three times they utter a cry, and the fourth time S4m rises up with triumph, and goes to meet Az-i Dahak. 61. And? S4m does not listen to his words, and the triumphant club strikes him on the head, and smites and kills 42m; afterwards, desolation azd adversity depart from this world, while I make a beginning of the millennium®. 62. Then Séshyans* makes the creatures again pure, and the resurrection and future existence occur.’

63. May the end be in peace, pleasure, and joy, by the will of God (yazd4n6)! so may it be! even more so may it be!

62. Then Séshyans* makes the creatures again pure, and the resurrection and future existence occur.’

63. May the end be in peace, pleasure, and joy, by the will of God (yazd4n6)! so may it be! even more so may it be!

1 Also called Sam in this same section; he was lying in a trance in the plain of Pésyansaf (see Bund. XXIX, 7-9).

2 Reading afas instead of minas (see Chap. II, 4, note 2).

8’ The thirteenth millennium, or first of the future existence, when Séshyans appears. The Dinkard and the Persian Rivayats recount the same legends regarding the miraculous birth of Séshyans, and of the sun standing still (for thirty days), as they do with regard to Hfshédar (see note on § 43).

‘ See Bund. XXXII, 8.

Digitized by Google

SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST

THE PROPER AND IMPROPER.

AN OLD.

PAHLAVI RIVAYAT

MISCELLANY OF TRADITIONAL MEMORANDA.

OBSERVATIONS.

1-5. (The same as on p. 2.)

6. Abbreviations used are:—Af. for Afringan. Av. for Avesta. AV. for the Book of Arda-Viraf, ed. Hoshangji and Haug. Bund. for Bundahis, as translated in this volume. B. Yt. for Bahman Yast, as translated in this volume. Chald. for Chaldee. Farh. Okh. for Farhang-i Oim-khadfk, ed. Hoshangji and Haug. Haug’s Essays, for Essays on the Sacred Language, Writings, and Religion of the Parsis, by Martin Haug, and edition. Huz. for Huzvaris. Lev. for Leviticus. Mkh. for Mainy6-i-khard, ed. West. Nir. for Nirangistin. Pahl. for Pahlavi. Paz. for Pazand. Pers. for Persian. Sls. for Shfyast l4-shdyast, as here translated. SZS. for Selections of Zad-sparam, as translated in this volume. W. for Westergaard. Vend. for Vendfd4d, ed. Spiegel. Visp. for Visparad, ed. Spiegel. Yas. for Yasna, ed. Spiegel. Yt. for Yast, ed. Westergaard.

7. The manuscripts mentioned in the notes are :—

Bag (written a.p. 1679), a Rivayat MS., No. 29 of the University Library at Bombay.

K2o (about 500 years old), No. 20 in the University Library at Kopenhagen.

L7, Lig, L2a, &c. are MSS. No. 7, 15, 22, &c. in the India Office Library at London.

Mg (written a. pd. 1723), No. 5 of the Haug Collection in the State Library at Munich.

M6 (written a. p. 1397), No. 6 of the same Collection.

Mg (modern), No. g of the same Collection.

TD (written about a. p. 1530), a MS. of the Bundahis belonging to Mobad Tehmuras Dinshawji Anklesaria at Bombay.

SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

Part 1.—TZhe Original Treatise.

Cuapter I.

o. In the name of God (yazd4n) and the good creation may there be the good health, long life, and abundant wealth of all the good and the rightdoers specially for him whose writing I am?.

1. As revealed by the Avesta, it is said in the Vendidad? that these seven degrees (payak) of sin

1 See the note on B. Yt. I, o.

1. As revealed by the Avesta, it is said in the Vendidad? that these seven degrees (payak) of sin

1 See the note on B. Yt. I, o.

* Referring to Vend. IV, 54-114, where seven classes of assault and their respective punishments are detailed. In our text eight classes of sin are named, although only seven degrees are mentioned; the second and third classes being apparently arranged together, as one degree of sin in § 2. Or the inconsistency may have arisen from the addition of the Farmén, a class of sin or crime not mentioned in the Vendidad, unless, indeed, it be the farm4n spékhtand, ‘neglect of commandment’ (referring probably to priest's commands), of Pahl. Vend. VI, 15. The other seven classes are thus described in Pahl. Vend. IV, 54-57, 79, 85, 93, 99, 106 :—

‘By the man whose weapon (or blow) is upraised for striking a man, that which is his Agerept is thus implanted in 42m. When it Aas moved forward—that is, he makes 7/ advance—#? is thus his Avoirist, that is, Avéirfst is implanted in him aad the Agerept merges into it, some say that it does not exist. When he comes on to him wth thoughts of malice—that is, he places a hand upon him—+‘ is thus his Aredfs, that is, Ared(s is implanted in him and the Avdirist merges into it, some say that it does not exist. A+ the fifth AredQs the man even becomes a Tan4p(har ; ¢hings at

240 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

are mentioned in revelation, which are Farm4n, Agerept, Avoirtst?, Aredis, Khér, Bazat, Yat, and Tanapdhar*. 2. A Farman is the weight of four

sunrise (avar-khfrshédth) and in the forenoon (44itth = £4stth) are no more apart. . . . Whoever inflicts the Aredfis blow on a man ? ¢s one-fifth of a wound (résh). . . . Whoever inflicts that which is a cruel Khér (‘hurt’) on a man 7f ts one-fourth of a wound. . . . Whoever ‘inflicts that which is a bleeding Khér on a man ?#/ ts one-third of a wound. . . . Whoever shall give a man a bone-breaking Khér ## ts half a wound. . . . Whoever strikes a man the blow which puts Pim out of consciousness shall give a whole wound.’

This description does not mention Bas4i and Y4t, unless they be the two severer kinds of Khér; but Baz4f occurs in Pahl.Vend. IV, 115, V, 107, XIII, 38, though Y4t seems not to be mentioned in the Vendidad. Aredfis occurs again in Pahl. Vend. IfI, 151, and Khér in Pahl. Vend. III, 48, XIII, 38, and Yas. LVI, iv, 2.

1 Also written av6irist, avirist, alvirist, avOkfrist, and avakdrist in other places.

* Five of these names are merely slight alterations of the Av. _ agerepta, avaoirista, aredus, vara, and tanuperetha (peretétanu or peshétanu). The last seven degrees are also noticed in a very obscure passage in Farh. Okh. pp. 36, 37 (correcting the text from the old MSS. M6 and K2o) as follows :—

_ agerepta, avaoirista, aredus, vara, and tanuperetha (peretétanu or peshétanu). The last seven degrees are also noticed in a very obscure passage in Farh. Okh. pp. 36, 37 (correcting the text from the old MSS. M6 and K2o) as follows :—

‘Agere pt, “seized,” is that when they shall take up a weapon for smiting an innocent person ; Avé6irfst, “turning,” is that when one turns the weapon upon an innocent person , when through sinfulness one lays the weapon on a sinner the name is Aredfs; for whatever reaches the source of life the name is Khér; one explains Bas4f as “ smiting,” and Yat as “ going to,” andthe soul of man ought to be withstanding, as a counterstroke is the penalty for a Y4t when it Aas been so much away from the abode of life. Jn like manner Agerept, Avéirist, Aredfs, Khér, Baz4t, and Yat are also called good works, which are performed in like proportions, and are called by the names of weights and measures 7” the same manner. Of peshdtanus tanfim pairyéité the meaning is a Tanap(har; as they call a good work of three hundred a Tanaphar, on account of the three hundred like proportions of the same kind, the meaning of its name, Tan4pfhar, thereupon enters into sin, .. . A Khér is just that description of wound from which

CHAPTER I, 2. 241

stirs, and each stir is four dirhams (gdgan)’ ; of Agerept and Avédirist that which is least is a scourging (taz4n6), and the amount of them which was specially ¢4a¢ which is most is said ¢o de one dirham?; an Aredds is thirty s¢évs®; a Khér is sixty stirs; a Bazai is ninety stirs; a YAt is a hundred and eighty stirs; and a Tandpdhar is three hundred stirs +.

the blood comes, irrespective of where, how, how much, and wherewith it is inflicted ; 3¢ zs that which is a wound from the beginning, and that which will result therefrom.’

The application of this scale of offences is, however, not confined to these particular forms of assault, but has been extended (since the Avesta was compiled) to all classes of sins, and also to the good works which are supposed to counterbalance them.

1 The dirham has been variously estimated, at different times, as a weight of forty-five to sixty-seven grains, but perhaps fifty grains may be taken as the meaning of the text, and the stir may, therefore, be estimated at 200 grains. The Greeks used both these weights, which they called 8payyi and orarnp.

The Greeks used both these weights, which they called 8payyi and orarnp.

2 The amounts of these first three degrees of sin are differently stated in other places (see Chaps. XI, 2, XVI, 1-3, 5). It is difficult to understand why the amounts of Agerept and Av6irtst should here be stated as less than that of Farman, and some Parsis, therefore, read vihast (as an irregular form of vist, ‘ twenty’) instead of vés-ast, ‘is most,’ so that they may translate the amount as ‘twenty dirhams ;’ but to obtain this result they would have to make further alterations in the Pahlavi text. Ina passage quoted by Spiegel (in his Traditionelle Literatur der Parsen, p. 88) from the Rivayat MS. Pra, in the Bibliothtque Nationale at Paris, it is stated that Farman is seven stirs, Agerept twelve stirs, and Avéirist fifteen stirs. Another Riva4yat makes the Farman eight stirs,

5 All MSS. have Aredfis st 30, ‘an Aredfis is thirty (30),’ leaving it doubtful whether dirhams or stirs are meant; and the same mode of writing is adopted in Chap. XI, 2.

‘ All authorities agree about the amounts of the last five degrees of sin. These amounts are the supposed weights of the several sins in the golden scales of the angel Rashnfi (see AV. V, 5), when the soul is called to account, for its actions during life, after the

[5] R

242 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

3. In the administration of the primitive faith? there are some who have been of different opinions

V, 5), when the soul is called to account, for its actions during life, after the

[5] R

242 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

3. In the administration of the primitive faith? there are some who have been of different opinions

third night after death (see Mkh. II, 114-122). Its sins are supposed to be then weighed against its good works, which are estimated by the same scale of degrees (see the passage already quoted from Farh. Okh. in p. 240, note 2), and it is sent direct to heaven, or hell, or an intermediate place, according as the good works or sins preponderate, or are both equal. In the Avesta of the Vendidad, however, whence these degrees are derived, we find them forming merely a graduated scale of assaults, extending from first lifting the hand to smite even unto manslaughter ; and for each of these seven degrees of assault a scale of temporal punishments is prescribed, according to the number of times the offence has been committed. These punishments consist of a uniform series of lashes with a horse-whip or scourge, extending from a minimum of five lashes to a maximum of two hundred (see Vend. IV, 58-114); each degree of assault commencing at a different point on the scale of punishments for the first offence, and gradually rising through the scale with each repetition of the offence, so that the more aggravated assaults attain the maximum punishment by means of a smaller number of repetitions. Thus, the punishments prescribed for Agerepta, from the first to the eighth offence, are 5, 10, 15, 30, 50, 70, 90, and 200 lashes respectively ; those for Avaoirista, from the first to the seventh offence, extend on the same scale from 10 to 200 lashes; those for Aredus, from the first to the sixth offence, are from 15 to 200 lashes; those for a bruised hurt (4vara), from the first to the fifth offence, are from 30 to 200 lashes; those for a bleeding hurt, from the first to the fourth offence, are from 50 to 200 lashes; those for a bone-breaking hurt, from the first to the third offence, are from 70 to 200 lashes ; and those for a hurt depriving of consciousness or life, for the first and second offences, are go and 200 lashes. The maximum punishment of 200 lashes is prescribed only when the previous offences have not been atoned for, and it is to be inflicted in all such cases, however few or trifling the previous assaults have been.

1 In M6 péryédkéshih, but péryédkésh4n, ‘ of those of the primitive faith,’ in K2o; from the Av. paoirySdkaésha of Yas. I, 47, I, 65, IV, 53, XXII, 33, Fravardin Yt. 0, go, 156, Af. Rapithwin, 2. It is a term applied to what is considered as the

CHAPTER I, 3. 243

about it, for Gégésasp' spoke otherwise than the teaching ? (2Astak) of Ataré-AQharmazd?, and Séshyans‘ otherwise than the teaching of Ataré-frébag Nésat®, and Médék-mah® otherwese than the teaching of Gégésasp’, and Afarg® otherwise than the teaching

true Mazdayasnian religion in all ages, both before and after the time of Zaratist.

(2Astak) of Ataré-AQharmazd?, and Séshyans‘ otherwise than the teaching of Ataré-frébag Nésat®, and Médék-mah® otherwese than the teaching of Gégésasp’, and Afarg® otherwise than the teaching

true Mazdayasnian religion in all ages, both before and after the time of Zaratist.

* One of the old commentators whose opinions are frequently quoted in Pahlavi books, as in Chap. II, 74, 82, 119, Pahl. Vend. ITI, 48, 138, 151, IV, 35, V, 14, 121, VI, 9, 64, VI, 6, 136, VIII, 64, 236, XV, 35, 48, 56, 67, XVI, 5, XVIII, 98, 124, and thirteen times in the Nirangistén. His name is sometimes written Gésasp (as it is here both in M6 and K2o) and sometimes Gégésésp.

? Probably a written exposition or commentary is meant.

* This commentator is mentioned once in the Nirangistan as Ataré A@harmazdan.

“ This commentator is mentioned in Chaps. II, 56, 74, 80, 118, 119, III, 13, VI, 4, 5; also in Pahl. Vend. III, 64, 69, 151, IV, 6, V, 48, 80, 107, 121, 146, 153, VI, 15, 64, 73, VII, 4, 136, 168, VUI, 28, 59, 303, [X, 184, XIII, 20, XVI, 7, 10, 17, 20-22, 27, XVIII, 98, and forty-six times in the Nirangistén. He was a namesake of the last of the future apostles and sons of Zaratfist (see Bund. XXXII, 8), and his name is often written Sdsh4ns and read Saoshyés or Sésy6s by Pazand writers.

5 This commentator is mentioned once in the Nfrangistén, and may probably be the Ataré-frobag of B. Yt. 1, 7; compare also Nésaf Bfrz-Mitr6, the name of another commentator, in Chap. VI, 18.

* This commentator is mentioned in Chaps. II, 1, 11, 12, 89, V, 5, 6; also in Pahl. Vend. III, 151, V, 6, 58, 107, VIII, 48, 110, IX, 132, XIII, 99, XIV, 37, and four times in the Nfrangistan. His name is sometimes written Médy6k-m4h or Matdék-mah, and he was a namesake of Zaratfist’s cousin and first disciple (see Bund. XXXII, 2, 3). The Vagarkard-i Dinik professes to have been compiled by Médy6k-mah, but there appear to have been several priests of this name (see Bund. XXXIII, 1).

7 Gésasp in M6.

* This commentator is mentioned in Chaps. II, 2, 64, 73, 88, 115, V, 5, 6; also in Pahl. Vend. III, 48, 115, V, 6, 14, 22, 58,

R 2

244 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

of Séshyans. 4. And all those of the primitive faith rely upon these six? teachings, and there are some who rely more weakly and some more strongly upon some of them.

146, VI, 9, VII, 6, 61, 93, 136, VIII, 48, 64, 110, 250, IX, 132, XIII, 99, XIV, 14, 37, XIX, 84, Pahl. Yas. LXIV, 37, once in Farh. Okh., and thirty-eight times in the Nirangistan.

1 Both MSS. have ‘three,’ although four teachings and six commentators are mentioned in the previous section, and a fifth ‘teaching’ is mentioned in Chap. II, 2. The original reading was more probably ‘six’ than ‘four,’ as a Pahlavi ‘six’ requires merely the omission of a cipher to become ‘ three,’ whereas a Pahlavi ‘ four’ must be altered to produce the same blunder.

II, 2. The original reading was more probably ‘six’ than ‘four,’ as a Pahlavi ‘six’ requires merely the omission of a cipher to become ‘ three,’ whereas a Pahlavi ‘ four’ must be altered to produce the same blunder.

Several other commentators are mentioned in Pahlavi books, such as Atar6-p4d, son of DAd-farukh, twice in the Nirangistan; Azadmard nine times in Nir.; Bar6shand Adharmazd once in Nir.; Dad Aftharmazd in B, Yt. I, 7, ITI, 16, Pahl. Yas. X, 57, XI, 22; Dadfarukh in Pahl. Vend. V, 112, VI, 64, and twice in Nir.; Dad-i-véh seventeen times in Nir.; Farukhé thrice in Nir.; Kiratand-bagéd in Pahl. Vend. V, 80, VI, 15, [X, 184, XIII, 20, he is called the Kirméanik in Pahl. Vend. IV, 35, and Dastfr Hoshangji thinks his name is merely a variant of the next; Kfshtand-bfigéd in Sls. II, 57, 81, 118, VI, 6, VIII, 17, Pahl. Vend. III, 64, 69, IV, 6, V, 48, VI, 53, 64, 73, VIII, 28, XVI, 17, 21, 22, 27, and twenty-two times in Nir. ; Mah-Afharmazd in Pahl. Vend. VIT, 82 ; M&h-gédsasp6, M&hg6séspd, Mah-géspé, or M4h-vasp in Pahl. Yas. IX, 33, Pahl. Vend. III, 138, and ten times in Nir.; M&hvand-déd or Méh-vindad in B. Yt. III, 3, Pahl. Yas. IX, 33, X, 57, XI, 22, XIX, 27; Mard-bid in Sls. II, 86, and twice in Nir., where he is called the son of DAdgun; Néryésang in Sls. VIII, 13, Pahl. Vend. V, 22; Nikhshapahar, or Nishapfhar in Pahl. Vend. III, 151, V, 112, VI, 71, VUI, 64, XVI, 10, 17, AV.I, 35, and twenty-four times in Nir.; Nésai Bfrz-Mitr6 in Sls. VIII, 18; Parfk or Pirik in Pahl. Vend. II, 138, V, 14, 134, VII, 82, 93, VIII, 64, and once in Nir.; Réshan or Réshané (which, as the Sikand-gQmanf states, was the name of a commentary written by Réshan son of Ataré-frébag) in Sis. II, 39, 86, 107, B. Yt. III, 3, Pahl. Yas. IX, 5, 14, Pahl. Vend. III, 48, V, 112, 134, 176, VII, 93, XVII, 11, and eleven times in Nir.; disciples of Vakht-Afridd (possibly the Bakht-dfrid of Sls. XX, 11, B. Yt. I, 7) are mentioned once in Nir.; Vand-AQharmazd in Sls. II, 2, 6, 44, XIV, 5, Pahl. Vend. VI, 73; and Véh-dést once in

CHAPTERS I, 4-II, 2. 245

CuaptTer II.

1. For in the third fargard (‘chapter’) of the Vendidad of Méa@ék-m4h ! 2¢ is declared that when life is resigned without effort®, at the time when the life departs, when a dog is tied to his foot, even then the Nasfs® rushes upon it, and afterwards, when seen by it, the Nasis is destroyed by it. 2. This is where z¢ zs stated which is the dog which destroys the Nasds‘, the shepherd's dog, the village-dog, the blood-hound, the slender hound®, and the rikdantk®;

the Nirangistén. It must, however, be observed that the reading of some of these names is very uncertain.

1 Alluding probably to Médék-m4h’s complete commentary on the Vendidad (now no longer extant), as the commentary on Pahl. Vend. III, 48, which treats of Sag-did or dog-gaze, does not mention Méd6dk-mah or any of the details described here in the text ; these details, however, are to be found in Pahl. Vend. VII, 4.

Vend. III, 48, which treats of Sag-did or dog-gaze, does not mention Méd6dk-mah or any of the details described here in the text ; these details, however, are to be found in Pahl. Vend. VII, 4.

* Reading amat bar4 zér gan dad. This phrase occurs only in M6 (as a marginal note) and in the text of its descendants. Assuming that bar& may be a miswriting of pavan (see p. 176, note 5), we might read amat pavan zér shdy4d, ‘when he shall wash with holy-water.’

* The ‘corruption’ which is supposed to enter a corpse shortly after death, whence it issues in the form of a fiend and seizes upon any one who touches the corpse, unless it has been destroyed, or driven away, by the gaze of a dog, as mentioned in the text (compare Vend. VIII, 38-48). The carcase of a dog is considered equally contagious with the corpse of a human being, and when the fiend of corruption (Nasfs or Nas of Bund. XXVIII, 29) has seized upon any one, it can be driven out only by a long and troublesome form of purification described in Vend. VIII, r11- 228, IX, 4-117.

* This statement is now to be found in Pahl. Vend. VII, 4.

® See Bund. XIV, 19. The Persian Rivayats of Kamah Bahrah and K4fs Kaman (quoted in B2g) describe these dogs as ‘the shepherd’s dog, the house-dog, the strange or tame (gharib) dog, and the puppy.’ ;

* Probably the Av. sukuruna of Vend. V, 100, XIII, 48, which

246 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

and as to the rfikdntk there have been divers opinions, as Vand-Afiharmazd! asserted, from the teaching of Afarg, that it does not destroy 74. 3. The dog destroys the Nasfs at the time when it sees the flesh, and when it sees the hair or nails it does not destroy z¢*. 4. A blind dog also destroys z¢ at the time when it places a paw? on the corpse ; and when it places z¢ upon the hair or nails it does not destroy 7¢4. 5. The birds which destroy the Nasts are three: the mountain kite, the black crow, and the vulture®; the bird, moreover, destroys z¢ at the time when z¢s shadow falls upon it; when it sees it in the water, a mirror, or a looking-glass, it does not destroy z¢°,

is translated by hfikar or hfikfr in the Pahlavi version. This fifth kind of dog is called ‘the blind (kfir) dog’ in the Persian Rivayats; but Pahl. Vend. VII, 4 asserts that ‘Sésh4ns said the rikuntk also destroys it, and then speaks of the blind dog as in § 4.

' See the note on Chap. I, 4.

* This is also stated in Pahl. Vend. III, 138.

5 See Pahl. Vend. VII, 4.

‘ The Persian Rivayats say this is because the Nas@s is concealed beneath the hair and nails (compare Vend. VII, 70).

® These are the birds ‘created for devouring dead matter’ (see Bund. XIX, 25). Pahl. Vend. VII, 4 substitutes an eagle (dalman) for the vulture.

5 See Pahl. Vend. VII, 4.

‘ The Persian Rivayats say this is because the Nas@s is concealed beneath the hair and nails (compare Vend. VII, 70).

® These are the birds ‘created for devouring dead matter’ (see Bund. XIX, 25). Pahl. Vend. VII, 4 substitutes an eagle (dalman) for the vulture.

° This sentence is probably defective, as the last clause evidently refers to the dog’s gaze (see Pahl. Vend. III, 138), and not to the bird’s shadow; the rule, however, is applicable to both. Thus the Persian Rivayats state that if the bird’s shadow falls upon the hair or the nails of the corpse, or if the bird’s shadow, or the dog’s gaze falls upon a corpse in the water, or upon its reflection in a mirror, the Nasfs is not destroyed. Dastir Jamaspji is of opinion that the utility of the bird’s shadow is intended to apply only to. cases of death in uninhabited places, where a dog is not procurable. As all three birds are such as feed upon corpses, it seems probable that the rule as to their utility was intended to pre-

CHAPTER II, 3-7. 247

6. Vand-Adharmazd said, where a pregnant woman is to be carried by two men’, both are to be cleansed by the Bareshnim ceremony*, and the head of the corpse, when they carry it away, is to be set towards the Dakhma’. 7. And on account of contamination

vent any neglect of corpses found in wild places, where some of these birds would be sure to approach and let their shadows fall upon the dead, after which the finder of the corpse would suppose that the Nass was destroyed or driven away, and the corpse safer to approach.

1 This is an exceptional case, when not more than two men are available; the usual custom (see Chap. X, 10) is to employ four men and two dogs (double the usual number) in disposing of the corpse of a pregnant woman, on account of the double risk of contamination, owing to the Nas@s, or fiend of corruption, having seized upon two corpses at once. In consequence of the exceptional nature of the case, the mode of purification is also exceptional.

2 A long purification ceremony lasting nine nights, and described in Vend. IX, 1-145. Its name, according to Dastir Hoshangji, is derived from the first word of the instructions for sprinkling the unclean person, which commence (Vend. IX, 48) as follows: Bareshnfim hé vaghdhanem paourum paiti-hi#dis, ‘sprinkle in front on the top of his head.’ As it is usual to quote chapters by their initial words, the initial word of these instructions for the ceremony became a name for the ceremony itself.

IX, 48) as follows: Bareshnfim hé vaghdhanem paourum paiti-hi#dis, ‘sprinkle in front on the top of his head.’ As it is usual to quote chapters by their initial words, the initial word of these instructions for the ceremony became a name for the ceremony itself.

5 The building in which the dead are finally deposited; here called by its Huzvaris name, khazin. The Dakhmas used by the Parsis in India are like low circular towers in external appearance, and consist of a high wall enclosing a larger or smaller circular space which is open to the sky. The only opening in the wall is a small doorway, closed with an-iron door. In the centre of the circular area is a circular well a few feet in depth, and the space around it is paved so as to slope gently downwards from the enclosing wall to the brink of the well. This paved annular area is divided (by shallow gutters grooved into its surface) into spaces, each large enough for one corpse to be laid upon it, with the head towards the wall and the feet towards the well. These spaces are arranged in two or more concentric rings around the well, and the gutters (which isolate each space on all four sides) drain into the

248 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

(padvishak)! two are not to be carried at one time, and two by one person are not proper; one dog and one person are proper*®. 8. Every one who understands the care of a corpse is proper; two boys of eight years old, who understand the care, are proper; a woman free from menstruation, or free from dead

well. After a sufficient time has elapsed the dry bones are said to be thrown into the well, and when the well is full the Dakhma ought to be finally closed, and another one brought into use. These Dakhmas are erected upon some dry and barren spot, remote from habitations and water; upon the summit of a hill, if possible, as prescribed in Vend. VI, 93, and usually more than a mile from the town. In Bombay the town has gradually approached the Dakhmas, and to some extent surrounded them, but has been kept away from their immediate vicinity by the judicious measures of influential Parsis, who have acquired all the neighbouring land, and refrain from building on it. The reason for thus exposing their dead to the sun and carnivorous birds is that the Parsis consider fire, water, and earth too sacred to be defiled by corpses; and they have less consideration for the air. Next to burning, the Parsi mode of disposing of the dead is the most rapid and effectual, as it avoids most of the concentrated evils which must accumulate in crowded cemeteries in the course of time, and which require ages to dissipate. As it is, most of the offensive effluvium in the immediate vicinity of a Dakhma arises not from direct contamination of the air, but indirectly through the ground, which becomes polluted, in the course of time, by impure filtrations.

As it is, most of the offensive effluvium in the immediate vicinity of a Dakhma arises not from direct contamination of the air, but indirectly through the ground, which becomes polluted, in the course of time, by impure filtrations.

1 Dastir Jamaspji prefers reading patéshak, and thinks it means ‘necessity,’ as in cases where two deaths occur nearly simultaneously in the same house, when both corpses cannot be removed the same day. Such a meaning might suit this passage, but the word occurs again, in § 33 and Chap. IX, 7, where it can refer only to ‘contamination, and the etymology of padvishak (Av. paiti + vish) is plain enough.

7 That is, when two persons cannot be found to carry a corpse, one can do it alone, provided he holds a dog by a string. This course is adopted, Dastfir Jam4spji says, when a person happens to die in a place where only one Parsi is available.

CHAPTER I, 8-11. 249

matter ', or a man, with a woman or a child of eight years old, is proper.

g. It is not to be carried all covered up’, for that is burying the corpse; to carry z¢ in the rain is worthy of death®. 10. When clouds have been around‘, it is allowable to carry z¢ away from the house; and when rain sets in upon the road it is not allowable to carry z¢ back to the house; é#¢ when it is before a veranda (d4hliz) oxe should put z¢ down there; that is allowable when he who owns the veranda is apprehensive, azd when he does not allow z¢ inside; and, afterwards, it is to be carried away to its place, and when the water stands the height of a javelin (ntzak) inside 5, ove puts 2¢ down and brings 7¢ away yet again. 11. Médék-mah® says that there should be a shelter (var)’ ove should

1 In the terms avf-dasht4né and avt-nas4f the compound av is written in an obsolete manner, both in M6 and K2o, The meaning of the text is that either or both of the corpse-carriers may be any Parsi man, woman, or child who understands the proper precautions. Compare Pahl. Vend. VIII, 28.

* K2o0 has ‘ when curved it is not to be carried.’

’ That is, it is a mortal sin to allow rain to fall upon a corpse before it is deposited in the Dakhma.

* Or ‘withheld,’ or ‘continuous,’ according as we compare hamfn with Pers. 4mfin (4man), am4n, or h4m4n.

5 Inside the Dakhma apparently. The meaning seems to be, that when the Dakhma is flooded the corpse is to be laid down in some dry place in its vicinity until the flood has abated. But according to Pahl. Vend. VIII, 17, it is allowable to throw the corpse in when the Dakhma is full of water.

® See Chaps. I, 3, II, 1. Here, again, the quotation must be from his complete commentary, as it is not extant in the present Pahlavi Vendidad.

7 From Av. var, ‘to cover, to shelter ;’ compare Pers. gullah, ‘a bower or shed.’ Nowadays the Parsis have a permanent shelter near the Dakhma. Pahl, Vend. VIII, 17 says, ‘to carry

250 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

7 From Av. var, ‘to cover, to shelter ;’ compare Pers. gullah, ‘a bower or shed.’ Nowadays the Parsis have a permanent shelter near the Dakhma. Pahl, Vend. VIII, 17 says, ‘to carry

250 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

fasten above that place, azd it would make 7¢ dry below!; one should place the corpse under that shelter, and they may take the shelter and bring z¢ away.

12. From the fifth fargard of the Vendidad of Médék-m4h? they state thus, that at the place where one’s life goes forth, when he shall die upon a cloth, and a hair or a limb remains upon the bedplace and the ground’, the ground conveys the pollution, even not originating with z¢se/f (ahambanié), in like manner down unto the water‘. 13. And when he ts on a bedstead, and z¢s legs are not connected with the ground, when a hair or a limb remains behind on the bedstead, it does not convey ¢he follutton down. 14. When he shall die on a plastered floor the plaster is polluted, and when they dig up that plaster and spread z¢ again afterwards, it is clean. 15. When he shall die on a stone, and the stone is connected with the ground, the stone will become clean, along with the ground, in the length of a year; and when they dig up the place, the stone deing polluted is to be washed at the time. 16. When a stone is connected with the ground, or is separated, and oxe shall die upon it, so much space of the stone as the corpse occupied is polluted;

an umbrella (avargash) from behind, or to hold up a shelter, is of no use.’

1 Or, ‘it would make ## very dry,’ if we read avtr, ‘very,’ instead of agtr, ‘below ;’ these two words being written alike in Pahlavi.

* Quoting again from his lost commentary.

* Or, perhaps, ‘ floor.’

‘ This translation is somewhat doubtful, but the text seems to imply that the ground is polluted as deep as it contains no water.

® K2o has had, ‘ the stone is all polluted, and will become clean at the time when they dig :¥ up, the stone is all polluted, in so

‘CHAPTER II, 12-19. 251

when they shall leave it, in the length of a year it will become clean a/ong with the ground; and when they dig z¢ up, the stone is all polluted, amd is to be washed at the time; when the stone is not made even with the ground, above the ground the stone is all polluted, azd is to be washed at the time.

17. Dung-fuel avd ashes, when the limbs of a menstruous woman come upon them, are both polluted ; and the salt and lime for washing her shift (kartak-shai) are ¢o de treated just like stone’.

18, If one shall die on a terrace roof (ban)?, when one of his limbs, or a hair, remains behind at the edge of the roof, the roof is polluted for the size of the body as far as the water; and they should carry down all the sacred twigs (baresém) ® in the house, from the place where the pollution is, until there are thirty steps of three feet‘ to the sacred twigs, so that the sacred twigs may not be polluted; and when his hair or limb has not come to the eaves (parak4n) the roof is polluted to the bottom (téhtk). 19. And when ove shall die on a rita® z¢ is polluted

much space as the corpse occupied 7 ¢s polluted;’ but the additional matter seems to be struck out. Something analogous to the details in this paragraph will be found in Pahl. Vend. VI, 9.

1 This section would be more appropriate in Chap. III.

? Or ‘an upper floor;’ Pahl. Vend. VI, 9 has, ‘when he shall die on an upper floor, when nothing of him remains behind at the partitions (pardak4n), the floor is polluted as far as the balcony (4skQp) and the balcony alone is clean; when anything of him remains behind at the partitions, the floor is polluted as far as the balcony, the ground is polluted as far as the water, abou/ the balcony alone it is not clear,’

* See note on Chap. III, 32.

‘ The g4m, ‘step,’ being 2 feet 71 inches (see note on Bund. XXVI, 3) these thirty steps are about 79 English feet.

® Meaning uncertain; the word looks like Huzvaris, but it is possible to read rid-aé instead of rfta-1.

252 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

for the size of the body as far as the water; z# the length of a year it will become clean along with the ground, 20. A built bridge is “adé/e just like a terrace roof. 21. When one shall die on the terrace roof of a trellised apartment (varam), that is also fiable just like a terrace roof. 22. When he shall die in a trellised apartment, when one of his limbs, or a hair, does not remain on the borders (parak4n), it does not convey the pollution down, but when azy of him remains behind it conveys z¢ down; it is allowable when they dig z¢ up?, and ove also spreads 2¢ again afterwards, and 7¢ is clean.

23. When one shall die by strangulation and a rope in a crowd, when ¢here is no fear of his falling down they should not carry 42m down; and when there is a fear of his falling down, when that fear is as regards one side of him, they should carry 42m down on that side; and when he has fallen down they should carry 42m down zm such place as he has fallen. 24. When one is seated upright azd shall die, when ¢here is fear of his falling on one side they should carry 47m down on that one side, and when there is fear on all four sides, ¢/ex on all four sides ; and when 4e has fallen down they should carry Azm down zz such place as he has fallen *.

24. When one is seated upright azd shall die, when ¢here is fear of his falling on one side they should carry 47m down on that one side, and when there is fear on all four sides, ¢/ex on all four sides ; and when 4e has fallen down they should carry Azm down zz such place as he has fallen *.

25. And when one shall die on a tree, when its

1 That is, the floor of the apartment; which would probably be formed of earth beaten down, which, in India, is nearly always overspread with diluted cow-dung to hinder cracks in the smooth surface. A better class of floor is spread with lime plaster on a stony surface.

* The object of these rules is evidently to avoid disturbing the corpse more than is absolutely necessary, provided there be no fear of its polluting more of the ground by falling upon it.

CHAFTER II, 20-32. 253

bark is green and /here is no fear of falling off, they should not carry 42m down; and when ¢here is fear of it, they should carry down the whole of the body (tanQ masai). 26. And when the bark of the tree is withered, when ¢here is fear of it and when ¢here is no, fear of it, they should carry z# down. 27. When he shall die on a branch of a tree which is green, when ¢heve is no fear of his falling off they should not carry 42m down. 28. And when ¢ééere is fear of it, or z¢ zs a branch of a withered tree, when also, a hair originating with him, or a limb, remains behind on the particular tree, they should carry down the whole of the body'. 29. And when it does not remain behind him on the particular tree, but when there is fear of its falling off, they should not carry it below (vad fr6d@)?.

30. When a corpse (nas4t-1)%, from outside of it, remains behind on a jar (khQmbS) in which ¢here may be wine, the jar is polluted, azd the wine is clean. 31. And when ome shall die inside, in the wine in the jar, if not even a hair or a curl originating with him remains behind on the jar, the wine is polluted and the jar not polluted*. 32. When ¢¢ zs

1 K2o has a portion of § 30 inserted here by mistake.

* The object of these rules is likewise to prevent the risk of the ‘corpse defiling more of the ground than is absolutely necessary by falling upon it, as it might do by the breaking of a dead branch.

5 Nas&tf (Av. nasu) means not only a corpse or carcase of a human being, dog, or other animal of the good creation, but also any portion of such corpse or carcase; that is, so/rd ‘ dead matter’ in general, as distinguished from dirt or refuse from the living body, or any /iguid exudation from a corpse or carcase, which is called hikhar (Av. hikhra).

* Pahl. Vend. VI, 9 states, that ‘when one shall die on a jar of wine, the jar is useless, and the wine becomes just as though sés

254 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

hikhra).

* Pahl. Vend. VI, 9 states, that ‘when one shall die on a jar of wine, the jar is useless, and the wine becomes just as though sés

254 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

a jar in which ¢4ere is oil!, and dead matter (nasAb), from outside of it, remains behind on it, this is even as though it remains inside it, because the oil comes outside and goes back to the inside, avd both are polluted, the jar and the oil; and even on making the jar dry? it is not fit to put anything in. .

33. When a serpent (garzak) is in a jar in which there is wine, both are useless and polluted, for it makes them contaminated (padvishak). 34. And when corn shall be in z¢, the jar is polluted and the corn clean; and when nothing originating with ¢he serpent inside the jar remains behind on the jar, so much of the corn as includes the serpent, and upon which the touch (m4lisn) of the serpent has gone— because the touch of the serpent’s seed might be the death of one —is to be taken out and to be thrown away. 35. And when hair or dead matter, even not originating with ¢he serpent, remains behind on the jar, the jar is polluted, but is serviceable (shAyad) on making z¢ dry®.

36. Brick, earth, and mortar are separated by

course (ravisn) had been within three steps of the corpse. And when he shall die in the wine, when nothing of him remains behind on the jar, the jar is proper on making :# dry’ (or, perhaps, ‘ the jar is fit for bran-flour’).

1 Or ‘clarified butter ;’ in this case the ‘jar’ is probably a globular vessel, or carboy, made of hide, through which the oil, or liquid butter, penetrates so far as to keep the outer surface greasy, which accounts for the remark about the oil passing in and out. Such vessels, called dabar, are commonly used for oil and liquid butter in India.

* Assuming that khfiskar stands for khfisk-kar, as it does in Pahl. Vend. VI, 71; otherwise we should have to read thus: ‘and the jar is not even fit to put any bran-flour in.’

* Again assuming as in § 32; otherwise we must read thus: ‘but is fit for bran-flour (khfskar).’

CHAPTER II, 33-38. 255

their own substance (pavan mindavam-i nafsman), and are connected with the ground; being separated by their own substance is this, that so much space as dead matter’ comes upon is polluted ; being connected with the ground is this, that they would convey the pollution down unto the water. 37. Dung-fuel, ashes, flour, and other powdered things are connected with their own substance, and are separated from the ground; being connected with their own substance is this, that when dead matter comes upon them the whole of them is polluted; and being separated from the ground is this, that when dead matter comes upon them it does not make the ground polluted 2.

38. Ata house zx which the sacred ceremony (yazisn) is prepared, and a dog or a person passes ® away in it, the first business to be done is this, that the fire is to be preserved from harm; moreover, if it be only possible to carry the fire so that they would carry z¢ away within three steps of the corpse‘, even then it is to be carried away, and the

1 Or ‘a corpse ;’ K2o has ‘stands upon.’ The meaning is that these substances do not communicate the contamination throughout their own substance, but only downwards to the ground, which conveys it farther down, so far as it contains no water.

2 That is, these substances communicate the contamination throughout their own substance, but not down to the ground.

8 The verb vidardanéd (Huz. vabrfintand), ‘to cross over, to pass away’ (Av. vi+tar, Pers. gupHastan), can only be used when referring to the death of good people or animals; but the verb mirdand (Huz. yemitfintand), ‘to die, to expire’ (Av. mar, Pers. murdan), can be used generally, though usually applied to the wicked and to evil creatures. Pahl. Vend. V, 134 contains nearly the same text as §§ 38, 39.

‘ Under ordinary circumstances fire must not be brought within thirty steps, or about 79 English feet, of a corpse (see Vend. VIII,

256 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

wall is not to be cut. 39. Réshan! said that an earthen one is to be cut into, du¢ a mortar one is not to be cut; below and above no account zs taken of damaging (béd@6zédth)? the wall*. 40. To bring the fire within ‘¢ the three steps from the corpse is a Tanapdhar sin; and when exudation happens to the corpse, it is worthy of death® 41. The prepared food in that house is all useless, and that which is not prepared is usable in the length of nine nights

17). But the spirit of the Mazdayasnian law is reasonable, and, although strict, it allows for practical difficulties and chooses the least of two evils in a more judicious manner than might be expected (a fact which it would be well for Parsis and others to observe in doubtful cases). Here, breaking through the wall of a house is considered a greater evil than the possible pollution of the fire by passing at a distance of three steps, or eight English feet, from a corpse.

1 The name of a commentator, or commentary, often quoted in Pahlavi translations (see the note on Chap. I, 4).

3 Literally, ‘destroying the consciousness,’ or ‘injuring the existence.’ Béd6zéd or bédy6zad is a particular kind of sin which appears to consist chiefly of the ill-treatment of animals and injury of useful property. It is mentioned in Pahl. Yas. XXIX, 1b, Pahl. Vend. V, 107, XIII, 38, Farh. Okh. pp. 32, 33; and in some editions of the Khurdah Avesta it is defined as selling stolen men or animals into misery, or one’s own domestic cattle to the butcher, also spoiling and tearing up good clothing, or wasting and spoiling good food.

Yas. XXIX, 1b, Pahl. Vend. V, 107, XIII, 38, Farh. Okh. pp. 32, 33; and in some editions of the Khurdah Avesta it is defined as selling stolen men or animals into misery, or one’s own domestic cattle to the butcher, also spoiling and tearing up good clothing, or wasting and spoiling good food.

’ The meaning is, that if it became necessary to break through the wall in order to remove the fire unpolluted, the sin committed through damaging the wall will not be punished either in this world or the next.

‘ That is, nearer than three steps, which is considered to be the minimum distance at which any degree of purity can be maintained.

5 A marg-arg4n sin, on committing which the sinner is required to place his life at the disposal of the high-priest (see Chap. VIII, 2,5, 6, 21). It is usually considered equivalent to fifteen Tanépfihars (see Chap. I, 1, 2).

CHAPTER II, 39-45. 257

or amonth'. 42. Clothing also zz like manner, except that which oze wears on the body; that, even in that time, is not clean, since it remains in use. 43. And the holy-water (zéhar)?, too, which is taken and remains z that place, is to be carried away immediately to the water; also the sacred milk (gtv)* azd butter (gum)* z# like manner. 44. Of the prayer® clothing Vand-Afharmazd * said that it is usable in the length of nine nights ov a month ; the writer’ (daptr) said that it is when they perform the washing of hands, and wash z¢ thoroughly, it will become clean at the time.

45. If in a house there are three rooms (gungtnak), and ome shall die in the entrance place (darg4s), if z¢ de so that they may set the door open, and the corpse comes to this side, only this

1 According to the season of the year, the period of uncleanness being nine nights in the five winter months, and a month in the seven summer months (see Vend. V, 129).

* Av. zaothra; this holy-water is consecrated by the priest reciting certain prayers while holding the empty metal cups in his hands, while filling them with water, and after filling them (see Haug’s Essays, p. 397).

* The Av. gdus givya, ‘product of the living cow,’ which is kept in a metal saucer during the ceremonies, and used for sprinkling the sacred twigs (baresém), and for mixing with the holy-water and Hém-juice in the mortar (see Haug’s Essays, PP. 403, 405, 406).

* Compare Pers. fim, ‘fat;’ it is the Av. g4us hudhau, ‘product of the well-yielding cow,’ a small piece of which is placed upon one of the sacred pancakes, or wafers (drén), during the ceremonies (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 396, 407).

5 Reading yast; but it may be gast, ‘ changed.’

* See the note on Chap. I, 4.

7 There appear to be, as yet, no means of ascertaining the name of the writer of the Sh4yast l4-shayast, who gives his own opinion here.

(s] Ss

258 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

396, 407).

5 Reading yast; but it may be gast, ‘ changed.’

* See the note on Chap. I, 4.

7 There appear to be, as yet, no means of ascertaining the name of the writer of the Sh4yast l4-shayast, who gives his own opinion here.

(s] Ss

258 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

side is polluted; and if the corpse comes to that side, only that side is polluted; when it comes to both sides at once (aév4é&), only the entrance place is polluted alone, both the dwelling-rooms (kh4nak) are clean.

46. And the vault of the sacred fires! alone does not become polluted.

47. If one shall die in a wild spot (vaskar), prepared food which is within three steps is all useless, and beyond four: steps it is not polluted. 48. Prepared food is this, such as bread, boiled and roast meat, and prepared broth *.

49. And the ashes (var) of the sacred fire*® become in a measure polluted.

50. Should they carry in the fire into that house in which the length of nine nights oy a month is requisite for becoming clean, ¢heve is a sin of one Tandpohar‘ through carrying z¢ in, and one Tan4pahar through kindling z¢; and every trifling creature (khar or kha) which shall die and shall remain causes a sin of one Tandpthar. 51. Also through carrying water in, ‘kere is a sin of one Farman; and to pour water on the place where amy one’s life departs is a sin of one Tan4pdhar, and to pour 2 on a different place is a sin of one Yat. 52. And to

' Literally, ‘the vault of the fires of Vahrém.’ Pahl. Vend. V, 134 says ‘the vault of the fires is /:ad/e just like an empty house.’ Both this section and § 49 seem out of place.

* See Pahl. Vend. V, 134.

® Literally, ‘the produce of the fire of V4&hram,’ a term for ‘ashes,’- which is used in Pahl. Vend. V, 150 along with the equivalent phrase, ‘clothing of the fire’ (see Chap. III, 27).

* See Chap. I, 1, 2 for the degrees of sin mentioned in § 50, 51, 53-

CHAPTER II, 46-56. 259

undergo ablution ! inside ¢he unclean house is all nonablution. 53. And whoever goes into it needlessly, his body and clothes are to be every time thoroughly washed, and his sin is one Tanapdhar; and when he goes in needfully z¢ is neither good work nor sin*. 54. And this pollution is all in the sharp account (ttkhak am4r) when the life departs?; the only thing which amounts to polluting is contact with the flesh, and even with the hair and nails. 55. Of the contact which is stated in the Avesta‘, the account is that zt zs from one side, and it ever cleaves to one; the curse (gazisn)® which is stated in the Avesta advances from all four sides. 56. Séshyans® said it is, until its exhibition to a dog, just as it becomes at the time when its life departs’; a priest, a

1 That is, the ceremonial ablution (p4dty4zth), or ‘ washing, with water, the hands and arms up to the elbows, the face as far as behind the ears, and the feet up to the ankles,’ whilst a certain form of prayer is recited (see AV. p. 148, note).

p. 148, note).

* Here again, as in § 38, the strict letter of the law is relaxed in case of necessity.

5 Meaning, apparently, that any pollution is taken into account, as a sin, in the investigation the soul has to undergo upon entering the other world. Much of this paragraph will be found in Pahl. Vend. V, 107.

* Referring to Vend. V, 82-107, which gives an account of the number of persons through whom the pollution of a corpse or carcase will pass, which is in proportion to the importance of the dead individual. The statement here made is that the infection, passing from one to the other, enters each person only on one side, but the demon of corruption attacks them on all sides.

5 Meaning, probably, the Nas(s, or demon of corruption (see § 1), who is said to rush upon all those polluted as detailed in Vend. V, 82-107.

* See Chap. I, 3.

7 That is, until seen by the dog the corpse remains pervaded by the demon of corruption and hazardous to approach (see §§ 1-4).

; S 2

260 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

warrior, and a husbandman are no use, for merely a dog is stated. 57. Kishtand-bigéd! said the account is at the time when its life departs; and that which Kashtané-bigéd specially said is, ‘when anything is inside it (the place) the pollution is as far as to the place where that thing stands.’ 58. When a dog, or a goat, or a pig is requisite (darvai)? it is proper, for the pollution does not attack further there ; and the pollution of a child in the womb is a/ong with the mother.

59- The direct pollution of a hedgehog ® cleaves to ove, and not the indirect pollution. 60. Direct pollution (hamréq) * is that when the body is in contact with a corpse, and indirect pollution (pait-

1 See Chap. I, 4, note. This name is nearly always written Kushtané-biigéd in Sls. in Kzo and M6; it is not mentioned in Pahl. Vend. V, 107, although the details here quoted are there given in part.

* The meaning is not quite clear, but this sentence is probably to be read in connection with the preceding one, as implying that where such domestic animals are kept they can be used for stopping the infection, as effectually as any inanimate object. The pig is here mentioned as a common domestic animal, but Parsis have long since adopted the prejudices of Hindus and Muhammadans as regards the uncleanness of the pig.

5 As Vend. V, 108-112 says the same of the dog urupi, it would seem that the writer of our text considered the urupi to be a hedgehog (zfizak); the Pahlavi translation of the Vendidad renders it by rapuk or rfpfk, which appears to be merely an approximate transcript of the Avesta word; traditionally, this is read raspfik and compared with Pers. rAs, ‘ichneumon;’ its identification with the hedgehog is certainly doubtful, although it appears to be admitted in Pahl. Vend.V, 112, where the same words are used as in this section.

rAs, ‘ichneumon;’ its identification with the hedgehog is certainly doubtful, although it appears to be admitted in Pahl. Vend.V, 112, where the same words are used as in this section.

‘ The technical terms hamréd and paftréd, for contagion and infection, are merely corruptions of Av. him-raéthwayéiti and paiti-raéthwayéiti. The definition of the latter one is omitted in K2o by mistake.

CHAPTER II, 57-63. 261

réd@) is that when! ne is in contact with him who touched the corpse ; and from contact with him who is the eleventh ? indirect pollution cleaves to one ix the same manner. 61. The indirect pollution of an ape * and a menstruous woman, not acting the same way, remains. 62. The shepherd’s dog, and likewise the village-dog, and others also of the like kind carry contamination to eight‘; and when they shall carry the carcase down on the ground ¢he place® is clean immediately; and that, too, which dies on a balcony (AskQp), until they shall carry z¢ down to the bottom, is polluted for the length of a year.

63. Whoever brings dead matter (nas4t) on any person is worthy of death; he is thrice worthy of

1 Reading amat, ‘when,’ instead of mfin, ‘ which’ (see note to Bund. I, 7).

* Vend. V, 86, 87 limits the pollution to the eleventh person infected, in the extreme case of the corpse having been a priest; but Pahl. Vend. V, 107 quotes the opinion of Sésh4ns that until a dog has gazed at the corpse the pollution extends to the twelfth, but only the first ten require the ceremonial purification of the bareshnfim, the others being cleansed by ordinary washing with bull’s urine and water.

5 Pahl, Vend. V, 107 states, however, that ‘everything of th: ape (kapik) is just like mankind.’ The meaning of § 61 is very uncertain, as the text can be both read and translated several ways, and none of them are very satisfactory.

* That is, in the case of the shepherd’s dog (see Vend. V, 92, 93); the carcases of other dogs occasion the indirect pollution of fewer persons, in proportion to their inferior importance; but Pahl. Vend. V, 107 states, with regard to this importance, that when ‘in doubt, every man is to be considered as a priest, and every dog as a shepherd’s dog,’ so as to be on the safe side, by exacting the maximum amount of purification in all doubtful cases.

5 The Pahlavi text leaves it doubtful whether the place, the people, or the carcase becomes clean, but the first is the most

probable.

262 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

5 The Pahlavi text leaves it doubtful whether the place, the people, or the carcase becomes clean, but the first is the most

probable.

262 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

death! at the time when a dog &as not seen the corpse (nasat); and ¢f through negligence of appliances and means (44r va tQb4n®) he disturbs 27, and disturbs z¢ by touching it, he knows that z¢ zs a sin worthy of death; and for a corpse that a dog has seen, and one that a dog has not seen, the accountability is to be understood 4o de as much *, and Jor the death and sickness * of a feeble man and a powerful ove. 64. Afarg has said there is no account of appliances and means‘, for ¢¢ is not allowable to commit a sin worthy of death in cases of death and sickness.

65. When they move a corpse which a dog Aas not seen with a thousand men, even then the bodies of the whole xuméer are polluted, and are to be washed for them with ceremony (pisak)* 66. And for that which a dog Aas seen, except that one only when a man shall move 7¢ all” by touching 7¢, his washing is then not ¢o de with ceremony. 67. And when he is in contact azd does not move 7¢, he is to be washed with bull’s urine axd water. 68. And

‘ That is, he has committed a sin equivalent to three mortal sins (marg-arg4n).

2 Reading ves as equivalent to vés.

5 Reading rakhtakth (compare Pers. rakhtah, ‘sick, wounded’).

‘ This opinion of Afarg (see Chap. I, 3) is also quoted in Pahl. Vend. III, 48.

5 This statement is repeated in Chap. X, 33.

7 This exception (which is repeated in §§ 68, 71) seems to imply that §§ 66, 68, 71 refer to the collection of any fragments of a corpse found in the wilderness, or in water; and the exemption from the troublesome purification ceremony in such cases, is probably intended to encourage people to undertake the disagreeable duty of attending to such fragments.

CHAPTER II, 64-71. 263

when he shall move with a stake (dar)! a corpse which a dog Aas not seen, except that one only when he shall move z¢ all, the washing for him is not ¢o de with ceremony.

CHAPTER II, 64-71. 263

when he shall move with a stake (dar)! a corpse which a dog Aas not seen, except that one only when he shall move z¢ all, the washing for him is not ¢o de with ceremony.

69. And when a man shall move a corpse, which a dog as not seen, by the hand of another man, he who moves it by the hand of a man, and he also whose own hand’s strength does z¢ are polluted in the bodies of both; and it is the root of a Tandpdhar? sez for him himself and of a Tanapdhar for the other one, for this reason, because his own body and that also of the other are both made _ polluted through sinfulness. 70. And when there is not in him, nor even originating with 42m (ahambdniA), the strength of him whose own hand 2¢ 2s, it is just as though he would move it (the corpse) with a stake *; and he who held z¢ in the way of contact with his hand is to be washed with ceremony ; and it is the root of a Tandpdhar sin for him whose own hand z¢ zs, and of a Khér‘ for himself. 71. When he shall move a corpse by the hand of a man, and the corpse is of those which a dog has seen— except that one only when he shall move it all '— the washing for him is not 40 de with ceremony.

1 The interposition of the stake, or piece of wood, prevents the direct attack of the Nasfs, or demon of corruption, which has not been driven away by a dog. That inanimate objects are supposed to stop the progress of the pollution appears from § 57.

* See Chap. I, 1,2. Asin is figuratively said to take root in the body, when it has to be eradicated, or figuratively dug up.

5 See § 68. If he employs another man to move the corpse merely because he is physically unable to do it himself, he escapes with less pollution than when he is able to do the work himself ; but the man employed suffers the same in both cases.

* See Chap. I, 1, 2. 5 See § 66.

264 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

‘72, When one is going dy a place at night, and comes back there on the morrow, and a corpse lies there, and he does not know whether the evil (dis) was there when he came by’, or not, it is to be considered by him that it was not there.

73. Ofa flock in which is a sheep by whom dead matter is eaten, of a forest in which is a tree with which dead matter is mingled, and of a firewoodstand (aesamd4n) in which is a stick of firewood with which grease is mingled, Afarg said that it is not proper to make the flock and the forest fruitful, and the firewood is useless *.

74. About a door on which a corpse impinges; as to the door of a town and city they have been of the same opinion, that z¢ is to be discarded by 4zs comrades (hamk4r)’; as to a door which is mostly closed (badtim)* they have been of different opinions,

1 Literally, ‘when I came by ;’ the usual Persian idiom in such phrases.

* This statement of Afarg’s, so far as it relates to greasy firewood, will be found in Pahl. Vend. V, 14.

5 Or, ‘bythe community.’ The same rule is mentioned in Pahl. Vend. V, 14.

* This statement of Afarg’s, so far as it relates to greasy firewood, will be found in Pahl. Vend. V, 14.

5 Or, ‘bythe community.’ The same rule is mentioned in Pahl. Vend. V, 14.

* There is some uncertainty about this word. It is not the Pers. badtum, ‘ worst, vilest,’ because that is written vadttim or vatfiim in Pahlavi; besides, the rule must apply to other than the vilest doors, otherwise it would not harmonize with § 75. It is not a miswriting of nft(m, ‘lowest, most debased,’ for the same reason, and because it occurs elsewhere. It is not a miswriting of bétman, a possible variant of béta, ‘a house’ (although ‘a house-door’ would suit the context very well), because it occurs also in Pahl. Vend. V, 14, XI, 10, in which latter, place it is clearly an adjective partially translating Av. bendvé. And it would be hazardous to connect it with Pers. bidfin, ‘outside,’ which seems merely a corruption or misreading of birfn. The view taken here is that badtfim stands for bandtfim, ‘most shut up,’ the nasal being often dropped in Pahlavi, as in sag for sang, ‘stone,’ &c.

CHAPTER II, 72-78. 265

Gégésasp! said that discarding z¢ by 4z¢s comrades is likewise proper, and Sdshyans said that it is not proper; and as to other doors they have been of the same opinion, that it is not proper. 75. The door of one’s own chief apartment (shah-g4s) is fit for that of the place for menstruation (dast4nist4n), and that of the place for menstruation is fit for that of the depository for the dead (khaz4n6)?, and that of the depository of the dead is not fit for any purpose whatever?; that of the more pleasant is fit for that of the more grievous.

76. Any one who, through sinfulness, throws a corpse into the water, is worthy of death on the spot‘; when he throws only one z¢ zs one st worthy of death, and when he throws ten at one time z¢ zs then oné s¢z worthy of death; when he throws ¢hem separately z¢ zs a stz worthy of death for each one. 77. Of the water, into which one throws dead matter, the extent of pollution is three steps of three feet 2 the water advancing, nine steps of three feet zz the water passed over, and six steps of three feet 2 the water alongside 5; six steps of three feet in the depth of the water, and three steps of three feet in the water pouring over the dead matter are polluted as regards the depth®. 78. When it is thrown zzéo the midst of a great standing water, in like manner, the proportion it comes is ever as much as it goes, and

1 See Chap. I, 3.

* The Huz. equivalent of Paz. dakhmak (see § 6).

® See Pahl. Vend. V, 14.

* Compare Pahl. Vend. VII, 66. 5 See Vend. VI, 80.

* That is, the pollution extends about eight English feet up-stream and upwards, sixteen feet sideways and downwards, and twentyfour feet down-stream. Some of the latter part of the sentence is omitted in K2o by mistake.

266 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

zs the proportion of it they should always carry away with the dead matter’,

Some of the latter part of the sentence is omitted in K2o by mistake.

266 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

zs the proportion of it they should always carry away with the dead matter’,

79. And when a man comes forth, and a corpse lies in the water, when he is able to bring it out, and it is not an injury to him, it is not allowable to abandon z¢ except when he brings z# out 80. Sdéshyans said that, when it is an injury, it is allowable when ‘ he does not bring zé out; and when it is not an injury, and he does not bring 2¢, his sin is a Tandpdhar*®, 81. Kdshtand-bigéd® said that even in case of injury it is not allowable to abandon 2¢, except when he brings z¢ out; when he does not bring z¢ 4e is worthy of death. 82. And Gégésasp’ said that it is even in case of injury not allowable, except when he brings z# out; and when, in case of injury, he does not bring z¢ out his sin is’'a Tana- _ pahar; and when it is no injury to him, and he does not bring z¢, Ze is worthy of death.

83. And when he shall wish to bring z¢ his clothing is to be laid aside, for it makes the clothing

1 The sentence is obscure, but this seems to be the meaning; that is, when a corpse or any dead matter is thrown into a pond or tank, the pollution extends sixteen feet from it in all directions ; and that quantity of water ought to be drawn off, in order to purify the tank (see Vend. VI, 65-71). As the corpse, in nearly all cases, must be either at the bottom or on the surface, the quantity of polluted water to be drawn off must be a hemispherical mass sixteen feet in radius, or about forty-eight tons of water.

* See Pahl. Vend. VI, 64, where it states that bringing it out is a good work of one Tanfpfihar, and leaving it is a sin of the same amount.

3 See Chap. I, 3.

* Reading amat, ‘when,’ instead of mQn, ‘which’ (see Bund. I, 7, note).

5 See Chap. I, 1, 2. ® See Chap. I, 4, note.

7 See Chap. I, 3. ® See Pahl. Vend. VI, 64.

CHAPTER II, 79-87. 267

polluted, and whatever Ae is first able and best able to bring is to be brought out by him. 84. When, too, he is able to bring z¢ out through the breadth of the water, then also it is to be brought out so!; and when he is not able, it is to be brought out through the length of the water; and showing z¢ ¢o a dog and the two men are not to be waited for °.

85. And it is to be carried by him so much away from the neighbourhood of the water that, when he puts z¢ down, the water which comes out dropping from the corpse does not reach back to the water ; for when the water which comes out from the corpse reaches continuously back to the water 4e is worthy of death; and after that (min zak frAg) it is to be shown ¢o a dog, and it is to be carried away by two men. 86. And when he wishes to throw z¢ out from the water, Mard-bid® said it is allowable to throw z¢ out thus, so that the water of the dripping corpse does not reach continuously back to the water; Réshan said it would be allowable to throw z¢ out far.

86. And when he wishes to throw z¢ out from the water, Mard-bid® said it is allowable to throw z¢ out thus, so that the water of the dripping corpse does not reach continuously back to the water; Réshan said it would be allowable to throw z¢ out far.

87. To drag z¢ over the water is allowable, to grasp and relinquish z¢ is not allowable *; and when it is possible to act so that he may convey z¢ from a great water to a small water, when the water is

' So that less water may be polluted by the corpse taking the shortest route through it; but if that be impossible it must’ come out quickly, at any rate.

* That is, the otherwise indispensable dog’s gaze and two bearers must be dispensed with, if not at hand, in order to save time, until the corpse is out of the water (see § 85).

5 It might be, ‘there was a man who said,’ but Mard-bdd occurs in the Nirangistén as the name of a commentator (see Chap. I, 4, note).

* See Pahl. Vend. VI, 64 for this prohibition.

268 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

connected z¢ is allowable, and when separated 7¢ is not allowable. 88. Afarg? said it is allowable to drag z¢ below through the water, but to drag #¢ over is not allowable, for this has come om the water as a danger ?, and that has not come on z¢ as a danger. 89. Médék-m4h? said it is allowable to drag 7¢ above, du¢ to drag z¢ below is not allowable, for the danger has gone out across the water, and the danger is not now to be brought upon it; and on that which is below, om which the danger has not come, the danger will at last arrive.

go. When he goes into the water he is to go into it with this idea, that ‘should there be many below, then I will even bring all;’ for whoever goes in not with this idea, and shall disturb any other one which lies there, will become polluted*. 91. And if the corpse be heavy avd it is not possible to bring z¢ out by one person, and he goes out with this idea, that ‘I will go and prepare means, and bring this corpse out of the water ;’ and when through sinfulness* he does not go back his body is polluted and worthy of

1 See Chap. I, 3.

* Or ‘fear.’ The difference of opinion between the two commentators on this question in casuistry, appears to have arisen from Afarg regarding the water merely as the representative of a spirit, who might be endangered or frightened by the source of impurity becoming more visible when above the water, while Méd6k-m4&h considered the water in its material aspect, and wished to save it from the further pollution consequent upon drawing the corpse through more of it.

3 See Pahl. Vend. VI, 64.

* These rules generally distinguish clearly between offences committed ‘through sinfulness,’ that is, wilfully, and those arising from accidental inability ; more stress being laid upon the intention than upon the. action.

CHAPTER II, 88-95. 269

death, and when he is unable to go back he is not polluted.

action.

CHAPTER II, 88-95. 269

death, and when he is unable to go back he is not polluted.

92. When the corpse is so decomposed (p(dak), when 2z¢ is thus necessary to bring it out, that he must cut off various fragments, even after he cuts them off they are to be brought out; and for every fragment his hands and knife are to be washed with bull’s urine (géméz), and with dust and moisture (nambd) ¢key are clean’. 93. And ¢hey are to be torn off? by him, and for every single fragment which he brings out his good work is one Tan4pthar.

94. And when rain is falling the corpse lies in the water ; to take z¢ from the water to deposit z¢ in the rain is not ® allowable.

95. Clothing which is useless ¢, this is that in which they should carry a corpse, and that even when very much oy altogether useless ; of that on which they shall decompose (bar4 vishfipénd), and of that on which the excretions (hikhar) of the dead come, so much space is to be cut away °, and the rest is to be

1 See Pahl. Vend. VI, 64 for §§ 92, 93.

2 Or ‘ twisted off;’ the Huz. neskhfintand must be traced to Chald. "D3 ‘to pluck out, to tear away,’ and seems to have a similar meaning in Pahlavi; its Paz. equivalent vikhtanéd (Av. vig) ought to be compared rather with Pers. kikhtan, ‘to bruise or break,’ than with békhtan or pékhtan, ‘to twist.’

> This negative is omitted in M6 by mistake.

“ Compare Pahl. Vend. VII, 32.

5 Or ‘go to pieces;’ that this is the meaning of vishitpénd appears clearly from Pahl. Vend. VII, 123, but a Persian gloss in the modern MS. Mg explains it as ‘deposit fragments from the beak of a bird,’ meaning, of course, fragments of dead matter dropped by a carrion bird.

* As useless, being incapable of purification ; such cuttings are to be buried, according to the Avesta of Vend. VII, 32, though the Pahlavi commentary explains that they are to be thrown away.

270 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

thoroughly washed for the six-months’ ferzod'. 96. That which a menstruous woman has in wear (mahmA4nth)? is to be discarded in like fashion.

97. The clothing which is to be washed for the six-months’ period is such as is declared in the Avesta*®, 98. If the clothing be leathern it is to be thoroughly washed three times with bull’s urine (géméz), every time to be made quite dry with dust, and to be thoroughly washed three times with water, and to be laid out three months in a place to be viewed by the sun‘; and then it is proper for an unclean person (armést)* who has not performed

1 Khshvas-m4ig6k is merely a corruption of the Av. khshvas maunghé, ‘six months,’ of Vend. VII, 36, where this form of cleansing is thus described: ‘If (the clothing) be woven, they should wash :/ out six times with bull’s urine, they should scour #4 six times with earth, they should wash :/ out six times with water, they should fumigate :# six months at the window of the house.’

2 See Pahl. Vend. VII, 32.

5 That is, woven clothing, as declared in Vend. VII, 36 (quoted above in note 1).

Vend. VII, 32.

5 That is, woven clothing, as declared in Vend. VII, 36 (quoted above in note 1).

“ See Vend. VII, 35.

5 A Persian gloss defines armést as ‘a woman who has brought forth a dead child,’ and this is the general opinion ; but that seems to be only a particular example of an unclean person who would be included under the general term armést, for according to Pahl. Vend. IX, 133, 137, 141 a man when only partially purified must remain apart in the place for the armést (Av. airima, compare Sans. il or rf) for a certain time. Néryésang, in his Sanskrit translation of Mkh. (XXXVII, 36, XXXIX, 40, LI, 7), explains armést as ‘lame, crippled, immobility ;’ it also means ‘stagnant,’ when applied to water; and its primitive signification was, probably, ‘most stationary,’ an appropriate term for such unclean persons as are required to remain in a particular place apart from all others, as well as for helpless cripples, and insane persons under restraint (see Chap. VI, 1). The meaning ‘most polluted’ would hardly apply to tank water.

CHAPTER II, 96-104. 271

worship, or it is proper for a menstruous woman. 99. Other clothing, when hair is on z¢}, is Zaé/e just like woven cloth (tadak); all the washing of wool, floss silk, silk, hair, and camel’s hair is just like chat of woven cloth; and woven clothing is to be washed six times”.

100. Wool which is connected together, when one part is twisted over another, and a corpse rests *® upon it, is all polluted on account of the connection ; and when fleece (mésh) rests upon fleece, then so much space as the corpse rests upon is polluted. tor. When one shall die upon a rich carpet (bap) when the carpet is on a coarse rug (namad) and is made connected, the rug and carpet are both polluted, and when separated the rug is clean. 102. When several cushions are heaped (niftd) one upon the other, and are not made connected, and dead matter comes upon them, they have been unanimous that only that one is polluted on which the dead matter came. 103. A cushion éogether with wool‘ is 4aéé just like a carpet with a rug’. 104. Of several cushions which are tied down together, when dead matter comes to the tie, both are polluted, the cord azd the cushions; and when the dead matter comes to a cushion, and does not come to the tie, the cushions are all polluted on account of the connection, and the tie is clean °,

1 Pahl. Vend. VII, 35 says ‘ when a single hair is on it.’

? As mentioned in a note on § g5.

® Literally, ‘impinges.’ Here, as in many other places, ‘ dead matter’ may be read instead of ‘corpse,’ as nas&i means both or either of them.

‘ That is, laid upon wool.

5 See § ror.

* See Pahl. Vend. VII, 27.

272 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

As mentioned in a note on § g5.

® Literally, ‘impinges.’ Here, as in many other places, ‘ dead matter’ may be read instead of ‘corpse,’ as nas&i means both or either of them.

‘ That is, laid upon wool.

5 See § ror.

* See Pahl. Vend. VII, 27.

272 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

105. A pregnant woman who devours dead matter through sinfulness is polluted and worthy of death, and there is no washing for her’; and as for the child, when it 4as become acquainted with duties (ptsak-shin4s), ashes? and bull’s urine are for its eating and for its washing. 106. 4s for a child who is born of solitary carriers of the dead *, although its father and mother may both have devoured dead matter through sinfulness, that which is born is clean on the spot, for it does not become polluted éy birth.

107. Réshan * said that every one, who, through sinfulness, has become polluted by means of dead matter, is worthy of death, and his polluted body never becomes clean; for this ome is more wretched than the fox which ove throws into the water living, and in the water it will die. 108. Oxe worthy of death never becomes clean; avd a solitary carrier of the dead is to be kept at thirty steps from ceremonial ablution (padty4zth).

109. Whichsoever of the animal species has eaten their dead matter’, its milk, dung, hair, azd wool are polluted the length of a year; and zf pregnant when it has eaten z¢, the young one has also eaten z¢, and the young one is clean after the length of a year from being born of the mother. 110. When a male which has eaten 7¢ mounts a female, the female is not polluted. 111. When dead matter is eaten by it,

1 That is, she cannot be purified.

* Reading var (see note on § 49).

* Carrying a corpse by a single person being prohibited (see §§ 7, 8); but why he is supposed to devour it is not clear,

* See Chap. I, 4, note.

® Compare Pahl. Vend. VII, 192.

CHAPTER II, 105-116. 273

and even while it is not digested it shall die, it is 4iable just like a leathern bag (anb4n) in which is dead matter.

112. Gold, when dead matter comes upon it, is to be once thoroughly washed with bull’s urine (g6méz), to be once made quite dry with dust, and to be once thoroughly washed with water, and z¢ zs clean’. 113. Silver is to be twice thoroughly washed with bull's urine, and to be made quite dry with dust, and is to be twice thoroughly washed with water, and zf zs clean®, 4114. And iron, 22 “ke manner, three times, steel four times, and stone six times®, 115. Afarg said: ‘Should it be quicksilver (Avginak)* it is “adde just like gold, and amber (kahrupat) just like stone, and all jewels just like iron. 116. The pearl (marv4rid)®, amber, the

1 The purification here detailed is prescribed for golden vesscls in Vend. VII, 186.

Afarg said: ‘Should it be quicksilver (Avginak)* it is “adde just like gold, and amber (kahrupat) just like stone, and all jewels just like iron. 116. The pearl (marv4rid)®, amber, the

1 The purification here detailed is prescribed for golden vesscls in Vend. VII, 186.

* This is the purification prescribed for silver vessels in Vend. VII, 74 W.; it is found in the Vendidad Sadah, but is omitted (evidently by mistake) in the Vendidad with Pahlavi translation, and has, therefore, been omitted in Spiegel’s edition of the texts. By this accidental omission in the MSS. silver is connected with the purification for stone (see § 114).

5 See Vend. VII, 75 W., much of which is omitted in the Vendidad with Pahlavi translation, and in Spiegel’s edition (see the preceding note), the sixfold washing of stone being erroneously applied to silver (see Vend. VII, 187 Sp.), owing to this omission of the intervening text. It appears from this section that the Av. haosafna, which has usually been translated as ‘copper,’ was understood to be pfilazd, ‘steel, by the Pahlavi translators.

* Or ‘a mirror’ (Pers. Abgfnah), but the word is evidently used for a metal in SZS. X, 2, and very likely here also.

5 Most of the substances mentioned in §§ 115, 116 are detailed in Pahl. Vend. VII, 188, where it is stated that ‘as to the pearl there have been different opinions, some say that it is ‘ade just like gold, some say that it is just like the other jewels, and some say that there is no washing for 4.’

(s] T

274 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

ruby (yAkand) gem, the turquoise’, the agate (shapak), coral-stone (vasadin sag), bone, and other substances (géhar) which are not particularly mentioned, are to be washed just like wood ?; and when they are taken into use there is no washing 3, and when they are not taken their washing is once. 117. Of earthen and horny articles there is no washing; and of other substances which are not taken for use the washing is once, and ¢hey are declared out of use.

118. Firewood, when green, is to be cut off the length of a span (vitast), one by one, as many sticks as there are—and when dry one span and two finger-4rcadthst— and is to be deposited 7% some place the length of a year, and water is not to be dropped upon 7z¢; and z¢ zs drawn out after the length of a year; Séshyans® said that it is proper as firewood for ordinary fires, and Kdshtand-bigéd* said that z¢ zs just as declared in the Avesta: ‘ The

1 This is doubtful; the word can be read pirfnak, and has the Pers. gloss pirfizah, ‘turquoise,’ in some MSS. If read pilfnak it might perhaps be taken for ‘ivory.’ But in Pahl. Vend. VII, 188 it is vafarind, ‘snowy,’ and the reading there seems to be ‘jetblack and snow-white stone-coral ;’ so here the original meaning may have been ‘ snow-white and jet-black coral-stone.’

? Vend. VII, 188 says that ‘earthen or wooden or porcelain vessels are impure for everlasting.’

* Meaning, apparently, that they cannot be purified for immediate use.

Vend. VII, 188 says that ‘earthen or wooden or porcelain vessels are impure for everlasting.’

* Meaning, apparently, that they cannot be purified for immediate use.

* That is, one-sixth longer than when green, the vitast being twelve finger-dreadshs, or nine inches (see Bund. XXVI, 3, note). The purification of firewood, here prescribed, is simply drying it for a year in short lengths; but Vend. VII, 72-82 requires it also to be sprinkled once with water, and to be cut into longer pieces.

5 See Chap. I, 3.

* See Chap. I, 4, note.

CHAPTER I, 117-122. 275

washed one, even then, is proper in dried clothing .’ 119. About corn? they have been unanimous that so much space is polluted as the dead matter comes upon; and of that which is lowered into pits’, or is wanted ¢o ée so, and of that which is scattered (afstd) at such a place ¢here are different opinions ; Séshyans said: ‘Should it be of such a place 7? is polluted as much as the dead matter Zas come upon

" and Gégésasp* said: ‘Should it be so 2 is all polluted, azd the straw is all polluted.’

120. A walnut °, through z¢s mode of connection, is all polluted, and the washing of both its shell and kernel (pést va mazg) is just like that of wood. © 121. A pomegranate also is of such nature as a walnut. 122. As éo the date, when its stalk® is not connected the date is polluted and the stalk and stone (Astak) are clean; the washing of the date is just like ¢hat of corn; and when it is touched upon the stalk, when the stalk, stone, and date are connected, the whole is polluted; as ¢o the date when not connected with the stalk, amd touched at the

1 Something similar is said in Pahl. Vend. VI, 71.

* According to Vend. VII, 83-93 polluted corn and fodder are to be treated like polluted firewood, but to be cut into pieces of about double the length.

* Reading dén g6p4n faréstak; the practice of storing corn in dry pits underground is common in the East and in some parts of Europe. In Pahl. Vend. VII, 93 it is dén gép4n 4vist, ‘ concealed in pits.’

* See Chap. I, 3.

5 Pahl. Vend. VII, 93 classes the almond with the walnut as a connected fruit, and the date with the pomegranate as a separated one.

* The word is kfrApak or _kdrdsak, but its meaning is doubtful.

T 2

276 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

stalk, the date is clean, and the washing of the stone is just like ¢ha¢ of wood. 123. The pomegranate, citron, quince, apple, pear, and other fruit, when in bearing and the rind (pazAvisn5) is perceptible on it, when dead matter comes upon it ¢here is no pollution of it; and when the rind (paz4misn6) is not perceptible on it, its washing is just like chat of corn; and rind is ever with the citron’. 124. For meat, butter, milk, cheese, and preserves (ri#ar) there is no washing *%.

Cuapter III.

124. For meat, butter, milk, cheese, and preserves (ri#ar) there is no washing *%.

Cuapter III.

1. The clothing of a menstruous woman which they shall take new for her use is polluted, and that which is in use is not polluted®*. 2. When a bedchamber (sh4d-afdrvAn) is overspread, and a carpet (bap) is laid upon it and a cushion om the two‘, and

' Pahl. Vend. VII, 93 says, ‘ fruit whose rind (paz4v) exists is also just like that in a pod (kfvak), and /or that which does not remain in a rind, when pollution shall come upon it, /Aere is no cleansing whatever. Afarg said that ¢here is ever a rind (pazavisn6) with the citron.’

® Pahl. Vend. VII, 93 says, ‘for everything separated shere is a washing, except meat and milk.’ Articles for which there is no washing cannot be purified. .

* Pahl. Vend. XVI, 5 says, ‘when in the place she remains in for the purpose, she does not make the clothing she wears on her body polluted, it remains for use within the place. The meaning is, probably, that clothing already set apart for the purpose does not become further polluted, so as to be unfit for her use. It appears also (Pahl. Vend. XVI, 5) that on the spot where menstruation first appears, not even the twigs uplifted in the sacred ceremony are polluted, unless the circumstances are abnormal.

‘ This phrase, about the carpet and cushion, is omitted in K2o by mistake.

CHAPTER II, 123-IU, 6. 277

a woman sits upon z¢ and menstruation occurs, when she puts a foot from the cushion on to the carpet, and from the carpet out into the bed-chamber, the carpet and bed-chamber are both polluted, for ¢hey ave taken newly for her use, dx¢ of the cushion ¢here is no pollution for this reason, because z¢ zs in use. 3. And when she sits on the cushion so that she shall have both the carpet and cushion in use, the bed-chamber is polluted by itself; and when all three shall be in use ¢here is no pollution whatever ?.

4. Just as she knows that z¢ zs menstruation, in the place she zs in for the purpose ’, first the necklace, then the ear-rings, then the head-fillet (4ambar), and then the outer garments (gamak) are to be put off by her. 5. When in the place she remains in for the purpose, even though she may remain a very long time for that purpose, yet then the outer garments are clean, and there is no need of leather covering and leather shoes *.

6. When she knows for certain (aévar) that 7¢ zs menstruation, until the complete changing (gdharidan6) of all er garments, and she shall Aave sat down in the place for menstruation‘, a prayer is to

1 § 2, 3 are merely corollaries from § 1.

* Or, possibly, ‘on the spot she #s in on the occasion ;’ although it would appear from § 5 that the place referred to is the dashtanistn, or place of retirement for the unclean.

® Reading mask va salmth4, but both reading and meaning are doubtful. The first word may be muské, ‘ musk,’ and the other can be read sharmga4h, but, if so, the construction of the sentence is defective, as it stands in the MSS.

* The dashtanist4n, a comfortless room or cell provided in every Parsi house for unclean persons to retire to, where they can see neither sun, moon, stars, fire, water, sacred vessels, nor righteous men; it ought to be fifteen steps (394 feet) from fire,

278 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

be retained znwardly. 7. When worship is celebrated a prayer is to be retained* zxwardly, and should menstruation occur the prayer is to be spoken out by her. 8. When in speaking ou¢ the prayer should menstruation occur, both afterwards, when the time was certain (avtgim4n), and now she is certain’, 9. When she retains a prayer z7wardly, and a call of nature arises, there is no need for her to speak ow the prayer, for the formula for the call is to be spoken by her ‘.

10. Hands sprinkled in ceremonial ablution (padiy4v), when a menstruous woman sees ¢hem, become quite unclean (apddity4v) by her look ®, and even when she looks hastily, and does not see the sacred twigs (bares6m), it is the same. 11. And om the subject of a house (khanak-1 baba), when a menstruous woman is above 2m it, and the sacred twigs

water, and the sacred twigs, and three steps (8 feet) from righteous men (see § 33 and Vend. XVI, 1-10).

1 This kind of prayer (Av. v4, ‘a word or phrase,’ Pahl. v4g, Pers. baz) is a short formula, the beginning of which is to be muttered in a kind of whisper, or (according to the Pahlavi idiom) it ‘is to be taken’ and ‘ retained’ inwardly (as a protection while eating, praying, or performing other necessary acts) by strictly abstaining from all conversation, until the completion of the act, when the prayer or vag ‘is to be spoken out,’ that is, the conclusion of the formula is to be uttered aloud, and the person is then free to speak as he likes. Different formulas are used on different occasions.

® Kao has, ‘she retains a prayer.’ See Pahl. Vend. XVI, 5.

* The meaning is, however, uncertain.

* The Pahlavi text is as follows: Amat vag yakhsenunéd, pésinkaér (Pers. pésydr) bara yAtOnéd, as vag gfiftand kar l6it mamanas nask-i pavan amisn yemalelunisnd. Compare Pahl. Vend. XVI, 5.

® See Pahl. Vend. XVI, 10.

CHAPTER III, 7-I4. 279

Vend. XVI, 5.

* The meaning is, however, uncertain.

* The Pahlavi text is as follows: Amat vag yakhsenunéd, pésinkaér (Pers. pésydr) bara yAtOnéd, as vag gfiftand kar l6it mamanas nask-i pavan amisn yemalelunisnd. Compare Pahl. Vend. XVI, 5.

® See Pahl. Vend. XVI, 10.

CHAPTER III, 7-I4. 279

stand right below, if even fully fifteen steps below, even then the sacred twigs are unclean (ap4dty4z)?; but when not right de/ow fifteen steps are plenty. 12. Prepared food which is within three steps of a menstruous woman is polluted by her, and food which she delivers up (bar4 pardazéd@) from her morning meal (44sht) is not fit for the evening meal (s4m), nor that which she delivers up from her evening meal for the morning meal; it is not fit even for the same woman?; and water which is within three steps of her, when they shall put z¢ into a pail (dabal) or ablution-vessel (p4dtyAvd4n), and shall do z¢ without handling (ayadman), is f¢ for the hands in ceremonial ablution. 13. When she touches the bedding * and garments of any one, Sdshyans * said that so much space is to be washed with bull’s urine (g6méz) and water; her bedding which touches the bedding of any one does not make z¢ polluted. 14. A menstruous woman who becomes clean in three nights is not to be washed till the fifth day; from the fifth day onwards to the ninth day, when-

’ Pahl. Vend. XVI, 10 says, ‘everything, when at the right distance, is proper, except only that one case, when uncleanness is above and cleanness also right below; although it be even much below, yet it is not proper.’ In such a case the prescribed distance of fifteen steps is not sufficient; therefore, the dasht4nistan should be on the ground floor, not over an underground watertank, nor within fifteen steps of the water in such a tank.

* Or, possibly, ham nésman may mean ‘a companion woman,’ when two or more are secluded at the same time. Pahl. Vend. XVI, 17 says, ‘food delivered up by a menstruous woman is of no use whatever, it is not proper; in par/s free from pollution (gavidvasnd), in those likewise it is not proper ;’ the reading gavidvasnd (proposed by Dastir Hoshangji) is, however, doubtful.

5 Or ‘clothing,’ vistarg.

* See Chap. I, 3.

280 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

ever she becomes clean, she is to sit down in cleanliness one day for the sake of her depletion (tihtk), and then she is /i¢ for washing; and after nine nights the depletion is no matter’.

15. A woman who 4as brought forth or miscarried (nas4i), during forty days sees whenever sfe is polluted ; but when she knows for certain that she is Sree from menstruation she is, thereupon, to be associated with meanwhile (vadas), from the forty days? onward; but when she knows for certain that ¢here 7s something of it, she is to be considered meanwhile as menstruous.

onward; but when she knows for certain that ¢here 7s something of it, she is to be considered meanwhile as menstruous.

16. A menstruous woman when she as sat one month as menstruous, and becomes clean on the thirtieth day, when at the very same time she became quite clean she also becomes again menstruous, her depletion (tihtk) is from z¢s beginning, and till the fifth day washing is not allowable. 17. And when she is washed from the menstruation, and has sat three days in cleanliness, and again becomes menstruous as from the beginning, four days are to be watched through by her, and the fifth day is for washing*®. 18. When she has become free

1 See Pahl. Vend. XVI, 22. The Hebrew law (Lev. xv. 1g) prescribes a fixed period of seven days, except in abnormal cases.

2 The same period of seclusion as appointed by the Hebrew

“ Jaw, after the birth of a man child (see Lev. xii. 2-4). The Avesta law (Vend. V, 135-159) prescribes only twelve nights’ seclusion, divided into two periods of three and nine nights respectively, as the Hebrew woman’s seclusion is divided into periods of seven and thirty-three days. ,

5 The substance of §§ 16, 17 is given in Pahl. Vend. XVI, 22, but in language even more obscure than here. The washing mentioned here is merely for the first menstruation ; that for the second one being prescribed in § 18.

CHAPTER III, 15-22. 281

from the second menstruation she is not in cleanliness for nine days and nights,—these days and nights are for watching,—azd then she is to be washed; when the nine days avd nights are completed, on the same day washing is good’.

19. Of leucorrhoea (Atharak)*, when it as quite changed colour, that which comes on before and also that which is after menstruation, the pollution is just like ¢hat of menstruation.

20. When she as become so completely clean from menstruation that her, washing may be as usual (dastébarag hae), she does not make the sacred twigs (baresém), or even other things, polluted when beyond three steps.

21, On account of severe cold it is allowable for her to sit out towards® the fire; and while she washes a prayer (v4g) is to be taken zxwardly by her‘, and the washing of her hands, except with bull’s urine (géméz), is not proper till ken; and when ¢hey are washed by her, two hundred noxious creatures are to be destroyed by her as atonement for sin.

22. A woman who goes beyond the period of menstruation 5, and, afterwards, sees she is polluted, when her pregnancy is certain—except when her

1 In such abnormal cases the Hebrew law (Lev. xv. 25-28) prescribes seven days’ seclusion after recovery.

3 Av. Aithra, see explanation of siharak-hémand (Av. dithravand) in Pahl. Vend. XVI, 1, 34.

> Dastir Jam4spji reads val bavan-i 4t4sh, ‘to the part of the fire.’ From what follows it would seem doubtful whether this distant approach to the fire is allowable until she is ready for washing.

* See § 6, note.

® Or, ‘goes up from the place of menstruation.’

282 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

* See § 6, note.

® Or, ‘goes up from the place of menstruation.’

282 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

miscarriage (nasA4t yeheviintand) is evident—is then to be washed with bull’s urine and water; when her pregnancy is not certain she is to be considered as menstruous. 23. Some say', moreover, that when miscarriage is certainly manifest she is, meanwhile, to be considered as menstruous. 24. Some say that when she is doubtful about the miscarriage she is to be washed with ceremony ®.

25. And for any one? who comes in contact with a menstruous woman, or with the person whom it is necessary to wash with water and bull's urine, ¢¢ is the root of a sin of sixty sttrs*. 26. And for whomever knowingly has sexual intercourse with a menstruous woman 7¢ is the root of a sin of fifteen Tanapthars and sixty sttrs 5

27. Of a menstruous woman who sees a fire the sin is one Farman £, and when she goes within three steps z/ is one Tandpfhar, and when she puts a hand on the fire itself? z¢ is a sin of fifteen Tan4pahars; and zz like manner as fo the ashes® and water goblet®. 28. When she looks at water z¢ is a

1 Literally, ‘there is one who says thus.’

* See Chap. II, 65.

* Reading ais instead of adinas, ‘then for him.’

‘ That is, the sin is a Khér (see Chap. I, 2).

® According to the Avesta (Vend. XV, 23, 24) he becomes a peshétanu (Pahl. tanapfhar). The Hebrew law (Lev. xv. 24) makes him unclean for seven days.

® See Chap. I, 2. That it was sinful for her to look at fire, even in Avesta times, appears from Vend. XVI, 8.

7 Literally, ‘on the body of the fire.’

* That libfsy4 means ‘ashes’ appears from Pahl. Vend. V, 150; literally it is Huzvaris for ‘clothing or covering,’ and is so used in Pahl. Vend. VI, 106, VII, 122. Metaphorically, ashes are the clothing of the fire.

® Reading dfibalak; but the word is doubtful. Possibly it

CHAPTER III, 23-32. 283

sin of one Farman; when she sits in water z¢ is a sin of fifteen Tan4pfhars; and when through disobedience she walks out in the rain every single drop is a sin of fifteen Tanapdhars for her. 29. And the sun and other luminaries are not to be looked at by her, and animals and plants are not to be looked at by her, and conversation with a righteous man is not to be held by her; for a fiend so violent is that fiend of menstruation!, ¢4a¢, where another fiend does not smite anything with a look (akhsh), it smites with a look.

30. As fo a house? in which is a menstruous woman, the fire of that house is not to be kindled; food which is delivered up from before a menstruous woman is not proper for the same woman *, 31. A tray-cloth (khv4né gamak) which stands before 4er, when it is not in contact with her, is not polluted; a table-napkin (pataskhdr) when apart from her thigh, and contact does not occur, is proper +.

A tray-cloth (khv4né gamak) which stands before 4er, when it is not in contact with her, is not polluted; a table-napkin (pataskhdr) when apart from her thigh, and contact does not occur, is proper +.

32. When one® wishes to consecrate the sacred cakes (drén)*, when one holds up the sacred twigs

should be read gébarak for gav-bar, ‘bull’s produce,’ referring to the bull’s urine which, with ashes, is prescribed (Vend. V, 148) as the first food for a woman after miscarriage.

* The demoness Géh (see Bund. III, 3-9).

* By khanak, ‘house, abode,’ must here be understood merely the woman’s place of seclusion. Kzo inserts 4taés dén after mfin, which renders it possible (by assuming another preposition) to translate as follows: ‘As fo a house in which is a fire, the fire in that house is not to be kindled by a menstruous woman.’

5 See § 12.

* Fit to use again.

* Perhaps we should read ‘she’ throughout this section, as a woman can perform these rites among women (see Chap. X, 35).

* The drén (Av. draona, corrupted into drain or darfin by

284 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

(baresém)' from the twig-stand (baresém-d4n), and menstruation occurs, and just as it came to one’s knowledge one puts down the sacred twigs and goes out, the sacred twigs are not polluted.

P4z. writers) is a small round pancake or wafer of unleavened bread, about the size of the palm of the hand. It is made of wheaten flour and water, with a little clarified butter, and is flexible. A drén is converted into a frasast by marking it on one side, before frying, with nine superficial cuts (in three rows of three each) made with a finger-nail while thrice repeating the words humat hfikht huvarst, ‘well-thought, well-said, well-done,’ one word to each of the nine cuts. Any drén or frasast that is torn must not be used in any ceremony. In the dr6én ceremony two dréns are placed separately by the priest upon a very low table before him, on its left side, the nearer one having a small piece of butter (g4us hudhau) upon it; two frasasts are similarly placed upon its right-hand side, the farther one having a pomegranate twig (urvardém) upon it; and between this and the farther drén an egg is placed. The sacred twigs (baresém) must also be present on their stand to the left of the priest, and a fire or lamp must stand opposite him, on the other side of the table. The ptiest recites a certain formula of consecration (chiefly Yas. III, 1~VIII, 9), during which he uplifts the sacred twigs, and mentions the name of the angel, or of the guardian spirit of a deceased person, in whose honour the ceremony is performed. After consecration, pieces are broken off the dréns by the officiating priest, and are eaten by himself and those present, beginning with the priests (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 396, 407, 408, AV. p. 147).

After consecration, pieces are broken off the dréns by the officiating priest, and are eaten by himself and those present, beginning with the priests (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 396, 407, 408, AV. p. 147).

1 The baresém (Av. baresma) consists of a number of slender rods or taf (Pahl. tak), formerly twigs of some particular trees, but now thin metal wires are generally used. The number of these twigs varies according to the nature of the ceremony, but is usually from five to thirty-three. These twigs are laid upon the crescentshaped tops of two adjacent metal stands, each called a m4h-rf, ‘“moon-face,’ and both together forming the bares6m-d4n or ‘twig-stand.” The baresém is prepared for the sacred rites by the recital of certain prayers by the officiating priest, during which he washes the twigs with water, and ties them together with a kfistik or girdle formed of six thread-like ribbons split out of a leaflet of the date-palm and twisted together; this girdle, being

CHAPTER III, 33-IV, I. 285

33. And during her menstruation she is to be so seated that, from her body, ¢here are fifteen steps of three feet to water, fifteen steps to fire, fifteen steps to the sacred twigs, and three steps to a righteous man!, 34. And her food is to be carried forth in iron or leaden vessels; and the person (valman) who shall carry forth the food stands at three steps away from her?. 35. When worship is celebrated, every time at the dedication (shnfiimané)® of the consecration of sacred cakes (drén yast) z¢ is to be uttered aloud éy her; some say the Ithd and Ashem-vohti *.

CuaptTer IV.

1. A sacred thread-girdle (kisttk), should it be made of silk (parvand), is not proper; the hair (pashm) of a hairy goat and a hairy camel is

passed twice round the twigs, is secured with a right-handed and left-handed knot on one side, and is then passed round a third time and secured with a similar double knot on the other side, exactly as the kfistfk or sacred thread-girdle is secured round the waist of a Parsi man or woman (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 396-399).

' See Vend. XVI, 9, 10. All the ceremonial apparatus must be kept as far removed as the sacred twigs.

2 See Vend. XVI, 11-14, which states that the food is to be carried forth on iron, lead, or the basest metal.

5 This is the time when the name of the angel or spirit is mentioned, in whose honour the cakes are consecrated (see § 32, note on dr6én, and Chap. VII, 8).

‘ The Itha is Yas. V (so called from its first word), which forms a part of the drén yast or formula of consecration (see § 32, note on drén). The Ashem-vohfi is probably that in Yas. VIII, 9, which concludes the consecration. The same details are given in Pahl. Vend. XVI, 17. These’ prayers also form a portion of all ceremonial worship, including the Yazisn.

286 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

The Ashem-vohfi is probably that in Yas. VIII, 9, which concludes the consecration. The same details are given in Pahl. Vend. XVI, 17. These’ prayers also form a portion of all ceremonial worship, including the Yazisn.

286 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

proper, and from other hairy creatures (mdyin6) it is proper among the lowly (nakhéztk). 2. The least fulness! necessary for z¢ is exactly three finger-dveadths ; when z¢ is exactly three fingeréreadths altogether? from one side, and when the rest is cut off, itis proper. 3. When ome retains the prayer znwardly* and has tied his girdle, and ties z¢ anew once again, he will untie that which he has tied, and it is not proper *.

4. Cloth of thick silk brocade (dtp4k5) and figured silk (parntk4n6) is not good for girdling 5; and cloth of hide when the hair is stripped from it, of wool, of hair, of cotton, of dyed silk, and of wood® is proper for shirting (saptkih). 5. Four fingerbreadths of shirt’ is the measure of zfs width away

1 Literally, ‘width ;’ that is, extra width, or slackness round the waist, as the girdle sits very loosely over a loose shirt; or, as the text implies, the slackness ought to admit three fingers together, projecting edgeways from the waist. After tying it so loosely, any unnecessary length of string may be cut off, when the girdle is put on for the first time. The necessary looseness is again mentioned in Chap. X, 1.

* Literally, ‘extreme to extreme ;’ r6ésman-4-réésman being Huzviris for sarAsar.

* That is, has begun the prayer formula (requisite while tying on the girdle) with a bas or muttered prayer (see Chap. III, 6, note).

‘ The meaning appears to be that he must not tie the girdle a second time without recommencing the prayer formula.

® This word, ayfby4ég,hanfh, is chiefly a transcript from the Avesta name of the kfstfk or girdle, aiwyaunghana. Probably garments in general are meant.

* Perhaps darfn may mean cloth of bark, hemp, or flax here.

* The sacred shirt, worn by Parsis of both sexes (young children excepted) in India, is a very loose tunic of white muslin, with very short loose sleeves covering part of the upper arm. It is called sadaro (Pers. sudarah) in Gugar&ti, and shaptk (Pers. shabf) in Pahlavi.

CHAPTER IV, 2-9. 287

from each side, from the neck to the skirt (parik); and as fo the length before and behind, as much as is proper to cover up is good. 6. So much length and breadth, when it is double or thickened !, are not proper; when on the separation (ddr m4nak) of the two folds ome remains clothed on one side, both when he wears the girdle (kdstik), aza@ when he does not wear the girdle, even then it is not undress (vishadakth)*.

7. When a shirt of one fold is put on, and the skirt has concealed both sides, the girdle is tied over it, avd it is proper. 8. When two shirts are put on, and they shall tie the girdle over that which is above, then 7¢ is for him a root of the sin owing to? running about uncovered *.

9. By a man and woman, until fifteen years of age, there is no committal of ¢he sin of running about uncovered®; and the sin of unseasonable

1 Assuming that aftabarftd stands for astabarfd; the Huz. aft being substituted for the Paz. ast. The text appears to refer to lined or stuffed shirts, such as would be very suitable for the cold winters of Persia, like the clothing padded with cotton wool used by natives of the cooler parts of India in the cold season.

* That is, the degree of nakedness which is sinful (see §§ 8-10).

8 K2o has 14, ‘not,’ instead of r&t, ‘owing to;’ this would reverse the meaning of the sentence, but it is not the usual place for the negative particle.

‘ This sin is called vishad-dQbé4risnth ; it is mentioned in Pahl. Vend. V, 167, VII, 48, but not described there. The usual definition of the sin is ‘walking about without the sacred threadgirdle;’ and it is generally classed with the two other Parsi sins of ‘walking with one boot’ and ‘making water on foot’ (see AV. XXV, 5, 6); sometimes a fourth Parsi sin, ‘ unseasonable chatter,’ is associated with them, as in the text, but this is supposed to be punished in a different manner in hell (see AV. XXIII).

® Indicating that it is not absolutely necessary to wear the sacred thread-girdle till one is fifteen years old (see Chap. X, 13).

288 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

chatter! arises after fifteen years of age*. 10. The sin of running about uncovered, as far as three steps, is a Farman each step; at the fourth step z¢ is a Tandpohar $ sea.

11. A girdle to which ¢here is no fringe is proper ; and when they shall tie a woman’s ringlet (gurs)*‘ 2¢ is not proper.

12. Walking with one boot® as far as four steps is

1 This sin is called dr4y4n-gyisath, literally, ‘eagerness for chattering,’ and consists in talking while eating, praying, or at any other time when a prayer (v4g) has been taken inwardly and is not yet spoken out; many details regarding it are given in the next chapter. The sin consists in breaking the spell, or destroying the effect, of the vag.

* This is modified by Chap. V, 1, 2.

® See Chap. I, 1, 2. These particulars are deduced by the Pahlavi commentator from Vend. XVIII, 115, which refers, however, to a special case of going without girdle and shirt. He says (Pahl. Vend. XVIII, 116), ‘so that as far as the fourth step it is not more than (ai) a Sréshé-4aran4m, and at the fourth step it amounts to the root of a Tanapfhar within him; some say that he is within what is allowed him in going three s/eps. When he walks on very many steps it is also not more than a Tan&pfhar, and when he stops again 1/ 7s counted from the starting-point’ (compare § 12).

When he walks on very many steps it is also not more than a Tan&pfhar, and when he stops again 1/ 7s counted from the starting-point’ (compare § 12).

‘ Probably referring to the possibility of tying the girdle over a woman’s hair, when hanging loose down to her waist. The present custom among Parsi women in India is to cover up the whole of their hair with a white handkerchief tied closely over the head; but whether this is an ancient custom is uncertain.

5 This sin, which is mentioned in Bund. XXVIII, 13, is called aé-mQk-ddb4risnih or khadi-mfk-dab4risnth, literally, ‘running in one boot,’ and is usually so understood, but how there can be any risk of the committal of so inconvenient an offence is not explained. Dastir Hoshangji thinks that a€-mfk, ‘one boot,’ was formerly written avi-mQk, ‘ without boots ;’ and no doubt avi is sometimes written exactly like khad@, ‘one,’ (indicating, possibly, a phonetic change of avf into agvi). Perhaps, however, the word alludes to the Persian practice of wearing an outer boot

CHAPTER IV, IO-I4. 289

a Tandpfhar sez, when with one! movement; and after the fourth step as much as one shall walk is a Tanapfhar; and when he sits down and walks on the sin is the same that z¢ woudd de from his startingpoint (bdinth); and ¢here were some who said z¢ is a Tanapthar for each league (parasang).

13. At night, when they lie down, the shirt and girdle are to be worn, for they are more protecting for the body, and good for the soul. 14. When they lie down with the shirt and girdle, before sleep one shall utter one Ashem-voh(i, and with every coming and going of the breath (vayd) is a good work of three Sréshé-4arandms’; and if in that

(mk) over an inner one of thinner leather, when walking out of doors ; so that the sin of ‘running in one pair of boots’ would be something equivalent to walking out in one’s stockings; and this seems all the more probable from the separate account of walking ‘without boots or stockings,’ avimfgak, given in Chap. X, 12. But whatever may have been the original meaning of the word, Parsis nowadays understand that it forbids their walking without shoes; this should be recollected by any European official in India who fancies that Parsis ought to take off their shoes in his presence, as by insisting on such a practice he is compelling them to commit what they believe to be a serious sin.

? Assuming that han, ‘ this,’ stands for aé, ‘one’ (see p. 218, note 3). The amount of sinfulness in walking improperly shod appears to be deduced from that incurred by walking improperly dressed (see § 10).

* See Bund. XX, 2, The same details are given in Chap. X, 24.

’ The Av. sraosh6-farana appears to have been a scourge with which offenders were lashed by the assistant priests (see Vend. III, 125, 129, IV, 38, &c.), and a Sréshé-4arandm was, therefore, originally one lash with a scourge. As the gravity of an offence was measured by the number of lashes administered, when this term was transferred from the temporal to the spiritual gravity of sin, it was considered as the unit of weight by which sins were estimated ; and, by a further process of reasoning, the good works

(5) U

290 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

sleep decease occurs, his renunciation of st is accomplished '.

Cuapter V.

1, Of unseasonable chatter* that of children of five years of age has no root; and from five years till seven years, when ome is under the tuition of his

necessary for counterbalancing sins were estimated by the same unit of weight. Regarding the amount of a Srésh6-4aran4m there is much uncertainty; according to Chap. XVI, 5 and Pahl. Vend. VI, 15 it is the same as a Farmén, and this appears to be the case also from a comparison of § 10 with Pahl. Vend. XVIII, 116 (see note on §10); but according to Chap. XI, 2 it is half a Farman, and the FarmAn is also probably the degree meant by the frequent mention of three Sréshé-daranams as the least weight of sin or good works that will turn the scale in which the soul's actions are weighed after death (see Chap. VI, 3). This uncertainty may perhaps have arisen from aé, ‘ one,’ and the cipher 3 being often written alike in Pahlavi. But, besides this uncertainty, there is some discordance between the various accounts of the actual weight of a Sréshékaranam, as may be seen in Chaps. X, 24, XI, 2, XVI, 5. Asa weight the Srésh6-4aranfm is not often mentioned in the Pahlavi Vendidad, for wherever it translates the Av. sraosh6-&arana it means ‘lashes with a scourge;’ but the weight of one Sréshédaran4m is mentioned in Pahl. Vend. VI, 15, three Srésh6-4aranéms in IV, 142, VII, 136, XVII, 11, XVIII, 55, 116, and five Srésh6daranams in XVI, 8.

1 Patitikih, ‘the dropping’ or renunciation of sin, is effected by confessing serious offences to a high-priest, and also by the recitation of a particular formula called the Patit, in which every imaginable sin is mentioned with a declaration of repentance of any such sins as the reciter may have committed. The priest ordains such atonement as he thinks necessary, but the remission of the sins depends upon the after performance of the atonement and the effectual determination to avoid such sins in future (see Chap. VIII, 1, 2, 8).

® See Chap. IV, 9.

CHAPTER V, 1-5. 291

The priest ordains such atonement as he thinks necessary, but the remission of the sins depends upon the after performance of the atonement and the effectual determination to avoid such sins in future (see Chap. VIII, 1, 2, 8).

® See Chap. IV, 9.

CHAPTER V, 1-5. 291

father azd innocent', it has no root z” him, and when sinful it has root 2” the father?. 2. And from eight years till ¢hey ave man and woman of fifteen years, if even ove is innocent during the performance of the ritual (yasté), but is able to say its Itha and Ashem-voht 3, and does not say ¢hem, zt is the root of unseasonable chatter for him‘; and when fe is able to perform 42s ritual by heart (narm), and says only the Ith and Ashem-vohd, some have said that such is as when his ritual is not performed and there is no offering (yastéfrid), and some ave said that it is not unseasonable chatter.

3. Unseasonable chatter may occur at every ceremonial (yazisn6); for him who has performed the ritual 2¢ is-a Tan4pdhar szz5; for him who has not performed the ritual z¢ is less, some Aave said three Sréshé-4arandms*. 4. The measure of unseasonable chatter is a Tandpdhar szz; this is where every ceremony, or every morsel, or every drop of urine is not completed’. 5. Of the unseasonable chatter of

1 That is, intending no harm, as contrasted with sinful or wilful chatter in defiance of instruction.

* Because the father is supposed to be responsible, in the next world, for the sins of the child, even as he will profit by its good works (see Chaps. X, 22, XII, 15).

® See Chap. III, 35.

* Inattention to prayers evinced by improper silence is thus put upon the same footing as inattention evinced by improper talking. This portion of the sentence is omitted in K2o.

5 See Chap. I, 1, 2. It is a greater sin in the officiating priests than in the other persons present at the ceremony.

* Probably a Farman sin (see Chap. IV, 14, note).

7 Referring to the three principal occasions when a prayer (v4g) is taken inwardly and retained until the completion of the action ; during which time it is unlawful to say anything but the prescribed prayers (see Chap. III, 6, note).

U 2

292 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

him who has not performed the ritual Afarg? said this degree is slighter; Médék-m4h? said both are alike, and he spoke further of this, since for him who has not performed the ritual, and does not attend to* saying its Itha and Ashem-vohd, it is more severe than for him who has performed the ritual, and does not attend to consecrating its sacred cake (drén). 6. Méaédk-m4h said that it (the ceremonial)® does not become Gét6-khartd*; Afarg said that it amounts to an offering (yastéfrtd)® for every one, except for that person who £mows the ritual by heart, and through sinfulness will not perform 724; and it becomes 4zs at the time when, during his life azd by his command, it is recited with this intention, namely: ‘I wish to do #4, my faith (astéb4nth) is in the religion °.’

7. The deaf and dumb when it is not possible for him to say an Ashem does not commit unseasonable chatter’; and when it is possible for him to say an Ashem he shall three times say of it, ‘Ashem, ashem, ashem ;’ and if it be possible for him to say

1 See Chap. I, 3.

* Literally, ‘ believe or trust to.’

* During which unseasonable chatter occurs.

* Generally written Géti-kharfd (see Bund. XXX, 28); but, perhaps, we should here read yast6frid, ‘offering,’ though gétékkharid occurs in Chap. XII, 30.

5 The MSS. have merely st6frtd, which differs from the foregoing gét6-kharfd only in one Pahlavi letter, so we should probably read the same word in both cases, but which of them it ought to be is uncertain.

* Meaning, apparently, that he can obtain the benefit of any past ceremony, forfeited by wilful negligence, by repentance and a repetition of the ceremony during his lifetime.

7 By omitting to say it (see § 2). This clause of the sentence is omitted in Kao.

CHAPTER V, 6-—VI, 2. 293

‘ith4’ and ‘ashem-vohf\’ it is well, and when it is only possible for him to say ‘itha’ it matters not},

CuapTer VI,

1. The deaf and dumb and helpless (armést)®, though of unblemished conduct and proper disposition, is incapable of doing good works, and from the éme when he is born till the ¢ime when he shall die, all the duty and good works which they may perform in the world become his property (nafsman) as much as his even by whom /fey are performed; some say that it is thus: as much as they belong to Zaratfist®. 2. Though he does not do the good works not really originating with (ahambdni£) him, and does not commit the sin not really originating with zm, z¢ is better than though he were, able to do the good works not really originating with him, avd should not do ¢hem; but should commit the sin not really originating with Am; when, afterwards, he passes away, and then also comes to #zs account as to sin and good works, when the good works not really originating with him are more 4e zs in heaven (vahist), when the sin

1 That is, any one barely able to speak must repeat so much of the indispensable prayers as he is able to pronounce, otherwise he will commit sin.

3 That is, any one compelled to remain stationary or secluded, owing to bodily or mental infirmity (see Chap. II, 98); an idiot, or insane person, is probably meant here.

* This comment seems to imply that its writer was translating from an Avesta text, and here met with a word which some persons thought contained a reference to Zaratfst, but which he first translated so as to suit the context; perhaps Av. zarazdaiti may be suggested.

294 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

not really originating with 42m is more 4e zs in hell, and when both are equal 4e zs among the everstationary (hamfstak4n)4. 3. When the good works are three Sréshé-faranams* more than the sins he ts in heaven (vahist), when the good works are one Tand4pdhar more he attains to the best existence (pahldm ahv4n)’, when his ceremony (yast) is per-

1 That is, he is treated, with regard to the actions merely imputed to him, precisely as all others are with regard to their own actions. With reference to the hamistak4n, Arda-Viraf states (AV.VI, 2, 5-12) that on his journey to the other world he * saw the souls of several people who remain in the same position,’ and he was informed that ‘they call this the place of the Hamistakfn (‘those ever-stationary”), and these souls remain 7” this place till the future existence; and /hey are the souls of those people whose good works and sin were equal. Speak out to the worldlings thus: “Consider not the easier good works with avarice and vexation! for every one whose good works are three Srésh6farandms more than Azs sin is for heaven, /hey whose sin is more are for hell, they # whom both are equal remain among’ these Hamistak4n till the future existence.” And their punishment is cold or heat from the changing of the atmosphere ; and they have no other adversity.’

* Probably equivalent to a Farm&n sin (see Chaps, I, 1, 2, IV, 14, note).

* This appears to be another name for Garédmé4n, ‘the abode of song,’ which is the highest heaven, or dwelling of Afharmazd. The lower heaven is here called Vahist, which is a general term for heaven in general. AV. VII-X, XVII, 27, and Mkh. VII, 9-12, 20, 21 describe four grades in heaven and four in hell, besides the intermediate neutral position of the Hamistak4an (AV. VI, Mkh. VII, 18, 19). The four grades of heaven, proceeding upwards, are Hiimat for good thoughts in the station of the stars, Hikht for good words in the station of the moon, Hfvarst for good deeds in the station of the sun, and Gar6dm4n where Afharmazd dwells (Vend. XIX, r2r). And the four grades of hell, proceeding downwards, are Dfs-himat for evil thoughts, Dfs-hOkht for evil words, Dfis-havarst for evil deeds, and the darkest hell (Vend. XIX, 147) where the evil spirit dwells. The p&hifm ahv4n of

CHAPTER VI, 3-6. 295

XIX, r2r). And the four grades of hell, proceeding downwards, are Dfs-himat for evil thoughts, Dfs-hOkht for evil words, Dfis-havarst for evil deeds, and the darkest hell (Vend. XIX, 147) where the evil spirit dwells. The p&hifm ahv4n of

CHAPTER VI, 3-6. 295

formed?. 4. Sdshyans* said that to come into that best existence it is not necessary to perform the ceremony, for when his good works are one* Tan4pihar more than the sin he attains to the best existence, and no account is 4akex of performing his ceremony; because in the heavenly existence (garédmantkth) it is not necessary to perform a ceremony, for an excess of good works must attain Garédman*. 5. As Séshyans said, in heaven (vahist) he who is below is elevated to him who is above; and it says thus: ‘ Happy indeed art thou, O man! who art in any way near unto that imperishable existence °.’

6. Kdshtand-bigéd* said that an infidel (akdtné)", when 42s good works are one Tandpdhar more than 4zs sin, is saved from hell.

the text is merely the Pahlavi form of Av. vahistem ahfim (Vend. VII, 133, XVIII, 69, XIX, 120, Yas. IX, 64), whence the term vahist (Pers. bahist) is also derived.

1 That is, when his surviving relatives have performed the proper religious ceremonies after his death.

* See Chap. I, 3.

* Reading a@, ‘one,’ and supposing that this Paz. form has been substituted for an original Huz. khad@k, ‘one.’ This supposition being necessary to account for the aé preceding its noun, instead of following it; and without it we ought to read ‘three’ instead of ‘one,’ which seems, however, hardly reconcileable with the context (but compare Pahl. Vend. VII, 136). This is an instance of the ambiguity occasioned by aé, ‘one,’ and the cipher 3 being often written alike in Pahlavi, as already noticed in p. 289, note 3. The word might also be taken as the conditional] verbal form a6, ‘shall be,’ but in that case it is likewise misplaced.

* See note on pahifim ahv4n in § 3.

* A somewhat similar exclamation to that in Vend. VII, 136.

* See Chap. I, 4, note.

7 That is, one of another religion; not an apostate, nor an atheist. :

296 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

7. Of a pure law (d4@) are we of the good religion, and we are of the primitive faith; of a mixed law are those of the Sintk congregation’; of a vile

VII, 136.

* See Chap. I, 4, note.

7 That is, one of another religion; not an apostate, nor an atheist. :

296 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

7. Of a pure law (d4@) are we of the good religion, and we are of the primitive faith; of a mixed law are those of the Sintk congregation’; of a vile

1 It is not easy to identify this Sintk vaskardth, but Professor J. Darmesteter suggests that the term may have been applied to the Manicheans settled in eastern Turkistén and western China, whence fhey may have been called Sinik (the country of the Sénf, Av. S4ini, being identified with Xinfstin or China in Bund. XV, 29, because 7Sin is the Arabic name of the latter). This is confirmed, to some extent, by a passage in the Dinkard (see Dastiir Péshétan’s edition of the Pahlavi text, p. 27), where three foreign religions are mentioned, that of the Jews from Arfim, that of the Messiah from the west, and that of M4nih from Turkistén. Darmesteter further points out the following passages in Barbier de Meynard’s French translation of Mas’afidi, which show that the Manicheans had considerable influence in eastern Turkistan as late as A.D. 944 :—

(Meynard, I, 268): ‘... the Turks, the Khuzlug, and the Taghazghaz, who occupy the town of Kfisan, situated between Khurésan and China, and who are now (a.p. 944) the most valiant, most powerful, and best governed of all the Turkish races »> and tribes. Their kings bear the title of frkh4n (“sub-khan?”), \7 and they alone, among all these nations, profess the religion of Mani’

Again, after stating that the Chinese were at first Samanians (Buddhists), it is added (Meynard, II, 258): ‘Their kingdom is contiguous to that of the Taghazghaz, who, as we have said above, are Manicheans, and proclaim the simultaneous existence of the two principles of light and darkness. These people were living in simplicity, and in a faith like that of the Turkish races, when there turned up among them a demon of the dualist sect, who showed them, in tempting language, two opposing principles in everything that exists in the world, such as life and death, health and sickness, riches and poverty, light and darkness, union and separation, connection and severance, rising and setting, existence and non-existence, night and day, &c. Then, he spoke to them of the various ailments which afflict rational beings, animals, children, idiots, and madmen; and he added that God could not be responsible for this evil, which was in distressing contradiction to the excellence which distinguishes his works, and that be was

CHAPTER VI, 7—VIt, I. 297

law are the Zandtk?, the Christian (Tars4k), the Jew (Yahfa@), and others of this sort (sand)?

Cuapter VII.

1. The morning sun it is necessary to reverence (yastan6) till midday, and that of midday it is necessary to reverence till the afternoon time, and that of the afternoon time it is necessary to reverence till night®; whenever ome is quite prepared

Cuapter VII.

above any such imputation. By these quibbles, and others like them, he carried away their minds, and made them adopt his errors.’

The tenets of the Manicheans ought, no doubt, to have been considered by the Zoroastrians as a mixture of truth and error, just as those of the Sinik congregation are represented to be in our text; but such tenets being an heretical offshoot of Zoroastrianism, it argues unusual liberality in the priests if they preferred Manicheans to Christians, that is, heretics to infidels.

Kzo has altered sfnfk vaskardth into nisfntk (or vidinfk) sikaftth, which appears to be an attempt to bring the words within the limits of the writer’s knowledge, without paying much attention to their collective meaning.

A sect which (according to its name) probably adhered to a certain heretical interpretation (zand) in preference to the orthodox Avesta and Zand. Nérydsang, in his Sanskrit version of Mkh. XXXVI, 16, explains a Zandik as one who ‘thinks well of Aharman and the demons.’

2 Unless this paragraph be a continuation of the quotation from Kfshtané-biigéd’s commentary, which seems unlikely, its contents have an important bearing upon the age of the Shayast 14-shayast. As it does not mention Muhammadanism by name it could hardly have been written after the fall of the Sasanian dynasty, when that new faith had become much more important, in Persia, than those of the Christians and Jews.

® Referring to the recitation of the Khfrshéd Nyfyis, or ‘ salutation of the sun,’ which should be performed thrice a day, in the Hfvan, Rapftvin, and A(izérin G&hs, or periods of the day (see

298 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

for activity (khvésk4rth), and shall then do reverence, it is proper. 2. And when anything of that happens which zzaicates when it is not proper to wash the hands, and about this he considers that when he does not reverence the sun it will stop}, a¢ the time previous 0 ¢ha¢ in which it occurs the sun is to be fully reverenced by him, and, afterwards, when £zs hands are washed, it is to be reverenced again ; and when he does not reverence 2¢, except when innocent through not reverencing z¢?, then it becomes irreverence (14 yast) of the sun for him®.

3. As ¢o the sun it is better when ome reverences z¢ every time at the proper period (pavan gAs-i nafsman); when he does not reverence 7¢ for once z¢ is a sin of thirty stirs‘. 4. Reverencing the sun is every time a good work of one Tanapdhar®; and so of the moon and fire zz like manner *&. 5. When on account of cloudiness the sun is not visible (pé@4k), and one shall reverence 2z¢, it is proper.

Bund. XXV, 9); a few sentences in the Ny4yis, or formula of salutation, are altered to suit the particular G4h in which it is recited.

5. When on account of cloudiness the sun is not visible (pé@4k), and one shall reverence 2z¢, it is proper.

Bund. XXV, 9); a few sentences in the Ny4yis, or formula of salutation, are altered to suit the particular G4h in which it is recited.

1 K2o has, ‘it will protect :/;’ having read netrfinéd instead of ketrfinéd in its original. To pray with unwashed hands would be sinful (see Pahl. Vend. XIX, 84).

* That is, except when the omission is to avoid a worse evil, as in the instance just mentioned.

* Or, perhaps, ‘it does not become a Khfirshéd Yast (“a formula of praise in honour of the sun”) for him.’ This Yast forms a part of the Nydyis.

‘ That is, an Aredfs sin (see Chap. I, 2). M6 has, ‘when he does not reverence 7/ again.’

5 That is, a good work sufficient to counterbalance a Tanapthar sin, which puts the performance of a Ny4yis on the same footing as the consecration of a sacred cake or drén (see Chap. XVI, 6).

* The moon and fire have each a separate Nydyis. .

CHAPTER VII, 2-8. 299

6. And while one does not reverence the sun, the good works which they do that day are not their own ; some say that of the good works which they do within the law (d4a) of the good religion he has no share. 7. While they do not wash dirty hands any good work which they do is not their own, for while one does not utterly destroy corruption (nasis)! ¢here is no coming of the angels to his body, and when ¢here is no coming of the angels to his body he has no steadfastness in the religion, and when he has no steadfastness in the religion no good work whatever reaches unto him.

8. When one wishes to perform the propitiation (shnaman)? of fire, it is allowable to perform one ‘Aathré’ by itself, and, when two and the ‘mad vispaéibyé Aterebyéd, these three are thus the propitiation everywhere*; some say that it would be proper to perform z¢ while allowable, except that of the heterodox.

1 That is, the demon of corruption, who is supposed to enter and reside in all filth of the nature of dead matter, until expelled or destroyed by cleansing.

* A shnOman or khshnfimanéd (Av. khshnfiman) is a short formula of praise, reciting all the usual titles of the spirit intended to be propitiated by it, and is used for dedicating the prayers or ceremony specially to his service (see Chaps. ILI, 35, X, 2, XIV, 3). The propitiatory formulas for the thirty angels and archangels who preside over the days of the month constitute the Sirézah, or fornf of prayer ‘relating to the thirty days.’

> The propitiation of fire (as given in Sir6z. I, 9, Atas Nyayis 5, 6) consists of five sentences, each beginning with the word Athré6, ‘of the fire,’ and the last sentence also contains the words mad vispaéiby6é Atereby6, ‘ with all fires.’ The meaning of the text appears to be that it is allowable to use only one of these sentences (probably the last), but if two are used besides the last they are amply sufficient for practical purposes.

300 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

9. Whoever shall extinguish’ a fire, by him ten fires are to be gathered together, by him ten punishments are to be endured, by him ten ants are to be destroyed ?, and by him holy-water (zéhar) is to be presented to the sacred fire (Atas-i VAhr4m).

CuaptTer VIII.

1. Sin which affects accusers * is to be atoned for (vig4risn) among the accusers, and that relating to

1 Literally, ‘kill,’

2 The ant being a creature of the evil spirit, on account of its carrying away corn.

* Vinas-i hamém4l&n, ‘sin relating to adversaries,’ Sins appear to be divided into two great classes, hamém4l and ribantk. A hamémAl sin seems to be any secular offence which injures some person or animal who, thereupon, becomes a hamémAl, ‘accuser’ (Av. hameretha, ‘opponent,’ Yas. LVI, x, 10), and who must first be satisfied by atonement, before confession to the high-priest, or renunciation of sin, can be of any avail for removing the sin (compare Matthew v. 23-26). The Rivayats assert that if a person dies without atoning for a hamém4l sin, his soul will be stopped at the Kinvad bridge (see Bund. XII, 7) on its way to the other world, and kept in a state of torment until the arrival of the ‘accuser,’ and after he is satisfied the sinner’s soul will be disposed of, in the usual manner, according to the balance of its good and bad actions. It is also probable that only a man of ‘the good religion,’ or an animal of the good creation, can be an ‘accuser.’ A rfibanfk sin, on the other hand, seems to be one which affects only the sinner’s own soul, and for which the high-priest can prescribe a sufficient atonement. It is doubtful, however, whether the Parsis nowadays have any very clear notions of the exact distinction between these two classes of sins, although aware of their names, which are mentioned in their Patit, or renunciation of sin. The explanations given in some editions of their Khurdah Avesta, or prayer-book, are confined to mentioning certain special instances of each class of sin; thus,

CHAPTER VII, 9—VIII, 3. 301

the soul is to be atoned for among the high-priests (radan), and when they do whatever the highpriests of the religion command the sin will depart, and the good works which they may thenceforth do will attain completion (avaspértk). 2. The sin of him who is worthy of death (marg-arg4n) is to be confessed (garzisn6d) unto the high-priests, and he is to deliver up 4zs body’; except o the high-priests he is not to deliver up /zs body.

3. On account of the dexterity (farhang) of horsemen it is not ¢hey business to hunt (nakh4tr kardan6); and it is not allowable for any one else to hunt for game, except for 42m whose wealth is less than three hundred sttrs *.

murder, seduction, unnecessary slaughter of cattle, embezzlement, slander, seizing land by force, and a few other evil deeds are stated to be hamémél sins; while unnatural offences and intercourse with women of another race and religion are said to be rabantk sins. In the Pahlavi Vendidad these classes of sins are rarely mentioned, but hamém4lan occurs in Pahl. Vend. III, rg1, IV, 23, XIII, 38; hamémalih in III, rr9; and rfibanfk in XIII, 38 ; although, perhaps, not always in the sense of sin.

1 By committing a marg-arg4n or mortal sin, that is, a sin worthy of death, he has forfeited his life, and ought to place it at the disposal of the rad, or high-priest.

® This section, intended to preserve game for the poor, is evidently out of place here, as it has no connection with the context.

- With reference to the property qualification for hunting, it appears, from a passage in the Persian MS. Mg about the proper dowry for a privileged wife, that 2000 dirhams of silver were worth 2300 riipis, and that 2 dirhams were 2} tolas; this was written in a.p. 1723, when neither the rfpft nor the tola were of uniform amount, though now the rfpf is exactly a tola weight of silver. As the stfr was four dirhams (see Chap. I, 2), three hundred stirs would have been 1380 rfipis or 1350 tolas of silver, according to the standards mentioned in Ms; so that hunting was intended to be confined to those whose property was less than 1350-1380 rfpis ; but how

302 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

4. The ceremonial worship (yazisn) of those worthy of death, which they do not perform by way of renunciation of sez’, is the ceremonial whzch is demon worship; and when the officiating priest (aérpat) does not know z¢ the merit (kirfak) of the ceremonial goes to the store (gang) of the angels, and they give the enjoyment which avzses from that merit in the spiritual exzstence to the soul of that person who fas at once (aév4&) become righteous in mind.

5. When the mortal sinner (marg-arg4nd) has delivered his body and wealth at once to the highpriests, and engages mentally in renunciation as to the sin which as occurred, and the high-priests give him ¢hezy decision (dastébarth) as to duty and good works, the duty and good works which were before performed by him come back ¢4o fim; and when they inflict punishment for three nights ?, he does not enter hell. 6. And if the high-priest orders the cutting off of 4s head Ze is righteous on the spot *, and the three nzghts’ (satdth) ceremony is to be celebrated for 4zm, and the account of the

this limitation is to be reconciled with the fact that hunting was a favourite pursuit of kings and nobles does not appear, unless it be considered as a sacerdotal protest against that practice.

? That is, in those cases when they do not have the yazisn performed as an atonement for sin, by order of the high-priest after confession.

* This appears to refer to temporal punishment, inflicted by order of the high-priest, for the purpose of saving him from the ‘punishment of the three nights’ in the other world, mentioned in Bund. XXX, 16.

* Reading pavan gin&k; but M6 marks the phrase as pavan din&k (for din4), ‘through the decree,’ which is probably an error.

CHAPTER VIII, 4-9. - 303

three nights (satQth) does not affect him’. 7. And if he does not engage in renunciation 4e zs in hell till the future existence; and in zs future body they will bring 42m from hell, and for every mortal sem they will cut off 42s head once, and the last time they wz/l make cm alive again, and will inflict (numayend) three hights’ severe punishment?

8. However a man engages in renunciation of sin the duty of his state of renunciation (patitth) is to be engaged therein openly and mentally in renunciation; the duty of openness is this, that the sin which he knows fas assailed him, is to be specially confessed (bara gédbisnd) by him; and the mental duty is this, that he engages in renunciation with this thought, that ‘henceforth I w2// not commit sin.’ g. And that which occurs before the renunciation, except pious alms, it is well for him not to be overlooked ‘ by him, and not to be kept® secret by him; for when he shall overlook®, or shall keep secret, about sin committed, it becomes for him as

1 That is, the usual ceremonies after death are not to be withheld in this world, and his soul is able to pass through the usual investigation, as to his sins and good works, on its way to the other world, without delay. This period of three nights (satfith, ‘the triplet’), which Pazand writers miscall sedés or sadis, is the time during which the soul is supposed to hover about the body, before finally departing for the other world (see Mkh. II, 114, 158- 160, AV. IV, 9-14, XVII, 2-9).

2 The same statement is made in nearly the same words in Pahl. Vend. VII, 136. This is the future three nights’ punishment for impenitent sinners, mentioned in Bund. XXX, 16.

* Literally, ‘which he knows thus: “It assailed me.

* Reading avénisnd, but the word can also be read khunfnisnd, ‘to be made celebrated, to be boasted of.’

5 Literally, ‘carried on, borne away.’

* Reading avénéd, but it may be khunfnéd, ‘boast of.’

”?

304 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

XXX, 16.

* Literally, ‘which he knows thus: “It assailed me.

* Reading avénisnd, but the word can also be read khunfnisnd, ‘to be made celebrated, to be boasted of.’

5 Literally, ‘carried on, borne away.’

* Reading avénéd, but it may be khunfnéd, ‘boast of.’

”?

304 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

much, some say, as three Sréshé-4arandms’; some say that when he keeps secret about a sin of three Sréshé-4aranams he is worthy of death; some say much otherwise*. 10. Ataré-p4d son of Zarattst® had remarked (péd4ktntd) ¢o a disciple, about this duty, thus: ‘Conform to the renunciation of sez/’ and one‘ time a secret was kept by him, and he ordered him thus: ‘Henceforth be thou never apparent in this duty!’ and after that he looked upon the supplication (avakhshth) and much repentance of that disciple, and even then he did not become the high-priest (dastébar) over him.

11, The rule is® this, that of those who would be proper for this priestly duty (dastébarth), that person is proper who is perfect in (narm) the commentary (zand) of the law, and the punishment of sin is easy for him, and he has controlled himself ; some say thus: ‘By whom a course of priestly studies (aérpatastan) is performed.’ 12. And the punishment of sin deg easy for him, and his having controlled himself are proper; and when, in danger before a menstruous woman, he engages in renunciation it is proper.

1 Probably the same as a Farmén sin (see Chaps. I, 1, 2, IV, 14).

* Or ‘many other sAings.’

® This Ataré-pad-i Zaratistin is mentioned in a manuscript about 500 years old, belonging to Dastir Jam4spji, in Bombay, as having lived for 160 years, and having been supreme high-priest for ninety years: he is also mentioned in the sixth book of the Dinkard. He may, possibly, have been the Ataré-p4d mentioned in B. Yt. I, 7, but it is hazardous to identify an individual by a single name so common as Atar6-p4d used to be.

* Reading a6, ‘ one,’ instead of han4, ‘this’ (see p. 218, note 3).

* Assuming that the word 4fnak has been omitted at the beginning of this section (see Chap. X, 1).

CHAPTER VIII, 10-14. 305

I, 7, but it is hazardous to identify an individual by a single name so common as Atar6-p4d used to be.

* Reading a6, ‘ one,’ instead of han4, ‘this’ (see p. 218, note 3).

* Assuming that the word 4fnak has been omitted at the beginning of this section (see Chap. X, 1).

CHAPTER VIII, 10-14. 305

13. Néryésang! said thus: ‘Thou deemest z¢ most surprising that, of the renunciation of s¢z with energy, whatever may be its efficacy, they have been so much of the same? opinion, so that whenever they perform renunciation, however they perform z¢, and before whomever they perform 7¢, whenever a@ sz is not even mentally originating with one® a renunciation should be performed by him; and when very many mortal sins (margargdn) are committed by him, and he engages mentally in renunciation of every one separately, he is not on‘ the way to hell, owing to his renunciation; and if there be one of which he is not in renunciation the way to hell® is not closed to him, for he does not rely upon the beneficence (sid) of Attharmazd, and it is allowable to appoint a priestly retribution (rad tégisn) to fully atone for it, and when thou appointest a priestly retribution for it, and dost not fully atone, it is allowable to inflict 2¢ justly and strongly (drab6).’

14. When his sin is committed against (dén)

' This cannot be the learned Parsi translator of several Pahlavi texts into Sanskrit, who bore the same name, and is supposed to have lived in the fifteenth century. Being quoted in the Pahlavi Vendidad (see Chap. I, 4, note) he must have been one of the old commentators.

* K2o has h6manam, ‘I am,’ instead of ham, ‘the same;’ a mistake arising from reading am, ‘I am,’ for ham.

5 This applies to all cases of merely imputed sin, such as those committed by children, which are imputed to the father, and for which he is spiritually, as well as temporally, responsible.

* Reading pavan, ‘on,’ instead of baré, ‘out of’ (see p. 176, note 5).

® Most of this clause is omitted in K2o by mistake.

{s] x

306 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

accusers ' it will be necessary to act so that the head of the family (mtrak) shall not become evil-minded?, and shall not divorce the wife from matrimony, and they shall not bring * 42 on unto him; before his accusers he is to be engaged in renunciation, and when not, 4e is to be engaged in renunciation of the sin before the high-priests (rad4n), and it will become debts, and debt does not make a man wicked ¢; its effect is this, that in the future existence they may quite forsake him, and this becomes a great shame, and they disturb (k4vénd) his enjoyment. 15. 4s ¢o the sin which affects the accusers, when the female 4as atoned for it, its stem (payak) is atoned for; some say that the stem (payakghth) has no root; some say that z¢ ¢s just like a tree whose leaves wither away.

15. 4s ¢o the sin which affects the accusers, when the female 4as atoned for it, its stem (payak) is atoned for; some say that the stem (payakghth) has no root; some say that z¢ ¢s just like a tree whose leaves wither away.

16. Sin relating to the soul ®, when one engages in renunciation, stays away /vom him; when it shall be fully atoned for z¢ is well, and when he does not fully atone they will make him righteous by the three nights’ (satQth) punishment. 17. Kfshtanébigéd® said that even that which affects accusers, when ove engages in renunciation, stays away from him.

» HamémA4lan (see § 1); the particular instance of hamémAl sin here referred to is seduction.

* Reading dismfn4n instead of the unmeaning dfismfy4an of the MSS.

® Reading yaftyQna instead of the unmeaning y4ftam of the MSS. ; & being often written very much like m in Pahlavi.

* This clause about the hamém4l sin becoming a debt, to be settled with the ‘ accuser,’ either here or hereafter, is taken from Pahl. Vend. III, 151.

® That is, ribanfk sin (see § 1, note).

§ See Chap. I, 4, note.

CHAPTER VIII, 15-22. 307

18. Nésaf Barz-Mitré! spoke these three sayings, that is, ‘ Next-of-kin marriage will extirpate mortal sins (marg-arg4n4n), and the sacred twigs when their ablution is such as renders them improper for firewood, and a man when his wife decomes pregnant by him.’

19. Whoever commits a sin against (dén) water, and kills a lizard, or other noxious water-creature, has atoned for it; also when thou atonest to (dén) fire for that agazns¢ water it is proper?, azd when thou atonest to water for that agaznst fire it is proper; some say that even a scorpion is proper ¢o be killed, 20. And when a sin of one Tandpdhar ° is committed by him, and he shall consecrate a sacred cake (drén), or shall accomplish a good work of one Tan4pthar ‘, it has atoned for it.

21. When he has committed a mortal sez (margargan), and engages mentally in renunciation, and the high-priest (rad) knows that, though he ought to give up his body, he w2// not give z¢ up, it is allowable when he shall kill him; that is, because he relies upon the beneficence (sid) of Adharmazd. 22. Moreover, from the rule (mank) ‘ yazemna® kad na haka@’ (‘through being worshipped what then at

1 See Chap. I, 4, note.

* A blank space is left for this verb in M6, indicating that that MS. was copied from an original already old and not very legible.

® See Chap. I, 1, 2.

* Consecrating a sacred cake is a Tanapfihar good work (see Chap. XVI, 6). The theory of counterbalancing sins by good works of the same weight is here clearly enunciated.

5 Written izimn in the MSS. This quotation appears to be, from some part of the Avesta, no longer extant, and being only the first words of the passage its exact meaning is very uncertain. The section, generally, seems to refer to the beneficence of Aflharmazd.

xX 2

208 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

xX 2

208 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

once,’ &c.) it is evident, and it becomes his through ceremonial ablution of the hands; it amounts to a whole quarry (k4n6) of good works, and the worship of God (yazisn-i yazd4nd) is to be performed for him', 23. Atar6-pad? son of Maraspend said that it is always necessary to be more diligent in performing one’s worship of God a¢ the time that many mortal sews are committed; all sins de¢ng admissible into renunciation, when thou shalt atone by complete self-sacrifice (pir-g4n-dAdtha), and when one engages in renunciation of the sin from z¢s root, he becomes free from the sin in renunciation of which sin he engaged; for Adharmazd will not leave his own creatures unto the evil spirit, unless on the path of non-renunciation.

CuapTer IX,

1. The greater H4sar is one part in twelve parts of the day and night, and the lesser HAsar is one part in eighteen parts*.

1 Tt seems that the execution of the sinner after repentance is here considered as furnishing him with a store of good works, so that it is allowable to perform such ceremonies for him, after death, as are usually performed for righteous men; the reason being given in § 23. The end of this section and beginning of the next are omitted in K2o.

* Whether the prime minister of ShApfir II, or the last editor of the Dinkard (see Bund. XXXII, 3, 1), is not clear.

®> The Hésar is not only a measure of distance (see Bund. XXVI, 1), but also a measure of time (see Bund. XXV, 5). According to the text here the greater H4sar must be two hours, and the lesser H4sar (which is not mentioned in M6) must be one hour and twenty minutes. But Farh. Okh. (p. 43) says, ‘dvadasang-h&threm asti aghrem ayare, ‘of twelve HAsars is the

CHAPTER VIII, 23—Ix, q. 309

2. The priest (AsrQk) who passes away in idolatry! (adzdayakth) thou hast considered as desolate (virdn)?; and there is a high-priest (dast6bar) who is of a different opinion, there is oe who says he 7s as a non-Iranian (anafrd4n) country’ 3. It is declared that, when a supreme high-priest (zaratistrotQm) passes away in idolatry, an apostate (aharmék) will be born in that dwelling, and a rumour of this calamity is uttered* by that supreme high-priest.

4. In order to be steadfast in the good religion it is to be discussed with priests azd high-priests, and when oze does not discuss it is proper that he do not teach it.

longest day;” the day and night in which is the longest day are twelve of the greatest H4sars, eighteen of the medium, and twentyfour of the least ;’ according to which statement there ate three kinds of Hasar, that are respectively equivalent to two hours, one hour and twenty minutes, and one hour. As the longest day is said (Bund. XXV, 4) to be twice the length of the shortest day, and the greatest Hasar is twice the length of the least one, it may be conjectured that the H4sar varied with the length of the day, being a subdivision (one-eighth) of the time the sun was above the horizon; this would account for the greatest and least HAsars, which are one-eighth of the longest and shortest days, respectively ; but it does not account for the medium HAsar, which is not a mean between the two extremes, but one-ninth (instead of oneeighth) of the mean day of twelve hours. If the Hasar of distance were really a Parasang, as is sometimes stated, the connection between it and the Hasar of time would be obvious, as the average HAsar of one hour and twenty minutes is just the time requisite for walking a Parasang, which seems indeed to be stated in Farh. Okh. Pp. 42.

1 Or it may be ‘ passes over into idolatry.’

* K2o has girdn, ‘grievous.’

3 That is, he reads an4fr4n instead of viran ia the foregoing statement.

* Or, perhaps, ‘this calamity is at once announced.’

310 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

5. The ceremonial worship (yazisn) which they perform in a fire-temple’, when not done aright, does not reach unto the demons; du¢ that which they perform zz other places, when they do not perform z¢ aright, does reach unto the demons; for there is no medium in worship, it reaches either unto the angels or unto the demons. 6. Of a man who has relinquished a dad habit, and through his good capabilities engages in renunciation of s¢z *, the good work advances unto the future existence.

7. Any one who shall die in a vessel (kastik) it is allowable, for fear of contamination (padvtshak), to throw into the water; some say that the water itself is the receptacle for the dead (khaz4nth).

8. This, too, zs declared: ‘When in the dark it is not allowable to eat food ; for the demons and fiends seize upon one-third of the wisdom and glory of him who eats food in the dark;’ and it is declared by that passage (gin4k) which Adtharmazd spoke to Zaratdst, thus: ‘ After the departure of the light let him not devour, with unwashed hands, the water and vegetables of Horvadad and Amerédad®; for if after the departure of the light thou devourest, with unwashed hands, the water and vegetables of Horvadad and Ameréddad, the fiend seizes away from thee two-thirds of the existing original wisdom

1 Literally, ‘in the dwelling of fires.’ The fire must always be sheltered from the sun’s rays, and in a fire-temple it is kept in a vaulted cell, with a door and one or two windows opening into the larger closed chamber which surrounds it.

* K2o has, ‘and it shall happen through his good capabilities.’

° The two archangels whose chief duties are the protection of water and plants, respectively (see Chap. XV, 5, 25-29, Bund. 1X, 2).

CHAPTER IX, 5-9. 311

which, when he seizes z# away, is the glory and religion which are auspicious for thee that day, so that diligence becomes a vexation this day’.’

g. In a passage of the fifth fargard of the Paz6n Nask? it is declared that one mentions these charac-

1 This passage does not appear to be now extant in the Avesta.

* This was the sixth nask or ‘book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard, which calls it Past or Pasag; but according to the Dinf-vagarkard and the Riv4yats it was the seventh nask, called Pagam. For its contents, as given by the Dinf-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, pp. 128, 129. The following is a short summary of the account of it given in the eighth book of the Dinkard (that published in the Pahl.-P4z. Glossary, pp. 184, 185, being taken from the fifteenth nask, whose contents were mixed up with those of the seventh through the abstraction of several folios from the Iranian MS. of the Dinkard before M13, or any other copy, was written in India) :—

The Pet (or Pazag) is about the lawful slaughtering of animals in the ceremonial rites of fire and water at the season-festivals ; also where, when, and how the festivals are to be celebrated, their advantages, and the duties of the officiating priests. The rotation of days, months, and years, summer and winter, the ten days at the end of the winter, when the guardian spirits visit the world, and the ceremonies to be then performed. The time for gathering medicinal plants. The retribution necessary for the various sins affecting the soul, the advantage of providing for such retribution, and the harm from not providing it. The thirty-three principal chiefs of the spiritual and worldly existences. The miracles of great good works, and the heinous sinfulness of apostasy. How far a wife can give away her husband’s property, and when it is lawful for him to recover it. Whither winter flees when summer comes on, and where summer goes when winter comes on. The amount of disaster (véighn) in one century, and the duration of everything connected with such disaster. The summer and winter months, the names of the twelve months, their meaning, and the angels they are devoted to; also the thirty days of the month, and the five GAtha days at the end of the year, when the guardian spirits are to be reverenced.

The fifth fargard, quoted in the text, was probably that portion of the Nask which described the duties of the officiating priests.

312 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

The fifth fargard, quoted in the text, was probably that portion of the Nask which described the duties of the officiating priests.

312 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

teristics of four kinds of worship of the celestial beings (yazd4n) :—one is that whose Avesta is correct, 6u¢ the man is bad; the second is that whose Avesta is faulty (zif4n6)', du¢ the man is good; the third is that whose Avesta is correct, and the man is good ; and the fourth is that whose Avesta is faulty and the man is bad. 10. Zhat whose Avesta is correct, dz¢ the man bad, the archangels will approach and will listen to, d#¢ do not accept; shat whose Avesta is faulty, 6#¢ the man good, the archangels and angels? will approach, éu¢ do not listen to, and will accept ; that whose Avesta is correct, and the man good, the archangels azd angels will approach, will come to, will listen to, and will accept ; that whose Avesta is faulty, avd the man bad, they do not approach, do not listen to, and do not accept. ;

11. In every ceremonial (yazisn5), at the beginning of the ceremony ®, and the beginning of the sacred-cake consecration (drén)‘, the angels and guardian spirits of the righteous are to be invited to the ceremony. 12. When they invoke the angels they will accept the ceremony, and when they do

1 Kzo has hfizvan, ‘tongue, speech,’ for zifan, ‘faulty’ (compare Pers. zif, ‘ sin’), in all occurrences of the word.

2 K2o omits from this word to ‘will approach’ in the next clause of the sentence.

5 That is, shortly before beginning the regular recitation of the Yasna, the angels, in whose honour the ceremony is being performed, are invited to approach by reciting their proper Khshnamans, or propitiatory formulas (see Chap. VII, 8, and Haug’s Essays, p. 404). ;

* This begins with Yas. III, 1, and the spirits are to be invited by adding their proper Khshnfimans to those contained in Yas. III, 3-20 (see Haug’s Essays, p. 408).

‘CHAPTER IX, 10-12. 313

not invoke them, all the guardian spirits of the righteous are to be invoked at the beginning of ‘staomi!;’ and when not, they watch until ¢he words ‘frashé-Aarethrim saoshyamtim ?,’ and when they shall invoke them there they will accept the ceremony; and when not, they will watch until ¢e words ‘vispau fravashay6 ashaonim yazamaidé%,” and when they shall invoke ¢em there they will accept ‘ the ceremony; and when not, they will watch until the words ‘tauska yazamaidé ®;’ and when they invoke them® a¢ the threefold ‘ashem vohd’ and ¢he word damanim’, at the twice-do/d ‘aokht6-namanéd 8,’ the ‘ash4d@ haa °, ov the ‘yatumanahé gasaiti!,’

1 This may be at the ‘staomi’ of Yas. XII, 6, which is recited before the Yasna is commenced ; but K2o alters the meaning (by inserting the relative particle) into ‘¢hey are to be invoked at “staomi,” the beginning of “all the guardian spirits of the righteous” (Yas. XXVI, 1).’

2 Yas. XXVI, 20.

5 Yas. XXVI, 34.

* Kao has, ‘shall not invoke,’ and ‘ will not accept.’

XXVI, 1).’

2 Yas. XXVI, 20.

5 Yas. XXVI, 34.

* Kao has, ‘shall not invoke,’ and ‘ will not accept.’

® The concluding words of the yénhé hata&m formula, probably of that one at the end of Yas. XXVII, just preceding the recital of the Gathas, up to which time the spirits wait, but, if not invoked, they are then supposed to ascend, away from the ceremony, as mentioned in the text.

* K2o has, ‘ when they do not invoke them.’

7 Yas. VIII, 10; which is preceded by a thrice-told ‘ashem voh@,’ at which the officiating priest tastes the sacred cake, being the end of the Drén ceremony (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 404, 408).

® Yas. XXII, 33 (§§ 14-33 being recited twice). At this point the officiating priest brings out the mortar for pounding the Hém twigs (see Haug’s Essays, p. 405); Yas. XXII being called the beginning of the Hémfst in the Vistisp Yast SAdah.

® Yas. XXIV, 30, when the officiating priest turns the mortar right side upwards.

314 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

they will accept’; and when not, they go up the height of a spear (ntzak) and will remain. 13. And they speak thus: ‘This man does not understand that it will be necessary even for him? to go from the world, and our prayer (apist4n) is for reminding men; it is not /Za¢ our uneasiness arzses from this, that we are in want of their ceremony, but our uneasiness avzses from this, that when they do not reverence and do not invoke us, when evil comes upon them it is not possible for us to keep z¢ away.’

14. ‘O creator! how much is the duration in life of him who is dead?’ And Adharmazd spoke thus: ‘As much as the wing of a fly,O Zaratist the Spttaman! or as much as the hearing a wing unto a sightless one 8,’

CuaptTer X.

1. The rule‘ is this, that a sacred thread-girdle (kQsttk) be three finger-dreadths loose transversely

1 K2o has, ‘they will not accept.’

* Literally, ‘for me,’ which seems to refer to the man, and not to the spirits,

§ This appears to be the complete translation of the Avesta sentence partially quoted in Pahl. Vend. VIII, 64: ‘ yatha makhshyau perenem, yatha v4 perenahé,’ &c. The last clause is doubtful; the reading adopted here is Aand zak-i shinavak-: par andarg avénak, as nothing more satisfactory suggests itself; it might also be translated by ‘as much as the sound of a wing in the invisible.’ ,

* Reading dinak; Pazand writers convert it into yak, which can, however, have the same meaning, though they evidently take the word to be Huz. khadfik, ‘one,’ which is written precisely like ainak in Pahlavi characters. Most of the miscellaneous statements, contained in the latter part of Sls., commence with this phrase.

CHAPTER IX, 13—X, 3. 315

(pavan targfin)’, as is said in every teaching (£4stak)?, and when it is less it is not proper.

Most of the miscellaneous statements, contained in the latter part of Sls., commence with this phrase.

CHAPTER IX, 13—X, 3. 315

(pavan targfin)’, as is said in every teaching (£4stak)?, and when it is less it is not proper.

2. The rule is this, that the sacred cake (drén), set aside at the dedication formula (shnimané) on the days devoted to the guardian spirits’, is to be used at the season-festivals, the Néndbar‘, the three nights’ ceremony®, the Hém-drén, and other rites of the righteous guardian spirits; and when they shall not do so, according to some teachings, it is not proper.

3. In the exposition (A4stak) of the Nihadim Nask® it says that a man is going to commit rob-

' That is, round the waist (see Chap. IV, 1).

* That is, ‘interpretation or exposition’ (see Chap. I, 3, 4). Kzo has, ‘ and by every teaching it is proper.’

® These fravardtk4n are, strictly speaking, the five supplementary days at the end of the Parsi year, but the last five days of the last month are usually added to them, so as to make a period of ten days at the end of the year, during which the guardian spirits of the departed are supposed to revisit their old homes, and for whom the sacred cake is set aside.

‘ The initiatory ceremony of a young priest (see Chap. XIII, 2).

® The ceremonies performed by the survivors for three nights after a death (see Chaps. VIII, 6, XVII, 3, 4).

* This was the fifteenth nask or ‘ book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard, which calls it Nikadim; but according to the Dini-vagarkard and the RivAyats it was the sixteenth nask, called Niy4rum. For its contents, as given by the Dinf-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, p. 132. The following is a brief summary of the account of it given in the eighth book of the Dinkard, where it occupies twenty-five quarto pages of that work :—

The beginning of the law (dad) is the Nikadim of thirty’ fargards, The section Patk4r-radistan (‘the arbitrator's code’) is about umpires and arbitration, contracts by words of four kinds and by signs of six kinds; and twelve sorts of arbitrators are described in four sub-sections, according as they decide by hearing or seeing, and with regard to women and children, foreigners and

316 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

bery, avd a wall falls in upon him, z¢ zs his destroyer ; when a man strikes at him 4e zs his adversary, and both are in sinfulness; when he is going to perform the worship of God (yazisnd-i yazd4nd) both of them are in innocence.

4. The rule is this, that when a woman becomes pregnant, as long as it is possible, the fire is to be maintained most carefully in the dwelling, because it is declared in the Spend Mask! that towards

those worthy of death. The second section, Zadamist4n (‘the assault code’), is a treatise on assault and the consequences of assault, pain, blood, and unconsciousness ; on blows and conflicts, man with man, women with women, and child with child, with their proper penalties; also the murder of slaves and children. The third section, Réshist4n (‘the wound code’), is a treatise on various kinds of wounds and their characteristics. The fourth section, HamémAlistan (‘the accusers code’), is a treatise on accusation and false accusation of various specified crimes, on lying and slander, the care of pregnant women, impenitence and various offences against priests and disciples, remitting penalties, abetting and assisting criminals, mediation, punishment of children, smiting foreigners, murder, medical treatment, and many other things (see Pahl.-Paz. Glossary, p. 184, where they are erroneously ascribed to the Pazén Nask, owing to the defective text of the MS. M13). The fifth section contained twenty-four treatises on miscellaneous subjects connected with crime and sin (see Pahl.- Paz. Glossary, pp. 184, 185).

The passage mentioned in the text cannot be recognised in any of the details supplied by the Dinkard.

1 This was the thirteenth nask or ‘ book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to all authorities, but is called Sfend in the Rivayats. For its contents, as given by the Dinf-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, pp. 131, 132. The following is a summary of the short account of it given in the eighth book of the Dinkard :—

The Spend is a treatise on the origin and combination of the existence, guardian spirit, and glory of ZaratQst; on his generation and birth; on the coming of the two spirits, the good one to sustain, and the bad one to destroy him, and the victory of the good

CHAPTER X, 4, 5. 317

Dfkd4v!, the mother of Zaratfst, when she was pregnant with Zaratdst, for three nights, every night a leader (khQd@4)*? with a hundred and fifty® demons rushed for the destruction of Zaratist, du¢ owing to the existence of the fire in the dwelling they knew no means of accomplishing #7.

5. The rule is this, that they have a tank (még) for the disciples, when they are going to perform the worship of God, azd are sprinkling the stone seat (magdk)*; and lest they should make a wet place by that sprinkling through taking water out from it, it is to be done sitting; for in the Vendidad* the high-priests Zave taught, about making

spirit; on his going, at thirty years of age, to confer with Adharmazd, and his seven conferences in ten years; on the seven questions he proposed to the archangels on those occasions ; on the conveyance of the omniscient wisdom into him, showing him heaven and hell, and the intermediate place of those ‘ everstationary,’ the account taken of sin and good works, the future existence, and the fate of the religion on earth till the renovation of the universe, with the coming of his future sons, the last three apostles.

1 The Paz. Dughdé of Bund. XXXII, ro would indicate Pahl. Dfkd&n, but the Dinkard has Dikd4ibd and Dikdafbag (pointing to Av. Dughdhavan), and the Persian forms are Dughdft and Dughdavih. Here the name is Dfikd4vé, which is transposed into Didk4v in Chap. XII, 11; it must have meant either ‘ milk-maid’ or ‘suckler’ originally.

? Kzo has sé@d4, ‘a demon,’ and in Chap. XII, 11, where this section is repeated, the word can be read either s@da, ‘ a demon,’ or shah, ‘a king or ruler;’ of course ‘an arch-fiend’ is meant.

® M6 appears to have ‘sixty,’ instead of ‘ fifty,’ but see Chap. XII, rr.

“ Or magh, on which they squat in the purification ceremony (see B. Yt. II, 36).

5 Referring probably to Pahl. Vend. XVIII, 98; the ground is not to be wetted further than the length of the fore-part of the foot beyond the toes, that js, not more than a hand's breadth ; this

318 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

water when standing on foot’, that the measure it refers to applies to everything else, not even of a like origin; by him who makes water the Avesta? for making water is to be uttered, avd then z¢ is the root of a Tandpdhar sin® for 42m, and when he does not utter z¢ 4e is more grievously sinful.

6. The rule is this, that to recite the Gathas over those passed away is not to be considered as beneficial, since it is not proper to recite the three H4s‘ which are the beginning of the Adstizat GAtha whenever one ts on the road; whenever one recites ¢hem over a man in the house ¢hey are healing.

7. The rule is this, that in the night wine and aromatic herbs (sparam) and anything like food are not to be cast away towards the north quarter, because a fiend® w7// become pregnant ; and when one casts them away one Yatha-ahi-vairy6*® is to be uttered.

measure is here extended to washing water, hence the necessity of squatting during such ablutions.

’ This is a sin which is usually classed with ‘running about uncovered’ and ‘ walking with one boot’ (see Chap. IV, 8, note).

* This Avesta is prescribed in Vend. XVIII, 97, and is still in constant use; it consists of three Ashem-vohtis (see Bund. XX, 2), two Humatanims (Yas. XXXV, 4-6), three Hukhshathrétemais (Yas. XXXV, 13-15), four Ahunavars (see Bund. I, 21), and one Yénhé-hatiim (see B.Yt. II, 64).

* See Chap. I, 1, 2.

* The three chapters (Yas. XLII-XLIV) which begin the Ustavaiti Gatha (Yas. XLII-XLV).

XX, 2), two Humatanims (Yas. XXXV, 4-6), three Hukhshathrétemais (Yas. XXXV, 13-15), four Ahunavars (see Bund. I, 21), and one Yénhé-hatiim (see B.Yt. II, 64).

* See Chap. I, 1, 2.

* The three chapters (Yas. XLII-XLIV) which begin the Ustavaiti Gatha (Yas. XLII-XLV).

5 A drfg, or fiend, is usually considered as a female demon (see Vend. XVIII, 70-77); and the demons are supposed to come from the north, where they congregate on the summit of Aresfir, at the gates of hell (see Vend. XIX, 1, 140, 142, Bund. XII, 8).

* See Bund. I, 21. This statement is repeated in Chap. XII, 18.

CHAPTER X, 6—I1. 319

8. The rule is this, that reverential should be the abstinence from unlawfully slaughtering of any species of animals; for in the Sthdgar ask’ it is said, concerning those who Aave unlawfully slaughtered animals, the punishment is such that each hair of those animals becomes like a sharp dagger (tékh), and he who is unlawfully a slaughterer is slain. 9. Of animals, the slaughtering of the lamb, the goat (vahtk), the ploughing ox, the war-horse, the hare, the bat (4thar4z), the cock or bird of Vohfman, and the magpie (kaskinak) bird, and of birds that of the kite, eagle (hOm4i), and swallow is most to be abstained from.

10. A pregnant woman who passes away is not to be carried away by less than four men’, who are at it constantly with united strength; for wth other corpses, after a dog’s gaze, when they carry them along by two men with united strength, they do not become polluted; éu¢ for a pregnant woman two dogs are necessary, to whose united power sie is to be exposed ; and they carry fer along by four men with united strength, azd they do not become polluted ; d¢¢ when they carry er along by two men they are to be washed with ceremony (pisak)*.

11. The rule is this, that when they beg forgiveness for a person (mard(im) who as passed away,

1 See B.Yt. I, 1. The passage here referred to is probably one in the middle of the seventeenth fargard of this Nask, which is mentioned as follows, in the ninth book of the Dinkard: ‘ And this too, namely, those who unlawfully slay sheep and cattle, which diminishes their life and glory.’

2 This is the usual custom, while that mentioned in Chap. II, 6 is the exceptional case, mentioned at the end of this section, which necessitates extraordinary purification.

* That is, with the Bareshnfiim ceremony (see Chap. II, 6).

320 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

such @ prayer is more significant when ome says thus : ‘Whenever a trespass (vinds) of mine 4as occurred against him, you will take account of t¢ along with those of his which have occurred against me, and the trespasses Aave passed away one through the other; ay further trespasses of his which have occurred against me are then made a righteous gift by me’.’

12, The rule is this, that one should not walk without boots*?; and his advantage therefrom is even this, that when a boot (mdgak) is on 47s foot, and he puts the foot upon dead matter, and does not disturb the dead matter, he does not become polluted ; when a boot is not on 42s foot, and he puts the foot upon dead matter, and does not disturb 2¢, he ts polluted*, except when he knows for certain (aévar) that a dog as seen 7¢, or 2f not it is to be considered as not seen by a dog’.

13. The rule is this, as revealed zx the Dabdsrfgéd Nask*, where a day in the year is indicated,

' That is, I pardon them in charity.

* Or, perhaps, ‘without stockings,’ avimfigak; this seems to be something different from the sin of aé-mfik-dfb4risnth, ‘running in one boot’ (see Chap. IV, 12).

5 Without these words, which do not exist in the MSS., the sentence seems to have no clear meaning.

‘ And, therefore, still containing the Nasfs, or fiend of corruption, who will enter into any one who merely touches the dead matter, without disturbing it, and can be driven out only by the tedious and troublesome Bareshnfim ceremony.

® This was the sixteenth nask or ‘ book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard, which calls it Dhbasrfigd or Dfibasrfid; but according to the Dint-vagarkard, which calls it Dvasrfizd, and the Rivayats, which call it Dv4srfigad, Dv&srfingad, or Dvasrfb, it was the eighteenth nask. For its contents, as given by the Dini-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, pp. 132, 133. The following is-a brief summary of the account of it given

CHAPTER X, 12-14. 221

that the sacred thread-girdle of every one who shall be one day more than fourteen years and three months o/d is to be tied on—z¢ zs better so than when he remains unto fifteen years, and then ties on the girdle—who is more cared for, that way, than a five-months’ child’, on whom they should put 7 in the womb of z¢s mother.

14. The rule is this, that when ove retains a prayer zxwardly*, and wind shall come from below, or wind shall come from the mouth, it is all one *.

in the eighth book of the Dinkard, which occupies ten quarto pages of that work :—

14. The rule is this, that when ove retains a prayer zxwardly*, and wind shall come from below, or wind shall come from the mouth, it is all one *.

in the eighth book of the Dinkard, which occupies ten quarto pages of that work :—

Of the first eighteen sections of the DfbAsrfigd the first is a treatise on thieves, their arrest, imprisonment, and punishment, with the various kinds of robbery ; the second section is about the irresponsibility of a father for the crimes of a grown-up son, and of a husband for those of a separated wife, about the time for instructing children, and when they first become responsible for sin, the crime of giving weapons to women, children, and foreigners, about warriors plundering, the various kinds of judges and their duties, and offences against accusers. Of the twelve next sections one, called Pasfis-hérvist4n (‘the shepherd’s dog code’), is about shepherd’s dogs, their duties and rights. Of the last thirty-five sections the first, called Stérist4n (‘the beast of burden code’), is about the sin, affecting the soul, of unlawfully beating and wounding cattle and beasts of burden, birds and fish; the second section, Argistan (‘the value code’), is a treatise on the value of animate and inanimate objects; the third section, Aratést4ristan (‘the warrior code’), is a treatise on warriors, arms, armies, generals, battles, plunder, &c.; the fourth section is about warm baths, fires, clothing, winter stores, reaping fodder and corn, &c.

The passage mentioned in the text was probably in that part of the second section which referred to the responsibility of children. The words from ‘as revealed’ to ‘indicated’ are omitted in K2o,

1 K2o has ‘ nine-months’ child.’

* See Chap. III, 6.

* Literally, ‘both are one;’ that is, in either case the spell of the v4g or prayer is broken.

[5] ¥

322 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

15. Also this, that ten women are necessary for affording assistance 40 a woman who is in labour: five women for directing the making of the. cradle (gavdrak), one woman should be opposite the left shoulder, and one to hold the right shoulder, one woman to throw a hand on her neck, one woman to hold her waist, and one woman, when the infant shall be born, to take z¢ up and cut the navel cord, and to make the fire blaze’. 16. Three days and three nights no one is to pass between the fire and the child, nor to show the child to a sinful man or woman ; ¢hey are to triturate a little sulphur in the sap (may4) of a plant, and to smear it over the child; anzd the first food to give z is Hém-juice (parahém) and aloes (shapy4r).

17. The rule is this, that in case any one shall beat an innocent man, until the pain shall cease it becomes every day the root of a Tan4pdhar sin? for him.

18. The rule is this, that when in a country they trust a false judge, and keep 42m among ¢hetr superiors, owing to the sin and breach of faith which that judge commits, the clouds amd rain, in that country, are deficient, a portion (bavan) of the deliciousness, fatness, wholesomeness, and milk of the cattle and goats diminishes’, and many children become destroyed in the mother’s womb.

19. The rule is this, that a man, when he does not wed a wife, does not become worthy of death; but when a woman does not wed a husband it

1 Literally, ‘make the fire high.’

® See Chap. I, 1, 2.

* Most of these evils are also ascribed (see B. Yt. II, 41-43) to neglect of the precautions prescribed with regard to hair-cuttings.

CHAPTER X, 15-21. 323

amounts to @ sim worthy of death; because for a woman ¢here is no offspring except by intercourse with men, and no lineage proceeds from her; du¢ for aman without a wife, when he shall recite the Avesta, as it is mentioned in the Vendidad', ¢here may be a lineage which proceeds onwards ¢o the future existence.

20. The rule is this, that a toothpick is to be cut out clear of bark (pést p4k)’, for the high-priests have taught that when one’s toothpick—made for the mouth with the bark—shall fall, and when a pregnant woman puts a foot upon it, she is apprehensive about z¢s being dead matter *.

21. The rule is this, that in accepting the child of a handmaid (£akar)* discrimination is to be exercised; for in the fourteenth of the Nask Hfdspéram 5

1 This reference is probably to the circumstances detailed in Vend. XVIII, 99-112, but the Pahlavi commentary on §§ 111, 112 of that passage is missing in all MSS. The Avesta to be recited in such cases is precisely the same as that detailed in a note on § 5.

? This translation is in accordance with the seventeenth chapter of the prose Sad-dar Bandahis, or ‘ BOndahis of a hundred chapters,’ a Pazand work of later times; but the text here might be translated ‘cut out of clean skin,’ and in Chap. XII, 13, where the statement is repeated, the word used is also ambiguous.

* The Sad-dar Bandahis says, ‘the fear arises that the infant may come to harm.’ This section and the three which follow are repeated in Chap. XII, 13-16.

‘ This might mean a dakar, or ‘serving’ wife (see Bund. XXXII, 6), but the further details given in Chap. XII, 14, where this statement is repeated, make it more probable that a concubine is meant.

* As this was the seventeenth nask or ‘book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to all authorities, it is probable that the word ‘fourteenth,’ in the text here, refers to some particular chapter or fargard, most likely to the last group of fourteen

yY2

324 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

yY2

324 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

the high-priests Aave taught thus: ‘ My son is suitable also as thy son, 6u¢ my daughter is not suitable also as thy daughter.’

sections, mentioned below, in the summary of its contents; and this is confirmed by another reference in Chap. XII, 7. This nask is called Aspaéram in the Rivayats, and Asp4rim in the Dini-vagarkard; for its contents, as given by the latter, see Haug's Essays, p. 133. The following is a brief summary of the account of it given in the eighth book of the Dinkard, where it occupies sixteen quarto pages of that work :—

Of the first thirty sections of the Hfsparam, one is the Aérpatistan (‘the priest’s code’), a treatise on priestly studies, priests, disciples, and their five dispositions. One section is the NfrangistAn (‘religious formula code’), a treatise on the formulas of worship, the Avesta to be recited by the officiating priests twice, thrice, and four times, the five periods of the day and their proper ceremonies, the season-festivals, the sacred girdle and shirt, cutting the sacred twigs, reverencing water, the families of Zarattst, Hvév, and Vistésp, &c. One section is the GéharfkistAn (‘ quality: code’), a treatise on nobility and superiority, buying and selling, cattle, slaves, servants, and other property, houses where men or dogs have been sick, dealings with foreigners, &c. And other sections are about appropriating the property of others, obedient and disobedient wives, foreign wives, advantages of male and female offspring, breeding of cattle, treatment of labourers and children, the evil eye, judges, the origin and cultivation of corn, the degrees of crime and punishment, &c. Of the next twenty sections, one is about the treatment of furious cattle and mad dogs, and the damage they may do. One section on the means of accumulating wealth, the giving of sons and daughters in marriage, the goodness of charity and evil of waste, the five best actions and the five worst, unlawful felling of trees, the sin of burying the dead, &c. And one section on the begetting, birth, and treatment of children. Of the last fourteen sections, one is a treatise, in six fargards, on the ownership of property and disputes about it, on one’s own family, acquiring wife and children, adoption, &c. And a section of seven fargards, at the end, is a treatise on the sufferings of men, women, children, and dogs, on the connection of owner and herds, priest and disciple, on various offences and sins, spiritual and worldly healing, physic and physicians, astrology,

‘CHAPTER X, 22-24. 325

And a section of seven fargards, at the end, is a treatise on the sufferings of men, women, children, and dogs, on the connection of owner and herds, priest and disciple, on various offences and sins, spiritual and worldly healing, physic and physicians, astrology,

‘CHAPTER X, 22-24. 325

22. The rule is this, that ove perseveres much in the begetting of offspring, for the acquisition of abundance of good works at once; because, in the Nihadim Nask?, the high-priests ave taught that the duty and good works which a son performs are as much the father’s as though they had been done by his own hand; and in the Damdad Nas? it is revealed thus: ‘ Likewise, too, the good works, zz like measure, which come into the father’s possession.’

23. The rule is this, that they shall give to the worthy as much of anything as is proper for eating and accumulating; because in the Nihaddm Nask?* the high-priests Zave taught thus: ‘A man gives a hungry ove bread, and zt zs too much, yet all the good works, which he shall perform through that superabundance, become as much his who gave it as though they had been done by his own hand.’

24. The rule is this, where ove lies down, in circumstances of propriety and innocence, one Ashemvoht is to be uttered‘, and zz like manner when he

the proper feeding of cattle, horses, sheep, goats, and pigs, the duty of a frontier governor during a foreign invasion, &c.

The passage mentioned in the text was probably in that portion of the last group of fourteen sections which treated of wives, children, and adoption.

4 See § 3; the passage mentioned here cannot be traced in the account of this Nask given in the Dinkard.

2 See SZS. IX, 1. The passage here quoted cannot be traced in any of the short accounts of the contents of this Nask. This section is repeated, with a few verbal alterations, in Chap. XII, 15.

> See § 3; the passage here quoted is also not to be traced in the account of this Nask given in the Dinkard. This section is repeated, with a few verbal alterations, in Chap. XII, 16.

* Compare Chap. IV, 14, where much the same is stated as what occurs in this section.

326 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

gets up well; when he does so, every single drawing of the breath (vay6) becomes a good work of three Sréshé-farandams, that is, a weight of ten dirhams of the full weight of four mads?.

25. The rule is this, that when an action or an opinion comes forward, and one does not know whether z¢ de a sin or a good work, when possible it is to be abandoned and not executed by him; as it says in the Sakadim Mask? that Zaratdst has

1 Reading i mad-4, instead of va maz-4; the word mad (see Pahl.-P4z. Glossary, p. 21) being Huz. for the dang or quarterdirham. The amount of the Srésh6é-4aranam, as deduced from this statement, differs from those given in Chaps. XI, 2, XVI, 5, and must be awkwardly fractional, unless the sentence be altered into ro gigan sang ném zis pir sang yeheviinéd, ‘a weight of ten dirhams and a half, which is its full weight;’ in which case one Srésh6-faraném would be 31 dirhams, as in Chap. XVI, 5.

* This was the eighteenth nask or ‘book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard; but according to the Dint-vagarkard and the Rivayats it was the nineteenth nask, called Askarfim or Askéram. For its contents, as given by the Dint-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, p. 133. The following is a brief summary of the account of it given in the eighth book of the Dtnkard, where it occupies twenty quarto pages of that work :—

Of the first thirty sections of the Sakadim one is a treatise on the necessity of obedience and understanding the laws, on newborn infants and their proper treatment, on the care of fire and sharp-pointed things, on race-courses, the use of water, salt and sweet, warm and cold, flowing and stagnant, &c. One section is the Hafidak4nistAn (‘annoyances code’), a treatise on irritating words and ill-treatment of living creatures and trees, the finding of buried treasure at various depths and in different places, &c. And one section is the Zfy4nakistan (‘damage code’), a treatise on damage to animate and inanimate objects. Of the last twenty-two sections, one is the Vakhshistan (‘increase code’), a treatise on the progress of growth, breeding of cattle and other animals, pleadings regarding debts, growth of corn, &c. One section is the Varist4n (‘ordeal code’), a treatise on the detection of witchcraft by ordeal, by heat and cold, &c. One section on asking assistance

CHAPTER X, 25, 26. 327

not provided about everything whatever, but three times z¢ has been done by Zaratist about this duty, that is, so that the Avesta azd Zand, when one has learned it thoroughly by heart’, is for recitation, and is not to be mumbled? (gfyisn6), for in mumbling (gidan6d) the parts of the Ahunavar® are more chattering‘. 26. As it says in the Bagh MNask>

and rewarding it, on the unjust judge and the sagacious one, on daughters given in marriage by mothers and brothers, on the disobedient son, &c. And one section on the spirits of the earthly existences, the merit of killing noxious water-creatures, the animal world proceeding from the primeval ox, the evil spirit not to be worshipped, and much other advice.

And one section on the spirits of the earthly existences, the merit of killing noxious water-creatures, the animal world proceeding from the primeval ox, the evil spirit not to be worshipped, and much other advice.

The passage mentioned in the text appears to have been in the first section of this Nask, as the Dinkard says it treated, among other matters, ‘about a man’s examining an action before doing it, and when he does not know whether 7/ de a sin or a good work, when possible, Ae is to set it aside and not to do ##’ But nothing is said there about Zarat(st, and what is said here seems to have very little connection with the ‘rule’ laid down in this section.

1 Literally, ‘made it quite easy.’

3 Literally, ‘not to be devoured or gnawed.’

® The formula commencing with the words Yath4 ahfi vairyd (see Bund. I, 21); its parts or bagha are the phrases into which it may be divided (see Yas. XIX, 4, 6, 9, 12).

* Reading drAitar, ‘more clamourous or ‘chattering ;’ but the word is ambiguous, as it may be darfktar, ‘more rending,’ or giraftar, ‘more weighty, more threatening,’ &c.

5 M6 has Bak. This was the third nask or ‘book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard, which calls it Baké; but according to the Ditni-vagarkard and the Rivayats it was the fourth nask. For its contents, as given by the Dinf-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, p. 127. In the Dinkard, besides a very brief account of it, in the eighth book, which states that it was a treatise on the recitation of the revealed texts, there is, in the ninth book, a long description of the contents of each of its twenty-two fargards, occupying fifty quarto pages in the MSS. of the Dinkard. From this it appears that the passage quoted in our text probably occurred in the first

328 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

thus: ‘Whoever shall mutter, O Zaratfst! my allotment of the Ahunavar ‘—that is, shall softly take z¢ inwardly—and shall let i¢ escape? again—that is, shall utter 24 a/oud—so much as a half, or one-third, or one-fourth, or one-fifth, his soul will I shield, I who am Adharmazd, from the best existence— that is, I w2// keep it away—by so much of an interval as the width of this earth.’

27. The rule is this, that ove is to proceed with great deliberation when he does not know whether tt de a sin or a good work, that is, it is not to be done.

28. The rule is this, that an opinion (and4zak) of anything is to be formed through consultation

fargard. It also occurs, in nearly the same words, in Pahl. Yas. XIX, 12-15, and as Yas. XIX is called ‘the beginning of the Bak&n’ in some MSS,, it is possible that the three Has (Yas. XIX-XXI) which relate to the three short Avesta formulas are really the first three fargards of the Bagh Nask, which are said to have treated of the same subjects.

Yas. XIX, 12-15, and as Yas. XIX is called ‘the beginning of the Bak&n’ in some MSS,, it is possible that the three Has (Yas. XIX-XXI) which relate to the three short Avesta formulas are really the first three fargards of the Bagh Nask, which are said to have treated of the same subjects.

1 The text is corrupted into min zak-i li, ZaratQst! béstarth-i min Ahunavar drfdgist, which might be translated, in connection with the following phrase, thus: ‘Of my vexation, O Zaratfist ! from the Ahunavar, the most fiendish is that one shall softly take z/,’ &c. But very slight alterations of the Pahlavi letters (in accordance with Pahl. Yas. XIX, 12) convert min into min, bést4rth into bakhtarth, and drfgist into dreng&d. Instead of ‘allotment of the Ahunavar’ we might read ‘ predestination, or providence, from the Ahunavar ;’ because the Pahlavi translator, by using the word bakhtarih or bakhtarth, appears to have understood the Av. bagha in its sense of ‘ divinity, providence,’ rather than in that of ‘ part, portion.’

8 Reading raninéd or rahéinéd. The Pahlavi translator seems to think the sin consists in breaking the spell of the vag or inward prayer (see Chap. III, 6) by speaking part of it aloud ; but the original Avesta of this passage attributes the sin to obscuring the meaning by imperfect recitation.

CHAPTER X, 27, 28. 329

with the good; even so it is revealed in the Kidrast Nask?* that Spendarmad spoke to Mandséthar thus : ‘Even the swiftest horse requires the whip (t4z4-

1 This was the twelfth nask or ‘book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard, which calls it Kidrast6 or Kidrést6; but according to the Dinf-vagarkard and the Rivdyats it was the fourteenth nask called Girast. For its contents, as given by the Dinf-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, p. 131. The following is a summary of the short account of it given in the eighth book of the Dinkard :—

For its contents, as given by the Dinf-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, p. 131. The following is a summary of the short account of it given in the eighth book of the Dinkard :—

The Xidrést6 is a treatise on the race of man; how Aftharmazd produced the first man, Gayémard, how the first pair, Mashya and Mashyédt, arose, with their progeny, till the region of Khvaniras was full, when they supplied the six surrounding regions, till they filled and cultivated the whole world. The Pésdadian dynasty of H6shang, Takhmérupé, and Yim, the evil reign of Dahdk, descended from Taz, the brother of Héshang and father of the Arabs, then Frédin who divided Khvaniras between his three sons, Salm, Tg, and Afrif, who married the daughters of Patsréb6 (compare Pahl. Vend. XX, 4) king of the Arabs, then M4nfséihar, descendant (nap) of Airié, the penal reign of Frastyav ruler of Tfr4n, then Afiz6bé the Tam4spian, descendant of Manfsihar, then Kai- Kavad and the penal reign of Karsésp6. The Kayanian dynasty of K4i-Us, Kai-Khisr6b son of Styavakhsh, with many tales of the specially famous races of Iran, Tfrén, and Salman, even to the reigns of Kaf-Léharasp and Kai-Vistésp. The apostle Zaratfst, and the progress of time and events from the reign of Frédfn till Zaratfist’s conference with Afharmazd. The race of MAnfséihar, Nédar, and others. Avarethrabau’s (see Fravardin Yt. 106) father, Atar6-pad son of M4raspend. On future events and the reign of the renovation of the universe; the origin of the knowledge of occupation, and the care and industry of the period; the great acquaintance of mankind with the putting aside of injury from the adversary, the preservation of the body, and the deliverance of the soul, both before and after the time of Zarattst.

As MAnfsgihar is several times mentioned there are several places in this Nask where the statement, quoted in the text as a saying of Spendarmad, the female archangel who has special charge of the earth (see Chap. XV, 5, 20-24, and Bund. I, 26), may have occurred.

330 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

nak), the sharpest steel knife requires the whetstone (afs4n), and the wisest man requires counsel (hamparsth).’

29. The rule is this, that when ove laughs outright (bar4 khandéd) the Avesta and Zand are not to be mumbled, for the wisdom of Afharmazd is omniscient, azd good works are a great exercise of liberality, but an extreme abstinence from producing irritation (hangtd4r-dahtsnth); because in the Ratdstaitth Mast! many harsh things are said about the severe punishment of producers of irritation, in the spiritual exzstence.

30. The rule is this, that as there may be some even of those of the good religion who, through unacquaintance with the religion, when a female fowl crows in the manner of a cock, will kill the

' This was the seventh nask or ‘book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard, which calls it Ratdstaiti ; but according to the Ditni-vagarkard and the Rivayats it was the eighth nask called Ratustat. For its contents, as given by the Dini-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, p. 129. The following is a summary of the short account of it given in the eighth book of the Dinkard:—

The Ratfstdit? is a treatise on indispensable religious practices, the reason of the worthiness and superexcellence in a purifying priest, and how to distinguish worthiness and superexcellence from unworthiness, in the priesthood of each of the seven regions of the earth; on the indication and manifestation of an assemblage of the archangels, the formulas and means to be employed in reverencing the angels, the position and duties of the two officiating priests in the ceremonies, and all the business of the orderers of ceremonies, with their various duties; on the greatness and voluntariness of good works, the kinds of voluntariness, and the proximity of Aidharmazd to the thoughts, words, and deeds of the material world.

It is uncertain under which of these heads the passage mentioned in the text may have occurred.

CHAPTER X, 29-32. 331

fowl, so those of the primitive faith’ Zave said that there may be mischief (vinast4rth) from wizards in that dwelling, wAzchk the cock is incapable of keeping away, and the female fow/ makes that naise for the assistance of the cock *, especially when the bringing of another cock into that dwelling is necessary.

31. The rule is this, that when one sees a hedgehog, then along with it* a place in the plain, free from danger, is to be preserved; for in the Vendidad ‘ the high-priests Aave taught that it is when the hedgehog every day voids urine into an ant’s nest that a thousand ants will die.

32. The rule is this, that in the Vendidad® seven kinds of things are mentioned, awd when they are the cause of a man’s death, until the forthcoming period of the day (gAs-i levin) comes on, contami-

1 See Chap. I, 3.

* The cock is considered to be an opponent of demons and wizards (see Bund. XIX, 33), and to warn men against the seductions of the demoness of lethargy (see Vend. XVIII, 33-42, 52).

’ Assuming that levatman val means levatman valman, but the reading ‘he takes s# back to (lakhvar val) the plain,’ which occurs in the repetition of this section in Chap. XII, 20, seems preferable.

* The details which follow are to be found in Bund. XIX, 28, but they appear to be no longer extant in the Pahlavi Vendidad ; though the hedgehog is called ‘the slayer of the thousands of the evil spirit,’ in Vend. XIII, 5, of which passage the statement in our text seems to be an illustration. The ant is considered noxious.

XIX, 28, but they appear to be no longer extant in the Pahlavi Vendidad ; though the hedgehog is called ‘the slayer of the thousands of the evil spirit,’ in Vend. XIII, 5, of which passage the statement in our text seems to be an illustration. The ant is considered noxious.

5 Vend.VII, 5, 6, where, however, eight modes of death are mentioned, which delay the arrival of the Nas@s, or fiend of corruption, till the next period of the day; these are when the person has been killed by a dog, a wolf, a wizard, anxiety, falling into a pit, the hand of man as sentenced by law, illegal violence, or strangulation. In all other cases it is supposed that the fiend of

corruption enters the corpse immediately after death (see Vend. VII, 2-4). ,

332 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

nation (nisrfst)! does not rush upon him; and for this reason, this, too, is well for the good, that is, to show a dog rightly again a previous corpse in the forthcoming period of ¢he day *.

33. The rule is this, that by those who attend to a corpse among the pure z¢ is then to be shown /oa dog very observant of the corpse; for when even a thousand persons shall carry away a corpse which a dog Aas not seen, they are all polluted *.

34. The rule is this, that meat, when there is stench or decomposition not even originating with zt, is not to be prayed over‘; and the sacred cake (drén) and butter (g4ds-d4k) which are hairy are also not to be prayed over

35. A woman is fit for priestly duty (z6tth) among women °, and when she is consecrating’? the sacred

? See Bund. XXVIII, 29.

* In order that there may be no risk of the fiend of corruption having entered the corpse after it was first exhibited to a dog.

® This statement has been already made in Chap. II, 65.

‘ That is, it is not to be used in any religious ceremony. Small pieces of meat are consecrated, along with the sacred cakes, in the Drén and Afringan ceremonies at certain festivals.

5 So in K20; but M6 has, ‘the sacred cake they present, even that is not to be prayed over.’ Although M6 is more carefully written than K20, it seems to have been copied from an original which was hardly legible in some places, of which this is one. The presence of a hair in the cake or butter would render it useless for religious purposes. —

* But only for some of the minor priestly offices, such as consecrating the sacred cake. According to Avesta passages, quoted in the Nirangistén, any man who is not a Tan4p(har sinner can perform certain priestly duties for virtuous men, and any woman who is not feeble-minded (kasu-khrathwa) can perform them for children. .

7 M6 has, ‘ when she does not consecrate.’

CHAPTER X, 33-40. 333

7 M6 has, ‘ when she does not consecrate.’

CHAPTER X, 33-40. 333

cake (drén), and one Ashem-voht! is uttered by her, she puts the sacred twigs (baresém) back on the twig-stand, brings ¢hem away, and the utterance of another one is good; when she says it is not expedient to do z¢ with attention before a meal, it is proper. 36. The sacred cake of a disreputable woman is not to be consecrated, but is to be rendered ineligible (aviginak6).

37. When one places a thing before the fire observantly, and does not see the splendour itself, ‘tava 4thr6?’ is not to be said.

38. At night, when® ove lies down, the hands are to be thoroughly washed. 39. That which comes from a menstruous woman to any one, or to anything, is all to be thoroughly washed with bull’s urine (gdméz) and water‘.

[40. The rule is this, as Atar6-pAd son of MAraspend® said when every one passed away:—‘ The mouth-veil® and also the clothing are to be well

1 See Bund. XX, 2; it is rather doubtful whether we should read ‘one’ or ‘two.’

2 These Avesta words, meaning ‘for thee, the fire,’ are used when presenting anything to the fire, such as firewood and incense (see Yas. VII, 3, XXII, 10, 22, &c.)

5 Reading amat, ‘when,’ instead of mfin, ‘who’ (see Bund. I, 7, note).

* Here ends the original Sh4yast l&-shayast. § 40 is found only in M6, and is evidently a later addition to that MS. by another hand. Then follows the Farhang-i Oim-khadQk, both in M6 and K20; this is an old Avesta-Pahlavi Glossary which has no connection with Sls., although it may be of the same age, as it quotes many Avesta sentences which are no longer extant elsewhere, and amongst others passages from the Nih&dim Nask (see Sls. X, 3) and the commentary of Afarg (see Sls. I, 3).

5 See Bund. XXXII], 3.

* The padém (Av. paitidana, Paz. pendm) ‘ consists of two

334 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

set apart from the gifts (dasardn), so that his soul may become easier.’ Completed in peace and pleasure. ]

Part Il.—A Supplementary Treatise’.

CuapTer XI.

1. The degrees of sin are these ?, such as a Farman, Sréshé6-4arandm, Agerept, Atvtrist, Aredis, Khér, Bazat, Yat, and TanA4pfhar, and I wz// mention each of them a second time. 2. A Farmd4n is the weight of ‘three dirhams of four mads*; a

pieces of white cotton cloth, hanging loosely from the bridge of the nose to at least two inches below the mouth, and tied with two strings at the back of the head. It must be worn by a priest whenever he approaches the sacred fire, so as to prevent his breath from contaminating the fire. On certain occasions a layman has to use a substitute for the pendm by screening his mouth and nose with a portion of his muslin shirt.’ (Haug’s Essays, p. 243, note 1; see also Pahl. Vend. XVIII, 1-4.)

On certain occasions a layman has to use a substitute for the pendm by screening his mouth and nose with a portion of his muslin shirt.’ (Haug’s Essays, p. 243, note 1; see also Pahl. Vend. XVIII, 1-4.)

* This second part is evidently by another writer, for he not only repeats several passages (Chaps. XI, 1, 2, XII, rr, 13-16, 18, 20), which are given in the first part, but he also writes generally in a less simple style. In some MSS. of Sls. alone, such as Mg, the second part immediately follows the first, as in this translation ; indicating that it has been accepted as a part of the same work. But in M6 the two parts are separated by the Farh. Okh., occupying twenty folios; and in K2o there is an interval of ninety-two folios, containing the Farh. Okh., Bund., B. Yt., and several other texts.

2 §§ 1, 2 are a repetition of Chap. I, 1, 2, with a few variations. The number of degrees is here raised to nine by the addition of the Srésh6-4aran4m (see Chap. X, 24), which is written Srdshakaranam in both these sections.

5 Reading i mad-4, instead of va m-4; the mad being a quarter-dirham (see Chap. X, 24, note) ; or we can read ‘weight and quantity (mayah) of three dirhams.’ The amount of the Farman

‘CHAPTER XI, I-4. 335

Sréshé-Zarandm is one dirham and two mads; three Sréshé-aranams are the weight of four dirhams and two mads!; an Agerept is thirty-three stirs?; an Aivirist is the weight of thirty-three dirhams; an Aredds is thirty stévs*; a Khér is sixty stirs; a Bazat is ninety stirs; a Yat is a hundred and eighty stirs, and a Tandpdhar is three hundred stirs.

3. Every one ought to be unhesitating and unanimous about this, that righteousness is the one thing, and heaven (garédm4n)* the one place, which is good, and contentment the one thing more comfortable.

4. When a sheep? is slaughtered and divided, its meat-offering (g4vds-d4k)*® is to be thus _presented :—the tongue, jaw, and left eye are the

here given appears to agree with that stated in Chap. XVI, 1, but differs very much from the sixteen dirhams mentioned in Chap. I, 2, and the twenty-eight dirhams quoted by Spiegel.

1 That is, one Srésh6-Zaran4m is one dirham and a half, and three of them, therefore, are four dirhams and a half; the mad being a quarter-dirham. This computation differs considerably from the amounts stated in Chaps. X, 24, XVI, 5, but corresponds better with the supposition (see Chap. IV, 14, note) that a Sréshé- Aaranam is one-third of a Farman.

* Both this amount and the next are evidently wrong, and no doubt the Pahlavi ciphers have been corrupted. Chap. XVI, 5 gives ‘sixteen’ and ‘ twenty-five’ stirs, which are probably correct, though the computation in Chap. I, 2 is very different.

5 Written AredQs 30 si, ‘an Aredds is 30 (thirty),’ as in Chap. I, 2; with which also all the remaining amounts correspond.

“ See note on p&hifim ahvan in Chap. VI, 3.

® Or ‘goat.’

I, 2 is very different.

5 Written AredQs 30 si, ‘an Aredds is 30 (thirty),’ as in Chap. I, 2; with which also all the remaining amounts correspond.

“ See note on p&hifim ahvan in Chap. VI, 3.

® Or ‘goat.’

* Av. gdus hudhau, which is generally represented by a small piece of butter placed upon one of the sacred cakes; but on certain occasions small pieces of meat are used. The object of this section is to point out what part of the animal is suitable for use in a ceremony dedicated to any one of the angels, or spirits, mentioned.

3 336 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

angel Hém’s! own; the neck is Ashavahist's® own ; the head is the angel V4é’s* own; the right shoulder (arm) is Ardvtsdr’s‘, the left is Drvdsp’s*®; the right thigh (hakht) is for the guardian spirit® of Vistasp, and the left for the guardian spirit of Gam4sp’; the back is for the supreme chief*; the loin is the spirits’ own; the belly is Spendarmaa’s®; the testicles!° are for the star Vanand"; the kidneys are

1 Av. haoma, the angel of the Hém plant (see Yas. IX-XI, Bund. XVIII, 1-3, XXVII, 4, 24), the juice of which is used in ceremonial worship by the Parsis.

2 The same as Ardavahist (see Bund. I, 26).

5 M6 has ‘Rém’ as a gloss; he is the Vayé of the Ram Yt, ‘the good Vaé’ of Mkh. II, 115, who assists the righteous souls in their progress to the other world; his name, Ram, is given to the twenty-first day of the Parsi month (see Chap. XXII, 21).

* Av. Ardvi sfira of the Aban Yt, a title of Andhita, the female .

angel of the waters (see Bund. XXXII, 8). This title is written Arédvfvsir in the Bundahis, and applied to the source of pure water (Bund. XIII); while the name Avan, ‘waters,’ is given to the eighth month and the tenth day of each month in the Parsi year.

® Av. Drvdspa of the Gés Yt., the name of the female angel of cattle, called Gésfrvan in Bund. IV; her alternative name, Gés, is given to the fourteenth day of the Parsi month.

® The word fravash-i, ‘the guardian spirit of,’ is evidently omitted here, as it occurs with the next name. For Vistasp, see Bund. XXXI, 29, XXXIV, 7.

7 Av. Gam4spa of Yas. XIII, 24, XLV, 17, XLVIII, 9, L, 18, Aban Yt. 68, &c., the prime minister of Vistasp.

* Ratp6k berézad stands for the Av. rathw6 berezaté of Yas. I, 46, &c., a ‘supreme chief’ who is often associated with the chiefs of the various subdivisions of time, and seems to be Adharmazd himself (see Yas. LVI, i, 10).

® The female archangel who has charge of the earth (see Chap. “XV, 5, 20-24, and Bund. I, 26).

10The word gfind has here, in most MSS., the usual Persian gloss dah4n, ‘ mouth’ (see Bund. XIX, 1), which is a very improbable meaning in this place.

" Probably Fomalhaut (see Bund. II, 7, note).

CHAPTER XI, 4, 5. 337

“XV, 5, 20-24, and Bund. I, 26).

10The word gfind has here, in most MSS., the usual Persian gloss dah4n, ‘ mouth’ (see Bund. XIX, 1), which is a very improbable meaning in this place.

" Probably Fomalhaut (see Bund. II, 7, note).

CHAPTER XI, 4, 5. 337

Haptéiring’s'; the ventricle (naskadak6)? is for the guardian spirit of priests; the lungs are for the guardian spirit of warriors; the liver is for compassion and sustenance ® of the poor; the spleen is MAnsarspend’s‘; the fore-legs (bAzdt) are for the waters; the heart is for the fires; the entrail fat is Ardat-fravard’s®; the tail-bone (dunb-gazak3) is for the guardian spirit of Zaratdst the Spttaman®; the tail (dunbak) is for Vad" the righteous; the right eye is in the share of the moon®; and any® ¢hat may be left over from those is for the other archangels. 5. Zhere have been ¢hose who may have spoken about protection, and ¢heve have been those who may have done so about meat-offerings; whoever as spoken about protection is such as has

1 Ursa Major, called Hapt6k-ring in Bund. II, 7.

* Translating in accordance with the Persian gloss éustah, given in the modern MS. Mg; but nas-kadaké may perhaps mean ‘the womb.’

5 Reading sar-Ayisn6, ‘ maturity,’ the usual equivalent of Av. thraosta (see Yas. XXXIV, 3), and not srayisné, ‘chanting.’

‘ Av. mathra spenta, ‘the beneficent sayings, or holy word,’ of which this angel is a personification; his name is often corrupted into Mahraspend or M4raspend, and is given to the twentyninth day of the Parsi month (see Chap. XXII, 29).

° A personification of the Av. ashaondm fravashay6, ‘ guardian angels of the righteous’ (see Fravardin Yt. 1, &c.), whence the first month, and the nineteenth day of each month, in the Parsi year, are called Fravardin.

* This clause and the next are omitted in K2o.

7 The angel of the wind, whose name is given to the twentysecond day of the Parsi month (see Chap. XXII, 22).

® Or its angel, M&h, whose name js given to the twelfth day of the Parsi month.

* M6 has va a€-maman=va a€é (Pers. f4, ‘any’); K2o has kol4 maman, ‘whatever,’ and omits the words ‘ may be left over’ and ‘ other.’

(5) Zz

338 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

spoken well, and whoever “as spoken about meatofferings has not spoken everything which is noteworthy’. 6. When oze shall offer up? wha? pertains to one (khaddkag) on account of another it is proper; except the tongue, jaw, and left eye, for that those are the angel Hém’s own is manifest from the passage: ‘ Hizvaém frerenaod’, Ge.

CHAPTER XII.

t. The rule is this, that when one’s form of worship (yast)* is performed, and it is not possible for him to prepare z¢, the practice of those of the primitive faith’ is, when the girdle (atpiy4dng) is twined about a sacred twig-bundle (baresém)® of seven twigs (tak), to consecrate a sacred cake (drén6d) thrice, which becomes his form of worship that is performed one degree better through the sacred cake; and of the merit of a threefold consecration

1 Meaning, apparently, that to pray for protection as a favour is better than to pray for it as a return for an offering.

* K2o has ‘shall give up.’

* It is doubtful if this passage can be found in the extant Avesta; but a passage of similar meaning, and containing the words frerenaod and hizvé, occurs in Yas. XI, 16, which states that ‘the righteous father, Ahuramazda, produced for me, Haoma, as a Draona, the two jaws, with the tongue and the left eye;’ and it then proceeds (Yas. XI, 17-19) to curse any one ‘who shall deprive me of that Draona, or shall himself enjoy, or shall give away what the righteous Ahuramazda gave me, the two jaws, with the tongue and the left eye.’

* A Yast is a formula of praise in honour of the sun, moon, water, fire, or some other angel, as well as a term for prayers and worship in general.

5 See Chap. I, 3. ® See Chap. III, 32, note.

CHAPTER XI, 6—XII, 3. 339

of the sacred cake the high-priests ave specially taught, in the Hdspéram Wasé', that z¢ is as much as ‘hat of a lesser form of worship.

2. The rule is this, that he who is himself more acquainted with religion is he who considers him who is more acquainted with religion than himself as high-priest, and considers 42m as high-priest® so that he may not destroy the bridge of the soul*; as it says in the Sakadim Mask * that no one of them, that is an inattentive (asrdshd4r) man who has no high-priest, attains to the best existence®, not though his recitations should be so many that they have made his duty and good works as much as the verdure (sapdak) of the plants when it shoots forth in spring, the verdure which Afharmazd has given abundantly.

3. The rule is this, that they keep a fire ® in the house, because, from not keeping the fire properly, there arise less pregnancy of women and a weeping (Av-didan6d) for the loss of strength (tand) of men’; and the chilled charcoal (angist) and the rest which are without advantage (bar) are to be

1 See Chap. X, 21. The passage mentioned in the text was probably in the section called Nirangistan.

* K2o omits this repetition.

8 That is, may not render the passage of his soul to heaven, over the Kinvad bridge (see Bund. XII, 7), impossible, owing to the sin of arrogance in this world.

* See Chap. X, 25; the passage alluded to was probably at the beginning of the Nask, which treated of ‘the reward of the precepts of religion, and the bridge of the destroyers of good preceptors, adapted to their destruction.’

® See Chap. VI, 3.

* K2o has ‘ that a fire is to be properly kept.’

7 K2o has ‘and a loss of the strength and wealth of men.’

340 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

carried away from the fire; and in the Spend WVask? z¢ is revealed that a fire, when they shall make it quite clean from its chilled charcoal, Aas as much comfort as a man whose clothing they should make clean.

4. The rule is this, that when any one passes away it is proper to render useless* as much as the smallest mouth-veil%, for it says in the Vendidad * that ‘if even those Mazdayasnians should leave on him who is dead, in parting with him, as much as that which a damsel would leave in parting with the food-bowl (padm4nak6)—that is, a bag (anbanak6é-han4)*’—the decree is this, that 2¢ is a Tana-

' See Chap. X, 4; the passage mentioned was probably in that part of the Nask which described the protection afforded by the fire to the new-born Zaratist.

* Probably a negative is omitted, or ak4rintdand should be translated ‘ to make no use of.’

5 See Chap. X, 40. Kzo has ‘ garment.’

« Always written Vadfkd4d in this second part of Sls., except in Chap. XIII, 7; whereas in the first part it is written in its uncorrupted form Gavid-déf-dad or Gavid-séd4-dad, ‘the law opposed to the demons.’ The passage here quoted is Pahl. Vend. V, 171, 172, with one or two verbal variations.

5 Standing for anbAnak-aé, which is corrupted in the Vendidad MSS. into the unintelligible form andanak6-1, so that this old quotation throws a rather unexpected light upon a passage in the Vendidad which translators would be almost certain to misunderstand. The allusion is to the bags used by a menstruous woman, when eating, to prevent contamination of the food. The Persian Rivayats state that three bags (kisah) are made of two thicknesses of strong linen, one bag to wear on each hand, and the third, which is larger, to hold the metal food-bowl and water-goblet. After thoroughly washing her hands and face, she puts the two bags on her hands, taking care that they do not touch her food, or clothes, or any other part of her body. She then feeds herself with a metal spoon, which must not touch her nose; and when the meal

CHAPTER XII, 4, 5. 341

pahar szz} at root, which is hell; a#d in the Vendidad? it says that the clothing of the charitable (dahisn-hémand) soul, and even the clothing which they will give z¢, are out of almsgivings (dasar4n) *.

5. The rule is this, that when any one passes away, after keeping fasting the three xighés*, still the presentation of holy-water (z6har) to the fire is to be performed, which is the presenting of the holy-water to the nearest fire; for in the Damdéd Nask* it is revealed that when they sever (tebrfind) the consciousness of men it goes out to the nearest fire, then out to the stars, then out to the

is finished the food-bow] and water-goblet are placed on the large bag, and the two smaller bags inside it, till wanted again.

1 See Chap. I, 1, 2.

3 This passage does not appear to be now extant in the Vendidad, and it is possible to read Nask Dad instead of Vadikd4d. The D&di or Dadak Nask was the eleventh nask or ‘book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard, which merely says that its ‘ Avesta and Zand are not communicated to us by the high-priest.’ According to the Dini-vagarkard, which calls it Khast6, and the Riv4yats, which call it Khast, it was the twelfth Nask, and they give its contents in more detail than usual (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 130, 131).

5 Meaning that the dead require no clothing, as their future bodies will be clothed out of the garments they have given away in charity. The resemblance of this statement to that contained in Bund. XXX, 28, which must have been abridged from the Damdad Nask (see SZS. IX, 1), renders it possible that it may have been taken from that Nask.

* No fresh meat is to be cooked or eaten for the first three days after a death in the house, according to the Sad-dar Bundahis, LXXVIII (compare Chap. XVII, 1-3).

5 See SZS. IX, 1. The passage here quoted may perhaps be found in the complete text of the Bundahis, as given in TD (Chap. 37; see Introduction, p. xxxvii).

342 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

moon, and then out to the sun!; and z¢ is needful that the nearest fire, which is that to which it 4as come out, should become stronger (z6r-hémandtar)*%

6. The rule is this, that they should not leave a nail-paring unprayed over (an4fsddak), for if it be not prayed over (afsand)* it turns into the arms and equipments of the M4zandn demons‘; és is explicitly shown in the Vendidad *.

7. The rule is this, that the labour of child-birth ¢ is not to be accomplished at night, except while with the light of a fire, or the stars and moon, upon i¢; for great opposition is connected with it, and in the twentieth of the Hdspdram ask? it is shown that over the soul of him who works in the dark there 7s more predominance of the evil spirit.

8. The rule is this, that they should allow the egg and other food® for those gifts azd favours of the

1 A righteous soul is supposed to step out first to the star station, then to the moon station, and then to the sun station, on its way to 'Garédm4n, the highest heaven ; but if its righteousness is imperfect it has to stop at one of these three stations, which are the three lower grades of heaven (see note on p&hifim ahvan, Chap. VI, 3).

2 Or ‘more provided with z6r,’ which may mean ‘ holy-water,’ as the two words z6r and zéhar are occasionally confounded.

* Or, perhaps, ‘if they shall not pray over ¢#.’

* See Bund. III, 20, XIX, 19, 20.

® Vend. XVII, 29.

* Barman-zerkhfinisnth may also mean ‘ begetting a son.’

™ See Chap. X, 21. The word ‘twentieth’ appears to refer to the second group of twenty sections, one of which treated of the begetting, birth, and treatment of children.

III, 20, XIX, 19, 20.

® Vend. XVII, 29.

* Barman-zerkhfinisnth may also mean ‘ begetting a son.’

™ See Chap. X, 21. The word ‘twentieth’ appears to refer to the second group of twenty sections, one of which treated of the begetting, birth, and treatment of children.

* Referring to the egg, dréns, frasasts, and g4us hudhau or ‘meat-offering’ (which may be either butter or meat, see Chap. XI, 4) that are used in the dr6n ceremony, or consecration of the sacred cakes (see note on drén, Chap. III, 32). The object of

CHAPTER XII, 6-II. 343

sovereign moon (m4h-i khfdai) and the other angels ; if so, it is to be allowed by them thus: ‘I will consecrate so much food for such an angel,’ and not thus: ‘One sacred cake (dr6n6) in so much food.’ 9. And the reason of it is this, that ¢Aey who shall allow thus: ‘One sacred cake out of so much food,’ and of which z¢ is one thing less, even though one shall consecrate z¢ many times, still then he Aas not repaid ; and ¢key who should allow thus: ‘I will consecrate so much food for such an angel,’ though one shall reverence 42m with many sacred cakes, it is proper. ro. And in the twenty-two sections of the Sakédim Vask! grievous things are shown about those who do not make offerings (atiistéfrid) unto the angels.

11. The rule is this, that when a woman becomes pregnant, as long as it is possible, a fire ove cares for well is to be maintained in the house, because it is revealed? in the Spend Nask that to Ddkdav%, the mother of Zaratfst, when she was pregnant with Zaratdst, for three nights, every night a leader (shah) ‘ with a hundred and fifty demons came for the destruction of Zarat(st, and yet, owing to the existence of the fire in the dwelling, they knew no means for zt.

this paragraph is, evidently, to reprove niggardliness in such offerings, and to prevent their being mere pretexts for feasting.

1 See Chap. X, 25. The passage alluded to here was probably in that section, of the last twenty-two, which treated of the spirits of the earthly existences, one portion of which was ‘ about preparing offerings (afist6frit6) to the angels.’

* M6 has ‘the fire of AQharmazd is to be fully maintained, and it is revealed,’ &c. This section is a repetition of Chap. X, 4, with a few variations.

* Here written Didk4v.

* Or it may be read s@d4, ‘a demon,’ meaning ‘an arch-fiend.’

344 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

12. The rule is this, where a child is born, during three days, for protection from demons, wizards, and witches, a fire is to be made at night until day4ghé, and is to be maintained there in the day, and pure incense is to be put upon it, as is revealed in the thirtieth of the Sakadim ask’.

13. The rule is this?, that from a toothpick the bark® is to be well cut off, for there are some of those of the primitive faith* who ave said that, when‘ they shall make it for the teeth wzth the bark on, and they throw z¢ away, a pregnant woman, who. puts a foot upon it, is doubtful about z¢s being dead matter.

puts a foot upon it, is doubtful about z¢s being dead matter.

14. The rule is this, that z¢ is well 2/ any one of those who have their handmaid (4akar) in cohabitation (zanth), and offspring is born of her, shall accept all those who are male as sons; dé those who are female are no advantage, because an adopted son (satér) is requisite, and in the fourteenth of the Hdspéram Nask® the high-priests

1 That is, in the first thirty sections of the Nask (see Chap. X, 25); the passage alluded to must have been in that portion which treated of new-born infants and their proper treatment.

? §§ 13-16 are a repetition of Chap. X, 20-23, with a few variations.

* The word appears to be t6pé or tQfd, which would rather mean ‘scum’ or ‘gum’ (see Bund. XXVII, 19), unless it be considered a miswriting of t6g6 or t635, which would mean ‘thin bark’ or ‘bast.’ It can also be read tfipar, ‘a leather bag,’ and the sentence can be so translated as to imply that a toothpick should be cut out of a leather bag, an alternative similar to that suggested by the text of Chap. X, 20.

* See Chap. I, 3.

5 Reading amat, ‘when,’ instead of mfin, ‘who’ (see Bund. I, 7, note).

® See Chap. X, 21.

CHAPTER XII, 12-17. 345

have taught thus: ‘My son is suitable also as thy son, éu¢ my daughter is not suitable also as thy daughter;’ and ¢kerve are many who! do not appoint an adopted son with this idea, that: ‘The child of a handmaid may be accepted by us as a son.’

15. The rule is this, that ove zs to persevere much in the begetting of offspring, since z¢ zs for the acquisition ? of many good works at once ; because in the Spend ® and Nihadim Nasks*‘ the high-priests have taught that the duty and good works which a son performs are as much the father’s as though they had been done by his own hand; and in the DAémdad Nasé ® it is revealed thus: ‘ Likewise, too, the good works, z# like manner, which come éo the father as his own.’

16. The rule is this, that what they shall give to the worthy is as much as is proper and beyond, for eating and accumulating; because in the Nihadim Nask* the high-priests Aave taught thus: ‘When a man gives bread to a man, even though that man has too much bread, all the good works, which he shall perform through that superabundance, become as much his who gave zt as though they had been done by his own hand,

17. The rule is this, that in the night water is

' The writer of M6 evidently found his original illegible at this place, as he wrote . . . maman instead of min denman.

3 M6 has ‘performance,’ which is probably a misreading, due to the original of that MS. being partially illegible.

5 See Chap. X, 4. This Nask is not mentioned in Chap. X, 22, and the passage here alluded to is not to be traced in any of the short accounts of its contents.

* See Chap. X, 3, 22.

5 See SZS. IX, 1, and Chap. X, 22.

® See Chap. X, 3, 23.

346 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

being partially illegible.

5 See Chap. X, 4. This Nask is not mentioned in Chap. X, 22, and the passage here alluded to is not to be traced in any of the short accounts of its contents.

* See Chap. X, 3, 22.

5 See SZS. IX, 1, and Chap. X, 22.

® See Chap. X, 3, 23.

346 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

not to be drawn! from a well, as in the Bag-yasn6? notice is given about the uncleanness (ayosdAsarth) of well-water at night

18. The rule is this, that in the night anything eatable is not to be cast away to the north, because a fiend w/Z become pregnant; and when it is cast away one Yath4-ahi-vairy63 is to be uttered. 109. Those of the primitive faith* who used to act more orthodoxically (hf-rastakihatar), when food was eaten by them in the night, for the sake of preservation from sin owing to the coming of strainings and sprinklings o” to the ground, directed a man to chant the Ahunavar® from the beginning of the feast

* K2o has ‘that water is not to be drawn on foot.’

* Probably the Bak4n-yast6 is meant, which was the fourteenth nask or ‘book’ of the complete Mazdayasnian literature, according to the Dinkard; but according to the Dini-vagarkard and the Riviyats it was the fifteenth nask, called Bagh4n-yast. For its contents, as given by the Dini-vagarkard, see Haug’s Essays, p. 1332. The following is the account of it given in the eighth book of the Dinkard :—

‘The Bak4n-yast6 is a treatise, first, on the worship (yast6) of Adiharmazd, the most pre-eminent of divinities (bakin avartQm), and, secondly, the worship of the angels of the other invisible and visible worldly existences, out of whom are even the names of the days, and the glory, power, triumph, and miraculousness of their life also is extreme; the angels who are invoked by name in their worship, and the attention and salutation due to them; the worthiness and dispensation of favour for worshippers, and the business of their many separate recitations unto the angels; the business of unlimited acquaintance with knowledge about the promoters of the treasures of the period, unto whom the creator Aftharmazd #s to intrust them, and they remain to cause industry. Perfect is the excellence of righteousness.’

5 See Bund. I, 21. This section is a repetition of Chap. X, 7, with a few variations.

“ See Chap. I, 3.

5 That is, the Yatha-ahQ-vairyd (see Bund. I, 21).

CHAPTER XII, 18-22. 347

(myazd) unto the end, more especially at the feast of the season-festivals; as it says in the Hadékht Nasék', that of the sayings which are spoken out the Ahunavar is that wzch zs most triumphant.

20. The rule is this, that when one sees a hedgehog he takes z¢ back to the plain, and its own place is to be preserved free from danger; for in the Vendidad the high-priests Aave taught, that every day, when.the hedgehog voids urine into an ant’s nest, a thousand ants will die’.

21. The rule is this, that some who are of the good religion say, where one is washing zs face, one Ashem-vohi® is always to be uttered, and that Ashem-vohti is to be uttered before the washing ; for when he utters z¢ while washing zs face, he is doubtful (var-hémand) about the water coming to Azs mouth.

22. The rule is this, that they select ftom the purifiers*—when their business (mindavam) is as important (rab) as purity and impurity—Azm with whom the control’ of ablution (padty4vth)* and non-ablution is connected ; they select 42m especially

' See B.Yt. ITI, 25. The passage here quoted must have been in the first division of the Nask.

* This section is a repetition of Chap. X, 31.

5 See Bund. XX, 2.

‘ The yésd4sar4n, ‘ purifiers’ (Av. yaosd4thrya), are those priests who retain so much of the purifying effect of the Bareshnim ceremony (see Chap. II, 6) as to be able to assist in purifying others by means of the same ceremony. When that effect has passed away a priest can no longer perform the sacred rites, until he has again undergone the nine nights’ purification of the Bareshnfim.

* Reading band, but it may be béd, ‘ vitality, essence.’

® See Chap. II, 52.

348 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

with regard to the good disposition and truthful speaking of the man, and /o the particular work ; and on account of zs deing in innocence 4e is to be considered more righteous. 23. As in the Vendidad! it says, about the two shares of righteousness, how one should tell that 4e zs ‘a righteous man, O Zaratdst the Spttam4n ! who is a purifier, who should be a speaker that speaks truly, an enquirer of the sacred texts—that is, he has performed his ritual (yast)—a righteous oe who specially understands purification from the religion of the Mazdayasnians, that is, he understands its vedigious formulas (nirang).’ 24. When z¢ is so that the control of their ablution is connected with him, so that they consider what pertains to the purifying bowl (zak-i tastik) as his, and ever abstain from it, though the angels hear and consider ¢hem as clean, and they select for him those who consecrate the water and bull’s urine (gé6méz) on account of ¢hezy control of purification (yésdAsarkarth), and zt is to be performed very observantly by the consecrators at the place which is to be measured with a measure and very exactly (khQptar)% 25. And the purifier is so much the better when washed again, and when z¢ zs by some one through whose periodic (zam4ntk)

' The passage here quoted is from Pahl. Vend. IX, 4-6.

And the purifier is so much the better when washed again, and when z¢ zs by some one through whose periodic (zam4ntk)

' The passage here quoted is from Pahl. Vend. IX, 4-6.

® Referring to the Bareshnfim-g4h, or place prepared for the Bareshnfim ceremony of purification with bull’s urine and water, which are handed to the person undergoing purification by an officiating priest (see Chap. II, 6). The place is marked out with furrows in the ground, and furnished with stones (magh) to squat upon during the ablutions (see B. Yt. II, 36). The construction of this paragraph is very obscure in many places, and its proper division into sentences is, therefore, uncertain.

CHAPTER XII, 23-28, 349

care he is thus done; for in the periodic interval many secret! kinds of pollution are produced. 26. Of the celebrators of the Vendidad the good are they who shall again perform the Navashddar rite’; for, on account of the same nicety (nazfikih) which is written above by me, avd on account of much also that zs secret, which has happened azd mostly arises about it, ‘eve is no harm from performing zz. 27. And any one of those who shall receive the water and bull’s urine z¢ is very important to wash beforehand (pavan pés)*; because, if there be impurity adout him‘, and he puts a hand to the cup (gamak), the water, avd the bull's urine, ¢hey are unclean (ap4d4v5)5; when z¢ zs so that there be some one, when so, z¢ is better ¢ha¢t they always wash his eyelids (méyak g4s), azd to wash them by the clean is good.

28. The rule is this, that thou shouldst not consider even any one hopeless (andtméd) of heaven,

* Reading nih4n, but we might perhaps read ‘ causes (vah4n) of pollution of many kinds.’ The meaning of the section is, that it is necessary for the purifying priest to maintain his own purity by frequently undergoing the Bareshnfm ceremony himself.

* Yast-i Navash4dar in all MSS., but the latter word is most probably a corruption of Av. navakhshapara, ‘a period of nine nights,’ for which length of time the Bareshnfim ceremony must be continued (see Vend. IX, 144, XIX, 80), The ‘ NavashAdar rite’ is, therefore, ‘the ceremony of the nine nights,’ which should be frequently undergone by the priests who celebrate the Vendidad ceremonial.

* M6 has pavan pisak, ‘ with ceremony.’

« M6 has ‘ them.’

° M6 has ‘one knows it is unto the cup and bull’s urine;’ but as M6 was evidently copied from a MS. already nearly illegible in some places, it is generally safer to follow K20, except when M6 supplies words omitted by the more careless writer of K2o,

350 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

already nearly illegible in some places, it is generally safer to follow K20, except when M6 supplies words omitted by the more careless writer of K2o,

350 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

and they should not set ‘ety minds steadfastly on hell; thereby much sinfulness for which ¢here is a desire would be undesirable, because ¢here is nothing which is a sin 7# my religion for which ‘here is no retribution, as it says in the G&éthas! thus:—‘ Of those who are aware that thou art, OO Atharmazd! is even he who is infamous (raspak6); and they know the punishment of him even who is very sinful.’ 29. And as ¢o him even who is a very sinful person, through the desire? of good works which is entertained by him, ¢heve then comes more fully to him the joy of a soul newly worthy (nuk shdyaa); as in the Spend Was’ r¢ was shown to Zaratist about one man, that all 42s limbs were in torment, and one foot was outside ; and Zarattst enquired of Afharmazd about the reason of z¢; and Atharmazd said that he was a man, Davdns‘ by name; he was ruler over thirty-three ® districts, and he never practised

1 The passage here quoted from the G&thas will be found in Pahl. Yas. XXXII, 7.

* M6 has merely ‘through the good works which are practised by him;’ but Kzo has ‘1 hamak’ inserted at this point, which seems to indicate the existence of the nearly identical Pahlavi letters kAmak, ‘desire,’ in the original from which it was copied.

* See Chap. X, 4. The passage here quoted was no doubt contained in that part of the Nask which treated of the exhibition of heaven and hell to Zaratfist, which must have been very similar to the Arda-Viraf-namak, in which most of the details of this story about Dav4ns are given (see AV. XXXII).

* This is, no doubt, the Av. davaés of Yas. XXXI, 10, which may be translated ‘hypocrite.’ The Pahlavi translation of the line in which the word occurs is thus rendered in Haug’s Essays (p. 351): ‘ Afharmazd does not allot to him who is an idler, the infidel who is any hypocrite (davas) in the sacred recitations. In the good religion it is asserted that even as much reward as they give to the hypocrite they do not give to the infidel.’

§ K2o has ‘thirty-four.’

CHAPTER XII, 29-31. 351

any good work, except one time when fodder was conveyed by him to a sheep with that one foot.

30. The rule is this, that when a man has performed his form of worship (yast), and his wife has not performed 7¢, z¢ is extremely necessary to perform the suitable form of worship, or to order a Gété-kharid', so that they may become such as are dwelling more closely ¢ogether in the spiritual exzstence than in the world; and in the Hadédkht Mask? it says that a woman (nAtrik) who shall be reverent (tarsak) is to be considered as much as she who is suitable (zty4k).

it says that a woman (nAtrik) who shall be reverent (tarsak) is to be considered as much as she who is suitable (zty4k).

31. The rule is this, that these five ceremonies (yazisn), when they shall perform ¢hem, are good works *; when ove does not perform ¢hem, and the time is manifest to him, and when he shall set them aside to perform ¢kem out of the proper time, they shall go to the bridge‘ as sin; the ceremonies which go to the bridge are these, and in the Hfspéram Nask® it says that ¢hey are the non-celebration of the rites (14 yastand) of the season-festivals*®, the

1 Here written géték-kharfd, but see Chap. V, 6, and Bund. XXX, 28.

* See B. Yt. III, 25; but the passage here quoted is not clearly indicated in the accounts we have of the contents of this Nask.

* The distinction between these ceremonies and those whose values as good works are given in Chap. XVI, 6, appears to be that any omission in performing these five at their proper times amounts to an absolute sin, whereas the others are not so indispensable.

* That is, they will be taken into account at the judgment on the soul’s actions at the Ainvad bridge (see Bund. XII, 7).

5 See Chap. X, 21. The passage here quoted was probably in the section called Nirangistan.

6 The Gasanbars or Ga&hanbars (see Bund. XXV, 1-6).

352 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

Rapttvin!, the three nights? after a death, the days devoted to the guardian spirits*, and the sun and moon ¢,

32. The rule is this, that at every one of these three things, whch come through hungry living, that is, sneezing, yawning, and sighing, ove is to speak out a Yatha-ahd-vairy6 and one Ashem-voht‘; and also when one hears the sneezing of any one, to speak zz like manner is so considered as an action of the good *; and in the Stidgar Vask’ it says thus: ‘“ What prepares sneezing? that is, through what process (kr) does it come?” And Adharmazd said thus: “ Hungry living, O Zaratdst! because the remedy for its existence is the Ahunavar, O Zaratdst! and righteousness °.”’

CuapterR XIII.

o. The signification of the GAthas®. 1. These three Ashem-vohis (Yas. XI, end) which

* The midday period (see Bund. II, 8, 9, XXV, 9-14).

* See Chap. VIII, 6. 5 See Chap. X, 2.

* See Chap. VII, 1-5. 5 See Bund. I, 21, XX, 2.

* That is, it is commendable, though not obligatory. The practice of uttering a blessing on hearing a sneeze is still common in many parts of Europe.

7 See B. Yt. I, 1. The passage here quoted is not to be traced in any of the accounts of this Nask.

® <The Ahunavar and praise of righteousness’ would be a Pahlavi equivalent for ‘the Yatha-ah-vairy6 and Ashem-voht.’

® That is, the mystical meaning or influence supposed to attach to various parts of the ancient hymns, or to the manner in which they are chanted. The term G&tha or ‘hymn’ (Pahl. gés) is applied, in this chapter, not only to the five Gdthas properly so called, but also to the Yasna of seven chapters, and apparently to

CHAPTER XII, 32—XIII, 2. 353.

The term G&tha or ‘hymn’ (Pahl. gés) is applied, in this chapter, not only to the five Gdthas properly so called, but also to the Yasna of seven chapters, and apparently to

CHAPTER XII, 32—XIII, 2. 353.

vepresent’ the Fravarané (Yas. XI, end) of the preliminary ritual (pés nirang) and the rotation of these three Ha4s (‘chapters’), the Fravardné, Frastuyé, and Astuyé—fravarané deimg the beginning of the Fravarané? which extends as far as frasastayaéka %, frastuyé‘, the beginning of the Frastuyé (Yas. XII, 1-XIII, 26) wich extends up to the Astuyé, and Astuyé®, the beginning of the Astaoth. wanem ¢ (Yas. XIII, 27—-XIV, end) which extends as far as 4staothwanem&4 daénayau Md4zdayasndis—also represent the Visdi-ve-amesh4-spemta (Yas. XV), which zs the beginning of the Stétanyasné (‘the ritual of praisers’)’, and these three Has of the Baghém (Yas. XIX-X XI).

2. In the exposition (4ashtdak) and through the

other portions of the Yasna written in the Gatha dialect of the Avesta,

1 This appears to be the meaning, but the construction of this section is altogether very obscure, and the text is more or less ‘corrupt in all MSS, In the celebration of the Yasna or Yazisn the Officiating priest tastes the H6m juice during the recitation of Yas. XI (see Haug’s Essays, p. 404), and shortly afterwards he commences the preliminary prayers mentioned in the text.

? Both K2o and M6 have Freran in Pazand.

* Both Kzo and M6 omit the initial f.

“ M6 has Astuyé.

® M6 omits this word,

® This is the Avesta name of the H4 or chapter consisting of Yas. XIII, 27-XIV, 19; as Fraoreti is the name of the preceding Ha, consisting of Yas. XII, 1-XIII, 26.

7 Probably consisting of the three Has, Yas. XV-XVII; in which case,.the meaning seems to be that the three Ashem-vohfis, at the beginning of this preliminary ritual, are symbolical of each of the three triplets of chapters which follow them; first, of the Fravaréné, Fraoreti, and Astaothwanem chapters; secondly, of the three chapters of the St6tan-yasné ; and thirdly, of those of the Bagh4n Yast.

(s] Aa

354 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

evidence of revelation (dind) the wise of those of the primitive faith! Zave thus said, that a man of fifteen years*, and a son and brother of Mazdayasnians—when he confesses Azs failings (mAndak) to the high-priests (rad4n), and they shall bring him the whip and scourge’, and these five GAthas* are chanted and the good waters consecrated by him, and the whole of the renewed-birth ceremony (navidzadth)® is performed by him— decomes a mature youth and not a child, and a share of the prayers of initiation (napar) and of the fires is to be given over to him®; and when thus much. is not performed by him, a share is not to be given. 3. These five’ Gathas are made up from the body of a righteous man.

» See Chap. I, 3.

* Referring to one about to become a priest.

is not performed by him, a share is not to be given. 3. These five’ Gathas are made up from the body of a righteous man.

» See Chap. I, 3.

* Referring to one about to become a priest.

5 The Av. astra and sraosh6-farana of Vend. IV, 38-114, &c., which were formerly used for the temporal: punishment of sinners. Whether they are here brought to the neophyte as a token of his admission to the priesthood, or are administered to him as a punishment for his offences, is not quite clear.

‘ The five Gathas are the Ahunavaiti (Yas. XXVIJI-XXXIV), the Ustavaiti (Yas. XLII-XLV), the Spesta-mainyfi (Yas. XL VI- XLIX), the Voh@-khshathra (Yas. L), and the Vahistéisti (Yas. LII) ; these collections of hymns are thus named from the words with which each of them commences, excepting the first, which derives its. name from the Ahunayar (see Bund. I, 21) which is written in the same metre.

5 This is the Pahlavi form of the Parsi navazfidf, a term applied to the whole initiatory ceremonial of a nén4bar, or newly initiated priest; the term evidently implies that the ceremony is considered somewhat in the light of ‘ regeneration.’

® That is, he can take his part in the regular priestly duties, including the initiation of other neophytes.

7 Both K2o and M6 have four in ciphers, which can hardly be right; the sentence is clear enough, but the idea of its writer is rather obscure.

CHAPTER XIII, 3-5. 355

4. Ahyd-y4s4 (Yas. XXVIII), Khshmaibyé (Yas. XXIX), and Ad-ta-vakhshy4 (Yas. XXX) dave, severally, eleven stanzas (vasést), because eleven things move spiritually within the bodies of men, as life, consciousness, religion, soul, guardian spirit, thought, word, deed, seeing, smelling, and hearing ; and the bodies of men and other creatures are formed of water, fire, and wind},

5. Ashem-Ahurem-mazdim (Visp. XV) is fo ée vecited* three times before the coming of Hfshédar, Hashédar-méh, and Séshyans; and when they also recite the chapter (h4d) well, and by line (gas) and stanza, those afost/es are present®, and the

1 These first three chapters of the Ahunavaiti collection of hymns are here supposed to symbolize the three material elements, whose union distinguishes a man’s body from inorganic substances ; while the eleven stanzas, which each of these chapters contains, symbolize the eleven immaterial existences said to be contained in the same body.

* This is doubtful, as no verb is expressed, and the word bar, ‘time,’ is struck out in M6, so it is possible to read ‘the “ three foremost” of the Ashem-Ahurem-mazdam are the coming of Hfishédar,’ &c. The ‘three foremost’ (3 levindg) would be a possible Pahlavi translation of the Av. tisr6 paoiryé and tisra paoirya of Visp. XV, 4-6, instead of the actual ‘three first’ (3-i fratfim), as may be seen from Pahl. Visp. VIII, 17, 20; where both pés (= levind) and fratfim are used indifferently for Av. paoiryd. At any rate the idea embodied in the text is that these ‘three first’ have some reference to the three future apostles of the Parsi religion (see Bund. XXXII. 8, B. Yt. III, 13, 44, §2, 62). In fact, however, they seem to refer to the first three chapters of the Ahunavaiti Gatha, immediately after which this chapter (Visp. XV) is recited in the full Parsi ritual ; the phrase being rendered in the Pahlavi translation thus :—‘ I reverence the three first by not speaking out, that is, I do not say anything during them, and not wearing out, that is, I do not doze away during them.’

5 K2o has ‘arrive early.’

Aa2

356 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

country becomes more flourishing and more dominant in the world.

6. The twenty-two stanzas of Ta-ve-urvata (Yas. XX XI) are the twenty-two judgments (dadist4n) of which it speaks in the HAdékht WVask! thus :— ‘Anaomé mananghé daya vispai kva, kva par6?’ (‘where are ¢hey to be produced beyond every thought ? avd where before ?’) ‘Lodging in the judge, that while Ze as twenty-two judgments he may be more just ;’—so that when they pray the T4-ve-urvata chapter well, and recite 7¢ by line and stanza, the judges possess those twenty-two judgments more correctly, and judiciousness is more lodging 2 them.

7. The sixteen stanzas of the Hvaétumaithi chapter (Yas. XXXII)? are lodging in warriors, so that it becomes possible, during their good protection, to force the enemy away from those sixteen countries which the Vendidad * mentions in z¢s first fargard.

1 See B. Yt. III, 25. Both the Avesta text here quoted and the translation suggested must be received with caution, as the MSS. do not agree in the three central words; K2o has mananhé dya vispai kaua, and M6 has mananhé kya visdi kaia. The former reading has been adopted, with very slight correction, as it seems the more intelligible; but the meaning of the preceding word, anaomé, is far from certain. The writer seems to have been quoting from a Pahlavi version of the Nask which contained this Avesta quotation. .

? This Ha, which begins with the words akvy4k& Avaétus, is not called by its initial words, as the preceding chapters are, but has this special name (see the prayers at the end of it) derived from its second word, and which is corrupted in Pahlavi into Khvétmand.

5 Here written Gavid-séda-dad as in Sls. Part I, and not Vadikdad as in other parts of Sls. Part II (see § r9 and Chap. XII, 4, 6, 20, 23, 26). Vend. I contains an account of the sixteen

CHAPTER XIII, 6-9. 357

8. The fourteen stanzas of Yath4-4is (Yas. XXXIII) are for this reason, because seven archangels are more diligent in activity for the spirit, and seven archangels! for the world, so that they may attain ‘to heaven, the home (méh6n6) of Adharmazd, the home of the archangels, the home of those righteous ones, avi garé-nm4nem, maéthanem Ahurahé mazdau, maéthanem ameshanim speztanim, maéthanem anyaéshim ashaonim® 9g. The three repetitions (d4nar) of Ye-sevist6 (Yas. XX XIII, 11)3, avd the holding up of the holy-water (zéhar) at these repetitions, are for the four classes‘, and for this veason at AhurAi mazdai and ashemé&aé fradad® the holy-water is

‘best of regions and countries’ where the Iranian power and religion extended at an early date.

1 The seven archangels besides their spiritual duties have severally charge of the seven worldly existences, man, animals, fire, metal, earth, water, and plants (see § 14 and Chap. XV). But perhaps we should read ‘angels,’ as they are often mentioned as ‘the angels of the spiritual and worldly existences.’

* This quotation, of which the Pahlavi translation is first given, and then the Avesta text, is from Vend. XIX, 107.

3’ This stanza is recited thrice, and about the same time the Officiating priest strains the Hém juice, and prepares to pour holywater into the mortar in which the Hém twigs were pounded (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 402, 406).

* Or ‘professions’ of the community, of which there were originally only three, the priest, warrior, and husbandman ; but at a later date the artizan was added. Both K2o0 and M6 have ‘ four classes,’ but this is inconsistent with the ‘ three repetitions.’ The Avesta generally knows only three classes, but four are mentioned in the Bagh4n Yast (Yas. XIX, 46).

* That is, probably, at the words Ahuré mazdausAa in the first line, and ashem&4 fradad in the second line of the stanza ; but this is doubtful, as the MSS. give the words corruptly, in a mixture of Av. and Pahl., as follows: pavan Ahurdi mazdai aharayih-i daddih.

358 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

to be held level with the heart of him who is the officiating priest (z6t), and at sraota4! z¢ is to be held level with the arm of him who is the officiating priest, so that while the warriors are in battle with foreigners (anatran) they may be fuller of breath (vay6-girtar), and the husbandmen stronger-armed in the tillage and cultivation of the world.

z¢ is to be held level with the arm of him who is the officiating priest, so that while the warriors are in battle with foreigners (anatran) they may be fuller of breath (vay6-girtar), and the husbandmen stronger-armed in the tillage and cultivation of the world.

10. The fifteen stanzas of Y4-skyaothana (Yas. XXXIV) are for this reason, because it is given? for the destruction of those fifteen fiends who are disclosed in the medical part (bésh4z) of the Hadékht Nask*. 11. The four repetitions (bar) of Mazda-admoi (Yas. XXXIV, 15)‘ are for the right coming on of the share of these five chieftainships (radth), the house-ruler, the village-ruler, the tribe-ruler, the province-ruler, and the supreme Zaratist °.

12, The two repetitions of Ahyd-yaés4 (Yas. XXVIII, 1)* are for this reason, that the sovereign (dahydpat) may not at once seize body, conscious-

1 The first word in the third line of the stanza; but this, again, has to be guessed from a Pahlavi version in the MSS. which may be read va va-srédaan.

* Or ‘produced.’

* In the last division of that Nask (see B. Yt. III, 25, note).

* This last stanza of the Ahunavaiti GAtha is recited four times.

5 See Yas. XIX, 50-52. The last of these rulers must have been the supreme pontiff or patriarch of the province, and in the province of Ragha (Rages or Rai, near Teheran) he was both temporal and spiritual ruler.

® This first stanza of the Ahunavaiti Gatha is recited twice, not only in its proper place (as the first stanza of each chapter is, in the GAthas), but also at the end of every chapter of the Ahunavaiti GAtha, while the officiating priest sprinkles the sacred twigs with the sacred milk or g4us givya, ‘living-cow produce’ (see Haug’s Essays, pp. 405, 406).

CHAPTER XIII, IO-TS5. 359

ness, and soul. 13. Those four Yath4-ahd-vairyés of the first Géta) are for this reason, that is, so that inferiors may become more tolerant of the commands of superiors, and good thoughts, good words, and good deeds be more domesticated (m 4hmantar) in the world, and the fiend more powerless (apadakhsh4htar).

14. In short (aé-mar)*, Ahy4-y4sé is as (pavan) Adharmazd and the righteous man, Khshmaiby4 as WVohdman and cattle, Ad-t4-vakhshyA as Ardavahist and fire, Ta-ve-urvata as Shatvatré‘ and metal, the fvaétumaithi as the Gatha of Spendarmad and the earth, Yatha-dis as Horvadad and water, and Y4skyaothana as -Amerédad and plants.

15. The progress which is in® the Ahunavaiti ‘Gétha the house-rulers should carry on; that which is in the Ustavaiti Gatha the village-rulers should ‘carry on; that which is in the Spetd-mainyd® ‘Gatha the tribe-rulers should carry on; that which is in the Vohd-khshathra Gatha the province-rulers should carry on; that which is in the Vahisté-isti Gatha the supreme Zaratdsts should carry on; and

1 After the two Ahy4-yas4s, at the end of each chapter of the Ahunavaiti Gatha, the Yatha-ahf-vairyé formula (see Bund. I, 21) is recited four times.

2 Or ‘to sum up.’

I, 21) is recited four times.

2 Or ‘to sum up.’

° It is not quite clear how pavan, ‘in, on, with, by, through, as, for,’ &c., should be translated in each clause of this section; but the intention is evidently to compare the seven chapters of the Ahunavaiti Gatha with the seven archangels and the seven earthly creations which they severally protect (see Chap. XV).

* Here written Shatrivar.

5 Meaning probably ‘the prosperity which is occasténed by ;’ but the exact signification of the word frik-sham or frehkash&m (or however it may be read) is uncertain.

* Spendémat or Spendamat in Pahlavi.

360 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

that which is in the Yasna, which is the place of righteous blessing’, these four classes themselves should carry on.

16, Of the Yasna of seven chapters (Yas. XX XV— XLI, 17) the beginning section (kardak6) das nine stanzas; and its beginning? is Humatanim (Yas. XXXV, 4), and its end is Humataném (Yas. XLI,

17 supl.}

17. The six stanzas of Ahy4-thw4-4thré (Yas. XXXVI) are owing to the six hot ordeals (var) which, in the Hdsparam /Vas&®, are effected by £athray4im 4Athraidim ‘+.

18. The five stanzas of Ith4-Ad-yazamaidé (Yas. XXXVII) are thanksgiving and praise for the production of the good creations by Adharmazd.

19. The five stanzas of Ima&m-dad-zim (Yas. XXXVIIT) are owing to those five comforts and five discomforts of the earth, which, it is declared in the third fargard in the Vendidad 5, are accomplished

1 That is, the Yasna of seven chapters (Yas. XXXV-XLI), which is called simply ‘the Yasna’ in this chapter. This last clause, which is omitted in M6, connects these later hymns with the four classes of the community (see § g), just as the five older hymns are connected with the five chiefs of the community (see § 11) in the former clauses. This section may be a translation from the Avesta, as the verbs precede their nominatives.

3 That is, the beginning of the Yasna of seven chapters.

* See Chap. X, 21; but the Sak4dfim Nask (see Chap. X, 25) is probably meant, as it contained a section on ordeals by heat and cold.

‘ These Avesta words are evidently corrupt, but perhaps ‘a quadtuple fire’ is meant. Kazo has dathrayaim 4thraiim.

5 Here written Vandtkdad (see § 7). The passage here cited is not a quotation, but only a brief summary of Vend. III, 1-37; and appears to have been derived direct from the Avesta, without the assistance of the Pahlavi version, as several words differ from that translation.

CHAPTER XIII, 16-22. 361

The passage here cited is not a quotation, but only a brief summary of Vend. III, 1-37; and appears to have been derived direct from the Avesta, without the assistance of the Pahlavi version, as several words differ from that translation.

CHAPTER XIII, 16-22. 361

thus :—‘ The first comfort of the earth is from the land on which a righteous man walks forth; the second is when they shall make the dwelling of the good and fires upon it; the third is when they sow corn upon it, and shall take heed of dead matter ; the fourth is when all beasts of éurden are born upon it; the fifth is when every beast of durden is on it?; and its first discomfort is from the Arezdir ridge? and the gate of hell; the second is when they dig? it up for a dead Jody; the third is when one constructs a depository for the dead (khazan)* upon it; the fourth is from the holes of its noxious creatures ; the fifth is when they shall forsake a man in affliction (vardakth) upon it, who is righteous.’

20. The five stanzas of Ith4 (Yas. XX X}X) are just as those which go before.

21. The four stanzas of Aht-ad-paiti (Yas. XL) are about the benefit (arg-hémandth) which is on account of water, earth, plants, and animals.

22. The six stanzas of Stité-garé (Yas. XLI, 1-17), the two repetitions of Humatanim (Yas. XX XV, 4-6), and the three repetitions of Hukhshathrétem4i (Yas. XX XV, 13-15) are on account of the existence of the sons of Zaratist 5.

* The verb is probably omitted by mistake, and we ought to read ‘ voids urine upon it,’ in accordance with Vend. III, 20.

2 See Bund. XII, 8.

® Reading kaléndend (Pers. kalandand), as Vend. III, 27 refers to burial of the dead, and the same idea might be obtained, more fancifully, by reading kilfnénd, ‘ they turn to clay’ (compare Pers. gil, ‘clay’); but the most obvious reading is karfnénd, ‘they cut,’ and as the sentence stands it would imply that ‘they cut up its dead.’

* See Chap. II, 6.

5 The three apostles expected in the future (see § 5 and Bund. XXXII, 8). It is doubtful whether these three passages in the

362 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

23. The two repetitions of Ashahy4-dad-sairi 1 (Yas. XXXV, 22, 23) are for the laudation of righteousness and the destruction of the fiend. 24. The two repetitions of Yénhé-hatém? are for the laudation of Adharmazd and the archangels, and the destruction of the evil spirit and the miscreations (vishOdakan). 25. The two repetitions of * Thwéistaotaraséa (Yas. XLI, 12-14) are for the laudation of ceremonial worship (yazisnd) and the sacred feast (m4zd).

26. The two repetitions of Atareméa (Visp. XIX, 1-8) ‘ are for the laudation of the Frébak fire and the fire Vazist ©.

27. Of the sixteen stanzas of the Ustavaiti chapter (Yas. XLII) ® it is related just as about the vaétumaithi chapter ?.

26. The two repetitions of Atareméa (Visp. XIX, 1-8) ‘ are for the laudation of the Frébak fire and the fire Vazist ©.

27. Of the sixteen stanzas of the Ustavaiti chapter (Yas. XLII) ® it is related just as about the vaétumaithi chapter ?.

Yasna are here intended all to refer to the same subject, but no ‘other subject is mentioned for the two former. Having completed the enumeration of the sections of the Yasna of seven chapters, the writer is now proceeding to notice those passages which are ‘recited more than once in the performance of the ritual.

1 M6 has gairf, ‘in a song,’ with the obsolete g, which is very like s, and is also used in the word garé in § 22; this is a variant well worth consideration by translators of the Avesta. Kzo has only Ashahyé.

* This formula (see B. Yt. II, 64) is recited after every chapter of the Gathas, but does not appear to be anywhere recited twice ; so the words 2 dAnar, ‘two repetitions,’ may perhaps be inserted here in the wrong place, as they are wanting in § 25.

* These words are omitted in the Pahlavi text, evidently through mistake.

* Visp. XIX, XX follow Yas. XLI in the full Parsi ritual, and the first of them is recited twice.

5 The Frébak is the oldest sacred fire on earth, and the VAzist is the lightning (see Bund. XVII, 1, 5, SZS. XI, 5, 8-10).

° The first chapter of the Ustavaiti Gatha (see § 2, note 4), so called from its first word usta.

7 See § 7.

CHAPTER XIII, 23-29. 363

28. The twenty stanzas of Tad-thw4-peresa (Yas. XLIII) are the twenty judgments (dadist4n) between the beneficent spirit and the evil spirit; and for this ~eason they should every time utter Tadthw4-peres4 again’, because they should utter the original judgment again, and the twentieth time the evil spirit becomes confounded.

29. The eleven stanzas of Aa-fravakhshy4 (Yas. XLIV) are made up from the six chieftainships * and the five accomplishments (farhang) owing to religion ; one is thus, not to do unto others all that which is not well for one’s self ; the second is to understand fully what is well-done and not well-done; the third is to turn from the vile and their conversation (andarag-giftand); the fourth is to confess one’s failings to the high-priests, and let them bring the whip; the fifth is not to neglect the season-festivals at their proper hour (dén hAsar), zov the other things which go to the bridge‘; and the six chieftainships are not his property who has not these

1 That is, the first line (tad thw4 peres& eres mdi vaoka Ahur4! ‘that 1 shall ask thee, tell :# me right, O Ahural’) is repeated at the beginning ‘of :each:of the first nineteen stanzas, and the first stanza being recited twice (as in all chapters of the Gathas) these words are recited twenty times before the last stanza is reached. The phrases ‘and for this reason’ and ‘because they should utter the original judgment again’ are omitted in M6.

The phrases ‘and for this reason’ and ‘because they should utter the original judgment again’ are omitted in M6.

* These cannot be the same ‘chieftainships’ (radih) as those mentioned in § 11, of which there are only five; but perhaps they are the spiritual chieftainships, or primacies, of the six other regions of the earth (see Bund. XXIX, 1).

* Assuming that afsan stands for ats4n.

‘ The Xinvad bridge, or route of the soul to the other world (see Chap. XII, 31). Part of these fourth and fifth clauses is omitted in K20 by mistake.

364 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

five accomplishments, and he is not fit even for teaching.

30. The nineteen stanzas of Kim-nem6i-zim (Yas. XLV) are for this reason, that every one may so persevere in his own duty (khvésakAnth)?, that while those are our nineteen propitiations (ats6frid)?, which it says in the Sakédam asé® should be my own, the strength and power of the angels shall become more considerable, and the destroyer more perishable.

31. The Ustavaiti Gatha is a Gatha (g4s) of four chapters *, and each stanza of five lines (g4s), except Haééad-aspa-vakhshyé (Yas. XLV, 15)5 32. The two repetitions of Ustéa-ahmai (Yas. XLII, 1)® are, one as a retention and embrace of Atharmazd, and one as a destruction of the fiends ; azd Usta-Ahuremmazdam (Visp. X XI, 1-5)? zw like manner.

33. Spewté-mainy (Yas. XLVI) Aas six stanzas, Yézi-ad4is (Yas. XLVII) twelve stanzas, Ad-mayava (Yas. XLVIII) twelve stanzas, axd Kad-méiurva (Yas. XLIX) eleven stanzas. 34. The Spestamainy GAatha is a G&tha of four chapters *, and

1 Or, it may be, ‘through his own intellect (khvésak hfsh),’ or merely another mode of writing khvésk4rth, ‘ industry.’

® Considering each of the stanzas as an offering to, or propitiation of, (Av. usefriti) the angels.

* See Chap. X, 25.

‘ Those detailed in §§ 27-30.

5 Which stanza has only four lines. Pahl. g4s means both the whole hymn and also each line of the hymn.

* The first stanza of the Ustavaiti GAtha, which is recited twice, both in its proper place and at the end of each chapter of that GAtha (see § 12, note).

7 Visp. XXI follows Yas. XLV in the full Parsi ritual, and is recited twice.

* Those detailed in § 33.

CHAPTER XIII, 30-40. 365

each stanza of four lines; it is made up from the five chieftainships and four classes'. 35. The two repetitions of Spewté-mainyd (Yas. XLVI, 1)? are, one for the laudation of the beneficent spirit (spendamat), and one for that of the earth *.

36. One Speztem-Ahurem-mazdim (Visp. X XII, 1-11) * is the laudation of the creatures of the beneficent spirit, and one is the destruction of the creatures of the evil spirit.

37. The twenty-two stanzas of the Vohd-khshathra Gatha (Yas. L) are those twenty-two judgments which are lodging within judges, as written above °. 38. The two repetitions of Vohd-khshathrem (Yas. L, 1)* are, one the laudation of living (zindakth), | and one of the supreme Zaratdst.

39. One Vohd-khshathrem yazamaidé (Visp. XXIII, 1-9)? is for the laudation of Shatvairé §, and one of metal. 40. The two repetitions of Avi-

1 See §§ 9, 11.

* The first stanza of the Spe#t&-mainyf Gatha, which is recited twice, both in its proper place and at the end of each chapter of that Gatha (see § 12, note).

5 It seems probable that the Pahlavi writer has here confounded Spendamat, ‘the beneficent spirit,’ with the archangel Spendarmad who has special charge of the earth; their names being even more alike in Pahlavi than in English, though corrupted from the distinct Avesta forms spemta mainyu and spenta Armaiti, respectively.

* Visp. XXII follows Yas. XLIX in the full Parsi ritual, and is recited twice.

5 See § 6.

* The first stanza of the Voh(i-khshathra GAtha, which is recited twice, both at the beginning and end of the chapter (see § 12, note).

7 Visp. XXIII, 1-9 follows Yas. L in the full Parsi ritual, and is recited twice.

® The archangel who has special charge of metal (see § 14, Chap. XV, 5, 14-19, and Bund. I, 26, XXX, 19); the name is here written Shatrivar.

366 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

apim (Visp. XXIV, 1-12)! are, one for the laudation of waters, and one of plants.

41. The nine stanzas of the Vahist6isti (Yas. LIT) are on account of those nine things which are? .. . the supreme Zaratdstship lodging in the supreme Zaratists, the source of fountains, the bridge over waters, and even the navigable river, the righteous man, and the righteous woman. 42. And 7¢ 7s a GAtha of one chapter, azd each stanza of four lines, except Ith4-t-haithy4-nar6 (Yas. LII, 6)°, for there is always one lord and sovereign in the world. 43. And those four lines.are for this ~eason, because z¢ is declared: Aathrus hamayau khshap6é dahmay4d paré 4fritéid*‘, ‘four times every night is the “blessing of the holy” (Yas. LIX),’ and three ¢zmes Srésh°, twice Bdsh4sp*, and once Aéshm? will come

1 After the two recitations of Visp. XXIII, 1-9 there follow Vend. XV, XVI, and Visp. XXIII, 10, and then Visp. XXIV, 1-12 is recited twice, in the full Parsi ritual, followed by Visp. XXV.

* Some words are evidently lost; here ; M6 has m followed by a blank space, and K2o has madam, ‘on.’ It is not quite certain whether the things mentioned are to be reckoned as four, five, or six; but assuming they are five, it is possible that the four _ things missing in the text are the four remaining chieftainships (see § 11), the rulerships of the house, village, tribe, and province lodged in the rulers of the same, respectively.

8 Which stanza has five lines, and is, therefore, here considered symbolical of the ruling monarch, or pontiff.

‘ This Avesta passage does not appear to be extant elsewhere, and its Pahlavi translation, given in the text, is not quite correct ; it would be better thus: ‘through the “blessing of the holy” four times every night;’ dahma 4friti (Pahl. dahm4n 4frfné, ‘blessing of the holy’) is the technical name of Yas. LIX.

5 See Bund. XIX, 33, XXX, 29. This angel, invoked by the ‘blessing’ (Yas. LIX, 8), comes to defend mankind against the wiles of Bash4sp and Aéshm.

* The demoness of sloth (see Bund. XXVIII, 26).

7 The demon of wrath (see Bund. XXVIII, 15-17, 20).

CHAPTER XIII, 41-49. 367

to the material world. 44. And the five mes of that one stanza (Yas. LII, 6) are for this reason, because the assistants of the supreme Zaratist are five, the house -ruler, the village-ruler, the tribe-ruler, the province-ruler, and she even who is his own wife (narik)'. 45. The two repetitions of Vahista-istis (Yas. LII, 1)? are, one for the laudation of sovereigns, and one for the laudation of peace (padm4n).

46. The two repetitions of Vahistem-Ahuremmazdaim (Visp. XXVI)* are, one for the laudation of Adharmazd and the archangels, and one for the destruction of the fiends. 47. The four repetitions of the Airyamana (Yas. LIII)‘ are for the existence of more submission (atrmAnth) in the house, village, tribe, and province. 48. The four repetitions of Avaa-mizdem (Visp. X XVII) are for the healing of those who dwell in the house, village, tribe, and province.

49. The section (kardak6) whose beginning is Tad-sdidhis (Yas. LVII, 1-9) ® is, for the completion

1 Though bound to be strictly obedient to her husband or guardian, a Mazdayasnian woman occupied a more honourable position in’ the community than was sanctioned by any other oriental religion.

2 The first stanza of the Vahistéisti GAtha, which is recited twice, both at the beginning and end of the chapter (see § 12, note). .

5 Visp. XXVI follows Yas. LII in the full Parsi ritual, and is recited twice, followed by Vend. XIX, XX.

* So called from its first words 4 airyem4; it is recited four times after Vend. XX, and shortly afterwards Visp. XXVII is also recited four times, as mentioned in § 48.

5 M6 has ‘ of the soul,’ which is, no doubt, a blunder due to the illegibility of the MS. from which it was copied.

* This is the FshQsh6-mathra (‘a spell or prayer for prosperity ’)

368 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

of the GAathas, taught as fertacning to the Gathas (gas4ntk 24st).

5 M6 has ‘ of the soul,’ which is, no doubt, a blunder due to the illegibility of the MS. from which it was copied.

* This is the FshQsh6-mathra (‘a spell or prayer for prosperity ’)

368 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

of the GAathas, taught as fertacning to the Gathas (gas4ntk 24st).

50. The beginning of the Gathas is Ahy4-y4s4 (Yas. XXVIII, 1), and their end is drigavé vahyé (Yas. LII, 9, end); and ¢heve are 278 stanzas, 1016 lines, 5567 words (v4éak), 9999 mArtk, and 16,554 khdrdak}. 51. For the lines and stanzas of the Gathas were collected by us, and were :—one hundred stanzas of the Ahunavaiti Gatha (Yas. XXVIII- XX XIV), of which each stanza is three lines; forty stanzas of the Yasna of seven chapters (Yas. XX XV-

of Visp. I, 28, II, 30, Yas. LVI, ix, 6, LVIII, 13. Whether the remainder of Yas. LVII is to be considered as pertaining to the GAthas is uncertain ; it is recited in seven sections by the assistant priest, each section from a different position ; these seven positions being the stations of the seven assistant priests who are supposed to be present spiritually, and to be arranged three on each side, and one at the south end, of the ceremonial area, while the chief officiating priest occupies the north end (see Haug’s Essays, P- 332).

1 The numbers of the stanzas and lines are correct, as may be seen from the details given in § 51. Regarding the words there is the uncertainty as to what constitutes a compound word, but, taking each compound in Westergaard’s edition of the texts as a single word, the total number of words in the ror6 lines is about 6147; and this could be reduced to 5567 only by omitting the Yasna of seven chapters, and somewhat relaxing the rule as to compound words. The meaning of the last two terms, m4rfk and khfirdak, is doubtful, but they are certainly not syllables and letters, as the number of syllables exceeds 13,000. In other places (see Bund. I, 21) m4rfk usually means ‘a word,’ but that meaning is expressed by the term v4éak here. If the number 9999 be correct, marfk must signify some particular class of syllable which would include about three-fourths of the whole number of syllables. It may be noted, however, that Zad-sparam, in the particulars he gives about the Gathas (see SZS. XI, ro, note 6), states the number of m4rfk at 6666. The khfrdak or ‘small’ things are probably the consonants.

CHAPTER XIII, 50—XIV, I. 369

XLI, 17), of which each stanza is three lines; sixtysix stanzas of the Ustavaiti Gatha (Yas. XLII- XLV), of which each stanza is five lines, except Haééad-aspa (Yas. XLV, 15), for that one is four lines; forty-one stanzas of the Spet4-mainyd Gatha (Yas. XLVI-XLIX), of which each stanza is four lines; twenty-two stanzas of the Vohd-khshathra (Yas. L), of which each stanza is three! lines; and nine stanzas of the Vahistéisti (Yas. LII), of which each stanza is four lines, except Itha-t (Yas. LII, 6), for that one is a stanza of five;—the amount of the foregoing ? is 278 stanzas *. -

L), of which each stanza is three! lines; and nine stanzas of the Vahistéisti (Yas. LII), of which each stanza is four lines, except Itha-t (Yas. LII, 6), for that one is a stanza of five;—the amount of the foregoing ? is 278 stanzas *. -

CuapTer XIV 4,

o. May it be in the name of God (yazd4n) and the good creation!

1. When they consecrate*a sacred cake (dr6n6), and it becomes demon worship*, what and how many ¢Azmgs are not proper?

1 All MSS. have ‘four,’ and then add the exception about Itha-f to the account of this G4tha, instead of mentioning it in the details of the Vahistéisti; which blunder is here corrected.

® Reading kadmon yehevinisné, but the latter word, with part of the ciphers which follow, is torn away in K2o0, and in M6 it is written so as to resemble the Avesta letters gnn gnn, which are unintelligible, though something like Pahl. yehevinisnd; there can, however, be little doubt as to the general meaning of the phrase.

5 The number of lines is easily computed from the same details, as follows :— 300 + 120 + 329 + 164 + 66 + 37 =1016 lines, as stated in § 50, and as they still exist in the Gatha texts.

* This chapter is also found in Lr15, fols. 1-4, and a P&zand version of §§ 1-3 exists in L22, fols.126, 127, and Ly, fols. 78, 79.

5 That is, it becomes desecrated through some fault in the cere-

[5] Bb

370 sHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

2. The decision is this: —Whoever knowingly consecrates a sacred cake with unpurified sacred twigs (baresém-i ap4diy4z)’, or with a twigbundle the number of whose twigs (t4k) is éoo many or 4oo few, or of another plant not proper for sacred twigs; or holds the end of the twig-bundle to the north? azd utters the Avesta attentively; or whoever consecrates with efficacy unawares, z/ is not to be considered as uttered by him. 3. Nor by him who advertently or inadvertently takes a taste (44shntk), not from the sacred cake with the butter (gads-d4é)*, du¢ from the frasast; or takes the prayer (vag) zxwardly regarding that cake (dr6éné) before the officiating priest (z6t) takes a taste from the same cake; or shall utter the length of a stanza tm excess, and does not again make a beginning of the consecration of the sacred cake; or takes up the

mony, for any ceremony, which is too imperfect for acceptance by the celestial beings, is supposed to be appropriated by the demons, as performed for their benefit (see Chap. IX, 5). Demon worship is a term also applied to many other evil actions which are supposed to give the demons special power over the perpetrator of them.

? See Chap. III, 32, note.

* The supposed direction of the demons (see Chaps. X, 7, XII, 18). When praying, a Parsi must face either the sun, or a fire or lamp ; and when the direction of the sun is doubtful, or when it is nearly overhead, he must face to the south, even when he is in so low a latitude that the sun may be somewhat to the north of him.

X, 7, XII, 18). When praying, a Parsi must face either the sun, or a fire or lamp ; and when the direction of the sun is doubtful, or when it is nearly overhead, he must face to the south, even when he is in so low a latitude that the sun may be somewhat to the north of him.

* Which usually takes the place of the meat-offering mentioned in Chap. XI, 4-6, and is placed upon one of the cakes on the left side of the table during consecration, while the frasasts are the cakes on the right-hand side of the table (see Chap. III, 32, note).

* That is, prepares for eating by muttering the portion of the grace which is to be recited in a low murmur before eating (see Chap. III, 6, note). This clause is omitted in K2o.

CHAPTER XIV, 2-6. 371

dedication formula (shnimand5)* 400 soon or foo late; or does not utter the Avesta for the fire when he sees the fire.

4. This is how it is when the period of ¢he day (g4s)? is retained, and how it should be when one may relinquish 2z¢; that is, when even one of the stars created by Afharmazd is apparent, z¢ is retained, azd when not z is relinquished. 5. It is Vand-Aftharmazd? who said that when, besides Tistar, Vanand, or Satavés‘, one of the zodiacal stars (akhtartk) is apparent, z¢ is retained, and when not ¢¢ is relinquished. 6. Zhere have been some who said that when, besides one of those three, three zodiacal s¢ars are apparent, ¢¢ is retained, and when not 2¢ is relinquished$,

1 See Chaps. III, 35, VII, 8.

* See Bund. XXV, 9. The text appears to refer to the transition from the Ushahina to the HAvani G&h at daybreak ; and as certain portions of the prayers are varied according to the period of the day, it is very necessary to know precisely when each period commences, so as to avoid vitiating the whole ceremonial by the use of a wrong prayer.

* See Chap. I, 4, note.

* Three of the leading stars, probably Sirius, Fomalhaut, and Antares (see Bund. II, 7).

5 This chapter is followed (in both the old MSS. M6 and K20) by the Pahlavi text of the Patft-i Khfid, or renunciation of one’s own sin, a translation of which will be found in Bleeck’s English version of the Avesta, London, 1864, III, pp. 159-162, derived from Spiegel’s German translation of the Pazand text. This translation is fairly correct on the whole, although some passages might be improved, thus (p. 162), instead of ‘all sins which may attack the character of man [or] have attacked my character, if I, on account of much death, have not recognised the death,’ &c., we should read ‘of all sins which may become the lot of men, and have become my lot, on account of whose excessive number I do not know the number,’ &c.

Bb2

372 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

Part Il].— Appendix’.

CHAPTER XV 2,

Bb2

372 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

Part Il].— Appendix’.

CHAPTER XV 2,

1. /¢ is revealed by a passage of the Avesta that Zaratist, seated before Adharmazd, always wanted information (v4é) from him; and he spoke to Afharmazd thus: ‘Thy head, hands, feet, hair, face, and tongue are in my eyes just like those even which are my own, and you have the clothing men have; give me a hand, so that I may grasp thy hand.’

2. Adharmazd said thus: ‘I am an intangible spirit; z¢ is not possible to grasp my hand.’

3. Zarathst spoke thus: ‘ Thou art intangible, and Vohdman, Ardavahist, Shatvatr6%, Spendarmad, Horvadad, and Amerédad are intangible, and when I depart from thy presence, and do not see thee zor even them—since of the person whom‘ I see and worship ¢here is something—skou/d thou and the seven archangels be worshipped by me, or not 5?’

1 This Appendix consists of a number of fragments found in the old MS. M6, and of somewhat the same character as the Sh4yast la-shd4yast, but they have no claim to be considered as a portion of that work. Excepting Chaps. XVIII, XIX, XXI, they are not found in the other old MS. K2o, and beyond the fact that they must be more than five centuries old their age is quite uncertain, though some of them are probably older than others.

? This chapter follows the Patft-i Khfid in M6, and is also found in Lrg, fols. 16-28; for a P4zand version of it, see L2a, fols. 113-122, and Ly, fols. 70-76.

* Written Shatrétvar throughout this chapter; these six (see Bund. I, 26) with Adharmazd himself, are the seven archangels.

* Reading mfin, ‘whom,’ instead of amat, ‘when’ (see Bund. I, 7, note).

® Zaratst is Coubtful whether he ought to worship beings of

CHAPTER XV, I-7. 373

4. Adharmazd said thus: ‘ They should be; I tell thee, O Zaratist the Spttam4n! that each individual of us has produced his own one creation (d4yak) for the world, by means of which they may set going in its body, in the world, that activity which they would exercise in the spiritual existence. 5. /# the world that which is mine, who am Afharmazd, is the righteous man, of Vohfiman are the cattle, of Ardavahist is the fire, of Shatvatré is the metal, of Spendarmad are the earth and virtuous woman, of Horvadad is the water, azd of Amerédad is the vegetation. 6. Whoever has learned’ the care of all these seven, acts and pleases well, his soul never comes into the possession of Aharman and the demons; when he 4as exercised his care of them, he has exercised his care of the seven archangels, and ought to teach all mankind in the world.

7. ‘Whoever wishes to propitiate Adharmazd in the world, wishes to promote the things of Adharmazd; axd whoever he be, with whom Atharmazd ever is in every place (g4s)?, it is necessary ¢hat he should ® propitiate the righteous man, in whatever

whose existence he had had no tangible evidence, when he no longer saw them ; fearing, perhaps, that they might have been mere dreams or optical illusions. But he is told that each of these spiritual beings is the protector of one class of worldly existences, and that the proper treatment of these existences is a man’s best means of reverencing the spiritual beings interested in their welfare.

1 Or ‘taught,’ for the verb has both meanings.

2 Or ‘at all times;’ it is always doubtful whether g4s means ‘time’ or ‘ place.’

® Throughout this chapter a conditional meaning is given to the verbs by prefixing han4, a@, or 1 (all representing Paz. aé or ¢) to the present tense, instead of affixing it.

374 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

has happened amd whatever occurs to him, and should act for his happiness, and afford him protection from the vile. 8. Since the righteous man is a counterpart of Adharmazd the lord, amd when the righteous man acts it is caused by him who is Atharmazd, whoever propitiates the righteous man, his fame and welfare exist a long time in the world, and the splendour of Adharmazd and pleasure and joy become his own 2” heaven (vahist).

9. ‘Whoever wishes to propitiate Vohiman in the world, azd wishes to act for 4zs happiness, is 4e who wishes to promote the things of VohQman; and it is necessary for him, so that VohQman may be ever with him, ¢#at he should propitiate, at every place (g4s) and time, the well-yielding (hOdh4k) cattle, in whatever has happened avd whatever occurs, and should act for ¢hezy happiness; and in the terrible days and the hurried times (g4s) which defa// them, he should afford them protection from the oppressive and idle. 10. He should not give ¢hem as a bribe to a man who is a wicked tyrant, du¢ should keep ¢hem in a pleasant and warm locality and place (g4s); and in summer he should provide them a store of straw and corn, so that it be not necessary to keep ¢kem on the pastures (£arak) in winter; and he should not deliver them « for this purpose, that is, “So that I may give them up to the vile,” because it is necessary to give to the good; and he should not drive them apart from ther young, and should not put the young apart from their milk. 11. Since they are counterparts of him (Vohiman) himself in the world, the well-yielding cattle, whoever propitiates those which are wellyielding cattle his fame subsists in the world, and

CHAPTER Xv, 8-15. 375

the splendour of Atharmazd becomes his own 7 the best existence},

11. Since they are counterparts of him (Vohiman) himself in the world, the well-yielding cattle, whoever propitiates those which are wellyielding cattle his fame subsists in the world, and

CHAPTER Xv, 8-15. 375

the splendour of Atharmazd becomes his own 7 the best existence},

12. ‘Whoever wishes to propitiate Ardavahist in the world is 4e who wishes to promote his things; and it is necessary for him, so that Ardavahist may be with 42m at every place (g4s) and time, ¢hat he should propitiate the fire of Adharmazd, in whatever has happened and whatever occurs, azd should act for zts happiness; he should not put upon z¢ wood, incense, and holy-water? which are stolen and extorted, and he should not cook at it a ration (b4har) which is violently extorted from men. 13. For it is a counterpart of him (Ardavahist) himself in the world, the fire of Atharmazd; and whoever propitiates those which are fires of Aftharmazd his fame subsists in the world, and the splendour of Atharmazd becomes his own 2” heaven.

14. ‘Whoever wishes to propitiate Shatvatré in the world, and wishes to act for 4zs happiness, is e who wishes to promote the things of Shatvairé; and whoever he be, it is necessary, so that Shatvatré may be with him at every place and time, ¢hat he should propitiate melted metal* at every place and time. 15. And the propitiation of melted metal is this, that he shall practise habits (Atyin6) of the

1 See Chap. VI, 3.

® Holy-water is not put upon the fire, for that would be sinful, but it is presented to the fire, and the outside of the fire-place is sprinkled or washed with it (see Haug’s Essays, p. 403). The ‘fire of Afharmazd’ means any fire, whether sacred or used for household purposes.

® The word may be read either afyén or asfn (Av. ayangh, Pers. 4yan, 4han, or 4hin), which is usually translated ‘iron,’ but also means ‘metal’ generally, as it certainly does here, and very probably likewise in B. Yt. I, 1, 5, II, 14, 22.

376 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

heart so unsullied and pure that, when they shall drop melted metal upon z¢, it does not burn. 16. And Atarép4d son of Maraspend? even acted in this priestly fashion (dastébarth), so that the melted metal, when they drop zé upon the region (kh4n6) of zs pure heart, becomes as pleasant to him as though? they were milking milk upon it. 17. When they drop z¢ upon the. region of the heart of the wicked and sinners, it burns, and they die. 18. And one should not commit sin with metal, and with its burning ; and should not give gold and silver to the vile. 19. For it is a counterpart of Shatvairé himself in the world for him, avd since he propitiates those which are melted metals, his fame subsists in the world, and the splendour of Adharmazd becomes his own 27 heaven.

19. For it is a counterpart of Shatvairé himself in the world for him, avd since he propitiates those which are melted metals, his fame subsists in the world, and the splendour of Adharmazd becomes his own 27 heaven.

20. ‘Whoever wishes to propitiate Spendarmad in the world, wishes to promote the things of Spendarmad; and whoever he be, it is necessary, so that Spendarmad may be with him, ¢hat he should propitiate, at every place and time, the earth and virtuous woman, in whatever has happened and in whatever occurs, avd should act for ¢heey happiness. 21. For when he does not spread out (bara 14 véshéqa) this earth, and it does not separate one piece from another, his body also w2é/ not be always

} The primate and prime minister of ShApfir II (a.p. 309-379), who is said to have undergone the ordeal of having melted metal poured upon his chest, in order to prove the truth of the Mazdayasnian religion. ‘The metal used is generally called rf, ‘ brass,’ but here it is afyén, ‘iron,’ though a more fusible metal than either was, no doubt, used.

? Reading amat, ‘though,’ instead of mfin, ‘which’ (see Bund. I, 7, note).

CHAPTER XV, 16-25. 377

living upon z¢ a¢ every place and time’. 22. On account of the lodgment of Spendarmad in the earth, when a robber, violent and worthy of death, and wives who are disrespectful to they husbands walk about in sinfulness in the world, and their husbands are active and virtuous, it becomes much distressed (zandtk). 23. This, too, is declared, that, whenever this earth becomes distressed (zantk), it is most so at the time when sinners worthy of death are most ; for z¢ is declared, when sinners worthy of death walk upon z¢, z@s pain and uneasiness become as distressing (diskhva4r) to it as the dead son on her bosom fo a mother; and the lodgment of Spendarmad in the earth is little zz that place whereon sinners worthy of death walk. 24. And her? happ+ness arises from that place when they shall perform tillage and cultivation on it, and a virtuous son is born upon it, and they rear cattle upon it; and it is so one’s fame subsists in the world, and the splendour of Atharmazd becomes one’s own 7” heaven.

25. ‘Whoever wishes to propitiate Horvadad and Amerédad in the world, whereas that is necessary which promotes their things, whoever he be it is necessary ¢hat he should propitiate, at every place and time, the water and vegetation of Horvadad and Amerdédad, in whatever has happened and in

1 Meaning that the earth must be tilled in order to support its inhabitants, but there is some doubt as to the exact wording of the translation.

2 Spendarmad is a female archangel; perhaps, however, the earth is meant here, as it is said to be most pleased by the existence of fire-temples, dwellings of righteous people, cultivation, stables, and pastures (see Vend. III, 1-20).

378 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

whatever occurs, azd should seize upon those who consume avd steal water and vegetation’. 26. And he should not act oppressively, he should not walk the world in sinfulness, and should not bring bodily refuse (hikhar), dead matter (nas4i)*, ov any other pollution to water; he should not destroy vegetation unlawfully, and should not give fruit to the idle and vile. 27. For when he commits sin against water and vegetation, even when it is committed against — merely a single twig of it, and he has not atoned for it, when® he departs from the world the spirits of all the plants in the world stand up high in front of that man, and do not let him go to heaven. 28. And when he has committed sin against water, even when it is committed against a single drop of it, and he has not atoned for z¢, that also stands up as high as the plants stood, and does not let him go to heaven. 29. Since they are counterparts of Horvadad and Amerdédad themselves, the water and vegetation, whoever propitiates those which be water and vegetation, his fame subsists in the world, and a share of the splendour of Adharmazd becomes his zn heaven.’

30. Adharmazd said this also to Zaratist, namely:

' Reading mfin, ‘ who,’ instead of amat, ‘ when,’ and daigend, ‘they steal,’ instead of dfigd (perhaps for dfigak, ‘thievish’); and supposing the verb to be vakhdfinéd, ‘takes, seizes,’ and not vAadfinéd, ‘ makes, acts.’ If the reverse be assumed, the translation would be thus: ‘should act for their happiness. When they consume water and vegetation he should not act thievishly and oppressively.’

2 For the meaning of hfkhar and nas4f, see note on Chap. II, 30.

® Reading amat, ‘when,’ instead of mfin, ‘who’ (see Bund. I, 7, note).

CHAPTER XV, 26-XVI, 2. 379

‘My will and pleasure is ¢4a¢ the observance and propitiation of these seven archangels shall be as / have told thee; and do thou, too, speak thus unto men, so that they may commit no sin and may not become wicked, and the splendour of Aftharmazd may become their own zz heaven.’

31. Completed in peace, pleasure, and joy’.

CuapTer XVI.

o. In the name of God (yazd4n) I write a paragraph (bab4) where the sins which are as it were small are mentioned one dy one.

1. The least sin is a Farman; and a Farman is three coins of five annas’*, some say three coins. 2. An Agerept is, as regards whatever weapon (snés) men strike with in the world, whenever the weapon is taken in hand; and taken up by eazy one four finger-6readths from the ground z¢ zs the root® of an

The least sin is a Farman; and a Farman is three coins of five annas’*, some say three coins. 2. An Agerept is, as regards whatever weapon (snés) men strike with in the world, whenever the weapon is taken in hand; and taken up by eazy one four finger-6readths from the ground z¢ zs the root® of an

1 This is the most usual concluding phrase of short Pahlavi texts, and indicates that this account of the best mode of propitiating the archangels is to be considered as a separate text. It is followed in M6 by the paragraphs which constitute the next two chapters,

* Reading 3 nfim4f-i 5 Anak, but this is uncertain, and if correct must have been written in India, as the anna is an Indian coin worth nearly three halfpence. The coin of five annas was probably a dirham, as the dirham being about fifty grains of silver (see note on gfigan in Chap. I, 2), and the rfipf having formerly been less than 180 grains in Gugarat, the former would be nearly five-sixteenths of the latter, that is, five annas. It may, therefore, be assumed that the amount of the Farman is here taken at three dirhams, as in Chap. XI, 2; but in § g it appears to be 34 dirhams, and in Chap. I, 2 as much as sixteen dirhams.

3 See Chap. II, 69, note.

380 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

Agerept for him; and the retribution and punishment for an Agerept should be fifty-three dirhams (gQgan)?. 3. When the weapon turns downwards zé ¢s the root of an Avétrist for him, and his sentence (dina) is to be changed; his retribution and punishment should be seventy-three dirhams’, which is when anything further occurs. 4. When he shall lay the weapon on any one z¢ zs the root of an Aredis for 42m, and his retribution avd punishment are thirty sttrs; if the wound thereby made by him be one-fifth of a span (dfst)® z# zs no root of an Aredts for him, and his retribution avd punishment are the same thirty stirs.

5. I write the degrees of sin:—A Sréshé-4aranam* is three coins and a half, a Farm4n is a Sréshédaran4m, an Agerept is sixteen stirs, an Avotrist is twenty-five stirs, an Aredfs is thirty, a Khér is sixty, a Bazét is ninety, a Y4t is a hundred and eighty, avd a Tandpdhar is three hundred *.

6. The good works which are in the ceremonial

1 § 5 says sixteen stirs, which, if equivalent to these fifty-three dirhams, would imply 3;%, dirhams to the stir, instead of four as usually stated (see Chap. I, 2). The amounts mentioned in Chaps. I, 2, XI, 2 are very different.

? § 5 says twenty-five stirs, which, at 345, dirhams to the stfr (as in the case of Agerept), would be very nearly eighty-three dirhams, which is probably the number we ought to read im the text, and also, possibly, in Chap. XI, 2.

* The dist is 2 span of ten finger-breadths (about 74 inches) between the thumb and middle finger (see Bund. XXVI, 3, note).

XI, 2.

* The dist is 2 span of ten finger-breadths (about 74 inches) between the thumb and middle finger (see Bund. XXVI, 3, note).

* See Chap. IV, 14, note. Comparing the amount here mentioned with that of the Farm4n in § 1, the Srdsh6-4arandm, which is here made equal to the Farm4n, appears to amount to 34 dirhams, which agrees very nearly with the statement in Chap. X, 24, but differs from that in Chap. XI, 2.

® For similar scales of degrees, see Chaps. I, 2, XI, 2.

CHAPTER XVI, 3-6. 381

worship of the sacred beings (yazisn-i yazd4n):— Consecrating a sacred cake (dr6én)! is a good work of one Tanapthar *; a form of worship (yast)* is a hundred Tan4pthars; a Visparad* is a thousand Tandpthars; a Dé-hémast® is ten thousand; a Dv&zdah-hémast is a hundred thousand, and the merit (kirfak) of every one which is performed with holy-water is said fo de a hundred to one; a H4aékht* is two thousand Tan4pthars, axzd with holywater it becomes a hundred to one’.

1 See Chap. III, 32. The Persian Rivayats explain that this is when the proper ritual is merely recited, without using the sacred twigs and other ceremonial apparatus; when the twigs are used the merit is ten times as great.

* That is, sufficient to counterbalance a Tan4pfhar sin (see Chap. I, 1, 2).

5 A Yast is a formula of praise in honour of some particular angel; when recited with all the accessories of sacred twigs and other ceremonial apparatus, the merit is ten times as great as is mentioned in the text.

‘ The Visparad service includes the Yasna, and when performed with the use of the sacred twigs, holy-water, and other ceremonial apparatus the merit is ten times as great as here stated; some authorities say it is a hundred times as great.

5 This kind of Hémfst is not mentioned in Dastfr JamAspji’s explanation of this species of religious service (see B. Yt. II, 59, note); it occurs, however, in the Ntrangistén as a distinct kind, though called merely Hémst in the Persian Rivayats.

* See B. Yt. III, 25.

7 The merits of other prayers and ceremonies are detailed in the Persian Rivayats; thus, that of the ordinary recital of a Vendidad (which includes both Yasna and Visparad) is sixty thousand Tanépfhars, and when with sacred twigs and holy-water it is a hundred thousand ; that of the recital of any Nydyis (see Chap. VII, 4), or of taking and retaining a prayer (vag, see Chap. III, 6) inwardly, is one Tan&pfthar.

382 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

CuarptTer XVII.

1. This, too, Zaratist asked of Atharmazd, that is: ‘Which is the time when ome must not eat meat ?’

VII, 4), or of taking and retaining a prayer (vag, see Chap. III, 6) inwardly, is one Tan&pfthar.

382 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

CuarptTer XVII.

1. This, too, Zaratist asked of Atharmazd, that is: ‘Which is the time when ome must not eat meat ?’

2. Atharmazd gave a reply thus: ‘In a house when a person shall die, until three nights are completed, nothing whatever of meat is to be placed on a sacred cake (drén) therein and in 7¢s vicinity’ ; but these, such as milk, cheese, fruit, eggs, and preserves, are to be placed; avd nothing whatever of meat is to be eaten dy his relations*. 3. In all the three days it is necessary to perform the ceremonial (yazisn) of Srésh for this reason, because Srésh will be able to save his soul from the hands of the demons for the three days*; and when one con-

1 Reading va hamgéshak, the latter word being apparently used in a parallel passage in Pahl. Vend. VIII, 64 in old MSS.; this reading is, however, somewhat doubtful here, and perhaps we ought to read ‘on a sacred cake in that roofed place (pavan zak vamkfnfh) ;’ the last word being a possible term for ‘roofing’ as it stands, though it may be a miswriting of vimpés (Pers. bamp6és, ‘ roofing’).

2 The Parsis, nowadays (Dastftr Hoshangji says), do not cook for three days under a roof where a death has occurred, but obtain food from their neighbours and friends; but if the cookroom be under a separate roof, as often happens in India, they have no objection to cooking there.

® The soul is supposed to hover about the body for the first three nights after death, during which time it has to rely upon the angel Srésh (see Bund. XXX, 29) for protection from the demons, which the angel, it is presumed, will afford more efficiently if properly propitiated by the surviving relatives. At the third dawn after death (that is, the dawn of the fourth day inclusive of the day of death) the soul is supposed to depart finally for the other world (see AV. IV, 8-36, XVII, 5-27).

CHAPTER XVII, I-6. 383

stantly performs a ceremonial a¢ every period (g4s)? in the three days 7z¢ is as good as though they should celebrate the whole religious ritual (hamak dtn6d) at one time. 4. And after the third night, af dawn, ome is to consecrate three sacred cakes (dr6n), one for Rashnd and Astdd, the second Jor Vaé the good’, and the third for the righteous guardian spirit (ard4i fravard); and clothing® is to be placed upon the sacred cake of the righteous guardian spirit. 5. For the fourth day it is allowable to slaughter a sheep‘, avd the fourth day the ceremonial (yazisn) of the righteous guardian spirit is to be performed; and afterwards are the tenthday, the monthly, and, then, the annual ceremonies ; and the first monthly is exactly on the thirtieth day, and the annual on the particular day*®. 6. When he

' These periods of the day are five in summer, and four in winter (see Bund. XXV, 9, 10).

6. When he

' These periods of the day are five in summer, and four in winter (see Bund. XXV, 9, 10).

* The usual name of the angel R&m (the Vayu of Ram Yt.) who, with the angels Rashnf and Astdd, is supposed to be stationed at the Kinvad bridge, where the soul has to give an account of its actions during life shortly after the dawn following the third night after death (see AV. V, 3, CI, 21, note, Mkh. II, 115).

5 This clothing must be new and good, and is supposed to be supplied to the spirit to prevent its appearing unclothed in the other world, where the clothing of the soul is said to be formed ‘out of almsgivings’ (Chap. XII, 4); to fulfil which condition the clothes provided are presented to the officiating priests (see Saddar Bundahis LXXXVII).

* Or ‘ goat.’

5 That is, on the exact anniversary of the death; the sentence is rather obscure, but this appears to be the meaning. With regard to the ceremonies after a death, the Persian Rivayats give more details, which may be summarized as follows :—On each of the first three days a Srésh Yast is performed and a Srésh Drén consecrated (see Chap. III, 32, note). On the third night, in the middle of the Aiwisrfthrem G4h (dusk to midnight), a renuncia-

384 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

shall die at a place distant from that where the information arrives, when the three days’ ceremontes (satQth) are celebrated a¢ that place where he shall die z¢ is well, when not, their celebration is ¢o de af this place, avd from the ¢2me when the information arrives, until three nights are completed, it is necessary to perform the ceremonial of Srésh, and after three days and nights it is necessary to perform the ceremonial of the righteous guardian spirit.’

7. /n one place z¢ is declared, that of him whose begetting is owing to the demons, of him who commits sodomy, and of him who performs the religious rites (din6) of apostasy, of none of the three do

/n one place z¢ is declared, that of him whose begetting is owing to the demons, of him who commits sodomy, and of him who performs the religious rites (din6) of apostasy, of none of the three do

tion of sin is performed in the house of the deceased; and in the Ushahin G4h (midnight to dawn) four Dréns are consecrated, one dedicated to the good V4é (N4-f veh), one to Rashn and Ast&d, one to Srésh, and one to the righteous (ash64n), and in front of the last are placed new and clean clothes with fruit, but without an egg. On the fourth day, at sunrise, the Dahman Afring4n (Yas. LIX) is recited, and then the Khfirshéd and Mihir NyAyis, after which the people in the house can first eat freshcooked meat. During the fourth day also the Yast of the righteous is performed, and the Dr6n of the righteous is consecrated; and the same again on the tenth day, together with the recitation of the Dahm4n Afringan. On the thirtieth day the Strézah (praise of the thirty days) is to be celebrated, with the dedication to the thirty days; thirty-three beans (lQvak) and thirty-three eggs, with fruit, being placed in front of the Drén, which is consecrated in the presence of fire; and, afterwards, the assistant priest consecrates a Drén for Srésh. The next day the chief priest consecrates a Drén for the righteous; a suit of clothes and fruit being placed in front of the Drdn. And each day a Yast of the righteous is performed, a Drén of the righteous is consecrated, and an Afring4n recited. On the same day every month the same Yast, Drdn, and Afring4n are celebrated ; a priest also undergoes the Bareshnim for the deceased, a Géti-kharfd (see Bund. XXX, 28) is performed, and three Vendidads dedicated to Srésh. On each day at the end of a year the Sirézah Yast is performed, and a Dr6én

CHAPTER XVII, 7-9. 385

they restore the dead!, for this reason, because he whose begetting is owing to the demons is himself a demon *, and the soul of him who commits sodomy will become a demon’, and the soul of him who performs the religious rites of apostasy will become a darting snake ‘.

8. This, too, is revealed by the Avesta‘, that Aftharmazd spoke thus: ‘Give ye up the persons of all men, with the submissiveness of worshippers, to that man 4o whom the whole Avesta and Zand is easy°, so that he may make you acquainted with duties and good works ; because men go to hell for this veason, when they do not submit ¢hecy persons to priestly control (aérpatistAn), and do not become acquainted with duties and good works.’

9. Query :—There is an action which, according to the Avesta’, is not good for a person to do, and the sentence of ‘worthy of death’ is set upon z¢; for one’s better preservation is ove not to do that action,

Query :—There is an action which, according to the Avesta’, is not good for a person to do, and the sentence of ‘worthy of death’ is set upon z¢; for one’s better preservation is ove not to do that action,

dedicated to the thirty days is consecrated, thirty-three beans being placed, with one Drdén, one Frasast (see Chap. III, 32, note), one pentagonal Drén as the sun, one crescent-shaped as the moon, thirty-three eggs, and fruit, in front of the Drdén, which is consecrated in the presence of fire; afterwards, the assistant priest consecrates a Drén for Srésh, and recites the Dahm4n Afring4n, and the next day the chief priest consecrates a Drén for the righteous, a suit of clothes being placed before the Drén, and recites the Dahm4n Afring4n.

1 That is, there is no resurrection for them.

* And, therefore, not immortal according to the Parsi faith.

® Compare Vend. VIII, 98-106.

‘ Which being a creature of the evil spirit is doomed to destruction.

* But it is doubtful if the passage be extant.

* That is, the man who knows the whole scripture and commentary by heart.

7 Reading pavan Avistak, instead of Avistdk pavan,

{s] cc

386 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

or to accomplish avd urge z¢ on, for the advance of religion in a state of uncertainty (var-hémandih)? 10. The answer is this, that when they act well for their better preservation ¢here is no fear, on account of acting well, but ove is not to forsake that!, too, though z¢ be not goodness; a forsaken duty is very bad, for a contempt of it enters into one.

11. This, too, is declared, that ZaratOst enquired of Afharmazd thus: ‘From what place do these people rise again ? from that place where they first went into ¢hezy mothers, or from that place where the mothers have given ¢hem birth, or from that place where ¢he:y bodies happen éo de (afftéd) ?’ 12. Aftharmazd gave a reply thus: ‘ Not from that place where they have gone into ¢hezy mothers, nor from that place where they have been born from theiy mothers, nor from that place where ‘her bodies and flesh happen ¢o de, for they rise from that place where the life went out from their bodies.’ 13. And this, too, he asked, that is: ‘Whence do they raise* 42m again who is _ suspended from anything, amd shall die in the air?’ 14. The reply was: ‘From that place where his bones and flesh first fall to the ground; hence, except when he shall die on a divan (g4s) or a bed (vistarg), before they carry him away, whatever z¢

1 The religion in a position of difficulty appears to be the meaning, but the reply to this question of casuistry is by no means clear.

3 Literally, ‘they rise,’ both here and in the next section, but the change to the plural number is perplexing, unless it refers to those who prepare the resurrection of the dead (Bund. XXX, 4, 7, 17), a8 here assumed by reading ‘they raise.’

CHAPTER XVII, IO—XVIII, 3. 387

zs, a fragment ' is to be taken and to be laid across his limbs; for when the usage is not so, they raise him again from that place where his body arrives at the ground.’

15. Completed in peace, pleasure, axd joy?.

Cuapter XVIII.

1. It is said in revelation that Aéshm*‘ rushed into the presence of Aharman®‘, and exclaimed thus: ‘I wll not go into the world, because Afharmazd, the lord, has produced three things in the world, to which it is not possible for me to do anything whatever.’

2. Aharman exclaimed thus: ‘Say which are those three things.’

3. Aéshm exclaimed thus: ‘ The season-festival

' Apparently a fragment of the place whereon the death took place is meant by kadam-1 p4rak.

* The miscellaneous passages which follow Sls. in M6 terminate at this point, which is the end of the first volume of that MS. The next three chapters are taken from the latter end of the other volume of M6.

5 Both this chapter and the next are also found in Kao, the first being placed before the first part of Sls, and the second before the second part. Chap. XVIII also occurs in Dastfir Jam4spji’s MS. of the Bundahis, just after Chap. XXXIV of that text (see Introduction, p. xxx), and a Pazand version of it occupies the same position in L7 and L2z, and is translated by Justi as the last chapter of the Bundahis, in his German translation of that work (see Introduction, p. xxvi).

* The demon of wrath (see Bund. XXVIII, 15-17).

5 See Bund. I, 3. Aéshm, as the chief agent of the evil spirit in his machinations against mankind, rushes into his master’s presence in hell to complain of the difficulties he encounters.

cc 2

388 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

(gasAnb4r)?, the sacred feast (myazd), and nextof-kin marriage (khvétQk-das).’

I, 3. Aéshm, as the chief agent of the evil spirit in his machinations against mankind, rushes into his master’s presence in hell to complain of the difficulties he encounters.

cc 2

388 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

(gasAnb4r)?, the sacred feast (myazd), and nextof-kin marriage (khvétQk-das).’

1 See Bund. XXV, 1, 3, 6. The six Gdhanbérs or seasonfestivals are held, respectively, on the 45th, rogth, 180th, 21oth, 2goth, and 365th days of the Parsi year. An explanation of the cause of the inequality of these intervals has been proposed by Mr. Khurshedji Rustamji Cama, which is well worthy of attention, and appears to have been first published in 1867 in Nos. 7 and 8 of his Zartosti Abhyas. His view is that the medieval Zoroastrians, beginning their year at the vernal equinox (Bund. XXV, 6, 13, 21), recognised originally only two seasons, a summer of seven months and a winter of five (Bund. XXV, 7), and they held a festival, not only at the end of each season, that is, on the 21oth and 365th days of their year, but also in the middle of each season, that is, on the rosth and 2goth days of their year. That these two latter were mid-season festivals is proved by their Avesta names, Maidhy6shema and Maidhydirya, beginning with the word maidhya, ‘middle.’ Later on, the Zoroastrians divided their year into four equal seasons, spring, summer, autumn, and winter (Bund. XXV, 20), and without interfering with their old festivals, they would, no doubt, have wished to celebrate the end and middle of each of their new seasons. The ends of these four seasons occur on the goth, 180th, 270th, and 365th days of the year, and their midpoints are the 45th, 135th, 225th, and 320th days; but the Zoroastrians already held a festival on the 365th day, and celebrated midsummer and midwinter (the 135th and 320th days of their new calendar) on the ros5th and 2goth days of their year, and they would consider the goth, 225th, and 270th days too close to their old festivals of the 105th, 210th, and 2goth days to allow of the former being held as new festivals; so that they would have only the midspring festival, on the 45th day, and that of the end of summer, on the 180th day, to add to their old festivals. It may be objected that the end of summer was already celebrated on the 21oth day, and, for this reason, it is more probable that the festivals were intended to celebrate the beginnings and mid-points of the seasons, rather than their ends and mid-points. According to this view, the six season-festivals were intended, respectively, to celebrate midspring, midsummer, the beginning of autumn, the beginning of winter, midwinter, and the beginning of spring. That they were also intended to commemorate, respectively, the

CHAPTER XVIII, 4. 389

According to this view, the six season-festivals were intended, respectively, to celebrate midspring, midsummer, the beginning of autumn, the beginning of winter, midwinter, and the beginning of spring. That they were also intended to commemorate, respectively, the

CHAPTER XVIII, 4. 389

4. Aharman exclaimed thus: ‘Enter into the season-festival! if one of those present shall steal a single thing the season-festival is violated, and the affair is 2” accordance with! thy wish; enter into the sacred feast*! if only one of those Zresené shall chatter the sacred feast is violated, and the affair is 7 accordance with thy wish; dz¢ avoid next-of-kin marriage®! because I do not know a remedy for it; for whoever fas gone four times near to z¢ wz/d not become parted from the possession of Atharmazd and the archangels *.’

creations of the sky, water, earth, vegetation, animals, and man, is a belief of later times, derived probably from a foreign source.

* Reading pavan, ‘ with, instead of bar4, ‘beyond,’ as in the next clause of the sentence (see p. 176, note 5).

* By the sacred feast is meant the consecration of sacred cakes, with meat-offerings and the recital of the Afring4ns or blessings (see Chaps. III, 32, XI, 4).

8 By next-of-kin marriage Parsis nowadays understand the’ marriage of first cousins, which they consider a specially righteous act; and the passages in Pahlavi texts, which appear to approve of marriages between brother and sister, father and daughter, and mother and son, they explain as referring to the practices of heretics (see Dastfr Péshétan’s English translation of the Dinkard, p- 96, note). How far this explanation may be correct has not been ascertained, for the passages in question are rather obscure, and have not been thoroughly examined. But it is quite conceivable that the Parsi priesthood, about the time of the Muhammadan conquest (when the practice of next-of-kin marriage was most extolled), were anxious to prevent marriages with strangers, in order to hinder conversions to the foreign faith; and that they may, therefore, have extended the range of marriage among near relations beyond the limits now approved by their descendants.

* The object of this chapter is evidently to extol the religious merit of next-of-kin marriage. A Persian version of the passage, contained in Ms, fols. 54, 55, adds the following details: ‘ Therefore it is necessary to understand, that the chief next-of-kin marriage is that of a sister's daughter and brother’s son; a medium

390 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

CuarTeR XIX.

1. The Yatha-ahd-vairy6 ' formulas that are necessary in each place, and how ¢hey are to be spoken in performing anything ?.

2. One $y kim who goes forth to an assembly, or before grandees and chieftains, or on any business; or when he goes to ask for what he wants (val khvahtsnd); also when he quits any business; in each of these situations 4e is to say only one formula, so that his business may proceed more promptly *.

One $y kim who goes forth to an assembly, or before grandees and chieftains, or on any business; or when he goes to ask for what he wants (val khvahtsnd); also when he quits any business; in each of these situations 4e is to say only one formula, so that his business may proceed more promptly *.

next-of-kin marriage is that of a brother’s son and a younger(dfgar) brother’s daughter, or of a sister’s son and a younger sister’s daughter; and inferior to a medium next-of-kin marriage is that of a sister’s son and a younger brother’s daughter. It is necessary to know that any person who contracts a next-of-kin marriage, if Azs soul be ff for hell, will arrive among the ever-stationary (see Chap. VI, 2), if it is one of the ever-stationary it will arrive at heaven. Another particular is to be added; if any one, in departing, settles and strives for the next-of-kin marriage betrothal (paivand) of a next brother it is a good work of a thousand Tanfpfhars; if any one strives to break off a next-of-kin marriage betrothal he is worthy of death.’

1 See Bund. I, 21.

® It appears from the ninth book of the Dinkard, that the contents of this chapter are derived from the first fargard of the Sfidkar Nask (see B. Yt. I, 1, note). The account given by the Dinkard contains fewer details, but, so far as it goes, it is in accordance with our text, except that it seems to transfer the object of § 10 to § 12, and removes the objects of §§ 12, 13 one step onwards ; it also adds ‘going on a bridge’ to § 2. The Persian Rivayat of Bahman Pfingyah gives further details, as will be mentioned in the notes below.

5 The Persian Rivayat adds to these occasions, when he goes on the water, or a river, or goes to borrow, or to ask repayment of a loan, or goes out from his house, or comes into it.

oe — ————

CHAPTER XIX, I-6. 391

3. That a blessing (4frin6é) may be more benedictory, for this ~eason one utters two formulas; for there are two kinds of blessing, one is that which is in the thoughts?, and one is that which is in words.

4. Four are for coming out more thankfully when at a season-festival *.

5. Five 6y him who goes to atone for sin, in order to expel the fiend; because it is necessary to undergo punishment by the decision (dastébarth) of these five persons, the house-ruler, the village-ruler, the tribe-ruler®, the province-ruler, and the supreme Zaratdst ; and five Ashem-vohiis‘ are to be uttered by him at the end.

6. Six dy ktm who goes to seek power, and to battle, so that he may be more successful.

1 The words pavan mfnisn are guessed, for this first clause is omitted by mistake in M6, and these two words are illegible in K2o, except part of the last letter.

6. Six dy ktm who goes to seek power, and to battle, so that he may be more successful.

1 The words pavan mfnisn are guessed, for this first clause is omitted by mistake in M6, and these two words are illegible in K2o, except part of the last letter.

2 K2o substitutes for val, ‘at,’ the following mutilated phrase : [....anhau khshap6 kadarkaf pavan kadérf4f] madam vazlinéd radih-i; the portion in brackets being evidently a fragment from the H4dékht Srésh Yt. 5 with Pahlavi translation (a passage which treats of the efficacy of reciting the Yath4-ahvairyd). If this fragment be not merely a marginal gloss, which has crept into the text by mistake, we must translate the whole section as follows: ‘Four are for the more thankful coming out of the liberality of a season-festival, when the passage, “on that day nor on that night comes there anything whatever on any one,” goes on.’ The Dinkard has merely: ‘Four by 4m who is at the invocation of the chiefs of creation and the celebration of a seasonfestival.’ The Persian Rivayats omit the section altogether.

* This person is omitted both in M6 and K2o, but he is wanted to make up the five. This section is omitted by the Persian Rivayats.

* See Bund. XX, 2. These are to be recited after the punishment is over.

392 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

7. Seven éy htm who goes to perform the worship of God (yazd4n), so ¢ha¢ the archangels may come more forward! at the worship. -

8. Eight 4y 47m who goes to perform the ceremonial of the righteous guardian spirit.

9. Nine dy 42m who goes to sow corn; these he utters for this ~eason, because the corn will ripen (raséd@) in nine months, avd so that the corn may come forward he will make the mischief of the noxious creatures less *.

10. Ten dy ktm who goes to seek a wife, so that the presents may be favourable for the purpose. 11. Ten dy Atm who wishes to allow the male access to beasts of burden and cattle, so that it may be more procreative *.

12. Eleven dy him who goes to the lofty mountains, so that the glory of mountains and hills may bless him and be friendly *.

13. Twelve dy 42m who goes to the low districts, so that the glory of that country and district may bless him and be friendly *.

14. Thirteen éy htm who shall become pathless ; at that same place he shall utter chem; or by him

1 Or ‘may arrive earlier;’ there being seven archangels has suggested the number seven. This section and the next are omitted by the Persian Rivéyats.

* The Persian Rivayats add general cultivation, planting trees, and cohabitation with one’s wife.

5 Instead of §§ 10, 11 the Persian Riv4yats have buying quadrupeds, and driving pegs into the ground for picketing them.

* The Persian Rivayats substitute conference with a maiden, seeking a wife, giving one’s children in marriage, and obtaining anything from another.

5 The Persian Rivayats add going up hills, mounting anything lofty, going on a bridge, and losing one’s way.

CHAPTER XIX, 7—XxX, I. 393

* The Persian Rivayats substitute conference with a maiden, seeking a wife, giving one’s children in marriage, and obtaining anything from another.

5 The Persian Rivayats add going up hills, mounting anything lofty, going on a bridge, and losing one’s way.

CHAPTER XIX, 7—XxX, I. 393

who shall pass over a bridge and a river, so that the spirit of that water may bless him!; because the Yath4-ahd-vairy6 is greater and more successful than everything in the Avesta as to all rivers, all wholesomeness, and all protection.

15. Religion is as connected with the Yath4-ahavairy6é as the hair is more connected with the glory of the face; any one, indeed, would dread (sam4d@) to separate hairiness avd the glory of the face.

CHAPTER XX 2,

1, Jn one place it is declared that it is said by revelation (din6) that a man is to go as much as possible (and vés-ast) to the abode of fires*, and the salutation (ntyd4yisnd) of fire* is to be performed wzth reverence ; because three times every day the archangels form an assembly in the abode of fires, and shed good works and righteousness there; and then the good works and righteousness, which are shed there, become more lodged in the body of 42m who goes much thither, and performs many salutations of fire wztk reverence.

1 The Persian Rivayats substitute going to and entering a city or town; they also add twenty-one recitations on setting out on a journey, so that the angel Bahram may grant a safe arrival.

2 The contents of this chapter conclude the MS. M6; a few lines even having been lost at the end of that MS., though preserved in some of its older copies. A more modern copy, in the MS. No. 121 of the Ouseley collection in the Bodleian Library at Oxford, contains §§ 4-17, appended to the Bundahis. Complete PAzand versions, derived from M6, occur in Ly and L22, immediately following the Pazand of Chap. XVIII.

’ The fire-temple.

‘ That is, the Atés Ny@yis is to be recited.

394 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

2. This, too, that the nature of wisdom is just like fire; for, in this world, ¢heve is nothing which shall become so complete as that thing which is made with wisdom; and every fire, too, that they kindle and one sees from far, makes manifest what zs safe and uninjured (atrakht); whatever is safe in fire is safe for ever, and whatever is uninjured in fire is uninjured for ever.

3. This, too, that a disposition in which is no wisdom is such-like as a clear, unsullied (an4htk) fountain which is choked (bast6) and never goes into use; and the disposition with which ¢here is wisdom is such-like as a clear, unsullied fountain, over which an industrious man stands and takes zt into use; cultivation restrains z¢, and it gives crops (bar) to the world.

4. This, too, that these three things are to be done by men, to force the demon of corruption (nasQs)! far away from the body, to be steadfast in the religion, and to perform good works. 5. To force the demon of corruption far away from the body is this, that before the sun 4as come up one is to wash the hands? and face with bull’s urine and water; to be steadfast in the religion is this, that one is to reverence the sun*; and to perform good works is this, that ove is to destroy several noxious creatures,

6. This, too, that the three greatest concerns of men are these, to make him who is an enemy a friend, to make him who is wicked righteous, and to make him who is ignorant learned. 7. To make

1 See Chap. II, 1. * See Chap. VII, 7. * See Chap. VII, 1-6.

CHAPTER XX, 2-I1. 395

an enemy a friend is this, that out of the worldly wealth one has before him he keeps a friend in mind ; to make a wicked ome righteous is this, that from the sin, whereby he becomes wicked, one turns him away; and to make an ignorant one learned is this, that oe is to manage himself so that he who is ignorant may learn of him.

8. This, too, that the walks of men are to be directed chiefly to these three places, to the abode of the well-informed, to the abode of the good, and to the abode of fires’. 9. To the abode of the well-informed, that so ome may become wiser, and religion be more lodged in ome’s person; to the abode of the good for this reason, that so, among good and evil, he may thereby renounce the evil and carry home ¢he good*; and to the abode of fires for this reason, that so the spiritual fiend may turn away from him.

10. This, too, that Ze whose actions are for the soul, the world is then his own, and the spiritual existence more his own; and 4e whose actions are for the body, the spiritual existence has him at pleasure, avd they snatch the world from him compulsorily.

11. This, too, that Bakht-afrid® said, that every GAatha (g4s4n)* of Aftharmazd has been an opposi-

1 The fire-temple.

* Assuming that the word sapfrth, ‘the good,’ has been omitted by mistake; the sentence appearing to be unintelligible without it.

* See B. Yt. I, 7.

* The word g&s4n being plural, Gatha must be taken in its collective sense as an assemblage of hymns. The word can also be read dahisn, ‘creation,’ but this meaning seems improbable here.

396 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

tion of the one adversary, and the renunciation of six (patitik)! for the opposition of every fiend.

The word can also be read dahisn, ‘creation,’ but this meaning seems improbable here.

396 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

tion of the one adversary, and the renunciation of six (patitik)! for the opposition of every fiend.

12. This, too, that, regarding the world, anxiety is not to be suffered, it is not to be considered as anything whatever, and is not to be let slip from the hand. 13. Anxiety is not to be suffered for this reason, because that which is ordained will happen ; it is not to be considered as anything whatever for this veason, because should it be expedient it is necessary to abandon z¢; and it is not to be let slip from the hand for this reason, because it is proper, in the world, to provide a spiritual exzstence for oneself.

14. This, too, that the best thing is truth, and the worst thing is deceit; and there is he who speaks true and thereby becomes wicked, and ¢here is he who speaks false and thereby becomes righteous.

15. This, too, that fire is not to be extinguished ?, for this is a sin; and there is he who extinguishes zt, and is good.

16. This, too, is declared, that nothing is to be given to the vile; and ¢here is he by whom the best and most pleasant ragout (khdrd@tk) is to be given to the vile. .

17. On these, too, is the attention of men ¢o de jixed, because there is a remedy for everything but death, a hope for everything but wickedness, everything will lapse * except righteousness, it is possible

1 That is, the Patit or formula of renunciation (see Chap. IV, 14).

3 Literally, ‘ killed.’

* M6 ends at this point, the next folio being lost. The remainder of the chapter has been recovered from a copy in, Bombay, checked by the Péz. MSS. L7 and Lz2za, all of which must have

CHAPTER XX, 12—XXI, 2. 397

to manage everything but temper (géhar), and it is possible for everything to change but divine providence (bak6-bakht6). .

18. This, too, is declared, that FrédQn! wished to slay Az-i Dahak*, 6v¢ Adharmazd spoke thus: ‘Do not slay 42m now, for the earth will become full of noxious creatures.’

CuapTreR XXI8.

1. I write the indication of the midday shadow; may it be fortunate !

2. Should the sun come‘ into Cancer ¢he shadow is one foot of the man, a¢ the fifteenth degree of Cancer z¢ is one foot; when the sun is at Leo z¢ is

been derived from M6 before it lost its last folio; whereas the MS. No. 121 of the Ouseley collection at Oxford, which ends at the same point, must have been written after the folio was lost.

1 See Bund. XXXI, 7.

2 See Bund. XXIX, 9, XXXI, 6, B. Yt. III, 55-61.

5 The contents of this chapter, regarding the lengths of midday and afternoon shadows, immediately follow a tale of Gést-i Fry4né, which is appended to the book of Ard4-Viraf’s journey to the other world, both in M6 and K2o. As will be seen from the notes, these details about shadows were probably compiled at Yazd in Persia, as they are suitable only for that latitude.

As will be seen from the notes, these details about shadows were probably compiled at Yazd in Persia, as they are suitable only for that latitude.

* Reading &yad-ae (a very rare form), or it may be intended for h6manfe, ‘should it be,’ but it is written in both MSS. exactly like the two ciphers for the numeral 5. Mulla Firfz in his Avigeh Din, p. 279 seq., takes 5 khadQk p4f as implying that the shadow is under the sole of the foot, or the sun overhead ; but neither this reading, nor the more literal ‘ one-fifth of a foot,’ can be reconciled with the other measures; though if we take 5 as standing for pangak, ‘the five éoes or sole,’ we might translate as follows: ‘When the sun is at Cancer, ‘he shadow is the sole of one foot of the man.’

398 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

one foot and a half, a¢ the fifteenth of Leo z¢ is two feet; when the sun is at Virgo z¢ is two feet and a half, a¢ the fifteenth of Virgo z¢ is three feet and a half; a¢ Libra z¢ is four! feet and a half, a¢ the fifteenth of Libra z¢ is five feet and a half?; a¢ Scorpio it is six feet and a half, a¢ the fifteenth of Scorpio #¢ is seven® feet and a half; a¢ Sagittarius z¢ is eight feet and a half, a¢ the fifteenth of Sagittarius 27 is nine feet and a half; a¢ Capricornus z¢ is ten feet, at the fifteenth of Capricornus z¢ is nine* feet and a half; a¢ Aquarius 2z¢ is eight ° feet and a half, a¢ the fifteenth of Aquarius z¢ is seven feet and a half; a¢ Pisces z¢ is six feet and a half, a¢ the fifteenth of Pisces z¢ is five feet and a half; a¢ Aries z¢ is four feet and a half, a¢ the fifteenth of Aries z¢ is three feet and a half; @¢ Taurus z¢ is two feet and a half, at the fifteenth of Taurus z¢ is two feet; a¢ Gemini z¢ is one foot and a half, a¢ the fifteenth of Gemini tt is one foot ®.

1 Kao has ‘three’ by mistake.

2 M6 omits ‘ and a half’ by mistake.

* Kao has ‘ six’ by mistake.

* Both MSS. omit one cipher, and have only ‘six,’ but the shadow must be the same here as at the fifteenth of Sagittarius.

® Both MSS. have ‘seven,’ which is clearly wrong.

* It is obvious that, as the length of a man’s shadow depends upon the height of the sun, each of these observations of his noonday shadow determines the altitude of the sun at noon, and is, therefore, a rude observation for finding the latitude of the place, provided we know the ratio of a man’s foot to his stature. According to Bund. XXVI, 3 a man’s stature is eight spans (vitast), and according to Farh. Okh. p. 41 a vitast is twelve finger-breadths, and a foot is fourteen (see Bund. XXVI, 3, note), so that a man’s stature of eight spans is equivalent to 6$ feet. Assuming this to have been the ratio adopted by the observer, supposing the obliquity of the ecliptic to have been 23° 35’ (as it

CHAPTER XXI, 3-6. 399

3. The midday shadow is written!, may z¢s end be good !

4. I write the indication of the Adzértn (afternoon)? pertod of the day; may it be well and fortunate by the help of God (yazd4n)!

399

3. The midday shadow is written!, may z¢s end be good !

4. I write the indication of the Adzértn (afternoon)? pertod of the day; may it be well and fortunate by the help of God (yazd4n)!

5. When the day is at a maximum (pavan afztind), azd the sun comes unto the head® of Cancer, and one’s shadow becomes six feet and two parts‘, he makes z¢ the Afizérin period (g4s). 6.

was about a.pD. 1000), and calculating the latitude from each of the thirteen different lengths of shadow, the mean result is 32° 1’ north latitude, which is precisely the position assigned to Yazd (the head-quarters of the small remnant of Zoroastrians in Persia) on some English maps, though some foreign maps place it 15” or 20° farther south. With regard to the rough nature of this mode of observation it may be remarked that, as the lengths of the shadows are noted only to half a foot, there is a possible error of a quarterfoot in any of them; this would produce a possible error of 2° 4’ in the midsummer observation of latitude, and of 39’ in the midwinter one; or a mean possible error of 1° 22’ in any of the observations; so that the possible error in the mean of thirteen observations is probably not more than 6’, and the probable error is even less, provided the data have been assumed correctly.

1 Reading nipist, but only the first and last letters are legible in M6, and the middle letter is omitted in K20.

* See Bund. XXV, 9.

8 The word sar, ‘head,’ usually means ‘the end,’ but it must be here taken as ‘the beginning ;’ perhaps, because the zodiacal signs are supposed to come head-foremost.

* What portion of a foot is meant by bahar, ‘ part,’ is doubtful. It can hardly be a quarter, because ‘two quarters’ would be too clumsy a term for ‘a half” But it appears from §§ 5-7 that the shadow, necessary to constitute the Afizérin period, is taken as increasing uniformly from six feet and two parts to fourteen feet and two parts, an increase of eight feet in six months, or exactly one foot and one-third per month, as stated in the text. And, deducting this monthly increase of one foot and one-third from the seven and a half feet shadow at the end of the first month, we have six feet and one-sixth remaining for the shadow at the

400 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

And, deducting this monthly increase of one foot and one-third from the seven and a half feet shadow at the end of the first month, we have six feet and one-sixth remaining for the shadow at the

400 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

Every thirty days it always increases one foot and one-third, therefore about every ten days the reckoning is always half a foot’, and when the sun is at the head of Leo the shadow is seven? feet and a half. 7. In this series every zodzacal constellation is treated alike, and the months alike, until the sun comes unto the head of Capricornus, and the shadow becomes fourteen feet and two parts. 8. In Capricornus it diminishes again a foot and onethird’; azd from there where it turns back, because of the decrease of the night and increase of the day, it always diminishes one foot amd one-third every one of the months, ad about every ten days the reckoning is always half a foot, until it comes back to six feet and two parts; every zodzacal constellation being treated alike, and the months alike +.

beginning of the month. Hence we may conclude that the ‘ two parts’ are equal to one-sixth, and each ‘part’ is one-twelfth of a foot.

‘ Meaning that the increase of shadow is to be taken into account as soon as it amounts to half a foot, that is, about every ten days. Practically, half a foot would be added on the tenth and twentieth days, and the remaining one-third of a foot at the end of the month.

* Both MSS. have ‘eight,’ but this would be inconsistent with the context, as it is impossible that ‘six feet and two parts’ can become ‘eight feet and a half’ by the addition of ‘one foot and one-third,’ whatever may be the value of the ‘two parts’ of a foot.

5 Both MSS. have 3 yak-1 pif, instead of p&f 3 yak-1.

* This mode of determining the beginning of the afternoon period is not so clumsy as it appears, as it keeps the length of that period exceedingly uniform for the six winter months with some increase in the summer time. In latitude 32° north, where the longest day is about 13 hours 56 minutes, and the shortest is 10 hours 4 minutes, these observations of a man’s shadow make the afternoon period begin about 3# hours before sunset at mid-

CHAPTER XXI, 7—XXII, 7. 40I

Cuapter XXII}

1. May Adharmazd give ¢hee the august rank and throne of a champion *!

2. May Vohdman give thee wisdom! may the benefit of knowing VohQman® be good thought, and mayest thou be acting well, that is, saving the soul!

3. May Ardavahist, the beautiful, give thee understanding and intellect!

4. May Shatvatré grant thee wealth from every generous one!

5. May Spendarmad grant thee praise through the seed of ¢ky body! may she give thee as wife a woman from the race of the great!

6. May Horvadad grant thee plenty and prosperity !

7. May Amerédad grant thee herds of four-footed beasts /

summer, diminishing to 23 hours at the autumnal equinox, and then remaining very nearly constant till the vernal equinox.

may she give thee as wife a woman from the race of the great!

6. May Horvadad grant thee plenty and prosperity !

7. May Amerédad grant thee herds of four-footed beasts /

summer, diminishing to 23 hours at the autumnal equinox, and then remaining very nearly constant till the vernal equinox.

' These last two chapters are found written upon some folios which have been added to the beginning of M6; but, though not belonging to that MS. originally, they are still very old. The first of these two chapters has not been found elsewhere ; it is an elaborate benediction, in which the writer calls down, upon some one, a series of blessings from each of the thirty archangels and angels whose names are given to the days of the Parsi month in the order in which they here stand (compare the same names in Bund. XXVII, 24).

* The meaning of the word p4drég or pAdrang (which occurs also in §§ 12, 26, and appears to be a title) may be guessed from the following passage in the Yadkar-i Zartrén, or Vistasp-shahnaémak: Pavan har ragm va padrazm-i lak pirédg va véh padrég sem ydityfint-ae, ‘in every attack and counter-attack of thine mayest thou bring away the title of conqueror and good champion!’

5 The reading is uncertain.

(5) pd

402 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

8. May Diné always secure! ¢hee the support of the creator Adharmazd!

g. May the light of the sublime Ataré? hold thy throne in heaven!

10. May Av4n grant thee wealth from every generous one!

11. May Khar hold thee without mystery aad doubt among the great and ¢ky compeers (hambudtk4n)!

12. May M&h give thee an assistant, who is the assistant of champions!

13. May Tistar hold thee a traveller in the countries of the seven regions!

14. Gésdrvan the archangel ® is the protection of four-footed Jdeasts.

15. May Diné always remain for ¢hee as the support of the creator Adharmazd!

16. May Mitré be thy judge, who shall wish thy existence 4o de vigorous!

17. May Srésh the righteous, the smiter of demons, keep greed, wrath, and want‘ far from thee! © may he destroy ¢hem, and may he not seize thee as unjust !

18. May Rashnf be thy conductor® to the resplendent heaven!

1 This verb is doubtful ; here and in § 23 it is netrfin4d, ‘ may she guard,’ but in § 15 it is ketrfin4d, ‘ may she remain.’

* Bars Atard, ‘the sublime fire,’ seems to be a personification of the fire Berezi-savang of Bund. XVII, 1, 3, the Supremelybenefiting of SZS. XI,-1, 6.

5 She is usually called an angel. Either the verb is omitted in this section, or it is not a blessing ; and the same may be said of §§ 20, 25.

‘ These are the three fiends, As, Aeshm, and Nty4z (see Bund. XXVIII, 15-17, 26, 27).

* It is very possible that the verb should be yehabfnéd,

CHAPTER XXII, 8-27. 403

19. May Fravardin give thee offspring, which may .bear the name of ¢hy race!

20. Vahrdm the victorious is the stimulator of the warlike.

XXVIII, 15-17, 26, 27).

* It is very possible that the verb should be yehabfnéd,

CHAPTER XXII, 8-27. 403

19. May Fravardin give thee offspring, which may .bear the name of ¢hy race!

20. Vahrdm the victorious is the stimulator of the warlike.

21. May Ram, applauding the life of a praiser of the persistent! lord, keep thee perfect (aspar), that is, living three hundred years 2, undying and undecaying unto the end of ¢hy days!

22. May V4d bring thee peace® from the resplendent heaven!

23. May Diné always secure ¢hee the support of the creator Adharmazd !

24. May Dind become thy guest in thy home and dwelling!

25. Arshisang, the beautiful, is the resplendent glory of the Kay4ns.

26. May Astdd be thy helper, who is the assistant of champions !

27. May Asm4n bless thee with all skill and wealth !

instead of yehevfin4d, in which case we should have ‘ give thee a passport.’

1 The meaning of khvapar (Av. Avdpara) is by no means certain; it is an epithet of Afharmazd, angels, and spirits, and is then often assumed to mean ‘protecting ;’ but it is also a term applied to the earth and offspring ; perhaps ‘self-sustaining ’ would suit both its etymology and its various applications best, but the root par has many other meanings.

2 That is, two great cycles. It is usual for the copyists of Pahlavi MSS. to wish, in their colophons, that the persons for whom the MSS. are written, whether themselves or others, may retain the MSS. for a hundred and fifty years before leaving them to their children; which period is mentioned because it is supposed to constitute a great cycle of the moon and planets.

5 Written drfid instead of drfd.

Dd2

404 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

28. May Zamyéad destroy for thee the demon and fiend out of thy dwelling!

29. May Maraspend hold thee a throne in the resplendent heaven!

30. May Aniran the immortal, with every kind of all wealth, become thy desire! the horses of God (yazd4n)? who shall come that he may go, and thou mayest obtain a victory.

31. May destiny give thee a helper! he is the guardian of the ce/estial sphere for all these archangels whose names I have brought forward; may he be thy helper a¢ all times, in every good work and duty !

32. Homage to Srit* the teacher! may he live long! may he be prosperous z# the land! may Azs be every pleasure and joy, axd every glory of the Kay4ns, through the will of the persistent Adharmazd !

CuHaPTeR XXIII.

o. In the name of God and the good creation be health °! 1. Adharmazd is more creative, Vohiman is more

* Both nouns are in the plural, and both verbs in the singular. Anfran is a personification of Av. anaghra raodau, ‘the beginningless lights,’ or fixed stars (which, however, are said to have been created by Aflharmazd in Bund. II, 1), and these stars appear to have been considered as horses of the angels (Bund. VI, 3, SZS. VI, 1). There are several uncertain phrases in §§ 30-32.

anaghra raodau, ‘the beginningless lights,’ or fixed stars (which, however, are said to have been created by Aflharmazd in Bund. II, 1), and these stars appear to have been considered as horses of the angels (Bund. VI, 3, SZS. VI, 1). There are several uncertain phrases in §§ 30-32.

* This would appear to be the name of the person to whom the benediction is addressed, as it can hardly be meant for the ancient hero Thrita, the Athrat of Bund. XXXI, 27, and the Srité of SZS. XI, 10, note.

’ Two versions of this chapter, detailing the qualities of the

CHAPTER XXII, 28—XxIIl, 4. 405

embellished ?, Ardavahist is more brilliant?, Shatvaird is more exalted *, Spendarmad is more fruitful‘, Horvadad is moister, Amerédad is fatter °. 2. Din-pa-Ataré is just like Adharmazd?, Atar6 is hotter *, Avan is more golden®, Khir is more obser- . vant?®, M4h is more protective ", Tir is more liberal, Gés is swifter!?. 3. Din?’-pa-Mitré is just like Afharmazd, Mitrd is more judicial, Srésh is more vigorous, Rashn is more just, Fravardin is more powerful, Vahram is more victorious, Ram is more pleasing, Vad is more fragrant. 4. Din-pa-Dindé is just like AQharmazd, Diné is more valuable, Ard ' is more beautiful, Astad is purer, Asm4n is more lofty, Zamy4d is more conclusive, Maraspend is more

thirty angels and archangels, are extant; one in M6, which has lost §§ 3-5, and the other in a very old MS. in the library of the high-priest of the Parsis at Bombay. This latter, being complete, is here taken as the text, while the variations of M6, which occur in nearly every epithet, are given in the notes. Which version is the oldest can hardly be ascertained with certainty from the state of the MSS. M6 omits this opening benediction.

1 M6 has ‘ more nimble.’

2 M6 has ‘more discriminative.’

5 M6 has ‘more active.’

* M6 has ‘more complete.’

® M6 has ‘ fatter.’

* M6 has ‘more fruitful.’

7 M6 has ‘ Dinéd is more desirous.’

* M6 has ‘more heating.’

® Referring perhaps to the golden channels (Bund. XIII, 4, 5) through which the water of Arédvivsiir (a title of the angel Avan, ‘ waters’) is supposed to flow. M6 has ‘more glittering.’

0 M6 has ‘more embellished.’

"1 M6 has varp4ntar, the meaning of which is uncertain.

1 M6 has ‘ more listening.’ .

13 The version in M6 ends here; the next folio being lost.

™ The same as Arshisang (see Bund. XXII, 4).

406 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

conveying the religion, Antran is the extreme of exertion and listening '. 5. May it be completed in peace and pleasure !

1 M6 has ‘ more listening.’ .

13 The version in M6 ends here; the next folio being lost.

™ The same as Arshisang (see Bund. XXII, 4).

406 SHAYAST LA-SHAYAST.

conveying the religion, Antran is the extreme of exertion and listening '. 5. May it be completed in peace and pleasure !

1 The reading of both these nouns is uncertain. The days of the Parsi month, which bear the names of these thirty angels, are divided, it will be observed, into four nearly equal divisions, resembling weeks, which are here separated in §§ 1-4. The first weekly period begins with a day dedicated to A@harmazd, and called by his own name ; and each of the three other weekly periods also begins with a day dedicated to Aiharmazd, but called by the name of Din, ‘ religion,’ with the name of the following day added as a cognomen. The first week, therefore, consists of the day Afiharmazd followed by six days named after the six archangels respectively (see Bund. I, 23, 26). The second week consists of the day Din-with- Ataré followed by six days named after the angels of fire, waters, the sun, the moon, Mercury, and the primeval ox. The third week consists of the day Din-with-Mitré followed by seven days named after the angels of solar light, obedience, and justice, the guardian spirits, and the angels of victory, pleasure, and wind. And the fourth week consists of the day Dinwith-Diné followed by seven days named after the angels of religion, righteousness, rectitude, the sky, the earth, the liturgy, and the fixed stars.

eel =

INDEX.

OBSERVATIONS.

1, The references in this index are to the pages of the introduction, and to the chapters and sections of the translations; the chapters being denoted by the larger ciphers.

2. References to passages which contain special information are given in parentheses.

3. Though different forms of the same name may occur in the translations, only one form is usually given in the index, to which the references to all forms are attached ; except when the forms differ so much as to require to be widely separated in the index.

4. Pahlavi forms are always given in preference to Pazand and Persian, when only one is mentioned; but where only a Pazand form occurs it is printed in italics, as Pazand orthography is usually corrupt. In all such italicised names any letters, which would elsewhere be italic, are printed in roman type.

5. Abbreviations used are :—Av. for Avesta word; Bd. for Bundahis ; Byt. for Bahman Yast; ch. for chapter of Visparad; com. for commentator and commentary; Gug. for Gugarati; Huz. for Huzviris; Int. for Introduction ; lun. man. for lunar mansion; m. for mountain ; meas. for measure; n for foot-note; Pahl. for Pahlavi; Paz. for Pazand; Pers. for Persian; r. for river; Sl. for Shayast 18-shayast ; trans. for translation; wt. for weight ; zod. for zodiacal constellation ; Zs. for Selections of Zad-sparam.

INDEX.

ABAN, angel, Byt. 2, 59n. See Avan.

Ab-istadah lake, Bd. 22, 5n.

for Pahlavi; Paz. for Pazand; Pers. for Persian; r. for river; Sl. for Shayast 18-shayast ; trans. for translation; wt. for weight ; zod. for zodiacal constellation ; Zs. for Selections of Zad-sparam.

INDEX.

ABAN, angel, Byt. 2, 59n. See Avan.

Ab-istadah lake, Bd. 22, 5n.

Ablution, Byt. 2, 36; Sl. 2, (52,) 108; 3, 10, 12; 8, 18, 22; 12, 22, 24.

— seat, Byt. 2, (36;) Sl.10,5. — tank, Sl. 10, 5. — vessel, SI. 8, 12.

Abode of fires, SI. 9, 5; 20, 1, 8, 9.

Abtin, man, Bd. 81, 7 n.

Achzmenians, Byt. 2, 17n.

Adar, angel, Byt.2, 59 n. See Ataré. Adarbigan, land, Bd. 20, 13 n, 25n; 22, 2n; 25, 4n; 29, tan.

Ad-fravakhshya ha, SI. 18, 29. Ad-ina-yava ha, $1.18, 33. Adopted son, SI. 12, 14. Ad-ta-vakhshya ha, SI. 18, 4, 14.

Aéshm, demon, Bd. 19, 33n; 28,.

(15-17,) 20; 80, 29; Byt.1, 5n; 2, 36n; S118, 43; 18,1, 3.

Afarg, com., SI. 1, (33) 2, 2, 64, 73, 88, 115, 1230; 5, 5,6; 10, 39n.

Afghanistan, Bd. 12, 22n; 20, 17n.

Atrasiyab, king, Bd. 81, 14n, 17 n,

Ign.

Afrin, ritual, Sl. 18, 43 n; 19, 3.

Afringan, rite, S110, 34n; 17, 5n; 18, 4n.

Afrébag-vindad, man, Bd. 39, 6, 8.

Agdimasvak, man, Bd, 81, 23.

Agerept sin, SI. 1, 1, 2; 11,1, 2; 16, 2, 5.

Aghrérad, man, Bd. 29, 5; 81, 15, 20-22.

Aharman, origin of evil, Bd. 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 23, 27; 3,113 Zs. 1, 2-4, 6, 8-11, 17, 20, 24, 253 Wworshipped by Dahak, Bd. 20, 23; nature of, Bd. 28, 1-6, 46, 48; by whom served, Bd. 28, 21; differs sometimes from the evil spirit, Bd. 28, 4on; 80, 30; his attack on creation, Zs. 1, 27; 2, 1-6, 113 4, 1-5, 10; 5, 1, 3, 5; 6,1, 233 7, 1,12; 8,

1,6; 9,1, 243 10, 1; ll, 1; defeated by religion, Byt. 2, 16, 20; SI. 15, 6; his future evildoings, Byt. 2, 40, 62; 8, 55, 56; his advice, Sl. 18, 1, 2, 4. See Evil spirit.

Ahasuerus, Byt. 2, 17 n.

Ah(-ad-paiti ha, SI. 18, a1.

Ahunavaiti gatha, S1.18, an, 4, 6-15,

51.

Ahunavar, Bd. 1, 21, 22; Zs. 1, 12; ll, ron; Sl. 10, 5n, 25, 26; 12, 19, 32n; 18, 2n; text and trans., Bd. 1, 21n; com., Zs. 1, 13-19.

Ahy&-thw4-athr6 ha, SI. 18, 17.

Ahya-yasa ha, Sl. 18, 4, 12, 14, 50.

Aibisrfitém gah, Bd. 25, 9.

Aighash, demon, Bd. 28, 33; 81,

50.

Atrak, man, Bd. 81, 14.

Airak m., Bd. 12, 2, 12.

Airan-vég, land, Bd. 12, 25; 14, 4; 20, 13, 32; 25, 11; 298, (4, 5, 12;) 82, 3; Zs. 9, 8.

Airié, prince, Bd. 81, (9, 10,) 12, 143 32, 1n; 84, 6; Sl. 10, 28n.

Airiz-rasp, chief, Bd. 29, 1.

Airman, angel, Bd. 80, 19 n.

Airya, tribe, Bd. 81, 9 n.

4iryak, man, Bd. 82, 1 n.

Airyamana hi, SI. 18, 47.

Aithritak, man, Bd. $2, 1 n,

Aiwisrfthrema gah, Bd. 25, 9n; SI. 17, 5n.

Akandgar, king, Byt. 2, 19.

Akatash, demon, Bd. 28, 20.

Akbésbir r., Bd. 20, 7, 18.

Ak6éman, demon, Bd. 1, 24, 27; 28, 7; 80, 29; Zs. 9, 6,

Albfirz m., Bd. 5, 3-5; 7,15n; 8, 2, 5; 12, (1-4,) 7n, 8, 9; 18, 1, 4; 19,15; 20,1, 4, 8; 24, 28; Zs, 6, 16, 20, 213 7, I, 5-7-

Alexander the Great, Int. 9, 11, 14, 16; Bd. 84, 8; Byt. 2, 190; 8, 34.

410

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Almsgiving never excessive, Sl. 10, 23; 12, 16.

Alvand m., Bd. 19, 3.

5, 3-5; 7,15n; 8, 2, 5; 12, (1-4,) 7n, 8, 9; 18, 1, 4; 19,15; 20,1, 4, 8; 24, 28; Zs, 6, 16, 20, 213 7, I, 5-7-

Alexander the Great, Int. 9, 11, 14, 16; Bd. 84, 8; Byt. 2, 190; 8, 34.

410

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Almsgiving never excessive, Sl. 10, 23; 12, 16.

Alvand m., Bd. 19, 3.

Ambergris, origin of, Bd. 19, 12.

Amerdad, angel, Byt. 2, 59 n.

Amerédad, angel, Bd. 1, 26; 9, 2; 27, 24; 30, 29; Zs. 8, 1; Byt. 3, 29; SI. 9, 8; 18, 14; 15, 3,

5, 25,29; 22,7; 28,1; month,

Bd. 25, 20. Ami r., Bd. 20, 8. Am( r., Bd. 20, 8n, 28n. Amfl, town, Bd. 20, 27n. Anahid, planet, Bd. 5, 1; angel, Bd. 82,8. See Abin, Avan. Anfhita, angel, Bd. 19, rn; SI. 11,

4n.

Anangbad, man, Bd. 82, rn.

Anastokb, man, Bd. 31, 9.

Andar, demon, Bd. 1, 27; 38, (8,) 10; 80, 29. See Indar.

Anér, land, Bd. 15, 29.

Angels, Bd. 15, 13; 30, 28; Zs. 1, 0; Byt. 3, 31; SI. 7, 7; 8, 4; 12, 243 18, 8n, 30; fight with demons, Bd. 8, 26; 6, 1; their flowers, Bd. 27, 24; prayers and offerings to them, SI. 9, 10- 123 11, 4; 12, 8-10; their gifts, SI. 22, 8-30; their qualities, Sl. 23, 2-4.

Angra-mainyu, Bd. 1, rn, 3n; 28, In

Animals, origin and classes, Bd. 10, 33. 14, 3-31; Zs. 9, 1, 7-24; chiefs of, Bd. 24, 2-13; eating dead matter, Sl. 2, 109-111; not to be killed, SI. 10, 8, 9.

Aniran, angel, Bd. 27, 24; Sl. 22, 30; 28, 4; day, Bd. 26, 7.

Anquetil Duperron, Int. 24, 25, 28.

Antares, star, Bd. 2, 7n; SI. 14,

5n.

Aoiwra, Av., Bd. 81, 6n.

Aoshnara, man, Bd. 81, 3 n.

Apaésh, demon, Bd. 7, 8, ro, 12; 28, (393) Zs. 6, 9, 11, 13.

Aparsén m., Bd. 12, 2, (9,) 12-14, 21, 22, 29, 30, 31n; 20, 16, 17, ai, 22; 24, 28; Zs. 7, 7.

Ape, origin of, Bd. 28, 1; pollutes, SL. 2, 61.

Apostasy, Sl. 17, 7.

Apostate, Byt. 3, 56, 57; SI. 9, 3.

Aquarius, Bd. 3, 2; Byt. 8, r1n3 SI. 21, 2.

Arabic, Int. 14.

Arabs, Bd. 15, 28; 28, 3; 29,4; 34, on, 9; Byt. 3, 9, 51.

Arag lake, Bd. 19, 15.

—r., Bd. 7, 15, 173 20, (1, 3-8,) gn, 22n, 28n; 21, 3; 24, 26; Zs. 6, 20n; Byt. 3, 17 n.

Araidar, man, Bd. 82, rn.

Aral sea, Bd. 19, 15n; 20, 20n; 23, 4n,

Arang r., Bd. 20, 8n; Zs. 6, 200; Byt. 8, 5n.

Arang-i Biradan, man, Bd. 82, 7.

Arask, demon, Bd. 28, 14, 16.

Arast, demon, Bd. 28, 32.

Arasti, man, Bd. 82, 2; 38, 1.

gracwisanasy man, Bd. 81, 23.

Araxes r., Bd. 20, 8n, 13n, 220, 28n; Zs. 6, 20n; Byt. 8, 5n.

Archangels, Bd. 1, (26n;) 2,9; 8, 2, 4; 30, 23; Byt.1,0; 2, 64; 3, 9, 31; Sl. 18, 8, 24, 46; 18, 4; 22, 31; their flowers, Bd. 27, 24; subdue demons, Bd. 30, 29; prayers and offerings to them, Byt. 3, 28, 37; SI.9, 103 11, 4; 19,7; 20,1; means of serving them, SI. 15, 1-30; their gifts, Sl. 22, 1-7; their qualities, SI.

23, 1.

Arch-fiends, Bd. 8, 2; 28, 1-13; 80, a9; SI]. 10, qn; 12, 111.

Ard, angel, Bd. 22, 4n; 27, 24; Sl. 23, 4. See Arshisang.

Arda-fravash, angel, Byt. 2, 59n.

Ardai-fravard, angel, SI. 11, 4.

Ardakhshir-i Kai, king, Bd. 31, 29n; Byt. 1, 5; 2,17.

Ardakhshtr-i Papakan, Int. 11, 193 Bd. 81, 30n; Byt. 2, 18.

8, 2; 28, 1-13; 80, a9; SI]. 10, qn; 12, 111.

Ard, angel, Bd. 22, 4n; 27, 24; Sl. 23, 4. See Arshisang.

Arda-fravash, angel, Byt. 2, 59n.

Ardai-fravard, angel, SI. 11, 4.

Ardakhshir-i Kai, king, Bd. 31, 29n; Byt. 1, 5; 2,17.

Ardakhshtr-i Papakan, Int. 11, 193 Bd. 81, 30n; Byt. 2, 18.

Ardavahist, angel, Bd. 1, 26; 81, 38; Sl. 11, 4n3; 18, 143 15, 3, 5, 12, 13; 22, 3; 28, 1; month, Bd. 25, 20. See Ashavahist.

Ardavan, king, Bd. 31, 30n.

Arda-Viraf, man, SI. 21, on.

Ardibahist, angel, Byt. 2, 59n. See Ardavahist.

Aredh6-manusha m., Bd. 12, ron.

Aredf@s sin, Sl.1, 1,2; 7, 30; 1,1,

2; 16,4, 5.

Arédvivsfir, angel, S]. 11, 4; 28, an; water, Bd. 7, 15n; 18,5; 18, I, 3,10; 21,4n; 24, 17, 26; 27,4; Zs. 6, 18.

Arezfir m., Bd. 8, an; 12, 2, (8;)

INDEX.

4It

Byt. 8, 2an; SI. 10,7n; 18,

19.

Arezfir-bfim m., Bd. 12, 2, 16.

Argasp, king, Bd. 12, 32; Byt. 2, 49n; 3, 9.

Aries, Bd. 2, 2; 5, 6; 7, 2; 25, 21; SI. 21, 2.

Aris, prince, Bd. 81, 25n.

Ariz, fish, Bd. 14, 26; 18, 5; 24, 13.

Armaiti, angel, Bd. 15, 6n. See Spendarmad.

Armenia, Bd. 20, ron.

Armést, SI. 2, (98n;) 6, 1.

Armin, prince, Bd. 81, 25n.

Arnig-bareda, woman, Bd. 82, 7n.

Arsaces I, Byt. 2, rgn.

Arsacidans, Int. 11. See Askanians.

Arshisang, angel, Bd. 22, 4; 27, 24n; Sl. 22,25; 28, 4n. See Ard.

Artakhshatar son of Papak, Bd. 81, 30; Byt.2, 18n; — the Kay4n,

Bd. 81, 30; 34,8n. See Ardakhshfr. Artaxerxes Longimanus, Bd. 84, 8n;

Byt. 2, 17n. — Mnemon, Bd. 84, 8n; Byt. 2,

170,

— Ochus, Bd. 84, 8n.

Arfim, land, Bd. 12, 16; 18, 153; 15, 29; 20, 10; SI. 6, 7n.

Arvand r., Zs. 6, (20;) Byt. 8, 5, 21, 38.

Arzah, region, Bd. 5, 8,9; 11, 3; 28,1; Byt. 8, 47.

Asam, man, Bd. 29, 5.

Ashard r., Bd. 20, 20.

Ashdshagahad, man, Bd. 29, 1.

Ashavahist, angel, Bd. 27, 24; 380, 29; Sl.11, 4. See Ardavahist.

Ashavanghu, man, Bd. 29, rn.

Ashavazd, man, Bd. 29, 6.

Ashem -Ahurem -mazdaim ch., SI.

18, 5.

Ashem-vohf, Byt. 2, 59; SI. 3, 35; 4,14; 5, 2, 5,7; 10, 5n, 24, 35; 12, 21, 32; 18,1; 19,5; text and trans., Bd. 20, 2.

Ashévahist, man, Bd. 88, 11.

Ashéozust, bird, Bd. 19, 19.

Asia Minor, Bd. 18, 15n.

Ask, king, Byt. 2, rgn.

Askanians, Bd. 31, 30n; 34,9; Byt. 2,19. See Arsacidans.

Askarfim nask, Sl. 10, 25n. Sakadfim.

See

Asmfn, angel, Bd. 27, 24; SI. 22, 27; 28, 4.

Asnavand m., Bd. 12, 2, (263) 17, 73; Zs. 11, 9.

Asparég m., Bd. 12, 29, 36.

Asparfim nask, Sl. 10, 21n. HAsparam.

Aspengargak, demon, Bd. 7, 12; 28, 39. See Spéngargak.

Aspikan, Bd. 82, rn.

Aspiyan, Bd. 81, 4,7, 8.

Assaults, S].1, rn, an.

Assyrians, Int. 12, 13; Byt. 3, 5.

Astad, angel, Bd. 27, 24; Byt. 2, 59n; 8, 32; SI.17, 4,5n; 22, 26; 23, 4.

— yast, Byt. 1, 6.

Astaothwanem hi, SI. 18, 1.

Astarabad, town, Bd. 12, 32n.

Ast6-vidad, demon, Bd. 3, 21, 22; 28, 35; Zs. 4, 4.

Astuyé ha, SI. 13, 1.

Asfirik, man, Bd. 381, 19.

As@ristan, land, Bd. 81, 39; Byt.

See

3, 5.

Asvast lake, Bd. 22, 1, 7.

Asvini, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3n.

Atareméa ch., SI. 18, 26.

Astaothwanem hi, SI. 18, 1.

Astarabad, town, Bd. 12, 32n.

Ast6-vidad, demon, Bd. 3, 21, 22; 28, 35; Zs. 4, 4.

Astuyé ha, SI. 13, 1.

Asfirik, man, Bd. 381, 19.

As@ristan, land, Bd. 81, 39; Byt.

See

3, 5.

Asvast lake, Bd. 22, 1, 7.

Asvini, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3n.

Atareméa ch., SI. 18, 26.

Ataré6, angel, Bd. 27, 24; SI. 22, 9; 28, 2; day, Bd. 25, 11.

— Aftharmazd, com., SI. 1, 3.

— béndak, man, Bd. 38, 1.

— dad, man, Bd. 38, 3.

— frébag, man, Byt.1, 7; Sl. 1, 3n.

— — nésaf, com., Sl. 1, 3.

— Mitré, man, Byt. 1, 7.

— pad, man, Byt. 1, 7.

— — i Dad-farukh, com., S].1, 4n.

— — i Maraspendan, priest, Bd. 33, 3, 113 Byt.1,1n; 2,18; SI. 8, 23; 10, 28n, 40; 15, 16.

— — i Zaratfstan, priest, Zs. 1, 19n; Sl. 8, (10.) .

— patak4n, land, Bd. 12, 26; 20, 13n, 23, 25; 22, 2; 20, 12; Zs. 11, 9; Byt.1, 7.

— tarsah, man, Bd. 31, 29.

Atas nyfyis, S1.7, 4n; 20, rn.

— i Vahram, see Vahram fire.

Atbrat, man, Bd. 31, 27; Si. 22,

3an.

Athwya, man, Bd. 81, 4n.

Atonement for sin, SI. 8, 1n, 4n, 13, 15, 16, 19, 20, 23.

Atrat, man, Bd. 81, 27n.

AGharmazd, Zs. 6, 10; Byt. 2, 64;

412

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Sl. 8, 13, 21, 233 10, 29; 18, 28; 18, 8; 18,4; 20, 11, 18; 22, 32; the creator, Bd. 1, 0-3, 6-12, 23, 25, 28; 2,13 7, 153 18, 5; 15, 3, 4, 6, 7, 23; 17, 1, 33 18, 3, 5; 19, 9, 10, 36; 20, 1, 5,6; 21, 3; 24, 25, 26; 28, 1-3,17; Zs. 1,0, 20, 23, 24; 2, 7, 8; 10, 4, 5; Byt. 1, 0; SI. 10, 28n; 12, 2; 14, 4; 18,1; 22, 8, 15, 23; contends with ; Aharman, Bd. 1, 13, 15-18, 20-22; 8, 2, 4,6, 18,19, 21; 4, 2-4; 6, 2,4; 7,9; Zs. 1, 2, 4, 7, 9,113 8,1, 2; 4, 3,10; 5, 13 instituted rites, Bd. 2, 9; chief of spirits, Bd. 24, rn; SI. 1l, 4n; archangel, Bd. 37, 24; Sl. 18, 14; 15, 5, 7, 8; 22, 1; 28, 1; religion of, Bd. 28, 4, 5; talks with Zaratfist, Bd. 80, 4, 5; Zs. 11, ron; Byt. 1, 1-5; 2, 1-63; 3, 1-62; SI]. 9, 8, 14; 10, 26; 12, 29, 32; 16, 1-30; 17, 1-6, 8, 11-14; worshipped, Bd. 80, 23, 28; Zs. 10, 1; Byt. 2, 643 8, 28, 37; SI. 18, 18, 24, 32, 46; arranges the future existence, Bd. 30, 24, 27, ( 29, 30, 323; his nature, Zs. 1, 13-17; 5, 4; Sl. 28, 1-4; foretells future events, Byt. 1, 3-5; 2, 15-22, 24-63; 8, 1-62. AGharmazd day, Bd. 8, 12; 26, 7, 10, 13; Zs.2, 1. — king, Bd. 83, 2. — planet, Bd. 5,1; Zs. 4, 7. Aurvadasp, man, Bd. 82, 1. Aurvad-aspa, king, Bd. $1, 28n. Afirvakhsh, man, Bd. $1, 26. A(Grvatad-nar, man, Bd. 32, 5, 6, 7n. Adirvazist fire, Zs. 11, 1, 4. See Urvazist. A@shabin gah, Bd. 25, 9. Afishbam, man, Bd. 81, 33, 34. Afishdastar m., Bd. 18, 2, 15. AGsind6m m., Bd. 12, 2,6; 18, 5; 18, 11n. Afiséfrid, rite, Byt. 2, 45; SI. 18,

30. Afispésin, man, Bd. 39, 1.

A@stGvat gatha, Sl. 10, 6. See Ustavaiti. Afist6frid, rite, Sl. 12, 10, See

Yast6frid. Afizav, man, Bd. 81, 28.

Afizérin gih, Bd. 25, 9, 10; SI. 7, In; 31, 4, 5.

Afiz6bé, king, Bd. 31, 23, 24, 353 34, 6n; SI. 10, 28n.

Afizvarak, man, Bd. 31, 41n.

Avad-mizdem ch., S]. 18, 48.

39, 1.

A@stGvat gatha, Sl. 10, 6. See Ustavaiti. Afist6frid, rite, Sl. 12, 10, See

Yast6frid. Afizav, man, Bd. 81, 28.

Afizérin gih, Bd. 25, 9, 10; SI. 7, In; 31, 4, 5.

Afiz6bé, king, Bd. 31, 23, 24, 353 34, 6n; SI. 10, 28n.

Afizvarak, man, Bd. 31, 41n.

Avad-mizdem ch., S]. 18, 48.

Avan, angel, Bd. 37, 24; SI. 28, 10; 28, 2; day, Sl. 11, 4n; month, Bd. 25, 7, 10, 20; Byt. 3, 16; SI. 11, 4n. See Ab4n.

Avardad, month, Bd. 25, 20n. See

. Horvadad.

Avarethrabau, man, SI. 10, 28n.

Avarnak, man, Bd. 81, 37, 38.

Avar-shatr6, land, Bd. 81, 37, 38.

Avdem, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Avésar, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Avesta, Int. 9, (10,) 54, 55, 58) 70-72; Bd. 14, 26; 19, 16, 19; Byt. 8, 45n; Sl. 18, 150; — texts, Int. 10, 11, 22, 24, 43, 47, 52, 53, 67, 68; Sl. 6, rn; —and Zand, Int. 10; SL 10, 25, 29; — letters, Int. 15, 16, 31, 66; — MSS., Int.a1, 27-29, 48, 57, 66; referred to, Bd. 14, 2; Sl. 1,15 2, 55,97, 118; 9, 8; 15, 1; 17, 8, 9; words quoted, SI. 5, 2, 5,7; 7,8; 9, 12; 10, 37; 18, 1, 4-14, 16-26, 28-36, 38-40, 42, 45-515 passages quoted, Sl. 8, 22; 11, 6; 18, 6, 8, 43; prayers, SI. 9, 9, 10; 10, 5, 19, 26n; 14, a, 3; 19, 14.

Avi-apam ch., Sl. 18, 40.

Avéirist sin, Sl.1, 1,2; 11, 1,2; 16,

3, 5

Avrak, lun. man., Bd. 2, 33 7, 13 Zs. 6, 1.

Ayanghad, man, Bd. 82, rn.

Ayazem, man, Bd. 83, 1.

Az, demon, Bd. 28, 27, 28; 80, 30;

_ Si. 28, 171, .

Azad-mard, com., SI. 1, 4n.

Azané, man, Byt. 2, 3n.

Az-i Dahak, king, Bd. 28, 2; 29, 8; 81, (6n,) 7n; Zs. 2, 10; Byt. 2, 62; 8, 52n, 56-58, 60; SI. 20, 18. See Bévaradsp and Dahak.

Bactria, Bd. 15, 29n; 20, gn. Bactrian, Byt. 8, 17n. Bad, angel, Byt. 2, 59n. See Vad. Badghés, land, Bd. 12, rgn.

INDEX.

413

Bagh nask, SI. 10, 26.

Baghan yast, Sl. 18, rn, gn. See Bagh.

Bag-yasn6 nask, SI. 13, 17.

Bahak, man, Bd. 88, 1, a, 6, 8.

Bahak, man, Bd. 38, 3.

Bahman, angel, Byt. 2, 59n; king, Bd. 81, a9n; Byt. 3, 17n. See Vohfiman.

— Pfngyah, SI. 19, rn.

— yast, Byt. 3, 11n; contents, Int. 50-52; age, Int. 53-56; MSS., Int. 56; P&z. version, Int. 57; Pers. version, Int. 57-59; German trans., Int. 59.

Bahram, angel, Byt. 2, 59n; king, Byt. 8, 14n; — fire, Zs. 11, 6. See Vahram.

— K6pin, man, Byt. 8, r4n.

Bak4n yast6 nask, Sl. 12, 17n. Bag-yasné.

Bakht-afrid, com., Byt. 1, 7; SI. 1, 4n; 20, 11.

Bakhtiyari m., Bd. 12, gon.

Bakht-tan m., Bd. 12, 40.

Baké nask, SI. 10, 26n. See Bagh.

Bakyir m., Bd. 12, 2, 20.

Balkh, town, Bd. 24, 15n; Byt. 8, 17n; river, Bd. 12, 9n; 20, 7, gn, 22.

Bambi, land, Byt. 3, 17.

Bamdad, man, Byt. 1, 6; 2, 21.

Bami, town, Byt. 8, 17n.

Bamikan, town, Bd. 20, 22.

Bamiy4n, Bd. 20, 22n; Byt. 8, r7n.

Bamm, town, Byt. 3, 17n.

Bareshniim, rite, Byt. 2, 36; SI. 2, (6,) 60n, 65n, 70; 8, 24; 10, ton, r2n; 12, 2an, 24n, 25n, 26n; 17, 5n.

Bares6m, see Sacred twigs.

Baresémdan, see Sacred twig-stand.

Barm§yfin, man, Bd. 81, 8.

Baréshand Afiharmazd, com., SI. 1,

4n.

Barzfi Qiyamu-d-din, Zs. 9, rn.

Baungha, man, Bd. 38, 1 n.

Bayak, demon, Bd. 31, 6.

2, (6,) 60n, 65n, 70; 8, 24; 10, ton, r2n; 12, 2an, 24n, 25n, 26n; 17, 5n.

Bares6m, see Sacred twigs.

Baresémdan, see Sacred twig-stand.

Barm§yfin, man, Bd. 81, 8.

Baréshand Afiharmazd, com., SI. 1,

4n.

Barzfi Qiyamu-d-din, Zs. 9, rn.

Baungha, man, Bd. 38, 1 n.

Bayak, demon, Bd. 31, 6.

Baz, Sl. 3, 6n. See Inward prayer.

Bazai sin, SI. 1,1, 23 11,1, 23 16, 5.

Bazdyvana sea, Bd. 24, 33.

Bear, origin of, Bd. 28, 1.

Beating the innocent, SI. 10, 17.

Beh-afrin, woman, Bd. 81, 30 n.

Beneficent spirit, Zs. 1, 0; SI. 18, 28, 35, 36.

See

Berezi-savang fire, Bd. 17, 1,3; Zs. ll, rn. Besa, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3. Best existence, SI. 6, 3; 10, 26; 12, 2; 15,11. See Gar6dman. Bévarasp, Bd. 12, 31; 29, 9; Byt. 8, 3n, 55, 56n. See Az-i Dahak.

Birds, classification, Bd. 10, 4; 14, 11, 23-25; Zs. 8, 9-15, 23; — of prey, Bd. 14, 30; chiefs of, Bd. 24, 11, 29; destroy Nasts, Sl. 2,5; not to be killed, $1. 10, 9.

Bis herb, Bd. 14, 22; 27,1; Zs. 9,

22.

Bisan, Bd. 12, 35.

Bitak, man, Bd. 81, 14.

Bivandangha, man, Bd. 29, rn.

Bodily refuse, Byt. 2, 36; Sl. 3, (30n;) 15, 26.

Béd6zéd sin, Sl. 2, 39 n.

Bombay, Byt. 8, 17 n; SI. 3, 6n.

B6r-t6ra, man, Bd. 31, 7.

Bradarvakhsh, man, Byt. 2, 3 n.

Bradr6k-résh, man, Byt. 2, 3 n.

Bradréyisnd, man, Byt. 2, 3 n.

Brazen age, Byt. 2, 18.

Buddha, Bd. 28, 34 n.

Buddhists, Bd. 20, 22 n.

Bukhar, land, Byt. 3, 17.

Bukhirans, Byt. 3, 17.

Bull's urine (g6méz), SI. 2, 67, 92, 98, 105, 112, 1133 8, 13, 21, 22, 25; 10, 39; 12, 24, 27.

Bumyé m., Bd. 12, 16 n.

Bunda, lun. man., Bd. &, 3.

Bundahis, Int. 22; contents, Int. a3, 24; MSS., Int. 24-41; Av. original, Int. 24, 43; Zs. 9, rn, 16n; French trans., Int. a4, a5; German trans., Int. 25, 26; Gug. trans., Int. 43-45; Paz. version, Int. 30, 31; longer text, Int. 32-41; contents of long text, Int. 35-37; extent of texts, Int. 34, 35, 413; age, Int. 41-43; Zs. 10, 5n. See also Sad-dar.

Barg, angel, Bd. 7, 3; 19, 15; Zs.

9 30 Burying the dead, SI. 2, 9; 18, 19. BGrzin-Mitr6 fire, Bd. 12, 18, 34; 17, 7n, 8; Zs. 6, 22; 11, 8-10; Byt. 8, 30, 37, 40. Bfishasp, demoness, Bd. 28, 26; SI. 18, 43.

414

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Bfit, demon, Bd. 28, 34. Butter, see Sacred butter.

Cake, see Sacred cake.

Cancer, Bd. 23, 2; 5, 6; 7, 1, 23 34,2; Zs. 4, 8; 6,1, 2; SI. 21, 2, 5.

Capricornus, Bd. 2, 2; 5, 6; 34, gn; Zs. 4, 10; Byt. 3, 11n; SI. 21, 2, 7, 8.

Carriers of the dead, single, SI. 2, 84, 106, 108; one with a dog, Sl. 2, 7; two, Sl. 2, 6-8, 84, 85; four, Sl. 2, 6n; 10, 10.

Caspian sea, Bd. 18, 15n; 15, 28n, 29n; 17, 5n; 19, 15n; 20, 8n, 24n, 27n; 32, 4n; $1, 21 n; Byt. 2, 63n; 3, r9n.

Ceremonial (yazisn), Byt. 2, 37; 8, 37; SI. 8, 35n; 5, 3; 8, 4; 9, 5,11; 18, 25; 19, 8.

Ceremonies, Sl. 2, 38; 12, 31; — after a death, Sl. 6, 3, 4; 8,6n; 12, 5, 31; 17, 2-6; — of nine nights, Sl]. 12, 26 n; see Bareshnim.

Ch in Oriental words is printed K.

Chaldzo-Pahlavi, Int. 19-21.

Chaldee, Int. 14, 19.

Chapter (ha), SI. 10, 6n; 18, 1, 5, 6,

31, 34.

Ceremonies, Sl. 2, 38; 12, 31; — after a death, Sl. 6, 3, 4; 8,6n; 12, 5, 31; 17, 2-6; — of nine nights, Sl]. 12, 26 n; see Bareshnim.

Ch in Oriental words is printed K.

Chaldzo-Pahlavi, Int. 19-21.

Chaldee, Int. 14, 19.

Chapter (ha), SI. 10, 6n; 18, 1, 5, 6,

31, 34.

Chiefs of creation, Bd. 24, 1-24, 28, 29; spiritual, Bd. 29, 1, 2, 5.

Chieftainships, spiritual, Bd. 29, 1 ; S]. 13, 29 ; temporal, SI. 18, 11, 15, 34, 41, 44; 19, 5.

Childbirth, S}. 10, 15; 12, 7.

Children, advantage of, Sl. 10, 22; 12, 15; illegitimate, SI. 10, 21; 12, 14.

China, Bd. 81, 3 n.

Christian, Byt. 2, 19n; 8, 3n; SI.

6, 7.

Christianity, Byt. 2, 19 n; 8, 3n.

Chronology of Iran, Bd. 84, 1-9.

Classes of people, SI. 18, 9, 15, 34.

Clothing corpses, Sl. 3, 9, 95; 10, 40; 12,4; — for spirits, Bd. 80, 28; SI.17, 4,5 0; purifying, 81. 2, 95, 97-99.

Commentary, see Zand.

Commentators, SI. 1, 3, 4; quoted, Byt. 1,7; 8, 3, 16; SI. 2, 1, a, 6, 11, 12, 39, 44, 56, 57, 64, 73, 74, 80-82, 86, 88, 89, 107, 115, 118, 119; 8, 13; 5, 5,6; 6,

4-6; 8, 13, 17, 18, 23; 10, 40; 14, 5; 20, 15.

Confession of sin, SI. 8, 2, 4 n, (8-10.)

Conflicts of evil, with the sky, Bd 6, 1-4; Zs. 5, 1-53; with water, Bd. 7, 1-13; Zs. 6, 1-23; with the earth, Bd. 8, 1-5; Zs. 7, 1- 12; with plants, Bd. 9, 1-6; Zs. 8, 1-6; with animals, Bd. 10, 1-4; Zs. 9, 1-24; with man, Zs. 10, 1-6; with fire, Zs. 1, I-10.

Constantinople, Int. 12.

Consulting the good, SI. 10, 28.

Contagion, Sl. 2, 59, (60.)

Copper age, Byt. 3, 19.

Corpse, carrying, $1.2, 6-11, 83-953 10, 10, 33; lowering, Sl. 2, 23- 29; moving, Sl. 2, 63, 65, 66, 68-71; thrown into water, SI. 2, 76-78; 9,7; bringing out of water, Sl. 2, 79-94; in rain, SI. 2,9, 10, 94; clothing for, SIL. 2, 9, 95; 10, 40; 12,4. See also Pollution.

Corpse chamber, Byt. 2, 36.

Creation of prototypes, Bd. 1, 8; Zs. 1, 5; of archangels, Bd. 1, 23, 26; of the world, Bd. 1, 25, 28; Zs. 1, 20; of demons, Bd. 1, 10, 24, 27; of time, Zs. 1, 24.

Crowing of a hen, SI. 10, 30.

Cyrus, Int. 9; Bd. 34, 8n.

Dabistan, book, Byt. 1, 1 n.

Dadak nask, SI. 12, 4n.

Dadakih-i Ash6vahist6, man, Bd. 33, 10.

D§&d-arda, man, Bd. 88, 3.

Dad-Afiharmazd, com., Byt. 1,7; 8, , 16; Sl.1,4n.

Dad-farukh, com., SI. 1, 4n.

DAdgun, man, SI. 1, 4 n.

DAadirad, man, Bd. 38, 3.

Dadistan-i dinik, book, Int. 32, 33, 46, 47; Bd. 15, 22n; 29, 5n, 6n; author of, Bd. 38, ron, Irn.

Daa-i veh, com., SI. 1, 4 n.

Dahak, king, Bd. 17, 5; 20, 23; 29,9; 30, 16; 31, 5-7; 34, 5; Byt. 3, 34; Sl.10, 28n. See Az-i Dahak.

Dah-hémist, rite, Byt. 2, 59 n.

Dahman afringan, S1.18, 43; 17, §n.

INDEX. 415

Dai, land, Bd. 15, 29.

Daitik m., see Kakad-i Daittk.

—r., Bd. 20, 7,13, 23n; 24, 14; 29, 5n; Zs. 3, 6.

Dakhma, Byt. 2, 36n; SI. 3, (6,) gn, ron, 11n, 75n. See Depository for the dead.

Damaghin, town, Bd. 20, 18n; 29,

14n.

Damdad nask, Int. 24, 48; Zs. 9, (1,) 16; SI. 10, 22; 12, 5.

Damnak, man, Bd. 81, 36, 39.

Daraga r., Bd. 20, 7, 32; 24, 15.

Darai, king, Bd. 88, 2; 34, 8.

3, 6.

Dakhma, Byt. 2, 36n; SI. 3, (6,) gn, ron, 11n, 75n. See Depository for the dead.

Damaghin, town, Bd. 20, 18n; 29,

14n.

Damdad nask, Int. 24, 48; Zs. 9, (1,) 16; SI. 10, 22; 12, 5.

Damnak, man, Bd. 81, 36, 39.

Daraga r., Bd. 20, 7, 32; 24, 15.

Darai, king, Bd. 88, 2; 34, 8.

Dargim r., Bd. 80, 7, 14.

Darius Codomannus, Int. 24; Bd. 34, 8 n.

— Hystaspes, Int. 9.

Darspét m., Bd. 12, 2, 20n.

Dashtanistan, SI. 2,75; 8, 4 n, (6 n,) Irn.

Dast4n, man, Bd. 81, 37.

Dastfir, Bd. 18, 36. See Highpriest.

Ddavad m., Bd. 12, 29, 30.

Davans, man, SI. 12, 29.

Dayrid r., Bd. 20, 26 n.

Days, lengths of, Bd. 25, 3-6 ; names of angels applied to them, Bd. 27, 243; Sl. 22, 1-30; 28, 1-4.

Dead matter, Byt. 2, 36; SI. 3, (30 N,) 32, 35) 53, 73, 77) 78, 102, 104-107, 109-1123; 10, 12, 203; 12, 13.

Deaf and dumb, SI. 5, 7; 86, 1.

Deana m., Bd. 12, 30 n.

Death, accidental, SI. 10, 32; on a bedstead, SI. 3, 13; 17, 14; on a bridge, S]. 2, 20; on a carpet, Sl. 2, 101; on a cloth, SI. 2, 123 on the ground, SI. 2, 14-16; in a hall, SI. 2, 45; in a house, SI. 2, 38-44; ina jar, SI. 2, 31; on a roof, SI. 2,18, 21; in a room, Sl. 2, 22; when seated, Sl. 2, 24; by strangulation, Sl. 2, 23; 17, 13; on a tree, SI. 3, 25-29; in a vessel, Sl. 9, 7; in a wilderness, SI. 2, 47. ‘

Demonized men, SI. 17, 7.

Demons, Bd. 5, 7; Zs. 3, 4; Byt. 2, 40, 62; 8, 9, 21, 335 Sl. 9, 5, 8; 12, 12; 15, 6; 17, 3; origin, Bd. 1, 10; end, Bd. 1, 21, 22; 6, 4; 80, 29-32; names, Bd. 1, 24, 275 8, 3, 6-9, 21; 7, 8, 10,

12; 28, 7-20, 23-36, 39, 40, 42; 30, 29, 30; Zs. 4, 4; 6,9, 11,13; council, Bd, 3, 1-9; 12, 8; incursion, Bd. 8, ro, 21, 25, 26; 7, 8,12; mislead men, Bd. 15, 9, 12, 17, 18; use nail-parings as weapons, Bd. 19, 19, 20; SI]. 12, 6; opposed by cock, Bd. 19, 33; SI. 10, 30 n; beget the ape, bear, and negro, Bd. 28, 1, 2; described, Bd. 38, 1-46; figures of, Byt.1, 4; 2, 16; — with dishevelled hair, Byt. 1, 5; 2, 22, 24-29, 36; 8, 1, 6, 13, 345 discomfited, Byt. 2, 16, 17; 8, 40, 413 reside in idol-temples, Byt. 3, 30, 36, 37; attack Zaratfst, S110, 4; 12,115; in the north, SI. 10, 7; 12,18; 14, 2n,

Demon worship, SI. 8, 4; 14, 1.

— worshippers, Byt. 3, 24.

Depository for the dead, SI. 2, 75; 18,19. See Dakhma and Receptacle,

Destroyer, Bd. 2, 4,8; 3, 1, 23; 7, 1; 20,6; 27,1; Zs. 7, 3; SL. 10, 3; 18, 30.

Development of animals, Bd. 10, 2, 3; 14, 3-7; Zs. 9, 7-9; fire, Zs. 11, 1-10; lakes, Zs. 6, 7, 8, 22; land, Bd. 11,2; Zs. 7, 8-11; man, Bd. 15, 1-5; Zs. 10, 3-6; minerals, Zs. 10, 2; mountains, Bd. 8, 1-5, 12, 1, 2, 11, 28, 413 Zs. 7, 1-7; plants, Bd. 9, 2-6; 10, 1; 14, 1, 2; Zs. 8, 1-5; 9, 1-6; rivers, Bd. 7, 15-17; Zs. 6, 20, 21; seas, Bd. 7, 6, 143 Zs. 6, 6-8, 14-19.

Deyrid r., Bd. 20, 7 n, 120.

Diglat r., Bd. 20, 7, 10, 12, 26; Zs.

6, zon.

Dilman town, Bd. 20, 12 n.

Dimavand m., Bd, 12, 29, 31; 20, 27; 28, 9; Byt. 8, 55.

Din, angel, Bd. 27, 24; Byt. 3, 59 n; month, Bd. 25, 3, 11, 20. See Dinéd.

6, 20, 21; seas, Bd. 7, 6, 143 Zs. 6, 6-8, 14-19.

Deyrid r., Bd. 20, 7 n, 120.

Diglat r., Bd. 20, 7, 10, 12, 26; Zs.

6, zon.

Dilman town, Bd. 20, 12 n.

Dimavand m., Bd, 12, 29, 31; 20, 27; 28, 9; Byt. 8, 55.

Din, angel, Bd. 27, 24; Byt. 3, 59 n; month, Bd. 25, 3, 11, 20. See Dinéd.

Dini-vagarkard, book, Zs. 9, 10; Byt.1,1n; 3,25n; SI.9,9n; 10, 3n, 4M, 13 n, 21 n, 25n, 26 n, 28n, 29n; 12, 4n, 170.

Dinkard, book, SI. 10, 22n, 23n; last editor of, Int. 64; Bd. 33, (11n;) SI. 8, 23; quoted, Zs. 9,1n; Byt.1,1n; 2,30,

416

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

19n; 8, 25 n, 430, 52N, 61 nj; Sl. 6,7n; 9,9n; 10, 3n,4n, 8n, 13 n, 21n, 25n, 26n, 28n, agn; 12, 4n, 170; 19, 10,

40D.

Diné, angel, S]. 22, 8, 15, 23, 24; 23, 4- See Din.

Din-pavan-Atar6, angel, Bd. 97, 24; SI. 23, 2, 4n.

Din-pavan-Diné, angel, Bd. 27, 24; SI. 28, 4.

Dtn-pavan-Mitr6, angel, Bd. 27, 24; SI. 28, 3, 4n.

Dirham, SI. 1, (2;) 8, (315) 10, 24; 11, 2; 16, rn, 2, 3.

Dist, span, Bd. 26, 3 0; SI. 16, 4. Dog’s gaze, Sl. 2, 1-3, 56, 63, 66, 71, 84, 85; 10, 10, 12, 32, 33.

Dé-hémist, rite, SI. 16, 6.

Dé-patkar, zod., Bd. 2, 2.

Doubtful actions, Sl. 10, 25, 27.

Dréné, see Sacred cake.

Drfigaskan, demon, Bd. 31, 6.

Drvasp, angel, SI. 11, 4.

Dualism, Int. 68-70.

Dfibasrfigéd nask, SI. 10, 13.

Dughddé or Diikdav, woman, Bd. 82, 103 SI. 10, 4; 12, 11.

Dl, zod., Bd. 2, 2.

Dfr4sr6b, man, Bd. 81, 13, 31; 82, 1; 38, 3, 4.

Dfirnamik, man, Bd. 38, 5.

Déréshasp, man, Bd. 31, 14, 27.

Dvisrfib or Dvasrfigad nask, see Dfibasrfigéd.

Dvazdah-hémast nask, Zs. 9, 1n; rite, Byt. 2, (593) 8, 25, 27, 37;

Eating in the dark, Sl. 9, 8.

Egypt, Int. 21; Bd. 20, 8n; Zs. 6, 20 n.

Erezishé m., Bd. 12, 12 n.

Erezraspa, man, Bd. 29, 1n.

Erezuré m., Bd. 12, 16 n.

Esther, book, Byt. 2, 17 n.

Etymander r., Bd. 20, 17 n.

Euphrates r., Bd. 20, ron, r1n; Byt. 8, 5 n.

Euxine, Bd. 18, 15n; 20, 8 n.

Ever-stationary, Sl. 6, 2; 18, 4n.

Evil eye, Bd. 28, 2 n, 14, 36.

Evil spirit, Zs. 1, 0; Sl. 8, 23; 12, 7; 18, 28; like the devil, Int. 69, 70; origin of evil, Bd. 1, 1, 9-22, 24; cast down, Bd. 8, 1-

5; 11, 6; 80, 29, 30, 32; Byt. 3, 35, 40; Sl. 18, 24, 36; comforted, Bd. 3, 6-8; described, Bd. 8, 9; 28, 40, 41; attacks creation, Bd. 8, 10-17, 21, 24a7; 6, 1-4; 8, 1; ll, 5; 18, 2,5; 19,10; 28,1, 3; misleads men, Bd. 15, 8,9; 28,6; ancestor of Dahak, Bd. 81, 6; his future evil-doings, Byt. 2, 54; 3, 24, 33. See Aharman.

Extinguishing fire, Sl. 7, 9; 20, 15.

Extirpation of sin, SI. 8, 18.

Ezra, book, Byt. 2, 17 n.

Faranak, woman, Bd. 31, 31n.

Farangis, woman, Bd. 81, r8n.

Farghanah, land, Bd. 20, 20n,

Farhank, woman, Bd. 81, 31-33.

Farman sin, Sl. 1, (1, 23) 2, 513 3, 27, 28; 4, 10, 14n; 5, 3n3 6, ys. 8, 9n; 11,1, (25) 16, 1,) 5.

Farukh6, com., SI. 1, 4n.

Fasa, town, Bd. 29, 14n.

Fayfim, land, Int. 21.

Feast, Byt. 2, 45. See Sacred feast.

Female things, Bd. 16, 6.

Ferid@n, king, Bd. 81, 7n, 31n. See Frédfin.

Farman sin, Sl. 1, (1, 23) 2, 513 3, 27, 28; 4, 10, 14n; 5, 3n3 6, ys. 8, 9n; 11,1, (25) 16, 1,) 5.

Farukh6, com., SI. 1, 4n.

Fasa, town, Bd. 29, 14n.

Fayfim, land, Int. 21.

Feast, Byt. 2, 45. See Sacred feast.

Female things, Bd. 16, 6.

Ferid@n, king, Bd. 81, 7n, 31n. See Frédfin.

Fiends, Bd. 2, 11; 80, 30; Zs.1, 5; 4,2; Byt. 8, 30, 37; Sl. 9, 8; 13, 10, 13; 18,5; 20, 9, 11; origin, Bd. 1, 10; destroyed, Bd. 2, 10; 19, 33, 34, 36; 20, 6; Zs. 10, 1; SI.18, 23, 32, 46; described, Bd. 28, 13, 14, 20, 33, 37; Christians, Byt. 3, 3, 5; serpents, Byt. 3, 52; of menstruation, Sl, 8, 29; become pregnant, S!.10, 7; 12, 18. See Arch-fiends.

Finger-breadth, meas., Bd. 21, 1; 26, (3n;) 27,25; Sl. 8,118; 4, 2,5; 10,1.

Fire, injured, Bd. 3, 24; described, Bd. 17, 1-9; Zs. ll, 1-10; reverence, Sl. 7, 4; 10, 37; to be kept up, SI. 12, 3, 12. See Sacred fire.

Fire-temple, see Abode of fires.

Fish, classification, Bd. 10, 4; 14, 12, 26; Zs. 9, 9-14; generation, Bd. 16,7; chief, Bd. 24,

13. Flowers, Bd. 27, 11, 24.

INDEX.

417

Fomalhaut, star, Bd. 2, 7n; SI. 11, 4n; 14, 5n.

Food not to be cast to the north at night, SI. 10, 7; 12, 18.

Foot, meas., Bd. 26, 3n; SI. 2, 18, 77> 78n; 8, 33; 21, 2, 5-8. Forgiveness of trespasses, SI. 10, 11.

Frabazu, meas., Bd. 26, 3n. Fradadafsh, region, Bd. 5, 8, 9; 11, 3; 25, 10; 28,1; Byt. 8, 47. Fradhakhsti, man, Bd. 29, 5n. Fragfizak, woman, Bd. 81, 14. Frabimrava, man, Bd, 82, 10. Frah-vakhsh-vindad, man, Bd. 88, 1. Frangrasyan, king, Bd. 31, 14n. Fraoreti ha, SI. 18, rn. Frarast, meas., Bd. 26, 3n. Frasast, cake, SI. 8, (32n;) 14, 3; 17,

51.

Frashiitar, man, Bd. 88, 3.

Frashakard, see Renovation.

Frashavakhsha, man, Bd. 88, rn.

Frashéstar, man, Bd. 83, 3n.

Frasty4v, king, Bd. 12, 20; 0, 17, 343 21,6; 80, 16; 81,(14,) 15, 18, 21, 22, 353 Zs. ll, ron; Byt. 2, 62; 3, 34; SI. 10, 8n.

Frasizak, woman, Bd. $2, 1n.

Frasp-i Kar, man, Bd. 81, 18, 19.

Frast, man, Bd. 38, 3. See next.

Frast, man, Bd. 31, 31n.

Frastuyé ha, SI. 13, 1.

Frat r., Bd. 20, 7,10, 11; Byt.8, 5.

Fravahar, see Guardian spirits.

Fravak, man, Bd. 15, 25, 30, 31; 31, 1,6; 32, 1n.

Fravakain, woman, Bd. 15, 25.

Fravarané ha, SI. 13, 1.

Fravardikan, see Guardian spirits’ days.

Fravardin, angel, Bd. 27, 24; SI. 22, 19; 28, 3; day, SI. 11, 4n; month, Bd. 8, 12; 25, 7, 13, 203 Zs. 2, 13 Sl}. 11, 4n.

Fravashis, Bd. 1, 8n; 2, ron. Guardian spirits.

Frazdan lake, Bd. 22, 1, 5; Byt. 8, 13.

Frazisak, man, Bd, 32, rn.

FrazQsak, man, Bd. 81, 14.

Frédfin, king, Bd. 20, 12n; 28, 3; 29, 9; 81, (7-11,) 14, 27, 323 82, 1n; 34,6; Byt. 3, 55, 56, 58; SI. 10, 28n; 20, 18; man, Bd. 38, 3.

Fréh-khfird, man, Bd. 81, 19.

{s]

See

Freh-mah, woman, Bd. 88, 7.

Freh-Srésh, man, Bd. 88, 11.

Frén, woman, Bd. 88, 5, 7n.

Freni, woman, Bd. 81, 33n; 32,50.

Friftér, demon, Bd. 28, 30.

Fris, man, Bd. 81, 13.

Frébak fire, Bd. 17, 5,7n; Zs. 11, 8-10; Byt. 8, 29, 30, 37, 40; SI. 18, 26.

Fruits, Bd. 27, 7, 23.

Fry4né6, man, Bd. 88, 3.

88, 7.

Freh-Srésh, man, Bd. 88, 11.

Frén, woman, Bd. 88, 5, 7n.

Freni, woman, Bd. 81, 33n; 32,50.

Friftér, demon, Bd. 28, 30.

Fris, man, Bd. 81, 13.

Frébak fire, Bd. 17, 5,7n; Zs. 11, 8-10; Byt. 8, 29, 30, 37, 40; SI. 18, 26.

Fruits, Bd. 27, 7, 23.

Fry4né6, man, Bd. 88, 3.

Fshfish6-mathra, ritual, SI. 18, 49n.

Future existence, Bd.1, 1, 7, 21; 2, 11; 11,6; 15,9; 80,1; Byt. 2,55; 8,62; SI. 8,7, 14; 9, 6; 10, 19.

Gadbwithw, demon, Bd. 81, 6.

Gadman-hémand m., Bd. 17, 5; Zs. 11, 9; Byt. 3, 29.

Gaévani, man, Bd. 29, 6n.

Gah, Bd. 2,8; 25,9n; SI. 7, 1n; 14, 4n. See Period.

Gahanbars, Bd, 25, 1; SI. 12, 31n; 18, (3n.) See Season-festivals.

Gak, man, Bd. 88, 3.

Gam, meas., Bd. 26, 3n.

Ganfvad m., Bd. 12, 29, 34; 19, 8.

Ganrak mainék, Bd. 1, rn, 3n. See Evil spirit.

Garafsa, lun. man., Bd. 3, 3.

Garédman, Bd. 80, 12, 13, 27; SI. 6, (3n,) 43 11, 3. See Heaven.

Garsasp, man, Bd. 28, 7n; 81, 26n, 27n.

Garsivaz, man, Bd. $1, 15n.

G§sanbar, see Season-festivals.

G§atha days, Bd. 5, 7; 25, 7n.

Gathas, hymns, Bd. 12, 7n; Zs. 11, ton; Byt. 2, 60; Sl. 9, ran; 10, 6; quoted, Zs. 5, 4; SI. 12, 28; mystic meaning, SI. 18, r- 49; extent, SI. 18, 50, 51.

Gau, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3

Gaus givya, Av., Sl. 2, 43n; 18, ran.

— hudhau, Av., Sl. 2, 43n; 8, 32n; 11, 4n. See Sacred butter.

Gayémard, man, Bd. 8, 1n, 14, 17, 19-23; 4,13 15, 1, 31; 24, 1; 80, 7,9; 31,1; 82, rn; 84, 1, a; Zs. 2, 6, 8; 8, 2; 4, 3, 5,9, 10; 5, 4; 10, 1-3; 11, 10n; SI. 10, 28n.

Gazdiim, zod., Bd. 2, 2.

Gefar-t6ra, man, Bd. 81, 7; 82, rn.

Géhan-bfin sea, Zs, 6, 14.

418

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Gél, lun. man., Bd. 3, 3.

Gemini, Bd. 2, 2; Sl. 21, 2.

Genealogies, Bd. 15, 24-30; $81, 1- 413 82, 1-10; 33, 1-11.

Generation, Bd. 16, 1-7.

Georgia, Bd. 20, 13n.

Gésbakht m., Bd. 12, 29.

Géti-kharid, rite, Bd. 30, (28;) SI. 5, 6; 12, 30; 17, 5n.

Ghazni, town, Bd. 28, §n.

Giklan sea, Bd. 80, 24.

Gilan, land, Bd. 12, 17.

Giw, man, Bd. 29, 6.

Glory, royal, Bd. 31, 32, 33; 34, 4.

Glossary, Av.-Pahl., SI. 10, 39 n.

— Huz.-Paz., Int. 16, 17.

God (‘celestial beings’), Bd. 17, 8; Zs, 11, 6; Sl. 1,0; 8, 22, 23; 10, 3, 5; 14,0; 19,7; 21, 4;

22, 30.

Gégésasp, com., Sl. 1, 3; 2, 74, 82, 119.

Goi, lun. man., Bd. 3, 3.

Gékard tree, Bd. 9, 6; 18, 1; 24,

37; 27, 4.

Gésihar, meteor, Bd. 5, 1; 28, 44; 30, 18, 31.

Golden age, Byt. 1, rn, 4; 2, 16.

Géméz, see Bull’s urine.

Good works, Zs. 1, 14, 18; 4, 6; 11,6; Byt. 2, 33, 38, 64; SI. 3, 53, 933 6, 3, 4, 63 7, 4, 6, 73 8, 1, 5, 20, 22; 8, 6; 10, a5, 27, 29; 12,1, 2, 29; 17, 8; 20, 1, 4, 5; imputed, SI. 4, 14; 6, 1, 23 7, 6; 8, 4; 10, 22-24; 12, 15, 16, 31; 16, 6.

Gépaté, land, Bd. 29, 5n.

G6patshah, chief, Bd. 28, 5; 81, 20, 22; Byt. 2, 1.

G6s, angel, Bd. 4, 4n; 27, 24; Byt. 2, 59n; SI. 11, 4n; 28, 2.

Gésasp, com., SI. 1, 3n.

Gost-i Fryané, man, Byt. 2, 1; tale of, S1. 21, on.

Gésfirvan, angel, Bd. 4, 2-5; Zs. 8, 1, 3; Sl. 11, 4n; 22, 14.

Greek inscriptions, Int. 19.

Greeks, Byt. 3, 5.

28, 5; 81, 20, 22; Byt. 2, 1.

G6s, angel, Bd. 4, 4n; 27, 24; Byt. 2, 59n; SI. 11, 4n; 28, 2.

Gésasp, com., SI. 1, 3n.

Gost-i Fryané, man, Byt. 2, 1; tale of, S1. 21, on.

Gésfirvan, angel, Bd. 4, 2-5; Zs. 8, 1, 3; Sl. 11, 4n; 22, 14.

Greek inscriptions, Int. 19.

Greeks, Byt. 3, 5.

Griffon, Bd. 14, 11, 23; 19, 18; 24, 11, 29; Zs. 8, 4.

Guardian spirits, Bd. 1, (8n;) 2, 10, 11; 4,4; 6, 3; 28,8; 32, 9; Sl. 9,11; 11, 4; 17, 4, 6; 19, 8; days devoted to, Byt. 2, 45; Sl. 10, 2; 12, 31.

Gfidarz, man, Bd. 29, 6.

Gfirgan, land, Bd. 20, 24n.

Gurgistan, land, Bd. 20, 13n.

Gfisasp fire, Bd. 17, 7; Zs. 6, 22n; Byt. 8, ron. See Visnasp.

Gfisnasp fire, Zs. 6, 22; 11, 8-10; Byt. 8, ron, 37, 40.

Gizak, princess, Bd. 81, 9, 14.

—, woman, Bd. 15, 28.

Gamagan, land, Bd. 29, 14n.

Gamiasp, priest, Sl. 11, 4.

Gar6-danghu, man, Bd. 29, rn.

Gasnd, Byt. 2, 45. See Feast.

Géh, fiend, Bd. 3, 3, 6-9; SI. 8, 29n.

Girast nask, S110, 28n. See Kidrast.

Givan, lun. man., Zs. 4, 8.

Gumin, town, Bd, 12, 34n.

Hadhayés, ox, Bd. 19, 13 ; 28, 5 0; 30, 25.

Had6kht nask, Bd. 15, 7n; Byt. 8, (25,) 28; SI. 12, 19, 30; 18, 6, 10; 16, 6.

Hésadasp, man, Bd. 88, 1.

Hagiabad inscriptions, Int. 20 n.

Hamadan, town, Bd. 12, 12; 19, 3n; 22, 6.

Hamémil, see Sin affecting accusers.

Haméspamadayém, season, Bd. 25, 6.

Hamid, man, Bd. 88, 11.

Hamistak4n, Sl. 6, 2. stationary.

Hamréd, see Contagion.

Hamfn, lake, Bd. 18, 16n.

Hapték-ring, stars, Bd. 2, 7; 5, 1; 18, 12; 14, 28; SI. 11, 4.

Harddr, man, Bd. 82, 1.

Hardarsn, man, Bd. 82, 1.

Harhaz r., Bd, 20, 7, 27.

Haro r., Bd. 12, 9n; 20, 7, 15, 16.

His, SI. 10, 6; 18, 1. See Chapter.

Hasar of distance, Bd. 14, 4; 16, 7; 26, (1,)2n; SL9, 1n; — of time, Bd. 25, 5; SI. 9, (1.)

Hathra, meas., Bd. 7, 8n; 26, 1; Sl. 9, rn.

Haug, Professor, Int. 12, 25, 26, 29.

Havan gah, Bd. 25, 9, 10; SL.7, 1; 14, 4n.

Heaven, grades in, Bd. 12, 1; SI. 6, 3n; garédman, Bd. 80, 12, 13, 27; Zs. 11, 2; Sl. 6, 3n, 4; UU, 3; 18, 8; vahist, Bd. 30, 27; Zs. 1, 14; SL 6, 2, 3,5; 12, 28;

See Ever-

INDEX.

419

15, 8, 13, 19, 24, 29, 30; 18, 4n; 22, 9,18, 22,29 See also Best existence.

Heaven, not to be despaired of, SI. 12, 28, 29.

Hebrew laws, SI. 8, 14n, 150, 18n, 26n,

Hedgehog, Bd. 14, 19; 18, 28; Sl. 2, 59; 10, 31; 12, 20.

Hell, Bd. 15, 9; 22, 10; Zs..1, 143 Sl. 6, 2, 6; 8, 5, 7, 13; 12, 4, 28; 18, 4n; described, Bd. 3, 27; 28, 47, 48; abode of demons, Bd. 8, 26; Byt. 8, 30, 35; for the wicked, Bd. 80, 12,13 ; gate of, Bd. 12, 8; 28, 18; Zs. 2, 4; Sl. 10, 7n; 18, 19; purified, ries 80, 31,.32; grades in, SI.

Halmand r., Bd. 20, 17n.

Hendvd r., Bd. 20, 7, gn.

Heri r., Bd. 20, 15n, 16n.

Hétfimand r., Bd. 12, 9n; 20, 7, 17,

_. 343 21, 3n. Hiddekel r., Bd. 20, 12n; Byt. 8,

arn,

High-priest, dast@r, Bd. 19, 36; 28, 20; Byt. 8, 52; Sl. 8, 10; 9, 3, 43 10, 5, 20-23, 31; 12, a, 14-16; rad, Bd. 20, 1n; Byt. 8, 525 Sl. 8, 1, 2, 5, 6, 14, 21; 18, 2, 29; supreme, Bd. 24, 1; SI. 9, 3; see Supreme Zaratfist.

343 21, 3n. Hiddekel r., Bd. 20, 12n; Byt. 8,

arn,

Hikhar, SI. 2, (30n,) 95. See Bodily refuse,

Hinge Bd. 425: 34; Byt. 8, 14,17;

Hindtstin Ba. 20,93 26, 15; 29,15.

Hindva m., Bd. 12

Hirat, town, Bd. 20, r6n.

Hiratis, men, Byt. 3, 19.

Hiriyan, men, Byt. 8, ron.

Hoazarédatbbri, chief, Bd, 29, 1.

Holy-water, Bd. 21, 3, 4; Byt. 3, 59; Sl. 2, (433) 7, 9; 12, 5; 18, 9; 15,12; 16, 6.

H6nm, angel, Bd. 7, 3; 27, 24; Zs. 6, 3; Sl.11, 4,6; — drén, SI. 10, 2; — juice, SI]. 10, 16; 18, In, 9n; — mortar, SI. 9, 12n; 18, 9n; — tree, Bd. 9,6n; 18, 2,3; 24, 18; 27, 4, 24; 30, 25; Zs. 8,5; — twigs, Sl. 9, 12n; 13, gn.

H6émist, rite, Byt. 2, (59n;) SI. 9. 12n; 16, 6n.

Horvadad, angel, Bd. 1, (26;) 27, 24; 30, 29; Byt. 8, 29; SI. 9, 8; 18,14; 15, 3, 5, 25, 29; 22, 6; 28,1; month, Bd. 25, 20.

_ yast, Byt. 1, 6.

Hoshyang. king, Bd. 15, (28;) 81, 1, 2, 9n, 32n; 82, rn; 84, 3, 4; Zs. 11, 10; SI. 10, a8n,

House ruler S]. 18, 11, 15, 410, 44;

Habakhe ‘man, Bd. 38, 1.

H Gdiné, man, Bd. 88, 3.

Hfigar m., Bd. 7, 15n; 12, a, (5,) 6; 18, 4; 22,11; 24, 17; Byt.

3, 31n.

H(kairyad m., Byt. 8, 31.

Hukhshathrétemai, prayer, SI. 10, 50; 18, 22.

Hamat, woman, Bd. 838, 7; queen, Bd. 84, 8

H(iman, man, Bd. $1, 17.

Human monstrosities, Bd. 165, 5, 31.

Humatan4n, prayer, SI. 10, 5n; 18, 16, 22.

Hunting, Sl. 8, 3.

H{ish, beverage, Bd. 19, 13; 80, 25..

H{fshédar, apostle, Bd. 21, 6; 82, 7n, (8;) Byt. 8, r1n, 13, 340, (43, 445) 47, 48, 61n; SI. 18, 5.

Hishédar-mah, apostle, Bd. 80, 2; 83, 70, (83) Byt. 3, 52, 53; sl.

) Se

Hasparam nask, Byt. 2, 37n; SI.10, (213) 12, 1, 7, 14, 30; 18, 17.

Husru, lun. man., Bd. 8, 3; "lake, Bd. 22, 1, 8.

Huvisp, chief, Bd. 29, 1.

Hiazavarak, man, Bd. $1, 41.

Huzvaris logograms, Int. 14-20.

Hvaétumaithi ha, Sl. 18, 7, 14, 27.

Hvandkan, man, Bd. 29, 1.

Hvara, Av., Sl. 1, rn.

Hvare-éithra, man, Bd. 88, 5 n.

Hvembya, man, Bd. 29, 5.

Hvév, woman, Bd. 82, 7n, 8; Sk 10, a1 n.

Hvyaona, land, Byt. 2, 49n.

Hyrcania, Bd. 20, 24n.

Taxartes r., Bd. 20, 20n.

Ibairaz, man, Bd. 29, 6.

Ibitak, man, Bd. 82, rn.

Idolators, Int. 50, 51; Bd. 8, 20n; 165, 28n; Byt. 3, 110.

Idolatry, SI. 8, 2, 3.

Idols, Bd. 28, 34; Byt.1, 4n.

Ee2

420

PAHLAVI TEXTS,

Idol-temples, Bd. 17, 7; Byt. 8, 30, 36, 37.

Imam-dad-24m ha, SI. 18, 19.

Immortal men, Bd. 29, 5-9; 30, 17.

Incursion of the evil spirit, Bd. 3, 10-26; Zs. 2, 1-11; 4, 1-6.

Indar, demon, Bd. 30, 29n. Andar.

India, Bd. 15, 29n; 20, 9n; 29, 4; Byt. 8, 44n; Sl. 2, 6n, 22n, 32n; 4, 5n, 6n, 11n, ran; 9, gn; 16, 1n; 17, an.

Indian ocean, Bd. 20, 8n.

Indra, god, Bd. 1, 27n.

Indus r., Bd. 20, 8n, gn, 22n, 28n; Byt. 8, 38n.

Infant, treatment, Sl. 10, 16; protected by fire, Sl. 12, 12.

Infection, SI. 2, 55, 59, (60-)62. Paitréd.

Infidel, Si. 6, 6.

2, 6n, 22n, 32n; 4, 5n, 6n, 11n, ran; 9, gn; 16, 1n; 17, an.

Indian ocean, Bd. 20, 8n.

Indra, god, Bd. 1, 27n.

Indus r., Bd. 20, 8n, gn, 22n, 28n; Byt. 8, 38n.

Infant, treatment, Sl. 10, 16; protected by fire, Sl. 12, 12.

Infection, SI. 2, 55, 59, (60-)62. Paitréd.

Infidel, Si. 6, 6.

Invoking angels, Sl. 9, r1-13.

Inward prayer, Sl. 8, (6-)9, 21; 4, 3,9n; 5, 4n; 10, 14, 26; 14, 3. See Baz, Vag.

Iran, Bd. 12, 9n; Zs. 6, 17; Byt. 2, 51,63; 8, 37n, 44N; SI.10, 28n; countries of, Bd. 28, 3; Byt.1, In; 2, 24, 26, 49; 8, 5-7, 10, 20, 22, 23, 25, 26, 36, 38, 39; kings of, Bd. 81, 32n; $2, 1n.

Iranian, countries, Bd. 19, 15; Byt. 2, 28, 29; kings, Bd. 34, 4n; Byt. 8, 51; logograms, Int. 14, 18, 19; rule, Bd. 29, 4n; Sl. 13, 7n.

Iranians, Bd. 12, 33; 165, 28; 31, 21; Byt. 2, 33n.

Iron age, Byt. 1, 1n, 5; 2, 22; 38, 12 n.

Isadvastar, man, Bd. 80, 10on; 32,

See

5) 7+

Isfendiy ar, prince, Bd. 81, 29n; Byt. 2, 177.

Ispahan, Bd. 12, 4on; 20, 15n, 26n; 31, gon.

IstGidgar nask, Byt.1,1n, See St(id-

gar.

Ith ha, $1.18, 20; prayer, SI. 8, 35; 5, 2, 5, 7; see the next.

Itha-4d-yazamaidé ha, SI. 18, 18,

Izak, princess, Bd. 32, rn.

J in Oriental words is printed G. jamshéd, Bd. 28, 1n; 81, 27n. Jew, Sl. 6, 7.

udge, unjust, SI. 10, 18. upiter, planet, Bd. 5,1; Zs. 4, 7, 8, 10; Byt. 8, 4, 18. Justi, Professor, Int. 26, 66n.

Kabed-sikaft m., Bd. 12, 2, 21. Kabisah dispute, Bd. 25, 3n. Kabulistan, Byt. 8, 13n.

Kad, priest, Bd. 38, 1, 2

Kadan, title, Bd. 31, 15. Kad-méi-urva ha, $1.18, 33.

Kaf m., Bd. 12, a, 14.

Kahrkis, bird, Bd. 14, 23; 19, 25,

Kabt, lun. man., Bd. &, 3.

Kabhtsar, un. man., Bd. 2, 3.

K4hfis, Byt. 3, 9n. See Kai- Kats

Kai-Apivéh, prince, Bd. 31, 25, 28, 31, 34.

— Arsh, prince, Bd. 31, 25.

— Kabad, king, Bd. 84, 7.

— KAfis, king, Bd. 31, 25, 31; S4, 7; Byt. 8, 9.

— Kavad, king, Bd. 31, 28; 34, 7n; $1.10, 28n. See Kavad.

— Khfisr6b, king, Bd.17, 7; $1, 18, 25; 34, 7; SI. 10, 28n.

— Léharasp, king, Bd. $1, 29; 34, 7; Sl. 10, 28n.

— Pisin (or Pisin), prince, Bd. $1,

25, 28. — Qubfd, king, Bd. $1, 24n. — Us, king, Zs. 11, 10on; SI. 10, 28n. — Vistasp, king, Bd. 34, 7; Byt. 3, t1n; SI. 10, 28n. — Vyarsh, prince, Bd, 81, 25. Kalak, town, Bd. 12, 35. Kalagang, zod., Bd. 2, 2; 5, 6. Kamah Bahrah, Zs. 9, 1n; Sl. , an, Kamindan, land, Bd. 28, ro. Kam-nem@i-zam hi, Sl. 18, 30. Kamr(id sea, Bd. 18, 7, 15; Zs. 6

14.

Kan4bad, town, Bd. 12, 34n.

Kanak-i Barzist, man, Bd. 31, 23.

Kangdez, land, Bd. 12, 2; 20, 31; 29, 4, 5, 10; 82, 5; Byt. 3, 25,

Kaoigisa m., Bd. 12, 25n.

Kar fish, Bd. 14, 12; 24, rn, 13. Karap, title, Byt. 3, 3.

Karapan, title, Zs. 11, ron; Byt. 2,

gn. Karm,, tribe, Byt. 3, 7. Karmak, tribe, Byt. 2, 49.

INDEX.

421

Karman, tribe, Byt. 3, 20.

Karsispé, king, Sl. 10, 28n,

Karsévaz, prince, Bd. 81, 15.

Karsipt, bird, Bd. 14, 23; 19, 16; 24, rn, 11, 29n.

Kasak or Kasik r., Bd. 20, 7, 90,

Kaski-zard, town, Bd. 12, 30n.

Kasmir, land, Bd. 29, 4, 15.

Kasp r., Bd. 20, 30.

2, 49.

INDEX.

421

Karman, tribe, Byt. 3, 20.

Karsispé, king, Sl. 10, 28n,

Karsévaz, prince, Bd. 81, 15.

Karsipt, bird, Bd. 14, 23; 19, 16; 24, rn, 11, 29n.

Kasak or Kasik r., Bd. 20, 7, 90,

Kaski-zard, town, Bd. 12, 30n.

Kasmir, land, Bd. 29, 4, 15.

Kasp r., Bd. 20, 30.

Katayfin, man, Bd. 81, 8.

K&afis Kaman, SI. 2, 2n.

Kavad, king, Bd. 31, 24, 25; Byt. 1, 5n; 3, 21n. See Kaf-Kavad,

Kavi Aipi-vanghu, prince, Bd. 381, 25,

— Arshan, prince, Bd. 31, 25n.

— Byarshan, prince, Bd. 81, 25n.

— Husravangh, king, Bd. 81, 25n.

_ Pisanangh, prince, Bd. 81, 25n.

— Sy4varshan, prince, Bd. 31, 25n.

— Usadhan, king, Bd. 81, 25n.

Ka4vfil, town, Bd, 12, 22; 17, 6

Kavfili, tribe, Byt. 2, 49.

Kavulistan, land, Bd. 17, 6; 29, 11; Byt. 8, 13n, 29n.

Kay4n, Bd. 21,7; 28, 15,17; 81, o,a5n; Byt.1,5; 2,17; 8, 14,

51.

Kayd4nians, Bd. 11, 6; Byt. 8, r4n; SI. 10, 28n.

Kayans>Byt. 8, 25, 26; Sl. 22, 32.

Keres@ni, king, Byt. 2, rgn.

Keresasp, man, Bd, 29, 7n; 81, 26, a7n, 36n; Byt. 3, 59, 60.

Késhvars, regions, Bd. 5, 8, 9; 11, (2-6 ;) 15, 27; 17, 43 Zs. 7, (8- 113) Byt.8, 473 SI. 10, 28n.

Kévad, king, Byt. 1, 5; 2, 21.

Kévan, planet, Bd. 5, 1; 38, 48; Zs.

4,7. Khashm, demon, Bd, 39, 5. Aéshm. Khast nask, SI.12,4n. See Dadak. Khava, demon, Bd. 19, 27. Khazar, land, Byt. 2, 49n. Khér sin, Sl. 1,1, 2; 2,70; 8, 25n; 11, 1, 2; 16, 5. Khrfitésp, man, Bd. 81, 6. Khshmaibya hi, SI. 18, 4, 14. Khshnfiman, ritual, see Shnfiman. Khfdarak, tribe, Byt. 2, 4gn. Khugand, town, Bd. 20, zon. Khfigistan, Jand, Bd. 12, 9, 30; 20, 12, 26; 24, 28; Zs. 7, 7n. Khumbya, title, Bd. 29, 5n.

See

Khfir, angel, SI. 22, 11; 28, 2; day, Bd. 25, 3. See Khfrshed. Khfrasan, land, Bd. 12, 18, 37; 20,

13n, 21n; 25,16n; Byt. 2, 24n;

3, 19.

Khurdad, angel, Byt. 2, 59n; month, Bd. 25, 20n, See Horvadad.

Khurdah Avesta, SI. 8, rn. -

Khfrshéd, angel, Bd. 27, 24; Byt. 2,59n. See Khér.

— Athar, man, Bd. 82, 5, 6, 7n.

— mah, apostle, Byt. 8, 52n.

— ny4yis, ritual, SI. 7, 1n; 17, 5n.

— yast, ritual, SI. 7, 2n.

Khfirshédar, apostle, Byt. 8, 13n.

Khfsak, zod., Bd. 2, 2.

Khfisré, king, Byt. 1, 5, 7n, 8; 2, 21,

— Ma&hdad4n, priest, Byt. 1, 7.

— N6shirvan, king, Bd. 84, gn; Zs. 6, 20n; Byt.1, §n,7n; 2, arn.

— Parviz, king, Bd. 834, 9n; Zs. 6 2on; Byt. 3, r1n.

Khisrév,. man, Bd. 81, 36, 40.

Khfist6 nask, $1.12, 4n. See Dadak.

Kbvanaidis r., Bd. 30, 7, 29n.

Khvantras, region, Bd. 5, 9; 11, (a- 6;) 15,27; 17,4; 24, 26, 27, 29; 29, 2,3, 5n; 823, 1n; Zs. 6, 21; 7, (10;) Byt. 8, 47; SI. 10, 28n.

Khvaraé r., Bd. 20, 7, 26.

Khvarth, Bd. 12, 2.

Khvariz2m, land, Bd. 12, 12; 17, 5, 6; Zs.11, 9; Byt. 3, 29n; lake, Bd. 22, 1, 4.

Khvast-atrikht, man, Bd. 81, 19.

Kbvegand r., Bd. 20, 7, 19, 20.

Khvétmand hi, SI. 18, 7n.

Khvétfik-das, see Next-of-kin marriage.

Khyén, land, Byt. 2, 49n.

Kilisyakih (Christianity), Byt. 2, 19;

12, 2.

Khvariz2m, land, Bd. 12, 12; 17, 5, 6; Zs.11, 9; Byt. 3, 29n; lake, Bd. 22, 1, 4.

Khvast-atrikht, man, Bd. 81, 19.

Kbvegand r., Bd. 20, 7, 19, 20.

Khvétmand hi, SI. 18, 7n.

Khvétfik-das, see Next-of-kin marriage.

Khyén, land, Byt. 2, 49n.

Kilisyakih (Christianity), Byt. 2, 19;

8, 3, 5, 8. Kiratand-bfigéd, com., SI. 1, 4n. Kirfak, see Good works. Kirmian, land, Bd. 12, 35n; 38, 10n; Byt. 2: pans town, Zs.1, on; Byt. 8, . Kohistan, land, ‘Ba. 20, 130; 8, 19 Koirr., Ba. 20, 7, 24. Kokand, town, Bd. 20, 20n. K6ndras m., Bd. 12, 2, 25. K6ndrasp m., Bd. 12, 2, 24; 22, 3n. Krittika, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3n.

Byt.

422

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Kfimis m., Bd. 12, 32; land, Bd. 20, 18.

Kfindak, demon, Bd. 28, 42.

Kr r., Bd. 20, 8n, 24n.

Kuran r., Bd. 20, 26n.

Kurd, tribe, Byt. 8, 7n, 20.

Kfrisk sheep, Bd. 14,15; Zs. 9, 19.

Kf@ishtand-bigéd, com., SI. 1, 4n; 2, 57, 81, 118; 6, 6, 7n; 8, 17.

Kfistik, Bd. 24, 22; 80, 30n. See Sacred thread-girdle.

Kyansth sea, Bd. 18, 16; 20, 34; 21, 6, 7.

Kakad-i Daitik m., Bd. 12, 2,7; 30, 33n; Byt. 8, 26.

Kakbravak, chief, Bd. 29, 1.

Kakhshnfis, man, Bd. 32, 1.

Kamrés, bird, Bd. 19, 15; 24, 11n, 39; 27, 3n.

Kathwaraspa, man, Bd. 29, tn.

Katru-miyan r., Bd. 20,°7, 31.

Kékast lake, Bd. 7, 14; 12, 36; 17, 73 22, 1, 2,8; Zs. 6, 22; Byt. 3, 10.

Kidrast nask, SI. 10, 28.

Kihar-Az4d, queen, Bd. 84, 8.

Kin or Kind m., Bd. 12, 2, 13; 16, 2gn; land, Bd. 12, 13n, 223 15, 29n; 81, 3; Byt. 2, 4gn.

Kini, tribe, Byt. 2, 49; 8, 17.

Kinistan, land, Bd. 12, 9n,13n; 15, 29; 29,13; Zs.7,7; Byt. 3, 14; SI. 6, 7n.

Kinvad or Kinvar bridge, Bd. 12, 7; 28,18n; 30, 33; SI.8,1n; 12, an, 31m; 18, agn; 17, 4n.

Kishmak, demon, Bd. 28, 24.

Kitr6-mainé, prince, Bd. 28, 5; Byt. 3, 25n.

Kitr6-miy4n, prince, Byt. 2, 1; 8, 25, 26,

Lakes, Bd. 18, 1-4; 28, 1-113. Zs. 6, 7, 8, 22.

Laran, land, Bd. 12, 38.

Liristan, land, Bd. 12, 38n.

Laughter at prayer, SI. 10, 29.

La-vahak, man, Bd. 81, 19.

Leo, Bd. 2, 2; 34, 2; SI. 21, 2, 6.

Leucorrheea, SI. 8, 19.

Libra, Bd. 2, 2; 5, 6; 34,2; Zs.4, 8-10; SI. Zl, 2.

Life, duration of, SI. 9, 14.

Liquids, Bd. 21, 1.

Logograms, Int. 13-17, 20.

Léharasp, king, Bd. 28, r5n; $1, 28, See Kai-Léharisp.

Luminaries, Bd. 2, 1-8.

Lunar mansions, Bd. 2, 3.

Madoéfry4d m., Bd. 12, 32.

Magh (ablution-seat), Byt. 2, (36;) Sl. 10, 5n.

Ma&h, angel, Bd. 27, 24; Byt.2, 59n; SI.11,4n; 12, 8; 22,12; 23, 2.

— Afiharmazd, com., Sl. 1, 4n.

— ayar, man, Bd. 38, 7.

— b6ndak, man, Bd. 38, 7.

— bfikht, man, Bd. 33, 7.

— dad, man, Bd. 88, 1.

— gésaspd, com., SI. 1, 4n.

— ny4yis, ritual, SI.'7, 4 n.

— vasp, com., SL 1, 4n.

MAhik, zod., Bd. 2, 2.

Ma&hvand-dad, com., Byt. 8, 3; SI. 1, 4n.

Maidhyairya, season, Bd. 25, 3n; SI. 18, (3 n.)

Maidhy6é-shema, season, Bd. 26, 3 n; SI, 18, (3n.)

Male things, Bd. 16, 6.

Mam-sozak, title, Bd. 81, 14.

Manicheans, S$}. 6, 7 n.

MAnih, heretic, SI. 6, 7 n.

Mansarspend, angel, SL 11, 4. Maraspend.

Manis m., Bd. 12, 2, 10; King, Bd. $8, 4; man, Bd. $1, 28.

25, 3n; SI. 18, (3 n.)

Maidhy6é-shema, season, Bd. 26, 3 n; SI, 18, (3n.)

Male things, Bd. 16, 6.

Mam-sozak, title, Bd. 81, 14.

Manicheans, S$}. 6, 7 n.

MAnih, heretic, SI. 6, 7 n.

Mansarspend, angel, SL 11, 4. Maraspend.

Manis m., Bd. 12, 2, 10; King, Bd. $8, 4; man, Bd. $1, 28.

— ikhfirshéd-vinik, man, Bd. 81, 11,

See

Ig.

— kh@rnik, man, Bd. 81, 14; 32,1 n.

—khfrnar, man, Bd. 81, 12, 14; 382, 1n.

Manuscripts, oldest Pahl. and P4z., Int. 21; of Bd., Int. 24-41; of Zs., Int. 48-50; of Byt., Int. 56-59; of SI., Int. 65, 66.

Manfisfihar, king, Bd. 18, 10; 14, 1§; 20, 11, Sl, 12-14, a1, 23, 31; 32, 1,4; 88, 3, 40, 5,95 84, 6; Zs. 9, 19; ll, 10n; Byt. 2, 3n; Sl. 10, 28; man, Bd. 38, 3.

—son of Yfidan-Yim, priest, Int. 46, 47; Bd. 38, ron.

Marak m., Bd. 12, 29, 38.

Maraspend, angel, Bd. 27, 24; Sl. ll, 4n; 22,29; 28,4; man, Bd. 88, 3, 11; Byt. 2, 18 n.

Mardan-véh, man, Bd. 38, 6, 8.

Mard-bfid, com., Sl. 1, 4n; 2, 86.

INDEX.

423

Margandak, man, Bd. 31, 36, 40. Marg-argan, see Worthy of death. Marriage, refraining from, SI. 10, 19. See also Next-of-kin. Mars, planet, Bd. 5, 1. Martv or Marv, land, Byt. 8, 21. Marv r., Bd. 12, 9; 80, 7, 21; Q1, 3. Madshdaba, lun. man., Bd. 3, 3. Mashya, man, Bd. 15, 6, 11, 19, 20, 30; 80,1, 7; Sl, 1; 32,10; 34, 3; Zs. 10, 4; SI. 10, 28n. MAshyéi, woman, Bd. 15, 6, 11, 20; 30, 1,7; $38,1n; 34,3; Zs. 10, 4; SI. 10, 28n. Masvak, man, Bd. 88, 5. Matré, man, Bd. 15, 2. Matréya6, woman, Bd. 16, 2. Ma4azanan demons, SI. 18, 6. Mazinikan. Mazdi-ad-mii ha, SI. 18, 11. Mazdayasnian literature, Zs, 9, 10; Byt. 8, 25n; SI. 9, 9n; 10, 3n, 4N, 13n, a1n, 25n, 26n, 28n, 29n; 12, 17n; —religion, Bd. 29, 7; 33, 11. Mazdayasnians, SI. 12, 4; 18, 2; religion of, Int.9; Bd.1, 2, 253 11,6; 12, 41; 88,12; Byt.1, ©; &, 2, 26, 46, 613 8, 1, 32, 41, 46, 49; SI. 12, 23. Mazdik, heretic, Byt. 1, 6; 2, 21. Mazendaran, land, Bd. 8, 20n; 18, 15n; 15, 28; 19, 5. Mazinikan demons, Bd. 3, 20. Mazanan. Measures, linear, Bd. 26, 1-3. Meat, unfit for rites, Sl. 10, 34; when not to be eaten, SI. 17,

See

I, 2. Meat-offerings, SI. 10, 34; 11, 4-6; 12, 8-10; 18, 4n. Mediterranean sea, Bd. 18, 15n; 20, 8n. Médiy4rém, season, Bd. 25, 3. Méd6k-mah, com., $1.1, 3; 3, 1, 11, 12, 89; 5, 5, 6, — shém, season, Bd. 386, 3. Médy6k-mah, man, Bd. 82, 2, 3; 33,1; Zs. 11, 10n; SI.1, 3 n. Mebrd or Mchrvd r., Bd. 20, 7, 9. Menstruation, see Woman. Mercury, planet, Bd. 5,1; Byt. 8, 4. Merkhinah m., Bd. 12, 38 n. Mesbhed, town, Bd. 20, 15 n, 30n; 22, 3n. Mesr, land, Bd. 20, 8.

Mesrkdn r., Bd. 20, 7, 26.

Metal, melted, Bd. 30, 19, 20, 31, 32; origin of, Zs. 10, 2.

Mezinan, town, Bd. 12, 32 n.

Migin m., Bd. 12, 29, 32 n.

Mihir, angel, Byt. 2, 59n. See Mitré.

— nyayis, ritual, SI. 17, 5n.

Mihran r., Bd. 80, 9 n.

Milk, see Sacred milk.

Millennium, Int. 40; Bd. 80, 2; 34, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7n, gn; Zs.], 10; Byt.1, 5; 2, 22, 24, 41, 63; 8, 9, 11, 43, 441, §1-53, 61.

Minos, man, Bd. 31, 3 n.

Mirak, man, Bd. 81, 4.

Mitékht, demon, Bd. 1, 24; 28, 14,

— nyayis, ritual, SI. 17, 5n.

Mihran r., Bd. 80, 9 n.

Milk, see Sacred milk.

Millennium, Int. 40; Bd. 80, 2; 34, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7n, gn; Zs.], 10; Byt.1, 5; 2, 22, 24, 41, 63; 8, 9, 11, 43, 441, §1-53, 61.

Minos, man, Bd. 31, 3 n.

Mirak, man, Bd. 81, 4.

Mitékht, demon, Bd. 1, 24; 28, 14,

16,

Mitré, angel, Bd. 27, 24; Byt. 3, 32-36, 47; SI. 22, 16; 23, 3; month, Bd. 25, 7,320. See Mihir.

— akAvid, man, Bd. 38, 6.

— ay4r, man, Bd. 32, 7 n.

— tarsah, man, Bd. 81, 29.

— varfz, man, Bd. 38, 4.

Miydn, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Miyan-i dast m., Bd. 12, 32.

Mébad of mébads, Bd. $2, 5; 393, 2.

Mébads (priests), Bd. 32, 4; 38, 0, g-11.

Mébadship of mébads, Byt. 3, 39.

Mokarstdan, \and, Bd. 20, 7.

Monstrosities, human, Bd. 16, 5, 31.

Months, names of, Bd. 26, 20.

‘Moon reverence, SI. 7, 4; 12, 31.

Mortal sin, see Worthy of death.

Mountains, Bd. 8, 1-5; 11, 4; 12, 1-41; 18, 10, 11; 24,17, 28; Zs. 7, 1-7.

Mouth-veil, SI. 10, 40; 12, 4.

Muhammadanisn, Sl. 6, 7 n.

Muhammadans, Byt. 2, 24n; 8, 11 n; SI. 2, 58n.

Mulla Firfiz, S}. 21, 2n.

Mumbat (Bombay), Byt. 8, 17 n.

Murghab r., Bd. 20, 21 n.

Muru, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Mispar, comet, Bd. 5, 1, 2; 28,

44. Mfisulman, Byt. 8, 3 n. Myazd, see Sacred feast. Myths, how treated, Int. 71, 72. Nabn, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3; Zs. 4,

8n. Nahvtak r., Bd. 20, 34; 21, 6.

424

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Naikfyas, demon, Bd. 28, 10; 380, agn.

Nail-parings to be prayed over, Sl. 12, 6.

Natvtak r., Bd, 29, 4, 5.

Nakahéd, "demon, Bd. 1, 27; 28, ton; 80, 29n.

Namak or Namén, man, Bd. 381, 35.

Naotara, man, Bd. 29, 6n.

Nagqs-i Rustam, Int. 20on.

Nariman, man, Bd. 81, 36n.

— Héshang, Zs. 9, 1n.

Narsih, prince, Bd. 29, 6; 81, 3, 5

Nas, demon, Bd. 28, 29.

Nasai, see Corpse and Dead matter.

Nasak, woman, Bd. 15, 25.

N§satyas, Bd. 1, 27n.

Nasks, Zs. 11, 10n; quoted in Sl., Int. 63, 64; described, Zs. 9, 1; Byt.1,1; 8, 25; SI. 9, 9; 10, 3, 4, 13, 21, 25, 26, 28, 29; 12, 4n,17n; referred to, Zs. 9, 16; Sl. 10, 22, 23; 12, 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12, 14-16, 19, 29-32; 18, 6, 10, 30.

Nasm, man, Byt. 2, 3n.

Nasfis, demon, SI. 2, 1-5, 6n, 55n, wen 7, 7; 10, ran, 32n; 20,

Néiinghas, demon, Bd. 30, 29.

Navadd r., Bd. 20, 7, 34n; 21, 6n.

Navashadar rite, Sl. 12, 26.

Navazfidi rite, S]. 18, an.

Naydzem, man, Bd. 82, rn.

Negro, origin of, Bd. 28, 2.

Néryésang, angel, Bd. 15,1; 82, 8; Byt. 8, 25, 25, 59, 60; com., sl. 1, 4n; 8, 13; man, Bd. 32, 1n; translator, Byt. 2, 4n; SI. 6, 7n.

Nésr-gyavan, title, Bd. 31, 5.

Névak-t6ra, man, Bd. 82, rn.

Next-of-kin marriage, Byt. 2, 57, 61; Sl. 8, 18; 18, 3, 4.9

Nigas-afzGid-dak, man, Bd. 88, 4.

Night, length of, Bd. 25, 3-6.

Nihadfim nask, Sl. 10, (3,) 22, 23, 39n; 13, 15, 16.

Nihag, man, Bd. 29, 7

Nikadim nask, SI. 10, 3n. Nihadim.

Nikhshapfihar, com., SI. 1, 4n.

Nile r., Bd. 20, 8n; Zs. 6, 20n.

NimAsp, zod., Bd. 2, 2.

Nirang, ritual, SI. 12, 23; 18, 1.

Nirangistan, book, Int. 32; Byt. 2,

See

37; 8, 29; SL 1, 3n, 4n; 8, 86n; 10, 35n; 12, in, 310; 16, 6n.

Nihag, man, Bd. 29, 7

Nikadim nask, SI. 10, 3n. Nihadim.

Nikhshapfihar, com., SI. 1, 4n.

Nile r., Bd. 20, 8n; Zs. 6, 20n.

NimAsp, zod., Bd. 2, 2.

Nirang, ritual, SI. 12, 23; 18, 1.

Nirangistan, book, Int. 32; Byt. 2,

See

37; 8, 29; SL 1, 3n, 4n; 8, 86n; 10, 35n; 12, in, 310; 16, 6n.

Nisanak, place, Byt. 3, 9, 21.

Nishapthar, com., SI. 1, 4n.

Nishapfr, ows Bd, 12, 12n, 320; Byt. 1,

Niv r., Bd. 20, 8

Nivar, man, Bd. 38, 3.

Niyarum nask, Sl. 10, 3n. Nihadm.

Niyz, demon, Bd. 8,17; 28, 26.

Nédar, man, Bd. 29, 6; 31, 13, 23; $8, 5; SI.10, 28n.

Néktarga, man, Bd. 31, 32, 33.

Né6nabar, rite, Sl. 10, 2; 18, 2n.

Non-Iranian, Bd. 19, 15; 29, 40; Zs. 2,10; Byt. 2, 51.

Non-Turanian, Byt. 2, 49.

Nésai Bfrz-Mitré, com., Sl. 1, 3n, 4n; 8,18.

Noxious creatures, Bd. 8, 15, 20; 7, 5) 7,13; 18, 16; 19, 7, 9, 17, 21, 27, 30; 20,13; Zs. 2, 9; 6, 4, 5,9, 14; SL. 8, 21; 8,19; 18, 19 ; 19, 9; 20, 5, 18.

Nur, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Nyayis, ritual, SI. 7, 1n, 2n, 4n; 16, 6n; 17, 5n; 20, 1n.

See

Ocean, Bd. 7, (6,) 7,16; 9,5; 11, 4; 12, 6; 18,1, 5, 8-10; 15, a7; 18,1, 7,9; 18,1, 8,11; 20, 4; 22, 2, 5,9; 27, 2; 29, 10; 81, 32; Zs,6,6,7; 7, 8,01.

Ordeals, $1.10, 25 n; 18,17; 15, 15-17.

Orthography, Pahl., Int. 74.

Owokhm, demon, Bd. 81, 6.

Oxus r., Bd. 15, 29n; 20, 8n, gn, aan, 28n; 22,4n; Zs, 6, 20n; Byt. 3, 17n, 38n.

Padashkhvargar m., Bd. 12, 2, (17,) 31n, 32; 81, a1, 40; Byt. 3, 63; 3, 19, 20.

Padeévar, lun, man., Bd. 2, 3.

Padiyavih, see Ablution.

Pagam nask, SI. 9, gn.

Paha, \un. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Pahargar m., Bd. 12, 29, 37.

Pahlavas, tribe, Int. 12.

Pahlavi alphabets, Int. 16, 17, 20.

— language, Int. 11.

— literature, extent, Int. 22.

— manuscripts, Int. 21, 22.

— (meaning of), Int, 12.

See Paz6n.

INDEX.

425

Pahlavi papyri, Int. a1.

— texts, three kinds here translated, Int. 67, 68; proportion untranslated, Int, 68; value of, Int. 74.

— writings, Int. 9-22.

Pat K&il, place, Int. 19, 2on.

Pairistira, man, Bd. 29, rn.

Pairi-urvaésm, demon, Bd. 81, 6.

Paitirasp, man, Bd. 89, 1.

Paitirasp, man, Bd. 82, 1, 2; 88, 1. See Pirtarfsp.

Paitréd, see Infection.

Pandnamak-i Zaratfst, Bd. 15, 2n.

Pangistan, land, Bd. 20, 13n, 15.

Papak, man, Int. 19; Bd. 81, 30; 34,9; Byt. 2, 18n.

Parahém, see H6ém juice.

Parasang, meas,, Bd. 7, 8; 18, 2; 14, 4; 16,7; 22,8; 26,1, 2; Sl. 4,12; 9,1n.

Paréstyaré, man, Bd. 29, 1.

Pargana, \and, Bd. 20, 20.

Parik, com., SI. 1, 4n.

Pars, land, Bd. 12, 2, 9, 21, 36; 20, 25, 29; 24, 28; 29, 14; 31, 30n; 82, 4; 88, 10n; Zs. 7,7, 10; Byt.8, 9, 10, 19, a1.

Parsadga, chief, Bd. 29, 5.

Parsi religion most detailed in Pahl. texts, Int. 9; not fully explained here, Int. 68.

Parstva, man, Bd. 88, 4.

Parthians, Int. 12.

Parthva, land, Int. 12.

Parviz, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Parysatis, queen, Bd. 84, 8n.

Pashang, king, Bd. 29, 5 ; 31, 14, 16.

Pasin, prince, Bd. 81, 25n.

Pasus-haurva, dog, Bd. 14, r9n; 19,

34.

Patit, see Renunciation of sin.

— i khfid, ritual, SI. 14, 6n.

88, 4.

Parthians, Int. 12.

Parthva, land, Int. 12.

Parviz, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Parysatis, queen, Bd. 84, 8n.

Pashang, king, Bd. 29, 5 ; 31, 14, 16.

Pasin, prince, Bd. 81, 25n.

Pasus-haurva, dog, Bd. 14, r9n; 19,

34.

Patit, see Renunciation of sin.

— i khfid, ritual, SI. 14, 6n.

Patsr6bé, king, SI. 10, 28n.

Pazand, Int. (12,) 14, (15)-173 Byt. 2, 55.

— Bahman Yast, Int. 57.

— Bundahis, Int. 30, 31.

— SI., in part, Int. 66.

Paz6n or PAzi nask, SI. 9, 9.

Pédak-mfyan r., Bd. 20, 7, 31.

Peném, see Mouth-veil.

Periods of day, Bd. 25, (9, 10;) SI. 7,1; 10, 32; 14, 4-6; 17, 3. See Gah.

Persepolis, Int. 19, 20n.

Persian, ancient, Int. 11; medizval, Int. 11, 123 modern, Int. 11, 143 version of Byt., Int. 57-59. See also Rivayats.

Persian Gulf, Bd. 18, 8n, 13 n; 20,

a5n.

Pésdad, title, Bd. $2, 1 n.

Pésdadian, Bd. 15, (28n;) 17, 4n; Sl. 10, 28n.

Pésh-Parviz, lun. man., Bd. 3, 3.

Péshyétani, priest, Bd. 20, 31n; 29, 5; 31, 29; 32, 5; Byt. 2, 1; 8, 25-27, 29-32, 36-38, 39 n, 41, 42, 51, 52.

Pésy4nsai, land, Bd. 29, 4, 5, 7, 113 Byt. 8, 6on.

Pig, domesticated, SI. 2, 58.

Piran, man, Bd. 81, 17.

Pirik, com., SI.1, 4n.

Pirtarasp, man, Bd. $2, 1n; $8, rn.

Pisces, Bd. 2, 2; SI. 21, 2.

Pisin valley, Bd. 29, 5 n. .

Planets, Bd. 8, 25; 5, (1,) 53 28, 44; Zs. 2,10; 4, 3, 7-10.

Plants, origin, Bd. 9, 1-6; 27, 1-3; Zs. 8, 1-6; 9, 1-6; chiefs of, Bd. 24, 18-21, 27; 27, 4; classification, Bd. 27, 5-23; devoted to angels, Bd. 27, 24; dried before burning, Bd. 27, 25.

Pleiades, stars, Bd. 2, 3 n.

Pollution from dead apes, SI. 2, 61; dead bodies, Sl. 3, 12-16, 18-22, 30-32, 35-124; 10, 12; dead dogs, Sl. 2, 62; dead hedgehog, Sl. 2, 59; dead menstruous woman, SI. 2, 61; dead priests, Sl. 2, 60 n; from menstruation, Sl. 2,17, 963 8, 1-3, 10-20, 22- 34; from serpents, SI. 2, 33-35.

— of animals, SI. 2, 109-111; buildings, Sl. 2, 18-22, 45; 8, 2, 3; carpets, Sl. 2, 101; 8, 2, 3; clothing, Sl. 2, 42, 44, 83; 8,1, 13; cushions, Sl. 2, 102-104; 8, 2, 33 doors, SI. 2, 74; earth and masonry, SI. 2, 36; fire, Sl. 2, 38-40, 46, 49; food, SI. 2, 41, 47, 119-1243 8, 12, 30; ground, Sl. 2, 12-16; jars, SI. 2, 30-35; powdered things, Sl. 2, 37; unborn child, SI. 2, 58, 105, 106; water, Sl. 2, 77-94; wool, Si. 2, 100,

— stopped by objects, SI. 2, 57, 58.

Portuguese, Byt. 3, 17 n.

426

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Poruéist, woman, Bd. 82, 5, 7 n.

Pérfishasp, man, Bd. 20, 32, 34n; 32, 1, 2; 33, 3.

Péryédkéshih. See Primitive faith.

Pourudbakbst, man, Bd. 29, 6.

Pouru-gau, man, Bd. 31, 7 n.

Prayer before and after sleep, Sl. 10, 24. See also Inward prayer.

Precautions where death occurs, Sl. 2, 38-44.

Pregnant woman, carrying her corpse, SI. 2, 6; 10, 10; eating dead matter, SI. 2, 105; protected by fire, Sl. 10, 4; 12, 11; stepping on toothpick, Sl. 10, 20; 12, 13.

31, 7 n.

Prayer before and after sleep, Sl. 10, 24. See also Inward prayer.

Precautions where death occurs, Sl. 2, 38-44.

Pregnant woman, carrying her corpse, SI. 2, 6; 10, 10; eating dead matter, SI. 2, 105; protected by fire, Sl. 10, 4; 12, 11; stepping on toothpick, Sl. 10, 20; 12, 13.

Priests, Bd. 80, 30n; 82, 4n; 83, 0, 2n, 3n, ron; Zs. 11, 10n; Byt.1,7n; 2, 38, 40, 55; S12, 56, 6on, 62n; 5, 3n; 8, 4,11; 9, 2, 4,120; 18, 9, 49n; 14, 3; their five dispositions, Bd. 19, 36n. See Dastfr, Highpriest, Mébads, Purifying, Raspi, Supreme, Zéta.

Primeval ox, Bd. 3,14, 17,183 4,1, 2; 10, 0,1; 14,1, 3; 27, 2; 34,1; Zs. 2, 6; 9, 1-7.

Primitive faith, SI.1, 3, 4; 6,7; 10, 30; 12,1, 13, 19; 18, 2.

Professions, see Classes.

Providence, Sl. 20, 17.

Province-ruler, Sl. 18, rt, 15, 41n, 44; 19, 5.

Purification, modes of, Sl. 2, 6, t4- 17,19, 22, 41, 42, 44, 53, 65- 68, 92, 95-99, 112-118, 120-123; 3, 14, 16-18, 20, 21.

Purifying priest, SI. 12, 22-27.

Pfir-t6ra, man, Bd. 31, 7, 8; 382,

In,

Pfis, demon, Bd. 28, 28.

PGtik sea, Bd. 18, 7-11; 22, 9; Zs. 6, 14-16.

Pfiyisn-shad, man, Bd. 38, 8.

Qubad, king, Byt.1, 5n.

Rad r., Bd. 20, 7, 24 n.

Ragan, man, Bd. 32,1; 88, 3.

Ragha, town, Bd. 81, 40n; SI. 18, Irn.

Rai, town, Bd. 81, 40; SI. 18, rn.

Rak, man, Bd. $1, 31; 32, rn.

Rakbvad, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Ram, angel, Bd. 27, 24; Byt. 2,

59n; Sl.11,4n; 17,4n; 22, a1; 28, 3. Ramak-t6ra, man, Bd. 31, 7. Rangha r. or lake, Bd. 19, 15 n; 20, 8n. Raoidhit6 m., Bd. 12, 27 n. Rapitvin gah, Bd. 2, 8, 9; 25, 9, 10, 12,143 S1.7,1n3; 12, 31. Rashnfi, angel, Bd. 27, 24; 31, 3 Byt. 2, 59n; 3, 32; SL1,2n 17, 4,50; 22,18; 28, 3.

Rack, Professor, Int. 25, 27.

Raspi, priest, Bd. 30, 30.

Rathwé6 berezaté, Av., Sl. 11, 4n.

Ratfistattih nask, SI. 10, 29.

Ravak m., Bd. 12, 29, 35.

Receptacle for the dead, Sl. 9, 7. See Depository.

Regulus, star, Bd. 2, 8 n.

Renovation of the universe, Bd. 1, 25; 6, 4; 18,17; 18, 4; 19, 13,14; 22, 7; 27, 4; 29,6; 80, 17, 32; Zs. 1, 16, 193 4, 2;

wows

13s

Renunciation of sin, Sl. 4, 14; 8, IN, 4) 5, (7-10,) 12-14, 16, 17; 21, (233) 9,6; 20,11.

Resurrection, Bd. 1, 21; 11, 6; account of, Bd. 30, 1-33; not for some, Sl.17, 7; where, SI. 17, 11-14.

Révand m., Bd.'12, 2, 18, 23, 3403 17,8; Zs.11, 9.

Revolving of luminaries, Bd. 5, 3-9.

Ridge of Vistasp, m., Bd. 12, 18n, 343 17,8; Zs. 11, 9.

Ritual, SI. 5, 2, 3, 5,6; 12, 23.

Rivas-plant, Bd. 15, 2; Zs. 10, 4.

Rivayats, Pahlavi, Int. 60; Persian, Int. 57,67; Zs. 9,1n; Byt. 1, tn; 8, 25n, 43n, §2n, 61n; Sl.1, 2n; 2, 2n, qn, 5n; 8, tn; 9, 9n; 10, 3n, 4n, 130, ain, 25 n, 26n, 28n, 29n; 12, 4n,17n; 16,6n; 17, 5n; 19, In, 2n, 4N, 5n,7N, gn-14n.

Rivers, Bd. 7, 15-17; 20, 1-343; 21, 2-4, 6; 24, 14,153; Zs. 6, 20, a1.

Romans, Byt. 2, 19 n.

Réshan, com., Byt. 8, 3; Sl.1, 4n; 2, 39, 86, 107.

— m,, Bd.17, 6.

Réshané-kerp, fire, Byt. 8, 29.

Réyisn-hé6mand m., Bd. 12, 2, 27.

RGibanik sin, see Sin affecting the soul,

INDEX.

427

Rivers, Bd. 7, 15-17; 20, 1-343; 21, 2-4, 6; 24, 14,153; Zs. 6, 20, a1.

Romans, Byt. 2, 19 n.

Réshan, com., Byt. 8, 3; Sl.1, 4n; 2, 39, 86, 107.

— m,, Bd.17, 6.

Réshané-kerp, fire, Byt. 8, 29.

Réyisn-hé6mand m., Bd. 12, 2, 27.

RGibanik sin, see Sin affecting the soul,

INDEX.

427

Rfidastam, man, Bd. 81, 41. Rulers, the five, Sl. 18, 11, 15, 41n,

445 19, 5.

Riiman, Bd. 34, 8; Byt. 2, 49; 8, 8, 9, 34, 51.

Rimans, Byt. 2, 50.

Rustam, man, Bd. 28, 7n; 81, 36 n, 410.

Sacred butter, Sl. 2, (43;) 3, 3an; 10, 34; 11, 4n; 14, 3.

— cake, Byt.2, 36,57n; SI. 2, 43n; 8, (32,) 353 5,53 7,4n; 8, 20; 9, 11, 12n3; 10, 2, 34-36; 12,1, 8, 9; 14, 1-3; 16,6; 17, 2, 4, 5n; 18, 4n.

— feast, SI. 12,19 ; 18, 25; 18, 3, (4.)

— fire, Sl. 2, 46, 49; 7,9. See Vahram fire.

— milk, SI. 2, (433) 18, ran.

— shirt, Bd. 28, 8, 10; SI. 4, 2n, (5-8,) 13, 14.

— thread-girdle, Bd. 28, 8, 10 ; 30, 30n; Byt. 2, 36, 44,57, 58; Sl. 8, 32n; 4, (1-4,) 6-8, 11, 13, 143 10, 1, 13.

— twigs, Byt. 2, 36, 57, 58; 38, 29, 37; Sl. 2, 18; 8, 10, 11, 20, (32,) 33; 8, 185 10, 35; 12,1; 13, ran; 14, 2.

— twig-stand, Sl. 8, 32; 10, 35.

Sadaro, Sl. 4, 5n. See Sacred shirt.

Sad-dar Bundahis, Int. 22n, 45, 59n; $1.10, 20n; 12, 5n; 17, 4n.

Sadis, S]. 8, 6n. See Three nights.

Sadvastaran, Bd. 30, ro.

Saféd k6h, m., Bd. 12, 22n.

Saféd rfid, r., Bd. 20, 13n, 23n.

Sagansih, land, Bd. $1, 37.

Sagastan, land, Bd. 12, 9, 15; 18, 16; 20, 17, 24n, 29; 22,5; 24, 28; 31, 37n; Zs. 7, 7,9; Byt. 8, 19.

Sag-did, see Dog’s gaze.

Sagittarius, Bd. 2, 2; 34, 6; SI. 21, 2.

Sahm, man, Bd. 81, 27.

Sairima, land, Bd. 15, 29n; 81, 9n;

Byt. 8, 3n. Sakadfim nask, SI. 10, (25;) 12, 2, To, 123 13, 17Nn, 30.

Salm, prince, Bd. 15, 29; 20, ran; $1, 9, 10, 12; SI. 10, 28n, Salman, land, Bd. 20, 12; Byt. 8,3;

SI. 10, 28n.

Sam, man, Bd. 29, 7, 9; 81, 36; Byt. 3, 60, 61.

S4mAn, title, Byt. 8, 59.

Samarkand, Jand, Bd. 12, 13n; 15, agn; 20, 20; Zs.7,7n; Byt. 2, 49n; 8, r4n.

Samarkandian, Byt. 3, 17n.

Sarak, land, Bd. 12, 35.

Sarsaok, ox, Bd. 15, 27; 17, 4; 19, 13; Zs. 11, ron.

Sasin, man, Int. r9n; Bd. 31, 30.

Sasanian inscriptions, Int. 19, 20; Byt. 2, 4n.

— Pahlavi, Int. rg-ar.

Sasanians, Int. 11, 15, 19, 213 Bd. 31, 32n; 88, an; 84, 9; Byt. 2, 18n, 20n; 3, 11n.

Satan, Bd. 8, gn.

Satavés, gulf or lake, Bd. 18, 9, ro, 12,133; 22, 1,93; Zs. 6, 16-18; star, Bd. 2, 7; 5,1; 18, gn, 12; 24,17; Zs. 6, 16; SI.14, 5.

Satlig r., Bd. 20, gn.

Satfiih, Sl. 8,6n. See Three nights.

Saturn, planet, Bd. 5, 1; 28, 48; Zs. 4, 7-10.

Saukavastén, land, Bd. 29, 4, 5, 13.

Savah, region, Bd. 5, 8, 9; 11, 3; 28, 1; Byt. 8, 47.

Svar, demon, Bd. 28, 9, 10; 80, 29. See Sévar.

Scorpio, Bd. 2, 2; 34, 5; SI. 21, 2.

Seas, Bd. 7, 6, 14; 11, 2, 4; 18,1, 5-17; 24, 23; Zs. 6, 6,7, 14-19.

Season-festivals, Bd. 25, 1, 3, 6; Byt. 2, 45; Sl. 10, 2; 12, 19, 31; 18, 29; 18, (3,) 45 19, ¢.

Seasons, Bd. 26, 3-17, 19, 20.

Ség, demon, Bd. 28, 26.

28, 9, 10; 80, 29. See Sévar.

Scorpio, Bd. 2, 2; 34, 5; SI. 21, 2.

Seas, Bd. 7, 6, 14; 11, 2, 4; 18,1, 5-17; 24, 23; Zs. 6, 6,7, 14-19.

Season-festivals, Bd. 25, 1, 3, 6; Byt. 2, 45; Sl. 10, 2; 12, 19, 31; 18, 29; 18, (3,) 45 19, ¢.

Seasons, Bd. 26, 3-17, 19, 20.

Ség, demon, Bd. 28, 26.

Selections of Z4d-sparam, where found, Int. 46; age, Int. 47; contents, Int. 48; MSS., Int. 48-50.

Seleucus Callinicus, Byt. 2, rgn.

Semitic words in Pahlavi, Int. 13, 14, 17, 18; in modern Persian, Int. 14.

Sénf, land, Bd.12, 13n; 15, 29; 20, 30n; SI. 6, 7n.

Séné bird, Bd. 14, 11n, 23n; 18, gn; Zs. 8, 4. See Griffon.

Serosh, see Srésh.

Serpent, Bd. 30, 31.

Sevan lake, Bd. 22, 8n; 24, 23n.

Sfend nask, Sl 10, 4n. See

Spend.

428

PAHLAVI TEXTS,

Shadows, midday, SI. 21, 1-3; — afternoon, SI]. 21, 4-8.

Shah ’Abbis, Byt. 8, 34n, 440.

Shahpfhar, king, Int. 19; Bd. 83, 2; Byt. 2, 18n.

Shahp@r, king, Byt. 2, 18; 8, 14.

Shahrivar, angel, Byt. 2, 59n. See Shatvairé.

Shapik, see Sacred shirt.

Shapfr II, Bd. 38, an, 3n; Byt. 2, 18n; SI. 8, 23n; 15, 16n,

Shatr6-ram, man, Bd. 12, 2on.

Shatvairé, angel, Bd. 1, 26; 27, 24; 80, 19, 29; SI. 18, 14, 39; 16, 3, 5) 14-19; 22, 4; 28. month, Bd. 25, 20.

Shayast 14-shayast, why so called, Int. 59, 60; extent, Int. 60; contents, Int. 60-62; age, Int. 63-65; com. mentioned, Int. 63, 64; nasks mentioned, Int. 64; MSS., Int. 65, 66 ; Paz. version, Int. 66 ; not hitherto translated, Int. 66, 67.

Shédak, man, Bd. 81, 18.

Shédaspth, fiend, Byt. 3, 3, 5, 8, 21.

Shiraz, town, Bd. 29, 14n.

Shirt, see Sacred shirt.

Shirtashésp, man, Bd. 88, 4.

Shirvan r., Bd. 20, 25n.

Shnfiman, ritual, SI. 8, 35; 7, (8;) 9, 11n; 10, 2; 14, 3.

Shfistar, town, Bd. 20, 26n.

Sighing, cause of, SI. 12, 32.

Sikandar, king, Bd. 84, 8n; Byt. 2, Ign.

Sigidav m., Bd. 12, 2.

Silver age, Byt.1, rn, 5; 2, 17.

Simurgh, bird, Bd.14, r1n; 18, 9n; 24, 11n.

Sin, Zs. 1, 13, 18; Byt.2, 40; 8,57; SI. 2, 53,91, 106; 5,6; 6, 4,6; 8, 19; 10, 3, 18, 25, 27; 12, 315 15, 22, 26-28, 30; 20,15; affecting accusers, Sl. 8, (1,) 14, 15, 173 affecting the soul, SI. 8, (1,) 16; degrees of, SI.1, 1, 2; 11, 1, 2; 16, 1-5; harm, Bd. 5, 2; 19, 20; imputed, Sl. 5, 1; 6, 2; 8,13; making water on foot, Sl. 4, 8n; 10, 5; mortal, S]. 8, 7, 18, 21, 233 running about uncovered, Bd. 28, 8, 10; Byt. 2, 38; Sl. 4, (8)-10; unseasonable chatter, Bd. 28, 19; SI. 4, (9 ;) 5,1-7; walking with

y TS

one boot, Bd. 28, 13; SI. 4 8n,(12.) See Ared@s, Farman, Khér, Renunciation, Tanapihar, Worthy of death, Yat.

Stnamr(, bird, Bd. 24, 11n.

Sind, land, Bd. 15, 29; 20, 9, 30.

Sinik congregation, Sl. 6, 7.

Sinners, SI. 15, 17; mortal, SI. 8, 5; put to death, SI. 8, 6, 7, 21, 22n.

Sirius, star, Bd. 2, 7n; 7, 1n; SI. 14, 5n.

Sirkan, town, Bd. $8, 11; Zs. 1, on.

Sirézah, ritual, S}. 7, 8n; 17, 5n.

Sistan, land, Bd.12, 9n. See Sagastan.

Siyah k6h, m., Bd. 12, 22n.

Styak-h6mand m., Bd. 12, 22.

— mf@i-mand m., Bd. 12, 2.

— tér4, man, Bd. 81, 7.

8, 6, 7, 21, 22n.

Sirius, star, Bd. 2, 7n; 7, 1n; SI. 14, 5n.

Sirkan, town, Bd. $8, 11; Zs. 1, on.

Sirézah, ritual, S}. 7, 8n; 17, 5n.

Sistan, land, Bd.12, 9n. See Sagastan.

Siyah k6h, m., Bd. 12, 22n.

Styak-h6mand m., Bd. 12, 22.

— mf@i-mand m., Bd. 12, 2.

— tér4, man, Bd. 81, 7.

Styakmak, man, Bd. 15, 25, 30; 31, 1,6; 82, rn.

Styvakhsh, prince, Bd. 28, 15n; $1, 25; Byt. 8, 25, 26; SI. 10,

28n.

Snake-killer, Bd. 28, 22.

Sneezing, cause of, SI. 12, 32.

S6fti, tribe, Byt. 2, 49.

Sogdiana, land, Bd. 20, 8n.

Soghd, land, Bd. 20, 19.

S6k-t6ra, man, Bd. 81, 7; 32, 10.

Sdshyans, apostle, Bd. 11, 6; 28, 6; 30, 3, 4, 7,17, 25, 27; 82, 7n, 8; Byt. 8, 61n, 62; SI. 18, 5; com., SI. 1, 3; 2, 2n, 56, 74, 80, 118, 119; 8,13; 8, 4, 5.

Sévar, demon, Bd. 1, 27; 28, gn. See Savar.

— lake, Bd. 12, 24n; Zs. 6,22. See next.

S6vbar lake, Bd. 7,14; 12,24; 22, 1, 3; Zs. 6, 22n.

Spaényasp, man, Bd. 81, 14, 27.

Spahan, land, Bd. 12, 40; 20, 26; 81, 40.

Spans, Bd. 26, 3; SI. 16, 4; 21, 2n.

Sparnak, man, Bd. 31, 40.

Spazg, demon, Bd. 28, 31.

Spéd r., Bd. 20, 7, 130, 23.

Spéd-razir, forest, Bd. 24, 16n; Byt. 8, 9, 21.

— t6ra, man, Bd. 81, 7.

Spénak-mainék, Bd. 1, 1n. Beneficent spirit.

Spend nask, SI. 10, (43) 12, 3, 11, 15, 29.

—r., Bd. 20, 7n, 13n, 23n,

See

INDEX.

429

Spendarmad, angel, Bd. 1, 26; 15, 1; 27, 24; 80, 29; Zs. 10, 3; Byt. 2, 8, 16, 31, 48, 53, 5905 SI. 10, 28; 11, 4; 18, 14; 15, 3, 5) 20-24; 22, 5; 28, 1; month, Bd. 25, 6, 7, 11, 20.

Spend-dad, prince, Bd. 31, 29, 30; 34,8; Byt.2,17.

Spendyid m., Bd. 12, 2, 23.

Spéngargak, demon, Bd. 17, 1. Aspe

Spénist fire, Ba. 17, 1; Zs. 11, 10.

Spenta-mainyu, Av., Bd. 1, rn,

Spent4-mainy@ gatha, Sl. 18, an, 15, 33-35, 51

— — hi, SI. 18, 33.

Spentem-Ahurem-mazdim ch., Sl. 18, 36.

Spétos, land, Bd. 20, 8.

Spiegel, Professor, Int. 25, 59, 71.

Spitaman, man, Bd. 82, 1; title, see Zaratfst.

“Spitéid, chief, Bd. 29, 1.

Spitér, prince, Bd. 31, 3 5.

Spir, lun. man., Bd.

Srit, man, Sl. 22, 32; 82, 5

Sritak, woman, Bd. 82, 7n.

Srit6, man, Zs. 11, ron.

Srob, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Srésh, angel, Bd. 19, (33;) 27, 24; 80, (29,) 30; 31, 38; Zs. 11,7; Byt. 2, 59n; 8, 25, 26, 32, 59; 33, 435 17,3, 50, 6; 22,17;

Srdsho-faranam, wt., Sl. 4, ron, (145) 5, 3; 6,3; 8,9; 10, 24; 11,1, 2; 16,5.

Sruvd, place, Bd. 29, 14.

Srfivé, ox, Zs. 11, 10.

Steel age, Byt. 1, 1n, 5; 2, a1.

Step, meas., Bd. 26, 3n.

Stir, wt., Sl. 1, (23) 3, 25, 263 7, 33 11, 2; 16, 2n, 3n, 4, 5.

Stétan yasné, ritual, SI. 18, 1.

StGdgar nask, Byt. 1, (1;) SI. 10, 8;

2, 32.

Stit6-garé ha, SI. 18, 22.

Side, land, Bd. 20, 14.

Sfidkar nask, Byt.1,1n; SJ. 18, n. See Stédgar.

Sughdha, land, Bd. 15, 29n.

Summer, Bd. 25, 4, 5, 7-10, 13-17, 19, 20,

Sun reverence, Sl. 7, 1-6; 12, 31.

See

woman, Bd.

Supreme high-priest, Bd. 24, 1; Sl. 3. _ Zaratdst, Sl. 18, 11, 15, 38, 41,

18, 22.

Side, land, Bd. 20, 14.

Sfidkar nask, Byt.1,1n; SJ. 18, n. See Stédgar.

Sughdha, land, Bd. 15, 29n.

Summer, Bd. 25, 4, 5, 7-10, 13-17, 19, 20,

Sun reverence, Sl. 7, 1-6; 12, 31.

See

woman, Bd.

Supreme high-priest, Bd. 24, 1; Sl. 3. _ Zaratdst, Sl. 18, 11, 15, 38, 41,

44; 19, 5. Sfrak, land, Bd. 16, 29; 20,8; man, Bd. 81, 19. Sfiristan, land, Bd. 15, 29n; 20, 10. Syr-darya, r., Bd, 20, 20n. Syria, Bd. 15, 29n; 20, ron.

Sahi-bfin sea, Bd. 18, 7, 15. Sam, man, Bd. 81, 27 n. San, man, Bd. 81, 17, 18. Sarva, god, Bd. 1, 27n. Séd, r., Bd. 20, 7.

Sér, zod., Bd. 2, 2.

Sidasb, man, Bd. 31, 27n. Séinds, man, Bd. 88, 3n. S6k, bird, Bd. 19, 19.

Tad-s6idhis ha, SI. 18, 49. Tad-thwa-peres4 ha, SI. 18, 28. Taham, man, Bd. 88, 4.

Tahmiasp, man, Bd. 81, 23n. Tare, aman, Bd.1, 27; 28, 11n;

Takhmorcp, king, Bd. 17, 4; S81, 2, 3; 32, tn; 34,4; Zs.1l,10n; SI. 10, a8n.

Tambayak, "demon, Bd. 81, 6.

Tanapthar good work, SI. 1, (1n;) 2, 79n, 93; 6, 3, 4,6; 7, 4; 8, 20; 16, 6; 18, 4n.

— sin, SI. 1, 1, (23) 2, 40, 50, 51, 53, 69, 70, 79N, 80, 82; &, 26-28; 4, 10,12; 5, 3, 4; 8, 20; 10,5, 17,35n; 11,1, 2; 12, 4; 16, 5.

Tanuperetha, Av., SI.1, rn.

Taparistan, land, Bd. 12, 17; 18, 15; 20, 27; Byt. 3, 19.

Taprév, demon, Bd. 28, 11,13. See Tairév.

Taraba, \un. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Tarazfik, zod., Bd. 2, 2; 5, 6.

Tarmaz, town, Bd. 20, a8n.

Tarémat, demon, Bd. 28, 14; 30,

29.

Tashkand, town, Bd. 20, 2on.

Taurus, zod., Bd. 2, 2; SI. Q1, 2.

T-ve-urvata ha, Sl. 18, 6, 14.

T4&z, man, Bd. 15, 28; $1, 6; SI. 10, 28n.

Tazak, woman, Bd. 15, 28.

Tegend r., Bd. 20, r5n.

Teheran, town, Bd. 12, 31n; 81, 4on; S118, 11n.

430

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Térak m., Bd. 5, 3, 4; 12, 2, 4.

Teremet r., Bd. 20, 7, gn, 28.

Thra€étaona, king, Bd. $1, 4n, 7n.

Three-legged ass, Bd. 19, 1-12.

Three-nights’ ceremony, Sl. 8, 6; 10, 2; 12, 5, 31.

— — punishment, Bd. 30, 13, 16; Sl. 8, 5, 7, 16.

Thrita, man, Bd. 81, 26n, 27n; Zs. 11, ron; Byt. 3, 14n; Sl. 22,

32n. Thritak, man, Bd. 81, 14.

Thriti, woman, Bd. 82, 5n.

Tides, Bd. 18, 8, 11, 13, 14; Zs. 6,

17.

Tigris r.. Bd. 20, ron, ran, 25n; Zs. 6, 20n; Byt. 8, 3n, 5n, 21, 38n.

Time personified, Int. 70; Zs. 1, 24-27; 4, 5.

Tin age, Byt. 2, 20.

Tir, angel (for Tistar), Bd. 27, 24; Sl. 28, 2; month, Bd. 7, 2; 26, 3, 20; Zs. 6, 2; planet, Bd.

5,1.

Tistar, angel, Bd. 7, 2-4, 7-10; 9, 2; 11,2; 18,11; 27,3; Zs. 6, I, 3, 9, 10,13; 8,1; Byt. 2, 59n; 3, 14n; Sl. 22, 13; see Tir; star, Bd. 2, 7; 5,13; 7,13 SI. 14, 5.

Toothpick, how to be cut, SI. 10, 20; 12, 13.

T6r4, zod., Bd. 2, 2.

Tort r.. Bd. 20, 7n, 24.

Translations of Bd., Int. 24-26, 43-45; of Byt., Int. 57,59; of SI., Int. 66, 67; plan of these, Int. 70-74.

Tree of all germs, Bd. 9, 5,6; 18, 9; 27,2; 28,5; Zs. 8, 3.

Tribe-ruler, SI. 18, 11, 15, arn, 44;

19, 5.

Tfig, prince, Bd. 81, 9, 10, 12, 14, 27; SI. 10, 28n.

Tdhmispian, title, Bd. 81, 23; $4, 6; SI. 10, 28n.

Tfirya, tribe, Bd. 15, 29n; 81, gn.

66, 67; plan of these, Int. 70-74.

Tree of all germs, Bd. 9, 5,6; 18, 9; 27,2; 28,5; Zs. 8, 3.

Tribe-ruler, SI. 18, 11, 15, arn, 44;

19, 5.

Tfig, prince, Bd. 81, 9, 10, 12, 14, 27; SI. 10, 28n.

Tdhmispian, title, Bd. 81, 23; $4, 6; SI. 10, 28n.

Tfirya, tribe, Bd. 15, 29n; 81, gn.

Tar, land, Bd. 12, 20; 15, 29; 21, 6; 30, 16; 31, 27n; Byt. 2, 62; 8, 34.

— Bragrésh, Byt. 2, 3n.

— i Bradarvash, Byt. 2, 3.

Tfirak, man, Bd. 81, 14, 27.

TGr4n, land, SI. 10, 28n.

Turanian syllabary, Int. 13.

Tfrk, tribe, Bd. 29, 7; Byt. 2, 493

8, 7-9, 51.

Tfrkistin, land, Bd. 12, 13, 393 ts, 29n; 29, 13; Byt.2, 24n, 49n; 8, 21n; SI. 6, 7n.

Tfrks, Byt. 2, 24n, son.

Tas m., Bd. 22, 3; land, Bd. 12, 24; 20, 30; man, Bd. 29, 6.

Uda, demon, Bd. 28, 19; 81, 6n. Udai, demon, Bd. 81, 6. Ukhshyad-ereta, apostle, Bd. $82, 8n. — nemangh, apostle, Bd. 32, 8n. ’Umin gulf, Bd. 18, gn. Uncleanness, period of, SI. 2, 41, 42, 44, 62, 105-109; 8, 14-18. Unseasonable chatter, see Sin. Ursa major, Bd. 2, 7n; SI. 11, qn. Urumiyah lake, Bd. 22, 2n, 8n. Urupi dog, SI. 2, sgn. Ururviga, man, Bd. 82, 7. Urvad-ga@, man, Bd. 31, 31n; 38, 4. Urvad-gai-frast, man, Bd. 31, 31. Urvakhshaya, man, Bd. 81, 26n. Urvandasp, man, Bd. 82, 1n. Urvaradm, twig, SI. 8, 32n. Urvatad-nar, man, Bd. 28, 5; 32,

§n. Urvdeist fire, Bd. 17,1. See AGrvazist. Urvig, woman, Bd, 82, 7n. Urvis lake, Bd. 18, 4n; 22, 1, 11. Usefriti, Av., SI. 18, 30n. Ushahina gah, Bd. 19, 15n; 25, 9n; Byt. 2, 59n; SI. 14, 4n; 17, 5n. Ushidarena m., Bd. 12, 6n. Ushidhau m., Bd. 12, 6n. Usinemangh, man, Bd. 31, 33n. Uspasnu, title, Bd. 29, rn. Usta-Ahurem-mazdam ch., Sl. 18,

32. Ustavaiti gatha, $].18, an, 15, 27-31,

51. — ha, SI. 18, 27. Uzasti, span, Bd. 26, 3n. Uzava, king, Bd. 31, 23n.

Vad, angel, Bd. 27, 24; SI. 1, 4; 22, 22; 23, 3; day, Byt.3, 16.

Vadgés m., Bd. 12, 2, 19.

Vidgésians, Bd. 12, 19.

Vaé the bad, demon, Bd. 28, 35.

— the good, angel, Si. 11, 4; 17, 4,

5n. Vaé-bfikht, man, Bd. 33, 6, 8. Vaédist, man, Bd, 82, 1n.

INDEX.

431

Vaétand-i Raéghinoid, woman, Bd. 81,

23.

Vafar-hémand m., Bd. 12, 2, 22.

Vag, SI. 8, 6n; 16,6n. See Inward prayer.

Vagarkard-i Dinik, quoted, Bd. 82, In, §n, 7N; its author, Sl. 1, 3n.

Vabidbros, man, Bd. 38, 3.

Vahik, zod., Bd. 2, 2; 5, 6

Vahist, see Heaven.

Vahistem-Ahurem-mazdam ch., SI.

13, 46. Vahistéisti gatha, $1.18, an, 15, 41-45,

51.

Vahram, angel, Bd. 27, 24; Byt. 8, 32; Sl. 22, 20; 23, 3; day, Bd. 25, 3; planet, Bd. 5, 1.

— fire, Bd. 17, 1, 2, 9; Byt. 2, 26, 37; SI. 2, 46n, 4gn. See Sacred fire.

— Gér, king, Byt. 2, 20.

— iVargavand, king, Byt. 8,14, 32n, 39, 440, 49.

— shad, man, Bd. 38, 11.

Vabt, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Vakaéni r., Bd. 20, 34.

Vakhsh, man, Bd. 38, 3.

Vakht-atrid, com., SI. 1, 42.

Valkhas, king, Byt. 2, rgn.

Van lake, Bd. 22, 8n; 24, 23n.

Vanand, star, Bd. 2, 7; 5,1; SL 11, 43 14, 5.

Vand-AGharmazd, com., Sl. 1, 4n; 2, 2, 6, 44; 14, 5.

Vandid-khim, priest, Byt. 8, 39.

Vanfraghesn, man, Bd. 31, 7.

Vanidar, man, Bd. 81, 9.

38, 3.

Vakht-atrid, com., SI. 1, 42.

Valkhas, king, Byt. 2, rgn.

Van lake, Bd. 22, 8n; 24, 23n.

Vanand, star, Bd. 2, 7; 5,1; SL 11, 43 14, 5.

Vand-AGharmazd, com., Sl. 1, 4n; 2, 2, 6, 44; 14, 5.

Vandid-khim, priest, Byt. 8, 39.

Vanfraghesn, man, Bd. 31, 7.

Vanidar, man, Bd. 81, 9.

Vané6-i-fravisn, man, Bd. 32, :n.

Varak, zod., Bd. 2, 2; 5, 6, 7.

Varant, lun. man., Bd. 2, 3.

Varené, demon, Ba. 3,17; 28, (25.)

Varesha bird, Bd. 14, 30,

Varzid-din, man, Bd. 32, rn. :

Vas-i pandasadvaran, fish, Bd. 18,

5) 7+ Vay6é, demon, Bd. 28, 35n. Vazist fire, Bd. 7, 12; 17,1, 2; Zs. 6,13; ll,1, 5; SI. 18, 26. Véh r., Bd. 7, 15, 17; 20,1, 3, 5-7, 8n, 9, 22, 28, 30; 21, 3; Zs. 6, 20; Byt. 3, 17, 38.

Véh-atrid, woman, Bd. 8], 30.

Véh-dést, com., SI. 1, 4n.

Vendeses r., Bd. "20, 29.

Vendidad, ritual, Byt. 2, 59n; SI. 12, 26; 16,6n; 17, 5n; oldest

MSS. of, Int. 21; referred to, Sl.1,1; 2,1, 12, 55n,118n; 10, 5319, 31, 32; 12, 6, 20; 18, 7; quoted, SI. 12, 4, 23; 18, 8, 19; Av. passage translated, SI. 2, 95n; Pahl. do. do, SI. 1, 1n3 2, 18n, 31N, 123n,124n; 3,1n, In, ran; 4, 10on.

Venus, planet, Bd. 5,1; Byt. 3, 4n, 18,

Vergan sea, Bd. 20, 24.

Vibazu, meas., Bd. 26, 3n. Vidadatsh, region, Bd. 5, 8,9; 11, 3; 25, 10; 29,1; Byt. 3, 47.

Vidast, man, Bd. 32, 1. Village-ruler, S118, 11,15, 41M, 443 19, 5

“Vindsp, m: man, Bd. 38, 3.

Vindad-i-pédak, man, Bd. 88, 6, 8. Virafsang, man, Bd. 31, 6

Virak, princess, Bd. 31, 9 n

Virgo, Bd. 2, 2; 34, 2; SI. 21, 2. Visak, man, Bd. 31, 16, 17. Vis-haurva dog, Bd. 14, 19n; 19,

34+

Visnasp fire, Zs. 6, 22n; Byt. 8, 10. See Gfisasp.

Vispan-frya, woman, Bd. 81, 18.

Visparad, ritual, Byt. 2, 59n; SI. 16, 6; chapters cited, SI. 18, 5, 26, 32, 36, 39, 40, 46, 48.

Vistasp, king, Bd. 12, 32; 17, 6, 8; 20, 31n; 28, 15n; 29, 5; 31, 29; 32, 5; Zs. 11, ton; Byt. 1, 1n, 4; 2,1, 16, 49n, 58-60; 8, 9, 25, 26, 29M, 30, 51, 52; Sl. 10, 21n; 11, 4. See Kai- Vistasp.

Vitast, span, Bd. 26, 3 n; S]. 21, an.

Vivanghaa, man, Bd. 29, 6; 31, 2, 7; 32, 10.

Vizak, man, Bd. 32, rn.

Vizarésh, demon, Bd. 28, 18.

Vobu-fryan fire, Bd. 17,1; Zs. 11,

In,

Vohi- khshathra gatha, $1.18, 2n, 15, 37, 38n, 51.

Vohii- kishathrem- -yazamaidé ch., SI. 18, 39.

Vohfiman, angel, Bd. 1, 23, 25, (26n;) 7, 35 27, 24; 30, 29; Zs. 6, 3; 9, 6; ll, ron; SI. 18, 14; 15, 3) 5) OrIT; 22, 25 23, 1; his bird, SI. 10, 9; king, Bd. 31, 29, 30; 34, 8; Byt. 2, 17; month, Bd. 25, 20.

432

PAHLAVI TEXTS.

Vohfiman-éthar, man, Bd. $3, 3.

— yast, ritual, Byt. 1, 1n, 6; 2,1.

Vologeses I, Byt. 2, 19 n.

Vérdbarst, region, Bd. 5, 8, 9; 11, 3, 45 25, 10; 28,1; Byt. 3,

47+

Vérfigarst, region, Bd. 5, 8, 9; 11, 3, 4; 25,10; 20,1; Byt. 3, 47-

Walking with one boot, Bd. 28, 13; Sl, 4, 8 n, (12.) — without boots, SI. 4, 12n; 10,

12.

Washing the face, SI. 12, 21.

—the hands, SI. 7, 2, 7; before sleep, Sl. 10, 38.

Weeks, SI. 23, 4 n.

Well-water unclean at night, SI. 12,

17.

5, 8, 9; 11, 3, 4; 25,10; 20,1; Byt. 3, 47-

Walking with one boot, Bd. 28, 13; Sl, 4, 8 n, (12.) — without boots, SI. 4, 12n; 10,

12.

Washing the face, SI. 12, 21.

—the hands, SI. 7, 2, 7; before sleep, Sl. 10, 38.

Weeks, SI. 23, 4 n.

Well-water unclean at night, SI. 12,

17.

Westergaard, Professor, Int. 20n, 25, 28 n, 37-395 41, 48, 71. Wife to worship with her husband,

$1.12, 30.

Windischmann, Int. 25, 26.

Winter, Bd. 25, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10-13, 15-17, 19, 20; 28, 1.

Wisdom, like fire, SI]. 20, 2; effect on the mind, SI. 20, 3.

Wives, five kinds, Bd, 32, 6n.

Woman, after child-birth, SI. 3, 15; menstruous, SI. 2, 17, 96; 3, I-14, 16-22, 25-35; 8, 123; 10, 39; 12, 4n; miscarriage, SI. 3, 15, 22, 23; pregnant, Sl. 2, 6, 105; 3, 22; 10, 4, 10, 20; 12, 11,133 priest, SI. 10, 35.

Worship, four kinds, SI. 9, 9, 10; of God, Sl. 8, 22, 23; 10, 3, 53 19, 7; form of, Sl. 12, 1.

Worthy of death, Bd. 80, 16; Sl. 2, 9, (40,) 63, 64, 76, 81, 82, 85, 105, 107, 108; 8, 2, 4, 5, 7,9, 13, 18, 21, 23; 10, 19; 16, 22, 23; 18, 4n.

Wrath, race of, Byt. 2, 22, 24, 25, 36; 3, 1, 6, 10,13, 21; — with infuriate spear, Byt. 2, 36; 3, 24, 30,35. See Aéshm, Khashm.

Xerxes, Bd. 34, 8 n.

Y4dk4r-i Zariran, book, Byt. 2, 49n.

Yamdbust, man, Bd. 29, 5.

Yangbad, man, Bd. 81, 2. See Ayangad.

Y4-skyaothan4 ha, SI. 18, 10, 14.

Yasna, ritual, Byt. 2, 59n; Sl. 9, 11n, 12n3 18, rn; 16, 60; oldest MSS. of, Int. 21; chapters cited, SI.13, 1, an, 4, 6- 12, 16-23, 25, 27-33, 35) 375 38) 41-45) 47) 49-513 Of seven ch., Sl. 18, on, 15-25, 50n, 51.

Yast, ritual, Sl. 12, 1, 30; 16, (63) 17, 5 n.

Yast6frid, rite, Sl. 5, 2, 6. Adstéfrid.

Yat sin, Sl.1,1, 2; 2,51; 11, 1, 2; 16, 5.

Yath4-ahfi-vairy8 formula, Bd. 1, (213) Zs.1, (19 n;) 2, 8; SI. 10, 7; 12, 18, 32; 18, 13; recitations of, $1.19, 1-15.

Yatha-ais ha, Sl. 18, 8, 14.

Yawning, cause of, SI. 12, 32.

Yazd, town, SI. 21, on, 2n.

Yazdakard, king, Int. 42; Bd. 33, 11n; 84,9n; Byt. 3, r1n.

Yazdan, see Angels, God.

— afrikht, man, Bd. 31, 19.

— sarad, man, Bd. 81, 19.

Yazisn, rite, Bd. 2, 9; 30, 25; SI. 3, 35n; 18,1n; 17, 3,5. See also Ceremonial.

Year, solar, Bd. 25, 1, 21; lunar, Bd. 25, 18, 19.

Yénhé-hatam formula, Byt.2, (64n;) S]. 10, 5n; 18, 24.

Yézt-adais ha, SI. 13, 33.

Yim, king, Bd. 12, 20; 17, 5; 23, 1; 31, 3-5, 6n, 7, 8; 82, rn; 34, 4; Sl. 10, 28n; his enclosure, Bd. 19, 16; 24, 11; 28, 4, 5,14; 82, 5; Byt. 3,

See

55.

Yimak, queen, Bd. 28, 1; 31, 4.

Yimak4n m., Bd. 29, 14.

Ydgést, meas., Bd. 14, 28; 26, (1n.)

Yfidin-Yim, man, Int. 42, 46, 47, 64; Bd. 33, ron, 11; Zs.1, 0.

Yinan, see Greeks.

Zab, king, Bd. 31, 23 n.

—r., Bd. 20, 25 n.

ZAdsam, man, Bd. 81, 14n.

Zad-sparam, priest, Int. 38, 42, 46- 49; Bd. 33, 10n, 11; Zs. 1, 0, 19n; 2,6n; 4,1n; 5, 4n, 5n; 6, 20n; 9,1n, 22n; 10, 5n; li, ron; Byt. 2, 3n; SI. 13, 50n.

INDEX.

433

Zaésm, man, Bd. 381, 14.

Zagh, man, Bd. 33, 5.

Zagros m., Bd. 12, 36n.

Zabavayi r., Bd. 20, 25.

Zainigav, man, Bd. 31, 6.

Zad-sparam, priest, Int. 38, 42, 46- 49; Bd. 33, 10n, 11; Zs. 1, 0, 19n; 2,6n; 4,1n; 5, 4n, 5n; 6, 20n; 9,1n, 22n; 10, 5n; li, ron; Byt. 2, 3n; SI. 13, 50n.

INDEX.

433

Zaésm, man, Bd. 381, 14.

Zagh, man, Bd. 33, 5.

Zagros m., Bd. 12, 36n.

Zabavayi r., Bd. 20, 25.

Zainigav, man, Bd. 31, 6.

Zairiz, demon, Bd. 1, 27; 238,11; 30, 29.

Zairivairi, prince, Bd. 31, 29.

Zal, man, Bd. 81, 37 n.

Zamyad, angel, Bd. 27, 24; SI. 22, 28; 23, 4.

Zand (com.), Int. (ro,) 21; Byt. 1, 6,7; 3,1, 55.

Zand-akas, book, Int. 23; Bd. 1, 1; Zs, 9, rn.

Zandik, sect, SI. 6, 7.

Zaothra, Av., SI. 2, 43n. See Holywater.

Zarafsan r., Bd. 20, r9n.

Zarah sea, Bd. 18, 16 n.

Zaratst, apostle, Bd. 4, 2n; 17, 8; 21, 3; 24, 1,15; Zs. 11, ron; Byt. 1, 7n; 2, 4-7, 9; S.1, 3n; 6,1; 10, 25, 28n; chief, Bd. 29, 2; his family, Bd. 20, 32; 28, 5; 32, 1-10; Byt. 3, 13, 47, 48; SI. 10, 4, 21n; 18, 22; his guardian spirit, Bd. 4, 4; SI 11, 4; his millennium, Bd. 34, 9n; Byt.1, 5; 2, 22, 24, 31, 41; 8,11, 43M, 440; attacked by demons, SI. 10, 4; 12, 3n, 11; addresses A(iharmazd, Bd. 30, 4; Byt. 1, 1, 2; 2, 1, 12, 23, 573 8, 1,12; SI. 12, 29; 15,1, 33 17,1, 113 addressed by Afharmazd, Byt. 2, 58; 3, rr; SI. 9, 8; 10, 26;

12, 32; 15, 30; called righteous, Byt. 2, 11, 24, 41, 62; called the Spitaman, Byt. 1, 3,5; 2, 3y 4) 15, 22, 25, 28, 30, 31, 36, 44, 54-56, 63; 3, 3, 4, 8-10, 13, 14, 23, 24, 43, 50; SI. 9,14; 11, 4; 12, 23; 15, 4.

Zaratfist, man, Bd. 33, 11.

Zarat@strétGm, Bd. 24,1. See also Supreme high-priest or Zaratast. ,

Zardahim, title, Bd. 31, 4.

Zarid m., Bd. 12, 2, 10n.

Zarin m., Bd. 12, 29, 39.

Zarinmand lake, Bd. 23, 1, 6; spring, Bd. 20, 34.

Zarir, man, Bd. 81, 30; 383, 4; prince, Bd. 31, 29.

Zarman, demon, Bd. 28, 23.

Zav, king, Bd. 31, 23 n.

Zavarah, man, Bd. 31, 41n.

Zavulistan, land, Byt. 3, 13 n.

Zend r., Bd. 20, 15.

Zendah r., Bd. 20, 15 n.

Zisak, man, Bd. 82, 1n.

Zismand r., Bd. 20, 7, 19.

Ziyanak, woman, Bd. 31, 4.

Zéb, king, Bd. $4, 6. See AGz6bé.

Zobara-vahman, bird, Bd. 19, 19.

Zodiacal signs, Bd. 2, 2; SI. 21, 2, 7.

Zohab, land, Bd. 20, 25 n.

Zohar, see Holy-water.

Zéndak r., Bd. 20, 7, 15 n.

Zota (priest), Bd. 30, 30.

Zravad, place, Bd. 12, 35.

Zravakad, place, Bd. 12, 35.

Zrvana, Av., Zs. 1, 24 n.

Zfisak, man, Bd. 31, 14.

[5]

ERRATA.

P. 133, note 6, for ‘daughter’ read ‘ grand-daughter.’

P. 161, note 4, for ‘D&d-sparam’ read ‘ Zad-sparam;’ also in’ p. 167, note 5; p. 168, note 2; p.177, note 3; p. 182, note 1; p. 184, note 1.

P. 199, note 6, for ‘Shapfir I’ read ‘Shapér II.’

Ff 2

TRANSLITERATION

OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS ADOPTED FOR THE TRANSLATIONS

OF THE SACRED Books oF THE Fast.

CONSONANTS,

MISSIONARY ALPHABET.

T Class.

IT Class.

—

IIT Class.

Zend. Peblevi

Persian, | Arabic.

Hebrew.

Chinese.

Gutturales.

1 Tenuis...... 2 4, aspirata . 3 Media......

4 4 aspirata..

5 Gutturo-labialis . .

6 Nasalis......

7 Spiritus asper . . 8 ” 9 3” 1 ,

11 ” asper fricatus .

12. —«C««W,

T Class.

IT Class.

—

IIT Class.

Zend. Peblevi

Persian, | Arabic.

Hebrew.

Chinese.

Gutturales.

1 Tenuis...... 2 4, aspirata . 3 Media......

4 4 aspirata..

5 Gutturo-labialis . .

6 Nasalis......

7 Spiritus asper . . 8 ” 9 3” 1 ,

11 ” asper fricatus .

12. —«C««W,

Gutturales modificatae

lenis. .... asper faucalis lenis faucalis

lenis fricatus .

(palatales, &c.)

13 Tenuis . 14. ~—=C«sg_”—s aspirata . 15 Media ...... 6 , 17...

aspirata. . Nasalis . .

hi (ng)

ew Re

per ee

TRANSLITERATION

OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS.

435

Digitiz

ed by G

51@1@)

fal

gle

CONSONANTS (continued).

MISSIONARY ALPHABRT.

a—_—_ — | Sanskrit.

I Class.

II Class.

III Class.

Zend.

Pehlevi,

Persian.

Arabic. | Hebrew.

Chinese.

18 Semivocalis .......

19 Spiritus asper ...... 20 5; ena 6.6205 -¥.8 21 5 asper assibilatus 22 = lenis assibilatus Dentales. 23 TOnwis |e) ais) ete eene fee 24 ~=«4, «aspirata...... 25 ~«,, assibilata..... 2G Media’ ius iarticecansg ce

20 «55 aspiratasieec:s.-ae:s

28 ~=«,,~=«assibilata..... 29) Nasaliaiciis: 6 ocese 05.058 30 Semivocalis .... 31 - mollis 1

32 ss mollis2... 33 Spiritus asperrl..... 34 bp. BBDERIA c-e,00 6 35 gy) Tani Sais 3's 36 = ,,_—Ss asperrimus 1. . 37 » asperrimus 2. .

BAB) Nv sane %(3) [wee

ws b]

436

TRANSLITERATION OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS

Dentales modificatae (linguales, &c.) 38 Tenuis......-ecceee 39 +, aspirata ....... 40 Media ........2... 41 ,, aspirata........ 42 Nasalis......0020.0.

43 Semivocalis ......... 44 yy fricata. .. 2. 45 ” diacritica .... 46 Spiritus asper ........ 47 o lenis.....0-6.

Labiales.

48 Tenuis ....... cece 49 » aspirata .. 2... ee 50 Media .....cccseee

51, = aspirata ....-.

52 Tenuissima.....-eeee.

53 Nasalis. 2. eee eee eee 54 Semivocalis ........-. 55 ” aspirata..... 56 Spiritus asperr ........ 57 » lenis... eee 58 Anusvéra. .... 2.0000. 59 Visarga...cecccecees

sh zh

Br BS

eee ocee eee eee

"a a a

FOR THE SACRED BOOKS OF TIE EAST.

437

VOWELS.

MISSIONARY ALPHABET. —————-_-——

T Class.

II Class.

IIT Class.

Sanskrit.

Zend.

x ee et

Pehievi.

Persian,

1 Neutralis........... 2 Laryngo-palatalis ...... 3 ,, Iabialis....... 4 Gutturalis brevis....... 5 ” longa ....... 6 Palatalis brevis. ....... 7 ” longa........ 8 Dentalis brevis........ 9 » longa ...+..6- 10 Lingualis brevis ....... 11 ” longa . +e. eee 12 Labialis brevis... ....- 13. gg_~—s Jonga ww eee eee 14 Gutturo-palatalis brevis . . . 15 ” longa ... 16 Diphthongus gutturo-palatalis 17 ”» ” 18 ” ” 19 Gutturo-labialis brevis... . 20 ” 21 Diphthongus gutturo-labialis 22 ” ” 23 . ” 24 Gutturalis fracta....... 25 Palatalis fracta........ 26 Labialis fracta ........ 27 Guatturo-labialis fracta. .. .

longa....

wo 6

e é (ai) ai ei (81) oi (Su) oO 6 (au) fu eu (8u) ou (Sn) a 1 i

eevee

eoeee

- + - BRE ww PRP Rr Bw ewe -

E(e) § (e) 20,

Arabic.

. . ~yY Ud

“inh

Hebrew.

- 438

TRANSLITERATION OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS,

Digitized by Google

27 Guatturo-labialis fracta. .. .

longa....

wo 6

e é (ai) ai ei (81) oi (Su) oO 6 (au) fu eu (8u) ou (Sn) a 1 i

eevee

eoeee

- + - BRE ww PRP Rr Bw ewe -

E(e) § (e) 20,

Arabic.

. . ~yY Ud

“inh

Hebrew.

- 438

TRANSLITERATION OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS,

Digitized by Google

ST UT

3 2044 019 623 693

THE BORROWER WILL BE CHARGED eB AN OVERDUE FEE IF THIS BOOK IS N NOT RETURNED TO THE LIBRARY ON D OR BEFORE THE LAST DATE STAMPED IE BELOW. NON-RECEIPT OF OVERDUE E NOTICES DOES NOT EXEMPT THE BORROWER FROM OVERDUE FEES. Harvard College Widener Library 3

Cambridge, MA02138 (617) 495-2413

; NOV 0 9 2005 ky £ CANO ge): Te

ae Salis nf tag

a és

ed ’ ’ .